Encyclopedia of Electronic Circuits, Volume 2 - (Rudolf F Graf) Mcgraw-Hill Tab Electronics 1988

- Encyclopedia
if
Volume 2
RudoIfEGnf
CONTENTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Introduction vii Alarm and Security Circuits 1 Amplifiers 5 Analog-to-Dlgltal Converters 23 Annunciators 32 Audio Mixers, Crossovers and Distribution Circuits 35 Audio Signal Amplifiers 41 AutomotlveCircuits 48 Battery Chargers and Zappers 64 Battery Monitors 74 Bridge Circuits 80 Burst Generators 86 Capacitance Meters 91 Circuit Protection Circuits 95 100 Clock Circuits Comparators 103 Computer Circuits 113 Converters 123
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37
38 39 40 41 42
43 44
45 46
47 48
49 50 51
52
53 54
55
56
57
Counters Crystal Oscillators Current Meters Demodulators Descramblers and Decoders Detectors Digital-to-Analog Converters Dip Meters Display Circuits Drive Circuits Electronic Locks Emulator Circuits Fence Chargers Fiberoptics Circuits Field Strength Meters Filter Circuits Flashers and Blinkers Flow Detectors Fluid and Moisture Detectors Frequency Meters Frequency Multiplier and Divider Circuits Frequency-to-Voltage Converters Function Generator Circuits Games Gas and Smoke Detectors Hall Effect Circuits Humidity Sensors Infrared Circuits Instrumentation Amplifiers Integrator Circuits Intercom Circuits Lamp-Control Circuits Laser Circuits Light-Controlled Circuits LogicAmplifiers LVDT Circuits Measuring and Test Circuits Medical Electronics Circuits Metal Detectors Metronomes
133 140 152 158 162

171 179
182
184
189 194 198 201 204 208 213 225 240 243 249 251 255 258
275 278
282 285 288 293

297
301 304 313 318 332

336
340
347
350 353
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97
Miscellaneous Treasures Modulator Circuits Motor Control Circuits Multiplier Circuits Noise Reduction Circuits Notch Filters Operational Amplifier Circuits Optically-Coupled Circuits Oscillators Oscilloscope Circuits Peak Detector Circuits Phase Sequence Circuits Photography-Related Circuits Power Amplifiers Power Supply Circuits Power Supply Circuits (High Voltage) Power Supply Monitors Probes Proximity Sensors Pulse {;enerators Radiation Detectors Radar Detectors Ramp Generators Receivers Rectifier Circuits RelayCircuits Resistance/Continuity Meters RF Amplifiers RF Oscillators Sample-and-Hold Circuits Sine-Wave Oscillators Sirens, Warblers and Wailers Sound (Audio) Operated Circuits Sound Effect Circuits Square-Wave Generators Staircase Generator Circuits Stereo Balance Circuits Strobe Circuits SWitch Circuits Tape Recorder Circuits
356 368 373 391 393 397 404 407 420 430 434 437 443 450 460 487 491 498 505 508 512 518 521 524 527 529 533 537 550 552 560 571 580 585 594 601 603 606 611 613
98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
Telephone-Related Circuits Temperature Controls Temperature Sensors Temperature-to-Frequency Converters Theremlns Thermometer Circuits Tilt Meters Time-Delay Circuits Timers Tone Control Circuits Touch-Switch Circuits Sources Index
616 636 645 651 654 657 663 667 671 682 690 694 713
Introduction
Encyclopedia of Electronic Circuits- Volume 2, a companion to Volume 1 published in
1985, contains well over 1400 not-previously covered circuits organized into 108 chapters. For each reference, circuits are listed at the beginning of each chapter. The extensive index further enhances the usefulness of this new work. The browser, as well as the serious researcher looking for a very specific circuit, will be richly rewarded by the context of this volume. A brief explanatory text accompanies almost every entry. The original source for each item is also given so that the reader requiring additional data will know where to find it. I am most grateful to William Sheets for his many and varied contributions to this book, and to Mrs. Stella Dillon for her fine work at the word processor. These friends and associates of long standingllave my sincere thanks for contributing to the successful completion of this book.
vii
Alarm and Security Circuits

The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694.
Auto Burglar Alarm Multiple Alarm Circuit Differential-Voltage or Current Alarm Trouble Tone Alert Photoelectric Alarm System Alarm Circuit The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section.
AUTO BURGLAR ALARM

ONJOf'J' Il.IDt SWITCH ~
... f)
RA
CKNT~
J.G.m.o#
.
>Co
t,7
~
YMlt:,.
..I
1....
-,
. . - ON
....,
~ '.1 TUER
ON
CA
..."'""" ~
FIg. 1-1
I
i
l-z:~ t-oT"-l I -=I """" JA'" , .. I I ,

IVT10N
PUS!<
O.OO1 .. F
lA,
":'
FRONT
SWITCH
OAT-O--O-ro
~SCR
--~:n IwrTC>a
SIGNETICS
NOTES: Timer Signotics NE555 All resistor values In ohms
.;,
1 1
~
":"
Circuit Notes Timer A produces a safeguard delay, allowing the driver to disarm the alarm and eliminating a vulnerable outside control switch, The SCR prevents timer A from triggering timer B, unless timer B is triggered by strategically-located seusor switches, MULTIPLE ALARM CIRCUIT
+12V
RELAY
200n
11
~D
(
'-
344
D G
( ]"
'-
344
D G
(
'-
344
Fig. 1-2
INPuT I
10K
,3NBl
IT V
INPUT 2
10K
I"'UT N
10K
V
~
GE
Circuit Notes Any of several inputs pulls in the common alarm relay with lamps giving visual indication of triggering input. Low resistance lamps decrease input sensitivity,
DIFFERENTIAL VOLTAGE OR CURRENT ALARM

+
1N4001
""-,
inp ut
1:3 et
1N4001~
"
VI
0.5
1N4001-;
47kO
'
;>
'------
II (]rJSPKR
Fig. 1-3
'2 V
0.5
47o kO
WILLlAM SHEETS
2i~F
IJ
~
2N 3904
4.7 kO
J,'
"
10 kG
r--....
2N 3904
Circuit Notes
The input may be de or low frequency ac. The output is a distinctive series of audio beeps or a continuous tone, and occurs only when a selected polarity unbalance is present at the input.
TROUBLE TONE ALERT
r------,--~.,./2V
r - - - - - --,
1 1'-)
L
A~----:;;;jji~=-c;::~--+e
MIf.TI!Il MIIlI-iTACI(
1II1#/-PLlJ6r
H!.~.z02.14C e.~.I'1.'
50Q"/IIIW
.ze:NI!-R.
DIOt>e.
Go-2V
Fig. 1-4
~I WI~If.P I'k;Ro,s,'S - - ~~~E:~NT /r-M~~IM~--+-----"""""~

IOf(
20"
(;rNC
DPOT
';tWITC.H
L-_-'-=<~ 1.5" L __ ;_ _ _ _ _ _ _
PP'ST 'SWlTc..t{
RADIO ELECTRONICS
(INGRA$E/
P(CB,tJfC:)
Circuit Notes
The Trouble Tone Alert is intended for use with analog meters-just wire a "mini" earphone jack directly across the meter movement, plug it in, and you're all set. This device reacts the to the meter-movement driving voltage. It will respond to a change in ac or dc voltage, current, or in resistance. The circuit will respond to an increase or decrease selected by the DPDT switch and is adjusted with the threshold control until the tone from the Sonalert just disappears (with the meter in the circuit being tested, of course).
3
PHOTOELECTRIC ALARM SYSTEM

+9V
5.1
10
Fig. 1-5
K
5.1
2N6107
Cl"
0.01 !iF
10M
O.047fi.F
I PULSE /5 SEC
NOTES:
I. TERMINAL I1 CONNECTED TO GND = CONTINUOUS HORN
GE/RCA
2. Cl SETS TIMING FOR IRE DIODE

ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS
Circuit Notes The CA3164A BiMOS detector alarm system and the CA3078 micropower op amp with a photodiode are used as an automatic switch for turning on a night light or sounding a mechanical horn.
ALARM CIRCUIT r---r----,--O+ 12"
tOOK
(~
q4T
EFFECT I
ALTERNATE
IfoIPuT
~
Fig. 1-6
1001(
t-<Y .... .....,V X

SET 11< TO I"
3Ne. OR 3N84
WHEN Rs DECREASES SUFFICIENTLY TO FQRWARO BIAS THE SCS, THE ALARM IS ACTIVATED. INTERCHANGING Rs AND THE POTENTIOMETER TRIGGRS THE SCS WHEN Rs INCREASES.
scs
GE
POSITIVE PULSE TRIG(Z:RS
-12"
Circuit Notes
Temperature, light, or radiation sensitive resistors up to 1 megohm readily trigger the alarm when they drop below the value of the preset potentiometer. Alternately, 0.75 V at the input to the 100 kll triggers the alarm. Connecting SCS between ground and - 12 V permits triggering on negative input to GA'
2
Amplifiers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Stable Unity Gain Buffer with Good Speed and High Input Impedance Chopper Stabilized Amplifier U1tra-Low-Leakage Preamplifier FET Input Amplifier Ultra-High Zin ac Unity Gain Amplifier Logarithmic Amplifier Composite Amplifier Stereo Amplifier with Gain Control Precision-Weighted Resistor Programmable-Gain Amplifier Power GaAsFET Amplifier with Single Supply Linear Amplifiers from CMOS Inverters Current-Collector Head-Amplifier Hi-Fi Compander Two-Wire to Four-Wire Audio Converter Thermocouple Amplifier Low-Distortion Audio Limiter Speech Compressor Speaker Overload Protector Audio Automatic Gain Control Voltage Controlled Attenuator High-Input-Impedance Differential Amplifier Audio Q-Multiplier Automatic Level Control Pulse-Width Proportional-Controller Circuit Op Amp Clamping
STABLE UNITY GAIN BUFFER WITH GOOD SPEED AND HIGH INPUT IMPEDANCE
5V
INPUT
2N5486 -t:~~~~~i:01 A
TO POINT A
OUTPUT
TO POINT B +--~-OUTPUT
'0
10"
NPN =2N3866 PNP=2N5160
15<
-5V
ALTERNATE BUFFER
(A)
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION
(8)
Fig. 2-1
Circuit Notes
Ql and Q2 constitute a simple, high speed FET input buffer. Ql functions as a source follower, with the Q2current source load setting the drain-source channel current. Normally, this open loop configuration would be quite drifty because there is no dc feedback. The LTC1052 contributes this function to stabilize the circuit by comparing the filtered circuit output to a similarly filtered version of the input signal. The amplified difference between these signals is used to set Q2's bias and hence Ql's channel current. This forces Ql's VGS to whatever voltage is required to match the circuit's input and output potentials. The 2000 pF capacitor at Al provides stable loop compensation. The RC network in Al's output prevents it from seeing high speed edges coupled through Q2' s collector-base junction. A2' s output is also fed back to the shield around Ql' s gate lead, bootstrapping the circuit's effective input capacitance down to less than 1 pF. For very fast requirements, the alternate discrete component buffer shown will be useful. Although its output is current limited at 75 mA, the GHz range transistors employed provide exceptionally wide bandwidth, fast slewing and very little delay.
CHOPPER STABILIZED AMPLIFIER

15V
FET INPUT AMPLIFIER
+
'-~--
lOOk
.
,.
...
OUTPUT
lN758
-15V
lOOk
130n
15V
30k
NATIONAL-SEMICONDUCTOR CORP.
INPUT-+-t----"i
LT1028
OUTPUI
-15V
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORP.
Circuit Notes The NPD8301 monolithic dual provides an ideal low offset, low drift buffer function for the LMIOIA op amp. The excellent matching characteristics of the NPD8301 track well over its bias current range, thus improving common mode rejection.
Fig. 2-4
Fig. 22
UL TRALOWLEAKAGE PREAMPLlFIER
non
ULTRAHIGH Zln AC UNITY GAIN AMPLIFIER
2.1"
>~
__
"'OUTPUT 1.1001
\"F
.12HMIII~OI
r~r
~ltl)t(P131
...
'"
...
~.'
.
L._ _ _ _~-.;";;.";;.'- 0
_12 V
11 (
"
OUTPUT
NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP.

SILICONIX
Circuit Notes
Nothing is left to chance in reducing input capacitance. The 2N5485, which has low capac itance in the first place, is operated as a source follower with boots trapped gate bias resistor and drain.
Fig. 25
Circuit Notes The circuit has an input leakage of only 2 pA typical at 75C and would be usable with 1 M ohm input resistance.
Fig. 23
LOGARITHMIC AMPLIFIER
,---------1,---, .r-;---.. , -.....--------1,--""'1'.---<_....,.,,1'.-CIA 018
124k
S.lk
+ 15V
,,,.
INPUT---W............
+15V
330pF
100pF
LT-I004 1.2V
15.7k"
OUTPUT
+
Ql
=
~
TEL. LABS. TYPE 061 1% FILM AESISTOR 2N2979
Low bias current and offset voltage 01 the LT1012 allow 4', decades 01 voltage mput logging
Fig. 2-6
COMPOSITE AMPLIFIER
10pF
E",~"""
IOk
....-------+--'III,....-i
IOk 300pF
10k
Fig. 2-7
lTl012
> ....;w.....,.-I
4.7k
LT 1022
OUTPUT
2200
Circuit Notes The circuit is made up of an LTl0l2 low drift device. and an LTl022 high speed amplifier. The overall circuit is a unity gain inverter, with the summing node located at the junction of three lOk resistors. The LTl012 monitors this summing node, compares it to ground. and drives the LTl022' s positive input, completing a dc stabilizing loop around the LTl022. The 10 k - 300 pF time constant at the LTl0l2 limits its response to low frequency signals. The LTl022 handles high frequency inputs while the LTl012 stabilizes the dc operating point. The 4.7 k - 220 ohm divider at the LTl022 prevents excessive input overdrive during start-up. This circuit combines the LTl012's 35 p.V offset and 1.5 V/QC drift with the LTl022's 23 V/p.s slew rate and 300 kHz full power bandwidth. Bias current, dominated by the LTl0l2, is about 100 pA.
STEREO AMPLIFIER WITH GAIN CONTROL

.Vcc
lOt(
3 INT
V""
A,.
A,
':"
"
3D.
+VCC AD
4
'"
+VCC
A,
10.
Vc
Ac
10K
V""
A,.
.,
vcc
14
NE5517/A
,.
i"ac
12
':"
'"
15
10
t
5.1K
VOUT!
-Vcc
+VCC
Fig. 2-8
A 13
':"
- Vcc
10K
...
VOUT2
SIGNETICS
-Vcc INT
Circuit Notes
Excellent tracking of typical 0.3 dB is easy to achieve. With the potentiometer,~, the offset can be adjusted. For ac-coupJed amplifiers, the potentiometer may be replaced with two 5.1 k ohm resistors.
PRECISION-WEIGHTED RESISTOR PROGRAMMABLE-GAIN AMPLIFIER
".o-------'-{:,
v'
>-,---~----...:o
VouT
002'11
OG212
GAIN EIlIIIOA IS DfTERMINEOONl Y 8'1' THE RESISTOR TOlERAJ\;CE OP AMP OFFSET ANDCMRA I\'ILlllJ,llll ACCURACy Of CIRCUIT
GAIN,
AV"\
GAIN2
AV '0
" "
"
.
,
-'
Fig. 2-9
"
GA''"3
AV' 20
GAIN t Av 100
-'
1 K~!
WITH
sw 4 CLOSED
SILICON IX
~'5V
POWER GaAsFET AMPLIFIER WITH SINGLE SUPPLY
Vin
o--4~LM123~~~----~~
2N6107
Vp Vp
r-~--~~
750
----
lK
Pl lK
1 @ 4
+
BFW10
ELPACI
TDK
CB-38ll
-5
3
L...-_ _ _ _ _
* Mounted on heat/sink
@ DC+/DC- Convertor module
ELECTRIC ENGINEERING
Fig_ 2-10
Circuit Notes
The dual regulator circuit operates from a positive supply, which when switched ON powers the gate first, and when switched OFF shuts off the drain first as shown in the figure _ This circuit incorporates the LM123, a three terminal positive regulator and a dc+ to dc- converter, the outputs of which power the drains and gates of the power GaAsFETs in a power amplifier relay_ The output of the three terminal regulator drives a dc + to dc - converter whose output biases an N-channel JFET suitably so as to pull the base of the series pass transistor 2N6107 to a level to turn it on_ The circuit will turn off the drain supply whenever the negative potential on the Gate fails_
10
LINEAR AMPLIFIERS FROM CM OS INVERTERS R2
C1
-U-yY.:/' 100 k
ELECTRONIC_ENGINEERING
R1
>-"ilCircuit Notes
+15V
~OvM
.h
Fig. 2-11
CMOS inverters can be used as linear amplifiers if negative feedback is applied. Best linearity is obtained with feedback applied around three inverters which gives almost perfect linearity up to an output swing of 5 V POp with a 10 V supply rail. The gain is set by the ratio of R1 and R2 and the values shown are typical for a gain of 100. The high frequency response with the values shown is almost flat to 20 kHz. The frequency response is detennined by Cl and C2. This circuit is not suitable for low level signals because the signal-to-noise ratio is only approx. 50 dB with 5 V pop output with the values shown. CURRENT-COLLECTOR HEAD-AMPLIFIER
'00
: BD131
R.
R. "K _
r - - - - ---- - - - - ----1
.u
I
I I
I I
I
'mm
B'
R3
~LES
~
...
14VI700mW
I I I I
11
VR
OV
_l11V
~+ .- ,. " R 9 ?!C~ Z1~ 1 ci~oo" c~~oo;-} ~RlO I"

C5:
p, K?
SK
~~R1'
:
820
~7
ORP12
I
lOOn ~15VI
1Faraday Cup
17" ,,"
I P
I R'lOAK
r'oo"
lM1041
lK6 1K8
lM329
,OOn
r...
..,
TC2
lOK
I I I
"K"
% Rotation
I? Ch.mb".,j.. :
R'~M :~O~~
....
R'~
'"i
R.~
"?
47
""--t+r
[
10
lOIlA
0.91(
"
l/-lA
"
1001(
70
90
'CO
L
:
lOOn
I ---0 I lT1008 -15V. ~---------------~

ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
!
:,/"\ 'V
fullscala {IV
desired R3
100!-'A 10"A
'"A
lOM
OV I
lOK
'M
C3
1Output
desired VR
Measured ,'08 VR
5.2
5.07
3.2 3.18
2.15
2.24
,.
'.3
Vo,,"
1.03
1.66
1.23
Fig. 2-12
Circuit Notes To amplify small current signals such as from an electron-collector inside a vacuum chamber, it is convenient for reasons of noise and bandwidth to have a "head-amplifier" attached to the chamber. The op-amp NI is a precision bipolar device with extremely low bias current and offset voltage (1)ilS well as low noise, which allows the 100:1 feedback attenuator to be employed. The resistance of R3 can be varied from above 10 M to below 1 k, and so the nominal 0 to 1 V-peak output signal corresponds to input current ranges of 1 nA to 10 p.A. 11
HI-FI COMPANDER
2/4 LM324 1k
1k
3.SV
+3.S V
, ,
100 k ~""""I22,,0l'>.-k~O.-i R 16 I L--r-....
13
I I
: a .--'---,
I
-=-
THD TRIM
I
I
"----
30k
----68 k
":,,R4:
-_ ..
L----~--~-1Cl~7
R16 ,--_~ 100 k D.C. SHIFT TRIM R 18 -:220 k S F COMPRESSOR + Il OUT
.....-'VYv-- + 7.S V R11 Rg

47 k
1100 k
COMPRESSOR C2 In Cl .OOS
1
100;-r
62 k RS
20 k
C3
270
PF 2.2 k
NESS34
R131
Ra
1k
TC0721S
SIGNETICS
HI-FI Compressor With Pre-emphasis
Fig. 2-13(A)
Circuit Notes
This circuit for a.high fidelity compressor uses an external op amp, and has a high gain and wide bandwidth. An input compensation network is required for stability. The rectifier
capacitor (Cgl is not grounded, but is tied to the output of an op amp circuit. When a compressor is operating at high gain, (small input signal), and is suddenly hit with a signal, it will overload until
12
+3.IV
+7.5V
D.e.
....
7
SHIFT
TRIM
T.H.D. TRIM
0'. ....
R11
..
0" ...
r--------EXl'ANooo
IN
1/2 NE510
.....
e,
I
I
27'"
0'
I
':'
ca
2.2k
"'-
Ri
:
I
I , I
RM
..,.
C2
'Ok
18
0" c....,Mr-t-.,.
...
....CO
~----------
------..1
~------~~------~ C4
21........
'...
...
TC012SOS
HI-FI Expandor With De-emphasis
Fig. 2-13(8)
it can reduce its gain. The time it takes for the compressor to recover from overload is determined by the rectifier capacitor e9 . The expandor to complement the compressor is shown in Fig. 2-13B. Here an external op amp is used for high slew rate. Both the compressor
and expandor have unity gain levels of 0 dB. Trim networks are shown for distortion (THD) and dc shift. The distortion trim should be done first, with an input of 0 dB at 10 kHz. The dc shift should be adjusted for minimum envelope bounce with tone bursts.
13
TWO-WIRE TO FOUR-WIRE AUDIO CONVERTER
l
,"00
'.
FCUIl-WIRE RECEIVER
mo"{
'"
"
,
3
~2Q
} TO FOURWIRE
TRANSMITIEA
~
BALANCING I'OTENTlOMETER OT010kQ
..r
'.
Fig. 2-14
NASA
Circuit Notes
This converter circuit maintains 40 dB of isolation between the input and output halves of a four-wire line while permitting a two-wire line to be connected. A balancing potentiometer, Rg, adjusts the gain of lC2to null the feed-through from the input to the output. The adjustment is done on the workbench just after assembly by inserting a 1 kHz tone into the four-wire input and setting Rg for minimum output signal. An 82 ohm dummy-load resistor is placed across the two wire terminals.
THERMOCOUPLE AMPLIFIER
".
Circuit Notes
".
I
I
lO K
"
'"
".
499 K
1
i
-,)'0"
'"
2,
The circuit uses a CA3193 BiMOS precision op amp to amplify the generated signal 500 times. Three 22-megohm resistors will provide full-scale output if the thermocouple opens.
L_._vvy_~
IK
O~lmA
ALL RESISTORS ARE I'll. ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS
GENERAL ELECTRIC/ReA
Fig. 2-15
14
LOWDISTORTION AUDIO LlMITER Circuit Notes
The level at which the audio limiter comes into action can be set with the LIMIT LEVEL trimmer potentiometer. When that level is exceeded, the output from the LIMITERDETECTOR half of the op-amp (used as a comparator) turns the LED which causes the resistance of the photoresistor to decrease rapidly. That in turn causes the gain of the LIMITER half of the op-amp to decrease. When the signal drops below the desired limiting level, the LED turns off, the resistance of the photoresistor increases, and the gain of the LIMITER op-amp returns to its normal levelthat set by the combination of resistors RI and R2. A dual-polarity power supply( 12 volts is desirable) is needed for the op-amp.
RADIO.ELECTRONICS
FIg. 216
SPEECH COMPRESSOR Circuit Notes The amplifier drives the base of a pnp MPS6517 operating common-emitter with a voltage gain of approximately 20. The control RI varies the quiescent Q point of this transistor so that varying amounts of signal exceed the level Vr' Diode D1 rectifies the positive peaks of Ql's output only when these peaks are greater than Vr ~ 7.0 volts. The resulting output is filtered CX' R.. R. controls the charging time constant or attack time. Cx is involved in both charge and discharge. R2 (150 K, input resistance of the emitter-follower Q2) controls the decay time. Making the decay long and attack short is accomplished by making Rx small and R2 large. (A Darlington emitterfollower may.be needed if extremely slow decay times are required.) The emitter-follower Q2 drives the AGC Pin 2 of the MC1590 and reduces the gain. R3 controls the slope of signal compression.
15
SPEAKER OVERLOAD PROTECTOR
10
HO," LINE:
~
1'1'<1
a_}TO
~
LEFT :;PEAKE.R
"HeT" LINE
R \,",!-IT ~PE.AKe:R
loon
SeeRI
RIO
R9
ZNSO'-O
~~~~__~~t+.~-1IK
"51 (N.D.)
ALL RE:SISTOR:; I/2-WATT
Fig. 2-18
Circuit Notes
The input to the circuit is taken from the amplifier's speaker-output terminals or jacks. If the right-channel signal is sufficiently large to charge Cl to a potential that is greater than the breakdown voltage of Q1' s emitter, a voltage pulse will appear across R7. Similarly, if the left-channel signal is sufficiently large to charge C2 to a potential that is greater than the breakdown voltage of Q2' s emitter, a pulse will appear across R7. The pulse across R7 triggers SCR1, a sensitive gate SCR (IGT less than 15 mA where IGT is the gate trigger-current), that latches in a conducting state and energizes RYl. The action of the relay will interrupt both speaker circuits, and the resulting silence should alert you to the problem. Cut back the volume on your amplifier, then press and release SI to reset the circuit and restore normal operation. The circuit can be adjusted to trip at any level from 15 to ISO watts RMS. To calibrate, deliberately feed an excessive signal to the right input of the speaker protector and adjust R3 until RY1 energizes. Do the same with the left channel, this time adjusting R4. The circuit is now calibrated and ready for use.
16
AUDIO AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL

RB 4BO
+ 2 4 o-'VVY--<~~'=":cc:-1r------1~---1~----' VDC
R6
1/2W
10,:-'-t----JFsI.::.'V'iE R
R3
lOOk
0-3 B2
fill
le A
AUOIO~
+
I
U2
LM741CN
C7
4.7JJF
INPUT~
E---o OUTPUT AUDIO

Cl"
AGe'a
-0.33
CR2
IN270
R2
IM
CRI
IN270
*"
HAM RADIO
SEE TEXT
Except ss indicated, decimal values 01 capacitance Ir. In microlarads (I'F); others lITe in pico/ar-
ads (pFJi resJstances are in ohms. /!; = 1,000 NI = 1,000,000
Fig. 2-19
Circuit Notes An audio signal applied to U1 is passed through to the 741 operational amplifier, U2. After being amplifieu, the output signal of U2 is sampled and applied to a negative voltage doubler/rectifier circuit composed of diodes~CR1 and CR2 along with capacitor Cl. The resulting negative voltage is used as a control voltage that is applied to the gate of the 2N5485 JFET Ql. Capacitor C2 and resistor R2 form a smoothing filter for the rectified audio control voltage. The JFET is connected from pin 2 of the MC3340P to ground through a 1 kilohm resistor. As the voltage applied to the gate of the JFET becomes more negative in magnitude, the channel resistance of the JFET increases causing the JFET to operate as a voltage controlled resistor. The MC3340P audio attenuator is the heart of the AGC. It is capable of 13 dB gain or nearly - 80 dB of attenuation depending on the external resistance placed between pin 2 and ground. An increase of resistance decreases the gain achieved through the MC3340P. The circuit gain is not entirely a linear function of the external resistance but approximates such behavior over a good portion of the gain/attenuation range. An input signal applied to the AGC input will cause the gate voltage of the JFET to become proportionally negative. As a result the JFET increases the resistance from pin 2 to ground of the MC3340P causing a reduction in gain. In this way the AGC output is held at a nearly constant level.
17
VOLTAGECONTROLLED ATTENUATOR
+15Y
''''' 010
DC SHIFT
UV
T1iD
TAIM
013
H'
TRIM
'001 0'
'OOk
Re
220k 011
".
A121k
014
"".
07
Cl
IN 1'"~''-~~;';;'"
'OOk
O'
__. . _~3,'::..~'-"'' 07---1

2.1'F ... I Rl
I,' ~------r------..L-----.,----i
+--"w,;'-'-+':;;'.--i
C3
,*' ..F
'000
010
L~_-'O'
:
~
5,12
'OOk '"T' OUT 017

C$
...
C4
CONTROL R22 VOLTAGE UIIk 0_1OV

FOR GANGING MULTIPLE CHANNELS
C6I ~ _________ _ --------""

':' +15V
015
...
1.18
1%
'50'
R23
'~n
Q,:--__
021
GAIN
TRIM ~iL__,
-15V
'00'
O.
44MI!G
018
~~w:.--."
020
'00'
SIGNETICS
FIg. 220.
Circuit Notes
Op amp A2 and transistors Q! and Q2 form the exponential converter generating an exponential gain control current, which is fed into the rectifier. A reference current of 150 p.A, (15 V and R20 = 100 k), is attenuated a factor of two (6 dB) for every volt increase in the control voltage. Capacitor C6 slows down gain changes to a 20 ms time constant (C 6 x Rj ) so that an abrupt change in the control voltage will produce a smooth sounding gain change. Rl8 ensures that for large control voltages the circuit will go to full attentuation. The rectifier bias current would normally limit the gain reduction to about 70 dB. Rl6 draws excess current out of the rectifier. After approximately 50 dB of attentuation at a -6 dBIV slope, the slope steepens and attenuation becomes much more rapid until the circuit totally shuts off at about 9 V of control voltage. Al should be a low-noise high slew rate op amp. R13 and Rl4 establish approximately a 0 V bias at AI's output.
18
HIGH-INPUT-IMPEDANCE DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER

+15 V
+7"'----~
R4 100 kn
RS 100 kn 15 V
R1 -15V
100 kn
INPUTS~
+15 V
R2
2kn
Vo
R3
100kn R5
y
15 V 20kn
100kn
-15V
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Circuit Notes
Fig. 2-21
Operational amplifiers Al ani:! A2 are connected in a non-invertiog configuration with their outputs driving amplifier A3. Operational amplifier A3could be called a subtractor circuit which converts the differential signal floating between points X and Y into a singleended output voltage. Although not mandatory, amplifier A3 is usually operated at unity gain and R4, R5, R6, and R7 are all equal. The common-mode-rejection of amplifier A3 is a function of how closely the ratio R4:R5 matches the ratio R6:R7. For example, when using resistors with 0.1 % tolerance, common-mode rejection is greater than 60 dB. Additional improvement can be attained by using a potentiometer (slightly higher in value than R6) for R7. The potentiometer can be adjusted for the best common-mode rejection. Input amplifiers Al and A2 will have some differential gain but the common-mode input voltages will experience only unity gain. These voltages will not appear as differential signals at the input of amplifier A3 because, when they appear at equal levels on both ends of resistor R2, they are effectively canceled. This type of low-level differential amplifier finds widespread use in signal processing. It is also useful for dc and low-frequency -signals commonly received from a transducer or thermocouple output, which are amplified and transmitted in a single-ended mode. The amplifier is powered by 15 V supplies. It is only necessary to null the input offset voltage of the output amplifier A3.
19
AUDIO Q-MUL TIPLlER

. - - - . - -.....-.-----Vee
AUDI-lI-W'"WOW'+_~"'--1 INPUT
~EE
TEXT
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 2-22
Circuit Notes This circuit is for selective tuning between two closely spaced audio tones. The selective frequency is dependent on the value of capacitors and resistors in the feedback circuit between the collector and base of Q1. With the values shown. the frequency can be "tuned" a hundred cycles or so around 650 Hz. RI and R2 must be ganged. Emitter potentiometer R3 determines the sharpness of response curve. Any transistor having a beta greater than 50 can be used. Select a value for R4 so that the circuit will not oscillate when R3 is set for minimum bandwidth (sharpest tuning).
AUTOMATIC LEVEL CONTROL

(2.11) 11,
..
(' ZJ
t----if----4
1"
11._
*
".
<7.10)
SIGNETICS
Fig. 2-23
Circuit Notes The NE570 can be used to make a very high performance ALe compressor. except that the rectifier input is tied to the input. This makes gain inversely proportional to input level so that a 20 dB drop in input level will produce a 20 dB increase in gain. The output will remain fixed at a constant level. As shown. the circuit will maintain an output level of 1 dB for an input range of + 14 to -43 dB at 1 kHz. Additional external components will allow the output level to be adjusted.
20
PULSE-WIDTH PROPORTIONAL-CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
OSCILLATOR
RAMP GENERATOR
30K
1N645
3K
lN645
Reference
0.01
VARIABLE Voltage COMPAAATOA/
POWER
-]7'"-[.)+--""""'1_
0.005 , 11
J_A
AMPLIFIER
SQUARING
AMPLIFIER
..J1.Sl..
, - -....... Oulput
.Fl:::ft
IM
2K,IW
2.
100 K
Reference
Voltage on
1.
2.
Power Supply
L-__________________-1~
Minimum-Speed Adjustment
__~____-rTh~I~'~LI"~.~____~------------~~----~+
10K,2W
t
Speed Control
'to30V
NOTE: Capacitance! are in ",F.
~Fig. 2-24
NASA
Circuit Notes
The quad operational amplifier circuit yields full 0 to 100 percent pulse-width control. The controller uses an LM3900 that requires only a single supply voltage of 4 to 30 V. The pulse-repetition rate is set by a 1 kHz oscillator that incorporates amplifier Al' The oscillator feeds ramp generator A2 which generates a linear ramp voltage for each oscillator pulse. The ramp signal feeds the inverting input of comparator A3 ; the speedcontrol voltage feeds the noninverting input. Thus. the output of the comparator is a 1 kHz pulse train. the pulse width of which changes linearly with the control voltage. The control voltage can be provided by an adjustable potentiometer or by an external source of feedback information such as a motor-speed sensing circuit. Depending on the control-voltage setting, the pulse duration can be set at any value from zero (for zero average dc voltage applied to the motor) to the full pulse-repetition period (for applied motor voltage equal to dc power-supply voltage). An amplifier stage (A4) with a gain ono acts as a pulse-squaring circuit. A TIP-31 medium-power transistor is driven by A4 and serves as a separate power-amplifier stage.
21
OP AMP CLAMPING
R2
750k
R,
750k
R.
1.5M
Your
R.( V,-V2 ) -
R,
o
Fig. 225
Circuit Notes
The circuit clamps the most positive value of the input pulse signal to the zero base level. Additionally. the circuit inverts and amplifies the input signal by the factor of R5/R1 The waveforms are shown in the bottom of Fig. 2-24.
22
3
Analog-to-Digital Converters
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Successive Approximation AID Converters 4 Digit (10,000 Count) ND Converter 16-Bit AID Converter Inexpensive, Fast lO-Bit Serial Output AID 10-Bit AID Converter High Speed 12-Bit ND Converter Successive Approximation ND Converter Cyclic AID Converter Differential Input ND System
23
SUCCESSIVE APPROXIMATION AID CONVERTERS
-D?*+ ~IV
22
11 11
+15V
- v.. +
T
~ CS DGNO VRL
..I-~,J . "'V
VRII AONDs
.~
..
23
;:,
..........
...
... HP2IDO
21
PROQ y'" AGMDF RFe
louT
~
.,..
I"='"
..
A,
WR
ICL71348
........ '
MS.
LS. 3
i*
DATA OUT
~~ +
Aa
LM311
~
H..A,
+
-15V
IV
..
r-
-15Y
,.
12" ,
,
1300
lMO
-1"
SHORT CYCLE UN
.....
.IT
HOLD/ROR I"t.
'00
~~'~F
k
.IT
'Ol$1'" U
...
H;;;"
r.~~ Hli 1~.

220ri I .
:-t;),..., .IT ,V
~
INTERSIL
L---~~-----+--------------------~~AroS
Fig. 3-1
24
SUCCESSIVE APPROXIMATION AID CONVERTERS, Continued. Circuit Notes The ICL7134Bbased circuit is for a bipolarinput high-speed AID converter, using two AM25L03s to form a 14bit successive approximation register. The comparator is a two-stage circuit with an HA2605 front end amplifier, used to reduce settling time prob lems at the summing node (see A020). Careful offset-nu1ling of this amplifier is needed, and if wide temperature range operation is desired, an autonull circuit using an 1CL7650 is probably advisable (see A053). The clock, using two Schmitt trigger TTL gates, runs at a slower rate for the first 8 bits, where settlingtime is most critical than for the last 6 bits. The shortcycle line is shown tied to the 15th bit; if fewer bits are required, it can be moved up accordingly. The circuit will free-run if the HOLD/RUN input is held low, but will stop after completing a conversion if the pin is high at that time. A low going pulse will restart it. The STATUS output indicates when the device is operating, and the falling edge indicates the availability of new data. A unipolar version can be constructed hy typing the MSB (D13) on an ICL7134U to pin 14 on the first AM25L03, deleting the reference inversion amplifier A4, and tying VRFM to VRFL' 4 DIGIT (10,000 COUNT) AID CONVERTER
+ 15'.'
Rl 11<
R2
ZERO TRIM
INPUT OV-l0V
+ 15V
R6 4,7k
0
18k
~
r14~.
-=
0,01
C4
lT1011
~'---'-~~:;:C~:r") "I'
OUTPUT = 1 COUNT PERmV,f=lMHz
R3 39k
-15V
C2lSpF
J
R9
C3 Q.l"F
+ 15V
Rn
68k
R4 5.6k
+15V AB
3k
D3
RW
FULL-
365k
SCALE
TRIM
"
lM329
START
2:12ms-fi-
ALL DIODES lN4148 'POLYSTYRENE
"NPO
Fig. 32
25
16-BIT AID CONVERTER
L...~;"C;tc;-----:.~___~___ BOUT
lOk
T
-5V
lOPF
AOUT
- 5V
LTl009
1j1F -
-5V
CURRENT SINK
75k'
~--------"'----1--...l ~I~I~ARITY
-5V
' ID
o O1j1F
I I
."
39"
I
I I
CURRENT SWITCH
20k
18
~
lS -
DATA OUTPUT '= 100,000 COUNTS FULL-SCALE NO lERO TRIM 20ppm/oC GAIN DRIFT 'VISHAY 5-102 RESISTOR
~*
-1l{J-_J
-5V
LTC1043
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY
Fig. 3-3
Circuit Notes The AID converter, made up of A2, a flip-flop, some gates and a current sink, is based on a current balancing technique. Once again, the chopper-stabilized LTCI052's 50 nV1C input drift is required to eliminate offset errors in the AID.
26
INEXPENSIVE, FAST 10BIT SERIAL OUTPUT AID

.5V
Ex INPUT
~
3,9k
lT1004
1.2V
2.5k 002%
7.5k
0.02%
01 2N390OS
"1--1r--1
330
1000pF
- (POLVSTYRENE)
01
2N2369
}+____....,_6y.2>Atk~
)o...-!-_SERIAL DIGITAL DATA OUT
4.7k
300pF
74ASOO
...
CONV
-5V
COMMAND
100MHz CLOCK INPUT
"3.9k", TAW MTR-5 + 12Oppm/"C
,OOOpF=WESCO #32-P - 10530ppm/oC
Fig. 3-4
Circuit Notes Everytime a pulse is applied to the convert command input, Q1 resets the 1000 pF capacitor to 0 V. This resetting action takes 200 ns of the falliog edge of the convert command pulse, the capacitor begins to charge linearly. In precisely 10 microseconds. it charges to 2.5 V. The 10 microseconds ramp is applied to the LTl016's positive input. The LT1016 compares the ramp to Ex, the unknown, at its negative input. For a 0 V - 2.5 V range, Ex is applied to the 2.5 k ohm resistor. From a 0 V - 10 V range, the 2.5 k ohm resistor is grounded and Ex is applied to the 7.5 k ohm resistor. Output of the LT1016 is a pulse whose width is directly dependent on the value of Ex. This pulse width is used to gate a 100 MRz clock. The 100 MRz clock pulse bursts that appear at the output are proportional to Ex. For a 0 V - 10 V input, 1024 pulses appear at fullscale, 512 at 5.00 V, etc.
27
10-BIT AID CONVERTER
+ 1.511
'0<
FULL SCALE
TRIM
~
+1,5V~M""-l
'OOk
+ 1 5'.'
LT1034 1,2V
12 lk' 27.4k'
4/k
10k
DATA OUTPUT
04 2N3904 'OOk
3O.1k'
-+f
" % FILM RESISTOR
=HPS08228tO
Fig. 3-5
Circuit Notes
The converter has a 60 ms conversion time, consumes 460 /LA from its 1. 5 V supply and maintains 10 bit accuracy over a 15C to 35C temperature range. A pulse applied to the convert command line causes Q3, operating in inverted mode, to discharge through the 10 k!l diode path. forcing its collector low. Q3's inverted mode switching results in a capacitor discharge within 1 mV of ground. During the time the ramps' value is below the input voltage, CIA's output is low. This allows pulses from ClB, a quartz stabilized oscillator, to modulate Q4. Output data appears at Q4's collector. When the ramp crosses the input voltages value CIA's output goes high, iJiasing Q4 and output data ceases. The number of pulses at the output is directly proportional to the input voltage. To calibrate apply 0.5 V to the input and trim the 10 k!l potentiometer for exactly 1000 pulses out each time the convert command line is pulsed.
28
HIGH SPEED 12-BIT AID CONVERTER
,."'
... "
lUS\
OAC128U OAtl285
'" ,. r ...
-IIY
...
RIIUI\lII'OLIUI)
USk
"
21'1 RANGE
: } AlllliILDGJNPUn
'fiEF
"
U.lI'I
, .... /lANGE
""
lOUT 4.~AEF. CODE
- ..
"
-P
...
'" "
-'.
POWER GNO
...
"
. ...
~.
CODE IJIf'UT
...
'" "
...
D1GDUT~
SERIAL OUT
""' ....
'"
"
"
"
.
"
"
DATA IN
JrnT
CLOCl
TLlH/5242-8
INPUT FlANGES
Unipolar
Fig. 3-6
.. ..... ,.... .. '"

,,
:t:U
Oto 10
Equlw
C~ ....
.to
Input ID A
DACZoin UOkfl
DACour Input to fit InputtoB
2.35kO
3.OIkfl
Circuit Notes This system completes a full 12-bit conversion in 10 I's unipolar or bipolar . This converter will be accurate to v, LSB of 12 bits and have a typical gain TC of 10 ppm/oC. In the unipolar mode, the system range is 0 V to 9.9976 V. with each bit having a value of 2.44 mY. For the true conversion accuracy. an AID converter should be trimmed so that given bit code output results from input levels from Vz LSB below to Vz LSB above the exact voltage which that code represents. Therefore. the converter zero point should be trimmed with an input voltage of 1.22 mY; trim RI until the LSB just begins to appear in the output code (all other bits "0"). For full-scale. use an input voltage of 9.9963 V (10 V-I LSB-V, LSB); then trim R2 until the LSB just begins to appear (all other bits "I"). The bipolar signal range is - 5.0 V to 4.9976 V. Bipolar offset trimming is done by applying a - 4.9988 V input signal and trimming R3 for the LSB transition (all other bits "0"). Full-scale is set by applying 4.9963 V and trimming R2 for the LSB transition (all other bits "I").
29
SUCCESSIVE APPROXIMATION AID CONVERTER
... "
,...
F.~
ANALOG
+5Vdc
INPUT (O-10V)
ADJ
-V~TV
"
NE~10
~
,."
""
.;. 5Vdc
ZERO
ADJ
....
,. " '"A ".
2.5k
'"
DOUT
CLOCK
c.
.a, .......
~
NE529
OUT ...
Fig. 3-7
"D
0"
...
-tOVdc
"
stART
SIGNETICS
... 5VIIe
Circuit Notes
The IQ-bit conversion time is 3.3 p's with a 3 MHzclock. This converter uses a 2504 12-bit successive approximation register in the short cycle operating mode where the end of conversion signal is taken from the first unused bit of the SAR (QlO).
CYCLIC AID CONVERTER
+Vcc
'OK
'OK
lOGIC OUT
-----'
'OK
"N
~.-
SIGNETICS
Fig. 3-8
Circuit Notes
The cyclic converter consists of a chain of identical stages, each of which senses the polarity of the input. The stage then subtracts VREF from the input and doubles the remainder if the polarity was correct. The signal is full-wave rectified and the remainder of VIN - VREF is doubled. A chain of these stages gives the gray code equivalent of the input voltage in digitized form related to the magnitude of VREF' Possessing high potential accuracy, the circuit using NE531 devices settles in 5 p.s.
30
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT AID SYSTEM
,
3
~C0n!:
,'.' I*',
1.:."
1',:%
VAA~
'cc
STRT
JD
*O"fO~ ace
-SI/SUPPLY
lCC
7663
,
C
"I 5 '"
I ",
5,
GAIr"<
Ar 5
~,
".'1
TAN
V REF
Lvvv-J
"
"
ART. CONVERSION
DR ST
EseT FLAG
~,
ADJUST
.:::8 ? K
CA3310/A
0'"
DU
H. OH eVTE ENABLE
'0 W
BYTE ENABLE
"
e,
-=::-
~
~
OPTIONAL
VR[r
Dp
,
OUTPUT DATA
10:'>
.
"-
"
e,
.,7
<
CC' ~.,' (C~A-t15"

6
'"
'>'
"
ORDY
C Lt(
D' TA
READY FLAG
Cl A MP
f,2;;
",-'
CA-../.
~I ~I
H5
MH, CLOCK
UNLESS NOTED, ALL RESISTORS 1% METAL FILM.
'DD
., ,<
R;::)(T
r--,a
~
V;s
" r,
- 1V
;0
J:A
"llDJUST
OFF SET INPUT RANGE OT02.511 o TO 5 V o TO 10 Y
+0
4.991< 4.991< 4.991<
~D
POTS HI TURN. ceRMET
o
J'i4 9091< OPEN 4 991( 4.531< OPEN 4 991( 4 S3K OPEN OK 9.091< 9.09K 991< 9 091< 9.09K 1OK
0'
"' "
"
100
-1511
-25TO+2.5V -5TO.5Y
'"
'"
RS 9.091< 453K 4531< 4.531< 4.531<
DIGITAL GROUND ANALOG GROUND
Fig. 3-9
Circuit Notes Using a CA3140 BiMOS op amp provides good slewing capability for high bandwidth input signals, and can quickly settle energy that the CA3310 outputs at its VIN terminal. The CA3140 can also drive close to the negative supply rail. If system supply sequencing or an unknown input voltage is likely to cause the op amp to drive above the VDD supply, a diode clamp can be added from pin 8 of the op amp to the VDD supply.
31
4
Annunciators
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Low-Cost Chime Circuit Electronic Bell Sliding-Tone Doorbell
32
LOW-COST CHIME CIRCUIT

101015 V
Circuit Notes
R,
270
le 4049 All resistors are 1 W, 5%
8n
10 D.
1N4001
12
lN4001
'Ok
D.
R.
C. R. R,
'M
c, +
47k
h' -
1O"rFig. 4-1
Resistor RI, capacitor Cl, and two inverters form a square wave generator, which produces the basic tone. The geuerator is followed by an inverter that acts as both a buffer and a driver for the speaker. Resistor R2, which has a minimum value of 100 ohms, limits the current and controls the volume. Diode DI, capacitor C2, resistors R3 and R4, and two inverters create the pulse generator that determines the turn-on and decay times of the chime. The decay circuit-formed by D2, C3, R5, and Q-reduces the amplitude of the chime tone exponentially as a function of time.
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
ELECTRONIC BELL
']
OUTPUT
~
Circuit Notes
Coarse frequency is controlled by the capacitors which must be kept nearly identical in value to each other for best results. Fine tuning is accomplished with R1 and R2. The decay time is controlled by R3.
RING
+--1~'"
--1-
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 4-2
33
SLIDING TONE DOORBELL
'I?G Oh
f
+
1<4
SOK
~+v
IN~"
D3
D2
2o#f
COl .,.
IN't1l
R5
50'1<.
\OO~
R2
Ro
lOOK
~+
C>
~2N5Z11
(5
B ~!
8.1l
S'P"':'Q.
\O..u. F
-;
.,.
Fig. 43
RADIO ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes When the doorbell is pushed, you'll hear a low tone that will "slide up" to a higher frequency. The frequency of the AF oscillator is determined by coupling capacitor, Cl and the value of the resistance connected between the base of QI and ground. That resistance, RBG is equal to (RI + R2) R3. First, assume that SI is closed and R2 has been adjusted to produce a pleasant, low-frequency tone. Capacitor C3 will charge through R6 until it reaches such a voltage that it will cause diode Dl to conduct. When that happens, the value of RBG is paralleled by R4. Thus, because the total resistance RBG decrease, the output tone slides up in frequency. Capacitor C3 will continue to charge until the voltage across D2 and D3 causes those diodes to conduct. Then RBG is paralleled also by R5, the total resistance again decreases, and the oscillator's frequency again increases.
34
5
Audio Mixers, Crossovers and Distribution Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Electronic Crossover Circuit Sound Mixer Amplifier Microphone Mixer Low Distortion Input Selector for Audio Use Audio Distribution Amplifier Four Channel Four Track Mixer
35
ELECTRONIC CROSSOVER CIRCUIT

+V INPUT
R2 3301(
AUDIO INPUT ;-A--,
~
Ra
'R<
;>C"'*-'_~Rcc9-<F:>--~~~:UATSS
470n
1K
+--1- TO PIN 4, Ut
01 12V lW
R12 (SEE TeXT)
+12V
330K
"
".
R3
150;.:
~12V
Cl 0,33
" 01
C5 01
R11
>,~_-+-,4.:.:70:.:n@G>--~~~~0~SS
RI'
" 12V lW
t--...... rOPIN 1',Ul
RI3 (SEE TEXT)
".
1K
51
AC10C COUPLING
SEE TABLE 1 AND TEXT
HANDS-ON ELECTRONICS
PI'"
Fig. 5-1
~ ~~
PIN 1
"'
V INPUT
Circuit Notes
An audio source, such as a mixer, preamplifier, equalizer, or recorder, is fed to the Electronic Crossover Circuit's input. That signal is either ac- or dc-coupled, depending on the setting of switch SI, to the non-inverting input obuffer-amplifier Dla, one section of a quad, BIFET, low-noise TL074 op amp made by Texas Instruments. That stage has a gain of 2, and its output is distributed to both a lowpass filter made by R4, R5, C2, C3, and op-amp DId, and a highpass filter made by R6, R7, C4, C5, and op amp Dlc. Those are12 dB/octave Butterworth-type filters. The Butterworth filter response was chosen because it gives the best compromise between damping and phase shift. Values of capacitors and resistors will vary with the selected crossover at which your unit will operate. The filter's outputs are fed to a balancing network made by R8, R9, RIO, RH and balance potentiometer R14. When the potentiometer is at its mid-position, there is unity gain for the passbands of both the high and low filters. Dc power for the Electronic Crossover Circuit is regulated by R12, R13, Dl, and D2, and decoupled by C6 and C7.
36
Input1
r
--
SOUND MIXER/AMPLIFIER
VR1
47 kO
500 kO 100 kO 2N3563 2.2 kO
+ I47~F
~
-
9V
-=-
VR3 1 MO
47
~F
In put2
r
1 Meg
VR2 500 kO
47 kO
--
"" 13
1 kO
100~F
+~ o~'}w Optional
Vol Control VR 4
:OO~F
Fig. 5-2
WILLlAM SHEETS
Circuit Notes Both input signals can be independently controlled by VRl and VRZ. The balance control VR3 is used to fade out one signal while simultaneously fading in the other. The transistor provides gain and the combined output signal level is controlled by VR4 (optional) . MICROPHONE MIXER
.1
101 {<>---1
~
"l =
1
2.2 Meg
2.2 Meg
++9
2.2 Meg
I02{<>---1
1 Meg
"l
~
.1
=
1 Meg
<>---1 In3 {
~
2.2 Meg
I04{~~M'9 I "l'~
WILLlAM SHEETS
Circuit Notes A TL081 op amp is used as a high-ta-low impedance converter and signal mixer. The input impedance is approximately 1 megohm and the output impedance is about 1 kilohm. Two 9-volt batteries are used as the power source. Battery life should be several hundred hours with alkaline batteries.
9--<Y"'"~
Fig. 5-3
37
LOW DISTORTION INPUT SELECTOR FOR AUDIO USE

lOW DISTORTION INPUT SElECTOR
ir
I
v"
i--
" .
I
I I
R"
~G~FM _ _ __
I I
I
TO REMAINING M' IDENTICAL
SECTIONS
J
TO 1 OF M DECODER (E.G.4514)
EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT eF EACH STAGE:
v,
R,
Fig. 5-4
Circuit Notes CMOS switches are used directly to select inputs in audio circuits, this can introduce unacceptable levels of distortion, but if the switch is included in the feedback network of an op amp, the distortion due to the switch can be almost eliminated. The circuit uses a 4416 CMOS switch, arranged as two independent SPDT switches. If switching transients are unimportant, R5 and Cl can be omitted, and R4 can be shorted out. However, a feedback path must be maintained, even when a channel is switched out, in order to keep the inverting input of the op amp at ground potential, and prevent excessive crosstalk between channels.
38
AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
50~F
+~
, Mn
50~F
OUTPUT A
5.1 kn
+~
100 kn 100 kn 100kn ....JV'vv--+9
OUTPUT B
5.1 kn
10pF
J-
t=----r15.1
FIg. 5-5
OUTPUT C
+
100 kn
kfl
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Circuit Notes
The three channel output distribution amplifier uses a single TL084. The first stage is capacitively coupled with a 1.0 I'~ electrolytic capacitor. The inputs are at Y, Vcc rail or 4.5 V. This makes it possible to use a single 9 V supply. A voltage gain of 10 (1 M ohm/lOO k ohm) is obtained in the first stage, and the other three stages are connected as unity-gain voltage followers. Each output stage independently drives an amplifier through the 50 I'F output capacitor to the 5.1 k ohm load resistor. The response is flat from 10 Hz to 30 kHz.
39
FOUR CHANNEL FOUR TRACK MIXER
lOOn
'NPUTS,
o--j
1
vaL
10k
'R
4k7
Sk PAN
4'1
~
5k PAN
f ,
, , , J;(+
lela 'R
+12V
10".
tOOA
~ ,
OUTPUTS
tOOn
SW,
4k7
4k7
ab
10"
':;1"k
lOOn
,
r'
VaL
2-Y=
SW,
Sk PAN
tOOR
'R
,0--/1
lOOn
':;1~k
~
10k
''1 ''1
vaL
-;;J"
5k PAN
, i,
SW,
r
'OOR
~ ,
IQ"
''1 ''1
vaL
i
SW,
~ ,
*Note: Choose R to give appropriate gain.

ELECTRONICS TDDA Y INTERNATIONAL
Fig. 5-6
Circuit Notes
This circuit can be used as a stereo mixer as well as a four track. The quad op-amp re gives a bit of gain for each track. The pan control allows panning between tracks one and two with the switch in the up position, and with the switch in the down position, it makes possible panning between tracks three and four. Extra channels can be added. A suitable op amp for ICl is TL074 or similar.
40
6
Audio Signal Amplifiers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Auto Fade Transistor Headphone Amplifier Stereo Preamplifier Audio Compressor Micropower High-Input-Impedance 20-dB Amplifier Stereo Preamplifier Microphone Preamplifier Volume. Balance. Loudness & Power Amps Balance and Loudness Amplifier
41
AUTO FADE
C4 1 R5 33K
RI 470K
c
C3 1
~
+ 01 OA91
LEDl T1L209 C7 + 1
SI
+9V
R6 6Bon R7 33K
RIO lMEG
R2 1.5 MEG
R4 2.2K R3 02 2.2K OA91 C5 1

':"
.47
cs
Re 22K
CONTROLLED INPUT
ORP12
LDRI~
R9 lOOK
GNO
TAB BOOKS INC.
Fig. 6-1
Circuit Notes
The automatic fader drops the level of the background music when the narration comes up. The control input goes through RIO, a preset audio level control, to the input of an emitter-follower buffer stage (QI). The buffer offers a high input impedance and makes sure that the source impedance is low enough to drive the rectifier and smoothing circuit, which consist of DI, D2, and C5. The smoothed output drives a simple LED circuit. R8 and LDRl form an input attenuator across which the output is fed via C6 and C7 to the output jack. The output at the emitter of Ql couples to this sor...ket through C4 and R5. R5 and R7 are a passive mixer. With 200 mV or less at the input, there isn't sufficient voltage across C5 to make Q2 turn on. Over 200 mV, Q2 does turn on to a limit, and the LED gets power. That makes the LDR's resistance fall, and signal loss through the attenuator increases. Increase the input to 350 mV rms, and you get a signal reduction of better than 20 dB.
42
TRANSISTOR HEADPHONE AMPLIFIER
0. 5 VAC
INPUT -
Fig. 6-2
250K
en
HEADPHONE OUTPUT
RADIO ELECTRONICS
STEREO PREAMPLIFIER
CHANNELl PREAMP
INPUT
RI
2.2K
+S-lSV
Cl
O.l~F
R3 47K R5 47K
R9
lMEG
R7 47K
fPREAMP
INPUT
CHANNEl2
C15
Circuit Notes The circuit provides better than 20-dB gain in each channel. A better op-amp type will give a better noise figure and bandpass. In this circuit the roll-off is acute at 20,000 Hertz.
RIO lMEG
0---)
C2
O.l.uF
R4 IOOJ,lF 47K
CHANNEL2 R2
2.2K
RB 47K
PREAMP
OUTPUT
Fig. 6-2
43
AUDIO COMPRESSOR
'rH":
aClosc '"
Circuit Notes
A MC3340P is used as a variable gain amplifier. The output of TR2 is rectified and controls the gain of lC1.
"ESISTOR$-I.UN,.t,TURE II4W. 0 OR 10'11. Cl ,C~.C6 .~l-E~ECTROI.YTIC ,I6V WKG
C3 ELECTROLnK. ~~v WKG CB-ELECTROLYTIC, 6V WKG
(2-
TV~E
CZIIO IMULLAROI
73 MAGAZINE
Fig. 6-3
MICROPOWER HIGH-INPUT-IMPEDANCE 20dB AMPLIFIER
+
9v
(
47.,
22~
(7
.AA
2 2.,
INPUT
'"' ~
-{3}-
OU;:UT
CA34~
0---1
500 pF
... 2 i-" F
cb'
+f$~
Fig. 64
47.,
R ,n >20 M
10M
All ARE
RESISTANCE VALUES
I N OHMS
-4.3 kHl
UPPER
STAND-BYPOWER:90/o'W
.3 dB BANCWIDTH
GAIN; 20 db sw: 20-Hz TO 3- K.Hz SR'" 0_016 V/~'
Circuit Notes
This circuit takes advantage of low power drain, high input impedance, and the excellent frequency capability of the CA3440. Only a 500-pF input coupling capacitor is needed to achieve a 20 Hz, -3 dB low-frequency response.
44
STEREO PREAMPLlFIER
BASS
220K
0OO375~F
,0 ,
100 K
,U,
I , 803 uF
o 0:
~F
~--+
----'vV'r-
'"
~-
-'I
tOO'"F
'0 ,
Q------1
,"'
'00
,---
50 pF
me
'00
I .~
V
168
K
Fig. 6-5
:3 :3 K
GAIJII
M
47
~r
0003 f'.F
100 K 0003 f"F
J::75 p..F
TREBLE.
Circuit Notes
This circuit has RIAA playback equalization, tone controls, and adequate gain to drive a majority of commercial power amplifiers, using the CA3410 BiMOS op amp. Total harmonic distortion, when driven to provide a 6- V output, is less than 0.035% in the audio-frequency range of 150 Hz to 40 kHz. Complete stereo preamplifier consists of duplicating this circuit using the two remaining CA3410 amplifiers.
MICROPHONE PREAMPLlFIER
LOW To MEDIUM IMPEDANCE DYNAMIC MIKE
VDD +1.5 v
1 Mn
100 kn
GAIN CONTROL
1.0/JF
40
1111
30
/
7'
I;1W
~~+
=
11
10kl1
2~
7 6
0.1
3 He251
1 kU
~IF
~1
+I -
1E-:--t3
m
~
20
J@
BIAS
BIAS
"\
........
RL-l00kn
100 kH
BIAS
10
'-TEXAStNSTRUMENTS
:?- HIGH -
LOW = 1.5V-= MED '" 0.75 V
VD11l l
1IIIj
GND
0 10 Hl
1
V
\
100 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz 10 kHz FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Circuit Notes A microphone preanoplifier using a :om CMOS op anop complete with its own battery, is small enough to be put in a small mike case. The anoplifier operates from a 1.5-V mercury cell battery at low supply currents. This preanoplifier will operate at very low power levels and maintain a reasonable frequency response as well. The TLC251 operated in the low bias mode (operating at 1.5 V) draws a supply current of only 10 pA and has a - 3 dB frequency response of 27 Hz to 4.8 kHz. With pin 8 grounded, which is designated as the high bias condition, the upper limit increases to 25 kHz. Supply current is only 30 I'A under those conditions.
Fig. 6-6
45
VOLUME, BALANCE, LOUDNESS & POWER AMPS
,I r
'.M
..
M
1.-
"
"
~
~~:
,CO
o-j
"r4
14
'""~
...
"
~~~
fr11
"
M
" "
""
" '" ~ "" "" "" ""

I--
.....
... J
, , "'~. NE~..-17 -!.. (".

-:} 1121
'''f
~,
"" ~,~
~~ .. e
f-ii- '"
."
."
""
,~U
'"
'"
,
.n
-0-; a
....... ... """"

C1Or:
."
"
,~
~ tH37"
--11-
'0:
'"
. -1
+Cl~
L..FT0lIl
,~
~,
r
,~
'"
'"
"
." /,..-.1
~
'--
..
'ARTS USTIN()
." ""
.,
. , '" "".... ""

,,~,
."
... .. ""..... ""
I---
-.HI
,,~
NOTE
." ,.n
,,~
" .. '" .. ,." .. ." , '" '" '" , '" .. . . " ... ...
2.11(
,,~
."
M
" "
10K (POT)
3K
'M
1(11( (POT)
2.21\
n.
,~
,. ... ... 'H, .. " ...., ." .. , .., ". '" ...... , ... 'H
,~
,... ...
." ." .n
M.
'M
2.211:
" CO
.H
,~-
,.o-S(2Wj
11\ TA ... POT
.~
8.21t
" " " " " " .1", " '" '" ,.., '" '"
.7"F 10,,'
10I'F
'O~f
,'-'
10~F
OO.I1"F
,..
~7"F
.111 OIWS (2W)
""
1120
'" '" '"
'" ' '"
2211
50"F
.DlMT"F
SIGNETICS
FIg. 6-7
Circuit Notes This circuit should prove suitable as a design example for audio sound application.
46
BALANCE AND LOUDNESS AMPLIFIER

lOOK
0.'
A IN
o----ii
1001(
uVEC
--.----1H
I I I
I
4.7K
"".
...
".
1.2K
lOOK
>--+---<J A O\IT
LOUONESS
IN
I
25K
BALANCE
O\IT
4.7K
33
lOOK
lOOK
0.' ... o----i....-,
...
'
I I I I
100K1
....
0
I
I
"0
I I
lOOK
>--+---<J 8 OUT
1.2K
.33
loot<
NOTE:
All resistOf values are in ohms.
SIGNETlCS
Fig. 6-7
Circuit Notes
The circuit shows a combination of balance and loudness controls. Due to the nonlinearity of the human hearing system, the low frequencies must be boosted at low listening levels. Balance, level, and loudness controls provide all the listening controls to produce the desired music response.
47
7
Automotive Circuits
The sources ohhe following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Intermittent Windshield Wiper with Dynamic Braking Immobilizer Automotive Exhaust Emissions Analyzer Glow Plug Driver Garage Stop Light Bar-Graph Voltmeter Delayed-Action Wmdshield Wiper Control Slow-Sweep Wiper Control Automotive Lights On Warning PTC Thermistor Automotive Temperature Indicator Road Ice Alarm Headlight Dimmer Ice Formation Alarm Delay Circuits for Headlights Ignition Timing Light Digi-Tach Car-Wiper Control Automatic Headlight Dimmer
48
INTERMITTENT WINDSHIELD WIPER WITH DYNAMIC BRAKING

WIPER FUSE
+12 V
51 k Rt
MC
14555
,I
I
----,
OFF
ORIGINAL
_ _ --.J
WIPER
SWITCH "OFF'
52
05
3
~_+_ORIGINAL
RB
4001
R2
MC14555
'" R7
"
'"
WIRING
TIMER
"
RB
04
tNg14
2N
2222A
,.
D3
02
MR
820
0'
D2
S'B
'" 4001
r -I
t-----t---=--t--I---/'t--+,-CAM.ACTUATED
lN914
t-'~N~"~4_~33~k~-J~R~5~'~W~'P~E~SL'~====~~_ _-+ I
09
lN914
08
R3
1 MEG
lSN05
MTP
R4
1k
10 MEG
li4~'+-~~~-W~==~--------~
=10/J-F 'SV
R6
"'
LMOTO~
WINDSHIELD WIPER
II II
BRAKE AUN I ____ ...J
SWITCH
MOTOROLA
Fig. 7-1
Circuit Notes The circuit provides a delayed windshield wiping, and dynamic braking of wiper blades when they reach the rest position. This prevents the blades from overshooting, which might cause them to stop at a point where they interfere with the drivers' vision. With the original wiper switch off, switch SlA turns on the delay circuit and S18 disconnects the original automotive wiring. When SI is turned off, the original wiring controls the system and the delay circuit is bypassed. Turning SI on applies the + 12-V battery to U1 which is a voltage doubler that produces + 18 V. This higher voltage supply is necessary to ensure reliable turn on of Q1 by multivibrator U2. This arrangement provides about + 18 V to the gate of Q1, whose source is + 12 V minus the VDS drop of Ql. Q1 remains on for a time determined by the WIPES potentiometer. The interval between wipes is controlled by the PAUSE control. When Cl drops below + 4 V, U2 fires, turning Q1 on and restarting the cycle.
49
IMMOBILIZER
Rl
01 1N4001
270K
Sl ON/OFF
0-0
R2
4.7K +12V
Cl
100
TO POINTS
rrt
Kl
Fig. 7-2
02 1N4148
"e---...,
Circuit Notes
A flip of Sl puts the circuit into action. Power for the circuit is picked up from the ignition switch, and the circuit receives no power until the ignition switch is closed. When power is turned on, capacitor Cl is not charged and the emitter-follower Darlington pair (formed by Q1 and Q2) are cutoff, thus no power is applied to the relay (K1), which serves as Q1' s emitter load. The relay's normally-open contacts are connected across the vehicle's points. (At this time, the relay contacts are open and have no effect on the ignition system). Cl charges by way of R1, causing the voltage at the base of Q1 to rise steadily. That creates a similar rise in the voltage at the emitter of Q2. A Darlington pair is used to provide a high input-impedance, buffer stage so that the voltage across C2 is free to rise almost to the full supply potential. Loading effects do not limit the charge potential to just a few volts. Eventually, the voltage applied to the relay becomes sufficient to activate it. The contacts close and short out the points. The ignition system now doesn't act properly and the vehicle is disabled. If the ignition is switched off, power is removed from the circuit and diode D1, which was previously reverse-biased, is now forward biased by the charge on Cl. D1 allows Cl to rapidly discharge through R2 (and any other dc paths across the supply lines). The circuit is ready to operate when the ignition is again turned on. The engine will operate, but not for very long. The values of R1 and Cl provides a delay of about 25 to 30 seconds. Increase R1' s value to provide a longer delay.
50
AUTOMOTIVE EXHAUST EMISSIONS ANAL YZER

UI
LM309H
---III----+-----l'
DI I N2089
., loon
'A 3
I EXHAUST I
r- TI---- ---T2'
SENSOR AIR :
SRI
Fig. 7-3
ASS'r'
I R7
L -
- - - - - - -
A~~+--,
122Kn
I2V
loon teon
.6
22Kn
R8
.4
,
U2
LM741C
RIO
S9Kn
6
4
Cl-1 a-uF. 25 volt electrolytic capacitor Dl-Silicon diode, general purpose, IN2069
or equivalent Ml-0.1 rna ammeter RI. R3. R4. RS-IOO-ohm 10% \I, watt resistor (All resistors are 10%, V" watt)
RIO-5,900-ohm resislor
SR1-thermister sensor assembly, part num
ber 100-1648 from Heathkil model CI-I080, Heath Company B.nlon Harbor, MI, 49022 UI-lM309H 5-",tt regulator inlearaled cir
cuit
R2-500-ohm polenliomeler, PC mounl R5 -IQ-ohm potentiomeler, front panel mount 17, RI-22,OOO-ohm resi,lor RB-570,OOO-ohm resislor TAB BOOKS, INC,
U2-LM74ITC op amp intergraled circuil

Misc.-PC Board, screws, cabinet, solder, hardware, 10foot plastic tube, etc.
Circuit Notes
A bridge circuit contains two lOO-ohm resistors (R3 and R4). and two thermistors (Tl and T2). At room temperature the resistance of T1 and T2 is about 2000 ohms. When they are each heated to 150C by a 10 mA current. the resistance value decreases to 100 ohms. Thus, the four elements comprise a bridge circuit. A characteristic of CO is that it conducts heat away from a thermistor at a different rate than air. One thermistor. T1. is exposed to the automobile exhaust while the other, T2. is isolated in a pure air environment. The difference in thermal conduction unbalances the bridge. A voltage difference is caused between points A and C. A differential amplifier, U1. amplifies this difference and drives the meter with sufficient current to read out the percentage of CO and the air-fuel ratio. A front panel balance control. R5. balances the bridge and calibrates the instrument. Calibration is performed when both thermistors are exposed to the outside air. 51
GLOW PLUG DRIVER

ALL RESISTORS 112W EXCEPT AS NOTED OTHERWISE +12 V( NOMINAL) 2.2.
J,;
~4
03
},'RC
25'
iK
V t-, ~~
PC1
,
I
\
>----'
~5 .,;
R' 180K 15K
RH ' - ~ GLOWPLUG
(15 VOLT OR 2 VOLTS!
~ }~=.
R2 O. 40 5W
( ~6.8V
ov
4.7K
;:::
~50
ZENER
~ ~ -ff _.... /
PC1
---
~2D 44HI
C Do,
'K
'2
/f e1 'O.OO5JJ.F
Rc - SUPPLY VOLTAGE COMPENSATION TRIM. Rp - PLUG TEMPERATURE ADJUST. 01 - 2"16028

GENERAL ELECTRIC
PCI - HIIL2.
03 - 029E2 04,05- D3301
Fig. 7-4
Circuit Notes Model airplanes, boats, and cars use glow plug ignitions for their miniature (0.8cc to 15cc) internal combustion engines. Such engines dispense with the heavy on-board batteries, H.T. coil, and "condenser" required for conventional spark ignition, while simultaneously developing much higher RPM (hence power) than the compression ignition (diesel) motors. The heart of a glow plug is a platinum alloy coil heated to incandescence for engine starting by an external battery, either 1. 5 volts or 2 volts. Supplementing this battery, a second 12-volt power supply is frequently required for the engine starter, together with a third 6 volt type for the electrical fuel pump, Rather than being burdened by all these multiple energy sources, the model builder would prefer to carry (and buy) a single 12-volt battery, deriving the lower voltages from this by use of suitable electronic step-down transformers (choppers). The glow driver illustrated does this and offers the additional benefit of (through negative feedback) maintaining constant plug temperature independent of engine flooding, or battery voltage while the starter is cranking. In this circuit, the PUT relaxation oscillator Ql turns on the output chopper transistor Q2 at a fixed repetition rate determined by Rl and Cl. Current then flows through the glow plug and the parallel combination of the current sense resistor R2 and the LED associated with the HllL Schmitt trigger. With the plug cold (low resistance), current
52
is high, the HIlL is biased "on", and Q3 conducts to sustain base drive to Q2. Once the plug has attained optimum operating temperature, which can be monitored by its ohmic resistance, the HIlL is programmed (via to switch off, removing base drive from Q3 and Q2. However, since the HIlL senses glow plug current, not resistance, this is only valid if supply voltage is constant, which is not always the case. Transistor Q4 provides suitable compensation in this case; if battery voltage falls (during cold cranking, for instance), the collector current of Q4 rises, causing additional current to flow through the LED, thus delaying the switch-off point for a given plug current. The circuit holds plug temperature relatively constant, with the plug either completely dry or thoroughly "wet", over an input voltage range of 8 to 16 volts. A similar configuration can be employed to maintain constant temperature for a full size truck diesel glow plug (28-volts supply, 12-volts glow plug); in this case, since plug temperature excursions are not so great, a hysteresis expansion resistor RH may be required.
RJ
Fig. 7-4 Continued
GARAGE STOP LIGHT
QI
61 flV
61
Rt
10 meg
1.'; v
Cl'l.l.f
Cl
,I.f
Rl
RI
lK
4.7 meg
SWI
TAB BOOKS INC.
SWITCH STRIP
Fig. 7-5
Circuit Notes Capacitor Cl is permanently connected across the 3-volt supply through 10 megohm resistor Rl. The capacitor charges (relatively slowly) to 3 volts. The instant switch SW1 is dosed, it connects the charged capacitor (Cl) in series with C2 and RZ. Capacitor C2 starts to charge, placing a positive-going voltage on the gate of the SCR and causing it to turn on. The two parallel-connected "self-flashing" bulbs I1 and 12 turn on. They flash and turn off the SCR and the circuit is off until car is driven off the switch and Cl can recharge.
53
BAR-GRAPH VOLTMETER
+ BATTERY
Dl lN4007 Al
30.1K
11 1.0 mh
JUl
BAR/DOT
it ... ."
C2 lo,uF
16V
A7
8ZU2W
SELECT
I
10
-.?
Cl
'T '"
A2
30.1K
LED I
lED2
LED3
15.0 VOLTS 14.5 VOLTS

14.0 VD LT5 13.5 VD LTS
'"
A3 750ft
REFERENCE VOLTAGE
SOURCE
lED5
A' 500n
13.0 VOLTS
lEDS LEo7
lED8
12.5 VOLTS
12.0 VOLTS 11.5 VOLTS
7.5V
8
A5
lED9
lEOtO
11.0 VOLTS
ADJUST
5K
lK
10.5 VOLTS
5.0V
t---"'t-------'
A6 3.74K
ICl
LM3914
D2 IN4007 D3 ,N4007
,N,OOI
D5
D'
RADIOELECTRONICS
lN4001
Fig. 7-6
Circuit Notes This display uses ten LED's to display a voltage range from 10.5 to 15 volts. Each LED represents a 0.5-volt step in voltage. The heart of the circuit is the LM3914 dotlbar display driver. Trimmer potentiometer R5 is adjusted so that 7.5 volts is applied to the top side of the divider. Resistor R7 and diodes D2 through D5 clamp the voltage applied to the LED's to about 3 volts. A lowpass filter made up of Ll and C2 guards against voltage spikes. Diode D1 is used to protect against reverse voltage in case the voltmeter is hooked up backward.
54
DELAYED-ACTION WINDSHIELD WIPER CONTROL
Fig. 7-7
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
SLOW-SWEEP WIPER CONTROL
'"
TO
WIf>ER
MOTOR
lrl
r-'RELAY
RATE
se,,, "~
R2
4101(
I r-;
2
,---
~ 2201(
555
7
>
"
ITv
1'---
1.2K
., "
WIDTH
20jiF
cibt 1,02
20V
.05vF
Circuit Notes The relay which applies power to the wiper motor is actuated at periodic iutervals by the timer circuit, closiug the wiper motor contacts. Potentiometer RI serves as the pulse rate control and potentiometer R5 as the pulse width control. These two controls should be adjusted for optimum performance after the unit is iustalled iu a car.
- 'POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 7-8
AUTOMOTIVE LIGHTS ON WARNING
TO LIGHT SW:..:IT..:C.:..;H. ._---,
DIR TO IGNITION SWITCH ARCHER
273066
BEEPER
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 7-9
Circuit Notes The SN75604, with iuput control logic but requiriug only one supply rail, can be used iu the "lights on" sensor and alarm driver. The device VCC and enable iuputs are connected to a voltage lead from the light switch. The direction control iuput is connected to a lead from the ignition switch. Only operation of the lights without the ignition will result iu the alarm sounding. The beeper used iu this application is ~an Archer 273-066 that will operate from 3 V to 28 V. At a typical 12 V level, it will produce a pulsating tone of about 95 dB at 30 cm. The alarm "on" current is about 12 mA when operating from a 12 V supply.
55
PTC THERMISTOR AUTOMOTIVE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

12 V
t__
----------;:-:=:-:~H~Y~S~T~E;:RESIS
-,
70"C
470
n
10 kn
I )0'--'-...
111
"11\,.,......,..---. FAN ON
390
.A
n TI L220 ..,.
10 kn
2kn 11.6 knl
-=
THRESHOLD ADJUST
lNS239
9.1 V 9S"C
10kn 1 kn SENSOR TSPL02
~~~~~~-I~-,OVERHEAT
390
n TI L220 ..,.
2 kn 11.6 knl
THRESHOLD
ADJUST
TEXASINSTAUMENTS
Fig. 7-10
Circuit Notes
The circuit is used to indicate two different water temperature trip points by turning on LEDs when the temperatures are reached. The circuit is constructed around the LM2904 dual operational amplifier powered from the 12 V auto system. The thermistor is in series with a 10 kG resistor from ground to the positive 9.1 V point. The top of the thermistor is tied to both non-inverting inputs of the LM2904. The voltage at these inputs will change as the thermistor resistance changes with temperature. Each inverting input on the LM2904 has a reference, or threshold trip point, set by a 10 kG resistor and a 2 kG potentiometer in series across the 9.1 V regulated voltage. When this threshold is exceeded on the non-inverting input of LM2904, the TIL220 LED lights. The two trip points can be recalibrated or set to trip at different temperatures by adjusting the 2 kG potentiometer in each section. In addition to being used as warning lights as shown here, circuits can be added to turn on the fan motor or activate a relay.
56
ROAD ICE ALARM

,.-~--:::=---,---,
Rl
33K
15K@ 25"C
___
+12V
T
CAL R2 20K
IC-3/4
LM3900
10
MEG
150K
11
3 MEG
" ,12
10
3 MEG
30K 10 MEG
+
III
4
470H
3
3 MEG +
LED
".F:;J;:
FLV'
=
Fig. 7-11
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a thermistor and three sections of a LM3900 quad op amp IC. When the temperature drops to 36F the LED indicator flashes about once each second. The flashing rate increases as temperature drops to 32F when the LED remains on. Amplifier I compares the thermistor's resistance to the resistance of the standard network connected to its noninverting input. Its output-fed to the noninverting input of op amp Ill-varies with temperature. Op amp IT is a free-runntog multivibrator feeding a pulse signal of about 1 Hz to the inverting input of op amp Ill. This amplifier compares the outputs of op amps I and IT and turns on the LED when the multivibrator's output level drops below op amp I. The monitor is calibrated by placing the thermistor in a mixture of crushed ice and water and adjusting the 20 kO pot so the LED stays on.
HEADLIGHT DIMMER
+12V o~--~Ct"'C>-;:OC;;N----1r-----""'---1r-----------,
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
R5
Sl 0 FF
22K
Q2
D41KJ
R1
22K
R3 22MEG
R4 22K R2
22K
Kl
11
Cl 0,1
lOW
BEAMS D1 DT230F
12
HIGH BEAMS
03
2N5249A
Fig. 7-12
Circuit Notes When the lights of an on-coming car are sensed by photo-transistor Ql, things get going. Sensitivity is set by the 22-megohm resistor, R5, to about half a foot-candle. The relay used has a 12-volt, 0.3A coil. The Ll4Cl is complete with a lens that has a diameter of one inch for a 10 viewing angle.
57
ICE FORMATION ALARM

+12V (via igniti0n switch)
Rl
R8
210k
R3
100
lOOk
R5 33k
47k
R7
Th I GL16
R2
470k
R4
lOOk
R6
lOOk
OV
Fig. 7-13
Circuit Notes
The circuit warns car drivers when the air temperature close to the ground approaches oDe. thereby indicating possible formation of ice on the road surface. Op amp Al is wired as a voltage level sensor. Op amp A2 is wired as an astable multivibrator which, by means of current buffer Trl, flashes a filament lamp at about 1 Hz. As air temperature falls, a point is reached when the voltage at pin 2 just rises above the voltage at pin 1. The output of Al is immediately driven into positive saturation, since it is operated open loop. This positive output voltage powers A2 through its V + connection on pin 9, starting the oscillator. The thermistor is a glass bead type with a resistance of about 20 MO at 20C. VRl is adjusted so that the lamp starts flashing when the air temperature is Ito 2C.
58
DELAY CIRCUITS FOR HEADLIGHTS
'"
BYPASS
".
LIGHT sw
'2V
".
LIGHT Sw
r ___.o:.'",=AS::s"'.1 DEL"
~--+-~.~--~--,~~
"
(SPOTl
"r.R4 L5k
IGNITION SW
VMp1
HEADLIGHTS
'ET
SIUCQNIX
S>
POTTER 6 BRUMFIElD
KUPIlOl5 DPOT 12VOLT
.0.
R2
3.9k
10 AMP PLASnc EN-
c,
looOfLf
CLOSED 120,n COIL
" 11
'0400
"
"
R' 2"
(LONG reLAY ::::12 MIN)
R'
I,,"
'2
IOOfLF
11 "
"'
IN4001
(SHORT DELAY ~ I~ uc I
1. Automobile headlights may be kept on up to 3 minutes after you leave the car with this Darlington time-delay circuit.
2. A FET version of the delay circuit allows the use of a smaller timing capacitor, Cl l for a given delay, and almost instantaneous reset with S:5; the Darlington circuit needs almost 2 s.
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 7-14
Circuit Notes This circuit keeps an automobile's headlights on temporarily. It also will turn the lights off, even if you forget to flip the light switch. The circuit's shut-off delay is actuated only after both the ignition and light switches have been on, and only if the iguition switch is turned off first. If the light switch is turned off first, no delay results. Parking and brake-light operation is not affected. The maximum time out can be up to 3 minutes in part 1 and hours with the circuit in part 2, depending on the relay selected and the value of R2. A switch S2 can be used to permit selection of either a short or long delay. Momentary switch S3 can restart circuit timing before the time-out is completed. A bypass switch, SI removes the delay action.
59
IGNITION TIMING LIGHT

RI 15" 'Sw
300-~--~--~~----r---[]~~
400v Cl
,\~F
500V
STROBE
TuBE
"TO NIJ""SEfl, \
+-+-[]r::::'5TRO"E TUBE
SPARK PI.U<7
,,:z.
.04"1
-rRI~~"R
T"'A"~foRO\ER
DI
/ foJ"IICf
~oo
Ar-ooV
b
RADIOELECTRONICS
Fig. 7-15
Circuit Notes Figure A shows the circuit of a direct-trigger timing light. The trigger voltage is taken from the car's ignition circuit by a direct connection to a spark plug. A circuit using an inductive pickup is shown in Fig. B. A trigger transformer is used to develop the high-voltage pulse for triggering. The triggering circuit consists ofTl, Cl, SCRl, inductive pickup coil T2, and the waveshaping components in the SCR's gate circuit. When the spark plug fires, it induces a pulse in pickup coil T2 that triggers the SCR gate. The SCR fires and discharges C2 through the primary of Tl. The secondary of Tl feeds a high-voltage pulse to the trigger electrode of the flash tube. That pulse causes the gas-usually neon or xenon-to ionize. The ionized gas provides a low-resistance path for Cl to discharge, thereby creating a brilliant flash of light. Resistor RI limits current from the supply as the tube fires. When Cl is fully discharged the strobe tube cuts off and returns to its "high-resistance" state. The current through R2 is not enough to sustain conduction through SCRl, so it cuts off and remains off until it is re-triggered by a gate pulse.
60
C3 047
IGNITION
PULSES IN
"V , "
11
DIGI-TACH
I ~.~K
lOK 20K
R1
R4
ITn
12
I-- 3OO~
U'< : 1/614C14 11
0' lN9T.
U2.d +5V
A2' OK
1/6 74t14
,
6 ,
U6
MASTER CLOCK
JI
JJ
14
--l
lOll
10
02lB
4060
:lK
wo.-,
.
"fv:
Mm
D1
lN914
i' I r ~ ~
'
.
iK . f'....
y
":'"
6&8
CYLINDERS
------;:sv:~l---"'-----Jl!~L-~~-J
R7
47K
U2b 1/614[14
CS .00'
---,
'-- JOOm
AB
Wl -01. MED,UM/I
13 R915 1500
R14 47K
S1
47K
RESET
~ r
10
H'GH
C6
7 AS71 ,;, 15 Rm
3 I , ' "
LA_T_CH
- -.. V ' "
.01
.,v
I I II
"ISPI LSD
U' 1/":C14 "' PULSE

COUNTER
8'
'Nl
10
"
' 8
DISPLAY, 11 OR"IVER d 10 11 9 15
U4
b"
"
8 b ,-5 c ,-4.
, 11
C1 .1
45", ' " 13

CK2 8 14
LATCH
J:
7"
I f4 2 I , 3
'
R1622
~
~
L
A23
.. v
~ 13
150n
10' 9 8
>12VINPUT ---
I
+-SV SOURCE
b 12 I" t 11 2" U, 6'8 DISPLAY dl'O
'r--i I I' ',I----'

MSO
620n~
+-
C1 1000
+-
CB 100
+-
C9 10
DRIVER 4511
---7
~LATCH
I I ;1;, :: :I: I_I

tU
~d
g.14
DISP2
"
~ HANDS-ON ELECTRONICS
.r
~
Circuit Notes
Lf
Fig; 7-16
Cl
~
The Digi-Tach contains a master-clock circuits (U6),latch and reset pulse generators (U2-b-U2-d), input signal tonditioner (UI, U2-a), pulse counter (U3), display and display drivers (DISI, DIS2, U4, and U5), and a voltage regulator (U7). As an added feature, Digi-Tach contains a dinuner circuit (U2-e).
CAR-WIPER CONTROL
R1 56K
R3 1 MEG
Q.,.Sl
8 4
~7'--i
R2 33K U1
ICM7555 3
CMOS 6 TIMER
+--=-t
2
+
TO
JJ
-; I [61
ON/OFF~
"0
+12V
WIPER SWITCH
Cl 100
C2
22
L-----~-----4~--------~~GND
FIg. 7-17
Circuit Notes Ul is configured to operate in the standard astable mode, providing a form of relaxation oscillator. When power is applied, C2 initially charges through Rl, R2 and R3 to two-thirds of the supply voltage. At that point, Ul senses that its threshold voltage at pin 6 has been reached, and triggers the timer, causing its output at pin 3 to go high. That high, applied to the base of Ql, keeps the transistor in the off state. Now C2 begins to discharge through R2 to pin 7 of Ul. When C2 has discharged to about one-third of the supply voltage, Ul is toggled back to its original state. C2 starts to charge again, as pin 3 of Ul goes low. The low at pin 3 causes Ql-which serves as an emitterfollower buffer stage-to turn on, allowing current to flow through the coil of relay Kl. That, in turn, causes Kl's contacts to close, applying power to the wipers. The charge time of capacitor C2 is determined by the setting of potentiometer R3.Capacitor C2 should be a tantalum type, and actually, almost any 12-volt coil relay with sufficiently heavy contacts should serve well.
62
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT DIMMER
OFF
+12"
0
~ON
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
RI
22K
22. 22.0
22.
r-- ---, --,

I
N.D,
R2
22'
I I I I I L
DT230F
N.C.
___ ..J
RELAY
0.1
lOW
BEAMS
HIGH BEAMS
RElAY: 12V. O.3A-COIL: 20A. FORM C. CONTACTS OR SOLlD-STAT.E SWITCHING OF 18A STEADY-STATE 1S0A COLD fiLAMENT SURGE. RATING. LENS: MINIMUM 1 H DIAMETER. POSITIONED FOR ABOUT 10 VIEW ANGLE.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 7-18
Circuit Notes
This circuit switches car headlights to the low beam state when it senses the lights of an on-coming car. The received light is very low level and highly directional, indicating the use of a lens with the detector. A relatively large amount of hysteresis is built into the circuit to prevent "flashing lights." Sensitivity is set by the 22 megohm resistor to about 0.5 ft. candle at the transistor (0.01 at the lens), while hysteresis is determined by the RI, R2 resistor voltage divider, parallel to the D41K3 collector emitter, which drives the 22 megohm resistor; maximum switching rate is limited by the 0.1 "F capacitor to IS/minute.
63
8
Battery Chargers and Zappers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Rapid Battery Charger for rCOM rC-2A Gel Cell Charger Ni-Cad Battery Zapper Lithium Battery Charger Thermally Controlled Ni-Cad Charger Ni-Cad Battery Zapper II Battery Charger Wind Powered Battery Charger Battery Charger Operates On Single Solar Cell Versatile Battery Charger 14-Volt. 4-Amp Battery Charger/Power Supply
64
RAPID BATTERY CHARGER FOR ICOM IC-2A

LED's 680
~
6BO 680
'oo
51A
470
LED
TRICKLE
"9
500
5CR
"<'W
l5n
MJE205 Radio Shack 276-2017
~~~_~~J
52
CHARGE RtlTE
'.<'
[.,0
516
50?.!'
or-.
mA) Optional
T1
24,
Jtr
ca
v
lN4Q02
14 req'd)
,,.,
'V)<
r----ll"
111
'"
,I--
4[2
lN4001
+ pin
27H
')
lM723
500)'
''0
'1--1- - - - - - - 1
LEGEND: 1.8K
All resistors
':~w
1S1A, 8
=
pin
470~F...l:
50'1 I'
....L
'::"
'::"
~ ~
6 7 13
,I-I
except where marked
DP3T 2N5062, 2N5063, 2N2328
t,,",,,,
20K
1.8K
52 = SPST pushbutton
SCR
=
VOLTAGf
Radio Shack 275-1067

C,
500pF
C~A
BOTTOM VIEW
Fig. 8-1
Circuit Nates Rectified and filtered voltage from the 24 Vac transformer is applied to the LM723 voltage regulator and the npn pass transistor set up for constant current supply. The 470 ohm resistor limits trickle current until the momentary pushbutton (52) is depressed, the 5CR turns on and current flows through the previously determined resistor network limiting the charging current. The 5CR will turn off when the thermal cutout circuit inside the battery pack opens up,
81
GEL CELL CHARGER

2zod
5'4
"
IOVdc
REGU.ATED
2ZU
5 4
0
"
6V 1.2Ah
.JGEL CELL
TlPll
"
~R'I
IfMOOI
" ""n 5'4
71SU
R.
..
Circuit Notes
R6 , 40>
..
This circuit detects a full-charge state and automatically switches to a floaLcondition-from 240 mA to 12 mA.
,
6
R5 3_57 k
NE555V
"' ,
.. t''
~
R'
1
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
147k
,.,.
I"'
220
Fig. 8-2
NiCAD BATTERY ZAPPER Charge
n (20 W)
::;::
12,000 p.F 80 V (min.)
~~o---~Ar-----l~IL~C-1-06-B----'+
Between 20 V to 60 V de
iI
b+
z~p
1 kn
L..--'V\.f\r-_J
WILLlAM SHEETS
N:~C~~S
zapped
1
. Fig. 8-3
Circuit Notes The short in a Ni-Cad battery can be "burned off" witb this zapper. Use of tbe SCR keeps heavy discharge current from damaging switch contacts.
66
LITHIUM BATTERY CHARGER

.. _. LM317T
D.e.
CHARGING VOl.TAGE
U2
3 VIn
Vou1
01
2
R'
IN4Q05
ADJ
POWER F
(see lable belo'
1 R'
TO
EVICE
(AC ADAPTER)
RI
IK5
iK
RS
IM
OUTPUT
R6 8
2
Ag
FUSE
(OPTIONAL)
02
, ,
OV
5
~
ON/OFF (OPTIONAL)
'CHARGING"
R2
IM D
-w
x~
~w ~~
:
3
R7
RIO
r---'i
j
01
2N5306
OR EQ
~~
IAF520 OR SIMILAR
02
G! 7
~~
UV
6
,
-::::-
+ -+I!! MOikEL
-
NFET
~--
----1-~:~~
Cl
BA TTERY PA K(S)
R8
Rll
--+--
I- J
Fig. 8-4
MOll ENERGY LIMITED
Circuit Notes Charging is accomplished with a constant current of 60 rnA for AA cells to a cutoff voltage of 2.4 V per cell at which point the charge must be terminated. The charging system shown is designed for multi-cell battery packs of 2 to 6 series-connected cells or series/parallel arrangements. It is essential that all cells assembled in the pack be at an identical state-of-charge (voltage) prior to charging. The maximum upper cut-off voltage is 15.6 volts (6 x 2.6 V).
gj
THERM ALL Y CONTROLLED Ni-CAD CHARGER
r----------,
tN4001
1600 0.1
It
.........-t-I~
~
1400 1300 1200 1100
"00
;:' 900
CS 800
il600
500
700
-15V......;W\.-+.....;.;...........-------4
620k
43k
400 300 200 0.60 SW
100
00 30 60 90 120 MINUTES 150 180
'SINGLE POINT GROUND THERMOCOUPLES ARE ho"vrc CHROMEL-ALUMEL ITYPE K)
....
Fig. 8-5
Circuit Notes
One way to charge Ni-Cad batteries rapidly without abuse is to measure cell temperature and taper the charge accordingly. The circuit uses a thermocouple for this function. A second thermocouple nulls out the effects of ambient temperature. The temperature difference between the two thermocouples determines the voltage which appears at the amplifier's positive input. As battery temperature rises, this small negative voltage (1C difference between the thermocouples equals 40 p.V) becomes larger. The amplifier, operating at a gain of 4300, gradually reduces the current through the battery to maintain its inputs at balance. The battery charges at a high rate until heating occurs and the circuit then tapers the charge. The values given in the circuit limit the battery surface temperature rise over ambient to about 5C.
NI-CAD BATTERY ZAP PER It 8.2 kG
Cl06Y
220 kZ
lN4006
3.9 k
___
Ni-CAD battery
NE2
100
I'F
200 V
WILLlAM SHEETS
1 kG
Fig. 8-6
Circuit Notes This zapper clears internal short in nickel cadmium batteries by burning it away. CAUTION: The negative battery terminal is connected to one side of the ac line. For safety operation use a 1: 1 isolation transformer.
68
BATTERY CHARGER
01 T1 20V
120 V
lN1183
20V 02
t;,
RB
200n
Q1 -TIP642
lN1183
RS
22
L--_ _ _ _
S1 -ON/OFF SWITCH
RCL
-+
0.227
30W
R1
R2
Vo
0- 15 V
Tl431
2.5 kn
120V,60Hz
NOTE:
Tl is TRIAD F275 U 115 V Primary: 10 A/40 V- Canter-Tap Secondary.
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 8-7
Circuit Notes
The charger is based on a charging voltage of 2.4 V per cell, in accordance with most manufacturers' recommendations. The circuit pulses the battery under charge with 14.4 V (6 cells x 2.4 V per cell) at a rate of 120 Hz. The design provides current limiting to protect the charger's internal components while limiting the charging rate to prevent damaging severely discharged lead-acid batteries. The maximum recommended charging current is normally about one-fourth the ampere-hour rating of the battery. For example, the maximum charging current for an average 44 ampere-hour battery is 11 A. If the impedance of the load requires a charging current greater than the 11 A current limit, the circuit will go into current limiting. The amplitude of the charging pulses is controlled to maintain a maximum peak charging current of 11 A (8 A average).
69
WIND POWERED BATTERY CHARGER
107k lN4001
10k
LM334
680
215k
lOOk
OVER VOLTAGE (>15.1'.')

LTl004-U
Fig. 8-8
Circuit Notes The dc motor is used as a generator with the voltage output being proportional to its rpm. The LTC1042 monitors the voltage output and provides the following control functions.
1. If generator voltage output is below 13.8 V, the control circuit is active and the NiCad battery is charging through the LM334 current source. The lead acid battery is not being charged. 2. If the generator voltage output is between 13.8 V and 15.1 V, the 12 V lead acid battery is being charged at about 1 amp/hour rate Oimited by the power FET). 3. If generator voltage exceeds 15.1 V (a condition caused by excessive wind speed or 12 V battery being fully charged) then a fixed load is connected limiting the generator rpm to prevent damage.
This charger can be used as a remote source of power where wind energy is plentiful such as on sailboats or remote radio repeater sites. Unlike solar powered panels, this system will function in bad weather and at night.
70
BATTERY CHARGER OPERATES ON SINGLE SOLAR CELL

CdS PHOTOCELL Uld
D2 D3 D4 lN914 R3 2.7k
Rl 100 k
R2 820 k
Cl ,01 Ula
ff
6V N,-Cd Ulb
-=-
FAILSAFE EXCITATION SUPPLY
Tl
~~~~~~~~~~~~
110 Vi6.3 V FILAMENT TRANSFORMER
9V _ Ni-Cd
Ul
MOTOAOLA
MC14093B
Fig. 8-9
Circuit Notes The circuit charges a 9-V battery at about 30 mA per input ampere at 0.4 V. Ul, a quad Schmitt trigger, operate as an astable multivibrator to drive push-pull TMOS devices Ql and Q2. Power for Ul is derived from the 9-V battery via D4; power for Ql and Q2 is supplied by the solar cell. The multivibrator frequency, determined by R2-Cl, is set to 180 Hz for maximum efficiency from a 6.3-V filament transformer, Tl. The secondary of the transformer is applied to a full wave bridge rectifier, Dl, which is connected to the batteries being charged. The small Ni-Cad battery is a fail-safe excitation supply to allow the system to recover if the 9-Vbattery becomes fully discharged. A CdS photocell shuts off the oscillator in darkness to preserve the fail-safe battery during shipping and storage, or prolonged darkness.
71
VERSATILE BATTERY CHARGER
~ !17 ~O
\/RC
R~
J./v ~II
IN-l/oo2
03 IN'/OO%,
Cl
100
y,,-W
15" I<
,.C2 I;t;F TNT.
DZ
'1oV
",.. 0'W
RI ISK
{)S
IN'f1'f2.
-::
5
IN
1'1 2.BMEG
R3
IC2
C5
Z
7. CD'f5#/
06 07
"- TI1NT.
4.7ME&
.33",F
08
IH'I733
D'f
DIO
10
.3
R'f
/N'fl.JJ
IN'f733
1/V'I7S.J
/N1/7.13
~ED~/
R5 IODn
o[fc!Jo
0'1
LED~, s
soJ.
~ 6
$0/
91 VN67RF
/J
G
503
R6
/OOl.
R7 /001.
!,/zw
!,/.zw
loon
?/2ff
R8
R'f lOOn.
RIO
lOOn...
t/2W
?/2ff
!/2ff
-=
Fig. 8-10
RADIO ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes An LM317 voltage regulator is configured as a constant-current source. It is used to supply the 50 mA charging current to S01-S06, an array of AA-cell battery holders. Each of the battery holders is wired in series with an LED and its associated shunt resistor. When the battery holder contains a battery, the LED glows during charging. Each battery holder/LED combination is paralleled by a 5.1-volt Zener diode. If the battery holder is empty, the Zener conducts the current around the holder. A timing circuit prevents overcharging. When power is applied to the circuit, timing is initiated by IC2, a CD4541 oscillator/programmable timer. The output of IC2 is fed to Ql. When that output is high, the transistor is on, and the charging circuit is completed. When the output is low, the transistor is off, and the path to ground is interrupted.
72
14-VOLT, 4-AMP BATTERY CHARGER/POWER SUPPLY
1N24.
151l,2""
110 VAC-36veT
."
1N241
1000 pF
10110
1&0 pF
l&OkO
C'I
10 kO
SO,, I so,
C,
SILlCONIX, INC.
Fig. 8-11
Circuit Notes Operation amplifier Al directly drives the VN64GA with the error signal to control the output voltage. Peak rectifier DI, Cl supplies error amplifier Al and the reference zener. This extra drive voltage must exceed its source voltage by several volts for the VN64GA to pass full load current. The output voltage is pulsating de which is quite satisfactory for battery charging. To convert the system to a regulated de supply, capacitor C2 is increased and another electrolytic capacitor is added across the load. The response time is very fast, being determined by the op-amp. The 2N4400 current limiter circuit prevents the output current from exceeding 4.5 A. However, maintaining a shorted condition for more than a second will cause the VN64GA to exceed its temperature ratings. A generous heat sink, on the order of IOC/W, must be used.
73
9
Battery Monitors
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Dynamic, Constant Current Load for Fuel Cell/Battery Testing Voltage Detector Relay for Battery Charger Battery Status Indicator Low-Battery Indicator A Lithium Battery's State-of-Charge Indicator Step-Up Switching Regulator for 6-V Battery Battery Voltage Monitor Battery Monitor
74
DYNAMIC, CONSTANT CURRENT LOAD FOR FUEL CELUBATTERY TESTING

R7 100
+15 V
R6 01
2.2 k
2N2222
RS 100 V
147
n
R10 4.7 k
C3
JLF
~Iin
+
R1 Sk 10T
INTERNAL
S1
1 ~F C2
-=
+
RS
MTE100N05
R2 10 k R3 2.7 M
220
:J'~"Vin
Vout 0.10 V/AMP
U1 C1 1000 pF RB 2.7 M FUEL CELL OR BATTERY
-=
R' 10 k
-=
R11 1k R1S 0.5 mU SHUNT
R12 150 k R1' 1k
lout--"
MOTOROLA
R13 100 k
-=
Fig. 9 1
0
-=
Circuit Notes This circuit was designed for testing fuel cells, but it could also be used for testing batteries under a constant current load. It provides a dynamic, constant current load, eliminating the need to manually adjust the load to maintain a constant load. For fuel cell application, the load must be able to absorb 20-40 A, and since a single cell develops only 0.5 to 1.0 V, bipolar power devices (such as a Darlington) are impractical. Therefore, this dynamic load was designed with a TMOS Power FET (Q2). With switch SI in~osition I, emitter follower QI and RI establish the current level for theload. In position 2, an external voltage can be applied to control the current level. Operational amplifier VI drives TMOS device QI, which sets the load current seen by the fuel cell or battery. The voltage drop across RI5, which is related to the load current, is then applied to V2, whose output is fed back to VI. Thus, if the voltage across RI5 would tend to change, feedback to the minus input of VI causes that voltage (and the load current) to remain constant. Adjustment of RI3 controls the voltslamp of feedback. The VOUT point is used to monitor the system.
75
VOLTAGE DETECTOR RELAY FOR BATTERY CHARGER
2k2
2k2
Relay
4
>-~-----16
IC555
18k
5k
Vmin
Vmax = 65V Vmin = 42V
VB
23V
Fig. 9-2
Circuit Notes
While the battery is being charged, its voltage is measured at V. If the measured voltage is lower thao the minimum the relay will be energized, that will connect the charger circuit. When the battery voltage runs over the maximum set point, the relay is deenergized and it will be held that way until the voltage decreases below the minimum when it will be connected again. The voltage is lower than a threshold VB (low breaking voltage) the relay will be assumed that such a low voltage is due to one or several damaged battery components. Of course VB is much lower than the minimum set point.
76
BATTERY STATUS INDICATOR

RI
33'
R1
220k
R3
lk
Fig. 9-3
T,2
RVI
4' 7
hi BC109C
BCI0ge
Circuit Notes
Continually monitors battery voltage during use and consumes only about 250 p.A (until the end point is reached). Near the end point Trl turns off, allowing Tr2 to illuminate the LED to increase current drain further leading to a distinct turn off point.
LOW-BATTERY INDICATOR
+------------~----------~~--------~~---------------
4k7
6
56k
+
2.2~F
.01
BFY90
Fig. 9-4
Circuit Notes
Under good battery conditions the LED is off. As the battery voltage falls, the LED begins to flash until, in the low battery condition, the LED lights continuously. Designed for a 9-volt battery, with the values shown the LED flashes from 7.5 to 6.5 volts.
77
A LITHIUM BATTERY'S STATEOFCHARGE INDICATOR

-..l.2EST pUSHBunON
;>
.1Ot<
I,
,
.
OPERA TlNG TIME

REMAINING
~~A~ 11 ' / 'SO'I. P-- -I<J
82.
"
uRN ,/ 40 80';
GR",/
r--7
r--
"
:t
M
20 40%
YEL/
en
"
RtO/
20'1.
MOikEl
+
-'
>..8
~j "
L8
"
.0',.
--
4 CELL BATIERY PACK
Fig. 9-5
120 ohms
MOll ENERGY LIMITED
Circuit Notes State-of-Charge indication oh sloping-voltage dischar.ge can be used as a state-ofcharge indicator. A typical voltage comparator circuit that gives a visual indication of stateof-charge is shown. Components identified are for a 4-cell input voltage of 9.6to 5.2 volts.
STEP-UP SWITCHING REGULATOR FOR S-V BATTERY

INPUT
2N2222
'1<
220pF
+SV
OUTPUT +lSV SOmA
,.
"1
~
lMHY
lN5821
130k
220k
-Io.
Q01
300n
2N5262
~
100
56k
I ~' ~t---1
56k
l1 ;AIE-VERNITAON 24-104 78% EFfiCIENCY
Fig. 9-6
78
BATTERY VOLTAGE MONITOR
+
10 k R3 D1 6.2 V Zener D R4 2.2 k LED
V To 9-V Battery Supply
2N3904 02 R2 1.5 k 5.6 k R1 01 2N3904
IN914
WILLIAM SHEETS
FIg. 9-7
Circuit Notes This circuit gives an early warning of the discharge of batteries. Zener diode DI is chosen for the voltage below which an indication is required (9 V). Should the supply drop to below 7 V, DI will cease conducting causing QI to shut off. Its collector voltage will now increase causing Q2 to start conducting via LEDI and its limiting resistor R4.
BATTERY MONITOR
+12V FROM CAR
'H2
1K
RI
10K 01 6V ZENER
NPN 2N3904
Circuit Notes The circuit is quick and easy to put together and install, and tells you when battery voltage falls below the set limit as established by RI (a IO,OOO-ohm potentiometer). It can indicate, via "LED I , that the battery may be defective or in need of change if operating the starter causes the battery voltage to drop below the present limit.
TAB BOOKS, INC.
FIg. 9-8
79
10
Bridge Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Ac Bridge Bridge-Balance Indicator Bridge Circuit Typical Two Op Amp Bridge-Type Differential Amplifier Low-Power Common Source Amplifier Amplifier for Bridge Transducers Strain Gage Bridge Signal Conditioner
80
AC BRIDGE
j
,.1 ..
" '"
"E~~'
I"
.,
"
., ,.
" "',
~
,. [
"
21
~r
~.
,
SYNC
"
0"
DEMOOUlATOOl
"
" '"
~
" ,
'"
" "
,
--<l
Q;l ~4~.'
LOww.s5~TEA
, ,
1"
..,. 0 ,
."
"~
r '.
.
'"
.wuSTMENT
"
,. J
"
'" , " ."

~
" OFFSET
SIGNETICS
Fig. 10-1
Circuit Notes
The circuit provides a simple and cost-effective solution to matching resistors and capacitors, Impedances ZR and Zx form a half-bridge, while OSC and OSC excite the bridge differentially. The external op amp is a FET input amplifier (LF356) with very low input bias current on the order of 30 pA (typical). Cl allows ac coupling by blocking the dc common mode voltage from the bridge, while RI biases the output of LF356 to oV at dc. Use of FET input op amp insures that dc offset due to bias current through RI is negligible. Ac output of the demodulator is filtered via the uncommitted amp to provide dc voltage for the meter. The 10 k potentiometer, R5, limits the current into the meter to a safe level. Cahbration begins by placing equal impedances at ZR and Zx, and the system offset is nulled by the offset adjust circuit so that Pin 1 is at 0 V. Next, known values are placed at Zx and the meter deviations are calibrated. The bridge is now ready to measure an unknown impedance at Zx with 0.05% accuracy or better.
81
BRIDGE-BALANCE INDICATOR
Vo"'O
when
R"2=
Rl
R3
R4
lN914
>-....-Vo
-Vcc
+Vcc
Fig. 10-2
- GAIN AT BALANCE
<
'"
UNBALANCEO GAIN
o
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Circuit Notes Indicator provides an accurate comparison of two voltages by indicating their degree of balance (or imbalance). Detecting small variations near the null point is difficult with the basic Wheatstone bridge alone. Amplification of voltage differences near the null point will improve circuit accuracy and ease of use. The IN9I4 diodes in the feedback loop result in high sensitivity near the point of balance (RlIR2 ~ R3/R4). When the bridge is unbalanced the amplifier's closed-loop gain is approximately RF/r, where r is the parallel equivalent of RI and R3. The resulting gain equation is G ~ RF(lIRI + 1IR3). During an unbalanced condition the voltage at point A is different from that at point B. This difference voltage CVAB)' amplified by the gain factor G, appears as an output voltage, As the bridge approaches a balanced condition (RlIR2 ~ R3/R4) , VAB approaches zero. As VAB approaches zero the IN9I4 diodes in the feedback loop lose their forward bias and their resistance increases, causing the total feedback resistance to increase. This increases circuit gain and accuracy in detecting a balanced condition. The figure shows the effect of approaching balance on circuit gain. The visual indicator used at the output of the OP-07 could be a sensitive voltmeter or oscilloscope.
82
BRIDGE CIRCUIT
r - - - - - - - - -.....- - - - + 6 V
220 k
.005
Z1
.1 I'F
H1 Z Phones
2k
2N3904
Z1
2k
Fig. 10-3
WILLlAM SHEETS
Circuit Notes The transistor is connected as an audio oscillator, using an audio transformer in the collector. The secondary goes to a linear pot. The ratio between the two parts of the pot from the slider is proportional to the values of Zl and Z2 when no signal is heard in the phones.
TYPICAL TWO OP AMP BRIDGE-TYPE DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
,
" "
" "
Circuit Notes
Using aCA3493 BiMOS op amp to provide high input impedance and good common-mode rejection ratio (depends primarily on matching of resistor networks).
" "
~OUT
"OUT -
~b
~Q
:;
+ I)
.
Fig. 10-4
-'1(
A. "OUT '(~+I)
VI: -'0'0 R3
'OR VAUJES ABOV liouT" \'1 0

ALL RESISTANCE VAlUES
1110)
AII:E IN OHMS
83
LOW-POWER COMMON SOURCE AMPLIFIER

'6V
BALANCE
22M
I I I I I I I L
r-----SI1100
lOOK
1M
+12V
_____ _
'6V
r-----I
SI1100
L-----I~_____<I>__.jL
-12V
lOOK
I I
I l _____ _
SILlCONIX, INC.
1M
Fig. 10-5
Circuit Notes
A circuit that will operate in the 10-to 20- microamp range at a 12-volt supply voltage. The diode protection is available in this configuration. The circuit voltage gain will be between 10 and 20, with extremely low power consumption (approximately 250 "W). This is very desirable for remote or battery operation where minimum maintenance is important.
AMPLIFIER FOR BRIDGE TRANSDUCERS
AS
56M
RI
100~
R3
510k
LT1012
>'--+-- OUTPUT
Fig. 10-6
R4
510k
S2
100~
R2 lOOk
R6 56M VOLTAGE GAIN
-., 100
84
S"fRAIN GAUGE BRIDGE SIGNAL CONDITIONER

+5V
220
1.2VOI!T REFERENCE
lmA MAXIMUM LOAD
301k
t---t----.,-,.,,----------- ~~RA~~T~g~~i~~E~PEAATION
0.1
OUTPUT
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 3500

2~
OV-3 5V Opsl-350pSI
GAIN TAl M
"100J.'F
46k"
", %
FILM RESISTOR PRESSURE TAANSDUCER-BLH IOHF-J50 CIRCLED LETTER IS PIN NUMBER
100[1"
Fig. 10-7
85
11
Burst Generators
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Single-Tone Burst Generator Square Waveform Multiburst Generator Single-Timer le Provides Square-Wave Tone Bursts Strobe-Tone Burst Generator Tone Burst Generator
86
SINGLETONE BURST GENERATOR
'5K
,~l
R,
"
Vc >-- 5
+12V +12V
. . -. 0 . IV\I\/\ . L
4
'OK
L..7r--~'r-'3;-O ~
-=':-
R2 1801(
I
0.5 SEC TONE BURST FOLLOWING , APPLICATION OF POWER TONE FREO ~ 3 Rle,
'.2V
~~
2
.2K
OPTIONAL ~ REGULATED CAPACITOR CHARGING CIRCUIT
SIGNETICS
Fig. 111
Circuit Notes
The tone burst generator supplies a tone for onehalf second after the power supply is activated; its intended use is a communications network alert signal. Cessation of the tone is accomplished at the SCR, which shunts the timing capacitor Cl charge current when activated. The SCR is gated on when C2 charges up to the gate voltage which occurs in 0.5 seconds. Since only 70 p.A are available for triggering, the SCR must be sensitive enough to trigger at this level. The triggering current can be increased, of course, by reducing R2 (and increasing C2 to keep the same time constant). If the tone duration must be constant under widely varying supply voltage conditions, the optional Zener diode regulator circuit can be added, along with the new value for R2 R2' ~ 82 kll. If the SCR is replaced by an npn transistor, the tone can be switched on and off at will at the transistor base terminal.
87
SQUARE WAVEFORM MULTI BURST GENERATOR

COMPOSITE BLANKING PULSES CLOCK PULSES LOCKED TO VERT. BLANK VERTICAL BLANKING PULSES
1fT
8
13
+12V
,.
2
JWL JUl
CLOCK RESET
15
IC14017
16
.
13
13
3
+12V
12 11
5
3
6
9
12
+12V
SQUARE MULTI BURST
illlJl
TO VIDEO MIXER
2.7
FIG. 1 FIELD, 16.8/20 mS
CL2~!': nnI IN:LJUU

I I
VERTICAL BLANKING
I'
'I
J I
OUTPUTS ICl
_....:.3---l
n
46.
kH,
L
+-"""':
l ~----------------~
-~~+-~
n
6 ..
kH,
L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
I
I I
I I
~
I
1400 kH, 2700 kH, 3600 kH,
oSCllLATOR oUTPUT
900 kH,
'8" kH,
600.
kH,
Fig. 11-2
88
SQUARE WAVEFORM MULTIBURST GENERATOR, Continued. Circuit Notes
The generator described here is intended for multiburst signal square waveform generation and can be used as a device for characterizing the response of TV monitor amplifiers as shown. The circuit is an RC oscillator with NAND gates (IC4-4011), with its capacitor C changed periodically by means of bilateral switches (IC2, IC3-4016). The control inputs of bilateral switches are driven by the outputs of a counter/decoder (IC1-4017) the operation of which is determined by generated clock pulses, so that they occur eight times at half-picture (field). These pulses are locked to vertical blank pulses. Horizontal synchronization is achieved by means of composite blanking pulses (negative polarization) applied to pins 1 and 5 of IC4. The oscillator frequency changes in the following discrete steps: 460 kHz, 680 kHz, 900 kHz, 1400 kHz, 2700 kHz, 3600 kHz, for the time of one frame. The video signal is fed on a mixer where it is superimposed with a composite sync signal.
SINGLE-TIMER IC PROVIDES SQUARE-WAVE TONE BURSTS
r,,"-'5V)
OUTPUT
3
-1 i.C2 T60
fk F
.J1Jl.f1..JL
R'
Vc:: (5-ISVl
5W R5 220 R4
pa
a
300
7
NE 555
R2 47.
G
1.5~
2 4
~
IOOOpr
C'
R3 300
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 11-3
Circuit Notes
The tone-burst generator gives a 50-ms burst of 1.5 kHz square waves with each operation of the pushbutton and can source or sink 200 mA.
89
STROBE-TONE BURST GENERATOR
AA
..
..
+11\1
le......
Fig. 11-4
"
.. ,
INt14
~
1.. 114
""'" '''' rc,,, V .'"

~
STRo.E
OH
+15\1 (+10Y) -15V (-10V)
INTERSIL
TONE BURST GENERATOR
:>
2K MIN
Vcc
R,
Vcc
Vcc
I
4 10
R2
2K
MIN
Circuit Notes
tc'1
INPUT
':'
',2
14 ,3R3
TRIGGER
c:
6 7
556
'2~
J:::
C2
"-
Fig. 11-5
"
OUTPUT
The dual timer makes an excellent tone burst generator. The first half is connected as a one shot and the second half as an oscillator. The pulse established by the one shot turns on the oscillator allowing a burst of pulses to be generated.
SIGNETICS
90
12 Capacitance Meters
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Capacitance-to-Voltage Meter Accurate Digital Capacitance Meter
91
CAPACITANCE-TO-VOLTAGE METER
VDD
+15 V
100kil
i--VOD - - - itSET----TiCS55j
I
"' I I
OUTPUT) 220 kO
181
141
16,I THRH
220 kO I
0.1 ",f
,--VDD
I
181
(6)ITHRES
1511cONTROL
a,o'T I ",F _I
~ ITR~ER
I I
I
I
:
1211
L__~o
100 n
________ ~'~~~5
111
Im
JO.'IJF
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 12-1
Circuit Notes Timer UI operates as a free-running oscillator at 60 Hz, providing trigger pulses to timer U2 which operates in the mono stable mode. Resistor RI is fixed and capacitor ex is the capacitor being measured. While the output of U2 is 60 Hz, the duty cycle depends on the value of ex. U3 is a combination low-pass filter and unity-gain follower whose dc voltage output is the time-averaged amplitude of the output pulses of U2, as shown in the timing diagram. The diagram shows when the value of ex is small the duty cycle is relatively low. The output pulses are narrow and produce a lower average dc voltage level at the output of U3. As the capacitance value of ex increases, the duty cycle increases making the output pulses at U2 wider and the average dc level output at U3 increases. The graph illustrates capacitance values of O.OII'F to O.II'F plotted against the output voltage of U3. Notice the excellent linearity and direct one-to-one scale calibration of the meter. If this does not occur the lOO k ohm resistor, RI, can be replaced with a potentiometer which can be adjusted to the proper value for the meter being used.
92
CAPACITANCE-TO-VOLTAGE METER (CONT'D)
1.1
+':]/'------------1,n '-----ft-t1~
I
+15
Ibl
oJ
t MI4--- t '-----tj
I
I
to
9 8 7
i-------,
U2 Duty Cycle Change
>
I
6
5 4
:>
~
>-
'o 3
3
2
oL-~~=--~~~~~~~~~~
0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 CAPACITANCE - jJF
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
FIg. 12-1
93
ACCURATE DIGITAL CAPACITANCE METER

11
d ..
C:J
9
11
V+
9 1 14 IC5 4 16
8 1 9
IC2 7 15
15
1.5M
wvv~",1
bF.mFi
V+
2K
:221
:~
:
1
sw,
R,
39K
J.
pF T -m tent
SW,$w;z
11.0"'I polys.
pF I :CD4093 B I : CD4518 B 1
~
nF le1 F IC2.3 I " IC 4.5.6 : CD 4511 B 1 L ___________________________ I mF V+ : 12-9V 1
o o 0
Sw,
Fig. 12-2
Circuit Notes
The principle of operation is counting the pulse number derived from a constant frequency oscillator during a fixed time interval produced by another lower frequency oscillator. This oscillator uses the capacitor being measured as the timing. The capacitance measurement is proportional during pulse counting during a fixed time interval. The astable oscillator formed by IClc produces a pulse train of constant frequency. Gate ICla also forms an oscillator whose oscillation period is given approximately by the equation: T=O.7 RC. Period T is linearly dependent on the capacitance C. This period is used.as the time interval for one measurement. The differentiator network following the oscillator creates the negative spikes shaped in narrow pulses by IClb NAND Schrnitt Trigger. The differentiator formed by RI and Cl produces a negative spike which resets the counters. The display shows the number of high frequency oscillator pulses entering the counter during the measurement period.
94
13
Circuit Protection Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Overvoltage Protector High Speed Electronic Circuit Breaker 12 ns Circuit Breaker Low Voltage Power Disconnector Automatic Power-Down Protection Circuit Line Dropout Detector Electronic Crowbar
95
OVERVOL T AGE PROTECTOR

+ +
12VDC SOU RCE
SCAl A1 2.5K TO LOAD
lA 50V
G
TAIGGER ADJUST
A...!....o I
Kl
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
12 VDC
Fig. 13-1
Circuit Notes A silicon-controlled rectifier is installed ID parallel with the 12-V line and connected to a normally-closed 12-V relay, KI. The SCR's gate circuit is used to sample the applied voltage. As long as the applied voltage stays below a given value, SCRl remallis off and Kl's contacts remalli closed, thereby supplying power to the load. When the source voltage rises above 12 V, sufficient current is applied to the gate of SCRl to trigger it into conduction. The trigger point of SCRl is dependent on the setting of RI. Once SCRl is triggered (activating the relay), Kl' s contacts open, halting current flow to the load.
HIGH SPEED ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BREAKER

4e,
lN1204
R9 1k 02 LED R4 2m
lN914
01
CIRCUIT BREAKER" {
TERMINALS
R5 12 k R6
5k
9V
9V
" 11f;"111
R8
7.5 k
04
05 R7 R3
2k
9 V.:-
3 6 8
lOk
U1
2
HARAIS HA2525
J
Fig. 13-2
01
MTM15NSO
MOTOROLA
0.1 11 CQPEL WIRE
'"
07
lN823
D6
lN823
Circuit Notes This 115 Vac, electronic circuit breaker low resistance. One input to comparator VI is uses the low drive power, low on resistance and a fraction of the internal battery voltage and the fast turn off of the TMOS MTMI5N50. The trip other input is the drop across zeners D6 and point is adjustable, LED fault indication is D7 and the voltage drop across R1.If excessive provided and battery power provides complete current is drawn, the voltage drop across RI circuit isolation. increases beyond the comparator threshold (deThe two "circuit breaker" terminals are termined by the setting of R6), VI output goes across one leg of a full wave diode bridge low, Ql turns OFF, and the circuit breaker consisting of DI-D4. Normally, Ql is turned "opens." When this occurs, the LED fault ON so that the circuit breaker looks like a very indicator is illuminated.
96
12 ns CIRCUIT BREAKER
390U
CURRENT
+ 15V
LTl004
1.2V
SET
1k
lk
3.3U
47#
r---w.----+--"/+h
:H----{
HP5082-2810
02
2N3866
-:-
Fig. 13-3
"OIl
330
.70
+ 5V
-'\M,.4""";o.;......,
330
LOAD
100
Circuit Notes This circuit will turn off current in a load 12 ns after it exceeds a preset value. Under nonnal conditions the voltage across the 10 ohm shunt is smaller than the potential at the LTI016's negative input. This keeps Ql off and Q2 receives bias, driving the load. When an overload occurs the current through the 10 ohm sense resistor begins to increase. When this current exceeds the preset value, the LTI016's outputs reverse. This provides ideal turn-on drive for Ql and it cuts off Q2 in 5 ns. The delay from the onset of excessive load current to complete shutdown is just 13 ns. Once the circuit has triggered, the LTl0l6 is held in its latched state by feedback from the non-inverting output. When the load fault has been cleared the pushbutton can be used to reset the circuit.
LOW VOLTAGE POWER DISCONNECTOR
r - - - - - - .......--.--.--- v
".
_OUTPUT
REFERENCE
INTERSIL
Fig. 13-4
Circuit Notes There are some classes of circuits that require the power supply to be disconnected if the power supply voltage falls below a certain value. As an example, the National LM199 precision reference has an on chip heater which malfunctions with supply voltages below 9 volts causing an excessive device temperature. The ICL8212 can be used to detect a power supply voltage of 9 volts and turn the power supply off to the LM199 heater section below that voltage.
97
AUTOMATIC POWER-DOWN PROTECTION CIRCUIT
+24 V
Optoisolator
12-Y regulator
+12 Y
J. -
~ 1 k t01 Ok as require d
1
. WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 13-5 .
Circuit Notes This circuit is faster than a fuse and automatically resets itself when a short is removed. The normal regulated dc input line is opened and the phototransistor of the opto isolator is connected in series with the source and regulator. Between the output of the regulator and ground is a LED and an associated current-limiting resistor, placed physically close to the surface of the photosensitive device. As long as the regulator is delivering its rated output, the LED glows and causes the photo device to have a low resistance. Full current is thus allowed toilow. If a short circuit occurs on the output side of the regulator, the LED goes dark, the resistance of the photo device increases, and the regulator shuts off. When the short is removed, the LED glows, and the regulator resumes operation.
LINE DROPOUT DETECTOR
TRIP SET
TO SiCONOARY
'He
POWER TRANSFORMER
, , :::
i --
-r-=,.=H~-h
'"
L ____
4N46
J
LM 311
Fig. 13-6
98
ELECTRONIC CROWBAR
Rl 10 k SUPPLY VOLTAGE AC OR DC R2 1k R3 1k
PUSH TO TEST
11
SET POINT ADJ. TRIAC 0.1 "F MBS4991
TO ELECTRICAL OR ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
MOTOROLA
Fig. 13-7
Circuit Notes
Where it is desirable to shut down equipment rather than allow it to operate on excessive supply voltage, an electronic "crowbar" circuit can be employed to quickly place a ~hort-circuit across the power lines, thereby dropping the voltage across the protected device to near zero and blowing a fuse. Since the TRIAC and SBS are both bilateral devices, the circuit is equally useful onac or dc supply lines. With the values shown for RI, R2 and R3, the crowbar operating point can be adjusted over the range of 60 to 120 volts dc or 42 to 84 volts ac. The resistor values can be changed to cover a different range of supply voltages. The voltage rating of the TRIAC must be greater than the highest operating point as set by R2. 11 is a low power incandescenUamp with a voltage rating equal to the supply voltage. It may be used to check the set point and operation of the unit by opening the test switch and adjusting the input or set point to fire the SBS.
99
14
Clock Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Three Phase Clock From a Reference Clock 60 Hz Clock Pulse Generator
100
THREE PHASE CLOCK FROM A REFERENCE CLOCK

~C10Ck
Pulse train: 1
First monostable
output
~T~T~J..
Second IOOn05 tab le

output
Pulse train:2
Fig. 14-1
Pulse train:3
Loutput:l
Output :2
Output:3
~~----------~~
Rb
VCC=5V
Third pulse train
r----...
J
R,
r--!-~~~-.
4 10 14
! 7476
I-:---Output 3
Second ITK)no
stable
output
T K Flipflop
First mono
stab 1e output
12
Second pulse train

J
~
7476
I--:---Output 2 Q
~-7-----~"-I13
556
81---,
T Flipflop
K
11
Reference clock
I----.J
.L T
L 7476
Flipflop
I-Q--output 1
Circuit Notes
The circuit provides three square wave outputs with 120 0 of phase difference between each other. Reference clock frequency is twice that of the required frequenc}'. This can be obtained from a crystal oscillator with a chain of dividers or by using LM 555 in 50% duty cycle astable mode. If liT is the frequency of the reference clock, the dual timer 556 is connected to give two mono-stable output pulses of duration T/3 and 2T/3. The first timerR and C value are adjusted so that ta = 1.1RaCa = T/3 and the second timer R and C values so that tb = 1.1RbCb = 2T/3. For triggering the two monostables a negative pulse train (1st) is derived from the reference clock with a differentiator and a clipper combination as shown. The three pulse trains trigger three JK flip flops giving three phase square wave outputs.
101
60 Hz CLOCK PULSE GENERATOR
OUTPUTS
GN0 0------,
60Hz 0 - - - , 3,58MHzo---.
8
7
~ XTAL 1 33pF T 358 ~12' 1 MHz

C;'
"
Rl 22
ICl MM5369
~
2
Circuit Notes The circuit provides a clean, stable square wave and it will operate on anywhere from 6 to 15 volts. The le and color-burst crystal are the kind used in TV receivers. The 3.58 MHz output makes a handy marker signal for shortwave bands.
MEG
5
"''' C2
4-40
pF
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
J.
Fig. 14-2
102
15
Comparators
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginuing on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Low-Power Comparator with Less than 10 p.V Hysteresis Voltage MonitorfComparator Limit Comparator Double-Ended Limit Comparator Low-Cost Comparator and Display Window Comparator Comparator Detects Power Supply Overvoltages. Catches Glitches High-Low Level Comparator with One Op Amp High-Input-Impedance Window Comparator Frequency Comparator Demonstration Comparator Circuit LED Frequency Comparator TIL-Compatible Schmitt Trigger
103
LOW-POWER COMPARATOR WITH LESS THAN 10 fLV HYSTERESIS

5V-r----~--__,
330k NON-INV INPUT INVERTING

INPUT
100k OUTPUT
lOk
620k
LT101:?
y......~N--{ 2N3904
lOOk
Fig. 15-1
10k
VOLTAGE MONITOR/COMPARATOR
L.EO I
"
~6011.
.,
"
+
POWER SUPPLY
01
+
INPUT
Circuit Notes A portion of the monitored voltage (determined by RI s adjustment) is compared to a fixed voltage obtained from a zener reference network, R2-Dl. As long as the monitored voltage remains at or above its present monitor point (determined by RI's setting), the output indicator, LEDl, remains dark. If the voltage drops below this level, the LED goes on. Dl is a 3.3-V zener. A 12 Vdc power supply is suitable for monitoring input voltages of up to 12 volts.
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 15-2
LIMIT COMPARATOR
v + (12VOc)
+ VREF HI o-...",.....p,
10KO
LAMP
Fig. 15-3
SIGNETlCS
104
DOUBLE-ENDED LIMIT COMPARATOR

V" " 10 V
RSET
lOM H
VUL
R,
lMSl
V"
10 V
V,N ~---,,,,,,,L1"
V+" 10 V
1/3
R2 1 MU
R3
113
Ll"
Fig. 15-4
1 Mu
, MIl
vSILlCQNIX
PO" 290jJW
-lOV
VOUT" "LOW" WHEN: VHIGH > VIN :> VLOW DIRECT CMOS OUTPUT
LOW-COST COMPARATOR AND DISPLAY

+12
R1
Fig. 15-5
IN
6.V in
6ILED~-- B
R111R2
LED
Circuit Notes
An op amp is used as a comparator and a sink for LED current. The output voltage of the amplifier changes about 1.4 V depending on the direction of the current. Only one transistor is on at any time. Maximum LED current is limited to 25 mA by overcurrent protection of the uA741. If LEDs are not capable of carrying such a current or an alternative op amp is used and an additional resistor RIim is necessary.
105
WINDOW COMPARATOR
r-----OOIf
Sign" "1" Vin > Vref
,"
4k7
Vino-------..---"I
12
Comp 1
330R
"
"On
If
Vref <Vin <Vu
. Vrefo-------+_~
.5V On
1k R2
0,
If
VL (Vin (Vref
"7
330R
(+Ve direction)
" t
lOk
~F
Camp 2
Vu " Vref Where
+
VA
Ri "
Rl
-15V
VL ,,-Vref - (VS) ~
lOk
Pin 9
Switch up when
'1 Vs "
+5V
_Camp 2
~--.;:--- =--Camp I
Analogue switch Vs E.G. ! DG303, siliconix
Fig. 156
Circuit Notes This circuit provides independently adjustable upper and lower threshold settings, and has sign, in window ranlle, in upper window, and in lower window digital outputs.
106
COMPARATOR DETECTS POWER SUPPLY OVERVOLTAGES, CATCHES GLlTCliES

VI V2 V2 VI
BEEPER
MALLDRY SONALERT
BEEPER
Ik
2"
lB'
!IV 0
5 V <>-",N'~Io-;--r--;
O.l125V
\\
N..
51
I
I
"
011'
t,
25V
I I
10 A2 .u
I2V
~"'-~'r--jh
O.l/25V
"
\\
112 VI
PIN 3
~
" v..
AI-A.3' 114 LM339

TO LM339
V2
lB'
PIN 12
150k
1, ~ .1 1
W5 %
~!.
.+
TO 20'1 DC POWER SU'I'lY
2OOI25v
+.
Fig. 15-7.
-12 V O __....JI'..r
10.
~
IN34A
"1+A3 BL
NOTE: LED, ARE MOTOROLA MLED 640
OR EIlUIVALENT
~
ALL RESISTORS 114
Circuit Notes
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
(A) To maintain an alarm condition when an overvoltage transient disappears, add an SCR to the comparator circuits. For SCR operation, voltages to the comparator inputs are inverted. (B) The triple-voltage monitoring circuit detects transient power-supply overvoltages. If excessive voltage momentarily appears at the 5, 12 and -12 V inputs, the LED for that circuit lights and the beeper sounds for as long as the overvoltage lasts.
HIGHLOW LEVEL COMPARATOR WITH ONE OP AMP

+U N
.....1
";";1
.'> RI
"le .......
~ ......
R5
U out
Fig. 158
-UNIO)
Circuit Notes
The voltage to be compared is fed through diode Dl and D2 to the voltage dividers Rl and R5 where the low and high limits are present. When the voltage level of an input signal exceeds the high threshold limit set with potentiometer Rl, the diode Dl becomes forward biased and the increased voltage on the inputs of the op amp drives it into positive saturation. Similarly, a decrease of the input voltage at the op amp inputs turns the op amp to positive saturation. ~Potentiometer R3 is used for zeroing the op amp in the off state.
HIGHINPUTIMPEDANCE WINDOW COMPARATOR
\;v
100 k 2
~9'
AI
..l ~ LED
670fl.
+I~
INPUT()--<
47
1/
U
v47>
-<D68,
.J;
100 k
WINDOW~O
Vl ~
5
i?
A2
~2N2I02
Fig. 159
CD
GENERAL ELECTRIC /ReA
981/ WIDE LEO QN IN WINDOW
Circuit Notes
The circuit uses both halves of the CA3290 BiMOS dual voltage comparator. The LED will be turned "ON" whenever the input signal is above the lower limit (VL) but below the upper limit (Vu).
108
FREQUENCY COMPARATOR
+5V
4K7 IC1(a)
I/P1 C RC 0 ---<1 (300ms)
Ot-----------,
01---.....--.,
+5V
22k
B CL
620
+5V-+---..J
PR
IC2a
01--+--10 PR O~
IC2b
PR 0
IC3a
LOOP LOCK
r---f> CL Q
+5V
I/P2
CL
is
L-_,-~+5V
IC1(b) IC2 & IC3 74LS74
Fig. 15-10
Circuit Notes Input 1 is used as a gating period, during which a single rising edge on input 2 will cause a logic 1 output-any other number, indicating non-identical frequencies causes a logic 0 output. ICla converts input 1 to a narrow pulse which initializes IC2 which forms a twostage shift register clocked by input 2. On the first edge of input 2 a logic 1 appears on the output of IC2b and for all subsequent inputs a logic 0 is present. At the end of the gating period this output is latched by IC3 forming the lock output. As this is only valid for one input period a monostable is added to the output to enable, for example, visual monitoring of the output. Either output from IC3 can be used depending on which state is most important. As connected the failure state is indicated. DEMONSTRATION COMPARATOR CIRCUIT
+" \'
R'i '~.f~
+~v
LED
UI
'I
~.
lo/<.
-=
Fig. 15-11
Circuit Notes This circuit is an op amp without a feedback resistor. R2 and R3 junction point sets the reference voltage. When the input voltage set by Rl is below the reference voltage the LED glows. If voltage is above reference, the LED goes off.
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
109
LED FREQUENCY COMPARATOR
'r:;,;F~~~~;r=:::::~]'--~~r----------------------,~-------,'------------v+ L IKO
14 13 2321 Aa A, Az 24 AJ Y4
1C1
~14B
a.. <l.i
01 Q 1 0.. 0. Q'ICI Q 11 0 12 012 Q .... 0'15
18 17 20 19 14 13 16 15
~Df:.----"*"
, ICS
40428
:::'-'~
FMEASURl<FREF
IC6 "" HEX SCHMITI TRIGGER 401068 OR MC14584BCP DIODES = 1N4148 LED'S = LOW CURRENT [2mAJ
FMEASUflE ~ FRS'
FMEASURf> FREF
2Kz
IIU
Circuit Notes
IllU
Dv
Fig. 15-12
The circuit provides unambiguous LED + or - bar readout with steps of 0.1 %. The reference frequency is multiplied by the PLLICl and divider ICg to output 64 x F (reO and this is then gated by dividing F (measure) by 32 in ICS thus is F (reO = (measure) then IC2 counts 1024 pulses. Should the count be more than 1031 than the latch IC4clIC4a is set to indicate count too high (F (measure) F (reO) and if the count is less than 1017 then IC3/IC4b indicate count too low (F (measure) F (reO. These signals are latched by IC5 at the end of each period by the latch signal from IC6e. When the two frequencies are within + or - 0.6% the LSB's of the counter IC2 are decoded and latched by IC7 and displayed on LED's IC6c resets the counter after latching the data.
TTL-COMPATIBLE SCHMITT TRIGGER

------------------------------------------------~-----------'V"
Rz
R,
r v,
Of
Vo
0, 0,
V" Rz RL
V,
FIg. 15-13
Circuit Notes The comparator has an output pull-up resistor RL and is connected up to operate as a Schmitt trigger using the single rail supply Vcc. The feedback resistors RI and R2 give upper and lower threshold levels VT +, VVVTW' respectively. VT + is easily set by suitable resistor selection but there is little independent choice of VT _ because VT _ cannot exceed VCE(SAU. In Fig. 15-13B current-source, comprising the transistors RE' RB produces a current I -: (YEB/RE), VEB (- 0.65 V) being the emitter-base voltage of Q1 and Q2. Fig. 15-13C shows the results of a practical test using the circuit of Fig. 15-13B, and the following operating and component data: Vcc = 5 V; RL = 1 K ohm; RI = R2 = 10 K ohm; RB = 3.6 K ohm; RE = 1 K ohm + 10 K ohm pot; Q I = ZTX500; Q2 = ZTX500.
111
:> ,; >
\.
, 11
--
\ / If
'A
1\,
r\
C
/ If
/ \
~
!
,\V
Fig. 15-13 Continued
112
16
Computer Circuits
T he sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694.
8-Bit I'P Bus Interface Vpp Generator for Eproms Eight Channel Mux/Demux System Microprocessor Selected Pulse Width Control 804811M80C48 Microcomputer with 8-Character I6-Segment ASCII Triplex Liquid Crystal Display CMOS Data Acquisition System High Speed Data Acquisition System Buffered Breakout Box Z80 Clock Data Separator for Floppy Disks The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section.
113
8-BIT I'P BUS INTERFACE
,
BUS
"' ,
3

,
..2. Do c...2
" " " " ,

Do~
Ol
rJ
NES410
LS373
E~.l Q2~
112 LS315
CONTROL { El
::o':~
Fig. 16-1
E,-
1/2 LS315
D, Eo,l Ot
Q3~
TIMING SeQUENCE
E,---ILE,-----1LSIGNETICS
DATA~
...
'
082_,
Circuit Notes
With this double latch technique. valid data will be latched to the DAC until updated with the E2 pulse. Timing will depend on the processor used.
Vpp GENERATOR FOR EPROMS
~24
22,
3tO
-
+24V
~7
[OO'SRC
PER
I~TEL
SPEC
'"
LT1004-1.2 ":;
7
~
se.
7
lO5,,~~6
J
V'2N3904
7
OUT
169.-
r.t:~I~
105k-
W,
L.iTTL INPUT
1~. META.L FIUA RESISTORS
-5
Fig. 16-2
114
EIGHT-CHANNEL MUXlDEMUX SYSTEM

"5V
15V
,Nl'UTS {
- ,,"
"
...... .... ,,"

"
A 112
" . ., ,"
v,
ill "
GNO
0
_'lioV
-1&"
. "' .. """'" .
.'~ "
Ao ""
1,
."
CLOCK
.... .." "2 EN , 116 [15 12

_15V
015 V
'H
" 1 1"1" !:
"2 EN
."
-15 v
. ..
If__ "
_,:90
.-
,~
" ~ '"
,~
,GND
_15V
. . t!:!
.1'
") ,
I;--~
.,~
,.". I"'~/ '-------1>II>I-.,-t- '..

'OI(~
L _______
SIUCONIX
Da
O,020)O..
,~
0s0sDJoo.
0,
~
---'A"_"'EII- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___________
--RECEIVEII-- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
...J
fig. 16-3
Circuit Notes A number of signals may be sent between two points simultaneously by making a slight modification in the receiver circuit. A second DG508A is used as a demultiplexer, allowing all 8 channels to be monitored continuously.
~
en
MICROPROCESSOR SELECTED PULSE WIDTH CONTROL
, "l' " ",l

00521
19
20
,
21
..
EN 18 DATA BUS
AD 17
Al
16
23
"r-~ ~
~ ..r==
112
1'13
Circuit Notes
R4
..,2 15
" " " , " o. "

11
" "'
f
"
,
--"'
0",
10
.,
ADD BUS
"
"
, , ,
I--;~-H--*C3
I
CnIR. .,
" " "
fL
Go.
cc,
74123
f--!
h
c.
"
:)t
'"' !..
Fig. 16-4
Differential multiplexers are generally used in process control applications to eliminate errors due to common mode signals. In this circuit however, advantage is taken of the dual multiplexing capability of the switch. This is achieved by using the multiplexer to select pairs of RC networks to control the pulse width of the multivibrator. This can be a particularly useful feature in process control applications where there is a requirement for a variable width sample "window" for different control signals.
DECODE
SILlCONIX
804811M80C48 MICROCOMPUTER WITH 8-CHARACTER 16-SEGMENT ASCII TRIPLEX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
MlCROCOMPUTlR
....
'f
IIrnE:F~SILI
TlMPERATURE COMPENSATION
~ ,
'::"0
..
.
M
Voo)
201a
\ICe
.a..,. 40"'0 27 ,
,20 21
:aoec:r .. 11 :at
".-
...
...I.T
HA
" ,,,a 'Z1.

010 12
."
, , ~}vo_,
I ,
110 POAT Z
...... ..
'"
"
".
H'
1CM1Z--' ",",0 00 ________ 0& IoOA1CiiBi :wI _. _____ :.; 3131 31 I
".
"
"DC)-
'. " ....

"V'
M. ""'".,.
:n
, ':JI 311 1
00--------06 100 .,azCS!

30-------- 15
",un {:
.n,
"0
.U5
.iNT
I , ,
, ,
I I
~('1'''0
}
,.""
v,..
_0
""
.UHO EXTlRNAl
"'EMOR\; ANO OTMER 'E'"PHERA~$
0111.
11.2610.
m'..l.ll too
INTERSIL
......
Circuit Notes
'00
'MU
Fig. 16-5
The two bit character address is merged with the data and written to the display driver under the control of the WR line. Port lines are used to either select the target driver, or deselect all of them for other bus operations.
116
CM OS DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
'"
12-15 V
SUPPLY
100 kHZ
'"
BINARY
TRANSFER
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
CODE
111111111
'CC
CC<
CNO
se
0, 0, 0, 0,
~,.{ 8US
OUTPUT ENABLE
TRANSDUCER
0, 0, 0,
}o.,A 8U,
ANALOG LATCH
'00000000
0 0'
VREF
'OC
"'REF"
ANM{
I,..PUTS
SILlCONIX
'N' 'N' 'N' 'N' 'N' ""
ACe
OOOOOOOO~----------~-----------7,,,
INPUT VOLTAGE - V
CONTROL
, 'N'
.
A,
',.,"
} 'N'U'
ADDRESS
} ANALOG
INPUTS
Vcc 15 V "'FIEF ~ 10 V
GNDVREF-~OV
RESOLUTION - 39
mv
"'SOURCE i. 1 k!l
Fig. 16-6
Circuit Notes
Charge redistribution to achieve AID conversion. In typical applications. as a ratiometric conversion system for a microprocessor. V REF _ will be connected to ground and V REF + will be connected to Vcc. The output will then be a simple proportional ratio between analog input voltage and VCC. The general relationship is:
=
VREF+ - V REF _
Where DOUT
V REF V REF
V IN
Digital Output Analog Input Positive Reference Potential Negative Reference Potential
117
HIGH SPEED DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM

r---- ----,
I I
LOAD
AO
A,
A,
A8
CLEAR
f--J
-i
GAIN ADDRESS REGISTER
CHANNEL IN PUTS
MX-,616
MUX ENABLE
V
~
~ "--
~
.......
I
MUX ADDRESS REGISTER
I-
1
DATEL
CLEAR
Fig. 16-7
Circuit Notes
This diagram shows a high-speed data acquisition system with 8 differential inputs and 12-bit resolution using the AM-543. If the control logic is timed so that the SampleHold-ADC section is converting one analog value while the mux-amplifier section is allowed to settle to the next input value, throughout rates greater than 156 KHz can be achieved. The AM-543 is used with Datel's ADV-817, a 12-bit hybrid AID with a 2psec conversion rate, the SHM-6, a 0.01%, 1psec hybrid Sample-Hold, and the MX-1616,
118
r-r-r-r--
MSB
MSB
THREE STATE OUTPUT
DM-8095
~
V
HOLD
r-ADC-81?
rsrrs
1
T
DATA
BIT 6
ENABLE
BIT 7
START
lSB
BIT 7
THReE STATE
OM-809S
OUTPUT
DATA
LSB
CONTROl
LOGIC
EDC
DELAY
STROBE
a low cost, high-speed monolithic analog multiplexer. The system works as follows: The I'P selects a channel and initiates a conversion at G = 1 and then looks at the MSB of the conversion result. If the MSB = 1, the I'P will store the value. If the MSB = 0, the I'P will select G = 2. The JLP will repeat the cycle of gain incrementing, comparison, and analog-to-digital conversion until the MSB = 1. The I'P will then test for an output of all1's, as this is the full-scale output of the AID. If the output is all 1's, the I'P will decrement the gain by 1 step and perform the final conversion.
119
BUFFERED BREAKOUTBOX
R5 Rl
10K
INPUT 1 ~'II\I\~+---'.
IN PUT 2 O-'II\I\~+-+"
INPUT3 ~'II\I\~"'
Fig. 16-8
INPUT. ~'II\I\~...
-p
R13
llOK
"14
51K
I
9V :
Cl 1
Circuit Notes
The monitoring circuit consists of four tri-color LEDs driven by an equal number of op amps configured as gain-of-one inverting amplifiers. Each LED is wired in the circuit so that it glows red when the input to the op amp is high. and green when the input is low. The LED remains off when the input is disconnected from a circuit, when it's at ground potential, and when it's connected to a 3-state output that's in the highimpedance state. Each input has an impedance of 10,000 ohms preventing the circuit
120
BUFFERED BREAKOUT BOX, Continued.
from loading communication lines. The op amp requires both positive and negative supply voltages to properly drive the LEDs. Both voltages are supplied by a single, ninevolt battery. The battery supplies the positive source directly. The negative source is supplied via a CMOS 555 oscillator/timer that's configured as an astable oscillator, which is used to drive a standard diode/capacitor voltage doubler. When the 555 is connected to the monitoring circuit, the output voltage is not 18 volts (2 x 9), but a little under nine volts, due to loading. The circuit draws about 16 mA with all LEDs off; with all four on, it draws between 20 and 30 mA, depending on how many LEDs are high, and how many are low. The use of CMOS op amps reduces quiescent current drain considerably.
ZBO CLOCK
1 meg
HC04
HC04
(lk
40MHz
56pF
Fig. 16-9
40MHz
~22PF
~ 100pF
Damping resistor at the output is highly recommended
Circuit Notes The circuit will operate reliably from below 1 MRz to above 400 MRz. With Vcc = 5 V the output of the second inverter essentially attains a full swing from 0 V to 5 V. Such large logic output levels and broad frequency range capabilities make this oscillator quite suitable for driving MOS components such as CPU, controller chip, peripheral devices, as well as other TTL products. A damping resistor in series between the clock output of the oscillator and the input of the device being driven will remove the undesirable undershoot and ringing caused by the high speed CMOS part.
121
DATA SEPARATOR FOR FLOPPY DISKS

Separated data N1
1 B
1/2
>----OIA
A
from disk drive "--"":'--0'13
Clock & data
74LS221
+5V
3
0 4
C N3 0
N , Clock
4
+5V
1,2mF
14r.l::..........;~3
3'-- - -"""l5 C O 74LS74 74LS175

20
15 2
10 5
7
5 11
5k
22mF
PLL
4046
S
12 2
5k
R
4 4
Missing pulse
. .. ..
~Z~~Z~1.5mF
- Unseparated data from disk drive
C - clock pulse
o
E
-
o-
data pulse
______
B~a~d~.'_yn::.c::.h::.ro"'n~lza=tl:.:o.::n_ _ _ _ij
: .... 1---'--
Good synchronization Fig. 16-10
Circuit Notes The data separator is intended for use with 8" flexible diskettes with IBM 3870 soft sectored format. The circuit delivers data and clock (B) and clock pulses (D). These two signals must be in such a sequence that the negative edge of the clock pulse is at the middle of a data cell. Unseparated data (A) from the floppy unit is shaped with one shot Nl. Trimmer PI should be adjusted so that pulses (B) are I I's wide. This signal synchronizes PLL N2 with a free ruffi1ing frequency adjusted to 500 kHz. The output of the PLL is 90 out of phase with its input. D-type flip-flop N3 is connected as a divider by two and changes state at each positive edge of (C). N4, connected as a shift register, looks for four consecutive missing pulses. When this happens, the circuit is resynchroni2ed with (E) so that the negative edge of (D) is in the middle of a data cell.
122
17
Converters
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Voltage-to-Pulse Duration Converter Voltage-to-Current Converters TTL-to-MOS Logic Converter TTL Square Wave-to-Triangle Converter A Regulated DC-to-DC Converter Capacitance to Pulse Width Converter Current-to-Voltage Converter with Grounded Bias and Sensor Triangle-to-Sine Converters Precision Peak-to-Peak AC-DC Converter Photodiode Current-to-Voltage Converter Self Oscillating Flyback Converter RMS-to-DC Converter 100 MHz Converter Precision Voltage-to-Frequency Converter Bipolar DC-DC Converter Requires No Inductor
123
VOLTAGE-TO-PULSE DURATION CONVERTER

0R'lIfT
ADJUST,
~61<
v...
YRf
"M<
2.61<
2J1- VCC
,,47"
"Y
10,.,
OR 8 n. TUt
PVt-U GEHERATOR
a. ()Cl(
f'
,.';'-
V"'--15V
....... '" ,.,

YOUT FOR V1N-O YOUT FOR VaH- V,
vI:
I ,
h
7
...
r
c,
11.
21-
,,..
NOTES:
All (8&1StOf values In ohma V1N is limited 10 2 dIOd6 drop. Wlthin Ql'Ot.oo Of below 110::.
VOUT
FOR
V1N '12 \12 "'1
SIGNETICS
Fig. 17-1.
Circuit Notes Voltage levels can be converted to pulse durations by combining an op amp and a timer !C. Accuracies to better than 1% can be obtained with this circuit (a), and the output signals (b) still retain the original frequency, independent of the input voltage.
VOLTAGE-TO-CURRENT CONVERTERS
A.
n,
AS
A,
A,
A.
R3
VIN 'A 2
NOTES:
R2
AI
Circuit Notes A simple voltage-to-current converter is shown in the figure. The current out is lOUT or VJN/R. For negative currents, a pnp can be used and, for better accuracy, a Darlington pair can be substituted for the transistor. With careful design, this circuit can be used to control currents of many amps. Unity gain compensation is necessary.
IOUT---
A5' R l
SIGNETICS
Fig. 17-2
124
TTL-TO-MOSLOGIC CONVERTER
:::::tJo-o- .
VREF 0- (~ 1.4V OC)
v0
'IOkO
~
I4LM3
0
-1211
Fig. 17-3
- 12V OC -::
SIGNETICS
TC(I8geOS
TTL SQUARE WAVE-TO-TRIANGLE CONVERTER
",
Fig. 17-4
Circuit Notes This fixed frequency triangular wavefonn generator driven by a TTL square wave generates typically 16-Vp-p triangles at frequencies up to several MRz. It uses only one NAND open collector gate, or one open collector inverter as a fast integrator with gain. Careful successive adjustments of R and PI are needed. When correct adjustments are reached, output amplitude and linearity are largely independent of the value of VB' from a minimum of 18 Vup to 35 V. The value of C shown is for 100 kHz; at higher frequencies, it must be reduced in proportion.
A REGULATED DC-TO-DC CONVERTER

., v
R,
16
RSET
Cl ~P 470 F*, ,
JOOKn
,Kll:
R,
lOOK
!l
G(14 L161
10Kn
R,
300K
13
.... 0, -,.....2N440J
FIg. 17-5
l,
2mH
,
":'
5601< 11
D, ..
lN914
-.}
$ILlCONIX
-12V@5mA
125
CAPACITANCE TO PULSE WIDTH CONVERTER
r I r"l ...J L..J L

TIlOR
CMOS (OPERATING ON +5V)
TH-2:[CMA.X(pF)][l!'5 / pF] h2: 10 CMAX (1~/pF)
DI
-1H*.....---1,-...,GAIN ADJ
RI
5k +5V
">-,--,__ OUTPUT
li<S/pF
R5 4.7k.J
Fig. 17-6
R4 lOk
03 t
':'
D2'
lO"Ft
-i:
PW = (R2 +R3) {Cl
(Rl ~ R4) , INPUT CAPACITANCE OF
LT101115 .. SpF. THIS 15 AN OFFSET TERM tTHESE COMPONENTS MAY BE ELIMINATED IF NEGATIVE SUPPLY IS AVAILABLE (-lV TO -15V). TYPICAL 2 SECTIONS OF 365pF VARIABLE CAPACITOR WHEN USED AS SHAFT ANGLE INDICATION
CURRENT-TO-VOLTAGE CONVERTER WITH GROUNDED BIAS AND SENSOR
'.
lo'n
-=- BIAS Ve
~
ANALOG DEVICES. INC.
FIg. 17-7
126
TRIANGLE-TO-SINE CONVERTERS
~12V
..
"
,,'
2.21(
AMl'l!TVDE
ADJUST
SQUARE WAVE
HIIANGLi
WAVE
DC lEV!l
A.DJUST
"""'" ..IL
10 " 3Rl,cl
AN~
OUTPUT
'M
10Cl1 1%
SINE WAVE OVTPUT
ru
Fig. 17-8
SIGNETICS
Circuit Notes Conversion of triangle wave shapes to sinusoids is usually accomplished by dioderesistor shaping networks, which accurately reconstruct the sine wave segment by segment. Two simpler and less costly methods may be used to shape the triangle waveform of the 566 into a sinusoid with less than 2% distortion. The non-linear IDSVDS transfer characteristic of a P-channel junction FET is used to shape the triangle waveform. The amplitude of the triangle waveform is critical and must be carefully adjusted to achieve a low distortion sinusoidal output. Naturally. where additional waveform accuracy is needed, the diode-resistor shaping scheme can be applied to the 566 with excellent results since it has very good output amplitude stability when operated from a regulated supply.
PRECISION PEAK-TO-PEAK AC-OC CONVERTER
" '" ()---jlt-I
--i"'~----1~~I--fr----<o DC
DO'
CONVENTIONAL
VOLTAGE DOUBL ER
Circuit Notes Using a CA3140 BiMOS op amp and a single positive supply converts a conventional voltage doubler with two precision diodes into a precision peak-to-peak ac-to-dc voltage converter having wide dynamic range and wide bandwidth.
DC P-P OUTPUT
01
IN"II"I8
CA~I"IO
4
001 ",F
AC IN
G--l
t---+-"i
IN"II"I8
,.
GENERAL ELECTRIC/RCA
'"
,.
All RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS
Fig. 17-9
Reprinted With permIssion from ElectrOniC DeSign. VOI 25. No 24 copyright Hayden Publishing Co. Inc '977'
127
PHOTO DIODE CURRENT-TO-VOLTAGE CONVERTER
'.
100 oF"
"
OUT'I~RI
" "
,
,.IF DIODEC'IRAENT (I 1,10 nA

AND R,o!OOM,THEN
f>HOroOIOD 3
}-.---Q E.OUT~IO.IO-"'I 100.,0"

"I VOLT
Fig. 17-10
56pf
100 I(
ALL
RESISTANCE vALUES ARE iN OH"'''
GENERAL ELECTRIC IReA
Circuit Notes
The circuit uses three CA3130 BiMOS op amps in an application sensitive to subpicoampere input currents. The circuit provides a ground-referenced output voltage proportional to input current flowing through the photodiode.
SELF OSCILLATING FLYBACK CONVERTER
+3TO+16V
D,
lN4148
,oon
Z,-VZ<60V
Circuit Notes Low-power converter uses the core characteristics to determine frequency. With the transformer shown, operating frequency is 250 kHz. Diode D1 prevents negative spikes from occurring at the MOSFET gate, the 100 ohm resistor is a parasitic suppressor, and Zl serves as a dissipative voltage regulator for the output and also clips the drain voltage to a level below the rated power FET breakdown voltage.
TRANSFORMER: INDIANA-GENERAL CORE F626.12Q2 26 TURNS NO. 28 WIRE TAIFILAR WOUND
SILlCONIX, INC.
Fig. 17-11
128
RMS-TO-DC CONVERTER
+5V
F
VRI2 12
'f
V.
16
-F;~~48nF I lorlOOkHz
V+ 18
SE55'"
C, 17
11 RT
FEEDBACK 15
ose
SYNC DEMOOIN
,.
6
4
18.
A,
7 VDEMOO 5 DEMODOUT
-6 v
ACSIGNAl
'"'"
1
t
LDW-PASS
+IN
3
NETWORk
IN
DC OUTPUT
NOTE: 1 The DC output al Pin 1 vanas linearly with the RMS Input at Pin 4 2 eT IS tw(;laked until the sync signal IS In phase with the AC signal
SIGNETICS
FIg. 17-12
Circuit Notes
An ae voltmeter may be easily constructed. Simplicity of the circuit and low component count make it particularly attractive. The demodulator output is a full-wave rectified signal from the ac input at Pin 4. The de component on the rectified signal at Pin 5 varies linearity with the rms input at Pin 4 and thus provides an accurate rms-to-dc conversion at the output of the filter (Pin 1). eT is a variable capacitor that is tweaked until~ the oscillator signal to the sync input of the demodulator is in phase with the ac signal at Pin 4.
129
100 MHz CONVERTER
'" o---t---'r'V''N'''-_t--._ _ _ _ _ _-I-...J
'"
u
-
---,
c
"1YPAS~
-=-
I I
I
,
lM171 I
------'
'-------
'"'
Fig. 17-13
Circuit Notes
The 2N4416 JFET will provide noise figures of less than 3 dB and power gain of greater than 20 dB. The ]FET's outstanding low crossmodulation and low intermodulation distortion provides an ideal characteristic for an input stage. The output feeds into an LMl71 used as a balanced mixer. This configuration greatly reduces local oscillator radiation both into the antenna and into the if strip and also reduces if signal feedthrough.
130
PRECISION VOLTAGE-TO-FREQUENCY CONVERTER
Rt
10 k 10"1<, 10 k 10%" 6.8 k
1%"
6
2
LM331
.5
3 7
20k
2k.
GAIN ADJUST
CF
470 pF
2.2 k
O.OOII'F
100k100/0
~
S
Use stable components wIth low temperature coefficients. See Typical Applications section This resistor can be 5 kO or 10 k!l for Vs '" 8 V to 22 V, but must be 10 kO '" 4.5 V 10 8 V . Use low offset voltage and low offset current op amps for AI: recommended types LF411A or LFSSS.
lN4002
Vs
OPTIONAL OFFSET ADJUST 20kT01M
.......>M~.'M V
Ik
Fig. 17-14
Circuit Notes In this circuit, integration is performed by using a conventional operational amplifier
and feedback capacitor, CF. When the integrator's output crosses the nominal threshold level at pin 6 of the LM131, the timing cycle is initiated. The average current fed into the op amp's summing point (pin 2) is i x (1.1 ~Ct) x f which is perfectly balanced with - VIN/R1N In this circuit, the voltage offset of the LM131 input comparator does not affect the offset or accuracy of the V-to-F converter as it does in the stand-alone V-to-F converter, nor does theLM131 bias current or offset current. Instead, the offset voltage and offset current of the operational amplifier are the only limits on how small the signal can be accurately converted.
131
f(l
BIPOLAR DC-DC CONVERTER REQUIRES NO INDUCTOR
+24VdC---'t------------------------------------C--------------,.------~
R,
''''
C,
D,
lN914
R4
R,
-l+------'vv lkn
R,
10 kS1
lkn
Q, VPOBD8
D.
Q,
.
D,
12 V
lO }.IF
25 V
+V
C3 I',QOOPF
2NEi660
D, ~~
r- 25 10O.' V
C,
R, 100kll
R, 22 kS1
D,
c,
1,000 pF
R,
'16
MC14502
Q,
r:
B
c.~
10O.'
25V
V
~"'>oll
U1_f DJ RJ lN914 10 kn
2N6660
D,
I
c.
1,000 pF
Fig. 17-15
Circuit Notes
Inverters VIa and VIb form a 20-kiIohertz oscillator whose square wave output-further shaped by D2, R4, and R5 and by D3, R6, and R7--drives power field-effect transistors Q2 and Q3. The p-channel and n-cha.nnel FETs conduct alternately, in a pushpull configuration. When Q2 conducts, the positive charge on Cout forces diode D4 to conduct as well, which produces a positive voltage, determined by zener diode D5, at terminal A. Similarly, when Q3. in its turn conducts. the negative charge on Cout forces D7 to do so as well. A negative voltage. therefore. develops at terminal B. whose level is set by D6.
18 Counters
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. 8-Digit Up/Down Counter Ring Counter with Variable Timing 20 kHz Ring Counter Binary Counter 100 MHz Frequency. Period Counter Analog Counter Circuit Attendance Counter 10 MHz Universal Counter
133
a-DIGIT UP/DOWN COUNTER

COMIoION-AHOOl
UOC/O/
COUNT INPUT
'-' , , " "
LEO 0"'''''
'--OC/C/O
OIGITI
, ,,-, , I "
CAft.l!y OUT
BeD OUTPUTS 2$-21
of
ffO.GITI
4.7 leM 2f
CIoIIIAy,.OAIIIOW
HIGH ORDER 0lGIT5
~'i'.
BeD OUTPUTS
IEOMINTI
LOW
OAO~R
\
DIGITS
V~OWN .fJ
r-..r-
---1!!.o. :nn
==:
7'17
SlCMEN1'$
10
14
~~.~~H~-"""-L___ J t',~
20
R=-
Ur.,~~~":,,.,::,Ll
1211
b-.-....,.i---H'ICM 24f--V"
,,1-. 1-= 7
U
C04011
_1..- HIGH OAal!"
....,..v
21(11
r- 10
"'*"
1IH'I-t-_...J 21,22
LOW CIIIO!A
'" Q,j---4.M,---'I"[ CO~~J IOftII
"P" TRANI'ITOIII
INTERSIL
Fig. 18-1
Circuit Notes This circuit shows how to cascade counters and retain correct leading zero blanking. The NAND gate detects whether a digit is active since one of the two segments a or b is active on any unblanked number. The flip flop is clocked by the least significant digit of the high order counter, and if this digit is not blanked, the Q output of the flip flop goes high and turns on the npn transistor. thereby inhibiting leading zero blanking on the low order counter.
RING COUNTER WITH VARIABLE TIMING
+2BV~-----~-~----~-----r-~trn
4.7K
2N!58'~ SW2 ~1..
SET
".71(
.01
"71( 4.7K
-0-1:
4.7K
.001
+2411
2ZM
0''-'=:9
IN4009 2.2K
It
12.2 ,
'2.Z ,
22
K
"
2.2 fN81
K
f~81
."
2.21<
Circuit Notes Shift pulses are generated by the unijunction transistors. The intervals between pulses are controlled by eT and RT' A different RT can be selected for each stage of the counter as shown.
' - '01
' - "',
~.2
"',
~.2
.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
RTI
"Rn
Rn
1N4009
IN4009
1N4009
Fig. 18-2
134
20 kHz RING COUNTER

+20'0'
L~)(
'OK
4.71<.
'~K
10K 4.71<.
SET
.)
.00Z
PUSHBuTTON
(
FIRST
_) .3/1181
THRU
3Ne~
+20'0'
lOOK
.( J
IN4Q09
Dozt
TO SUCCEED!NG STAGES
STAGE
Fig. 18-3
1N4009
TRIGGER UNE
GENERAL ELECTRIC
"''':~~
-6V
SHIFT PULSE
~-IOIo'S
RESET PULSE,. 100.... 5
Circuit Notes
The shift pulse turns off the conducting scs by reverse biasing the cathode gate. The charge stored on the coupling capacitor then triggers the next stage. An excessively long shift pulse charges up all the capadtors, turning off all stages. Grounding an anode gate will "set" that stage.
BINARY COUNTER
, , ,
IK I
,
IN4009 .....
I ,
+12'0'
I I
.N4009
,
I
3N81
.02
JlJ
INPUT
--1
SQUARE WAvE
"' -Yr\: P
INPUT
,
I
: ---il
I
IN4009
~:
I
I
ZZK
I I 10KI
'":Q ~
If--.001 2.2K
:~~ , , ,
I ,
I IN4009
ZZK
~,
'";rrJ
.~
2.2K
';"4
l
I I
IN4009
MAY BE
OMiTTEO ON LAST
---'
STAGE
,
IN4009
I
ZZK
22K
2.2K
I ,
Rc IK
GENERAL ELECTRIC
,
I
STAGE
.2
I , I , ,
Rc
"
Fig. 18-4
Circuit Notes Stages are triggered by the positive going edge. The scs is turned on at the cathode gate; turned off at the anode gate. The anode-to-cathode IN4009 suppresses positive transients while the scs is recovering. The input stage generates fast positive edges to trigger the counter.
1.35
100 MHz FREQUENCY, PERIOD COUNTER

VDD
M'
C~
ICI.11CIO
.. MS
0,,<.
DIODES 1101914
VDD
21012222.
,.. n
,.. : [
FUNCTION SWITCH 0_(101 fREO CLOSED pERrOO
VDD'~r-'- ,.....
J..
_
":' -A15fT
'NPUT~
INTERSIL
Fig. 18-5
Circuit Notes
The figure shows the use of a CD4016 analog multiplex to multiplex the digital outputs back to the FUNCTION input. Since the CD40l6 is a digitally controlled analog transmission gate, no level shifting of the digit output is required. The CD4051's or CD4052's could also be used to select the proper inputs for the multiplexed input on the ICM7226 from 2 or 3 bit digital inputs. These analog multiplexers may also be used in systems in which the mode of operation is controlled by a microprocessor rather than directly from front panel switches. TIL multiplexers such as the 74LS153 or 74LS251 may also be used, but some additional circuitry will be required to convert the digit output to TIL compatible logic levels.
136
ANALOG COUNTER CIRCUIT
," I
I
3
--0-
'0'
L--
....... ~
I...... ~
--- -- 1--
l.,J-1--"
I...... ~
},oo,
I ... 1""".'"
ISYlOIVj
-- --- --
---.-f--- -- },,"
HORIZONTAL - 2O(ImSIDIV
,"",
VOVT V~EF
INTERSIL
Fig. 18-6
Circuit Notes
A straightforward circuit using a LM311 for the level detector and a CMOS analog gate to discharge the capacitor is shown. An important property of this type of counter is the ease with which the count can be changed; it is only necessary to change the voltage at which the comparator trips. A low cost A-D converter can also be designed using the same principle since the digital count between reset periods is directly proportional to the analog voltage used as a reference for the comparator. A considerable amount of hysteresis is used in the comparator. This ensures that the capacitor is completely discharged during the reset period. In a more sophisticated circuit, a dual comparator "window detector" could be used, the lower trip point is set close to ground to ensure complete discharge. The upper trip point could then be adjusted independently to determine the pulse count.
137
ATTENDANCE COUNTER
.,
18888
V TO "24V DC
LCD
20Kn
/'
V "'''
B.fC.
DSC,
w
'is
BP
A, -
l2.788kHz CRYSTAL
ICM7249
OSCo
lID'
cS
Vss
Co C, C. Cl
DT
H~L:;
INTERSIL
I
DISPLAY TEST
~Fig. 18-7
Clrcuil Notes
The display shows each increment. By using mode 2, external debouncing of the gate switch is unnecessary, provided the switch bounce is less than 35ms. The 3 V lithium battery can be replaced without disturbing operation if a suitable capacitor is connected in parallel with it. The display should be disconnected, if possible, during the procedure to minimize current drain. The capacitor should be large enough to store charge for the amount of time needed to physically replace the battery(t = Veil). A 100 I'F capacitor initially charged to 3 V will supply a current of 1. 0 I'A for 50 seconds before its voltage drops to 2.5 V, which is the minimum operating voltage for the ICM7249. Before the battery is removed, the capacitor should be placed in parallel, across the V DD and GND terminals. After the battery is replaced, the capacitor can be removed and the display reconnected.
138
10 MHz UNIVERSAL COUNTER
, ..0
...
,,.,.s
J
(Xl
'''''UT A
""
tNP'UT
IfOiGiTl
I~
IC()t,WON CATHOO( LEO DISPLAY
,--_+--1 '''' __+-1'''' __-<I~''__-J.I'''' ___.... 1,._._ ........ 1_',__.... 1_,

INTERSIL
BBBBBBBB l~ _----'1'-.'__ "'_'

Circuit Notes
~~~_'''-, ~b:
Fig. 18-8
The ICM7216A or B can be used as a minimum component complete Universal Counter. This circuit can use input frequencies up to 10 MRz at INPUT A and 2 MHz at INPUT B. If the signal at INPUT A has a very low duty cycle it may be necessary to use a 74121 monostable multivibrator or similar circuit to stretch the input pulse width to be able to guarantee that it is at least 50 ns in duration.
139
19
Crystal Oscillators
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Varactor-Tuned 10 MHz Ceramic Resonator Oscillator 10 MHz Crystal-Controlled Oscillator Low Power, 5V Driven, Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TXCO) Crystal-ControlledLO for SSB Transmitter Crystal Oscillator Crystal Controlled Signal Source 1 MHz FET Crystal Oscillator Pierce Crystal Oscillator lC-Compatible Crystal Oscillator Crystal Oscillator Provides Low Noise Low-Frequency Crystal Osci11ator-lO kHz-150 kHz Overtone Crystal Oscillator Colpitts Oscillator Crystal-Controlled Oscillator High-Frequency Crystal Osci11ator Crystal-Controlled Oscillator Operates from One Mercury Cell High-Frequency Signal Generator Crystal Tester Crystal Stabilized lC Timer can Provide Subharmonic Frequencies
140
VARACTOR-TUNED 10 MHz CERAMIC RESONATOR OSCILLATOR

I~
JOV
-VARACTOR
TUNING VOLTAGE"
0.01
~
0.01
UJM
27j1H
2.2'
"
RF
our
JJO.
7-
J'
0.01
+"
1'00
2N3-90.
100'
100.
CfUMIC
RESONATOR
107lolH.
'----+---1 MVI09
"
2200
2200
'"
6 TURNS
J TURNS
HAM RADIO
Fig. 19'1
Circuit Notes The FET input amplifier has fixed bias with source feedback. This provides a very high input impedance with very low capacitance. The FET amplifier drives an emitter follower which, in spite of the fact that it has a low output impedance, feeds a transformer with a 3:1 turns ratio for a nine-fold impedance reduction. The result is an impedance at the ceramic resonator of a few ohms masimum. The varactor-tuned ceramic resonator oscillator has a significant frequency-temperature coefficient. The tuning range of the vea is approximately 232 kHz, with a temperature coefficient of-350 Hz per degree centigrade. When using this circuit as a vea, the entire 232 kHz range cannot be used because some of the tuning range must be sacrificed for the temperature dependence. If the required tuning range were 200 kHz, leaving 32 kHz for temperature variation, the resulting temperature variation would be more than 90 0 e.
10 MHz CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
-28 V
Circuit Notes This xtal oscillator is a FET equivalent of a vacuum tube tuned to plate-tuoed grid xtal oscillator. Feedback is via the drain to gate capacitance.
120pF
""-. .1:" ol"Fd lOMH,D
I-=-CRYS1AL~
b1
-=-
Parts list
Fig. 19-2
L1 - 18 turns #22 enameled wire on micrometats T506 torroid core. 1.0/lH.
0:<
SILlCONIX INC.
141
LOW POWER, 5 V DRIVEN, TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR (TXCO)

+5V
'h mOll
>'~=====-, OSCILLATOR SUPPLY

STABILlZATlON
+5V
4.3k
3.4k"
5.'
m009 ,5V
~
Rn
3.2K
~
2.16k'
,.'
4,2M'
+5V
TEMPEMTlJRE
COMPENSATION GENERATOR
35MHz
20k XTAL
100k
100n
6.25k
R"
,.'
'h LTlO1J,;>~~y"O~k-r~D~~
____~__-{
OSCILLATOR
MV-109 560k
YSI 44201
4.22M"
___ +
t-_3 5MHl OUTPUT
Q,03ppmloC.O'C-70'C
680n
'1% FILM 3.5MHz XTAL =AT CUT ~35'20'
MOUNT RT NEAR XTAl

3mA POWER DAAIN tTHERMISTOR-AMPLIFIERVARACTOR NETWORK GENERATES A TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT OPPOSITE THE CRYSTAL TO MINIMIZE OvERALL I
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORP,
Fig, 19-3
CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED LOCAL OSCILLATOR FOR SSB TRANSMITTER
asc.
+12V
REG
100 15 k
5.tMHz c:JYl
2N3904
Ql
56 56
:h
56 560
01
5.6k 60
FREQ
f-<> TO AMP
OR MIXER
AOJ
QST
Fig, 19-4
Circuit Notes This oscillator may contain several switched crystals to provide channelized operation, A buffer amplifier may be added. if desired,
142
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
V' ",5V
Circuit Notes
OUT
This circuit uses an LTI011 comparator biased in its linear mode and a crystal to establish its resonant frequency. This circuit can achieve a few hundred kHz, temperature independent clock frequency with nearly 50% duty cycle.
Fig. 19-5
V-==-5V
CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED 1>IGNAL SOURCE
Fig. 19-6
~o.Ot
'"
ZN2222
'"
;;::
OST
2.h
0
001
".
'00 LEVEL
0.01
"
~ J2 ! OUTPUT
Circuit Notes
This general purpose signal source serves very well in signal-tracing applications. The output level is variable to more than 1 Vrms into a 50 [) load. Almost any crystal in the 1 to 15 MHz range can be used. Ql forms a Colpitts oscillator with the output taken from the emitter. A capacitive voltage divider (across the 2.2 K emitter resistor) reduces the voltage applied to the buffer aroplifier, Q2. The buffer and emitterfollower, provides the low input impedance necessary to drive 50 [) loads.
143
1 MHz FET CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR

r--------)l~------~------------~---<~~
A/If TIfIM_CIf
I . - . ~_F
0.'
+0,1.5....
.J . .J ... H
CHOKE
.,.8I11A
$1(IIEIf MICA
C""'''CIT01f
,-.---":)11---+--11-- ~;;_ %AK'
."0_
'0'
.DISK
C.. PACITOR
..
~I.IIVDC
0.01
r-;;o~~T::_~KJ
Fig. 19-7
OSCILLATOR
1000
HAM RADIO
Circuit Notes
This stable oscillator circuit exhibits less thao 1 Hz frequency chaoge over a VDD range of 3-9 volts. Stability is attributed to the use of MOSFET devices aod the use of stable capacitors.
PIERCE CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
RFC
2.5 mHY
9V
100 kHz
XTAL
r-_ _ _~---I
2-30
pF
I MEl
22
.....---jr-I
.01
--<l0 Out
MPF 102
WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 19-8
Circuit Notes
The JFET Pierce oscillator is stable aod simple. It cao be the clock of a microprocessor, a digital timepiece or a calculator. With a probe at the output, it can be used as a precise injection oscillator for troubleshooting. Attach a small length of wire at the output and this circuit becomes a micropower transmitter.
144
IC-COMPATlBLE CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR

R1 560 R2 560
le = 7400, Etc.
On-Off
Control
0---+--1
b---o</> 1
'-------0<1>2
L-----~D~------~
WfLLfAM SHEETS
XT AL 2-10 M Hz
Fig. 19-9
Circuit Notes Resistors RI and R2 temperature-stabilize the NAND gates; they also ensure that the gates are in a linear region for starting. Capacitor Cl is a dc block; it must have less than Vio ohm impedance at the operating frequency. The crystal runs in a seriesresonant mode. Its series resistance must be low; AT-cut crystals for the 1- to lO-MHz range work well. The output waveshape has nearly a 50% duty cycle, with chip-limited rise times. The circuit starts well from 0 to 70C. CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR PROVIDES LOW NOISE
100
r----~---~~~--oI2V
10k
2N91S
O.oOI,uF
4 MHz
H..--+--lD
200mY/22.n.
Fig. 19-10
2.2k
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Circuit Notes
The oscillator delivers an output of high spectral purity without any substantial sacrifice of the usual stability of a crystal oscillator. The crystal in addition to determining the oscillator's frequency, is used also as a low-pass filter for the unwanted harmonics and as a bandpass filter for the sideband noise. The noise bandwidth is limited to less than 100 Hz. All higher harmonics are substantially suppressed-60 dB down for the third harmonic of the 4-MHz fundamental oscillator frequency.
145
LOW-FREQUENCY CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR-10 kHz to 150 kHz

r
I
Cl
,---111-1- - - i ) I - - - - - ,
r------------------+----~--o+,
TO
~"
VDC
HAM RADIO
L i_ _ _ _ _
~'_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_o 0
,om
Fig. 19-11
Circuit Notes
Cl in series with the crystal may be used to adjust the oscillator output frequency. Value may range between 20 pF and 0.01 I'F. or may be a trimmer capacitor and will approximately equal the crystal load capacitance. X values are approximate and can vary for most circuits and frequencies; this is also true for resistance values. Adequate power supply decoupling is required; local decoupling capacitors near the oscillator are recommended. All leads should be extremely short in high frequency circuits.
OVERTONE CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR

+ 12 VOLTS
'"
7- 25
,
r-----+----~---l
t------o
OUTPUT
LIS:
20-33 MHZ 2.4,.H {lIlLLCfI "606} ",,- 6011HZ .6S ... H '/>fILLER "5901 60-100111-12 .22 ... H (MILLER
.'8"1
HAM RADIO
Fig. 19-12
Circuit Notes This oscillator is designeMor overtone crystals in the 20-100 MRz range operating in the third and fifth mode. Operating frequency is determined by the tuned circuit.
146
COLPITTS OSCILLATOR
(-)
9VDC
(+)~
h
R1 27K
C4 56pF
I
Y1 c C2 82 pF R2 10K R3 470
0
OUTPUT
C1 75pF
C3
L1
1110PF
2.5mH
TAB BOOKS, INC.
Fig. 19-13
Circuit Notes
Bias for the pnp bipolar transistor is provided by resistor voltage divider network RlIR2. The collector of the oscillator transistor is kept at ac ground by capacitor C5, placed close to the transistor. Feedback is provided by capacitor voltage divider C2/C3.
CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR
v'
200tdl
l00krt
2.0kO
n..n. ~F/g.
v.
19-14
2OOkO
CRYSTAL
"=' SIGNETICS
f 100kHz
147
HIGH-FREQUENCY CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
100 MHl
I'
Rp
1/4
MC10l0'p
7~35PF~~
I
MC1Ql01
,15.uH
1/4 0)
Rp Rp
Rp
001 "F
t
-
~ MC1662
~~
Rp Rp
~'!4 MC1662
E
1/4 MC101Ql
r-------
200 MHz
1/4 MC-'662
Rp
~'/4
Rp
MC1662
1/4
MC10101
Rp typ;cal_STO SI to VEE or 50
Rp
to -2.0 Vdc
200 MHz Crystal Oscilliltor
L-_ _
.J!
PTA
PT 8
'-----
PT C
---,L_---'
Frequency Doubler Waveforms
L-
PTO
PT E
MOTOROLA. INC.
FIg. 19-15
148
HIGH-FREQUENCY CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR, Continued. Circuit Notes
A highspeed oscillator is possIble by combining an MECL 10 K crystal oscillator with an MECL III frequency doubler as shown. One section of the MCIOlOl is connected as a 100 MHz crystal oscillator with the crystal in series with the feedback loop. The LC tank circuit tunes the 100 MHz harmonic of the crystal and may be used to calibrate the circuit to the exact frequency. A second section of the MC10101 buffers the crystal oscillator and gives complementary 100 MHz signals. The frequency doubler consists of two MClOI01 gates as phase shifters and two MC1662 NOR gates. For a 50% duty cycle at the output, the delay to the true and complement 100 MHz signals should be 90. This may be built precisely with 2.5 ns delay lines for the 200 MHz output or approximated by the two MC10101 gates. The gates are easier to incorporate and cause only a slight skew in output signal duty cycle. The MC1662 gates combine the 4 phase 100 MHz signals as shown in Figure B. The outputs of the MC1662's are wire-OR connected to give the 200 MHz signal. MECL III gates are used because of the bandwidth required for 200 MHz signals. One of the remaining MC1662 gates is used as a VBB bias generator for the oscillator. By connecting the NOR output to the input, the circuit stays in the center of the logic swing or at VBB A O.OOlI'F capacitor ensures the VBB circuit does not oscillate.
CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR OPERATES FROM ONE MERCURY CELL
+
RI ZZ.
R.
"
...
R.
Cl 1.35V
R4 470
Q' -
T'JLF
R.
2N2't05
R7
15
OUT IVpPJU'"
FIg. 1916
Cl
I,..
RO
47
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Inexpensive crystal controlled oscillator operates from a 1.35volt source.
Circuit Notes The circuit is powered by a single 1.35 V mercury cell and provides a 1 V squarewave output. As shown, the crystal is a tuned circuit between transistors Ql and Q2, which are connected in the common-emitter configuration. Positive feedback provided by means of R permits oscillation. The signal at the collector of Q2 is 'squared by Q3, which switches between cutoff and saturation. R7 permits short-circuit-proof operation.
149
HIGH FREQUENCY SIGNAL GENERATOR
OSC
:00
BUFf
500,llH
+12V
15 k 2N3904 Q'
~O,'
O~
'00
MPF 102
~O.
5.6 k
56
$M
.li
SM
'00 560
02
ot;-;:h
R.
3.5
M:::H.:o'~~
S.
;}'4
MHz
lOOk
7.0?
MHzl..
= == = vT v2f Tv' Jv-
~Hz
1\0.1
500
O~RF
OUT
S M = SILVER MICA
QST
Fig. 19-17
Circuit Notes A tapped-coil Colpitts oscillator is used at Ql to provide four tuning ranges from 1.7 to 3.LMHz, 3.0 to 5.6 MHz, 5.0 to 12 MHz and 11.5 to 31 MHz. A Zener diode (D2) is used at Ql to lower the operating voltage of the oscillator. A small value capacitor is used at C5 to ensure light coupling to the tuned circuit. Q2 is a source-follower buffer stage. It helps to isolate the oscillator from the generator-output load. The source of Q2 is broadly tuned by means of RFC1. Energy from Q2 is routed to a fed-back, broadband class-A amplifier. A 2 dB attenuator is used at the output of T1 to provide a 50 ohm tennination for Q3 and to set the generator-output impedance at 50 ohms. C16, C17 and RFC2 form a brute-forceRF decoupling network to keep the generator energy from radiating outside the box on the 12 V supply.
150
CRYSTAL TESTER
l
QI 2""~$"'~
0
Circuit Notes
BI qy
11
LE.D I
SI
R2
IOK
Oil
1+
C '"
C3
C'+ SbDll.
. DO I
R3
'''''''1'18
C2
lOOp!'
RI If'(,
IH"I5
02 .
2N3563
TEST CLIPS
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
OR
GE'"
Fig. 19-18
Transistor Ql, a 2N3563, and its associated components form an oscillator circuit that will oscillate if, and only if, a good crystal is connected to the test clips. The output from the oscillator is then rectified by the two lN4148 diodes and filtered by Cl, a .OlI'F capacitor. The positive voltage developed across the capacitor is applied to the base of Q2, another 2N3563, causing it to conduct. When that happens, current flows through LED1, causing it to glow. Since only a good crystal will oscillate, a glowing LED indicates that the crystal is indeed OK. The circuit is powered by a standard nine-volt transistor,radio battery and the SPST pushbutton power-switch is included to prolong battery life.
CRYSTAL-STABILIZED IC TIMER CAN PROVIDE SUBHARMONIC FREQUENCIES
,"
"
.
I
UTPUT
r1 " ." rl
"<0
.'
"".w.]-k: I
L1
,
!/KAfSI1OLO 100 KH,
COMPARATOR
;D~
,----COMPARATOR
3.12~1~
"co
"'
,
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
'"',
"
~RIGGER
s\,
'1
Fig. 19-19
The trimmer across the crystal can finely tune the circuit's oscillating frequency
151
20 Current Meters
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section.
Anuneter with Six Decade Range Current Sensing in Supply Rails Pico Ammeter Electrometer Amplifier with Overload Protection Guarded Input Picoammeter Circuit Ammeter with Six Decade Range Picoammeter Circuit
152
AMMETER WITH SIX DECADE RANGE

,~r--'~--'r-.-,;v~
10.
. . '5V
A,
2.
1.2k 100pA
RANGE
CUHRE.NT INPUT
5490
,eA
LT 1004C-12
549r! 549p.
lO~A
01 O? 03, Q4 ReA CA3146 TRANSISTOR ARRAY l;AlIBRATION ADJUST Rl rOR FULL SCALE
DEFLECTION WITH l"A INPUT CURRENT
100nA
549p.
'"A
549r~
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY
lO~A
5490
IO(}~A
Fig. 20-1
Circuit Notes The Ammeter measures currents from 100 pA to 100 pA without the use of expensive high value resistors. Accuracy at 100 pA is limited by the offset voltage between Ql and Q2 and. at 100 pA. by the inverting bias current of the LTl008.
CURRENT SENSING IN SUPPLY RAILS
PO$ITIVE OR..c;;::;:' NEGATIVE RAIL-
"'-1~""'''''''-r
Circuit Notes
The LTC1043 can sense current through a shunt in either of its supply rails. This capability has wide application in battery and solar-powered systems. If the ground-referred voltage output is unloaded by an amplifier. the shunt can operate with very little voltage drop across it, minimizing losses.
Fig. 20-2
153
Pica AMMETER
+15V
R,
, MD
CR:;~~_ _~_C_R2_': i. . J~
INTERtc
DIODES
t---------I~/
3
20 kO
.i:-
IC""CO ./>-5-.....
6~~I-VO-=-_-,IN-.. 1O~~:UT
-X
-1 VOLTlpA
'l>---'lfV---'
4
"I
Fig. 20-3
INTERSIL
-15V
Circuit Notes
Care must be taken to eliminate any stray currents from flowing into the current summing node. This can be accomplished by forcing all points surrounding the input to the same potential as the input. In this case the potential of the input is at virtual ground, or av. Therefore, the case of the device is grounded to intercept any stray leakage currents that may otherwise exist between the 15 V input terminals and the inverting input summing junctions. Feedback capacitance should be kept to a minimum in order to maximize the response time of the circuit to step function input currents . .The time constant of the circuit is approximately the produce of the feedback capacitance Clb times the feedback resistor %. For instance, the time constant of the circuit is 1 sec if Clb ~ IpF. Thus, it takes approximately 5 sec (5 time constants) for the circuit to stabilize to within 1% of its final output voltage after a step function of input current has been -applied. Clb of less than 0.2 to 0.3 pF can be achieved with proper circuit layout.
154
ELECTROMETER AMPLIFIER WITH OVERLOAD PROTECTION
10 pF
(Glass)
10.0k
+1SV
lM108A
2
10.0k
lG
OffsetControl Voltage (OAC Output)
3
+ISV
10.0k
Signal Input
1k
lM
0.1
-1SV
4.99k
Preamplifier Signal Output
OVerload Protection
~O.,
-1SV
Note: Resistances are in Ohms and Capacitances are in Microfarads. Unless Otherwise Noted.
NASA TECH BRIEFS
Fig. 20-4
Circuit Notes
The preamplifier is protected from excessive input signals of either polarity by the 2N5909 junction field-effect transistor. A nulling circuit makes it possible to set the preamplifier output voltage to zero at a fixed low level (up to 1O-8A) of the input current. (This level is called the standing current and corresponds to the zero-signal level of the instrumentation.) The opposing (offset) current is generated in the 109 feedback resistor to buck the standing current. Different current ranges are reached by feeding the preamplifier output to low and high gain amplifier chains. To reduce noise, each chain includes a 1.5 Hz corner active filter.
155
GUARDED INPUT PICOAMMETER CIRCUIT
+ 15v
Mn r-------"'N
lr--------,1I
><5v
1
I
PICOAMMETER CIRCUIT
99 Kfi
5 6 KO
500n
GE/ACA
9.1 Kg
- 15"
~ 500-0'500~A
Fig. 20-5
Circuit Notes
The circuit utilizes CA3l60 and CA3140 BiMOS op amps to provide a full-scale meter deflection of 3 pA. The CA3140 serves as an X100 gain stage to provide the required plus and minus output swing for the meter and feedback network. Terminals 2 and 4 of the CA3160 are at ground potential, thus its input is operated in the "guarded mode."
AMMETER WiTH SIX DECADE RANGE

r.....,-..,--..,-w~ -15V
."
o 1,.F
15V
10k 10k
A. 2k
121
IOOpA RANGE
-lnA
549~~
549' ,
ai, a2. a3, Q4, ReA CA3146 TRANSISTOR ARRAY CALIBRATION ADJUST RI FOR FULL SCALE DEFLECTION WlTH 11'A INPUT CURRENT
7
549!!
549'!
549!!
1O~A
549!!
Circuit Notes
100~A
7
Fig. 20-6
The Ammeter measures currents from 100 pA to 100 p.A without the use of expensive high value resistors. Accuracy at 100 p.A is limited by the offset voltage between Ql and Q2 and, at 100 pA, by the inverting bias current of the LTl008.
156
PICOAMMETER CIRCUIT
1"0 KM VICTOREEN
'"
LlTI-IIUM
"
CELL
j: -=-
, M
'"
,"
, 'n
,-
, M
430n
p,
Lt=j===~
:is
pA
1.S pA
1.2 K
M" '''"
Fig. 20-7
Circuit Notes The circuit uses the exceptionally low input current (O.lpA) of the CA3420 BiMOS op amp. With only a single 10 megohm resistor. the circuit covers the range from 50 pA maximum to a full-scale sensitivity of 1.5 pA. Using an additional CA3420. a lowresistance center tap is obtained from a single 3-volt lithium battery.
157
21 Demodulators
The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Narrow Band FM Demodulator with Carner Detect Stereo Demodulator AM Demodulator FM Demodulator
,.., 1 he sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694.
158
NARROW. BAND FM DEMODULA TOR WITH CARRIER DETECT
Circuit Notes
'M
xA 11$
O~M()O
DH,oou,"HD
OUTPU'
01.,
l~
10<
For FM demodulation applications where the bandwidth is less than 10% of the carrier frequency, an XR0567 can be used to detect the presence of the carrier signal. The output of the XR-567 is used to turn off the FM demodulator when no carrier is present, thus acting as a squelch. 1n the circuit shown, an XR-215 FM demodulator is used because of its wide dynamic range, high signal/noise ratio and low distortion. The XR-567 will detect the presence of a carrier at frequencies up to 500 kHz.
"R
~,
"
Fig. 21-1
EXAR
STEREO DEMODULATOR
"m,",,,'"
'"'"""p.J
00.
T""'",
U,/I
Circuit Notes
r-~~,,~~,,==~,,--b,,--t--h
l ... 1l10
This circuit uses a single IC LM1310 to provide left and right outputs from a composite MPX stereo signal. Oscillator adjust R1 is set for 76 kHz (19 kHz at pin 10). Cl should be a silver mica or NPO ceramic capacitor.
IIOU",Oj
Fig. 21-2
159
AM DEMODULATOR
+12V
3_91<
3.91C
..... C ... RRIIERI8 AMPLIFIED AND
LlMInO HERE
11f--- '
"
HIGH
FREQUENCY
AMPl.If"IER AND LlMIT1:.R
,
'" "
':-
g
'"
'"
600
LT
-
I ,
"
MC I
I ,
. ,
"
'r-
y'
~
NOTE,
1
,0
f'
ohms
,
~
"
~
6_8K
rOE-EMPHASIS
~IL\
_goo
90'
VOUT
PHASE ANGLE
All reSistor yalues are
Fig. 21-3
SIGNETICS
Circuit Notes Amplifying and limiting of the AM carrier is accomplished by the if gain block providing 55 dB of gain or higher with a limiting of 40 fJ-V. The limited carrier is then applied to the detector at the carrier ports to provide the desired switching function. The signal is then demodulated by the synchronous AM demodulator (1496) where the carrier frequency is attentuated due to the balanced nature of the device. Care must be taken not to overdrive the signal input so that distortion does not appear in the recorded audio. Maximum conversion gain is reached when the carrier signals are in phase as indicated by the phase-gain relationship. Output filtering is also necessary to remove high frequency sum components of the carrier from L'Ie audio signal.
160
FM DEMODULATOR
LOCI( RANGE AOJUSTMENT O.OI"F
q,
LOOP fiLTER
FM INPUT
O."'.. f
11(
11
11
le IMH1 I ... ' lkHI

BIAS FILTER
o---t
~OljjF
".
"r---<;--~
ANALOG OUT
U.HI
"
POST DETECTION FIlT(R
fREQuENCY SET CAP
"
I.... IV
1
INPUT f c = IMHI f"" nHI
1, lOCK RANGE ADJUSTMENT
O.Ol.uf
~ LOOP FILTER
00l"f
o-.t
1.47,..;;
SIGNETICS
.IAS flL TIER
0 l.uf
" , ,
.. ... "
"
"
~
h
ANALOG OUT
Fig. 21-4
T~J=~::
.~
nHI
o,'~~
I'OST DETECTION FILTHI
"
~O.l,.F
'0 ~ 5MHI
fREOUENCY SET CAP
Circuit Notes
The NE564 is used as an FM demodulator. The connections for operation at 5 V and 12 V are shown in Figures 21-4A and 21-4B. The input signal is ac coupled with the output signal being extracted at Pin 14. Loop filtering is provided by the capacitors at Pins 4 and 5 with additional filtering being provided by the capacitor at Pin 14. Since the conversion gain of the veo is not very high, to obtain sufficient demodulated output signal the frequency deviation in the input signal should be 1% or higher.
161
22 Descramblers and Decoders

The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Sine Wave Descrambler Outband Descrambler Gated Pulse Descrambler SCA Decoder Dual Time Constant Tone-Decoder Stereo TV Decoder Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Stereo Decoder Frequency Division Multiplex (FDM) Stereo Decoder SCA(Background Music) Decoder
162
SINE WAVE DESCRAMBLER

+12V
JI
r---------,-~+
12V
R5 4711
1I
TPl
R6
3.31(
CB
001f.LF
02
..3----.5J.1. H
.A-IN
"P
IK If
11
A2 4.71<
QI
l *" C5*
~ 470pF 410pF?
R9
2N3563
!C,
CJ lSpF MCIlJQ
470pF
Cl
rv
R4
'OK
2
r
"
IN4002
INPUTI OUTPUT
2201(
A"
l3
5.61-'H
2 .",
,------~
C36
C4
47pf
,
;>-
" OK
A" IK
Cl 470pF
cs
56pF
A3
47DIl
h
RI2 10K
3,
10011 470pF
--1(~
12 2-.3iJ.H
~
!C2.
.... R13
101<
."
- ---I-
+ 12V
" \/, MC1458 RI4
G~iN
12V
+-----..-JY\-.-~
loon
"
, :;:f .ClO
ll1F
+ 12V
c--- 20' ,.... C2S

+ 12V
lD;tF
~f20V 4R20
10K C16 RI9
e22
UOpF
Rn
4.71(
Rl3
101( Rza 11( R29 lK RJO 11< RJ3 lK
/~r"5'_71_I-",-'_~_~ _fl!~: "-V'1---'-~:-I:I~'~-LI-:~_:J21.L

2
r'1Vr-'--I.. ~...
/.''-...1l",-,,,,__
!C,
/_;~'_~:_f-'-"4" c~~ cg:! cgi t-:;;t ~~,

C26
~~
!C3
MC1358
2.21(
A"
C;4
01
12V
L-.l
N''''
C23
410pF
1 68pF
~,
~
P '
':'
C31
C32
470l-'F
VOl
A" 'OK
lOflF
W,
470pF
r-----1
.l
t--~
Gl:
4
!C, M 38.
20'
RJ2 lO!!
CH! 12 f
-A COMPLETE SINEWAVE OESCAAMBLEA. Easy 10 build, and rel.llvely e8SY to align, this circuit completely removes the 15.7SkHz scrambling sinf'wIlYe.
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 22-1
Circuit Notes
This decoder features a sine wave recovery channel and uses a PIN diode attenuator driven by the sine wave recovery system to cancel out the sine wave sync suppression signal. Kit available from North Country Radio, P.O. Box 53, Wykagyl Station, New York 10804.
163
OUT BAND DESCRAMBLER

IN~lllT
~~~S"''':.>.;:D;:EC''D''D;1,>-----1c~
470pf U' .032- 074)J.fl
Rll
!J,BYPASS
r-------------------------------------------'-----
IN9148
- ---
."
33!!
-:!II~f DFC~
5 S"H
lJ?""
-~ir:~f- HYI"~S:;!
-,
OU~~UT
--'-IIt/VY3J!!
------
.____ ~. __,_
nr,
HUpf
------~
IN9148
---
Cl'
4~ci~rlc" ~'N~~043lO~pF
"w
,; ,
::r C14 -=- 410pF
__
RI
-)f--- ~
L7
'='
?i71--,--~M------,----,r-----,
470pF
IOOH
ZNJG38
02
5.6 H
I-'
3"
47Gpf
'3
cw
470pF
DJ IN4002 '-... '------~--+-c-,,--+---j<f--O S2

O. IN914B
POWE~
AS saOD
RS 4]1(
12V
C9 470pf
!fC1~---'--" IOI,F
20V
-FOR THE OUTBAND DECODER shown here 10 work, the cable company must provide alleasl 81 mUllvolt signal. Values for Cl-CS and U_L4 are found In Table I.
TABLE l-CAPACITOR AND COIL VALUES

50 MHz 90-114 MHz
5 pF 12 pF
Cl
C2
5 pF
Cl C4
C5
L1
47 pF 200 pF 56 pF
56 pF 0.2 f1H
Fig. 22-2
82 pF
12 pF
10 pF
021 tH
0.03 p.H
0.2
I~H
L2
L3 L4
005 ).lH
U.175 jJH
0175,lH
0.24 IJ.H
RADIO ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes
This circuit consists of an amplifier for the synch channel and a video detector which controls an aUenuator so that the gain of the systems is increased during synch intervals. Kit available from North Country Radio, p.a. Box 53, Wykagyl Station, New York 10804.
164
GATED PULSE DESCRAMBLER
.,;,
RI4
C2I
470p~
'"
C2 470pf RS
47!!
6.8K
'"
RIB ~~ IOK VOL
J~"fB11 1 lOll 1(;3 I;

LM386 5"
t4CI~ ":' 470pf

Ra 410
V~
'(,70:1:
470l,f ?OV
C23 ~ SPKR 1 Si!
+12V
I~/\~ -
IN4001
"
RI 4H!
J' Rf
INPUT
";',1 )'1
4 ICI
R6
J2 Rf
?
-
C10 ,. 470PF 6
IC2
TP
R9
3 JK
f1,
I
470pF
R4
'OK
C3 470pF
;[P--
RI l.SK
R1
1 U" 'I
C16
8 f2~
MC1350
I: # ril!.qUT
J-40pF
"
,
e12
4
.~
,
~3
MC1330
cs
I00P~4~~ rtf. AI11-3~ ,

2
6
4 71(
~
* ~~ , f~,. "
"0
8
R13
CIB
14
le4
Me13!i8
11
R>O
Cl
120pF
410pF
CS 410pf
CS
8 Zj.lF
2-JI<H
470;;r C~3
' ,,0,'
10-331' H
>0
tC17 nOpF
Cl6
R12
47011
R3
-?
CII
56pF
"
68pF
c'51~
>OK
BIAS
'"
G29
[
Rn
3.31(
12pF
C11
470pF
C28
I"
1[<, MCl310
R33 390Jl
47,Or 4!~pF
33K 33K
7
Ala Rlli~
R20
OK
,!l
7
3~~\1 10
R2I
~~g
030 047
vco
'OK
Rl2 lMEG
~3I 01
, ,~
13
.
+C25
.22
39K 391<
C3.1 1O"F
R18
IOK
11 13
16
R3I
33<
20V
Q!..!M
2
IC5
C24
R32 10K
WI01H
"
R16
1;2
&04526
114
C34
"'
01
4
I"
, C35
0033
2N3565
,."
RI'
R24
~ 'LEJ
RI,
IOK
'L
~
~
~O
POLARITY
s,
"
1130
IOK
-DESCRAMBLE GATEO-PUlSE SIGNALS using this easy-to-bulld cIrculI. Information for winding transformer T1and coil L1 can be found in thelelt.
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 22-3
Circuit Notes This circuit consists of an amplifier and video detector with a second subcarrier detector for synch recovery purposes. A pulse-fonner circuit modulates the gain of the main channel increasing it during synch intervals. Provision for subcarrier audio descrambling is also provided. Kit available from North Country Radio, P.O. Box 53, Wykagyl Station, New York 10804.
165
SCA DECODER
8ACKGROUND MUSIC (SeA)
O
C6
.047
i. L1f-------i
AID
lK
C5
R9
.018 lK r----j~.AS
,-C4 .001
0 1-_ _+'''1
A6
1 SK
" LlUs
NE565
A7
5K
f'-'--:C-Tl 3, .,j,. 0'0
I-W..-'T~I~'
L-.l
.---JL.9 "
R4
2 r----j'
RJ
ID'
"
4.7K
---t---+-~ C2..1 R1 R2
510PF~~
1" ... J
510pF
OEM FM
FIg. 22-4
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a Signetics NE565 PLL (Phase-Locked Loop) as a detector to recover the SCA signal. The input to the SCA decoder circuit is connected to an FM receiver at a point between the FM discriminator and the deemphasis filter network. The PLL, ICI, is tuned to 67 kHz by R7, a 5 K potentiometer. Tuning need not be exact since the circuit will seek and lock onto the subcarrier. The demodulated signal from the FM receiver is fed to the input of the 565 through a high-pass filter consisting of two 510 pF capacitors (Cl and C2) and a 4.7 K resistor (RI). Its purpose is to serve as a coupling network and to attenuate some of the main channel spill. The demodulated SCA signal at pin 7 passes through a three-stage deemphasis network as shown. The resulting signal is around 50 mV, with the response extending to around 7 kHz.
DUAL TIME CONSTANT TONE DECODER
+Vcc
O.I11Ft
-~l-'-'II\,.,...+--___a_,
,....-1
1 kll
RL
',2N2901i
'0
"
EXAR
Fig. 22-5
Circuit Notes For some applications it is important to have a tone decoder with narrow bandwidth and fast response time. This can be accomplished by the dual time constant tone decoder circuit shown. The circuit has two low-pass loop filter capacitors, C2 and C' 2' With no input signal present, the output at pin 8 is high, transistor Q] is off, and C' 2 is switched out of the circuit. Thus, the loop low-pass filter is comprised of C2 , which can be kept as small as possible for minimum response time. When an in-band signal is detected, the output at pin 8 will go low, Q] will turn on, and capacitor C' 2 will be switched in parallel with capacitor C2 . The low-pass filter capacitance will then be C2 + C' 2' The value of C' 2 can be quite large in order to achieve narrow bandwidth. During the time that no input signal is being received, the bandwidth is determined by capacitor C2 .
166
STEREO TV DECODER
+12V
Rll 330n
LED 1
MULTlPLEXED
~( ~
6 13 2
7
C6 .47
~I-R8 330n 12 ICl

MC1310P
RIO 4.7K
R12 4,7K CI0
,~.
Cll 01
AUDIO
INPUT
RI 10K 10'
C3 330$J.F 1:,V
+"
C, 330$.iF I:'V
+
C5 .001
" ..
.'
5 8 14 R9 16K
~1
"-
~15 --'!"'rR4
C2 .001 R3
4.7K
11
" "
.liP
~
01
2N2222
R6 47K
R7 47K
~ -+
.05 C7 .22
LEFT OUTPUT
R5 27!l
RIGHT OUT PUT
,
RADIOELECTRONICS
i:;,C9
470pF
~
20K
Fig. 226
Circuit Notes
The composite input signal is preamplified by transistor Ql and is then coupled to the high-pass filter composed of C3, C4, R6, and R7. The filtered audio is then passed to ICl, an MC1310P "Coilless Stereo Demodulator." That IC is normally used to demodulate broadcastband FM signals, but by changing the frequency of its onboard VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator) slightly (from 19 kHz to 15.734 kHz), we can use that IC to detect stereo-TV signals. A block diagram of the MC1310P is shown in Fig. 22-5. Notice that the components connected to pin 14 control the VCO's frequency, hence the pilot-detect and carrier frequencies. For use in an FMreceiver, the VCO would run at four times the 19 kHz pilot frequency (76 kHz), but for our application, it will run at four times the 15.734 kHz pilot frequency of stereo TV, or 62.936 kHz. The MC1310P divides the master VCO signal by two in order to supply the 31.468 kHz carrier that is used to detect the L - R audio signal. The L - R signal undergoes normal FM detection, and at that point we've got two audio signals: L + Rand L - R. The decoder block in the IC performs the addition and subtraction to produce the separate left and right signals. RIO and CI0 form a de-emphasis network that compensates for the 75 JLs pre-emphasis that the left channel underwent; R12 and Cll perform the same function for the right channel.
167
Cl CO
TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEX (TOM) STEREO DECODER
+1SVO~--------------r--r----~----~~~~~~-t------, .! !
PILOT LEVEL
C4
10 ... F
C.
R' 1k
MUX1NPUT VOLTAGE
VI(P_P) '"' 1V
'OOoF
470k
R'~
NOTE 3
. 7 .. F
R7~"Ok ~ ...
\fJ
~J: "'"
COY..
NOTE ..
STEREO INOICATOR
EXTERNAL
680
(hW)
~ 1
4.7k NOTE 1
MONO/STEREO SWITCH
r-+-----~O
1,1,"_111 < 0.65V: STEREO V 14 _ 1&> 1.2V;"OOO
1560pf
lOA-l005A
4---'8
GE-OIODE
, ,
-----.--0
AUDIO LEFT OUTPUT
AUOIQ
Ve_u:- 1.3V: STEREO
VIl _ 1t
< a.65V: MONO 0--
44i
"
SMOOTH TAKE..(lVER
L-----1~------C8--JL.--t-CO~R~HTOUWUT
R,
(METAL FILM)
,81< (1%)
4.7}J.F
100F1
1'OnF
c,
("'CROPOCO)
HOTE2
-'-1...",F
R,
4.7k
I"e
Cl
RS
F
'.81<
VCO FREOUENCY
IV"... ,
-=-
-=-
2. Micropoco capacitor has a temp(>ralure cooillcionl of 125 10- 6
NOTES; 1 For other Input stn,Jclurtl:> see Figures 7 to 11, shown here with RC-hlter (Figure 8)
!
60.10- 6oC" 1
3 In simplified cirCUits a fixed rosiSlor (e g. 620k) can be used for a guaranteed SWitching level of ..;;; 16mV. Either the LED CI(Cwl or an e)l.19rndl slereo indIcator can be used
SIGNETICS
Fig. 22-7
FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEX (FDM) STEREO DECODER

PM.OTLEVEL
+,~o---------------t-~--~~-----t---1~----~-----,
,O.47,..F
:bC2 Q~"F
I .,
CS
1k 'OOpF
NO'' '
MUX-INPU'I' VOLTAGE
,...
....
15
.'2 'Ok
EXlEJItW.
NOTf. 4 STEREO INDtCATOR
V'''_'''1V~l -.q~lC7 ~F 1. 560pF 9 1,0 11 ~2
4.n
NOTE 1
JO! ~
,UI'F
("W)
MONO/STEREO SWITCH
r-+----.. . .
13
,.
V, 4-1, > 1.2V: MONO
V,4-1.
< G.I5V: STEREO
TDA1005A
GE-DlODE
~L---"~]",8;-1i7--J16.--r';-lr.4;-1i'~lJ;:'~-_--Tr'~__~____-o~~
VI_le> 1.3V: STEREO
Va-1I5 < O.65V:
MONOco,.....--f~+-IIT-.~
~
SIIOOlH TAKE-OVER
1...___1-____-,
R1 (METAL ,. (1%)
(MICROPOCO) -
NOTE'
I
~
ALM)
::!: ~=J;~~=~l~~~I~-O'UDlO +' I ~

e10
R10HT OUTPUT
,nF
"""[j- r
R2 J'" 3.3l'f
l_
C3r~ 7~:~
R4
:,
,':
~rL2
4
I ....
+-:,--'---'--+
"'-'------f---.
vCO FREQUENCY
'.Ok
.s ~
CL
1kAh
:-;::A~
1 .n
133nF
en
Coil data; L, l2 - 2.6mH

Q1-2 - 35; a".11II - 30
N1_2 - 357h turns:

N3_4" 297Y2 turns: scrambled wouro with wire diameter O.09mm,
~
10'.2
x 100%" 82%
NOTES: 1. For other input structures see Figures 6 10 11; shown here with AC-filter (F~ure 8). 2 The mlcropoco capaCitor has a temperature coefficient of 125.10- 6 " 60.10- k-'. 3 In simplified circuits a filled resIstor (e.g. 62{}k) can be used for a guaranteed sWitching level of ,;;;; 16rnV. 4. Either the LED clfcuit or an el(\ernai 8191"&0 il"ldicatol can be used.
SIGNETlCS
Fig. 22-8
169
SCA (Background Music) DECODER
. 12V
10.
1.8'
018
d: .041
24V
.018
:>,,,
.001
DEM 510 pF 510pF
F"~
14.1k
4.7.
28 0565
3 9
10
I.
lk
lk
!lAC"GROUND MUSIC(SCA)
4.7k
1;~
4.7k
+0
001
1
TC1:Je80S
SIGNETICS
Fig. 22-9
Circuit Notes
A resistive voltage divider is used to establish a bias voltage for the input (Pins 2 and 3). The demodulated (multiplex) FM signal is fed to the input through a two-stage high-pass filter, both to effect capacitive coupling and to attenuate the strong signal of the regular channel. A total signal amplitude, between 80 mV and 300 mV, is required at the input. Its source should have an impedance of less than 10,000 ohm. The PhaseLocked Loop is tuned to 67 kHz with a 5000 otun potentiometer, only approximate tuning is required since the loop will seek the signal. The demodulated output (Pin 7) passes through a three-stage low-pass filter to provide de-emphasis and attenuate the highfrequency noise which often accompanies SeA transmission. Note that no capacitor is provided directly at Pin 7; thus, the circuit is operating as a first-order loop. The demodulated output signal is in the order of 50 mV and the frequency response extends to 7 kHz.
170
23
Detectors
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Pulse Sequence Detector Voltage Level Detector Zero-Crossing Detector Peak Detector Level Detector High Frequency Peak Detector Tachometer. Single Pulse Generator. Power Loss Detector. Peak Detector Phase Detector with IQ-Bit Accuracy Frequency Limit Detector Pulse Coincidence Detector
171
PULSE SEQUENCE DETECTOR

r - -.....
Rc
----<
],91C
+12'"
"
...."
UWSL
.
" "
].]1(
I-~--+----<OOT~T
(HC)
INPUT A
"
J..)K
Circuit Notes The resistor divider connected between Ql and Q2 supplies IH to Ql after input A triggers it. It also prevents input B from triggering Q2 until Ql conducts. Consequently. the first B input pulse after input A is applied will supply current to RL.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 23-1
VOLTAGE LEVEL DETECTOR
ll61
VREFl
RSET
v
lOOK
11
lOOK II
L 161
VREF2
"
V"
FIg. 23-2
lOOK !!
L 161
"
VREF3
L161 VREF4
vSILlCONIX
172
ZEROCROSSING DETECTOR
,---......>--------_.- Vcc+ lOV

10kn
---
..,
lnkn
V,
+Vref
___~7-4-~~~~......~Vo
10 kO
lN914
,on
-=1
-'0
10 kfl
I I
_.-I.c-_ _...;.cl~---~- V,
--V re f -
vi
-Vr.f
I
I
______ __ LL_ _ _ _ _ Vo
~
n-+
I I I
4 4V .
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
FIg. 23-3
Circuit Notes This zero-crossing detector uses a dual LM393 comparator, and easily controls hysteresis by the reference levels which are set on the comparator inputs. The circuit illustrated is.powered by 10-V power supplies. The input signal can be an ac signal level up to + 8 V. The output will be a positive going pulse of about 4.4 V at the zerocrossover point. These parameters are compatible with TTL logic levels. The input signal is simultaneously applied to the non-inverting input of comparator A and the inverting input of comparator B. The inverting input of comparator A has a + 10 mV reference with respect to ground, while the non-inverting input of comparator B has a -10 mV reference with respect to ground. As the input signal swings positive (greater than + 10 mV), the output of comparator "A" will be low while comparator "B" will have a high output. When the input signal swings negative Oess than -10 mV), the reverse is true. The result of the combined outputs will be low in either case. On the other hand, when the input signal is between the threshold points ( 10 mVaround zero crossover), the output of both comparators will be high. If more hysteresis is needed, the 10 mV window may be made wider by increasing the reference voltages.
173
PEAK DETECTOR
& V"_II INPUT i
aW(-3 dBI L3 MHr
0.3 ""p_p INPUT i BW(.:5dB)-Z40kHI
6 Vp _ p INPUT,
+7.5 V
+7.5 V
BW1-J dBI' 360 ~H, 0.3 Vp _ p INPUT; eW(-3 dBI' 320 kH.
+00
OUTPUT
,
11\1914
-00
OUTPUT
1101914
'"
n.
la) PEAK PO$IHVE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
n.
-75 V
Ib) PEAK NEG,II.TIVE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
Fig. 23-4
Circuit Notes Circuits are easily implemented using theCA3130 BiMOS op amp. For large-signal inputs the bandwidth of the peak-negative circuit is less than that of the peak-positive circuit. The second stage of the CA3130 limits bandwidth in this case.
LEVEL DETECTOR
+I
+I
v" >---+---~
>----.--- TOCMOSOR
\lOUT
LPTTL LOGIC
,.
0307-31
INTERSIL
Fig. 23-5
Circuit Notes By using the ICL 7612 in these applications. the circuits will follow rail to rail inputs.
174
HIGH FREQUENCY PEAK DETECTOR
100pF 560
6 7 8 1.0 I'F 100pF
6
4 B
W
18 17 16 15 14 13
9
10
Digital
Output
DV
+12V'-4-~ 11
12
Fig. 23-6
Circuit Notes National Semiconductor's DP8464B is primarily intended for use in disk systems as a pulse detector. However it can be easily used as a general purpose peak detector for analogue signals up to 5 MHz. The chip can handle signals between 20 and 66 mV peak-to-peak. The circuit includes a filter with constant group delay characteristics to band limit the signal. Typically the - 3 dB point for this filter will be at about 1. 5 times the highest frequency of interest. This differentiator network between pins 1 and 24 can be as simple as a capacitor, or can be more complex to band limit the differentiator response. TACHOMETER, SINGLE PULSE GENERATOR, POWER LOSS DETECTOR, PEAK DETECTOR
INPUT
R
"
J L J l P TO IOOY
IN4148
INPUT
_.\NeIOR 3Ne2
IDEP[~NG
ON VOLTA('[)
220Q
A positive going input charges C through the IN4148 and R. The diode keeps the scs off. A negative going input supplies anode-gate current triggering on the scs discharging C through RL.
Fig. 23-7
GENERAL ELECTRIC
175
PHASE DETECTOR WITH 10-BIT ACCURACY
J.
" t~, ". ,
DEMCD IN 4 SYNC 6
1
....V 16
J;"" "
CT 17
Q
I I
FEE08ACK
14 OSC
12 VRI2
L~
Y
SE5521
I I
DEMOD
DEMODOUT
/.
~
AMP OUT 1
DC OUTPUT
LOW-PASS
NETWORK
+IN
-IN
a. Phase Detector Measures Phase Difference Between Signals V, and V2 and Provides de Output at Pin 1
DC OUTPUT
+FS
b. When VI and V2 In (a) 8re at Quadrature (Traces A and B). the DC Component of Demodulator Output (Trace C) is at OV
SIGNETICS
c. The de Output and Phase Vary Linearly
Fig. 23-8
Circuit Notes
Signals of identical frequency are applied to sync input (Pin 6) and to the demodulator input (Pin 4). respectively. the demodulator functions as a phase detector with output dc component being proportional to phase difference between the two inputs. The signals must be referenced to 0 V for dual supply operation or to VR/2 for single supply operation. At 5-V supplies. the demodulator can easily handle 7-V peak-to-peak signals. The lowpass network configured with the uncommitted amplifier de output at Pin 1 of the device. The dc output is maximum (+ full-scale) when VIand V2 are 180 0 out of phase and minimum (- full-scale) when the signals are in phase.
176
FREQUENCY LIMIT DETECTOR

v--r-----------_r-r----------------~r_--------_r,
C,
INPUT
o--1H---...-ill
R, R,
.
' - - - - - _ I -__~OUTPUT
TIME CONSTANT Fl3 C.
4' A~
C, <:: Rl C3
VARY R, FOR OPTION ZERO CROSSING DETECTION VARy A4 TO SET DETECTION fREQUENCY
INPUT
--,"----".----l'-F
---iINDETERMINATE
,..
BELOW 10
1.15V
_::!o-H-__..!O"'N'-TL'lIM"'E'-""'=;j,o/:-I~_
1.15V
-+l+------H-+--
.~
(
1 0
----
, ,
FRIEQUENCY--
INTERSIL
Fig. 23-9
Circuit Notes
Simple frequency limit detectors providing a GO/NO-GO output for use with varying amplitude input signals may be conveniently implemented with the [CL8211/8212. In the application shown. the first [CL8212 is used as a zero-crossing detector. The output circuit consisting of R3 ~ and C2 results in a slow output positive ramp. The negative range is much faster than the positive range. Rs and Rt; provide hysteresis so that under all circumstances the second [CL8212 is turned on for sufficient time to discharge C3. The time constant of R7C3 is much greater than R4C2 Depending upon the desired output polarities for low and high input frequencies. either an [CL8211 or an [CL8212 may be used as the output driver. The circuit is sensitive to supply voltage variations and should be used with a stabilized power supply. At very low frequencies the output will switch at the input frequency.
177
PULSE COINCIDENCE DETECTOR

+12'0'
t-----oOOTPVT
(Ne)
2_0V
INPUT B
:5NB4
OR "'"
I.
JJ-~
3NBI
,"'01
2.0'0' INPUT
OR
3NB4
I.
33)( 33K
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 23-10
Circuit Notes
Unless inputs A and B (2- to 3-V amplitude) occur simultaneously no voltage exists across RL Less than 1 microsecond overlap is sufficient to trigger the scs. Coincidence of negative inputs is detected with gates GA instead of Gc by using the scs in a complementary SCR configuration.
178
24 Digital-to-Analog Converters
Two 8-Bit DACs Make a 12-Bit DAC 12-Bit DAC with Variable Step Size
179
TWO a-BIT DAC S MAKE A 12-BIT DAC

A 5 13 14 6 15 7 8 9 .0 10 1 11 2 12 3 4
MSB AI A2 A3 A4
.. ~
:.
1.0k
Vref 2V
1,Ok
5.1k
6
-"
0
i.
~
-" 0
LSB A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 Al0 All A12
16
-15V 5V 5 6 7 8 13 14
.L
-
1.0k
.
u
Vref 2V
C
10 11 12 3 16
:.
'"
~
15 1 2 4
612
5.1k
> N
1"0
1.4k
2k
9 LM723C 2 3 57 13 6
'!!
>
.L
-15V ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING

Fig. 24-1
Circuit Notes Two MCI408-8-bit D/A converters, A and B in the circuit diagram, are used. The four least-significant bits of A are tied to zero. The four most significant bits of the 12-bit data are connected to the remaining four input pins. The eight least significant bits of the 12-bit data are connected to the eight input pins of B. The four most significant bits of the 12-bit data together have a weight of 16 relative to the remaining eight bits. Hence, the output from B is reduced by a factor of 16 and summed with, the output from A using the surmning op-amp configuration D. Voltage regulator chip, LM7236, is used to provide an accurate reference voltage, 2 V, for the MC1408. The full-scale voltage of the converter is VI. x 9.9609 + 1 x (9.375) or 9.9976 V. The step size of the converter is 2.4 mY.
180
12-BIT DAC WITH VARIABLE STEP SIZE
ALTERNATIVE (BIPOCAR) OUTPUT
-':-":-=====::;:--j---;-;:VVl1
B +15V -15V OV -15V
+15V
-15V
l-
13 16 3
B
~'h-+---.~t
R3 R4
VOUT
LSA
ELECTRONIC- ENGINEERING
Fig. 24-2
Circuit Notes
The step size of the converter is variable by selection of the high order data bits. The first DAC, A, has a stable reference current supplied via the 10.24 V reference lC and RI. R2 provides bias cancellation. As shown, only the first 4 MSB inputs are used, giving a step size of 225/256 x 2.048/16 = 0.127 mA. This current supplies the reference for DAC B whose step size is then 0.1275/256 = 0.498 I'A. Complementary voltage outputs are available for unipolar output and using R3 = R4 = 10 K, Vout is 10.2 V approximately, with a step size (1 LSB) of approximately 5 mY. If desired an op amp can be added to the output to provide a low impedance output with bipolar output symmetrical about ground, if R5 = R6 within 0.05%. Note that offset null is required, and all resistors except R2 and R3 should be 1% high stability types. By using lower order address lines than illustrated for DAC A, a smaller step size (and therefore full-scale output) can be obtained. Unused high order bits can be manipulated high or low to change the relative position of the full-scale output.
181
25 Dip Meters
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Littie Dipper
182
LITTLE DIPPER
~C6
L1~
C2
RFC
+6\1,d.c.
r--i:
C3
A3
AS
r.-J rfri'
A.\JD.
C4*
R2> D2f
CSt
~
R4
1 ..
~
S.
I I \LED
ca
Parts List
Ll-See coil data.
C1A,lB-Dual capacitor 100 pF per section (ETCO SV409 or similar) C2,C3-100pF mica, my!ar, ete, low voltage C4-10 pF mica, mylar, etc .. Iow voltage CS-.D' uF ceramic, low voltage C6-5 pF mica, mylar, elc., low voltage D1,02-1 N914 silicon diode or similar Rl-100Kohms 14 wait R2-220 K ohms 1,4 wait R3-500 K ohms potentiomeler
R4-10 ohms I;" watt AS-270 ohms 1,4 watt

Q1-MPF 102 FET Q2-Anygeneral-purpose NPN transistor with a Beta (Hie) of 40 or so (2N3904 or similar) Q3-Any general-purpose NPN transistor capable of 20 mA collector current or more, Beta 40 or so (2N3904, 2N2222 or similar) AFC-l mH miniature lerrite core choke (.... alue not critical)
LED--Panel mounting LED Radio Shack 276068 or similar. SW1-Sub-ffiiniature DPOT slide switch or similar
Miscellaneous-6 volt AC adapter (Radio Shack 273-1454A) Coaxial DC power jack (RS 274-1565) Calibrated Dial knob (RS 274-413) Dual phono jack (RS 274-332)
Fig. 25-1
Circuit Notes
'"
<Xl
The circuit consists of two basic circuits, the oscillator and the detector. The oscillator uses an FET in a Colpitts configuration. The energy circulating in the oscillator tank is coupled through C4 to the detector circuit, where a small diode (D2) rectifies it, feeding a dc voltage to the Darlington pair (Q2, A3) controlled by the sensitivity control (R3). Any small
variations in the bias of the amplifier will cause large variations of current through the LED indicator in the DIP mode; however, ill the PEAK mode the current produces a corresponding voltage drop through R5 and the action of the LED is reversed. The circuit shown will work practically on any frequency from LF to VHF if the appropriate components are used.
26
Display Circuits
Vacuum Fluorescent Display Expanded Scale Meter, Dot or Bar Low-Cost Bar-Graph Indicator for ac Signals LED Bar-Graph Driver
184
VACUUM FLUORESCENT DISPLAY
DlSPL AY ANODE {SEGM ENT)
14 PE R C\ARACTER
J)
.L 1
CA~'208E
1
- , GI4
I
-lG2
"I
OISP
OUTPUT DRIVERS
J '"
O
GATE I
"
I
DATA
(24 oHI
{)
LATCHES
~'21:211
OUTPUT DRIVERS
l
GAT E ~
, , ,
'" 14 oH,
{t {r
DECODER
SEQUENCER
CA~207[
SHIFT REGISTER
it
~ ~v
tI
SfiOT
r',
aCE
'"
'.1'
,
SYNC
f
'-r
~I
SJOB I" .H,

-
oHI
CC,
448 oH,
NOT[ 2 01 SP LAYS CAN SE OPERAT [0 SIMuL TANEDUS LV USING ONLY I SEaUENCER AND 2 SEGMENT UITCH ORIVERS
FIg. 26-1
This circuit uses the CA3207 sequence driver and CA3208 segment latch-driver in combination to drive display devices of up to 14 segments with up to 14 characters of display. The CA3207 selects the digit or character to be displayed in sequence, CA3208 turns on the required alphanumeric segments.
185
EXPANDED SCALE METER, DOT OR BAR
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
HIGHEST NO
LED ON
COLOR
VOUT(MINI
-This IIppll(;1I110n iliUltrll\l!S thallhe LED
H.
$upply needs P'lIctu::ally no fdle"ng
"' "
.n -!
114'
,
9
R,' R,d
Yellow
55'
542 530
5'8
Green
Gr~en
"
506 49'
4,82
5V
Calibration: WIth a preCISion mete. be

1V'W"n pons 4 and 6 adjust Rl for \/oltage VD of 1.20V. Apply 4.94V to pm 5, IInd adjust R4 until LED No. 5 lusl Iogh\5. Thll adjustments are non.lnUl'ra(:tlng.
,
J
Green
Green
Yellow
R,d R,d
458
"
'46
Fig. 26-2
Circuit Notes A bar graph driver le LM314 drives an1.ED display. The LEDs may be separate or in a combined (integral) bar graph display.
186
LOW-COST BAR-GRAPH INDICATOR FOR AC SIGNALS
Display
Indicator lads
On/Off
+ Vcc
RS
33K
R6 3K3
~~,!,y..--'\\ . \\ \\ \\ (lsoI RIO

2K2
R7 3K3
RI1
2K2
Cl
O. 'ILF
RB
02 3K3
1N914
+7V
..,.
I ,
RI2
2K2
-01
d~
to
VRI Input 100K R2 sign ....""'... 2K2 from R1 trans22K
+20V-
R9
R3
3K3
RI3
2K2
C6
220K ~~~--~~----~~----a----7---------1~~--+
C2 C4 O.1/-LF
O.1p.F
CS
O.1p.F
220pF
OVo_----~--~~----~--------_4
________~~--~~~~o__=
DV
le1 ... LF3S1 IC2 ... LM339
Fig. 26-3
Circuit Notes
Indicator was designed for displaying the peak level of small ac signals from a variety of transducers including microphones, strain gauges and photodiodes. The circuit responds to input signals contained within the audio frequency spectrum, i.e., 30 Hz to 20 kHz, although a reduced response extends up to 40 kHz. Maximum sensitivity for the component values shown, with VRl fully clockwise, is 30 mV peak-to-peak. The indicator can be calibrated by setting VRl when an appropriate input signal is applied.
187
LED BAR-GRAPH DRIVER
Circuit Notes
The circuit uses CA3290 BiMOS dual voltage comparators. Non-inverting inputs of Ai and A2 are tied to voltage divider reference. The input signal is applied to the inverting inputs. LEDs are turned "on" when input voltage the reaches the voltage on the reference divider.
0-10 V INPUT
All
RESISTANCE VAlULS
ARE IN :JHMS
Fig. 26-4
188
27
Drive Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Line Driver Provides Full Rail Excursions Five Transistor Amplifier Boosts Fast Pulses into 50-Ohm Coaxial Cable 50-Ohm Transmission Line Driver 600-0hm Balanced Driver for Line Signals High Output 600-0hm Line Driver
189
LINE DRIVER PROVIDES FULL RAIL EXCURSIONS
,5 V
LOGIC INPUT
D1
t
12 V
r
U11
I
-...:
-V
I L- --~
1k R1 10 k
U3 D3
LOGIC INPUT 1k
R2 1M
R3 10 k
o
OL MPTSP10
U4
I
U21
L_
~
VV
I _..J
R4
D2 12 V '"
~JS
=T1
24 Vp_ p BOOST CIRCUIT
_ 1S-Vdc
MOTOROLA
Fig. 27-1
Circuit Notes
The logic input is applied to opto-isolators U1 and U2 with, respectively, npn and pnp emitter follower outputs. Dc balance is adjusted by potentiometer R2. The emitter followers drive the gates of Q1 and Q2. the complementary TMOS pairs. With a 12 V supply, the swing at the common source output point is about 12 V peak-to-peak. By adding a 18-V boost circuit, as shown, the output swing can approach the rail swing. 1bis circuit applies the output to transformer T1, which is rectified by diode bridge D3, regulated by U3 and U4, and then applied to the collectors of U1 and U2. Diodes D1 and D2 are forward-biased when 12-V supplies are used, but they are back-biased when the 18-V boost is used.
190
FIVE-TRANSISTOR AMPLIFIER BOOSTS FAST PULSES INTO 50-OHM COAXIAL CABLE

r----~-----.,..-r_--__o
Vcc (i 14-6 V)
200,
lW
+5 V
Q,
Q~
,------0
TTL
input
S-Voutput 2.5 V
Coaxial cable
L'_2_0__+ __
4
04_;_"w-4-_~_k-t-__..._+_____-____i:_:. J~ -(':i}
D,
1k
-5V
10,0.25 W
R3
50-11 load
rC=:;'W-i2-22 pF
IC.-IC" 0,-0.
= =
74500 MPS 6595

MBD 502
c,
120
D,-D2
L, ~ 2-3 turns of 20 SWG enameled copper wire on a 1O-mm diameter form
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 27-2
Circuit Notes The circuit works from dc to 50 MHz and will deliver pulses as short as 10 ns. It is driven by a TTL signal through a 740S00 quad Schottky NAND gate, lC A through lCn' Transistor Q1, wired as a common-emitter amplifier, drives transistor Q2,,, simple emitter follower. Transistors Q3 and Q4, wired in parallel, also form an emitter follower and drive the output. When Q3 and Q4 are both turned off, transistor Q5 works as a low-impedance sink. Schottky diodes Dl and D2 prevent Q1 and Q5 from becoming saturated. To adjust the circuit, potentiometer RI is set to optimize the output pulse's fall time. lnductor 11, a peaking coil, should be adjusted to improve the rise time to wit.lrin a permissible 50/0 overshoot. Likewise, capacitor Cl can be varied to control preshooting. Further output pulse shaping is accomplished with the help of capacitor C2. Resistors R2 and R3 ensure a proper 50-ohm impedance at the amplifier's output when the pulse is on or off, respectively.
191
50-OHM TRANSMISSION LINE DRIVER

+15 V
+
SIGNAL
_T"50~F
"'25'0'
ADJUSTMENT
LEVEL
2N3053 OUTPUT
2:5kfi
200n
51n
2W
2N4037
22 kO
+15 V
2pF
>kn 10 k.o.r--,,;v;.i--1~~ _____

-15 V 200.n
-15 V
J
35
1"5
NOMINAL BANDWIDTH = 10 104Hz

tf
OUTPUT
DC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
Fig. 27-3
Circuit Notes This circuit uses a wideband. high slew rate CA3100 BiMOSop amp. The slew rate for this amplifier is 28 V/p.s. Output swing is 9 volts peak-to-peak into a terminated line, measured at the termination.
600-0HM BALANCED DRIVER FOR LINE SIGNALS
I~ l-"'lO,o,k...._-o\l:A0o.Ak~~
If
22,
30
TOA 1034
Circuit Notes
lOOk
B~ 1anced
output
This circuit uses current and voltage feedback. This circuit will handle + 24 dBm with 12 volts supply using TDA 1034s.
Fig. 27-4
192
HIGH OUTPUT 600-0HM LINE DRIVER

Gain'" X2
51k R1A 1 k R2A
2 3 51k R5 A
30 R3A
82k
Input
R6 82k 10k
600n
load
51 k
Rl B
R2B
2 3 R4 B 10k
30 R3 B
R7 only required
if load may be
floating
Fig. 27-5
Circuit Notes
The circuit has a "floating" output, i.e., it behaves like an isolated transfonner winding, with the output amplitude remaining unchanged whether the center or either end of the load is grounded. This is achieved by making Z-out, common mode, infinite. The circuit consists of two current-sources in push-pull. Since each has infinite output Z, the common mode output impedance is also infinite. Connecting a resistor between the noninverting terminals of the op amps reduces the differential Z-out without alfecting the Z-common-mode. Since the output is floating, if the load is also floating there is no output ground reference, which results in malfunction. This can be corrected by reducing the common-mode Z slightly. R7 fulliIls this function. All resistors should be of close tolerance to give a good balance. The line driver provides +24 dB from 12 V or + 16 dB from 6 V supplies.
193
28 Electronic Locks
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Three-Dial Combination Lock Electronic Combination Lock
194
THREE-DIAL COMBINATION LOCK

CI-500uF,
capacitor
25VDC electrolytic
RI
TO LOAD
01, D2-IN4002 diode

Kt-relay with 6-volt coil rated @
250-ohms, with SPSl .contacts QI-2N5050 SCR RI, R2-4,700-ohm, l;"watt resis tor, 5% 51, 52, 53-single pole, IOposi
tion rotary or thumbwheel
d
01
T I
S.
02
._.
switches
:lC~'J' : lS~"I'::i3;';!.: " ~ol
011"
c
------
Tlr-::
Cll
--
IIL~~
54-normally closed SPST push

button switch
__
R2
-
--
-------,."
Tl-120VAC to 6.3VAC <i9 300mA

power transformer
TAB BOOKS, INC.
Fig, 28-1
Circuit Notes Here's an effective little combination lock that you can put together in one evening's time. To open the lock, simply dial in the correct combination on the three rotary or thumbwheelswitches. With the correct combination entered, current flows through RI into Ql's gateterrninal, causing the SCR to latch in a conductive state. This sends a current through relay Kl, which responds by closing its contacts and actuating whatever load is attached. After opening the lock, twirl the dials of SI through S3 away from the correct combination so that nobody gets a look at it. The lock will remain open and your load will remain on because the SCR is latched on. To lock things up, it's only necessary to interrupt the flow of anode current through the SCR by pressing pushbutton
S4.
195
co
ELECTRONIC COMBINATION LOCK
SI~ I
2t=-o
"'' " "'"

Kl
JUMPER HEADER lIST
o--l--D
~ - 13RD 1 51
4TH 6 COMMON
I [ ,.,""b. t 1 r
ON
31
~?50R
\. ,'0
R7
~01
1 "
TO ALARM lN4003
lK
hB
,i.
I OE S14 RESET SWITCH F SCRl C106Bl
4
GO . SllP _IS8......... I"
R3 2.2K
HO
+.L
i
B1 I
;;:
EJ
R2 lK 1
13
Ul LS7220 7 10
Q2 2N3638A
11
12
R5 10K
.1" ... ' -I
~_o---to
9-12~
J
"BTq;
LOCK
+u b(} Jl8!jt
~
1 12
G' J YIK
...l..Cl
Ri"
10K
01
~~dK ~R6
~IK
"T'.1
2N3904
LED1
Fig. 28-2
Circuit Notes
When button 512 (If) is pressed, a positive voltage fed through R1 appears at the base of transistor Q1, turning it on. When Q1 is conducting, pin 1 of U1 is brought to ground Oow) or the battery's negative terminal. With pin 1 low, two things occur: Pin 8 of U1 goes high ( + 9 volts de), turning on LED 1-indicating that the circuit has been armed-and pin 13 goes from high to low. Transistor Q2 requires a low signal or negative voltage on its base in order to conduct. It also needs a positive voltage on its emitter and a negative voltage on the collector. As long as the door switch (515) remains open (with the door itself closed), Q2's emitter will not receive the necessary positive voltage. If, however, an unauthorized person opens the door, thus closing switch 515 and placing a positive voltage on the emitter of Q1, the following sequence occurs: 1. Transistor Q2 conducts, receiving the necessary biasing current through a currentdivider network consisting of resistors R3 and R4. 2. As Q2 conducts, a voltage drop is developed across the voltage dividers made up of resistors R5 and R6. With R5 at 10,000 ohms and R6 at 1000 ohms, approximately one volt appears at the gate of5CR1. That's enough voltage to trigger the 5CR's gate.
CD
.....
29
Emulator Circuits
Simulated Inductor Resistor Multiplier Capacitor Multiplier JFET ac Coupled Integrator
198
SIMULATED INDUCTOR Circuit Notes With a constant current excitation, the voltage dropped across an inductance increases with frequency. Thus, an active device whose output increases with frequency can be characterized as an inductance. The circuit yields such a response with the effective inductance being equal to: L ~ R1R2C. The Q of this inductance depends upon RI being equal to R2. At the same time, however, the positive and negative feedback paths of the amplifier are equal leading to the distinct possibility of instability at high frequencies. RI should therefore always be slightly smaller than R2 to assure stable operation.
l_
Cl
SIGNETlCS
Fig. 29-1
RESISTOR MULTIPLIER
R,
lOM lOk
R,
lk
Rm
R,
I 1+ ~
R,
R,
lOOk
Fig. 29-2
199
CAPACITANCE MULTIPLIER
Circuit Notes
The circuit can be used to simuiate large capacitances using small value components. With the values shown and C - 10 p.F, an effective capacitance of 10,000 p.F was obtained. The Q available is limited by the effective series resistance. So RI shouid be as large as practical.
TCIOW.20S
NOTE: All resistor _alues are In ohms.

SIGNETICS
Fig. 29-3
JFET
ac COUPLED INTEGRATOR
.-----_..-0,.
IOM
t--.........- + h
IOM
PNJ684 (P52)
.----t-......o
OUTPUT
Circuit Notes This circuit utilizes the "p.-amp" technique to achieve very high voltage gain. Using Cl in the circuit as a Miller integrator, or capacitance muitiplier, allows this simple circuit to handle very long time constants.
R1
INPUT
O-JV......
+-....---+l...,
PN3616 (P52)
Fig. 29-4
200
30 Fence Chargers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of-each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section.
Battery-Powered Fence Charger Solid-State Electric Fence Charger Electric Fence Charger
201
12
VOC
" {=rf
C5
BATTERY-POWERED FENCE CHARGER
+ C4
_ .001
100
"~~LEOI
,3
!
lMEG
01
~:Lo.L
I
~ri
T1 "11 COIL
HIGH
VOLTAGE
IGNITION
lN4001
K1 01 2N2222A
of" ---------+
.047
R1
220K
2N2222
~\
.,j.
Fig. 30-1
Circuit Notes In essence, the circuit is nothing more than an auto ignition coil and a set of points which accomplishes the same thing. A pulsing circuit made from a single CMOS NOR integrated circuit (Ul), opens and closes the relay contacts to simulate the action of the original breaker points. The relay pulser is divided into two clocking functions. The first circuit is a free-running squarewave generator that determines the rate or frequency of the pulses that activate the relay. It is essentially a pair of NOR gates connected as inverters and placed in a feedback loop, they are Ul-b. The oscillating period of the feedback loop is determined by timing components Cl, RI, and variable resistor R5.
ELECTRIC FENCE CHARGER

FILAMENT
.----1 b:;;",,--,'.,RIAD F-r::IMARY

NE2H NE21i
TRANSFORMER
TO
WIRE FENCE
l50n TO IOK SELECT FOR

F'ULSE RATE
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 30-2
Circuit Notes Any good power transistor can be used in this circuit. The base resistor should be adjusted to obtain a pulse rate of about 50 pulses per minute. The range of values shown can go from la pulses to 100 pulses per minute. The single fence wire must be insulated at each supporting pole and should be mounted low enough to prevent an animal from crawling under the wire. The two neon lamps indicate when the unit is operating.
202
SOLID-STATE ELECTRIC FENCE CHARGER

6V
r--~-------'-----llll--+------'
22 k 2N3906 2N4360 470 Il
1N4007 (2)
lk
22 Meg 47 k 91 Meg 9V lN5241
HV
XFRMR
10 k
11 ~~----~--.100 pf 3 kV NE51
__----------~----+---------+-~~GND
91 Meg
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~------------------------------------~--~
Fence
To
WILLIAM SHEETS
FIg. 30-3
Circuit Notes A touch-sensing circuit keeps the high-voltage generator cut off until something touches the fence wire. Contact with the fence sensing circuit wire starts the high-voltage generator which applies a series of 500 microsecond pulses at approximately 300 volts to the fence wire. Pulse repetition rate is determined by the intruder's resistance to earth ground. The lower the resistance, the higher the pulse rate. A ground rod is inserted several inches into the ground near the fence wire. In the sensing mode the neon lamp should not flicker or light. If it does, it indicates leakage between the fence wire and ground. If sensitivity is too great, it can be reduced by changing the 91 Meg resistor to 47 or 22 Meg as required.
203
31 Fiberoptics Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section.
~figure
Fiberoptic Interface 10 MHz Fiberoptic Receiver DC Variable Speed Motor Control via Fiberoptics
204
10 MHz FIBEROPTIC RECEIVER

TEST CIRCUIT
"on
PULSE
GENERATOR
::.: HP-HEMJ.5000
ANALOG OUT MONIIOR
LEVEL OUT MONITOR
'7<
'pF
2.7k
so
3JOfl
330\1
,7<
1,5~
Tli1F
- 5V SENSITIVITY: tOl'W/V OUT (O_5!<A;1I'W FLUX) MINIMUM LIGHT FLUX IN FOR VALID DATA our. 2p.W DATA RATE. DC - 10Mb/SEC
O=2N3866 THIS SECTION
Fig. 31-1
Circuit Notes The receiver will accurately condition a wide range of light inputs at up to 10 MHz data rates. The optical signal is detected by the PIN photodiode and amplified by a broadband fed-back stage, Q1-Q3. A second, similar, stage gives further amplification. The output of this stage (Q5's collector) biases a 2-way peak detector (Q6-Q7). The maximum peak is stored in Q6' s emitter capacitor while the minimum excursion is retained in Q7's emitter capacitor. The dc value of Q5's output signal's mid-point appears at the junction of the 0.005 ~ capacitor and the 22 M ohm unit. This point will always sit midway between the signal's excursions, regardless of absolute amplitude. This signal-adaptive voltage is buffered by the low bias LTl0l2 to set the trigger voltage at the LTl016's positive input. The LTl016' s negative input is biased directly from Q5' s collector.
205
DC VARIABLe SPEED MOTOR CONTROL VIA FIBEROPTICS

+ 12 vDC
+24VDC
SPEED SLOW FAST
AOJ.
..
....
50K
lK 390 lK
1<
24VDC
MOTOR
0.05
D41Kl 15K
ISTALL:!:10A
750
220 D44H2 0.22 0.027

POWER SWITCH
18<
GFOEl A1'"""=~
100
0.33
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 31-2
Circuit Notes
Dc power can also be controlled via fiberoptics. The circuit provides an insulated speed control path for a small dc actuator motor (,;; VI, hp). Control logic is a selfcontained module requiring about 300 mWat 12 V, which can be battery powered. The control module furnishes infrared pulses, at a rate of 160 Hz, with a duty cycle determined by the position of the speed adjust potentiometer. The programmable unijunction multivibrator provides approximately 10 mA pulses to theGFOE1A1 at duty cycles adjustable over a range of 1% to 99%. The infrared pulses are detected by the GFODlA1, amplified by the D39CLpnp Darlington, and supplied to the power drive switch, which is connected in a Schmitt trigger configuration to supply the motor voltage pulses during the infrared pulses. Thus, the motor's average supply voltage is pulse width modulated to the desired speed, while its current is maintained between pulses by the A1l5F freewheeling diode. The snubber network connected in parallel with the power switch minimizes peak power dissipation in the output transistor, and enhancing reliability. Larger hp motors can be driven by adding another stage of current gain, while longer fiber range lengths can be obtained with an amplifier transistor driving the GFOE1Al.
206
FIBEROPTIC INTERFACE
MR502
120-V
+ 10 V
MfOD404f / OPTICAL fIBE~
-VO
4.7 V
+ 10 V
+VO
(2)
INS14
MCRIOOO-4
+ 10 V
3.9 k
10 k MCI741
MFOEI06F
IW I N4732
-=
5.6 k
MOTOROLA
Fig. 31-3
Circuit Notes
An Op amp is used to interface between a fiberoptic system and the MOS SCR to multi-cycle. half-wave control of a load. This receiver has two complementary outputs. one at a quiescent level of about 0.6 V and the second at 3 V. By adding a 4.7 V zener in series with the return bus. the effective VCC becomes 5.3 V and also the 0.6 V output level is translated up to about 5.3 V. This level is compatible with the reference input (5.9 V) of the single-ended powered op-amp acting as a comparator.
207
32
Field Strength Meters
Field Strength Meter Field Strength Meter n RF Sniffer High Sensitivity Field Strength Meter Transmission Indicator LF or HF Field Strength Meter
208
FIELDSTRENGTH METER
Loop Antenna
Circuit Notes
WILLIAM SHEETS
lN270
The antenna consists of about 20 cm of insulated stranded wire glued or taped around the inside of a small plastic box. RF current is rectified by two diodes, and a 10 k poten tiometer provides variable attenuation for the meter.
+
lN270
10 k
Fig. 32'
FIELDSTRENGTH METER 11
Telescoping Whip
220 k
+6V
01 mA
--r--1+
lN270
Tap at
~%
10 k Sensitivity
-6V
10 k "A741 TL081 Etc.
Total Turns
10 k
WILLlAM SHEETS
+6V
Zero Set
-6V
Fig. 32-2
Circuit Notes
"Minimum-parts" field-strength meter is shown here. For more distant testing, add the dc amplifier.
209
RF SNIFFER
ANTENNA
C3~
47
I
b
R5 4.7K R6
2.2K
02 2N3638
b
L1
2.5~H
01
Bl
+9V
I I
I
2N3904
R4 2.2K Bll
RF CHOKE
C2 .01
01
Ri lK
LEDl
lN34A
Cl .1 Rl lK
.,..
PIElO ELECTRIC BUllER
.,..
.,..
R2 lK R3 4.7K
Fig_ 32-3
.,..
Circuit Notes This circuit responds to RF signals from below the standard broadcast band to well over 500 MRz, and provides a visual and audible indication when a signal is received_ The circuit is designed to receive low-powered signals as well as strong sources of energy by adjusting the bias on the pick-up diode, Dl, with R2_ A very sensitive setting can be obtained by carefully adjusting R2 until the LED just begins to light and a faint sound is produced by the Piezo sounder.
210
HIGH-SENSITIVITY FIELD STRENGTH METER Whip
+4.SV
CR1
.----1>r--~--~------~+
TL081 IC1
100 to SOO I'A
+
100 k LOG. SENS
2.2k or 10k
RFC
100 k
4.S V
10 k
WILLIAM SHEETS
FIg. 32-4
Circuit Notes
A TL081 (IC1 op amp is used to increase sensitivity. RF signal is detected by CR1 and is then amplified by IC!. Full-scale sensitivity is set with the 100 K potentiometer.
TRANSMISSION .INDICATOR
ANTENNA
Circuit Notes
6V GE47
RI 100K
Dl
1N34 Cl
+C2 5
.-005
G K SCRi 50PIV lA
A
6.3V
TO TRANSMITTER
GROUND
Everytime the push-to-taIk button is closed the light will go on. The antenna samples the output RF from the transmitter. That signal is then rectified (detected) by germanium diode D1, and used to charge capacitor C2. The dc output is used to trigger a small siliconcontrolled rectifier (SCR1), which permits the current to flow through the small pilot lamp. For lower-power applications, such as CB radio, the antenna will have to be close-coupled to the antenna.
HANDSDN ELECTRONICS
FIg. 32-5
211
LF OR HF FIELD STRENGTH METER

WHIP
ANTENNA
.!
4.7~
Table 1.
L1
C1
(variable)
Frequency
Ham Band
Range
30-365 pF 30-365 pF 30-365 pF

2.5 mH
1- 4MHz 5-16MHz 9-30 MHz
160, 80 meters 40, 30, 20 meters
30.20.15.12.10
meters
Broadband at
reduced gain HAM RADIO
Fig. 32-6
Circuit Notes
Cl and Ll resonate on the 1750 meter band. with coverage from 150 kHz to 500 kHz. Ll can be slug-tuned for 160-to-190 kHz coverage alone or a 2.5 mH choke can be used for Ll, if desired, using Cl for tuning. A 1N270 germanium diode rectifies the RF signal and C2 is charged at the peak RF level. This dc level is amplified by an LM358. The gain is determined by R2 and R3, 1 100-kilohm linear potentiometer that varies thedc gain from 1 to 100, driving the 50 microampere meter. This field strength meter need not be limited to LF use. The Table shows the Ll and Cl values for HF operation and broadband operation.
212
33
Filter Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Low Cost Universal Active Filter State Variable Filter Wideband Two-Pole High-Pass Filter Active Low-Pass Filter with Digitally Selected Break Frequency Digitally Tuned Low Power Active Filter Razor Sharp CW Filter Fifth Order Chebyshev Multiple Feedback Low-Pass Filter Precision, Fast Settling Low-Pass Filter Programmable Bandpass Using Twin-T Bridge Active Bandpass Filter (to = 1000 Hz) Bandpass Filter Active Bandpass Filter Bandpass and Notch Filter Multiple-Feedback Bandpass Filter
213
-I>
LOW COST UNIVERSAL ACTIVE FILTER

15k
FIG 2
15k
FI G. 3
15k "\AAr-o
16 IN R 3 13 -15v IN R 3 4 13 14 lk IN 5.1 k -15... 3
16 14 XR-13600 4
~
XR-136001 C
_~
A,
XR-13600
5 12 Z M_
t5
12(;;1 11
-lSV
6 8
-15v
11~V. I
~
9 20k 5.1 k
tl11
n-1&;;V
6 8
VYV
L......A.AA
"r;~..l ~ 10~ ~e ~A :~T ~

89
5.1 k
t"\
+15V
5.1 k
OUT
---
....................
-15V
Fig. 33-1
Circuit Notes
The circuit as shown in Fig. 1 gives the bandpass operation the transfer function calculated from S/Wo FBP(s)
K
Interchanging the capacitor C with the resistor R at the input of the circuit high-pass operation is obtained. A low-pass filter is obtained by applying two parallel connections df R and C as shown in Fig. 2. The low-pass operation may be much improved with the circuit as given in Fig. 3. Here the gain and Q may be set up separately with respect to the cut-off frequency according to the equations
where K ~ 1 + s/Qwo + s2/wo2. The cut-off frequency, wo' and the Q-factor are given by Wo
~
g/C and Q
gR/2
where g is the transconductance at room temperature.
Q ~ lItB ~ 1 + R2/R1 , A ~ Q2 and Wo ~ g tB/C.
STATE VARIABLE FILTER
'0,
m
Vm
1Vl>P
m
Wk
IIe1
220Ft
nOR
HP
Wk
~-vV\~--------r-----------+--.ep
4>7
'Sk
,ek
Nor~
IC1,3,5 iJre 741 IC2,4 are CA3080
ELECTRONIC TODAY INTERNATIONAL
CONTROLS
FREQUENCY
FIg. 33-2
Circuit Notes
The filter produces three outputs: high,pass, bandpass, and low-pass. Frequency is linearly proportional to the gain of the two integrators. Two CA3080's, (IC2, 4) provide the variable gain, the resonant frequency being proportional to the current IABc . Using 741 op amps for IC3~a control range of 100 to 1, (resonant frequency) can be obtained. If CA3140's are used instead of 741's then this range can be extended to nearly 10,000 to 1.
WIDEBAND TWO-POLE HIGH-PASS FILTER
RI 79.5
v'
........
Cl 100 pF
-I0l~
Fig. 33-3
INPUT
0-1
11 '=" >-":.....-..... -0 OUTPUT
Circuit Notes The circuit provides a 10MHz cutoff frequency. Resistor R3 ensures that the input capacitance of the amplifier does not interact with the filter response at the frequency of interest. An equivalent low pass filter is similarly obtained by capacitance and resistance transformation.
215
ACTIVE LOW-PASS FILTER WITH DIGITALLY SELECTED BREAK FREQUENCY

+15 V
'3 C4-'50pF fC4 SELECT

C3'" 1,500 pF
V,
6 8
DG201A
7
"
9
,4
'0
fC3 SELECT TTL CONTAOL fC2 SELECT

Cl = Q,15 .. F
C2'" 0.0151- F
'5
'6
3
fC' SELECT
v2
4
GND
5
A,
= 'OK
6 ~--------------------~~VDUT 3
30 pF
SILICONIX
Fig. 33-4
Circuit Notes Variable low-pass filter has break frequencies at 1,10,100 Hz and 1kHz. The break frequency is 1
1. fc
216
'60 '20
CD
;;
Cl
" z
w
"""80
'C,
......
......
LM10l A
OPEN LOOP GAIN
......
'C2
'Cl
..
....
0
......
Cl
~.
-'
,~""
"
0
"'-.... "-.... "-.... "-.... "-.... ~

'0
'00
l',
_AL~
-40
FREQUENCY - Hz
"
'K
~ ~ ~ ""-.... ............ ~
'OK ,OOK
......
1M
AL IVOLTAGE GAIN BELOW BREAK FREQUENCYI
.~
fe
'00 140 dBI

= --'-
(BREAK FREOUENCY)
211R3CX
'L
,UNITY GAIN FREQUENCYI- - ' 211R,CX

-"
MAX ATTENUAT10N -= ~
-40 dB
The low frequency gain is
2.
A second break frequency (a zero) is introduced by rDS(on) of the DG201A, causing the minimum gain to be
3.
rDS(on) 100 =---=--
.01,
a maximum attenuation of 40 dB (80 dB relative to the low frequency gain).
217
DIGITALLY TUNED LOW POWER ACTIVE FILTER

100110
'ookO
lO,QOOpF
10,OOOpF
HI PASS
OUTPUT
SIGNAL INPUT
BANDPASS OUTPUT
lookn
l00kO
lookO
lO PASS
OUTPUT
,,0
68OkO R
68kO R
-=-
68,0
R
68OkO
.]V
-.fL.. ov
LOGIC
STROBE
JNTERSJL
Fig. 33-5
Circuit Notes
This constant gain, constant Q, variable frequency filter provides simultaneous lowpass, bandpass, and high-pass outputs with the component values shown, the center frequency will be 235 Hz and 23.5 Hz for high and low logic inputs respectively, Q 100, and gain = 100.
218
RAZOR-SHARP CW FILTER
.001
LBM
COl
LaM
0"
,,"
680K
.001
."
680K
.001
r"
'"
""
001
."
"
"
'"
'"
6eOK
00 ,"0
IUI=U2'/LA7<17)
'"
00
'"
'"
J:r~~uj
73 MAGAZINE
Fig. 33-6
Circuit Notes The circuit consists of four stages of active bandpass filtering provided by two typepA747 integrated-circuit dual op amps and includes a simple threshold detector (diodes D1 and D2) between stages 2 and 3 to reduce low-level background noise. Each of the four filter stages acts as a narrow bandpass filter with an audio bandpass centered at 750 Hz. The actual measured 3-dB bandwidth is only 80 Hz wide.
FIFTH ORDER CHEBYSHEV MULTIPLE FEEDBACK LOW PASS FILTER
O,2~F
o ~~f
'"
''''''
"
r--"" .
o 2~F
I~
"'"
t
,,,.
""
:~ ",'
I ".
Ol"F
11
r- INPUT
:~ ""
-
"'"
L--W-~
T
'"
~
'"
t
I
OUTPUT
i L--H:_.J
INTERSIL
Fig. 33-7
Circuit Notes The low bias currents permit high resistance and low capacitance values to be used to achieve low frequency cutoff. fe ~ 10 Hz, AVCL ~ 4, Passband ripple ~ 0.1 dB. Note that small capacitors (25-50 pF) may be needed for stability in some cases.
219
PRECISION, FAST SETTLING, LOWPASS FILTER

IOk
>---......--OUTPUT
INPUT--"""1'"""""....-i-.,
15V
7 4
#1
lT311A
-15V 1
-=-t-15V
FILTER CUT IN ADJUST 10k
lOOtl
-=-
7
OPTO-MOS SWITCH TYPE OFM1A THETA-J CORP.
LT311A
4
15V 1
-=LINEAR TECHNOLOGY
Fig. 338
Circuit Notes
This circuit is useful where fast signal acquisition and high precision are required, as in electronic scales. The filter's time constant is set by the 2 K ohm resistor and the IJ<F capacitor until comparator No. 1 switches. The time constant is then set by the 1.5 M ohm resistor and the IJ<F capacitor. Comparator No. 2 provides a quick reset. The circuit settles to a final value three times as fast as a simple 1.5 M ohm-1J<F filter, with almost no dc error.
~20
PROGRAMMABLE BANDPASS USING TWIN-T BRIDGE

IN
o---It---+...
2k
10V
Vc
1.2k
2.7k
E430
OUT
Fig. 33-9 Circuit Notes
The circuit gives a programmable bandpass where both the cut-over frequency and the gain, A, are controlled independently. In the twin-T bridge the resistors R and R/2 are replaced by two double FETs, E 430, the channel resistance of the first one in the series, the channel resistances of the second one are in parallel as to stimulate the resistance Rl2. Both these resistors are controlled by Vc which ranges from 0 V to about 1 V. The gain of the circuit is set by means of the resistors R2 and R3.
ACTIVE BANDPASS FILTER (fO
.047
~
1000 Hz)
68 k
+6
In
>--'0__
-6
-0
Out
WILLIAM SHEETS
Fig. 33-10
Circuit Notes This filter has a bandpass centered around 1kHz, for applications such as bridge amplifiers, null detectors, etc. The circuit uses a I'A741 IC and standard 5% tolerance components.
221
BANDPASS FILTER
RS
100K
Set Center Frequency
Trrm<
Gain
VIN
0-
_~R~3~~--~~--1
R7
R1
and Q .--"1\"""'""""1"""-
~--~~------------------~-oVBP
RS
6':; 00752A
100K 0 -10 -20

0;
~
./
....
.L
'"
-30 -40 . / -50
.... ....
1/
~
rlln \'\
~
....... " 0'1 ,...., Q"0
"
I~
'
w
rI\\ " "
l\\. "' ........
::~
~O
,,~: ;~
J11
VBP _ F.===.,=,w~D=;,a===.
.......
:
I
'- ,S? ,
VIN
J [1-( :0/]' +( ~
:,)'
J.-'"
V
,0
-60 , . / 0,1
RAYTHEON
~Q '110~
I!
FIg. 33-11
Circuit Notes
The input signal is applied through R3 to the inverting input of the summing amplifier and the output is taken from the first integrator. The summing amplifier will maintain equal voltage at the inverting and non-inverting inputs. Defining 1/R1C1 as Wj and 1IR2C2 as W2' this is now a convenient form to look at the center-frequency Wo and filter Q.
5 10 1 +---
R7
andQ
~ 10- 9 .jO.1R1R2
1.1 + R3
104
The frequency response for various values of Q is shown.
222
ACTIVE BANDPASS FILTER
Circuit Notes
O.Ol,.,.F 200kn
R3
Vcc
+12
R'
50 kn
v
6
O.Ol,.,.F
4.7 kn
200 kn
3
R4
The circuit is a two-pole active filter using a TL081 op amp. This type of circuit is usable only for Qs less than 10. The component values for this filter are calculated from the following equations.
Q 2Q
~ 2 24 kn r-~~---'~~~~~-' +12V
RI
2 fGC
R2
R3
2fC
-J25V
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
10,.,.F
Q
(2Q2 - G)2fC
R4
R3
Fig. 33-12
The values shown are for a center frequency of 800 Hz.
BANDPASS AND NOTCH FILTER

OO~~J<f
"
300
~
n 005jJF
100 k
300
~V
2
100 k
3Q
". ~~
1200k
100 k
BP _____
~V
VCC
300 k
t-J>-~
~.
,00 k
Vcc
300k
Vcc Vec IPm 141- 12 Vul Ground - pm 7 '0

NOTCH
1""'
V
"
300 k
300 k
Cenle,
Freque~cy ~OO
VC!:
BJndpm Output __ pIn 4 Notch Outpul_ pin 10
"
0-5
B"odp." Gain - 1
MOTOROLA
Fig. 33-13
Circuit Notes
The Quad op amp MC430l is used to configure a filter that will notch out a given frequency and produce that notched-out l1:equency at the BP terminal, useful in communications or measurement setups. By proper component selection any frequency filter up to a few tens of kilohertz can be obtained.
223
MUL TIPLEFEEDBACK BANDPASS FILTER

C2 11
r-----l"t--A ::":3:-----.
Al
A2
f: ~ 111---1-
TL0II.:/>-.....-oVQ
Fig. 3314
fY
Circuit Notes
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
The op amp is connected in the inverting mode. Resistor R3 from the output to the inverting input sets the gain and current through the frequency -determining capacitor. Cl. Capacitor C2 provides feedback from the output to the junction of RI and R2. Cl and C2 are always equal in value. Resistor R2 may be made adjustable in order to adjust the center frequency which is determined from: 1 fa = - 211'C Rl+R2V, 1 --x R3 R1R2
When designing a filter of this typejt is best to select a value for Cl and C2. keeping them equal. Typical-audio filters have capacitor values from 0.01 /LF to 0.1 /LF which will result in reasonable values for the resistors.
224
34
Flashers and Blinkers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Low Voltage Lamp Flasher Miniature Transistorized Light Flasher Alternating Flasher Electronic Light Flasher High-Power Battery-Operated Flasher Series SCR Lamp Flasher Handles a Wide Range of Loads SCR Relaxation Flasher Low Current Consumption Lamp Flasher LED Flasher Uses PUT 2 kW Flasher with Photoelectric Control Sequential Flasher 1 kW Flip-Flop Flasher Circuit Low Frequency Oscillator Flasher High Drive Oscillator/Flasher Transistorized Flashers Sequential ac Flasher Astable Flip-Flop with Starter LED Flasher Uses UJT
225
LOW VOLTAGE LAMP FLASHER

T
3V GE NO. 14
Rl
lOOk
01 MPU131
R3 1k
R6 51k
C4 4/L F
TI~ I' --
.. -~
Cl
10/LF
R4 2k
C2
If
1\
02 .. 2N5060
(SEE TEXT) 03 . ,'-- 2N50 60 ! R7 1k
;;~
R2 910
0.01 /LF R5 1k
0.G1 /LF
I1
~;
-MOTQROLA
Fig. 34-1
Circuit Notes The circuit is composed of a relaxation oscillator formed by Ql and an SCR flip-flop formed by Q2 and Q3. With the supply voltage applied to the circuit, the timing capacitor Cl charges to the firing point of the PUT, 2 volts plus a diode drop. The output ofthe PUT is coupled through two 0.02 I'F capacitors to the gate of Q2and Q3. To clarify operation, assume that Q3 is on and capacitor C4 is charged plus to minus as shown in the figure. The next pulse from the PUT oscillator turns Q2 on. This places the voltage on C4 across Q3 which momentarily reverse biases Q3. This reverse voltage turns Q3 off. After discharging, C4 then charges with its polarity reversed to that shown. The next pulse from Ql turns Q3 on and Q2 off. Note that C4 is a non-polarized capacitor. For the component values shown, the lamp is on for about y, second and off the same amount of time.
226
MINIATURE TRANSISTORIZED LIGHT FLASHER

vcc
lOOk
"
k
/. z.1::.
..
'i"
.7.,LZll.
<.
.J
~ ""'-~~~
--3;-~
Cl .zO,l4.F
Circuit Notes Rl adjusts the flash rate. The lamp should be a No. 122, No. 222 or other similar, miniature incandescent lamp.
,ov
I/(
~*
Fig. 34-2
-..!:+61/ .:!:: Vce

POPULAR ELECTRONICS
~ +#f'll
ALTERNATING FLASHER
5V-15V
LEDC
f)~
R1
R3
4
8
)
2.2K
470n
3 R1 ICl 555
470n
~
5
100!-'F
R4 68K
Circuit Notes The LED's flash alternately. The flash rate is determined by Cl and R4.
LeD
D~
~ C1 ,
,~
Cl
10"'
Fig. 34-3
.~
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
227
ELECTRONIC LIGHT FLASHER
501 +5-9V -------<l>--t------,
RS
2.2~
AC OUTLET
R2
Rl
4.7K
A3 4.7K
500K 7
8
Ul
6 U2
Hll J TRIAC DRIVER OPTDCOUPLER
555
117V AC
6
+
TIMER 2
TO
117V AC
Cl
4.7
Fig. 3'1-4
Circuit Notes
The blinking or flashing rate is determined by Ul, a 555 timer integrated circuit. Its output, at pin 3, feeds U2, a RIU triac driver. That driver consists of an infrared LED that is coupled internally to a light-activated silicon bilateral switch (DIAC). When the LED internal to U2 is turned on by the timer, UI, its light triggers the DlAC; effectively closing the circuit between pins 4 and 6, and fires the Triac, TRI through its gate circuit. When the Triac is firing, it acts as a closed clrcuit that turns on the light (or other device it may be controlling via SOl). When the timer turns off, the LED, the DIAC and Triac stop conducting and the light turns off. The sequence then repeats. The flashing rate can be varied by means of RI, a 500,000 ohm potentiometer.
228
HIGH-POWER BATTERY -OPERATED FLASHER
12 V = 81
:!:-+
-
RI I MEG n. PERIOD ADJUST RS

47K
R7 lOOn.
~SCRI G
kc CR3 ~
GE-XI R6 47K
-.J
R9 680n.
EOo
~
62 62 Err:
61
GE-XI
SCR~G
7
-,
CR2 R8 IK 'L Cl IS TO 201'1 AT 3S0 VOLTS AC
\::
01 GE-XIO
91 C2 .221' 1 150 V
-'
CRI
C3 101'1 25V
R4 47n
11 GE NO.1I2S LAMP (12 V,3AI
RIO 220n
GND
~
n
\J
R3 47K
/R2 500K SYMMETRY ADJUST d P C I GE-X6
FIg. 34-5
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Circuit Notes
Trus flasher operates from a I2-volt car or boat battery. It offers 36 to 40-watts output, variable flash rate (up to 60 flashes per minute), independent control of both on and off cycles and photoelectric night and day control that turns the flasher on at night and shuts it off during the day for automatic operation. SCRI and SCR2 form a basic dc flip-flop. The lamp load is the cathode leg of one SCR so that the other side of the load may be at ground (negative) potential (required in some applications). The flip-flop timing is controlled by a conventional UJT oscillator arrangement (QI, RI, C3, etc.). Potentiometer R2 and diode CRI provide on/off timing independence. Photoconductor PCl locks out the UJT firing circuit during the daylight hours.
229
SERIES SCR LAMP FLASHER HANDLES A WIDE RANGE OF LOADS
r------------------, I
LAMP LDAD
CRl IN4004
RI 3 k
CR3
R2
eR I seR
CI06
2"
R3 6Bk C I 50,uF+_ _- 1
Fig. 34-6
BI
SOY
R4 Ik
' ,
I
I
I
L ___________________
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Circuit Notes
Brief full-power flashes are obtained when the SCR conducts during positive half cycles of the line voltage. The SCR fires when the voltage at the divider, R3 and R4, reaches the gate-firing level. Diode Dl conducts during the reverse cycle of the SCR and provides preheating current to the lamp filaments.
SCR RELAXATION FLASHER
+20Vdc
6BO
I.Sk
lN538
Fig. 34-7
CI06 A2 4.7k
#47
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
I000,uf
220
I5Y
Circuit Notes
Flashing occurs each time the capacitor discharges through the turned-on SCR. When the discharge current falls below the SCR holding current, the SCR turns off, and the capacitor begins charging for another cycle. The circuit will maintain a slower but good flashing capability even after considerable battery degradation.
230
LOW CURRENT CONSUMPTION LAMP FLA1>HER
18V nom.
1
R6 39k
Trl
Cl
2~2
R7 27k R3 220k
Fig. 34-8
ELECTRONIC-ENGINEERING
Circuit Notes
The circuit is economical in components, and will work with virtually any transistors and is reliably self-starting. The voltage Vb can be taken from a divider, as shown at the right. If taken from a fixed source, flashing becomes slower as battery voltage falls. The lowest drive current into the base of Tr3 is about (Vb-O,6 V)/(R2 + R4). Resistor R4 limits the initial current from Cl and, as shown, R2 and R4 can be roughly equal when a divider is used for Vb. Resistor R2 equals R6R7/(R6+R7). With the voltages shown, and with R2 = R4, the on-time is about1.1 CIR2 and the off-time about 0.28 CIR1. Using the component values shown the period is about 0.55 sec. with a duty cycle of about 7% and a mean battery current including the Vb divider, about 1.5 mA.
LED FLASHER USES UJT
RI
IOI<-!Kll(
1001\
R'
BI_
4.~-16V-
1
Fig. 34-9
Cl
10-30
v'
'"
Circuit Notes A relaxation oscillator is used to flash an LED in the base circuit. Cl is charged slowly through RI by the power source, then discharged periodically through R3 and the LED by the UJT. Flashing rate is determined by the supply voltage and by RI-CI's time constant. UJT = 2N4871
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
231
2 kW FLASHER WITH PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL
RI 10K
GE-X4
R2 33K R3 I MEG fi
CR I GE-X4
.
CR 4 GE-X4
....
,
I I I
-'-.
Cl
50/Lt
150 VDC
/
PC I
C2
GE-X6
0.5/L t
100 VOC CR2 GE-X4
11
1000 wATT LAMP OR OTHER LOAD
--- -/~~---fP
SI R4 100 K OPTIONAL REMOTE CONTROL Cl RCUIT
120 VAC
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 34-10
Circuit Notes CRI, CR2, CR3, and CR4 form a bridge circuit with the SCR across the dc legs. With light on the photoconductor PCl, Cl charges through RI to about 150 Vdc. The resistance of PCl is low when illuminated, so very little voltage appears across it or C2. At about 90 volts Cl starts discharging through RI and the SCR, but the SCR cannot turn off until Cl is almost completely discharged. When the SCR turns off during the interval line voltage is near zero, the full supply voltage again appears across the bridge, and Cl charges again to a high voltage. The voltage on C2 also starts rising until the neon lamp fires and the cycle repeats. An alternative remote control can be made by adding a second neon lamp, N2, and masking the photocell so it sees only N2. A very sensitive remote control is thus obtained that is completely isolated from the load circuit. For low-voltage remote control a flashlight lamp may be used instead of N2 and operated at about Y, its normal voltage thus giving exceptionally long life. Performance of the photoelectric control may be inverted (flash when the photoconductor is illuminated) by interchanging PCl, and R2. Sensitivity in either the normal or inverted modes can be decreased by partially masking PCl, and can be increased by increasing resistor R2 to about 470 K. To increase on time, increase Cl; to increase off time, increase R3.
232
SEQUENTIAL FLASHER
117 VAC
--.------.-------.~----_,_--------~----___,
t+
VCC
R4
R5
10K
2'0
2'0
10'
2 3
5
lCl CA3079
2 3 9
IC4
CA:1079
7
8 )ISH
run
+Vcc
RI WEG
~-----,-_1l7
VAC
R7
tnK 2'0 4 lMP4
R2 lOK
16
Iel
R3
5~5 OiJT J
ll:c.
4017
14 eLK
12 2 4
lK
6
Cl .I
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig_34-11
Circuit Notes
A 555 timer, IC1, drives a 4017 CMOS decade counter. Each of the 4017's first four outputs drives a CA3079 zero-voltage switch_ Pin 9 of the CA3079 is used to inhibit output from pin 4, thereby disabling the string of pulses that IC normally delivers_ Those pulses occur every 8.3 ms, i.e., at a rate of 120 Hz. Each pulse has a width of 120 ,"so Due to the action of the CA3079, the lamps connected to the TRI-AC's tum on and off near the zero crossing of the ac waveform. Switching at that point increases lamp life by reducing the inrush of current that would happen if the lamp were turned on near the high point of the ac waveform. In addition, switching at the zero crossing reduces Radio-Frequency Interference (RFI) considerably. CAUTION: The CA3079's are driven directly from the 117-volt ac power line, so use care.
233
1 kW FLIP-FLOP FLASHER CIRCUIT

LOAD -I LOAO- 2
'KW
120 V
sO~
MAX
'KW
MAX.
TRIAC-2
Gf
SC459
R,
5611
RS
33
'W
0, Gf
2N3416
GE AI4F (4) 01 - D4
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 34-12
Circuit Notes This is an application of the static switch circuit where the control logic is a flipflop which is controlled by the unijunction transistor. The flashing rate can be adjusted from about 0.1 second to a 10 second cycle time.
LOW FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR-FLASHER

24v
R,
20M
2400
47fi
N4009
O.2~1
2201<
'OK IK
'OM
leD "0
100l1li'
~-t.
er ~
l
GENERAL ELECTRIC
3N81
r- D'N4009
od ICPS
OUT 'r' F'ACTOR
.
Circuit Notes
J~O""'
FIg. 34-13
Electrolytic capacitors are unnecessary to generate a 1 cps frequency. As an scs triggers on, the 0.2 I'F commutating capacitor turns off the other one and charges its gate capacitor to a negative potential. The gate capacitor charges towards 24 volts through 20 Mretriggering its scs. Battery power is delivered to the load with 88% efficiency. The 20 M resistors can be varied to change prf or duty factor .
234
HIGH DRIVE OSCILLATOR/FLASHER
R' 20"
Vec
5V
r---------I
-----------...,
I I I I
RI
7.5M
I
I
R3 240k R4 2k
"::"
W
"::"
W
"::"
W
"::"
20M
Vet - 5V
r---------I I -= I
-:
-----------...,
I I I I
7.5"
I
___
I L
'--'Ill..........
~4~.~4~
__ _
240k
'20
1''''
w
Fig. 34-14
Circuit Notes
The driver in the package is connected as a Schmitt trigger oscillator (A) where RI aod R2 are used to generate hysteresis. R3 aod C are the inverting feedback timing elements aod R4 is the pull-down load for the first driver. Because of its current capability. the circuit can be used to drive ao array of LEDs or lamps. H resistor R4 is replaced by an LED (plus a current limiting resistor). the circuit becomes a double flasher with the 2 LEDs flashing out of phase (B).
235
~
Flash i
TRANSISTORIZED FLASHERS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
ti
f
-40F 77F 60.0 59.6 14.6 14.9 60.0 58.1 27.5 29.1 60.0 57.7 46.0 46.2
--
212F 59.6 58.7 14.3 15.3 59.0 56.4 22.2 29.6 61. 5 55.2 48.2 47.0
Flashes per Minute CIRUIT #1 Flash Duration in
min. max.
58.0 56.7 14.5 15.1 58.6 55.6 26.3 28.8 59.0 55.4 45.2 45.6
- -
min. max.
min. max. min. max. min.
Flashes per Minute CIRCUIT #2 Flash Duration in
Flashes per Minute CIRCUIT #3 Flash Duration in

--
max.
min. max.
Circu it Notes
Transistors Q1 and Q2 are connected as a free running multivibrator. The output, at the emitter of Q2, drives the base of the common emitter amplifier Q3, which controls the lamp. This circuit configuration permits the flash duration, the interval between flashes, and the lamp type to be varied independently. Flash duration is proportional to the product of R2C2 while the off interval is proportional to the product of R3Cl. Consequently, when the flash t.iming must be accurately maintained, these component tolerances will have to be held to similar limits. All three circuits described are designed for barricade warning flasher lights such as used in highway construction. They differ only in flash duration which normally is 15%, 25%, or 50% of the flash rate. Performance has been checked at ambient temperatures of _40F, 77F, and 212F. AGE 5 volt, 90 milliampere type No. 1850 lamp is used.
Rl
10K CZ 22
'"
~
R'5
..j 1Cl 33~'

01 ZN2926
-,
,
R' ",
(I::.
mm.
OR
--1--
-=-6'0'
T-
0' 2N2714
CIRClIlT NO.I
15% FLASH DURATION 60 FLASHES PER MINUTE
2N3414
rr
3.3K
'"
I
R, Z4K
Cl 2'Z~'
- I
-==61/
:l )
RI Z,21(
Rl
lOK
01 2N2926
.----"'1-11+ I I -W
Cl
22~f
Cl 22/o'-t
."
R'
01 2N2926
Cl 33".'
=-6'0'
(r
2NZ714
CIRCUIT NO. 3
!Xl')r,. fLASH OURATION 60 FLASHES PER MINUTE
2NZ714
0' OR
2N3414
0'
CIRCUIT
NO.Z
2N3414
OR
2:5-'" FLASH DURATION 60 FLASHES PER MINUTE
Fig. 34-15
GENERAL ELECTRIC
.....
SEQUENTIAL AC FLASHER
r----I I R" I '00 .W I I
1----------ba
1N4001
-------, I 0' I
11114001
MDA 920A-4
R"
200 l!.W
0'
010 11114001
I I
1
11
T'
STANCOA P8389 Or Equiv S.3V\!II 1.0 A
A
03
;p
c,
2000 "F
15V
L_
- - - 1----1-- 1---a.
--., +-_--l
2N6346
115./ A<
aa
O.
~
R' ,00
~"'6
~'
'00 %W
L.R,
~~
Lamp 2
~
R" ,00
~.,
ao,H
L. ....p 3
,W
,W
'--
a,
ffi -....,..., 'M ,

R,
0.3 j1F
;
R,
fC3
"
2 "F
:;
a,
'00
R"
"
'-<
5,."
To
"V
I--------j,
R.
C41~2"F
CS
ItR'O
t2
"F
CS I ~.2
"F
1\
~
R'
c'
'T
Cb' .- ~
"
'"CT
1\
:t
[
R'
Q2
",
c~( 5 nF
RT
a.
2N5060
'"
c~,5"'F
a,
2N5060
2N5060
1\
D6 1N4oo1
1\
OT R'
lN4001
lN4001
0'
"
!'
Rn
"
"
Fig. 3416
MOTOROU INC.
Circuit Notes
This circuit uses a ring counter made up of Q3, Q4 and Q5. Q2 acts as an oscillator which triggers the SCRs Q3, Q4 and Q5 in sequence. When an SCR fires, a O.2I'F ca pacitor provides commutation, shutting off the previous stage. Triacs Q6, Q7 and Q8 control lamps 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
ASTABLE FLIP-FLOP WITH STARTER Circuit Notes A pair of non-zenered MOSPOWER transistors, a pair of LEDs and a simple ~RC circuit make an easy sequential flasher with almost -unlimited sequencing time-from momentary to several seconds. The infinite input resistance of the MOSFET gate allows for very long sequencing times that are impossible when using bipolars. One precaution, though, don't wire your circuit using phenolic or printed circuit boards when looking for slow sequencing (they exhibit too much leakage!).
SILlCONIX, INC.
Fig. 34-17
LED FLASHER USES PUT

RI
." "
:::=:: Cl
2"
3.91(
,"T~
VF,-
Circuit Notes
"'~
~~
" '"
"1
01_
This flasher circuit operates as a relaxation oscillator with Cl discharged periodically through the LED as the PUT switches on. The flashing rate is about lOO/minute with the component values listed.
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 34-18
239
35
Flow Detectors
Thermally Based Anemometer (Air Flowmeter) Air Flow Detector
240
THERMALLY BASED ANEMOMETER (AIR FLOWMETER)

2k +15V
270
1W
10k*
15Qk*
220
AIR FLOW
11328
.-+--..........M.--15V
3 3k
SOOk
1M
FULL-SCALE
FLOW
1k
RECOMMENDED
LAMP
ORIENTATION
':'
2k'
":" ZERO FLOW
LTl004-1 2V
01 = 2N6533 ':' Q2-Q5 ",CA3046 ARRAY [TIE PIN 13 (SUBSTRATE) TO -15V] ., % RESISTOR
OUTPUT QV-10V"" 0-1000
FEET IMIN
Fig. 35-1
Circuit Notes
This design used to measure air or gas flow works by measuring tbe energy required to maiotain a heated resistaoce wire at constaot temperature. The positive temperature coefficient of a small lamp, in combination witb its ready availability, makes it a good sensor. A type 328 lamp is modified for this circuit by removing its glass envelope. The lamp is placed in a bridge which is monitored by AI. AI's output is current amplified by Ql and fed back to drive the bridge. When power is applied, tbe lamp is at a low resistaoce and Ql's emitter tries to come full on. As current flows tbrough the lamp, its temperature quickly rises, forcing its resistaoce to increase. This action increases AI's negative input potential. Ql's emitter voltage decreases aod tbe circuit finds a stable operating point. To keep tbe bridge balaoced, Al acts to force the lamp's resistance, hence its temperature, constant. The 20 k - 2 k bridge values have been chosen so tbat tbe lamp operates just below the incaodescence point. To use this circuit, place tbe lamp in the air flow so tbat its filament is at a 90 aogle to the flow. Next, eitber 'shut off the air flow or shield tbe lamp from it aod adjust the zero flow potentiometer for a circuit output of 0 V. Then, expose the lamp to air flow of 1000 feet/minute aod trim tbe full flow potentiometer for la V output. Repeat these adjustments until botb points are fixed. With this procedure completed, tbe air flowmeter is accurate within 3% over the entire 0-1000 foot/minute range.
241
AIR FLOW DETECTOR

+15V
IOM
+ 15V
R,
1k
6
OUTPUT
Fig. 35-2
I
I
AT AMBIENT
Mount R, in airflow. Adjust R2 so output goes high when airflow stops
JUNCTION
COLD
-15V
242
36
Fluid and Moisture Detectors
Rain Warning Bleeper Water-Level Indicator Acid Rain Monitor Plant-Water Monitor Water-Level Sensing and Control Single Chip Pump Controller Plant-Water Gauge Liquid Flowmeter
243
RAIN WARNING BLEEPER
nf---.-----..vv--- + 12 V
Rain sensing grid
2N3565 1 m!l .01 2N3906
470 "F
16 V
10 !l
32 !l
WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 36-1
Circuit Notes
One small spot of rain on the sense pad of this bleeper will start this audio warning. It can also be operated by rising water. The circuit has two transistors, with feedback via capacitor Cl, but Trl cannot operate as long as the moisture sense pad is dry. When the pad conducts, Trl and Tr2 form an audio oscillatory circuit, the pitch depends somewhat on the resistance.
WATER-LEVEL INDICATOR
wc,
., 4'.
PROBES
Circuit Notes
c,
lN4001
SCAt
In this a warning device WD 1 is in series with SCRl. When the liquid level causes a conductive path between the probes, the SCR conducts sounding WDl. The warning device may be a Sonalert (TM) , a lamp or a buzzer. Dl acts as a transient suppressor. Press SI to reset the circuit.
ELECTRONICS TODAY INTERNATIONAL
Fig. 36-2
244
ACID RAIN MONITOR
, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + 4 ' 1 . SOL1 ,------------+-t:PORAIN SOlENIOD R' 01 5K 3N181 NULL o G2
117VAC
R5
220K
L---+~T1
R3 4100
Rl 5<lK
FULL S~!?-~~
~ , ,
L... ____ .J
pH SENSOR
12V
4SOmA
Cl
470~F
"A Ml
R5 4700 l00f-L A
ISEE TEXT)
35V
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
INSIDE: OUTSIDE
Fig. 36-3
Circuit Notes A bridge rectifier and 12-volt regulator powers the MOSFET sensing circuit. The unregulated output of the bridge rectifier operates the drain solenoid via switch SI. The sensor itself is built from two electrodes, one made of copper, the other of lead. In combination with the liquid trapped by the sensor, they form a miniature lead-acid cell whose output is amplified by MOSFET Q1. The maximum output produced by our prototype cell was about 50 p.A. MOSFET Ql serves as the fourth leg of a Wheatstone bridge. When acidity causes the sensor to generate a voltage, Ql turns on slightly, so its drain-to-source resistance decreases. That resistance variation causes an imbalance in the bridge, and that imbalance is indicated by meter M1. PLANT-WATER MONITOR Circuit Notes When the soil is moist, the LED glows. If the moisture falls below a certain predetennined level, the LED begins to flash. If there is still less moisture, the LED turns off. To calibrate, connect the battery and insert the probe into a container of dry soil. Set RI to its maximum value then reduce that resistance until the LED begins to flash. The range over which the LED flashes before going out is adjusted using R2.
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 36-4
245
WATER-LEVEL SENSING AND CONTR6L
60 Hz
117VAC{O---~}----~
TRI
SC141D
SENSITIVITY
RI 1Of)
.2 100n
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
Fig.
~6-5
Circuit Notes
The operation of the circuit is based on the difference in the primary inTpedance of a transformer when its secondary!s loaded and when it is open-circuit. The inTpedance of the primary of Tl andTesistor RI are in series with the load. The triac's gatecontrol voltage is developed across parallel resistors RI and R2. When the water level is low, the probe i&out of the water and SCRIis triggered on. It conducts and inTposes~a heavy load on transformer TI's secondary winding. That load is reflected back into the prima ry, gating triac TRI on, which energizes the load. If the load is an electric value in the water-supply line, it will open and remain open until the water rises and touches the probe, which shorts SCRI's gate and cathode, thereby turning off the SCRI, which effectively open-circuits the secondary. The opencircuit condition-when reflected back to the primary winding-removes the triac's trigger signal, thereby turning the water off. The load may range from a water valve, a relay controlling a pump supplying water for irrigation, or a solenoid valve controlling the water level in a garden lily pond.
246
SINGLE CHIP PUMP CONTROLLER
isolated electrode
r-o.output
NO
1max:maximum level 1min:minimum level
.......T.....
l.. ...........
~--~
(f/VI
~ .....
NO
+12V
+12V
Calibration position
Calibration
820k
position
Fig. 36-6
Circuit Notes This circuit controls the level of a tank using a bang-bang controlled electrical pump. The actual level of liquid is measured by a capacitive level-meter. The first inverter performs as a capacitance to frequency converter. It is a Schmitt oscillator and its frequency output decreases as the capacitance increases. The second inverter is a monostable which performs as a frequency to voltage converter (f/V). Its output is applied to the maximum and minimum level comparator inputs. Maxin1Um and minin1um liquid levels may be set by the potentiometers. The maximum level (1 max) may be preset between the limits: 65 pF less than C (1 max) less than 120 pF. The minin1um level is presetable and the limits are: 0 less than C (1 min) less than 25 pF.
247
PLANT WATER GAUGE
-----'-'-ljl- - - ~II-I-----Clv
~ATreR..,(
1/4 .,"'/
1''''''''''''
...... ~
,.G"'"
... "m'
'O"\W,.'
""~O'n'"' ,,'60\<
__
Fig. 36-7
PR03E'S
RADIOELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes
To calibrate the gauge, connect the battery and press the probes gently into a pot containing a plant that is just on the verge of needing water (stick it in so that only an inch of the probe is left visible at the top). Turn the potentiometer until the "OK" LED lights and then turn it back to the point where that LED goes out and the "W", or "Water", LED just comes on. The device should now be properly adjusted.
LIQUID FLOWMETER
32,"
'~M RESPO~SE
A2
lTl014
'>~""",...;,.""-'4'i
DALE
~U\
":1''"
.".
lOOk
638,'
ILIlW
CALI~
"
Fig. 36-8
'1% FilM R[SI~'OR flOW
fLOW
"SUPPLlED WITH YSI m<AMISTO~ NEl\'iOR~ T1 TZ YS' THERM;STOA NETVI/Q~K~ '~'201 FLOW IN PIPE IS IN~t~SELY ~AOP(l~TlO~AL IQ RESISTANCE OF 11-TZ TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE Al-A;! P~OVIDE i?I\lN 43 A4 i'1lOIDE lI~EAR'ZEO FREOUENC' OUTPUT
248
37 Frequency Meters
Power Frequency Meter Low Cost Frequency Indicator
249
POWER-FREQUENCY METER
rv
i~~k.J1.I'L
022f-J. F J.....J..- SC-40

CAL
Circuit Notes
jk
BLI4~
:10 TO 230 V ac 10TOIOOHz
68V
SQ-'W
The meter uses a zener diode to form square waves from input sine waves. After calibration with the 5 k ohm potentiometer, the 100 pA meter reads directly in hertz.
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 37-1
LOW COST FREQUENCY INDICATOR
.,
UNIT 1
R,
ON
-=e,
FREQUENCY
INP~
100-1000 mV .ms
e,
1
II
-=- -=-
c)
-=-
HIGH
U'-lIT ,
-=R,
e,
C,
e,
-=-
II
I I
\_01) I"i--O 13 1"-----1

I AT
EXAR
Circuit Notes The circuit shows how two tone decoders set up with overlapping detection bands can be used for a go/no go frequency meter. Unit 1 is set 6% above the desired sensing frequency and Unit 2 is set 6% below the desired frequency. Now, if the incoming frequency is within 13% of the desired frequency, either Unit 1 or Unit 2 will give an output. If both units are on, it means that the incoming frequency is within 1% of the desired frequency. Three light bulbs and a transistor allow low cost read-out. The le is an EXAR 567.
I I
BOTH UNITS
OVEAI...AP
ON
SENSING CENIEAFAEOUENCV
Fig. 37-2
250
38
Frequency Multiplier and Div~der Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box uf each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Nonselective Frequency Tripler Uses Transistor Saturation Characteristics Frequency Doubler Works to 1 MHz Low Frequency Divider Frequency Divider
251
NONSELECTIVE FREQUENCY TRIPLER USES TRANSISTOR SATURATION CHARACTERISTICS

15Y
+-------OVOUI
-15V
Vin
L2V
---r-----------,
av
,I
: I
_1,2V';I __
11
: I: +-_:.L
I
I
-L __
i
I1
...l.!....!.I __
I I
I I
:1
:1
"""7 1
I1
I:
I I
11
Voul
DAV
f-:- -'- -jt-
II
I1
: I
~i __ - .LI_~
I I
I1
__
OYH+--~,----~,+,--1
I1
11
::
::
11
11
I:
11
I
11
Circuit Notes The turn-on and turn-off characteristics of two complementary transistors can be combined to attain nonselective frequency tripling. The resulting circuit handles any periodic waveform with nonvertical sides. Each input signal peak produces three output signal peaks. The additional peaks occur where the input signal causes saturation of one of the two transistors. The circuit operates over a frequency range from dc to the upper limits of the complementary transistor pair. About the only disadvantage of the circuit is the lack of symmetry of the output signal peaks.
-OAV
LJl. ___ ll _______ I~ __
r-T2--+"+-T2-1
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 38-1
FREQUENCY DOUBLER WORKS TO 1 MHz

r-----~~1r---_1~---O'OY SAW Ik R5
62
03
2.2k 12 k RI
R-3 R6
01 INPUT o--~
BAW
e:r
MPS 6521
62
02
Circuit Notes Adding components Q3, D3, and resistors R3 through R6 to a conventional complementary symmetry class AB buffer can double the frequency of an input sine wave.
OUTPUT
Ilk
R2
2.2k
+-----'___
R4
--0
'-------.4-.------__0-'0v
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 38-2
252
LOW FREQUENCY DIVIDER
y+20VdC
TABLE
lLn311 RI
J9k
R3
Ik
A5
8V
Cl
I(
lN4001
01
MPU131
51k
"
01 MPSti5,2
D1
~
R4 100
~1
MOTOROLA
DI
lN4001
C1+
I
~
OUT
C,
0,01
~F
C2
0.01 J.l.f
0,02 J.tF 0,03 IJ.F
Division
2
3 4 5 6 1
0,01 J.l.F 0.01 J.l.F

0,01 J.tF
0,04 J.'.F
0,01 J..I.F
0.01 J.tF
005 J.l.f
0.06 J.l.F
AS
51k
0.01 J.tf 0.01 /-!f

0.Q1 J.l.F 0.01 foIF
0,07/-4f 008 j.tf 0,09/J.f

01 ,<IF
8
9 10
11
Fig. 38-3
Circuit Notes The ratio of capacitors Cl and C2 determines division. With a positive pulse applied to the base of Ql, assume that Cl = C2 and that Cl and C2 are discharged. When~l turns off, both Cl and C2 charge to 10 volts each through R3. On the next pulse to thehase of Ql, Cl is again discharged but C2 remains charged to 10 volts. As Ql turns off this time, Cl and C2 again charge. This time C2 charges to the peak point firing voltage of the PUT causing it to fire. This discharges capacitor C2 and allows capacitor Cl to charge to the line voltage. As soon as C2 discharges and Cl charges, the PUT turns off. The next cycle begins with another positive pulse on the base of Ql which again discharges Cl. The input and output frequency can be approximated by the equation (Cl
=
C2)
Cl For a 10 kHz input frequency with an amplitude of 3 volts, the table shows the values for Cl and C2 needed to divide by 2 to 11.
253
FREQUENCY DIVIDER
+Vcc (5to15V) RESET
~V~/~ 1,Aa
8
le- Ir
1---4
11
OUTF'UT1VOLTAGE 5
I1
vie
1
-0-- 2
NE/SE 585 6 OUTPUT 0 - - 3

1
W re 'f} ~ J V~~~~~E ~
7
CONTROL
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE 5 V/CM t '"' o:TMSlCM
--
I
h L-- h
l
~
TC06790S
Schematic Diagram
Ra - 12500 C - .02 pF
WF14990S
Expected Waveforms
SIGNETICS
FIg. 38-4
Circuit Notes If the input frequency is known, the timer can easily be used as a frequency divider by adjusting the length of the timeing cycle. Figure shows the waveforms of the timer when used as a divide-by-three circuit. This application makes use of the fact that this circuit cannot be retriggered during the timing cycle.
254
39
Frequency-to-Voltage Converters
Frequencyto-Voltage Converters
255
FREQUENCY-TO-VOl TAGE CONVERTERS
+Vs
=:
t15V
10k
.,Ok
lMJJl
1
-="N ---1'...._____6,
410pF
..JU1JL
..
-=t. ,.,4:
1--1-....- - VOUT
Rl
IOOkW
lOUT
+--+--TL/H/5680-7
RL VOUT = fiN X 2.09V X - X (RtCtl
RS
Use stable components with low temperature coefficients.
Slmpl. Frequency-to-Voltage Converter, 10 kHz Full-Scale, 0.06% Non-Unearlty

Fig. 39-1
Circuit Notes
In these applications, a pulse input at fIN is differentiated by a CoR network and the negative-going edge at pin 6 causes the input comparator to trigger the timer circuit. Just as with a V-to-F converter, the average current flowing out of pin 1 is IAVERAGE = i x (1.1 RI Cl) x f. In this simple circuit, this current is filtered in the network RL = 100 k ohm and 1 /LF. The ripple will be less than 10 mV peak, but the response will be slow, with a 0.1 second time constant, and settling of 0.7 second to 0.1%
256
-+-VS'- -+-4,SV TO +2tJV
IOk
'Ok
Rt 6.8":!: 1%C t IO.01 IJ P
R,
" ., 1-<1---------'''1
CI,410pF
LMJJl
RF
l00 .. U-
'OOk
RS ('2'"
C4,O,02,..F
'%'
Sk'
VOUT = -fiN X 2.09V X -
RF
RS
X (RM)
-Vs
Tl/H/5680-8
SELECT Rx
= (Vs -
2V) O.2mA
Use stable components with low temperature coefficients.
Precision Frequency-to-Voltage Converter, 10 kHz Full-scale with 2-Pole Filter, 0.01% Non-Linearity Maximum
accuracy. In the precision circuit, an operational amplifier provides a buffered output and also acts as a 2-pole filter. The ripple will beless than 5 mV peak for all frequencies above 1 kHz, and the response time will be much quicker than in Part 1. However, for input frequencies below 200 Hz, this circuit will have worse ripple than the figure. The engineering of the filter time-constants to get adequate response and small enough ripple simply requires a study of the compromises to be made. Inherently, V-to-F converter response can be fast, but F -to-V response cannot.
257
40 Function Generator Circuits

The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Quad Op Amp Generates Four Different Synchronized Waveforms Simultaneously A Sine/Cosine Generator for 0.1-10 kHz Oscillator or Amplifier with Wide Frequency Range Linear Triangle/Square Wave VCO Circuit for Multiplying Pulse Widths Programmable Voltage Controlled Frequency Synthesizer Emitter-Coupled RC Oscillator Voltage Controlled High Speed One Shot Ramp Generator with Variable Reset Level 555 Astable with Low Duty Cycle Monostable Using Video Amplifier and Comparator UJT Monostable Circuit lnsensitive to Change in Bias Voltage Astable Multivibrator Waveform Generator Linear Ramp Generator Function Generator Waveform Generator Single Supply Function Generator Precise Wave Generator
258
QUAD OP AMP GENERATES FOUR DIFFERENT SYNCHRONIZED WAVEFORMS SIMULTANEOUSLY
')
,~
c
IVR -IV. R
T
R-=- 0
A!-A4: RC4136
~ ~ ~
:hAN .:hl 1 r
@
- 'Vpk
Rl(k!l)
Duty cycle (%)
0.3 0.5 I 4 10 20 50
lOO
117.8
10.4 10.2 9.85 8.0 5.86 4.04 2.09 J.J6 I
8.8 8.9 9.2 1l.1 14.6 19.84 32.4 46.30 50
"1"'Jl\,'\J'\] '" '"

.......-- T - - . l
Fig. 40-1
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Circuit Notes
A quad op amp can simultaneously generate four synchronized waveforms. The two comparators (Al and A3) produce square and pulse waves, while the tWo integrators (A2 and A4) give triangular and sawtooth waves. Resistor Rl sets the duty cycle and the frequency, along with resistors R and capacitors C.
A SINE/COSINE GENERATOR FOR 0.1 - 10 kHz

10K 100K 10K
7.5V
A
E
V.
10K
r'M
1113
1-15V
.. .
100K
100K
''1K.
10K
TTL
.!.
...
10K
G'0K A,
c
+15V
1"'\--",
~Y'DG20'
+
'OK
'OK~f--.. +~;';~""'t--....- 47K
loon T1
10011 T2
47K
-15V
471<
100n
47K
/
F'tg: 1
'<
Fig. 40-2
+~
Aa
Out Cosine
.7K
L...-CITTLI
8.2K
+7.5V
."" A20utput
A8~'
.7K
Out Sine
A30uiput -:0:..-----'-'
+7.SV
B2K
A1, A2. Al., TlO7. AS,A&,A7.A8:TL014
n. 12: FET2N4093
Circu it Notes
D1, 1.. 06:
,,..148
Fig: 2
'" '"
The scheme presented delivers waveforms from any function generator producing a triangular output and a synchronized TTL square wave. A1 and A2 act as a two-phase current rectifier by inverting the negative voltage appearing at the input of Al. Positive input: Both A1 and A2 work as unity gain followers, D1 and D2 being in the off-state. Negative input: A1 has a - Y, gain (D1 off and D2 on), A2 has a + Y, gain and the total voltage transfer is - 1 between output and input. P1 allows a fine trimming of the -1 gain for the negative input signals. A3 adds a continuous voltage to the rectified positive signal in order to attack A4 which acts as a multiplier commanded by the TTL input through the analog switch. The signal polarity is reconstructed and the output of A4 delivers a triangular waveform shifted by 90 with respect to the input signal, Fig. 2. The original and the shifted voltages are fed into the triangle to sine converters through A5 and A7 working as impedance converters. Over the frequency dynamic ranges from 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz, the phase shift is constant and the distortion on the sine voltage is less than 10/0.
OSCILLATOR OR AMPLIFIER WITH WIDE FREQUENCY RANGE
Eou! R C1 R
2V,
R Ro
R1
Input Terminals
NASA
NOTES: 1. A1, A2. A3. and A4 are operational amplifiers 2. ALN = Amplitude-Llmltlna Network
Fig. 40-3
Circuit Notes
An oscillator/amplifier is resistively tllllable over a wide frequency range. Feedback circuits containing operational amplifiers, resistors, and capacitors synthesize the electrical effects of an inductance and capacitance in parallel between the input terminals. The synthetic inductance and capacitance, and, therefore, the resonant frequency of the input admittance, are adjusted by changing a potentiometer setting. The input signal is introduced in parallel to the noninverting input terminals of operational amplifiers Al and Az and to the potentiometer cursor. The voltages produced by the feedback circuits in response to input voltage VI are indicated at the various circuit nodes.
262
LINEAR TRIANGLE/SQUARE WAVE VCO

~ 3
,00k
R'
R2
'OOk
,r----t'C
y,~~ I+VeJ lOOk

ONL.Y .
y", 3
-:>
I
Ja,-,c,
+
74',
!5V
V\I'
I
IU1
!5V,\
!10V
.'O--------~--------r-------_r--
74'
+"
R5
.>
IC2
J\Jl
-'0
IC 2
OlON
ClOFF
01 ON
OUTPUT
I 0
'OOk
.5
50k
R'
R6
'/illy
'OOk
Cl SCl82L.
+ -5
't"
Fig. 40-4
IC'
OUTPUT
R7
'MO
POWEREDBV!12V
Circuit Notes
The VCO has two buffered outputs; a triangle wave and a square wave. Frequency is dependent on the output voltage swing of the Schmitt trigger, IC2. Superior perfonnance can be obtained by replacing Ql with a switching FET. Fast FET op amps will improve high frequency perfonnance.
CIRCUIT FOR MULTIPLYING PULSE WIDTHS

SV
12V
1k 8
710 : comparator 741 , 531 : operational amp
lk8 _\/\1\,...,. Comparator
lSk
470
.,
e2E-~
E-
eo
Fig. 40-5
Circuit Notes A circuit for multiplying the width of incoming pulses by a factor greater or less than unity is simple to build and has the feature that the multiplying factor can be selected by adjusting one potentiometer only. The multiplying factor is determined by setting the potentiometer P in the feedback of a 741 amplifier. The input pulses -"1 of width T and repetition period T is used to trigger a sawtooth generator at its rising edges to produce the waveform e2 having a peak value of (E) volt. This peak value is then sampled by the input pulses to generate the pulse train e3 having an average value of e4 (= E ET/T) which is proportional to T and independent on T. The dc voltage e4 is amplified by a factor k and compared with sawtooth waveform e2 giving output pulses of duration k T. The circuit is capable of operating over the frequency range 10 kHz - 100 kHz.
264
PROGRAMMABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER

., v
I
R2
lOkn
820n
"' "n
TRIG
(16)
Vee
NOTE
FLlP-FlOPS2-6
(11)
....-'-
ARE NOT SHOWN
1101
RESET
Il RR
I
I-
r- ---
=-
-- ----,
OSCILLATOR
";:::~~j
rh
VOLTAGE
Rl
"
~
kn
UTPUT
5kn
(12)
~ tMOO
REGULATOR "M"'"
C2
0.05
;,r0.1
:~JI
(13)
Rle
h-
;
I I
I I
,",
0
l,;1
T
'l~ ,
T
QT
(15)
20 kll
3.3kl1
Cl-:!::=-
~F~9 191
GND
~' ~ __________ J
P-< ~Kt> ~ L-9 0...-.2

T
181
al
121
aD
III
TBO
1141
;.. i 0; "0'--1
~ ~
'0;-
.,T,-
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 40-6
Circuit Notes The 1'A2240 consists of four basic circuit elements: (1) a time-base oscillator, (2) an eight-bit counter, (3) a control flip-flop, and (4) a voltage regulator. The basic frequency of the time-base oscillator (TBO) is set by the external time constant determined by the values of RI and Cl (I?RICI = 2 kHz). The open-collector output of the TBO is connected to the regulator output via a 20 k ohm pull-up resistor, and drives the input to the eight'bit counter. At power-up, a positive trigger pulse is detected across C2 which starts the TBO and sets all counter outputs to a low state. Once the 1'A2240 is initially triggered, any further trigger inputs are ignored until it is reset. In this astable operation, the "A2240 will free-run from the time it is triggered until it receives an external reset signal. Up to 255 discrete frequencies can be synthesized by connecting different counter outputs.
265
EMITTER-COUPLED RC OSCILLATOR
r---~------~-------------r----~.9V
'RI
300n
R3
560n
...nrU"l. 10/15V
R6
30K
3 +r J~J5
5/15V
QI
Q2
03
C2 0.5
R2
1.2K
R4 2.2K
2S/15V
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
R7 ...._-<> OUTPUT 6oon< p.p MAX 1.2V 600n
Fig. 40-7
Circuit Notes The circuit covers 15 Hz-30 kHz and is useful as a function generator. The 2N2926 or equivalent transistors can be used.
VOLTAGE CONTROLLED HIGH SPEED ONE SHOT

+5V
lOOp!
9
2k
680 'kLT319A 6 7408
5V
INPUT PULSE
+
~
~
,5V
OUTPUT
10k
IOOpl
1k
0- 1,,5
680
(20nS MINIMUM)
+
r'20PI
2k 0-1 VOLT INPUT
'i2lT319A
I3DOPI
LM385
12
FIg. 40-8
266
RAMP GENERATOR WITH VARIABLE RESET LEVEL
Fig. 40-9
'SELECT FOR RAMP RATE ~v

A:;>: 10k
.1T
=- 1.2V
IA2jC n)
555 ASTABLE WITH LOW DUTY CYCLE
yv' "
8
Vo
"01
1
Fig. 1
5
16
555
I
VZ ;> ejJ
1
v
"
v'
"
Fig. 40-10
Circuit Notes This free-running multivibrator uses an external current sink to discharge the timing capacitor. C. Therefore. intervall::l may easily be 1000 x the pulse duration. t1 which defines a positive output. Capacitor voltage. Vc. is a negative going ramp with exponential rise during "the pulse output periods.
267
MONOSTABlE USING VIDEO AMPLIFIER AND COMPARATOR +5V +5V +5V
~
C
I4K7
INPUT
1l
lOOp!
4K7 2
OUTPUT
lnF
-5V
INPUT ATTENUATOR
~
10
lK
220 IMO
SET FOR GAIN
-5V
Fig. 40-11
Circuit Notes The output of a video amplifier is differentiated before being fed to a Schottky comparator. The propagation delay is reduced to typically IOns. The output pulse width is set by the value of C, lOOpf giving a pulse of about 90ns duration. UJT MONOSTABLE CIRCUITlNSENSITIVE TO CHANGE IN BIAS VOLTAGE
+ 20 V
J kf2
2N4853
Fig. 40-12
3
10 kfl 10 kll
1.0MF .........-0 CE 271l
MOTOROLA INC.
POS. TRI GGER
268
ASTABLE MUL TIVIBRA TOR

VCC-+ 15V 01/-,F lOOk
Fig. 40-13
IC
~OTOROLA
MC3301
INC.
WAVEFORM GENERATOR
r-~________~______~______~S~17 O~~---------
OFF
ON
J.
T
.l..
61 9V I
SOUAREWAVE
10 C2
\ 1 12
",047
R2
22K
F'
HYr-l-----4
R8 "-
lOOK ~
R3 8.2MEG
R7
lOOK
SINEWAVE OISTORTlON
-~
Fig. 40-14
Circuit Notes The circuit is designed around the Intersil8038CC. Frequency range is approximately 20 Hz to 20 kHz-a tuning range of 1000:1 with a single control. The output frequency depends on the value of C2 and on the setting of potentiometer RI. Other values of C2 change the frequency range. Increase the value of C2 to lower the frequency. The lowest possible frequency is around .001 Hz and the highest is around 300 kHz.
269
LINEAR RAMP GENERATOR

15 V
Vcc
4 .7 kn
> >
01
:> .>
R t - 47 kn 141 RESET
IBI
NE555
VCC
2N3906
10 kn
"'161 THRESHOLD 121 TRIGGER
OUTPUT
131
Vo
'.-<. m1
et"" 0.01 J.'F .., ~
171 DISCHARGE CONTROL VOLTAGE 151
---'I NPUT _ _ _....
GND 111
;:r:
OUTPU_T ___
~IIL___
I4-T~
Fig. 40-15
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
270
LINEAR RAMP GENERATOR. Continued.
Circuit Notes
The linear charging ramp is most useful where linear control of voltage is required. Some possible applications are a long period voltage controlled timer. a voltage to pulse width converter, or a linear pulse width modulator. Ql is the current source transistor, supplying constant current to the timing capacitor Ct. When the timer is triggered, the clamp on Ct is removed and Ct charges linearly toward Vcc by virtue of the constant current supplied by Q1. The threshold at pin 6 is 3 Vcc; here, it is termed Vc. When the voltage across Ct reaches Vc volts, the timing cycle ends. The timing expression for output pulse with T is: In general, It should be 1 mA value compatible with the NE555.
FUNCTION GENERATOR
TRIANGLE WAVE
OUTPUT
R2
,00K
R,
,,,,R1+RC R2Rl 4 CRi Al If A3 == A2 -+- Rl
SIGNETICS
Fig. 40-16
271
WAVEFORM GENERATOR
'"
!1II914
2'OpF
,"
100 K
CA!>OB6
"
_24\1
'"
1/3 C/l.~f)60">-<!",---,~-"V'h-()
"
'"
RED lED
-24 V
q,l~
'1<-,~,<-------~--1------1 ~'"
~ SLOPE--".A .... ( ADJUSTMENT RANGE
,ol::
TRIANGLE OUTPUT LEVEL
6.8
10
~$e(
Il.S +SLOPf
ALL
IlESISTANCE
VALUES ARE IN OHMS
GENERAL ELECTRIC 'ReA
Fig. 40-17
Circuit Notes
The circuit uses a CA3060 triple OTA (two units serve as switched current generators controlled by a third amplifier). A CA3160 BiMOS op amp serves as a voltage follower to buffer the 0.0022 I'F integrating capacitor. The circuit has an adjustment range of 1,000,000:1 and a timing range of 20 I's to 20 sec. The "ON-OFF" switch actuates an LED that serves as both a pilot light and a low-battery indicator. The LED extends battery life, since it drops battery voltage to the circuit by approximately 1.2 volts, thus reducing supply current.
272
SINGLE SUPPLY FUNCTION GENERATOR

+9 V
8 Vp . p OUTPUT
10kn
+9V
SlSL
6
100 kS1
2 2
6
10 kn
R3
-= -=
100 kn
+4.5 V
4 V p_ p OUTPUT
-=47 kn
R2
RI
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 40-18
Circuit Notes
The circuit has both square-wave and triangle-wave output. The left section is similar in function to a comparator circuit that uses positive feedback for hysteresis. The inverting input is biased at one-half the Vcc voltage by resistors R4 and R5. The output is fed back to the non-inverting input of the first stage to control the frequency. The amplitude of the square wave is the output swing of the first stage, which is 8 V peak-to-peak. The second stage is basically an op amp integrator. The resistor R3 is the input element and capacitor Cl is the feedback element. The ratio R1/R2 sets the amplitude of the triangle wave, as referenced to the square-wave output. For both waveforms, the frequency of oscillation can be determined by the equation: fo
~
1
4R3C1
R2
RI
The output frequency is approximately 50 Hz with the given components.
273
PRECISE WAVE GENERATOR

,----"'-0
RI
,v
R,
10'
Cl
Ik
a 1l2,
.;v
R'
2k
D1 lNg14
RJ
[M118
>""'-'I.!'''",'Ir--*,=-I +
10
A2
~v
10'
1HlANlil E O~--""-+----l uUIPUT
+
1/2 lMI19B
> ....-0 OUTPUT SQUARE WAVE
H'
,,,
- RH 5V
tREF
NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR
Fig. 40-19
Circuit Notes
The positive and negative peak amplitude is controllable to an accuracy of about 0.01 V by a de input. Also. the output frequency and symmetry are easily adjustable. The oscillator consists of an integrator and two comparators-one comparator sets the positive peak and the other the negative peak of the triangle wave. If RI is replaced by a potentiometer. the frequency can be varied over at least a 10 to 1 range without affecting amplitude. Symmetry is also adjustable by connecting a 50 kG resistor from the inverting input of !he LM1l8 to the arm of the 1 kG potentiometer. The ends of the pOientiometer are connected across the supplies. Current for the resistor either adds or subtracts from the current through RI. changing the ramp time.
274
41 Games
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Electronic Roulette Lie Detector
275
ELECTRONIC ROULETTE
15
cl
T
R3
10K
RI
2201{
RI
lOOK
1 Ul 4046
PHASELOCKED LOOP
16 11 9
U1
4017
DECADE COUNTER!DIVIOER
R6
3905~
'---4-------~_"'T AS SOOKS. INC.
0----:..
-> ;~VDC
SOU RCE
Fig. 41-1
Circuit Notes
VI (a 4046 PLL containing a voltage controlled oscillator or VCO, two phase comparators, a source follower. and a Zener diode) is used to produce a low-frequency, pulsed output of about 40 Hz. The VCO's frequency range is determined by R6 and C2, which can be altered by varying the voltage at pin 9. The rising voltage causes the frequency to rise from zero to threshold and remain at that frequency as long as SI is closed. When SI is opened, Cl discharges slowly through RI to ground and the voltage falls toward zero. That produces a decreasing pulse rate. The output of VI at pin 4 is connected to the clock input of V2 (a 4017 decade decoder/driver) at pin 14 via C3. V2 sequentially advances through each of its ten outputs (0 to 9)-pins 1 to 7. and 9 to ll-with each input pulse. As each output goes high, its associated LED is lighted, and extinguished when it returns to the low state. Only eight outputs are used in the circuit, giving two numbers to the spinner of the house. The circuit can be set up so that the LED's lights sequence or you can use some staggered combination; the LEDs grouped in a straight line or a circle.
276
LIE DETECTOR
5 kO
Electrodes 1 I"F Electrodes
WILLIAM SHEETS
0-1 mA
4.5v
33 kO
+
2N3565
/ l-+--vvv--~
1.5 kO
-=- 4.5 v
Fig. 41-2
Circuit Notes
The two probes shown are held in the hands and the skin resistance applies bias to the transistor. The 5 k ohm pot is set for zero deflection on the meter. When the "subject" is embarrassed or lies. sweating on the hands takes place. increasing the bias to the transistor and upsetting the bridge balance.
277
42 Gas and Smoke Detectors

The sources of the following circuits are contained in ~the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Gas and Vapor Detector Toxic Gas Detector Gas Analyzer
278
GAS AND VAPOR DETECTOR
R2 10 kll
BAT
Check S2
O-f----,R3
22 kll
R7
9-12 V
~340T-S
R1
S1
4.7kll
50mA
2.2
k
R4
t--~~-+--{
18 kll
R5
D2 IN270 Mlf----VV'v--.....-r~f__<~___< RS 10kll D11N270

2.2 kO
LED1
WILLlAM SHEETS
FIg. 42-1
Circuit Notes The power drain is approximately 150 mA. IC1 provides a regulated 5-volt supply for the filament heater of the sensor. The gas sensitive element is connected as one arm of a resistance bridge consisting of R4, R7, R8 and the meter M1 with its associated resistors R5 and R6. The bridge can be balanced by adjusting R8 so that no current flows through the meter. A change in the sensor's resistance, caused by detection of noxious gases, will unbalance the circuit and deflect the meter. Diodes D1, D2 and resistor R5 protect the meter from overload while R6 determines overall sensitivity. R2 limits the current through the sensor; R1 and LED1 indicate that the circuit is working, so that you do not drain the battery leaving the unit on inadvertently; R3 and S2 give a battery level check.
279
TOXIC GAS DETECTOR
R3
seAl
C206A LE01
470n
4071
TO
+12
SOURCE
vac
,
C2
Cl .006
.01
IJI
use
555
'TIMER
C3 25
3
R1
R'
10H
47K
R2 47K
Fig. 42-2
Circuit Notes
The major device in the circuit is SR1 (a TGS812 toxic-gas sensor manufactured by Figaro Engineering Inc.) The gas-sensitive semiconductor (acting like a variable resistor in the presence of toxic gas) decreases in electrical resistance when gaseous toxins are absorbed from the sensor surface. A 25.000 ohm potentiometer (R5) connected to the sensor serves as a load, voltage-dividing network, and sensitivity control and has its center tap connected to the gate of SCRl. When toxic fumes come in contact with the sensor, decreasing its electrical resistance, current flows through the load (potentiometer R5). The voltage developed across the wiper of R5, which is connected to the gate of SCR1, triggers the SCR into conduction. With SCR1 now conducting, pin 1-volt supply for the semiconductor elements of the TGS812 in spite of the suggested 10 volts, thus reducing the standby current. A 7805 regulator is used to meet the 5-volt requirement for the heater and semiconductor elements.
280
GAS ANAL YZER
1 ,J
l l4.5V
.Gas Detector
WllLlAM SHEETS
1800
z. LED
2N
3906
Fig. 42-3
Circuit Notes The circuit shows a simple yes/no gas detector. Three 1.5-V D cells are used as a power supply, with SI acting as ao on/off switch. The heater is energized directly from the battery, while the electrodes are in series with a 10 k resistor. The voltage across this resistor is monitored by a pnp traosistor. When the sensor is in deao air, the resistance between the electrodes is about 40 k, so that only about 0.9 V is dropped across the 10 k resistor. This is insufficient to turn on the traosistor, because of the extra 1.6 V required to forward bias the light emitting diode (LED) in series with the emitter. When the sensor comes in contact with contaminated air, the resistaoce starts to fall, increasing the voltage dropped across the 10 k resistor. When the sensor resistance falls to about 10 k or less, the traosistor starts to turn on, current passes through the LED, causing it to emit. The 180 ohm resistor limits the current through the LED to a safe value.
281
43 Hall Effect Circuits

Angle of Rotation Detector Door Open Alarm
282
ANGLE OF ROTATION DETECTOR
270 0
180 0
/
11
~'V
,.,
_
//
SECOND UNIT
COS6
"'--
-Vp
'bl
Fig. 43-1 TEXAS,NSTRUMENTS
Circuit Notes The figure shows two TL3103 linear Hall-effect devices used for detecting the angle of rotation., The TL3103s are centered in the gap of a V-shaped permanent magnet. The angle that the south pole makes with the chip face of unit #1 is defined as angle O. Angle 0 is set to 0 when the chip face of unit #1 is perpendicular to the south pole of the magnet. As the south pole of the magnet sweeps through a 0 to 90 angle, the output of the sensor increases from 0. Sensor unit #2 decreases from its peak value of + Vp at 0 to a value VOQ at 90. So, the output of sensor unit #1 is a sine function of 0 and the output of unit #2 is a cosine function of 0 as shown. Thus, the first sensor yields the angle of rotation and the second sensor indicates the quadrant location.
283
DOOR OPEN ALARM

+5 V
I', I I I I
--,
,
12 kG
5.1 MO
T L
",
"E
DOOR
3
0 1
100 kO
0.1 _F
8
4
T L C 5 5 5
6
7
+
11.0 _F
3
LED
TIL220
PIEZO ALARM
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 43-2
Circuit Notes
Door open alarms are used chiefly in automotive, industrial, and appliance applications. This type of circuit can sense the opening of a refrigerator door. When the door opens, a triac could be activated to control the inside light. The figure shows a door position alarm. When the door is opened, an LED turns on and the piezo alarm sounds for approximately 5 seconds. This circuit uses a TL3019 Hall-effect device for the door sensor. This normally open switch is located in the door frame. The magnet is mounted in the door. When the door is in the closed position, the TL3019 output goes to logic low, and remains low until the door is opened. This design consists of a TLC555 monostable timer circuit. The 1 I'F capacitor and 5.1 M ohm resistor on pins 6 and 7 set the monostable RC time constant. These values allow the LED and piezo alarm to remain on about 5 seconds when triggered. One unusual aspect of this circuit is the method of triggering. Usually a 555 timer circuit is triggered by taking the trigger, pin 2, low which produces a high at the output, pin 3. In this configuration with the door in the closed position, the TL3019 output is held low. The trigger, pin 2, is connected to Yz the supply voltage Vcc. When the door opens, a positive high pulse is applied to control pin 5 through a 0.1 I'F capacitor and also to reset pin 4. This starts the timing cycle. Both the piezo alarm and the LED visual indicator are activated.
284
44 Humidity Sensors
Relative Humidity Sensor Signal Conditioner
285
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR SIGNAL CONDITIONER
r-----,
+5V
470ll 1k
100PF
o '/-,F
r-----,
lT1009
2.5V
90%RH
TRIM
__.... ov-w ... > 0%-100% RH

SENSOR = PANAMETRICS # RHS .. 5OO~F AT RH '" 76%
1.7pF/'Io RH
LINEAR TECHNOLOOY CORPORATION
Fig. 44-1
Circuit Notes This circuit combines two LTC1043s with a based humidity transducer in a simple charge-pump based circuit. The sensor specified has a nominal 400 pF capacitance at RH = 76%, with a slope of 1.7 pF/% RH. The average voltage across this device must be zero. This provision prevents deleterious electrochemical migration in the sensor. The LTC1043A inverts a resistively scaled portion of the LT1 009 reference, generating a negative potential at pin 14A. The LTC1043B alternately charges and discharges the humidity sensor via pins 12B, 13B, and 14B. With 14B and 12B connected, the sensor charges via the 1/LFunit to the negative potential at pin 14A. When the 14B-12B pair
286
-5V
470 1k.
500 90% ~--.-lill""'<I. RH TRIM
10k
LM301A
LT 1004
OUTPUT OV-1V= 0%-100%
12V
9k"
lQOpF
33k
~ 1% FILM RESISTOR
SENSUR=PANAMETRIGS ~RHS '" 500pF AT RH == 76% 17 pF/%RH
1k.
opens, 12B is connected to AI's summing point via 13B. The sensor now discharges into the summing point through the I /,F capacitor. Since the charge voltage is fixed, the average current into the summing point is determined by the sensor's humidity related value. The l/,F value ac couples the sensor to the charge-discharge path, maintaining the required zero average voltage across the device. The 22M resistor prevents accumulation of charge, which would stop current flow. The average current into AI's summing point is balanced by packets of charge delivered by the switched-capacitor gives Al an integrator-like response, and its output is dc.
287
45
Infrared Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Low Noise Infrared Detector Infrared Transmitter Infrared Transmitter Invisible Infrared Pulsed Laser Rifle Infrared Receiver Pulsed Infrared Diode Emitter Drive
288
LOW NOISE INFRARED DETECTOR

5V
101)
3311 100"t
SYNCHRONOUS DEMODULATOR Wk"
2671!
"'J"OPTICAl
~ CHOPP~R
10k"
RADlAn~:=*
PHOTO-
WHEEl
1000"F
5V
ELECTRIC PICK-OfF
DC OUT
INFRA RED ASSOCIATES. INe
- 5V
HgCdTE IR DETECTOR
131l<1,77 K
1DIl
Fig. 45-1
INFRARED TRANSMITTER
01
-';iR R2
33Or!
C
SI
R3
47n
R1 lOOK
At
+
Cl
4.7 +
AUDIO INPUT FROM TV, RADIO, ETC.
C2
1000
..l..
Ql
2N2222
T B1 19V
Jl
Fig. 45-2
Circuit Notes
The ultra-simple one-transistor, IR tr.msmitter shown is designed to transmit the sound from any 8 or 16 ohm audio source, such as a TV, radio, or tape recorder on an infrared beam of light.
289
INFRARED TRANSMITTER
z z ->
> 1
>
~
15
z! z .1 z - i> 11, > l!5 > ~ !5 :s

16
13
SEHON 8
14
18
19
;;
If If,, If If l/ j 1/" V V f 1/ /31 If If j j 1/" V V f f t" V If t j j" V V f f too f V f

/
/
.:
If { l{o If V l/.
SENIN
SEN2N
,
6
V 1/ V"
l/
SEN3N SEN4N
SEN5N
5 4
3
t
j
/"
.:
If ; 1/" .f f~ If If j~
V"
SN6N
"0-.
I~
,,'Cl
'OPTIONAl DIODES
1"r
Fig. 45-3
SIGNETlCS
Circuit Notes The transmitter keyboard is arranged as a scanned matrix. The matrix consists of 7 driver outputs and 7 sense inputs. The driver outputs DRVON to DRV6N are opendrain n-channel transistors and they are conductive in the stand-by mode. The 7 sense inputs (SENON to SEN6N) enable the generation of 56 command codes. With 2 external diodes all 64 commands are addressable. The sense inputs have p-channel pull-up transistors, so that they are HIGH until [hey are pulled LOW by connecting them to an output via a key depression to initiate a code transmission.
290
INVISIBLE INFRARED PULSED LASER RIFLE
'ffi
RII
65" ""
R6 MAY BE INCREASED TO I M(G FOR REAL. l.DN PULSE RATE
--l'----l~ ~...... 15IJsec

TEST POINT A
3vi.~msl
TEST POINTS XANQY
MEASURE 2:00- 225 VOLTS AT TPZ
TP-Z2>------------r----.,....:.:~-:.:.:._,
OS
I
TP-X
~C2B
~C2A
RIO
R3
TP-C
11
* MAY
;5 HEAVY LINES ARE FOR THE CURRENT DISCHARGE AND MUST 8 SHORT AND DIRECT TO ELIMINATE STRAY INDUCTANCE.
BE SELECTED FOR TRIMMING OF LASER PULSE DO NOT GO OVER SEvERAL OHMS
Fig. 45-4
TAB BOOKS INC.
Circuit Notes The device generates an adjustable frequency of low to medium powered IR pulses of invisible energy and must be treated with care. The portable battery pack is stepped up to 200 to 300 volts by the inverter circuit consisting of Ql, Q2, and Tl. Ql conducts until saturated, at which time, the base no longer can sustain it in an "on" state and Ql turns "off," causing the magnetic field in its collector winding to collapse thus producing a voltage or proper phase in the base drive winding that turns on Q2 until saturated, repeating the above sequence of events in an "onl off" action. The diodes connected at the bases provide a return path for the base drive current. The stepped up squarewave voltage on the secondary of Tl is rectified and integrated on C2.
291
INFRARED RECEIVER
SI
RI lOOK
R4 4.7K
R3
an
R5
220K
CD
JI
C3
04
02-04
2N2222
Fig. 45-5
Circuit Notes The circuit consists of Q1-a phototransistor that responds to an intensity of amplitude-modulated IR light source-and a three-stage, high-gain audio amplifier. Transformer T1 is used to match the output impedance of the receiver to today's popular low-impedance Oow-Z) headphones; but if a set of 1000-2000 ohm, magnetic (not crystal), high-impedance (high-Z) phones are to be used, remove Tl and connect the high-Z phones in place of Tl' s primary winding-the 1000-ohm winding.
PULSED INFRARED DIODE EMITTER DRIVE
0--------..--------<>
+ Supply
lR LEO
(on remote leads)
BU131
wo
2"13704
"2
Circuit Notes Q1 and Q2 form a constant current drive defined by R2. 0 approximates to the reciprocal of R2 in the circuit shown for values of I greater than 1 amp). The pulse current is drawn from Cl which is recharged during the time between pulses via RI. The value of Cl is determined from the duration and magnitude of the peak current required, and the time constant RI Cl . is determined from the duration between pulses.
Fig. 45-6
292
46
Instrumentation Amplifiers
Instrument Preamp Instrumentation Amplifier with 100 Volt Common Mode Range Current-Collector Head-Amplifier Instrumentation Meter Driver Saturated Standard Cell Amplifier
293
INSTRUMENT PREAMP
12V-3 OV
.~
Cl
A2 470K 31" 7 + Ul 741 2~ 4 C7 6
~tIN PUT
0-
il
"
t~l
250K C5 33pF:: A4 ~ 10K.
C2
F I(
QUTP UT
~4
SI 0.47
.~ 47K
A7
560pF [
A6 " 2.5K 10pF
, ~6
A3 470K
:; ~ C3
A5 6sn
Fig. 461
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes
The input impedance is the value of potentiometer RI. If your instrument has extradeep bass, change capacitor Cl to 0.5/<F. What appears to be an extra part in the feedback loop is a brightening tone control. The basic feedback from the op amp's output (pin 6) to the inverting input (pin 2) consists of resistor R7, and the series connection of resistor R4 and~capacitor C3, which produce a voltage gain of almost 5 (almost 14 dB). That should be more extra oomph than usually needed. If the circuit is somewhat short on bass response, increase the value of capacitor C3 to 1 to 10 /<F. Start with l/<F and increase the value until you get the bass effect you want.
INSTRUMENTATION AMPLIFIER WITH
10M
+15V 100\!
100 VOLT COMMON MODE RANGE
lOOM
INPUT
lOOk
Fig. 462
lT1012
/'--+-- OUTPUT
A, - 100
10M
- 15V
All ReSistors 1% or better
294
CURRENT-COLLECTOR HEAD-AMPLIFIER
+15V
0"
100
Q,
RB
>820
'
r---------------~
BD131
I
6mm
VR
I
"" 147
OV.
- 15V 0--' LM741
"K" % Rot8tKm
to
I 301
50
70
1 90 I 100
1"A 10M
~..>jYI'---==:':
;
fullscale desired .3
t 1 I
:
I~! I ! i~"
lOOn
0V C3
Output
OV
desired
V.
Measured VR 17,118
5.2
3.2
2.15
1.6 1.66
1.3
I Volts
L_ _
_ _ LT1008 _ _ _________ -15V 0 .J I
I 5,07 I 3,18 I 2.24
I 1,23 I 1.03
Fig. 46-3
Circuit Notes
To amplify small current signals such as from ah electron-collector inside a vacuum chamber, it is convenient for reasons of noise and bandwidth to have a "head-amplifier" attached to the chamber. The op amp NI is a precision bipolar device with extremely low bias current and offset voltage (1) as well as low noise, which allows the 100:1 feedback attenuator R4:R5. The resistance of R3 can be varied from above 10M to below 1R, and so the nominal 0 to 1 V-peak output signal corresponds to input current ranges of 1 nA to 10 p.A; this current i enters via the protective resistor RI. Light from the bulb B1 shines on R3, and the filament current I is controlled by the op amp N2. The reference voltage VR is "shaped" by the resistors R9R10 so as to tailor the bulb and LDR characteristics to the desired current ranges. Thus, rotation of the cahbrated knob K gives the appropriate resistance to R3 for the peak-current scale shown.
INSTRUMENTATION METER DRIVER
10 kn
lOO kn
2
6 10 kn
-VOD
P2
95 kn
10 kn
3
4
~CMRR
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS -VDD
VOO'" 5.0
ADJ IMUST BE NON INDUCTIVE)
-=
Fig. 46-4
Circuit Notes
Three op amps UI, U2, and U3 are connected in the basic instrumentation amplifier configuration. Operating from 5 V, pin 8 of each op amp is connected directly to ground and provides the ac performance desired in this application (high bias model. PI is for offset error correction and P2 allows adjustment of the input common mode rejection ratio. The high input impedance allows megohms without loading. The resulting circuit frequency response is 200 kHz at -3 dB and has a slew rate of 4.5 V/p,s.
SATURATED STANDARD CELL AMPLIFIER
,--------...-+ 15V
lT1012
>''--.- OUTPUT
Fig. 46-5
1.018235V
SATURATED STANDARD
-15V
CElL
.::-101 EPPLEY LABS NEWPORT, A,I A1
A2
The IYPlcalJOpA blJS current 01 the LT1012 Will degrade the standard cell by only 1 ppm/year Noise IS a fractron of a ppm U~protecled gate MOSFET isolates standard cell on power down
296
47
Integrator Circuits
Improved Non-Inverting Integrator Active Integrator with Inverting Buffer Long Time Integrator
297
IMPROVED NON-INVERTING INTEGRATOR

Fig. 1
R,
15K
Fig.3
v;
R,
15K 1SK R"
V;
0--"""
lK
I. I
' f',
R,
CO.22nF
V Ot21
...
O.22mF
Fig.2
R,
15K
R,
V;
15K
R,
lk
' f'
"
Fig. 47-1
Circuit Notes In the circuit in Fig. 1, IC1a produces the integral term required but also has the side effect of producing a proportional term not required, so this term is subtracted by IC1b leaving a pure integral. H the ratio R2/RS does not exactly match the ratio of R3/R4, the subtraction will not be complete and a smal! amount of the proportional term will reach the output. The result of this with a square wave input is shown in Fig. 3a as small steps in the output waveform at points X and Y. This effect can be completely removed by using the simplified circuit shown in Fig. 2. Here the signal is pre-inverted by ICla, then fed to a standard inverting integrator IClb. The result is a non-inverting integrator with the advantage that the unwanted proportional term is never produced, so it does not need to be subtracted.
298
ACTIVE INTEGRATOR WITH INVERTING BUFFER

.1/<F
""
'ME'
.... = .... "'t
fin > 200Hz
,p'1 pR,
-15 +15
CP~.J.
cv
o
~
eout=ca.>I:
".
INTEGRATOR WAVEFORMS
SQUARE
WAVE
IN
10V/cm
SINE WAVE
INPUT
INPUT
/V
/\
(\
~/
f\
IN
5V/cm
TRIANGLE WAVE
OUTPUT
OUT
1V/cm
COSINE WAVE OUTPUT
/\V~
OUT
o.SV/cm
= 1m./cm
H = 1m.Jcm
le = NElSE5512
SIGNETICS
Fig. 472
CD
LONG TIME INTEGRATOR

v'
RESET
INTEGRATE
-.I"
v-
---,
c
v'
VOUT'
," RC /
"
Fig. 47-3
V,N
on
v.. Low leakage capacitor 50k pot used for less sensitive
Vas adjust
300
48 Intercom Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694.
Intercom Party-Line Intercom The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section.
301
INTERCOM
+:( C2
TALK Sl
OTALK
I C5~::: j::::
.005
n
C7
Cl 1/ 6 1 2 3
~~nJ. ~
4 :: 1:: C9 .Q47
C6 :::: .005 ::: ,--------, 1
LISTEN
::: F
Ul LM386 AMPLIFIER
l!Q..J 8
~
+ ., C3, 220
.'\
C4
hl
::=~
23
4 ::
R2 15n ( LISTEN
fS2
I::::
U2 LM386 AMPLIFIER 8 7 6
Cl0 .047
~O
"+
10
tI
~~
SPKR 1
~I
SPKR 2
Fig. 48-1
+9V
Circuit Notes
The circuit consists of separate amplifiers-one for each station-rather than a single amplifier and a time sharing arrangement. VI and V2 are low-voltage audio amplifiers, each of which operates as separate entities with switches at either station controlling which will transmit or receive. With capacitors C7 and C8 included in the circuit, the amplifiers have a gain of 200. Omitting those two components drops the gain to about 20. Other gain levels are available with the addition of a series-connected RIC combination connected between pin 1 and pin 8-for example, a 1000 ohm resistor and 10 I'F capacitor for a gain of about 150.
302
PARTY-LINE INTERCOM
\
HANDSET 1
"
e;SIt-
o IjJ--F
I I
I
2N363SA (2.1
"
STATION A
11P30
SIGNAI.ING UNIT
EL.ECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 48-2
Circuit Notes
A large number of intercom stations can be tied together. All units are connected in parallel, and the entire system is buzzed by only one signaling circuit. Each unit is powered individually from 1. 5-V cells for redundancy. For greater signal volume, 3-V sources can be used for the supplies without changing any other parts of the system. The carbon microphone of a standard telephone handset at each station feeds into a common-base amplifier, and a tandem high-gain common-emitter stage drives the intercom line. All phone earpieces are in parallel across the line. The signaling circuit, also connected across the line, is a simple oscillator that drives all the earpieces.
303
49
Lamp-Control Circuits
Voltage Regulator for a Projection Lamp Machine Vision Illumination Stabilizer dc Lamp Dimmer Automatic Light Controller for Carport 800 W Light-Dimmer
Lamp Dimmer Rugged Lamp Driver is Short-Circuit Proof TRIAC Lamp Dimmer TRIAC Zero-Point Switch Tandem Dimmer (Cross-Fader)
304
VOLTAGE REGULATOR FOR A PROJECTION LAMP

MDA920A7 Dl-D4 Rl 3k 5W R3 10 k lW D5 lN5250A D4 R4 25 k lW Cl 0.1 J1.f
R2
ClAIREX CL605
TUBE ISEE TEXT)
Ll MPS6517 01 02 2N4870
Dl
D2
03 2N5569
D3 105 TO 250 V AC POWER SOURCE
T1
o----------------~----------------------------------~~~
Ll -150 WATT PROJECTION LAMP WITH BUILT-IN REfLECTOR MIRROR

MOTOROLA
SPRAGUE 11Z12
Fig. 49-1
Circuit Notes The circuit will regulate the rms output voltage across the load (a projection lamp) to 100 volts 20/0 for an input voltage between 105 and 250 volts ac. This is accomplished by indirectly sensing the light output of lamp L1 and applying this feedback signal to the firing circuit (Q1 and Q2) which controls the conduction angle of TRIAC Q3. The lamp voltage is provided by TRIAC Q3, whose conduction angle is set by the firing circuit for unijunction transistor Q2. The circuit is synchronized with the line through the fullwave bridge rectifier. The voltage to the firing circuit is limited by zener diode D5. Phase control of the supply voltage is set by the charging rate of capacitor Cl. Q2 will fire when the voltage on Cl reaches approximately 0.65 times the zener voltage. The charging rate of Cl is set by the conduction of Q1, which is controlled by the resistance of photocell R2. Potentiometers R3 and R4 are used to set the lamp voltage to 100 volts when the line voltage is 105 volts and 250 volts, respectively.
305
MACHINE VISION ILLUMINATION STABILIZER
10 , R6 82 , 'I;;W
<
R5
R3
13'
.'::{~ 1"':~ 1,,""1

C3 200 16 V
~
03
~
150 k
MPS-051
J~r...V\I\,
1
28 V
,)
tOOW
120 V
BULB
1N5544A D2
R4 39 ,
1N4003 D3
115~IH
D
R2
C2
r
III a
r r
~14
J
111h
Ule
[ G
I
10 V
lN5530A
Dl
I 10 k~ ..L.01/16 V At 'T' Ct
Ul
MC14093B
MOTOROLA
Fig. 49-2
Cl rcult Notes
The combination of QI. Q2 and UI form a hysteresis oscillator to stabilize lamp illumination. In operation, full wave bridge D3 operates directly from the ac line to supply unregulated dc to the lamp and also to the 10 V zener that provides power to the quad CMOS Schmitt trigger, Ul. When the lamp supply exceeds 115 V, QI is turned ON, charging Cl through R2 to raise the input to UIa past the positive-going logic threshold. This drops the output voltage at Ulc and UId, which drives the gate of Q2, turning it OFF. Current then decays through the lamp, Ll and D3 until the lamp voltage falls below 115 V, at which time QI turns OFF and the cycle repeats.
DC LAMP DIMMER
LAMP 5 WATT-TO-48 WATT "HAND SPOT"
RB
I
50-60 WATTS
.
R1 8.2 k
,
3 7 10 k
)~
02 1N4004
'OIl
4 3
+
-
R2 01 ~N914
MC1455P1 U1 1
/P~ I[~ "--:t::
01 MTP10N10
R3
, ~k
3.9 k
R4 22116 V + ; C1
C3
.01
r:
!:: .01
i"C2
h
~~
MOTOROLA
Fig. 49-3
Circuit Notes
A low power, low cost dc lamp dimmer for a two-wire portable "flashlight" can be realized with little or no heatsinking. In addition, a single potentiometer, R3 adjusts lamp brightness. Battery power is stored in Cl for U1, which is a free-running multivibrator whose frequency is determined by R1, R2, R3, R4, and C2. U1 drives the gate of Q1, turning it and the lamp ON and OFF at a rate proportional to the multivibrator duty cycle.
307
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROLLER FOR CARPORT

'VOLT SUPPLY
pC3
PC ....
r- - - - - - ,
0--:, -------,
I
L-----------+-----------*--,'~~-'VOLT
L~c."~
PC 1- PC4 RADIO SHACk
27(,,-11(, OR. EQUIVALE.NT
INDOOR
__ J
CARPORT
I,..IGHi 5WITCK
RADIOELECTRONICS
Fig. 49-4
Circuit Notes
A 555 timer IC, operating in the one-shot mode, is triggered by light striking photoresistors. These normally have a resistance of several megohms but, in the pres ence of light, that resistance drops to several hundred ohms, permitting current from the six-volt source to flow in the circuit. The R-C combination shown gives an on-time of about two minutes. Photoresistors PC3 and PC4 are mounted at heatlight-height. When headlights illuminate the photoresistor, the timer starts. That actuates a relay, RY!. and the lights are turned on. The lights are automatically turned off when the timer's two minutes are up.
308
800 W LIGHT-DIMMER
LOAD
R1
'" 2W
r
I
115 VAC
---,
01 01 03 04
R2 150 I:
0' lN4748
60 III
I I I
I I
I
I I I I I
..J
01
2N4871
T1
$PRAGUE
02
l1Z12
11V
Cl
D.' ~F
2N6346 OR 2N5569
I L
____
Mo:A920A4
MOTOROLA
Fig. 49-5
Circuit Notes This wide-range light dimmer circuit uses a unijunction transistor and a pulse transformer to provide phase control for the TRIAC. The circuit operates from a 115 volt, 60 Hz source and can control up to 800 watts of power to incandescent lights. The power to the lights is controlled by varying the conduction angle of the TRIAC from 0 0 to about 170 0 The power available at 170 0 conduction is better than 97% of that at the full 180 0
LAMP DIMMER Circuit Notes
lOk
,
10.
120 VAC
MOTOROLA
Fig. 49-6
A full range power controller suitable for lamp dimming and similar applications operate from a 120 volt, 60 Hz ac source, and can control up to 1000 watts of power to incandescent bulbs. The power to the bulbs is varied by controlling the conduction angle of TRIAC Ql. At the end of each positive halfcycle when the applied voltage drops below that of the capacitor, gate current flows out of the SBS and it switches on, discharging the capacitor to near zero volts. The RC network shown across the TRIAC represents a typical snubber circuit that is normally adequate to prevent line transients from accidentally firing the TRIAC.
309
RUGGED LAMP DRIVER IS SHORT-CIRCUIT PROOF

+5V logic Supply
R3
+60V lamp Supply
4K7
'2K
Control Signal
-,, ,
1 _.J
74SC132
t--lP "~rd
TR'
TlP121
100 R5
---r--,
n5
TH1
Thermal Link BZVe8 C3V9
R4
IK5
OV logic Supply
ZD'
Mounting Tabs bolte-d together

to give thermal
' - - - - - - -......-----1 DV lamp Supply
link
Fig. 1
Fig.2
Fig. 49-7
Circuit Notes This circuit is capable of driving filament lamps of nominal rating 200 mA at 60 V dc from a CMOS logic signal. The lamp or load is connected in series with the Darlington transistor TR1 and emitter resistor R5. The Zener diode ZD1 establishes a soft reference voltage on the collector of the optical coupler IC2. When the logic control signal from the processor switches the optocoupler on via IC1, base drive is applied to TRl and the lamp is switched on.
TRIAC LAMP DIMMER
EXTERNAL LAMP TO 3~OW
RI
50K
11
MT2
Cl
... .. I
R2 15K
1111 40502
,..
tii:I
C7
6H
~--
Mfl Pl1
Circuit Notes Using a heatsink, the TRIAC (TRl) can handle up to 350 watts. The neon lamp, 11, won't trip the gate until after it conducts and using RI, set the lighting wherever you want it.
-.:" r 0
___
"_...J 117 VAC

Fig. 49-8
TAB BOOKS, INC.
310
TRIAC ZEROPOINT SWITCH
C2 2 "F 200 V
02 2N6346 D4 IN4001 D5 IN4003
115 VAC 60 Hz
RI 12 k 2W R2 10 k
Cl 10 "F 5V
D3 IN4003
D2 IN4003 01 MCR1906-4 SI R5 Ik 2W
+ C3
1 "F 200 V LOAD
D6 lN4372
MOTOROLA
fig. 499
Circuit Notes
On the initial part of the positive half cycle, the voltage is changing rapidly from zero causing a large current to flow into capacitor C2. The current through C2 flows through R4, D3, and D4 into the gate of the TRIAC Q2 causing it to turn on very close to zero voltage. OnceQ2 turns on, capacitor C3 charges to the peak of the line voltage through D5. When the line voltage passes through the peak, D5 becomes reversebiased and C3 begins to discharge through D4 and the gate of Q2. At this time the voltage on C3 lags the line voltage. When the line voltage goes through zero there is still some charge on C3 so that when the line voltage starts negative C3 is still discharging into the gate of Q2. Thus Q2 is also turned on near zero on the negative half cycle. This operation continues for each cycle until switch 51 is closed, at which time 5CR Q1 is turned on. Q1 shunts the gate current away from Q2 during each positive half cycle keeping Q2 from turning on. Q2 cannot turn on during the negative cyCle because C3 cannot charge unless Q2 is on during the positive half cycle.
311
TANDEM DIMMER (CROSS-FADER)
LAMP
I
LAMP 2
IZOV 60-
~L_' R~I~
__
______
~ ~~R~2~ ~L~
____ __
C,
C,
RI' R2" S800n I WATT
l,'LZ,60..,hy (fERRITE CORE)

CI'C2'C3"0,I~'
"3" I!lOK
LINEAR POT. IW
50V
-200 VOLTS
"'5" Rs'221oin,II2W.
R4'15Kn,II2W.
c4 "c,' 0.1..,'
TR I ' TR 2'TRIAC
DI'02'GEST-2 DlAC
Non: mrAL LIGHT l.EVEl (SUM OF
lAMPS H2J CONSTANT WIlHIN 15." .
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 49-10
Circuit Notes
This cross fader circuit can be used for fading between two slide projectors. As R3 is moved to either side of center. one triac is fired earlier in each half cycle. and the other later. The total light output of both lamps stays about the same for any control position.
312
50
Laser Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Laser Light Detector Stabilizing a Laser Discharge Current
313
RI4 R2 I1 rn->-9
4
LASER LIGHT DETECTOR

+
2mo
illl
rh
BI
R3
)51
R4
B2
1I1I
R5
3-4ma
,
R6
C5)r--
12 &,
\
\ \
7 10
AI
5"
+:('6
IS
3
R8
RI
+ C2 ;:r:~
JI
C3
~
0
EBC
.:!:~
J2
R7
C4:
tTEST POINT A 8 C D E
F
r, 7
SCHEMATIC
6
1 ,2,3,4 BOTTOM
VALUE 6-8V 4-5V 3-4V O( 31V 9(4.5IV O(3IV O(IIV
"
9
2
10
12 B
5
6
NOT
USED
3
1 7
05
AI CA3018 SOiEMATIC
~
e
G
H
91.21 V VALUE IN PARENTHESIS ARE IN THE "ACTUATED" STATE AND ARE WITH A REALISTIC #CTR -43 RECORDER.
TAB BOOKS INC.
Fig. 50-1
Circuit Notes The laser light detector utilizes a sensitive photo transistor (Q5) placed at the focal point of a lens (LE2). The output of Q5 is fed to a sensitive amplifier consisting of array (AI) and is biased via the voltage divider consisting of Rl4 and RI. The base is not used. Q5 is capacitively coupled to a Darlington pair for impedance transfonning and is further fed to a capacitively coupled cascaded pair of common-emitter amplifiers for further signal
314
14
" "
02
RII RI6 KI 6 RI9
""",,"-[1
R 17
03
RI8 R20
03 "04
RI3
J3
+----------------......>-----' FOR CQ\jTROL
TO CIRCUIT
HCirl:
B~K~li
P2
BlK GRN SPLICE TI INTO HEADSET PLUG lEAD
USED
~~E~r17:1 as =.f):O:;:::f!n"J
WRIO
PI
E
RECEIIIR PHOTOTRANSISTOR AND CABLE
amplification. Sensitivity control (R7) controls base drive to the final transistor of the array and hence controls overall system sensitivity. Output of the amplifier array is capacitively coupled to a one-shot consisting of Ql and Q2 in turn integrating the output pulses of Q2 onto capacitor C8 through D1. This de level now drives relay drivers Q3 and Q4 activating Kl along with energizing indicator D3, consequently controlling the desired external circuitry. The contacts of Kl are in series with low ohm resistor R13 to prevent failure when switching capacitive loads. J2 allows' 'listening" to the intercepted light beam via headsets. This is especially useful when working with pulsed light sources such as GaAs lasers or any other varying periodic light source.
315
Co>
~
0'>
STABILIZING A LASER DISCHARGE CURRENT

100l'F
f!
L,
R,
0.1S!!
D
Vc
r-
--,
GND
R,
R,
'l
Q,
lOK
C, C,
0.11'F 13kV
4.7nF/4kV
0. 1Jlr/3kV
R,
1S0K/BW
11OD!!
_ -.JR,
2K7 1'2 1'3 1'0
R"
2 4711
+ Vs Rn
1KS
Laser plasma tube
R,
1JVC
S
V+ COMP Vout C
U1
1M
v...
Vref
V~
R'~ 6 3K
R,
2KS
INV~ X
CS 3
VI
R"
D,
R"
MP
cw.
! !
~T
. l'
Id
lKl%
Ji
3K9
C'T
~R' 2001l
-;
Fig. 50-2
0,
D~:
03
D~
BA159 PL33Z
lN414B PL7V5
NPFNp2
U,
I LM723
Ns
NI
8 turns 1100 turns
~~Bl01
5 turns
0, KD167 Q, B0140 Q, BC173C Q~: 05 2N5496
04.
0, 0,
D. 0"
PL47Z
LA40
Circuit Notes
The circuit uses a free-running push-pull dc to dc high voltage converter to get the necessary voltage for the laser plasma tube supply. The supply voltage Vc of this converter, is adjusted by a switch-mode power supply in order to keep the load current constant, at set value. The linear opto-electronic isolator U2, connected in series with tile laser plasma tube, gives a voltage VF proportional to the discharge current ID across RI8, having the correct polarity to drive directly the inverting input of Ul, D7, RI5 protects the optoisolator diode against damage produced by the high voltage ignition pulse. Due to the high operating frequency of the high voltage converter (25 kHz) the ripple of the laser output power is less than 2.10- 4 . The stability of ID is better than 10- 2, for variations of supply voltage Vs is the range of 10%, and depends on the optoisolator sensitivity.
'" ....
~
51
Light-Controlled Circuits
Photo Alarm Warning Light Operates from Battery Power Supply Light Operated Switch Photoelectric Switch Back-Biased GaAsP LED Operates as Light Sensor Twilight-Triggered Circuit Automatic Mooring Light Electronic Wake-Up Call Photodiode Sensor Amplifier Light Seeking Robot
Synchronous Photoelectric Switch Photocurrent Integrator Robot Eyes Modulated Light-Beam Circuit Cancels Ambient Light Effects Monostable Photocell Circuit has Self-Adjusting Trigger Level Thermally Stabilized PIN Photodiode Signal Conditioner
318
PHOTO ALARM
+5 TO 15V
RI
I OK
SENSITIVITY 4
8
~}TO CON TROLLED

"'-l-o Cl RCUIT
01 IN4002.,
I I
UI
565
6
OSC.!TIMER
I ,
KI
~
LORI
;:: ~ Cl
()
---
.01
GND
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
Fig. 51-1
Circuit Notes
LDRl, a cadmium sulphide (CDS) photoresistive cell is used as the lower leg of a voltage divider between Vcc and ground. The timer terminals 2 and 6 are connected to the junction of the photocell and SENSITIVITY control RI. The resistance of the photoresistive cell varies inversely as the light intensity; resistance is high when the illumination level is low; low in bright light. (The Radio Shack CDS cell 276-116 has a typically wide resistance range-about 3 megohms in darkness and 100 ohms in bright light.) When the light is intenupted or falls below a level set by SENSITIVITY control RI, the rise in LDRl's resistance causes the voltage on pins 2 and 6to rise. lithe control is set so the voltage rises above 3 Vcc' the relay pulls in. The relay drops out when the light level increases and the drop across the photocell falls below Y, Vcc. (The circuit can be modified by placing relay Kl and diode Dl between pin 3 and ground. In this case, the relay drops out when the voltage on pins 2 and 6 rises above 3 Vcc' and pulls in when it falls below Y, Vcc' This modification is valuable when the relay has singlethrow contacts.) Opening and closing of the relay contacts occurs at different illumination levels. This Y, VCC hysteresis is an advantage that prevents the circuit from hunting and the relay from chattering when there are very small changes in illumination.
319
WARNING LIGHT OPERATES FROM BATTERY POWER SUPPLY

OHD806
EMITTER
120K
I ...
2N6028
100
3.9M
22M 0.12
2N5112
CONNECT
CONNECT
TO LAMP
TO
2N6076
COLLECTOR
GE
10K
C PROVIDES ABouT I MINUTE ON TIME IJF AND MUST BE lOW LEAKAGE
Fig. 51-2
Circuit Notes The circuit provides illumination when darkness comes. By using the gain available in darlington transistors. this circuit is simplified to use just a photodarlington sensor. a darlington amplifier. and three resistors. The illumination level will be slightly lower than normal, and longer bulb life can be expected, since the D40K saturation voltage lowers the lamp operating voltage slightly. LIGHT-OPERATED SWITCH
.------------------------.--~~-----+9V
1N4002 2.2 kO 15 kO
200 - 6000 relay
8.2 kO
01 2N3904
02 2N3904
CDS
photocell
WILLlAM SHEETS
S1
Fig. 51-3
Circuit Notes
This circuit uses a flip-flop arrangement of Ql and Q2. Normally Ql is conducting heavily. Light on CDS photocell causes Ql bias to decrease, cutting it off, turning on Q2, removing the remaioing bias from Q1. Reset is accomplished by depressing SI.
320
PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCH
r---------------~----.-I------~+6v
1N4002j
CDS cell
Relay
(~
~~
'---"
Fig. 51-4
2N3904 10 kQ
L -________________~------~GND
WILLlAM SHEETS
Circuit Notes The CDS cell resistance decreases in the presence of light, turning on the 2N3904 relay driver.
BACKBIASED GaAsP LED OPERATES AS LIGHT SENSOR

10M
.AA
,.
Circuit Notes
~~
I,*,
.....
741
Output
Fig. 51-5
Using a simple 741 amplifier connected as a current-to-voltage converter with the LED as the current source, the voltage at the output is proportional to incident light. The junction is biased only by the difference between the summing node junction potential and ground, preventing the possibility of reverse breakdown. The photon-generated current equals the short-circuit current of the junction, which is linearly related to incident light. The sensor requires a level of incident illumination that depends on the degree of opacity of the LED package.
321
TWILlGHTTRIGGERED CIRCUIT
~,
Al 10K S 7
R3 47K
A4 2.7K
4 C3
+ Cl ;:::;
100
R2 47K
Ul lCM 1555 3 CM OS 6 TIMER 21 1
+"
l,~O
t
.(
LOAl OAP12 R5 7.IK
01
lN4001
+12V LIGHTS
;: 0.01 ~2
SPKA 1 50-SOl!
~
&01 BC 109
A6 2.2K
f:.
:\
Fig. 516
Circuit Notes As dusk begins to iall, the sensor (a cadmium-sulfide light-dependent resistor or LD R) operates a small horn to provide an audible reminder that it's time to turn on your lights. To turn the circuit off-simply turn your headlights on and the noise stops. The base of Ql is fed through a voltage divider formed by R4, LDR1-a light-dependent resistor with an internal resistor of about 100 ohms under bright-light conditions and about 10 megohms in total darkness-potentiometer R6. Ql's base voltage depends on the light level received by LDRl and the setting of R6. If LDRl detects a high light level, its resistance decreases, thereby providing a greater base current for Ql, causing it to conduct. When Ql conducts, pin 4 of Ul is pulled to near ground potential, muting the oscillator. If, on the other hand, LDRl detects a low light level, its resistance increases (reducing base currentto Ql), cutting off the transistor and enabling the oscillator. In actual practice, you set R6 so that at a suitable light level (dusk), the oscillator will sound. The anode of diode Dl connects to the light switch, where it connects to the vehicle's parking lights. With the lights switched off, that point is connected to the negative chassis by way of the parking lamp. That has no effect on the circuit, as Dl blocks any current flow to ground from Ql's base via R6 and the sidelight lamps. When the lights are switched on, the anode of Dl is connected to the positive supply via the parking lamp switch, thereby applying a voltage to the base of Ql, biasing it into conduction. With Ql conducting, pin 4 of Ul is pulled virtually to ground, disabling the oscillator even though LDR1's resistance is not enough to do so.
322
AUTOMATIC MOORING LIGHT
+5 VOC
~j
R4 580n R2 10K RI lOOK 1 6 R5 12K
U2 3 +5V REG OUT 1805 2
r-mI
b' ..... )
\!:;:,
R6 1.8K
b/P'
\!::;:
02 c 2N301 + 12 VOC
UI JFET OPAMP LF3S1 2 3 4
01 c 2N5400
'i'
11 #47
QRI
R3 10K
Fig. 51-7
Circuit Notes Integrated-circuit U1-an LF351 or 741 op amp-is used as a comparator to control the light. Resistors R2 and R3 provide a reference voltage of about 2.5 volts at pin 3 ofUl. When daylight falls on light-dependent resistor LDR1, its resistance is low: about 1000 ohms. In darkness, the LDR's resistance rises to about 1 megohm. Since R1 is 100,000 ohms, and the LDR in daylight is 1000 ohms, the voltage ratio is 100 to 1; the voltage drop across the LDR is less than the 2.5 volt reference voltage and pin 2 of U1 is held at that voltage. In that state, the output at pin 6 of 01 is positive at about 4.5 volts, a value that reverse-biases Q1 to cutoff,which in turn holds Q2 in cutoff, thereby keeping lamp 11 off. When darkness falls, the LDR's resistance rises above R1's value and the voltage at pin 2 of 01 rises above the reference voltage of 2.5 volts. 01' s output terminal (pin 6) falls to less than a volt and Q1 is biased on. The base-to-emitter current flow turns Q2 on, which causes current to flow through the lamp. When daylight arrives, the LDR's resistance falls sharply, which causes the lamp to be turned off, ready to repeat the next night/day cycle.
323
ELECTRONIC WAKE-UP CALL

+9V . ........_ _- - -
Q2
T ........ 2N3906
,.-8
.~
6
3
C4 R4
UI
+ 47 47f1. SPKRl
R5 2.2K
555
2 5K SENS. AOJ.
R6~---+
C2 ......w.,:-!R 7 .1 IOK TONE FREQ. AOJ.

Fig. 51-8
Circuit Notes
A cadmium sulfide photocell (LDRI, which is a light-dependent resistor) is connected to the base and collector of an npn transistor, Ql. When light hits LDRI, the internal resistance goes from a very high (dark) value to a low (light) value, supplying base current to QI, turning it on. The voltage across RI produces a bias that turns Q2 on, which in turn, supplies the positive voltage to VI at pin 8 (the positive-supply input) and pin 4 (the reset input), to operate the 555 audio oscillator circuit. The circuit's sensitivity to light can be set via R6 (a 50,000 ohm potentiometer). R7 sets the audio tone to the most desirable sound. The squarewave audio tone is fed from VI pin 3 to a small speaker through coupling capacitor C4 and current limiting resistorR4.
PHOTODIODE SENSOR AMPLIFIER
R1
5M
1%
s,
LT1012 OUTPUT
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CQRP.
R2
5M
...
Fig. 51-9
"
324
LIGHT-SEEKING ROBOT
RY1 DPDT 5v +9v Q1

I I I
6
5 +
8
7 R5 1k D3 IN4001
,- -
- -
- -+5 v
le ra % TL092
+9v
R2 Left +9v
1-IN4001
10 IlF
16v1
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
C1
Fig. 51-10
Circuit Notes
The circuit is light seeking; it will follow a flashlight around a darkened room. A pair of photocells determine the direction in which the robot will move. Each photocell is connected to an op amp configured as a comparator. When sufficient light falls on photocell R2. the voltage at the inverting input (pin 6) of ICl-a will fall below the voltage at the non-inverting input (pin 5). so the output of the comparator will go high, and transistors Ql and Q2 will turn on. That will enable relays RYl and RY2, and thereby provide power for the right motor. The robot will then turn left. Likewise, when light falling on R3lowers its resistance, Q2 and Q3 will turn on, the left motor will energize, and the robot will turn right.
325
SYNCHRONOUS PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCH

COS PHOTOCELL FOR PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL (OPTIONAL WITH S,) Cl 01 GE IN5059 R3 10K Q2
, , L _____
120V 60RI 47K SI CONTROL SWITCH
.01,,1
R2 47K Q, GE C5B
R4 470 C2 GE IN5059 LOAD
'1'1
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 51-11
Circuit Notes Synchronous switching is turning on only at the instant the ac supply voltage passes through zero, and turning off only when current passes through zero. This circuit provides this function in response to either a mechanical switch or a variable resistance such as a cadmium-sulfide photocell. TIris circuit produces the minimum disturbance to the power supply when switching, and always conducts an integral number of whole cycles. It is ideal for use wherever RFI and audio filtering is undesirable, where magnetizing inrush current of transformers causes nuisance fuse-blowing, and where sensitive equipment must operate in the vicinity of power switches.
PHOTOCURRENTINTEGRATOR
ICL 781'
>--.J---VOUT
Circuit Notes Low leakage currents allow integration times up to several hours.
0307-32
INTER$IL
Fig. 51-12
326
ROBOT EYES
RI 1001<. 4
14
I D~5.T "'cC
RZ 3.'1
K
I\z 55"
Z Ht
.rC-I-a..
OUi
fL-H"
6ND
Cl
.01
,SV
200-""1"
-=
R'I SV
DPD,
",,, 5v D? PT
+!---"-t-j.,..:s,,,
",,, e
(ZII
,R RSl"
I, PS
9
RI,<1\C,
11. HI ICI_b
112.'i5,"
14
IO .... f
cv
C.3
001
15V
11
,
C
I
RIS
. 00\
.
03
R\8
\N4\ ...
iOOIe.
,eK
'K
R'
CII
'"0 %",4401
"'"T"1f
I5V
RADIO ELECTRONICS
Fig. 51-13
Circuit Notes
(IC1-a) functions as an astable multivibrator oscillating at a frequency of about 1 kHz. That IC drives transistor Q1 which in turn drives the two infrared LED's, LED1 and LED2. The right eye is composed of LED! and Q2. If an obstacle appears in front of the right eye, pulses from LED1 are reflected by the obstacle and aetected by Q2. The signal from Q2 is amplified by Q3, which triggers IC2, a 555. That operates in the monostable mode, and it provides a pulse output with a width of as much as 2.75 seconds, depending on the setting of R11. That pulse output energizes relay RY1, and that reverses the polarity of the voltage applied to the motor. Corresponding portions of the circuit of the left eye operate in the same fashion, using the unused half of the 556 (ICl-b). That action causes the robot to turn away from an obstacle.
re
An infrared LED and a phototransistor are used for each eye. Half of a 556 timer
re
327
MODULATED LIGHT-BEAM CIRCUIT CANCELS AMBIENT LIGHT EFFECTS
r----.~--___..-__o
lQ-kHz signal
ambient li9ht~
+:--..
~ 1 JJF
~ :-
+12 V
.. F_PT_l_00_A ____ 620 k lOOk

3.3k
I
....;;....;;:.fV+NIC~>_1-'h-LM.l-4-58-10 k
lO-kHz
signal
+ ~lJJF
33 k
~"=:: 1 ___~__~7 IC~,t-5~::~~ 4 + - Y2 LM1458

Ambient compensation
...----11\
Il02JJF 6
1k
10k +12V 10 k
::!::'J'lJJF
Fig. 51-14
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Circuit Notes
Feedback control of the phototransistor in this optical detector helps negate the effects of varying ambient lightsources. The output of a modulated visible-light LED is detected, amplified, buffered, and fed through a low-pass filter. Ambient light signals below the LED's 10-kHz modulating rate reach the detector's base out of phase with incoming ambient light and cancel the undesired effects.
328
MONOSTABLE PHOTOCELL CIRCUIT HAS SELF-ADJUSTING TRIGGER LEVEL

V
IT I
CADMIU
~D
r,
"
RI
M-SULFIDE CELL
JlS:
OUTPUT
IOk
,Ir IN914
1+ /" ....--JVW--~V
IOk
Cl
-.;,~_ _~I{
R2 IM
1\
( NONPOLAR!ZED)
-:,;:ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 51-15
Circuit Notes
A photocell circuit provides automatic threshold adjustment. Monostable action prevents undesired retriggering of the output. With only one op amp le, the circuit offers: Automatic adjustment of its trigger level to accommodate various light sources, changes in ambient light and misalignments; A built-in monostable action to provide only a single output pulse during a preset time; Feedback action to raise the threshold level after triggering and to speed switching. The feedback also eliminates the circuit's tendency to oscillate during switching.
329
THERMALLY STABILIZED PIN PHOTODIODE SIGNAL CONDITIONER
~~6,Q4~4__~____~~
50' 1M r-_"",,~:::----<~~DARK
FUll-SCALE
750ko TRIM '::" 5Ok" .........N>,--N't~
lM
TRIM
0.01
0033 lT102HOV
EOUT
3'
2' 330
15
L-__---'13
Fig. 51-16
Circuit Notes The photodiode specified responds linearly to light intensity over a 100 dB range. Digitizing the diodes linearly amplified output would require an A-D converter with 17 bits of range. This requirement can be eliminated by logarithmically compressing the diode's output in the signal conditioning circuity. Al and Q4 convert the diode's photocurrent to voltage output with a logarithmic transfer function. A2 provides offsetting and additional gain. A3 and its associated components fonn a temperature control loop
330
RESPONSE DATA LIGHT (9OO.M) lmW

100jLW
10pW 1.W 100nW

lOnW
DIODE CURRENT 35D.35.3.5'-350nA 35nA 35nA
CIRCUIT OUTPUT 10.0V 785V 5.70V 3.55V 1.40V

-Q.75V
-tJ+- = HP-5082-4204 PIN PHOTODIODE

01-Q5 =CA3096
CONNECT SUBSTRATE OF CA3096 ARRAY TO Q4'5 EMITTER. 1 % RESISTOR
I'
which maintains Q4 at constant temperature (all transistors in this circuit are part of a CA3096 monolithic array). The 0.0331'F value at A3's compensation pins gives good loop damping if the circuit is built using the array's transistors in the location shown. Because of the array die's small size, response is quick and clean. A full-scale step requires only 250 ms to settle to final value. To use this circuit, first set the thermal control loop. To do this, ground Q3's base and set the 2 k pot so A3's negative input voltage is 55 mV above its positive input. This places the servo's setpoint at about 50C (25C ambient + (2.2 mV/oC x 25C rise ~ 55 mV ~ 50C). Unground Q3's base and the array will come to temperature. Next, place the photodiode in a completely dark environment and adjust the "dark trim" so A2's output is 0 V. Finally, apply or electrically simulate 1 mW of light and set the "full-scale" trim for 10 V out. Once adjusted, this circuit responds logarithmically to light inputs from 10nW to ImW with an accuracy limited by the diode's 1% error.
331
52 Logic Amplifiers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in1:he Sources section. Low Power Inverting Amplifier with Digitally Selectable Gain Low Power Binary to lON Gain Low Frequency Amplifier Low Power Non-Inverting Amplifier with Digitally Selectable Inputs and Gain Programmable Amplifier A Precision Amplifier with Digitally Programmable Inputs and Gains
332
LOW POWER INVERTING AMPLIFIER WITH DIGIT ALLY SELECTABLE GAIN

201< 'I
'1SV
200K 11
-15 V
Ix
V'N'o-~Wv----+-c.=."
201( !l
"
\I]
L1U
"
10K \1 -15 V
OG301A
TTL lOGIC .GAIN SElECT

LOW' h
SllICONIX
Fig. 52-1
LOW POWER BINARY TO 10" GAIN LOW FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER

.,6\1
.15V
10K '!
Illl'". -,_'T"'O~",
lOOK"
lMII
1 ,
II
I I I I
OGJ04A
"
BINARY INPUT IQ 01
"
(lAIN
SILlCONIX
1 .
,10 1110
Fig. 52-2
Circuit Notes Gain increases by decades as the binary input decreases from 1,1 to 0,0. Minimum gain is 1 and maximum gain is 1000. Since the switch is static in this type of amplifier the power dissipation of the switch will be less than a tenth of a milliwatt.
333
LOW POWER NON-INVERTING AMPLIFIER WITH DIGITAUY SELECTABLE INPUTS AND GAIN
+l~V
_15"
"5V
CMOS LOO,C
INPUT SELECT
';,OH VII.,
114C~'
CMOS LO<:i" GAIN SlUCT HIGH' 10.
OG3GTA
ONO
'80~"
SILlCONIX
Fig. 52-3
PROGRAMMABLE AMPLIFIER
"
'"
'g, '"
, ,
i
I CURRENT MIRROR
.'
"
."
NEI11. HITD,I,C
, , ,
.-V~,-- - - J
: /TAJ,NS'STORARRAYI
l'.IC ~ Ip.~
VCC
'NT
FlILL$(:AU
"
AD.!Ust
-Vcc
301(
'"
SIGNETICS
Fig. 52-4
Circuit Notes
The intention of the following application shows how the NE5517 works in connection with a DAC. In the application, the NE5118is used-an 8-bit DAC with current output-its input register making this device fully /,P-compatible. The circuit consists of three functional blocks; the NE5118 which generates a control current equivalent to the applied data byte, a current mirror, and the NE5517.
334
A PRECISION AMPLIFIER WITH DIGITALLY PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS AND GAIN
30"F
VIN20-4-----0"";
'1,"V
OG202
" "
YOUT
18)(
'" '" '"

n
9,91{
1001(
~l
" "
-15V
"
'0.
GAIN' 1)(110------'1---.1
GAIN'~
NOTE PIN CONNECTIONS SHOWIII ARf FOR METAL CAN PACKAGE
'.
'00 " '.' '00" "" '"

7 7
GAIN 2 {Xl01o------~"'I_-_oI GAIN 31)(1001<>-----4---<1
GAIN 4 1"-100010-----4---.1
LOGIC i'iIGH _ SWITCH ON
_15 V
SILICONIX
Fig. 525
335
53
LVOT Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. LVDT Driver Demodulator Linear Variable Differential Transformer Signal Conditioner
336
LVDT DRIVER DEMODULATOR

.'0V
vo"
,.
,'\."
I.-./'
NESS20
M"
.033"F
*"
5
S.lXO 10K!? 1% M.F. 'OFFSET 1Kn~.o--<____- "____~ ADJUST lOT,; PoT 'OKr. 1"10 M F 1KO
11
LVDT
0
2
PHASEADJ. ,.KO
I
-=-
OO2
"F .'0V .1"F
q.
DISPLACEMENT
T _ THERMISTOR + O.7%/C 24lY.! MIDWEST COMPONENTS INC lK-241K LVDT SCHAEVITI <100
8.2KO
ILIMIT DETECTOR] IN41o&a
Kl
.5'
200
KIELECTROL AELA Y RA3OI1OS1 5 VOLT
Q,_2N2222
+10V
SIGNETICS
Fig. 53-1
337
LINEAR VARIABLE DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER SIGNAL CONDITIONER
LVOT ~ SCHAEVITZ E-100
100k
100k PHASE TRIM
FIg. 53-2
Circuit Notes
Al and its associated components furnish an amplitude stable sine wave source. AI's positive feedback path is a Wein bridge, tuned for1.5 kHz, QI, the LTl004 reference, and additional components in AI's negative loop unity-gain stabilize the amplifier. AI's output an amplitude stable sine wave,drives the LVDT. Cl detects zero crossings and feeds the LTCI043 clock pin. A speed-up network at Cl's input compensates LVDT phase shift, synchronizing the LTCI043's clock to the transformer's output zero
338
1.5kHz RD-BLUE YEL-BLK
lOOk
BLUE GRN
BLK
>"..--OV-
OUTPuT
2.5V OM-2.50MM 200k
10k GAIN TRIM
ib--5V
'I, LTC1043 L ____ ...J
lool
+5V
+5V
1k
>"'7_...._,_ TO PIN
16. LTC1043
--5V
crossings. The LTC1043 alternately connects each end of the transformer to ground, resulting in positive half-wave rectification at pins 7 and 14. These points are summed at a low-pass filter which feeds A2. A2 furnishes gain scaling and the circuit's output. The LTC1043' s synchronized clocking means the information presented to the low-pass filter is amplitude and phase sensitive. The circuit output indicates how far the core is from center and on which side. To calibrate this circuit, center the LVDT core in the transformer and adjust the phase.trim for 0 V output. Next, move the core to either extreme position and set the gain trim for 2.50 V output.
339
54
Measuring and Test Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Magnetometer Resistance-Ratio Detector Continuity Tester for PCB's Wire Tracer Diode Testing Measuring Phase Difference from 0 0 to 180 0 Ground Tester Making Slow Logic Pulses Audible Unidirectional Motion Sensor
340
MAGNETOMETER
Sl
..L
+
MAl + C4 47
: Bl I +9V
/I)
L1
(SEE TEXT) MA2 02 lN914
/I)
Rl 470K 01 2N2222
L2 (SEE TEXT) 01 lN914
02 2N2222 CB .1 R4 lK
C2 .047
R2 lK
Ml
C3
.1
R5 500n
R
10K .cALIBRATE
FIg. 54-1
Circuit Notes
The circuit uses two general-puq>ose npn transistors, Ql and Q2, and a special handwound, dual-coil probe ferrets out the magnetism. Q1 and its associated components form a simple VLF oscillator circuit, with Ll, C2, and C3 setting the frequency. The VLF signal received by the pickup coil, L2, is passed through C5 and rectified by dioues D1 and D2. The small de signal output from the rectifier is fed to the base of Q2 (configured as an emitter follower), which is then fed to a 0-1 mA meter, Ml.
341
RESISTANCE-RATIO DETECTOR
r "~N9~'f-.;~~_____~______-f-----:-;~n
R lk
f""
REED RELAY
'" 12V 290ll. COIL, I...""".,Q 25 W CONTACTS
120y,,:J11
RESISTANCE RS
12V IOOmA
SECONDARY
"""""'"
220p.F SENSOR Rp 25 V RESISTANCE
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 54-2
Circuit Notes Applications such as photoelectric control. temperature detection and moisture sensing require a circuit that can accurately detect a given resistance ratio. A simple technique that uses an op amp as a sensing element can provide 0.5% accuracy with low parts cost. The reed-relay contacts close when the resistance of the sensor Rp equals 47% of the standard Rs. Adjusting either RI or R2 provides a variable threshold; the threshold is controlled by varying R3. For the most part, the type of resistors used for RI and R2 determines the accuracy and stability of the circuit. With metal-film resistors, less than 0.5% change in ratio sensing occurs over the commercial temperature range (0 to 70 C) with ac input variations from 105 to 135 V.
CONTINUITY TESTER FOR PCB'S Circuit Notes
330H
4.7.k
TEST
01 IN914
+
39n
DURACELl
1.5 VOLTS
220n
Fig. 54-3
The continuity tester is for tracing wiring on printed circuit boards. It only consumes any appreciable power when the test leads are shorted, so no OnlOff switch is used or required. The applied voltage at the test terminals is insufficient to turn on diodes or other semiconductors. Resistors below 50 ohms act as short circuit; above 100 ohms as open circuit. The circuit is a simple multivibrator- Tl and T2, which are switched on by transistor TI. The components in the base ofT3 are DI, RI, R2, and thetest resistance. With a 1.5 volt supply, there is insufficient voltage to turn on a semiconductor connected to the test terminals. The phone is a telephone earpiece~but a 30 ohm speaker would work equally as well.
342
WIRE TRACER
.MO
RV'
GAIN
R,
4k1
sw.
R.
R' m
,c.
4
.""
o.
R'
+
~
IOR
TELEPHONE
PICK-UP
'+
O.
COOL
R' m
+C.
0'
'"
: : IV : , , ,
.....
R4
.""
NOT:
Re
ICl 1$74'
Fig. 54-4
Circuit Notes
The tracer detects the weak magnetic field of any current-carrying house wiring and amplifies this signal to a level that is adequate for driving a magnetic earpiece. The unit uses a telephone pick-up coil to detect the magnetic field.
DIODE TESTING
1]
POPULAR ELECTRONICS CAL
,,",0", )
6.3'1
.
OPEN
DIODE
UNDER
TEST
'""'00'' ,\"""'
GROUND
POOR/BAD
Fig. 54-5
0CD8C9C9(s)
SHORT
GOOD
Circuit Notes
The circuit will display curves on a ~scope, contingent on the state of the diode. To "calibrate," substitute a lOOO-ohm resistorfor the diode and adjust the scope gains for a 45-degree line. The drawings show some expected results.
343
MEASURING PHASE DIFFERENCE FROM 00 to 180 0

+5V 741 lOP-Amp
,...------,r...,l.;;..,14 C
2 1/2 7474
710 :Comparator
7474 :D-fllpflop
+12V
~5=----'
3
7
531: OP-Amp 7486. EX-OR gale
OIP
lip 2_"n,I\.-r.. REF 15K
O/Pvoltage F(voll)
Inputs
A-.J
B~
D
L L
logic 1
2
Phase difference
-180"
-90"
90
180-
-2
-3
-4
Lead
-5
lag
0
Fig. 546
344
MEASURING PHASE DIFFERENCE FROM 0 0 to Circuit Notes
180
Continued.
This method is capable of measuring phase between 0 to 180 0 The generated square waves A and B are fed to 11 D flip-flop which gives an output C equal to logic 1 when input 1 leads input 2 and equal to logic 0 in case of lagging. When C = logic 0, the output of the amplifier F will be positive proportional to the average value E of the output of the EX-OR. When C = logic 1, F will be negative and also proportional to E by the same factor. Hence, the output of the meter is positive in case of lagging and negative for leading. The circuit is tested for sinusoidal inputs and indicates a linearity within 1 %. Measurements are unaffected by the frequency ofthe inputs up to 75 kHz.
GROUND TESTER
-!,B_I...--.
1<.,
~--6---xr--~----,
47'
SI
.,
'7' "
Circuit Notes
3
11
R2
12
METAL
PANEL
'-t41,..._47M'f.-_-+ g~L~5~
2
!RED)
The circuit is simple and foolproof if wired correctly. Under normal conditions, only lamps 1 and 3 should be lit. If lamp 2 comes on, the cold lead is 117 volts above ground.
WH'
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 54-7
MAKING SLOW LOGIC PULSES AUDIBLE

47\1
4'.:.3),::....---+ 7_ IN PU ..... T _ _-'i_ O
Circuit Notes
loon
,5n
MINIATURE
SPEAKER
This circuit is useful for monitoring slow logic pulses as a keying monitor or digital clock alarm. The Schmitt trigger is connected as an oscillator. The trimpot controls the pitch of the output. When the input goes high, the circuit will oscillate.
.sv
Fig. 54-8
345
UNIDIRECTIONAL MOTION SENSOR
Voo
220k
--A
220k
Nand gates:MC14011B
L
I
~
(b) FIg. 54-9
I
~
(a)
i,
~I
c
0
" V
Circuit Notes This circuit detects an object passing in one direction but ignores it going the opposite
way. Two sensors define the sense of direction. The object blocks the light to phototransistor Ql or Q2 first dependent on the direction of approach. When the object passes Ql then Q2, an output pulse is generated at D; while no pulse is seen at D as the object passes Q2 then Ql. Object length (measured along the direction of the two sensors) should be greater than the ~separation of the two sensors Ql and Q2.
346
55
Medical Electronics Circuits
Heart Rate Monitor Medical Instrument Preamplifier
347
HEART RATE MONITOR

51
I
..
lOOK
IO "I,C'
1
12v,=
10K
R,
2K
15K
R,
68K A8 220K,
Rn
IM
Rn
220pl
IK
R"
R,
1K, A2
I
2N2222 Q,
lOOK
R4
5K,R9
710'
C, 1
IM
R14
1,,1, C,
e,
0.1,
User adjustable
lOOK.
O.O1~
CDl
VACTEC,~
R,
lK
F
....
lN914
3.9K
R"
VT125E
12v
110 'MU Lighl bulb
R,
1
C,
IC
~
0.1
D,
lM
C,
PKB8-4AO
0.1
R"
250~
Panel
LM339
PZI = Murata
meter
c.
1000,,1
C"
"="
"=" Fig. 55-1
HEART RATE MONITOR, Continued. Circuit Notes Light filtering through the finger tip is detected by the cadmium sulphide photoresistor CDl which forms the feedback network for transducer amplifier section !CA producing a weak signal which is further amplified by ICB. This signal is now compared against a user adjusted threshold, comparator ICD triggers gating on the piezoelectric buzzer PZl. On each falliQg edge of the comparator's output signal one-shot multivibrator ICD produces a 2 I's pulse which is inverted by Q1 and averaged by the RC network consisting of Ml, C6 and C7. The 10 K trimpot R20 in Ql' s collector circuit sets the scale factor for M j where full scale is 150 beats per minute.
MEDICAL INSTRUMENT PREAMPLlFIER
INPUT
SOl<
v>
,OOk
lM, ,'"
~ ~
lM,'%
VOUT
'OOk. ,%
v-
INTERSIL
Fig. 55-2
Circuit Notes
Note that AYOL = 25; single Ni-cad battery operation. Input current (from sensors connected to the patient) is limited to less than 5 ~ under fault conditions.
349
56 Metal Detectors
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Metal Locator II Metal Locator
350
METAL LOCA TOR 11
,-----<Y'"' 0
::L + 9V
...l
2.2KD 2.2
1.5 10-365 ,
MO
2N3565
MO
pF
+~
O"~I
1 MO
2N3565
22pF
22
pF
Wires
to
circuit
WIUIAM SHEETS
Circuit Notes
'"
U1
~
The circuit consists of two oscillators, both working at about 465 kHz. One uses an if transformer and the other uses an inductor (the search coil LI). The oscillators are coupled by a capacitor (10 pF). A beat note (produced if the two oscillators are working closely together) is detected by the diode and fed to the headphone amplifier and the 22 # capacitor. The search coil oscillator is tuned by a 10-365 pf variable capacitor. The search coil comprises 22 turns of wire (any gauge between 24 swg and 36 swg enamel) center tapped. The wire should be wound on a temporary form then taped and glued to a piece of hardboard. The coil size should be about 6" x 6". Headphones should be high impedance.
6" x 6"
Fig. 56-1
METAL LOCATOR
o Off
Search coil
I
180
pF SM
T
C1
'-~~)~>r--r----_~I~
-={C2 ?~ 10 4=470 SM '
MPF 102
On
-~
--=- 9V
--==1470 SM
I
Fig. 56-2
22 kQ
WfLUAM SHEETS
Circuit Notes
The search coil, Cl and C2 form a tuned circuit for the oscillator which is tuned near the center of the broadcast band. Tune a portable radio to a station near the middle of the band, then tune C2 until a squeal is heard as the two signals mix to produce a beat (heterodyne) note. Metal near the search coil will detune the circuit slightly, changing the pitch of the squeal. The search coil is 20 turns of number 30 enameled wire, wound on a 6" x 8" wood or plastic form. It is affixed at the end of a 30" to 40" wooden or plastic pole, and connected to the remainder of the metal detector circuit through a coaxial cable.
352
57 Metronomes
Simple Metronome Metronome I Ac-Line Operated Unijunction Metronome Metronome II
353
SIMPLE METRONOME
SOaK SPEED
39K
Fig. 57-1
+
IOpF
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes
Adjustable from 15 to 240 beats per minute. The UJT oscillator output is applied to a general purpose npn transistor which drives the speaker. UJT = 2N4871 NPNxistor = TIP31
METRONOME I
, -_ _ _ _ _--.-_ _ _ + 6 to + 12V Vcc
10K
3300
1 Meg
Q1 2N4871
eF
C2 f-o Spike Pulse or , - - , Audio Out lOK
4.71'F Tantalum
r
+
-~I-i-_.--j.1
C1
470
t---<>
Q2
2N3065
WILLlAM SHEETS
Sawtooth
Fig. 57-2
+6to +12VVcc
Circuit Notes
This simple oscillator uses a 2N4871 UJT to give pulses from 0.2 to about 20 Hz. A spike is available at C2, a sawtooth at the emitter of Q2 of about 2-3 V Pop, depending on Vee.
354
AC-LlNE OPERATED UNIJUNCTION METRONOME

117V
10 k
22 k
39011
2N4871
3 Wire Cord 10 k
SPKR
WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 57-3
Circuit Notes The UJT-oscillator frequency is detennined by the 100 "F capacitor and the effective resistance of the 22 K and 470 K resistors and the potentiometer. Rate can be varied from 42 to 208 beats/minute. The circuit should be housed in an insulated box for safety. or use ground (3-wire cord). METRONOME 11
+9to+12V
100 ~F 12
100/12
v vI
+
50
k
3.3
k
_ _ ....t
50 k
3.3
k
--
10 k
10 k
1 ~F
2N2222
22/15 v
.1
2.2
k
+
Fig. 57-4
22/15 v
WILLlAM SHEETS
Circuit Notes
This simple circuit uses a multivibrator to generate the beats and a subsequent audio amplifier stage to increase the output level. Range of adjustment is approximately from 40 to 200 beats per minute set by the gauged potentiometer.
355
58 Miscellaneous Treasures
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning onpage 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Squib-Firing Circuit (I) Squib-Firing Circuit (11) Model Rocket Launcher Push-On/Push Off Electronic Switch Game Feeder Controller Single LED Can Indicate Four Logic States Inexpensive Radio-Control Uses Only SCR Guitar and Bass Tuner 4-Channel Commutator Two-Wire Tone Encoder Differential Hold 5 MHz Phase-Encoded Data Read Circuitry Shift Register Power-On Reset Noise Immune 60 Hz Line Sync DC Static Switch (SCR Flip-Flop)
356
SQUIB-FIRING CIRCUIT (I) Circuit Notes
R, +28V -~N\~---r-==::::-l
100K
0---_0::.:.'
...I\..
INPUT
JAN1N4148~R,
Q~ _----'!:--~I
seR,
JAN2N3028
?1K '------"-1
UNITRODE CORP.
Fig. 58-1
Capacitor Cl is charged to +28 V through RI and stores energy for firing the squib. A positive pulse of 1 roA applied to the gate of SCR1 will cause it to conduct, discharging Cl into the squib load Xl. With the load in the cathode circuit, the cathode rises immediately to + 28 V as soon as the SCR is triggered on. Diode D1 decouples the gate from the gate trigger source, allowing the gate to rise in potential along with the cathode so that the negative gate-to-cathode voltage rating is not exceeded. This circuit will reset itself after test firing, since the available current through RI is less than the holding current of the SCR. After Cl has been discharged, the SCR automatically turns off-allowing Cl to recharge.
SQUIB-FIRING CIRCUIT (11)

2BV
R,
R,
? 50K
SCA,
'--'\'/\/\'-1
ZI JAN1N4471
'\it}
r;~ JAN 2N3031
UNITRODE CORP.
Fig. 58-2
Circuit Notes
The LRC input network limits the anode dvldt to a safe value-below 30 V/",s. RI provides critical damping to prevent voltage overshoot. While a simple RC filter section could be used, the high current required by the squib would dictate a small value of resistance and a much larger capacitor. Resistor R3 provides dc bias stabilization, while C3 provides stiff gate bias during the transient interval when anode voltage is applied. The SCR is fired one second after arming by means of the simple R2C2Z1 time delay network. R4 provides a load for the SCR for testing the circuit with the squib disconnected-limiting the current to a level well within the continuous rating of the SCR. The circuit can be reset by opening the + 28 V supply and then re-arming.
357
MODEL ROCKET LAUNCHER
+9V~
i
Power 81
(Six "e" cells)
Mai"~iR------'
9v :
R2
02
2.2k
+9v
C2, 22 ...F (Optional-5ee Text)
SN
o : I
~
} launch To
pad
"
11
10
le1
LM3914
S2-b
Safety
R3 1k
~
83
Rsse!
R5 3.9k
+ C3 U20/LF
R4
27k
-=
+9v
RADIO ELECTRONICS
Fig. 58-3
Circuit Notes
The circuit consists of the launch timer itself and an automatic-off timer. When power is applied to that !C, the countdown LED's sequence is on until they are all lit. When the last one LEDl, is fully lit, transistor Ql saturates, energizing RY2. When that happens, a circuit between the lantern battery at the launch pad and the nickel-chromium wire is completed; the wire heats up as before, and the rocket is launched. Resistor R4 and capacitor C3 determine the countdown timing; with the values shown it should be approximately 10 seconds. Resistors R3 and R5 set the LED brightness. Safety is of the utmost importance. That's the purpose of the second half of the circuit. When RY2 opens, the current flow to Q2 is disrupted. But, because of the presence of R2 and C4, the transistor remains saturated for about 3 seconds. After that, however, the transistor stops conducting and RYl is de-energized. That cuts off the power to the rest of the circuit, and RY2 de-energizes again, breaking the circuit to the launch pad. Switch S3 is used to reset the countdown. Once that is done, pressing SI starts the launch sequence; the rest is automatic. Switch S4 is used to latch RYl manually if needed.
358
PUSH-ON/PUSH-OFF ELECTRONIC SWITCH
+6-19V
,---<'
~ ,
R3 R6
4,7 K
47K
I I I
D1
1N4002
R4
10K
Ro IOK
R7
K1
IOK
TD
LOAD
R2
lMEG
Cl
02
2N2222
'"F
RI
330n
.1.
SI
Fig. 58-4
Circuit Notes
Transistors Q1 and Q2 make up the flip-flop while Q3 drives a reed relay. When power is first applied to the circuit, Q1 and Q3 are conducting and Q2 is cut off. Momentarily closing SI causes the flip-flop to switch states-Q1 cuts off and Q2 conducts. When Q2 is conducting, its collector drops to around 0.6 volt. That prevents base current from flowing into Q3 so it is cut off, de-energizing relay Kl. The flip-flop changes state every time SI is pressed. Capacitors Cl and C2 ensure that Q1 is always the transistor that turns on when power is first applied to the circuit. When power is first applied to the basic flip-flop, the initial status is random-Q1 and Q2 both try to conduct and, usually, the transistor with the higher gain will take control, reaching full conduction and cutting off the other one. However, differences in the values of the collector and coupling resistors will also influence the initial state at power-on. With C2 in the circuit, it and R4 form an R-C network that slightly delays the rise in Q2's base voltage. That gives Q1 sufficient time to reach saturation and thus take control.
359
GAME FEEDER CONTROLLER
R3 Cl R10 10K
IN914
-:'~
03
1
K1
R.
lMEG
R1
B2
ISEE
:.... 'i
I
:.....
B1
lMEG
2N3DSJ
TEXTJJ..
12V I
.... T
I
Fig. 58-5
Circuit Notes The circuit is built around an LM339 quad comparator, Ul, which forms the basis of a Schmitt trigger, timer circuit, and a window comparator. One comparator within the LM339 (pins 1, 7,6), plus LDR1, R4, R5, R6 and R8, is used as a Schmitt trigger. The timer circuit (which receives its input from the Schmitt trigger) consists of R9, RIO, RH, R13. The last two-fourth's of U1 (pins 8, 9, 10,11, 13 and 14) are wired as a window comparator. The two inputs to the window comparator are derived from the charge on capacitor Cl-which is fed to pins 9 and 10 ofUl. The other inputs are picked from two points along a voltage-divider network, consisting of R1, R2, and R3. Diode D1 is used as a blocking diode, forcing capacitor Cl to discharge through R10 and R13. The window comparator looks for any voltage falling between one-third and two-thirds of the supply voltage. When the voltage falls between those two points, the output of the window comparator (pins 13/14) goes high. Transistors Q1, and Q2 are turned on, when the pins 13/14 junction goes high, energizing the relay, Kl. The energized relay provides a dc path to ground, activating the motor, M1, which reloads the feeder. The timer circuit also provides immunity from triggering, due 1:0 lightning. The on-time of relay K1 is determined by the charge cycle of Cl, RH, and R9 or the discharge cycle of Cl, R10, and R13. Changing the value of either a resistor or the capacitor, changes the timing cycle.
360
SINGLE LED CAN INDICATE FOUR LOGIC STATES
~~J>AA.= vvvV-=--__ -
Fig. 58-6
Circuit Notes The LED is the CSL310L which contains a red LED and a green LED connected -back to back and mounted close togetherin a single moulding. The LED can emit red or .green light by controlling the polarity of the applied voltage and if the polarity is switched at a rate of several hundred Hertz the emitted light appears yellow. The four combinations of inputs A and B can therefore be converted to four LED states~red, green, yellow and off. The truth table shows the LED colors corresponding to the combinations of A and B levels.
Truth Table
A
0 0 1 1
B 0 1 0 1
X
1 0 0 C
Y
0 0 1 C
LED calor red off green yellow
INEXPENSIVE RADIO-CONTROL USES ONLY ONE SCR

(
+I2V
MOMENTARY OFF SWITCH
T
L.i
a
2000.
D~as[ RVa
~.RY"
VO-200PF
? I':
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 58-7
Circuit Notes A simple and effective receiver for actuating garage doors, alarms, waroing systems, etc. The SCR, which has a very low trigger current 30 pA is typical~it requires an input power of only 30 p.W to activate the relay. A high Q tuned antenna circuit assures rejection of spurious sigoals. A whip or wire antenna is adequate up to 100 feet from a low power transistor transmitter. A momentary-off switch resets the circuit.
361
GUITAR AND BASS TUNER

+12V
,t
2i5l 81i21 ,
14
31
13
IU 401 J
4 617 8110 14~
l"
I,
2151 9rm 13
3
1C4
4013
'0 IC2
50240
"46
31 1 4
71810 14L
2ill'JTIi
12
IC~
9JTI1
4013
I"
I
9
4
11
'Pi B'lOj14L i 151 ,!1il 91i2l

ICR 4013
1/44001 le 1 a
~
r"
iioPF R1 'OK
Rl 5.1K
1/44001
;,-"
1 I-J
.
41 , ) 8110 14L
I"
'3
32r
51 !!C:J!l
4013
IC7
I,
R3, TOn
4 , ) 8 '0 14<--
C/1
!.!'!ill
"+12V
14~
1 2
"L
C2
lOO!35V ---...
n,
~~
R4
R5
10H '5K
-n-
INPUT
(~ '="
PITCH REF VOl -- R7 lOOK REF lJ2W
3.3MEG R-8, lOK
SiG "" CU~.l J3
Cl 470pF '
- "3'Dc' C3" IC8 5'''005 .22 2 LM38~6 -' ;~ C8 R9 .005 TOn
+"
~04;'" 47~735V
!~
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 58-8
Circuit Notes The heart of the circuit is IC2, a 50240 top-octave generator. Thatdevice uses a single input-frequency to generate all twelve notes of the musical scale. The input signal is provided by IC1, a 4001 quad 2-input NOR gate. Two sections of that IC are used to form an oscillator that runs at approximately 2 MHz. The frequency can be adjusted by trimmer potentiometer R2. Dual D flip-flops, IC3-IC7, are used as frequency dividers. They divide down the upper-octave frequencies from IC2, thus generating the lowerfrequency notes required for the pitch references. The chords for the bass pitchreferences are composed of three notes each. Those notes are taken from various outputs
362
a HI~
E-
i, ~ G-BASS
1.1..
012
D11
09
All. DIODES lN914 OR lN4148
~
00
O-BASS
l r-r01
E-BASS
D4
D8
03
D2
DO
07
~
J1
n
:::l" C12
A13
SP~R
EADPHDNES
================================~___ ~~~~~10=0~!35V:r_ SH REO/MONO

---------------------------~
C9,l'
r- 470i35V
R12,15K
AlO
1DOK
lOK~; sMCl1. r,--"I......+--) .. "H 3 ICgD05'F'

VOLUME
INST
Rll
elQ
1/2 W
Cl4;
47[]pF
Cl3 1__2;::-'5, . . . :; .. r'047

;r:C15 .005
LM386
lon
ofIC2-IC7 through isolation diodes DI-D12. All signals are routed to the TONE switch, S3. The wiper arm of-that switch is connected through R7 to the input of audio poweramplifier IC8, an LM386. The resistor acts as a volume control for the pitch reference. Another LM386, IC9, serves as an amplifier for the instrument being tuned, with RlO acting as its volume control. The outputs of IC8 and IC9 are coupled, through C5 and C12 respectively, to the headphonejack, J1. Switch S2 STEREO/MONO is used to mix the reference and instrument signals at IC9 for mono operation. Power is supplied by eight "AA" cells connected in series.
363
4-CHANNEL COMMUTATOR
1114U91 Jf'h
,~
--,
-" V
'
0-
':::J
.
~
~
~
'NfUll
'"
INPUT 1
"H
ne
,
INPUTS
'"
'J
" v
" v
-'"' v
057800
,
~
D57800 VOl TAGE TRANHATOR
INPUT l
:]
OH
,---------,
'"
Circuit Notes This 4-channel commutator used the 2N4091 to achieve low channel on resistance ( < 30 ohm) and low off current leakage. The DS7800 voltage translator is a monolithic device that provides from 10 V to -20 V gate drive to the JFETs while at the same time providing DTLlTTL logic compatibility.
ne
,
INPU1~
0-'.1
L
VOlTAG~
'
..
~
'""""L
'"
INI'Ul4
OUTPUT
TRAIISLATOR
Fig. 58-9
TWO'WlRE TONE ENCODER

r---------,-----------------~,.
".
01 "F
AF99
q-"
, '--
/.
~HIEa
ADJ
"0 "
Fig. 58-10
........." 2N22Z2
".
L...---......I_-----....,-ll-- ""'
~
" ~ SYSTEM GND
364
DIFFERENTIAL HOLD
vs~
r--
n
Fig. 58-11
'V,M'
,L,
I
I I
',--'
5 MHz PHASE-ENCODED DATA READ CIRCUITRY
._.
...
~"
~"
,J'Dl"f
~
."
NOTE;
HlAD
O.022.F
LI,.AA PioIASI<
LOW PASS FilTER
'"
~m
:100
0
,,~
otGIlAl OUTPUTS
'"
O,'_f
IDpF
Xl00A,C I'REAIIIIl'tlf'FI
OIHEFlIENTlA
'Of!
BlOIRECTIONAL
ONE-StiOT
All resistor values are in ohms
SIGNETICS
Fig. 58-12
Circuit Notes Readback data is applied directly to the input of the first NE592. This amplifier functions as a wide-band ac coupled amplifier with a gain of 100. By direct coupling of the readback head to the amplifier, no matched terminating resistors are required and the excellent common-mode rejection ratio of the amplifier is preserved. The dc components are also rejected because the NE592 has no gain at dc due to the capacitance across the gain select terminals. The output of the first stage amplifier is routed to a linear phase shift low-pass filter, with a characteristic impedance of 200 ohms. The second NE592 is utilized as a low noise differentiator/amplifier stage. The output of the differentiator/arnplifier is connected to the 8T20 bidirectional monostable unit to provide the proper pulses at the zero-crossing points of the differentiator.
365
SHIFT REGISTER
204 !4v
IK
12! 2v
2N2714
47K
47K
47.
~
IN4009
TURN OFF LINE

I. IK 6"K IK 6eK
Jl
2N2
SHIFT PUl.SE prf ~ ~KC
:~
10K
.01",'
IN4009 INPUT
IK 10K
(,
DATA OOR+IY
IK 100
)3N81
THOU 3N95
~O~~ ~
4.7 K IN4009
~ojJ Q4.7 K
SHIFTING CIRCUITRY
INPUT STAGE
LAS T STAGE IN4009
GENERAL ELECTRIC
RETRIGGERING l.INE
Fig. 5813
Circuit Notes The shift pulse amplitude is less than 15 volts. If a stage is off. the shift pulse will not be coupled to the next stage. If it is on. the diode will conduct triggering the next stage. Just prior to the shift pulse the anode supply is interrupted to turn off all stages. The stored capacitor charge determines which stages will be retriggered.
POWER-ON RESET
VDD
'"
VDO
'"
Vss
(a)
(b)
Fig. 5814
ReA
Circuit Notes A reset pulse is often required at poweron in a digital system. This type of reset pulse is ideally provided by this circuit. Because of the high input impedance of the Schmitt trigger. long reset pulse times may be achieved without the excess dissipation that results when both output devices are on simultaneously. as in an ordinary gate device (B).
366
NOISE IMMUNE 60 Hz LINE SYNC

+5V
R2
75K
R3
1K
2V-25V
,rn,
~
RI'
330k
60Hz
INPUT
CI_'Q.221(F
3~ JLJL.J
'LT 10 I 1 7
2~'
~
OUTPUT 60Hz
R4 27K
R6
nv
27K R5 10K
'INCREASE RI FOR LARGER INPUT VOLTAGES dlOI! SELF OSCllLATE:S AT ",60Hz CAUSING IT TO '" OCK ON TO INCOMING LINE SIGNAl
Fig. 58-15
DC STATIC SWITCH (SCR FliP-FLOP)

+E~------~--~-----------,
LOAD
FOR
INDUCTIvE
LOAD
"
-'L
~ K~'
'c'
2!!
o,,!J
~SCR2
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 58-16
Circuit Notes This circuit is a static SCR switch for use in a dc circuit. When a low power signal is applied to the gate of SCRl, this SCR is triggered and voltage is applied to the load. The right hand plate of C charges positively with respect to the left hand plate through RI. When SCRZ is triggered on, capacitor C is connected across SCRl, so that this SCR is momentarily reverse biased between anode and cathode. This rever~se voltage turns SCRl off provided the gate signal is not applied simultaneously to both gates. The current through the load will decrease to zero in an exponential fashion as C becomes charged.
367
59
Modulator Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Double Sideband, Suppressed Carrier RF Modulator Low-Distortion Low Level Amplitude Modulator Video Modulator Circuit Video Modulator TTL Oscillator Interfaces Data for Display by a Television Set
368
7'
DOUBLE SIDEBAND, SUPPRESSED CARRIER RF MODULATOR

-t-2~
v
R5
56k
RADIO SHACK 270-090 MICROPHONE
R4
, k
28
C2
1 i-lF
STANDING
-::CURRENT
R7
5 k
~ DIFFERENTIAL
~+28V
I
R'6
270 k
R17
'l
CURRENT
R3 100 k
R6
5 k
'0 k
R8
100 k
R10
100 k
Cs
pF
MC34002AG
R'4 '0 k
R13
100 k AF IN
R'5
3.3 k
=
=
Rg 270 k
,0 k
R"
0,
MT12Nl0
R 20
Tl~
01
RF '"
W ______'-___-----, V lOT
TRIFILAR N 325
~ CARR~A LEVEL ADJUST
IOl
\i
MICROMETALS T5O-2
Cg
4 7 ~F
C'2
1190 pF RF OUT
NULU
C6
2
R , 21~. '00 \ I ~
MT12Nl0
2T
qf!
=
C"
tiT2 50<1
0'1
01E:;l
R'8 ,<I
C lO
4.7 J.lF
MOTOROLA
Fig. 59-1
DOUBLE SIDEBAND, SUPPRESSED CARRIER RF MODULATOR, Continued. Circuit Notes An RF input is applied to the primary of TI, which applies equal amplitude, opposite phase RF drive for output FETs QI and Q2. With no AF modulation at points A and B, the opposite phase RF signals cancel each other and no output appears at the 50 V output connector. When AF modulation is applied to points A and B, a modulated RF output is obtained. The dc stability and low frequency gain are improved by source resistors RI8 and R19. A phase inverter consisting of a dual op amp (UIa and UIb) produces the out-ofphase, equal amplitude AF modulation signals.
LOW-DISTORTION LOW-LEVEL AMPLITUDE MODULATOR .1 - 100 MHz carrier Audio input
2.2 kG
> 2.2
~ kG
AM modulated output
IN';:;Ja
HP2BOO
10 I'H ~
J 1
)"F-
."V
3-40 pF
1
f = 27r VLC
WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 59-2
Circuit Notes This ~imple diode modulator delivers excellent results when used for high percentage modulation at low signal levels. Constants are shown for a carrier frequency of about 10 MRz, but, with a suitable tank, the circuit will give good results at any frequency at which the diode approximates a good switch. To extend frequency above that for which the IN4I48 is suited, a hot-carrier diode (RP2800, etc.) can be substituted. A shunt resistor across the tank circuit can be used to reduce the circuit Q so as to permit high percentage modulation without appreciable distortion.
370
VIDEO MODULATOR CIRCUIT
..,..,----11--------,
INTERC=: ----i
..
....
~ ~
--.2:1; HF
r~=nn
"'cc: '"
$'0'
'CLOSE TO OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
~"O
Vcc .. 5V
IOUNO
INTIFICAfIRIER
..
""
~ ~
2:1; I1f
r~_"n
"'CC
sv
.......TION
1
f!---I~
7
CLOSe. TO OUTPUT
ThAHSFORMER
2:1: HF
""
r:

SIGNETICS
f\
75fl"
Vcc = 5'0'
r
Circuit Notes
CLOSE TO OUTPUT
TRANSFOAMER
Fig. 59-3
These are modulator circuits for modulation of video signals on a VHF/UHF carrier. The circuits require a 5 V powersupply and few external components for the negative modulation mode. For positive modulation an external clamp circuit is required. The circuits can be used as general-purpose modulators without additional external components. The le is TDA6800.
371
VIDEO MODULATOR
'*
Cl .01 ~
V+ (15 -12V)
~ R4)ti L2 L3 r_t-_+~",IO",nr--1 ~c&I,,"1lO'-'-_-'
C5
300n TWIN LEAO
TO TV
RECEIVER
:i:
Dl
RI
C4
,11
"10pF
C7
lN4148
lOpF
I10PF
En
TV
2.21<
10pF <+HHf--,<~"'''''
C3 27pF
QI
R~
2:1'1 )
C6 001
ANT
2N1DII
=
R1
2.2K
C2 R3
1470"
='"
MODULATION
INPUT
'SEE TEXT
RADIOELECTRONICS
Fig. 59-4
Circuit Notes
This circuit permits direct connection of composite video signals from video games and microcomputers to the antenna terminals of TV sets. The output signal level is controlled by the modulation input.
TTL OSCILLATOR INTERFACES DATA FOR DISPLAY BY A TELEVISION SET
TO
TELEVISION VHF
ANTENNA LEADS 330

RI lOOk
COMPOSITE
VIDEO
IN
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 59-5
Circuit Notes
Three gates of a 74LS04 form the oscillator circuit. Capacitor Cl allows fine-frequency adjustment to a specific television channel and helps stabilize the circuit. Potentiometer RI acts as the mixing input and provides adjustment of the contrast ratio for the best viewing. A fourth gate buffers and helps stabilize the oscillator.
372
60
Motor Control Circuits

Bi-Directional Proportional Motor Control AC Motor Control PWM Motor Speed Control Stepping Motor Driver Low-Cost Speed Regulator For DC Motors Motor Speed Control Circuit Constant Speed Motor Control Using Tachometer Feedback Back EMF PM Motor Speed Control
DC Motor Speed Control Reversing Motor Drive, DC Control Signal N-Phase Motor Drivers Servo Motor Drive Amplifier DC Servo Drive Employs Bipolar Control Input 400 Hz Servo Amplifier Three-Phase Power-Factor Controller Motor/Tachometer Speed Control Closed Loop, Tachometer Feedback Control
373
BI-DlRECTIONAL PROPORTIONAL MOTOR CONTROL
V,
10K 10K 10K

220K,,'1
1 8 16
10nF
2
l293
15
ZT2300
2TX300
459101213
ov
Fig. 60-1
Circuit Notes
The control of both direction and of proportional motor speed is achieved by rotation of a single potentiometer. The motor driver is an SGS integrated circuit L293 which will drive up to 1 amp in either direction, depending on the logic state of input 1 and input 2 as per table.
liP 1
High Low
liP 2
Low High
Function Motor turns one way Motor reverses
By applying a variable M/S ratio flip-flop to these inputs, both speed and direction will be controlled. With RV1 in its center position the M/S will be 1:1 whereby the motor will remain stationary due to its inability to track at the flip-flop frequency. Movement of RV1 in either direction will gradually alter the M/S ratio and provide an average volt age bias in one direction proportional to the M/S ratio.
374
AC MOTOR CONTROL
(411N5060
IN~060
RI
SPEED ADJUST GAIN
~ IOK
47
0.1", 12V
IK
10Kt
,>OK
SPEED ADJUST
IO ~ h
. .n. f
IM
f'A741
I L,
Q' 2N11/2 Hl1C4
or.
",
lOO!'.
0.2:2
r.", I
10.
rI I I I I
L
U'!
QI~ 2:"'6027
Cl
-,
I I I I I
...0
O.04T~F
I I L'~ ':J
DHIJ806
.,
10K
6027
IK
O.4T",F
C'
lOOK
'f.",
HilA!
..
1/2 Hl1C4 (4)lN5060
Fig. 60-2
Circuit Notes
The circuit illustrates feedback speed regulation of a standard ac induction motor, a function difficult to accomplish other than with a costly, generator type, precision tachometer. When the apertured disc attached to the motor shaft allows the light beam to cross the interrupter module, the programmable unijunction transistor, QI, discharges capacitor, Cl, into the much larger storage capacitor, C2. The voltage on C2 is a direct function of the rotational speed of the motor. Subsequently, this speed-related potential is compared against an adjustable reference voltage, VI, through the monolithic operational amplifier, AI, whose output, in turn, establishes a dc control input to the second P.U.T. (Q2). This latter device is synchronized to the ac supply frequency and furnishes trigger pulses in the conventional manner to the triac at a phase angle determined by the speed control, RI, and by the actual speed of the motor.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PWM MOTOR SPEED CONTROL

03 MR854 MOTOR ARMATURE
R1 R2 1 M!l R3 1 k!1
01 MGP20N45
VI'IEF
INPUT COMPARATOR 02 MGP20N45 R5 47 !1 C1 1 "F
'I:! HP 90 Vdc
R4 1 k!1 MOTOROLA
01
02
120 V AC LINE VOLTAGE
Fig. 60-3
Circuit Notes
Speed control is accomplished by pulse width modulating the gates of two MGP20N45 TMOS devices. Therefore, motor speed is proportional to the pulse width of the incoming digital signal, which can be generated by a microprocessor or digital logic, The incoming signa1 is applied to comparator VI, then to paralleled inverters V2, V3, and V4 that drive the two TMOS devices, which, in turn, control power applied to the motor armature. Bridge rectifier D1 supplies fullwave power that is filtered by R5 and Cl. Free-wheeling diode D3 (MR854) prevents high voltage across Ql and Q2. A back-to-back zener diode, D2, protects against transients and high voltage surges.
STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER Circuit Notes
.uPE~'O~ ElECTHIC SCo.SVN .... HD30'
STEPPING MOTOR
0,.0.,
VN'O~M O~
Vol00IlCJ
SILCONIX, INC.
Fig. 60-4
Stepping motors find wide use in disk drives and machine control. MOSPOWER transistors are ideal motor drivers because of their freedom from second breakdown. Note that snubbing networks are not used because load line shaping is not necessary with MOSPOWER and the inductance of the motor is fairly low so that the inductive spike is small. The MOSFET gates are tied directly to the outputs of theCMOS control circuitry. The logic is arranged to sequence the motor in accordance with the needs of the application.
376
LOW-COST SPEED REGULATOR FOR DC MOTORS
FIG.1
* - 1W Cl ~LM 358 Z ~ 5.8V
Fig. 60-5
Circuit Notes A four thyristor controlled bridge is used for operation in two quadrants of the torquespeed characteristics. In the trigger circuits the usual pulse transformers were replaced by self biased circuits which minimize gate power consumption and increase noise innnunity. Electrical isolation is guaranteed by the use of optocouplers. The trigger pulses are generated by the comparison between an error signal. previously processed and amplified, and a line synchronism signal. The converter's output is a dc voltage proportional to the speed, which after being compared with a reference signal, becomes the error signal.
377
MOTOR SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT

I
---R1 10k
-~
/
I
10k 10k
10k
I
1,Ok
10k
220k UN 220k UN R2
7
8 16
2 L293
3 6
R1 V4 LM339 10k
14 5 9 10 12 13
-:.-::=::;;::===--<>--t~~====~ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . -.. .;,:~~o,v
Fig. 60-6
Circuit Notes A shortcoming of the above bi-directional proportional motor control circuit is that with the potentiometer in its center position the motor does not stop, but creeps due to the difficulty in setting the potentiometer for an exact 1: 1 mark-space ratio from the flip-flop. This modified circuit uses a second potentiometer, ganged with the first used to inhibit drive to the motor near the center position. This potentiometer is connected between the supply lines and feeds a window comparator which in turn drives the inhibit input of the L293.
CONSTANT SPEED MOTOR CONTROL USING TACHOMETER FEEDBACK
Vi
IPIJRE dC:,
(PuLSING del
---v-v-v-rLOAD
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR R4 INPUT CIRCUIT I I DETECTOR AND POWER 120 V AC
CONTROL CIRCUIT MOTOROLA
'--~-~-...
Fig. 60-7
Circuit Notes The ~enerator output is rectified then filtered and applied between the positive supply voltage and the base of the detector transistoL This provides a negative voltage which reduces the base-voltage when the speed increases. In normal operation, if the tachometer voltage is less than desired, the detector transistor is turned on, then turns on Q2 which causes the timing capacitor for the unijunction transistor to charge quickly. As the tachometer output approaches the voltage desired, the base-emitter voltage is reduced to the point at which Ql is almost cut off. Thereby, the collector current which charges the unijunction timing capacitor is reduced, causing that capacitor to charge slowly and trigger the thyristor later in the half cycle. In this manner, the average power to the motor is reduced until just enough power to maintain the desired motor speed is allowed to flow.
378
BACK EMF PM MOTOR SPEED CONTROL

R5
V t (MOTOR VOLTAGE)
2M
+ 12 V
R1 7.5 k
C1
01
R7 D1
+ 12 VOLTS (REGULATED)
10 k 1N4740
01
+12 V
R4
MTP6P06
~~ ~I--J4611">/I4,..k+--1 2
R3
R10 499 k
LM311
U1 >-~~-~~~~
R6 15 k
R6 100 k
D3
IN 4004
3 -
562
n
PM MOTOR
D2
IN4Q04
R9
6.6 k
C2
C3
.1
.01
COMMON OR
vMOTOROLA
Circuit Notes The use of power MOSFETs allows a direct interface between logic and motor power, which permits circuit simplicity as well as high efficiency. This speed control circuit can be packaged on a 22-pin, double-sided, 3.5 x 4-in. pc board. A 12 V control supply and a TRW BLll, 30 V motor are used; with minor changes other motor and control voltages can be accommodated. For example, a single 24 V rail could supply both control and motor voltages. Motor and control voltages are kept separate here because CMOS logic is used to start, stop, reverse and oscillate the motor with a variable delay between motor reversals. Motor speed is established by potentiometer R2, which applies a corresponding dc voltage to the + input of comparator U1, whose output is then applied to TMOS device MTP8P08 (Q1). Zener diode Dl limits the drive to Ql. The output of Q1 drives the permanent magnet motor. Back emf is obtained from the motor via the network consisting of R8, R9, RlO, C2, C3 and D3; it is applied to-input of comparator U1.
379
DC MOTOR SPEED CONTROL
6V
6V
'~1
7
V SET
ULN3755W
'!~
3
5
6
4
1O
8 9
1/,
ULN3755W
"
11
-6V
H/F rO
-6V
I I
I
lOK
0.' J-IF
J
-6V
C,
R,
I
10K
o '!IF
R, R,
MOTOR 1S GLOBE IOOA565 (12 VDCj
Pwg No W-130
SPRAGUE ELECTRIC CO.
Fig. 60-9
Circuit Notes Power op amps provide accurate speed control for dc motors. The circuit provides bidirectional speed control. The amplifiers' push-pull configuration ensures a full rail-torail voltage swing (minus the output stages' saturation drops) across the motor in either direction. The circuit uses a mechanically-coupled tachometer to provide speed-stabilizing feedback to the first amplifier section. The motor's speed and direction of rotation is set by adjusting the 10 k ohm potentiometer at the amplifier's noninverting input. The RFCF feedback network prevents oscillation by compensating for the inherent dynamic mechanical lag of the motor. Select the RFCF time constant to match the particular motor's characteristics.
380
REVERSING MOTOR DRIVE, DC CONTROL SIGNAL
V"OEAD8ANO'
, ""R,
5K
"06 eR,
~
CR5
GC
5600
R,
R,
'''lO
ARMATURE
120 \I 60 (PS
"I.
Cl 10., CRI GE IN5059 ,
CR2 L _ _(; GE IN5059 T'
GC
""CR 6 --A40S
tggN TROL (!:6\11

Ct
OIAe
GE ST-2
+ .VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
JPEIGAlN
OEA08ANQ CONTROL
')0-
-...I
VOLTAGE
..., BALANCE
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 60-10
CircuilNoles This is a positioning servo drive featuring adjustment of balance, gain, and deadband. In addition to control from a dc signal, mechanical input can be fed into the balance control, or that control could be replaced by a pair of resistance transducers for control by light or by temperature.
381
N-PHASE MOTOR DRIVERS

50 50
Vs
8.2K 2 5 ULN3751Z
+ 4
SINGLE-PHASE AC MOTOR DRIVER

#47
-Vs
o
Dwg. No. W-131
":'
TWO-PHASE AC MOTOR DRIVER

50 50
B.2K
#47
0.33
11FT c,
0.33 pF B.2K
o
Circuit Notes
12.4K
-Vs
8.2K
-rO. 1JJF
Ct B.2K
Rt
=
Dwg. No. W-132
A,
SPRAGUE ELECTRIC
co.
Fig. 60-11
Because of its high amplification factor and built-in power-output stage, an integrated power operational amplifier makes a convenient driver for ac motors. One op amp can be configured as an oscillator to generate the required ac signal. The power-output stage, of course, supplies the high-current drive to the motor. The controlling op amp is
382
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR DRIVER
61.5K R3
Vs
7
11 12
R,
9.5K
~
</>0120'
1PF r0
-Vs
8.2K
Dwg. No. W133
configured as a Wein bridge oscillator. The RICl, R2C2 feedback networks determine the oscillation frequency, according to the following expression: 1
By varying either RI or R2, the oscillator frequency can be adjusted over a narrow range. The R3/R4 ratio sets the second amplifier's gain to compensate for signal attenuation occurring in the phase shitters. The circuits can be driven from an external source, such as a pulse or square wave, setting the gain of the left-hand amplifier to a level less than that required for oscillation. The RC feedback networks then function as an active filter causing the outputs to be sinusoidal.
383
SERVO MOTOR DRIVE AMPLIFIER

75 V REGULATED
R1
R5
1000
1000
R2
3000
Q7
02
MTM8P10
R3 3000
R7 3000
R4
1000
04
RB
100 V
1000
U3
TO SHORT
CIRCUIT INDICATOR
1>I I
5W
::.rv- L..+I_~ L ____ .J

Fig. 60-12
,...,.v
I I
R9
MOTOROLA
Circuit Notes Digital [Cs and opto-isolators provide the drive for this TMOS servo amplifier, resulting in fewer analog circuits and less drift. Fast and consistent turn-on and turn-off characteristics also enable accurate analog output results directly from the digital signal without the need for analog feedback. An "H" bridge configuration is employed for the servo amplifier, which obtains complementary PWM inputs from digital control circuits. The PWM inputs are applied via opto-isolators, which keep the digital control logic isolated from the 75 V supply used for the amplifier. A short circuit indicator is provided by opto-isolator U3; if there is a short, the drop across R9 increases to a value sufficient to activate the isolator and send a short indication to the digital control logic.
384
DC SERVO DRIVE EMPLOYS BIPOLAR CONTROL INPUT

CONTROL IN
POWER INPUT
OUTPUT
+5V + 5 V - .
10 Vp P
R1 10k BIPOLAR CONTROL INPUT
5 V 10
V
"0,,
l
D1 1N4148
01
MTP8N08
+2.5 V
V
L\
L\
+ 15 V
U1A '/. MC3403
OV
5 V
10 k
2.5 V
02
5V 0 /\.
GNDl
MOTOROLA
OUTPUT
-5V-u--Y
V O"1. RMS
c~Vi"
/ t-3~5
TRANSFER FUNCTION
Fig. 60-13
Circuit Notes
This circuit accepts bipolar control inputs of 5 V and provides a phase-chopped output to a dc load (such as a servo motor) of the same polarity as the input. The rms voltage of the output is closely proportional to the control input voltage. N-channel and p-channel TMOS devices; QI and Q2, are connected in anti-series to form a bidirectional switch through which current can flow in either the forward or reverse direction. Control circuits turn QI and Q2 on when they are reverse biased, bypassing their reverse rectifier and increasing circuit efficiency. Each device is allowed to turn off only when forward biased. The QI-Q2 switch connects the ac power source to the load when its instantaneous voltage is the same polarity and less than the control voltage. UIa is configured as an ideal positive rectifier whose output follows the control voltage when it is positive, and is zero otherwise. Similarly, UIb is a negative rectifier. UIc turns QI on whenever the ac input voltage is lower than the positive rectifier output. For negative control voltages, QI is turned on only during the negative half-cycle. For positive control voltages, QI is turned on during the end portions of the positive half-cycle. Similarly, UId turns Q2 on whenever the ac input voltage is higher than the output of the negative rectifier.
385
400 Hz SERVO AMPLIFIER

R9 6.04 k +28 V INPU T SIGNAL 0-1 20 Vac 4 00 Hz F ROM SYN CHROREC ElVER +28 V
22 k
t
Rl0 2k
Rll 6.04 k -28 V
100 k
28 V R7 10 k
lW
Rl CR7 Cl .22 250 V 1 N4005 R22 10 k
R2 10 k
11 t\
t'-+
LM343
R23 330
R3 47 k
lN4005 ~ D2 r- -28 V R4 -28 V R5 10 k
G AIN
825 k 1%
11
~
MOTOROLA
499
1%
C2
68 pF
R16 100 k
+ 28 V
R17 6.04 k
1%
R18 2k
Fig. 60-14
Circuit Notes The signal from a synchro receiver or a variable resistive cam follower (potentiometer) is boosted by operational amplifier U1, whose output swing is limited by back-to-back zeners D3 and D4. The signal is then applied to operational amplifiers U2 and U3, which drive the gates ofQ1 and Q2 respectively. The npn transistor (Q3) is a fast current limiter for the n-channel MTM8N10; a pnp transistor (Q4) performs the same function for the p-channel MTM8P10. Capacitors C3 and C4 eliminate the need for accurate dc offset zeroing. T1 steps up the output voltage to 120 V for the 400 Hz servo motor.
386
+28 V R13 470 R12 10 k

1%
01 MTM8N10
+28 V
D5 1N4936
D6 MR756. 03 R20 .2 !l 7.5W
D7 MR756
D3 18 V
)~
D4 1N4746
~'&
R14 10 k 1% +28 V LM343 U3
R15
C3 + 1500 50 V
C4 + 1500 50 V
-120 Vac 400 Hz TO SERVO MOTOR
470
D8 1N4936
-28 V
VVv--O -28 V R19 6.04 k
1%
-28 V
387
THREE-PHASE POWER-FACTOR CONTROLLER
4.lk 3W
IN645 I N965 15V
+-1IfI1I,.........--+-{) + 15 V
I +-'vv,"'.....--.---()3W
~
430"F ~ 30V 6.8kIN645 ....
IN965
Notes: A] to A6 = LM324 TRl MAC 36-6, (5320, or equivalent, gate-controlled semiconductor switch All resistors 1/4 Wuniess otherwise indicated All capacitors in m;crofarads, and 30 Vdc unless otherwise noted
:0
,..---4
r-- ------- ----- ------, -15V 180k o. 01 I N483 1N190l I O.,..,F I

3.9k 3.9k
Ramp generator
'1 .... ........

11k
:
+
1.1k
IN483:-------- V2
. 3.9k
Vl :
:H-M-1 I N483
eRl
....
Fig. 60-15
Circuit Notes The modified power-factor controller, developed at the Marshall Space Flight Center, employs a phase detector for each of the three phasewindings of a delta-connected induction motor. The phase-difference sum is the basis for control. Instabilities of earlier systems are overcome with improved feedback control incorporating a 20Hz bandwidth signal.
388
MOTORR" ACHOMETER SPEED CONTROL
Rl 10k 1.
" O.22,u ".7.

Cl
1
RS 101< 0.1%
R4 C2 1k 0.02",
R6 10k 0.1% Rl0 10k R7 0.2
,..
10k
D.U:
Fig. 60-16
Circuit Notes The tachometer, on the same shaft as the dc motor, is simply a generator. It gives a dc output voltage proportional to the speed of the motor. A summing amplifier, AI, controls its output so that the tachometer voltage equals the input voltage, but of opposite sign. With current drive to the motor, phase lag to the tachometer is 90, before the second order effects come in. Compensation on Al is designed to give less than 90 phase shift over the range of frequencies where the servo loop goes through unity gain. Should response time be of less concern, a power op amp could be substituted for Al to drive the motor directly. Lowering break frequencies of the compensation would, of course, be necessary. The circuit could also be used as a position servo. All that is needed is a voltage indicating the sense and magnitude of the motor shaft displacement from a desired position. This error signal is connected to the input, and the servo works to make it zero. The tachometer is still required to develop a phase-correcting rate signal because the error signal lags the motor drive by 180.
389
CLOSED LOOP, TACHOMETER FEEDBACK CONTROL
r----------- -- ------ ,
I +12VDC
--- - - - - - - --- - - -- -- - - --------,
, : , ,
OHOaO!)
,OK
C2 10 6V
1001<
'"
2201(
MOTOR
oc
2201(
330
.002
'K
AI4F
20K
OHo
22
spo.
AOJ.
'"
044EI
'K
'K
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 60-17
Circuit Notes
The system utilizes the H21Al and a chopper disc to provide superior speed regulation when the dynamic characteristics of the motor system and the feedback system are matched to provide stability. The tachometer feedback system illustrated was designed around specific motorlload combinations and may require modification to prevent hunting or oscillation with other combinations. This dc motor control utilizes the optachometer circuit previously shown to control a P. U. T. pulse generator that drives the D44El darlington transistor which powers the motor.
390
61
Multiplier Circuits
T he sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694.
Analog Multiplier 0.01 % Analog Multiplier The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section.
391
ANALOG MULTIPLIER
.tsv
CURRENT SOURCE
20 kll 1%
1.5 k!1
"
'"
~
AMPLIFIER
A1'
25.8 kW
lN963B
A1
20 kll
1%
EIN 1
-15 V
12 kW
'"
,,,
12 kW
-15 V
1'10
MULTIPLIER
1'10
2"2920
EOUT
0'
AS
-15 V
5 kJ! 1'10 f'A726
e'N
:>
25.8 kU'
1%
'15
-15 V
Fig. 61-1
20 kJ)
"
1%
15 kll 1%
-=-
'Matched to 01010 EOUT '" 100EIN 1

I'.:
EIN2
Courtesy of FAIRCHILD CAMERA & INSTRUMENT CORPORATION.
150 kl)
'"
ZERO ADJUST
"
<15 V
150 kO
0.01 % ANALOG MULTIPLIER
LTl004-,211
10<
80
6~
OUTPUT TRIM
16
-5V
----,
'I, LTC1043
+5V
Xlr,PUT+
30pF
11<
330k
OPERATE LTC1043 FROM 5V tPOLYSTYRENE, MOUNT CLOSE "'% FILM RESISTOR ADJUST OUTPUT TRIM
SQX-Y."OUTPUTOQ1%
I L_
OUTPUT '" XYO.OI%
2N2907A (FOR STARTUP)
-}---------i
-5V
Fig. 61-2
Circuit Notes The F - V input frequency is locked to the V - F output because the LTCI043' s clock is common to both sections. The F - V's reference is used as one input of the multiplier, while the V - F furnishes the other. To calibrate, short the X and Y inputs to 1. 7320 V and trim for a 3-V output.
392
62
Noise Reduction Circuits
Audio Squelch Circuit Precise Audio Clipper Balance Amplifier with Loudness Control Noise Limiter Audio-Powered Noise Clipper
393
AUDIO SQUELCH CIRCUIT

CI,CZ,C3.C4,C6 AND (7- ELECTROLYTIC .ISV WKG RESISTORS (FIXED VALUES) MINIATURE 1/4W 5 OR 10%
SPST TO GGLE
"'
1.:5M
"",7K
" " 0"
'-
."
IN
rr )TRI
"
0491
ICI MC3340P
"
- ."
,.
8CIO
IO"r
,
7
IO... F
r1- "
,.
\!::
BCIDSC
rue " ~~E--@
"
25"F
, "
47&1
~:OR41K
" . '" '"'"

"
aCID!!C
IO ... F
"
"
:560pF
POl:Y
73 MAGAZINE
Fig. 62-1
Circuit Notes Tbis simple audio squelch unit suppresses all input signals below a preset threshold.
PRECISE AUDI6 CLIPPER

+9V
CLIPPED
47k
10k r
_....;+~ ~UT
+---~-1---~4--, 22"F
MATCHED BC107 BC109 BC184 etc.
10k
ELECTRONICS INTERNATIONAL TODAY
Fig. 62-2
Circuit Notes
A differential amplifier makes an excellent audio clipper and can provide precise, symmetrical clipping. The circuit shown commences clipping at an input of 100 mV. The output commences clipping at 3 V. Matcbing Q7 and Q2 is necessary for good symmetrical clipping. (If some asymmetry can be tolerated, tbis need not be done.)
394
BALANCE AMPLIFIER WITH LOUDNESS CONTROL
,-
'''~i
,~.
LlIIlL
I I I I I I I
...
,,,""'''CE
Z:to.f
,.
LOUDOIEU OU10 12K
,~
,a.
I I
~
....
11. OUT
~
'"
I
I
,~.
"
~
"~1
,~.
I I
I
100.1 I I I
220._
I I
I
,.
".
o
All reslator values Bre In ohms.
I I
lOOK
'00'
SIGNETlCS
Fig. 62-3
NOISE LIMITER
INPUT
220k
R'
390k
R'
R2
lM~!
R' lMH
ON
R2
470k
02
IN914 RJ lMH
OUTPUT
Fig. 62-4
Circuit Notes This limiter improves signal-ta-noise ratio. It is connected between the detector output and the audio input (if high impedance) or at some relatively high-impedance section between two audio stages-preferably the low level stages. D1 and D2 can be any diode having relatively low forward resistance and very high back resistance. The circuit is excellent for receivers having bandwidths down to 2 or 3 kHz. Increase the value of Cl for receivers having narrower bandwidths.
395
AUDIO-POWERED NOISE CLIPPER

47
D,
G,
Input
Bn
11
2 .5K ~VV'v---.--f-{
22D
Output
10K 10K
11
Bn
ca
Circuit Notes
Fig. 62-5
T1 and T2 are 600 to 8 ohm transformers (any transistor radio output transformers with 500 to 4 ohm impedance may be used). Q1 is a 2N2222 npn transistor, and Q2 is a 2N2907 pnp transistor. D1 and D2 1N270 signal diodes (HEP 134 or 135). Two transistors, powered by the audio power contained within the signal, will clip signal peaks which exceed the threshold established by the 2.5 K potentiometer. The diodes isolate the positive and negative clipping circuits represented by the npn and pnp transistors, respectively. A desired audio operating level can be established and the potentiometer needs little or no further adjustment.
396
63
Notch Filters
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources <lection.
Adjustable Q Notch Filter 1800 Hz Notch Filter 550 Hz Notch Filter Tunable Audio Notch Filter Circuit Audio Notch Filter
Tunable Notch Filter Uses an Operational Amplifier Active Band-Reject Filter WienBridge Notch Filter Tunable Audio Filter Passive Bridged, Differentiator Tunable Notch Filter
397
ADJUSTABLE Q NOTCH FILTER
Rl
10MEG
R,
10 MEG
>-"--",VOUT
540 pF
~.
R3 M
Cl 270pF
270 pF
~o-60Hz
C'
50 k
R'
Fig. 63-1
Circuit Notes In applications where the rejected signal might deviate slightly from the null on the notch network, it is advantageous to lower the Q of the network. This insures some rejection over a wider range of input frequencies. The figure shows a circuit where the Q may be varied from 0.3 to 50. A fraction of the output is fed back to R3 and C3 by a second voltage follower, and the notch Q is dependent on the amount of signal fed back. A second follower is necessary to drive the twin "T" from a low-resistance source so that the notch frequency and depth will not change with the potentiometer setting. 1800 Hz NOTCH FILTER
1 79
K~2
1 79 KO
O.003 . F
Q,Q03"F
o 003"F
0 003"F
'/4
4741
006~F
I
Fig. 63-2
EXAR
Circuit Notes The circuit produces at least 60 dB of attenuation of the notch frequency.
398
550 Hz NOTCH FILTER

1 1 KQ 1 1 KQ
0033i1F
0033j.JF
EXAA
Fig. 63-3
Circuit Notes The circuit produces at least 60 dB of attenuation of the notch frequency.
TUNABLE AUDIO NOTCH FILTER CIRCUIT

Cl
+15v
0-1
A2
220111-
A4
4/k
C2
15nF
A6
lkO
A8
::I!9on
6
C4
f
2 22k
Al
30k
lOOk
A5
47k
A3
A7
R9
lkO
~5 b ~onF
-lSv
C3
1 10""-IC1=558
IC2 '" TL071 151lF
271 As
C~
eg 100Hz 1010kHz
It R6/R9 '" 1QOkO Dual pot
Fig. 63-4
Circuit Notes The circuit requires only one dual-ganged potentiometer to tune over a wide range; if necessary over the entire audio range in one sweep. The principle used is that of the Wien bridge, fed from anti-phase inputs. The output shonld be buffered as shown with a FET input op amp, particularly if a high value pot is used. An op amp with differential outputs (eg., MCl445) may be used in place of the driver rcs; R2 may be made t:rinuruIble to optimize the notch. .
399
AUDIO NOTCH FILTER

A A A
OUT
IN
R
A6
IC1A
HP
220k
ICl Tl084 R lOOk
68.
A
Ra, R9, lOOk DUAL POT
Fig. 63-5
Circuit Notes With the circuit shown here the response at one octave off tune is within 10% of the far out response: notch sharpness may be increased or reduced by reducing or increasing~respectively the 68 K ohm resistor. Linearity tracking of R8 and R9 has no effect on notch depth. The signals at HP and LP are always in antiphase, notch will always be very deep at the tuned frequency, despite tolerance variations in R6-9 and C2, C3. TUNABLE NOTCH FILTER USES AN OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
+10
'----=4
In
7
>~~--oOut
o---....- __N\,_-<~-4
.0047 -10 .0047 500 K!1 pot
470 K!1
10KIl
WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 63-6
Circuit Notes This notch filter is useful for tunable band-reject applications in the audio range. The values shown will give a tuning range of about 300-1500 Hz.
400
ACTIVE BAND-REJECT FILTER
C3 RI tOkn R3 Cl 0.01
~F
O.OO53",F
R2 10kn 1.2 kn C2 0,01

~F
>---~--~-----Vo
8.2kn
R5 R6
7 kn
1 kn
C4~ 0.008 jJF
10r-------------------------------,
01-_ _ _- .
III
'C
~ -10
~ -20 -~ -30
-~~_L~~~L__L_LLLUW~~_L~~
'il
>
100
600
lk
2k 5k
10k
60k lOOk
Frequency - Hz
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 63-7
Circuit Notes A filter with a band-reject characteristic is frequently referred to as a notch filter. A typical circuit using a ~ 741 is the unity-gain configuration for this type of active filter shown. The filter response curve shown is a second-order band-reject filter with a notch frequency of 3 kHz. The resulting Q of this filter is about 23, with a notch depth of - 31 dB. Although three passive T networks are used in this application, the operational amplifier has become a sharply tuned low-frequency filter without the use of inductors or large-value capacitors.
401
WIEN BRIDGE NOTCH FILTER

Input Rc
Fig. 63-8
WILLlAM SHEETS
R,
-==if RA = RB = RC = RD = RE = R and CA = CB = C f _ 1 R megohm null - 6.28 RC C microfarad f Hertz
TUNABLE AUDIO FILTER S60K
)
In
.1
I(
~
WILLlAM SHEETS.
.1
I(
>
>
( -- )
Ganged 100 k POTS
I r
(
Out
Fig. 63-9
Circuit Notes This filter covers the upper part of the audio passband and can be used to eliminate unwanted high frequencies from audio signals.
402
PASSIVE BRIDGED, DIFFERENTIATOR TUNABLE NOTCH FILTER
In 0
lC C ceI "C
A
Rc vvv
o Out
1\
And if R, = 6(RA + Re) Then { Notch} 1 freq = -6""'.2-:-a--=C=-'' ;"3'' R=A'' R=.
If RA and Re is made a potentiometer then the filter can be variable.
O~-I~--~VVV~--J:~--~O
--CA
-.:::c.
WILLlAM SHEETS
FIg. 63-10
RA and Re are sections of potentiometer.
403
64
Operational Amplifier Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Variable Gain and Sign Op Amp Circuit Single Potentiometer Adjusts Op Amp's Gain Over Bipolar Range
404
VARIABL-E GAIN AND SIGN OP AMP CIRCUIT

Fig.l
R
3R
Vc
Fi 9 .2
-r________________-,
1
"
~ ~
~
~
'0
~
1.0
-0.5
-l~__________________________~
FIg. 64-1
Circuit Notes
The gain of the amplifier is smoothly controllable between the limits of + 1 to - 1. It is adjustable over this range using a single potentiometer. The voltage gain of the arrangement is given by:
Vo Vi 2(1-2) (1+)(2-)
Where represents the fractional rotation of the potentiometer. R.
405
SINGLE POTENTIOMETER ADJUSTS OP AMP'S GAIN OVER BIPOLAR RANGE
RI
RI,
"
r-.w~-""--1ROI"-O) _
R2
"-
y>---_I--'O
.....
'0
.R3 R3
Fig. 64-2
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Circuit Notes An op amp's gain level can be adjusted over its full inverting and noninverting gain
range. R3 varies the signal applied to both the inverting and noninverting amplifier inputs. When the wiper position (denoted by xl equals zero, the noninverting amplifier input is grounded. This also holds the voltage across R2 at zero, so R2 has no effect on operation. Now only Rl and R carry feedback current, and the amplifier operates at a gain of - n. At the other pot extreme, where x = 1, the input signal is connected directly to the noninverting input. Since feedback maintains a near-zero voltage between the amplifier inputs, the amplifier's inverting input will also be near the input signal level, thus little voltage is across R1, also now the gain is +n. The amplifier should be driven from a low impedance source to minimize source loading error, low offset op amps should be used.
406
65
Optically-Coupled Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Three-Phase Switch for Inductive Load Integrated Solid State Relay Stable Optocoupler Microprocessor Triac Array Driver DC Linear Coupler Linear AC Analog Coupler Simple AC Relay Using Two Photon Couplers Linear Analog Coupler High Sensitivity, Normally Open, Two Terminal, Zero Voltage Switching Half-Wave Contact Circuit High Speed Paper Tape Reader Digital Transmission Isolator Isolation and Zero Voltage Switching Logic Optical Communication System Linear Optocoupler Circuit for Instrumentation 50 kHz Center Frequency FM Optical Transmitter Receiver for 50 kHz FM Optical Transmitter
407
THREE-PHASE SWITCH FOR INDUCTIVE LOAD

PHASE I
]I
1If
RI
RI
RI CRI
+
CRI
+
pc-r
<}--_-1~SC R2
PC - 2
r
I
I
r
I
----
<}----h
r I I
L
CONTROL INPUT
PC-3
-,
CR2 R2 R2
CR2 R2
PHASE I
II
m
pc- 3
PC-I
PC-2
R2
-
RI I
I
I
I I L
CONTROL
INPUT
---
--,
_J
Cl
r
I
I L
~-
-,
R2
RI
I
Cl
r
I I
.J
----
-,
_J
R2
RI
I I
Cl
Y OR A
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 65-1
Circuit Notes The following are three-phase switches for low voltage. Higher currents can be obtained by using inverse parallel SCRs which would be triggered as shown. To simplify the following schematics and facilitate easy understanding of the principles involved, the following schematic substitution is used (Note the triac driver is of limited use at 3 </> voltage levels).
408
INTEGRATED SOLID STATE RELAY
DT230H
QPTO
+ <>--INPUT I CIRCUIT 1\
-------t-,
----v-\
COUPLER
--'\..r-.
1+
ZVs
<>INPUT TERMINALS
I OUTPUT
,I
CIRCUIT
: : I I '.~J ~""."...
""
22
r
... "" ...
12011 RMS
100
I AC VOLTAGE
AND LOAD
TERMINALS
l-
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 65-2
Circuit Notes
A complete zero-voltage switch solid-stite relay contains an input circuit, an output circuit, and the power thyristor. The circuit illustrates a triac power thyristor with snubber circuit and GE-MOVR II Varistor transient over-voltage protection. The 22 ohm resistor shunts dildt currents, passing through the bridge diode capacitances, from the triac gate, while the 100 ohm resistor limits surge and gate currents to safe levels. Although the circuits illustrated are for 120-V rms operation, relays that operate on 220 V require higher voltage ratings on the MOV, rectifier diodes, triac, and pilot SCR. The voltage divider that senses zero crossing must also be selected to minimize power dissipation in the transistor optisolator circuit for 220-V operation.
STABLE OPTOCOUPLER
+ lOV
Vin
53.6K
2N2369A
Q2=4N24A
187Q
16.SK
10K
Q,=:4N24A
VOUT
y
EMITTER FOLLOWER
332 Q 604 I>
OPTOCOUPLER WITH FEEDBACI'.
NASA
Fig. 65-3
Circuit Notes A circuit stabilizes the current-transfer ratio (CTR) of an optically coupled isolator used as a linear transducer. The optocoupler produces a voltage output that is proportional to-but electrically isolated from-the voltage input. However, the output voltage is directly affected by changes in the CTR, ani:! the CTR can change substantially with temperature and current. To a lesser extent the CTR changes with time over the life of the optocoupler. The circuit employs a feedback circuit containing a second optocoupler. The feedback signal tends to oppose changes in the overall CTR.
410
MICROPROCESSOR TRIAC ARRAY DRIVER
120 VAC
I ':Ion
510M,f'l
Cl S8lJ.F
25V
/'
I
\
,~
OT23) 27KfI
C'
+5V
LOGIC SUPPLY SEIr.4ICQNOUCTQRS
IC-Z
a - 1,0-2 ,C-I\= 5 GI42 B

OCI.OC-2.0C~n= H IIG2
lC-I,le-2,IC-I'I= LED DRIVER
REPEAT
GENERAL ELECTRIC
"
OUTPUTS elOCt<; PULSED EACH TRIAC ON O.5ms, PRR WHEN n < 36 FOR Al, Cl VALUES SHOWN,
Fig. 65-4
Circuit Notes
In microprocessor control of multiple loads, the minimum cost per load is critical. A typical application example is a large display involving driving arrays of incandescent lamps. This circuit provides minimal component cost per stage and optocoupler triggering of triac power switches from logic outputs. The minimal component cost is attained by using more complex software in the logic. A darlington output optocoupler provides gate current pulses to the triac, with cost advantages gained from eliminating the current limiting resistor and from the low cost coupler. The trigger current source is a dipped tantalum capacitor, charged from the line via a series resistor with coarse voltage regulation being provided by the darlington signal transistor. The resistor and capacitor are shared by all the darlington,triac~pairs and are small in size and cost due to the low duty cycle of pulsing. Coupler lRED current pulses are supplied for the duration of one logic clock pulse (2,10 /Lsec) , at 0.4 to 1 msec intervals, from a LED driver I.C. The pulse timing is derived from the clock waveform when the logic system requires triac conduction. A current limiting resistor is not used, which prevents Miller effect slowdown of the HllG2 switching speed to the extent the triac is supplied insufficient current to trigger. Optodarlington power dissipation is controlled by the low duty cycle and the capacitor supply characteristics.
411
DC LINEAR COUPLER
+~vo--------r---, 1/2 H23AI*
10
43K
IOOpF
OAI703
lOOK
2N5249A
IK VOUT 1J$2.8+0.3V 1N
Input
Output
LINEAR OPTICAL COUPLER CIRCUIT
Clos.-Iv positioned to illuminate L14Ql end H231\1 U.HBctor, .uch that VOUT ~ 2.SV lit VIN" O.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 65-5
Circuit Notes The accuracy of direct linear coupling of analog current signals via an optocoupler is determined by tbe coupler linearity and its temperature coefficient. Use of an additional coupler for feedback can provide linearity only if tbe two couplers are perfectly matched and identically biased. These are not practical constraints in most equipment designs and indicate tbe need for a different design approach. One of tbe most successful solutions to this problem can be illustrated by using a H23 emitter-detector pair and a Ll4H4. The H23 detector and Ll4H4 are placed so botb are illuminated by tbe H23 IRED emitter. Ideally, tbe circuit is mechanically designed such tbat the H23 emitter may be positioned to provide VOUT ~ 2.8 V when V1N ~ 0, thereby insuring collector current matching in tbe detectors. Then all three devices are locked in position relative to each otber. Otberwise, R may be adjusted to provide the proper null level, altbough temperature tracking should prove worse when R is adjusted. Note tbat the input bias is dependent on power supply voltage, altbough tbe output is relatively independent of supply variations. Testing indicated linearity was better than could be resolved, due to alignment motion caused by using plastic tape to lock positions. The concept of feedback control of IRED power output is useful for both information transmission and sensing circuitry.
412
LINEAR AC ANALOG COUPLER
. - -......- - 0
10"'A
IK
~V
4 70K
25fLF
Vin
I
I I
4N 3~
250,u.F
rv
__'---.J-';..----i
E---o
V 0 U' 1: 0 3 Vin
2.2k
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 65-6
Circuit Notes With the coupler biased in the linear region by the 10 mA dc bias on the IRED and the voltage divider on the phototransistor base, photodiode current flows out of the base into the voltage divider, producing an ac voltage proportional to the ac current in the IRED. The transistor is biased as an emitter follower and requires less than 10% of the photodiode current to produce the low impedance ac output across the emitter resistor. Note that the HIlAVI may be substituted for the 4N35 to provide VDE line voltage rated isolation of less than 0.5 pF.
SIMPLE AC RELAY USING TWO PHOTON COUPLERS

LOAD
CONTROL
INPUT
HIICI
,,
Circuit Notes If load current requirements are relatively

120VAC
,I
HIICI
,
+
low (i.e. maximum forward rms current 500 mAl. an ac solid state relay can be constructed quite simply by the connection of two HIlC optically coupled SCRs in a back-to-back configuration as illustrated.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 65-7
413
LINEAR ANALOG COUPLER

,--,----O+12V 270 471<
+12VO-~--,
0i~'
10M 100
10K
47K
DH0806
~,
1.8K
~~2~:027
390 "..._
(
*0.01
IM
VI"
~Ir~
.... __ _
112 HIIAI
O.I~~
1
Fig. 658
112
22
HIIAI
-20:s 11,,,$20
Transmitter
Receiver
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Circuit Notes The minimum parts count version of this system provides isolated, linear signal transfer useful at shorter distances or with an optocoupler for linear information transfer. Although the output is low level and cannot be loaded significantly without harming -accuracy, a single I. C. operational or instrumentation amplifier can supply both the lino ear gain and buffering for use with a variety of loads. HIGH SENSITIVITY, NORMAllY OPEN, TWO TERMINAL, ZERO VOLTAGE SWITCHING, HALF-WAVE CONTACT CIRCUIT
+~~------------~r---'
,...
INPUT
,...
82"
GENERAL ELECTRIC
111'
DHDBOO
Fig. 659
Circuit Notes The SCR coupler circuit provides higher sensitivity to input signals as illustrated. This allows the lower cost 4N39 (HllC3) to be used with the > 7 mA drive currents supplied by the input circuit.
414
HIGH SPEED PAPER TAPE READER

+5 V LOGIC SUPPLY
1 ,
100 k
,------<> OUTPUT
2N5172
DHD806
240
24'
-15 Vdc
o----<~
lM
1 k
F5Dl
4__~-_="'__
______
____- - - - - '
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 65-10
Circuit Notes When compuler peripheral equipment is interfaced, it is convenient to work with logic signal levels. With a nominal 4 V at the output dropping to - 0.6 V on illumination, this circuit reflects the requirements of a high-speed, paper tape optical reader system. The circuit operates at rates of up to 1000 bits per second. It will also operate at tape translucency such that 500/0 of the incident light is transmitted to the sensor, and provide a fixed threshold signal to the logic circuit, all at low cost. Several circuit tricks are required. Photodarlington speed is enhanced by cascode constant voltage biasing. The output threshold and tape translucency requirements are provided for by sensing the output voltage and operating to 2000 bits per second at ambient light levels equal to signal levels.
DIGITAL TRANSMISSION ISOLATOR

v+_s.ov
V+=5.0V
R6 1.0 k
Circuit Notes
R1
FROM
100
R3
1.0 k
TTL
An optoelectronics device is used to couple

a digital (TIL) signal to another system. The photodiode in the optocoupler drives an LM311 set up to produce a TIL compatible output. It is useful where grounds are not able to be connected for any reason.
TTL GATE
OUTPUT
SO,
R2
Cl
National Semiconductor Corp.
Fig. 65-11
415
ISOLATION AND ZERO VOLTAGE SWITCHING LOGIC

USING A TRANSISTOR OPTOCOUPLER
INPUT
:(:~~:~_~) ~22~"~C_2_03_B-i
__
6V
27" 22
47"
Q,
2N
330pF
38~9
27"
+V
USING A seR COUPLER INPUT
270K
22
(
0.
2N3859
-~--[)
/
------
---
r>t---.-...,.--J
47K
HIICI
6BpF
NORMALLY OPEN. TWO TERMINAL, ZERO VOLTAGE SWITCHING HALF WAVE CONTACT CIRCUITS
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 65-12
Circuit Notes These two simple circuits provide zero voltage switching. They can be used with full wave bridges or in antiparallel to provide full wave control and are normally used to trigger power thyristors. If an input signal is present during the time the ac voltage is between 0 to 7 V, the SCR will turn on. But, if the ac voltage has risen above this range and the input signal is then applied, the transistor, Ql, will be biased to the "on" state and will hold the SCR and, consequently, the relay" off" until the next zero crossing.
416
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
10 k 47
~F
20Vl
+12V 2.2 k 2N2222

20 V
'1
..
Audio
A"'1 "",,,
+
oe---,I(+
1+
'h 4558 100 k ~A 741 TLD81 Etc.
+I(
100 !l
~~
CLR2060 RCVR
l"
6.8 k 20V
6.8 k
vvv
.. +12V
Plastic Bottle cap
47~F
\
~~:: ,
-'
----------+-
Parallel Light Beam
WILLlAM SHEETS
Led (Point Source)
Fig. 65-13
....
.....
Circuit Notes The circuit will modulate the light from the LED using a crystal microphone or a loudspeaker output. To obtain the maximum range, the optical system must be efficient (see example). Either a convex lens or a concave mirror can be used to convert the LED output into a parallel beam. The received light is concentrated onto a sensitive photodarlington transistor. At short range the signal across the load resistor is adequate tb drive a crystal earpiece, for longer range an amplifier and a loudspeaker are needed.
50 kHz CENTER FREQUENCY FM OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
22"
470
20"
lEO~6
+-'V+-'V10
2.4K
2N5172
Fig. 65-14
L-----~--~~~----~----~--~-25VOC
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Circuit Notes The pulse repetition rate is relatively insensitive to temperature. and power supply voltage and is a linear function of VIN' the modulating voltage. Useful information transfer was obtained in free air ranges of 12 feet ('" 4m). Lenses or reflectors at the light emitter and detector increases range and minimizes stray light noise effects. Greater range can also be obtained by using a higher power output [RED such as the F5D1 in combination with the L14P2 phototransistor. Average power consumption of the transmitter circuit is less than ~ watts. LINEAR OPTOCOUPLER CIRCUIT FOR INSTRUMENTATION
+Vee2
2'2
4'7
2M
5'
Circuit Notes A dual optocoupler is used in a configuration which has the same current throughout as the LEDs. Assuming similar optocoupler features the output voltage must be equal to the noninverting input voltage. Since the op amp is within a closed loop the output voltage becomes equal to the input voltage. l\, and C perform as a compensation network to prevent oscillations.
Fig. 65-15
418
RECEIVER FOR 50 kHz FM OPTICAL TRANSMITTER

IOK
4.7K
100
390pF
0.47-
.OOZ
Ll4G2
~ ~
ZZM
1001<
2N5355 .'K
<7OK
'!IOpF
IOOpF.
2N!5249
I I I I I I
10K 10M
0.1-= VOlJT "4mV/KHI
OHO
ODD
390pF IK
tN4911
4.71<
10
L-~~----~------------~--~;-------~----~----~-o-zovoc DEMOOUlATOR PHOTOOETECTOA AMPL.IFIER
OENERAL ELECTRIC
FIg. 65-16
Circuit Notes For maximum range, the receiver must be designed in the same manner as a radio receiver front end, since the received signals will be similar in both frequency component and in amplitude of the photodiode urrent. The major constraint on the receiver performance is signal to noise ratio, followed by e.m. shielding, stability, bias points, parts layout, etc. These become significant details in the final design. This receiver circuit consists of a L14G2 detector, two stages of gain, and a FM demodulator which is the tachometer circuit, modified to operate up to 100 kHz. Better sensitivity can be obtained using more stages of stabilized gain with AGe, lower cost and sensitivity may be obtained by using an H23Al emitter-detector pair and/or by eliminating amplifier stages. For some applications, additional filtering of the output voltage may be desired.
419
66
Oscillators
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. RF-Genie Emitter-Coupled Big Loop Oscillator Simple Triangle Square Wave Oscillator Oscillator Adjustable over 10:1 Range One Second, 1 kHz Oscillator Single Control Four-Decade Variable Oscillator Tunable Frequency Oscillators Resistance Controlled Digital Oscillator Cassette Bias Oscillator 1 kHz Oscillator Inexpensive Oscillator is Temperature Stable Code Practice Oscillator Wide Range Variable Oscillator
420
RF-GENIE
REAR VIEW. SWI
10
?MH~
OSCILLA TOR
~" ~~'
SIGNAL
ATTENUATOR
SIGNAL
~Jjl~~l'~'
I
C
"
sw,
OUTPUT
~~
TAP
1~~90PF
e
HIGH
}lL
A
""'ON
15-Z00pF
SECTION
TO
455KHr OSCILLATOR
,--l0~'_____
t--.J
Y2
IJ-----+~:;co;--~ RFC-2,
Q2 IOmH
}s;.-'---F
"
/'
"0
COUNTER
E
END
MPF-I02
I" th
5-60pF
lOOK
VARIABLE OSCILLA TOR
,,
\ S2A
IFFfON
-=-3V
SIA
MCf
Q'
''''
1"
10
1(
SIB
IOpF
,,"
,,'QO of
lOOK
IN914
1.1
" 04
2N2222
IN4735
"
221'F
9QpF
'"
11
"0
TUNING
CAPACITOR
73 MAGAZINE
Fig. 66-1
Circuit Notes A variable oscillator covers 3,2 to 22 MHz in two bands-providing coverage of 80 through 15 meters plus most crystal-filter frequencies, Optional 455 kHz and 10,7 MHz crystal oscillators can be switched on-line for precise if alignment. Generator output is on the order of 4 volts POp into a 500 ohm load, A simple voltage-divider attenuator controls the generator's output level, and a second output provides sufficient drive for an external frequency counter.
421
EMITTERCOUPLEDBIG LOOP OSCILLATOR

.--r--,....~+ 9V
.01
300 1I
5601l
.--If--t--t--I-<> OUTPUT
Q2
1.2K
2.2K
Circuit Notes L1 is a loop of 10 to 20 turns of insulated wire with a diameter anywhere between 4" to 4'. Oscillator frequency (7 to 30 MHz) shifts substantially when a person comes near or into the loop. This oscillator together With a resonant detector might make a very good anti-personnel alarm. Transistors are 2N2926 or equivalent.
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 662
SIMPLE TRIANGLE SQUARE WAVE OSCILLATOR

741, POWERED FROM 12V 47k
.--11--,
>+./\1\/\('-...,+
15k 741
Fig. 663
Circuit Notes
This circuit 'generates simultaneously ,a triangle and a square waveform. It is self starting and has no latch up problems. IC1 is an integrator with a slew rate determined by CT and RT and IC2 is a Schmitt trigger. The output of IC1 ramps up and down between the hysteresis levels of the Schmitt, the output of which drives the integrator. By making RT variable, it is possible to alter the operating frequency over a 100 to 1 range. Three resistors, one capacitor, and a dual op amp is all that is needed to make a versatile triangle and square wave oscillator with a possible frequency range of 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz.
422
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTABLE OVER 10:1 RANGE
10k
FREOUENCY
POT lOOk ' - _ " 10:1 RANGE
Fig. 66-4
Circuit Notes In this circuit, there are two feedback paths around an oPamp. One is positive de feedback which forms a Schmitt trigger. The other is a CR timing network. Imagine that the output voltage is + 10 V. The voltage at the noninverting terminal is + 15 V. The voltage at the inverting terminal is a rising voltage with a time constant of CTRT. When this voltage exceeds + 5 V, the op amp's output will go low and the Schmitt trigger action will make it snap into its negative state. Now the output is -10 V and the voltage at the inverting terminal falls with the time constant as before. By changing this time constant with a variable resistor, a va..'"iable frequency oscillation may be produced.
ONE SECOND, 1 kHz OSCILLATOR

+15
lOOk
rO~f
1.8 MEG
220k
GE76F02FCIOO
2N2926
INITIATE
---1
/ ' - - .....
(~\
820pF
220k
'---/
Circuit Notes This circuit operates as an oscillator and a timer. The 2N6028 is nonnally on due to excess holding current through the 100 k resistor. When the switch is momentarily closed, the 10 /LF capacitor is charged to a full 15 volts and 2N2926 starts oscillating (1.8 M and 820 pF). The circuit latches when 2N2926 zener breaks down again.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 66-5
423
SINGLE CONTROL FOUR-DECADE VARIABLE OSCILLATOR
5 V dc, 15 mA maximum
R, 10k,
10 turn
10k
Ra
.. IC,
6
C, :~ 0,01 ,F
Mylar
10k P
Re
:>
7
'Ok
1f~LM393P
~0
2
""'"
>-'......_ 0
'12 LM393P
Output
...2 /0,IC"
8.21t
Re.
GND
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 66-6
Circuit Notes The circuit consists of a variable current source that charges a capacitor, which is rapidly discharged by a Schmitt-trigger comparator. The sawtooth waveform thus produced is fed to another comparator, one with a variable switching level. The output from the second comparator is a pulse train with an independently adjustable frequency and duty cycle. The variable-frequency ramp generator consists of capacitor Cl, which is charged by a variable and nonlinear current source. The latter comprises a 2N2907A pnp transistor, plus resistor RI and the potentiometer R2. Capacitor C2 eliminates any ripple or noise at the base of the transistor that might cause frequency jitter at the output.
424
TUNABLE FREQUENCY OSCILLATORS
FREQUENCY RANGE 40 Hz to 65 kHz
OUTPUT PULSE
Rise time~200 nsec. Pulse width -10fLsec. Recovery time < 200 nsec.
Q,
PUT
CT
.005 ~F
1--t-OVO
R,
'5K0
Fig. 66-7A
RT ,
lKn
Rn 3M0 R2 5.6K0 PUT CT .005 ~F R, '5K0
FREQUENCY RANGE 40 Hz to 40 kHz QUTPUT PULSE

Width - 5 I.J.sec.
SCR
R
4700
RK 4700
Vo
Fig. 66-78
UNITRODE CORPORATION
Circuit Notes The variable oscillator circuit includes active elements for discharging the timing capacitor eT shown in Fig. 66-7A. A second method is given as in Fig. 66-7B.
425
RESISTANCE CONTROLLED DIGITAL OSCILLATOR
c,
f (Hz)
10
A
10
Fig. 66-8
Circuit Notes This very simple, low cost oscillator, is built with two CMOS buffer inverters, two capacitors and a variable resistance. The circuit can work with voltages ranging from 4 V up to 18 V. If Cl = C2, the frequency of oscillation, (ignoring the output and input impedance) is given by:
1 f
The graph in Fig. B shows how the output frequency varies with resistance when Cl = C2 = 100 pF and Cl =C2=2000 pF.
CASSETTE BIAS OSCILLATOR
Fig. 66-9
NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR
426
1 kHz OSCILLATOR
22 k 22k
I 01
01 ' 0 t - Fk
10k
1 k
-v
WILLIAM SHEETS
741 % 1458 TL081 Etc. v = 5 to 15 volts
+1=
10 k
Output Controlled output
Fig. 66-10
Circuit Notes If fine output control is desired, add the 10 K potentiometer. When the oscillator is connected to a dc circuit then connect a dc blocking capacitor in series with the potentiometer's wiper arm.
INEXPENSIVE OSCILLATOR IS TEMPERATURE STABLE
+20V
L,
RI 10K
Circuit Notes The Colpitts sinusoidal oscillator provides stable output amplitude and frequency from OaF to + 150F. In addition, output amplitude is large and harmonic distortion is low. Oscillation is sustained by feedback from the collector tank circuit to the emitter. The oscillator's frequency is determined by:
f
= :::--:-;=;;::;;;:;:;;;=211' V L1ClC2 Cl + C2
4.7K
"2
R3 20K
~----ll
osc~~~~~OR
0 OUTPUT
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 66-11
Potentiometer R3 is an output level control. Control R1 may be used to adjust base bias for maximum-amplitude output. The circuit was operated at 50 kHz with L1 = lOmH, Cl = 3500 pF, and C2 = 1500 pF.
427
eX>
CODE PRACTICE OSCILLATOR
KEY J1
R1 22K2.7K
R2
2.2K-2.7K
VOLUME
4.5-5V :
:iK
8
4
15K
..!..
R3
1.5K
R51' ...... 10 111 Uh ~ -=-
Cl
27
TONE
::"1' f
=-
I Vn I I r
J3
0J21
TO PHONES
OR SPEAKERS
VDJ
Vn J5
Fig. 66-12
Circuit Notes The inexpensive 7404 hex-inverter has enough amplification to handle a wide range of transducers. Closing the key completes the battery circuit and applies four to five volts to the 7404. Bias for the first two inverter amps (VIa and Ulb) comes from the two resistors, RI and R2, connected between their inputs and outputs. The capacitor and rheostat (R3/Cl) close the feedback loop from the input to the properly-phased output. The signal leaving Ulb drives the remaining four inverter amplifiers, Ulc through Ulf; they, in turn, drive the phones or speakers. The volume control potentiometers, R4-R7, may have any value from 1500 ohms to 10,000 ohms. The smaller values work best when speakers, or low impedance phones, are used.
WIDE RANGE VARIABLE OSCILLATOR
190.11+
l ,/111
~
L
27k
)
IN914
-:~;N914
,?'
"
7
~7
"*"
-5V
7.5M
3k
500
1>V
"" ~.
9~
~2222
10 7
8"/
3 _
1~;'4
..
S QUARE WAVE OUTPUT 1k Hz to lMHI
7 RIANGLE WAVE OUTPUT
500pf 1k
'2?F
2
lA
1SIGNETICS
1~914
FREQUE NCY ADJUST MUST BE BUFFERED FOR Rl :!!!: 10!"!
-=7
-5V
Fig. 66-13
429
67
Oscilloscope Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Analog Multiplexer Converts Single-Trace Scope to Four-Trace FET Dual-Trace Scope Switch Scope Calibrator
430
ANALOG MULTIPLEXER CONVERTS SINGLE-TRACE SCOPE TO FOUR-TRACE

+ov
,.
v
TRANSIENT COMPNSMION
>OF
={
100
o VDO
I
.00
10.
" 3
4002
OUT
I
,k
OJTPUT
TO SCOf'E
+5V
DUAL ~L!.!."~~~
+oV
SMitATION
TRAC,
.00
I 0
__,I,
1/2 7473
Q
1/2 7473
2 ell<
Q 9
CLI<
IOkH:r
Ik
COUNTER
"
+oV
HV
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 67-1
Circuit Notes This adapter circuit, based on a dual four-channel analog multiplexer handles digital signals to at least 1 MHz, and analog signals at least through the audio range. The dual multiplexer's upper half selects one input for display. The lower half generates a staircase to offset the baselines of each channel, keeping them separate on the screen. The emitterfollower buffers the staircase, which is then summed with the selected signal. A two-bit binary counter addresses the CMOS 4052 multiplexer.
431
FET DUAL-TRACE SCOPE SWITCH

+20V
R8 2.2K
RIO 820n
{l7
cl
GAIN
Q3
2N3638
D3
04
(2) IN4002
G
~
A INPUT R4 lOOK RI 47K R3 2SK R2 47K
R
TI
C3 10"F
R6 4.7K R7 = 4.7K G
POSITION
L~1I7VAC
+-+-;----@ ~UTPUT
RI2 22K
~BK
c
8
INPUT RS lOOK
IO",F
C~
b
i
R9 2.2K RI4 2.7K
Q2
2N5163
@-)
117
C2
RII
820n RI3 2.2K

CT .I
RIS ,--~r--4--r--, RI8 2.2K RI6 RI7 2.2K 01 10K 10K 02
+-------lh =
RI9 2.7K
IN3064
FIg. 67-2
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
IN3064
.002
C5
C6 .002
Q5
Q6
2N5134
2N5134
Circuit Notes The switcher output goes to the single vertical input of the scope, and a sync line from one of the inputs is taken to the scope's external-sync input. Frequency response of the input amplifiers is 300 kHz over the range of the gain controls. With the gain controls wide open so no attenuation of the signal takes place, the frequency response is up to 1 MHz.
432
SCOPE CALIBRATOR
1 -=2.2K 100 K
9V
l
T
r---VVv---.-----------~--~ 0
scope
.003-.01
Typical
Q1 2N3565
WILLIAM SHEETS
Fig. 67-3
Circuit Notes The calibrator operates on exactly 100 kHz providing a reference for calibrating the variable time base oscillator of general purpose scopes. For example, if the scope is set so that one cycle of the signal fills exactly 10 graticule divisions then each division represents 1 MHz, or 1 microsecond. If the scope is adjusted for 10 cycles on 10 graticule divisions. (1 cycle per division) then each division represents 100 kHz or 10 microseconds.
433
68
Peak Detector Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Positive Peak Detector Peak Detector
434
POSITIVE PEAK DETECTOR
U1 +12 VDC
H.P. 50822835
+12 VOC
01 0.5.F
T(
MYLAR l..Cl
-=10 V
.irO.
-=RESET
>-1.....~VO
lOO kn
,.~--- Vo (HOLD LEVEL)
VI
OV~------------------------
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
FIg. 68-1
Circuit Notes The purpose of the circuit is to hold the peak of the input voltage on capacitor Cl, and read the value, V0' at the output of U2. Op amps Ul and U2 are connected as voltage followers. When a signal is applied to VI' Cl will charge to this same voltage through diode Dl. This positive peak voltage on Cl will maintain Vo at this level until the capacitoris reset (shorted). Of course, higher positive peaks will raise this level while lower power peaks will be ignored. Cl can be reset manually with a switch, or electronically with an FET that is normally off. The capacitor specified for Cl should have low leakage and low dielectric absorption. Diode Dl should also have low leakage. Peak values of negative polarity signals may be detected by reversing Dl.
435
PEAK DETECTOR
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 68-2
Circuit Notes The comparator will charge Cl until the voltage across the capacitor equals the input voltage. If subsequent input voltage exceeds~that stored in Cl, the comparator voltage will go high and charge Cl to new higher peak voltage.
436
69
Phase Sequence Circuits
he sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. RC Circuit Detects Phase Sequence Reversal Phase Indicator Phase Sequence Detector Three Phase Tester Phase Sequence Detector II Simple Phase Detector Circuit
437
RC CIRCUIT DETECTS PHASE SEQUENCE REVERSAL

PHASE'B' PHASE'B'
V.
PHASE 'A' V.
PHASE'A' V.
\
Vc PHASE'C' TABLE PHASE 'A' T, PHASE'B'
~ Vc
60"
V.+Vc 60"
0022MFD 100K R,
..t
PHASE SEQUENCE
NEON INDICATOR OFF ON -ON OFF OFF ON
MOTOR MOTION FORWARD REVERSE REVERSE FORWARD FORWARD REVERSE
VA VB Vc VA Vc Va VaVA Vc
NEON LAMP 100K NEUTRAL ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING R,
Va Vc VA VCVA VB Vc Va VA
Fig, 69-1
Circuit Notes Assume the correct phase sequence to be VA-VB-VC. The circuit tenninals are connected such that Tl gets connected to phase A and T2 to phase B. The capacitor advances the voltage developed across R2 due to phase' 'B" by - 60, while the voltages developed across it by phase "A" is in phase with VA as shown in Fig. 69-1. The net voltage developed across R2 - zero, the neon lamp is not energized, thereby signaiing correct phase sequence. If tenninal T2 gets connected to phase C, a large voltage, K(VA + Vc 60), gets developed across R2, energizing the neon indicator to signal reverse phase sequence. The motor tenninals can be connected to the three phases in six different combinations. A three-phase motor will run in the forward direction for three such combinations, while for the other three it will operat in the reverse direction. As shown in the table, the circuit detects all three reverse combinations. This circuit can be wired into any existing motor starter where the operator can see whether the phase sequence has been altered, before starting the machine.
438
PHASE INDICATOR
B
120 k
c
120 k 120 k
WILLIAM SHEETS
220 k
Fig. 69-2
NE-2 or NE-51
.039
/L
A
Circuit Notes The circuit provides a simple means of determining the succession of phases of a 3-phase 120 V source used in synchro work. Terminals A, B, and C are connected to the three terminals of the source to be checked. If the neon bulb lights, interchange any two leads; the light then extinguishes and A, B, and C indicate the correct sequence. If power on anyone line is lost, the neon bulb will light. This feature may be useful for monitoring purposes.
PHASE SEQUENCE DETECTOR
Phase sensitive load
50/400 Hz
=-
o Ao----r------j:---;:::=f--..tvvI~~ ~ 0 B o - - -.....- t - - - -...... oC
0,033 MFD (50 Hz) 0,0047 MFD (400
H~);;;;:
..l..
100 k~
lOOk
10 V 1M .....'11
-----+-'L
20 k 5M
Out
I~
0.1 10 V - ..,.. Neutral
Cl060,~
_,L
[2~
.
2 InhibitSSA 8
n
SSR
AC
OUI AC
A
j
4-10 Vdc Isolated control
SSR
;--
AC SSR + In-
loJ
-'"
110V
MFD~~
...-....._ . ( /
1 k:S .. ~
ln1+ Teledyn.;-r Out
~-
643-1
+~
--0+
_0--
0---..0_--..0_.......- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
Fig. 69-3
Circuit Notes This circuit prevents damage to the load due to incorrect phasing. The three power SSR's are only permitted to turn-on for a phase sequence of phase A leading phase B. If phase A lags phase B the input currents will cancel, causing the SCR and the inhibit SSR to remain off until the sequence is reversed. The inhibit SSR is included to maintain isolation at the input.
439
THREE PHASE TESTER
phase (1)
R,
18kn/14W DL
R,
25kn SW
phase
R,
C,
(2) 3
phase o22J.d600V
25kn/lW 0 IN4007
R.
0
G
R,
25kfllDNW
(3) 2
" t
V,(1)
V,(3)
Vo (2)
G
iD
V o (3)
V,(2)
t
" ... _ ... '"I

iD
I
'v
'"oa-'
I I I
.I,-__ .",,~~;I,'_" I __
I I I
'\'
I
r r
I I
I
I I
I I
i I
r"\iI I
I I
I I
Fig. 69-4
440
THREE PHASE TESTER, Continued. Circuit Notes This simple three-phase tester, uses only a small current thyristor as a main element for testing the right or wrong succession of the three phases, and there is no need for a supplementary power supply. The basic circuit is shown in Fig. 69-4A. When connecting to the thyristor anode, grid, and cathode the three phases of the supply network in the sequence phase 1, phase 3, phase 2, are considered as correct, the mean value of the current through the thyristor is relatively high (since it is turned on during an entire half-period of one phase) . The result is that the LED will emit a normal light. The wave shapes for the three voltages and the current through the LED for this situation are shown in Fig. 69-4B. If the three phases are not correctly connected-phase 1 to the anode, phase 2 to the grid, and phase 3 to the cathode, for instance-the thyristor will be turned on for a very short time and the LED will produce a very poor light. The wave shapes for this case are shown in Fig. 69-4C. The delay time is given by the R3-R1R4 group. When any of the three phases is missing, there is no current through the thyristor and the LED will emit no light.
PHASE-SEQUENCE DETECTOR 11
Q'~r-~~~
I12W IN758A
Z I IOV
" en "
NE-2J OR C2AC(DIALlGHT)
NE2 fB o--~2""7~k-H
I12W
8--,,----,
"
NU
10V
"'
33k 1/2W
~~==~==~~~~~~~~~~~~:j~--~~
RESET
Z4 IOV
01 01 CLI C/MOS VoD -C2 02 14 13 12
RI 01 SI Vss CD4013A CL2 RZ 02 S2 I1 10 9 8 IN645 D3
Vc
f
f
TI
/""---+
""COCK
IN758A
!:--.+__
R5
C2 ~-=T-'-li t----r~-+ IpF R3
c ~~OOpF
1'-16145
I~~
"~
I< I
C4
2N2219
==. . ._-"'-'+_..J"
~Co--4-,~N'~O-O~,~----~9N09~20~W~------~'N~2~95~,7,~~~~--'-"-OW-'-'-"-N-7"-'-Nro-N-'-'-'MPSOC~T
ELECTRONIC--DESIGN
30V
"
22pF
Fig. 695
Circuit Notes This circuit derives its supply voltage, Vcc and Vdd from "'c' This factor, together with the neon lamps and zener diodes in the phase inputs, establishes 50% threshold that detects low voltage or absence of one or more phases. Relay K1 energizes for correct phase volts.
441
SIMPLE PHASE DETECTOR CIRCUIT

Fig. 1
A
B B
r--'-:---.
I I
,L.:1---J
L __ L!.......J
: I
y
Y - A leading B
Y' - A lagging S'
Fig.2
Rc
2.2Kn
Ao---Jo..f\,-----,
,---oy
Bo-----'YV----I
.
Flg.3
Fig, 69-6
OA79
~ A leading B
Output
RB
AND
A lagging B
Circuit Notes The operation of the circuit is like an enabled inverter, that is, the output Y = B provided A is high. If A is low, output is low (independent of the state of B). When the signals A and B or B1 are connected to the inputs A and B of this gate the output Y is a pulse train signal (shown a Y or Yl) which has a pulse duration equal to the phase difference between the two signals. The circuit is directly suitable for phase difference measurement from zero to 1800 This performance is similar to the circuits like the Exclusive OR gate used for this purpose. With this method leading and lagging positions of the signals can also be found using an AND gate. Phase difference measured along with the leading and lagging information gives complete information about the phases of the two signals between zero and 360 0
442
70
Photography-Related Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Auto-Advance Projector Shutter-Speed Tester Enlarger Timer Contrast Meter Electronic Flash Trigger Sound Trigger for Flash Unit
443
AUTO-ADVANCE PROJECTOR
SI ON/orF
1, f~
100
MEG
n~MEG
R4 1.5 MEG 10
~------~o-o--:gv
,
01
RI
15
20
/"I~ R5 \.5 MEG
BelOg
...
3,9 MEG
;~S-:~~I(- :; [i~_,__:_~___ '/_'

1/4 4001 1/4 4001
C2
J.
S2
25~
300-
:~ MEG
_'0_01
01
KI 6 TO 12 V RELAY
2.2
------J.---.--
_________ IN_',"'14 ... 8~~--.
GNO
Fig. 70-1
Circuit Notes The circuit is built around a 4001 quad two-input NOR gate, it provides switch selectable auto-advance times of 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 seconds through the remotecontrol socket of your projector. UIa and U1b form an astable multivibrator, with its operating frequency dependent on the number of timing resistors switched into the circuit via S2. The frequency.is about one cycle for every five seconds with a single timing resistor, one every ten seconds with two resistors, etc., providing six switched time intervals. The output of the astable at pin 4 of Ulb is fed to the input of a monostable multivibrator, consisting of the second pair of gates, Ulc and Uld. R7 and C3 are the timing components; they set the length of the (positive) output pulse of the monostable at a little more than half a second. The monostable is triggered by each positive-going input it receives from the astable. The output from the monostable therefore, consists of a series of short pulses, the interval between the pulses being controlled using S2. The output ofthe monostable (at pin 11) controls a relay by way of Ql, which is configured as an emitter-follower buffer stage. The projector is controlled via the normally-open contacts of relay Kl. When the output of the monostable goes positive, the relay contacts close, triggering the slide-change mechanism of the projector. The monostable assures that the power to the relay is applied only briefly by the timer, so that multiple operation of the projector is avoided.
444
SHUTTERSPEED TESTER
r
_
l----'!-- ~ '9V 81 ON
9VDC
OFF
S1
1--.......,.,...--...-------... (RCAJACKi
R2
3.3K
Jl
R\ 1. R4
W
02 2NJ904
TO V.IN.
01
2NJB19
(D
:-
('i::'>,.
\!:: 120K
R3
"
OF SCOPE
\..!7
R1
lMEG
01 SOLAR CELL
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
Fig. 702
Circuit Notes The solar cell is connected across the input of the FET (field-effect transistor), Ql, so that it will produce positive dc voltage to the gate when activated by light shining through the open shutter, decreasing the negative gate-source bias already established by the source resistor, and causes an increase in drain current. The drain voltage goes more negative which causes a decrease in Q2' s base current. Q2' s collector current decreases, and its collector voltage becomes more positive. There is an amplified positivegoing voltage output at the collector, and it's applied directly to the oscilloscope's vertical input, producing awaveforro that is displaced vertically whenever light strikes the cell.
445
ENLARGER TIMER
CONTACTS
R2 3.3K ON KI t 20V
NC
I
120V
PRI
ENLARGER
LAMP
120
VAC
~
TIME
GE-504A
LOAD
SOCKET
RESET
SCRI
GE-X5
GE-504A
CR3
Cl 100 ,,''!FO
~OO
R4 I MEG
Parts List
Cl -IOO-mfd, .JOG-uolt elec-
{roly tic capacitor CR 1 thru CR4 - GE-504A
rectifier diode
Kl -/2 -volt a-e relay (Potter & Brumfield No. MR5A, or equivalent)
RI - 250K-ohm, 2-watt
polelltiomeler
R2, R3 - 3.3K-ohm, 1!2-watt resistor

GENERAL ELECTRIC
R4 - I-megohm, 1!2-watt resistor SI - DPDT toggle switch SCR 1 - GEX5 silicon controlled rectifier T 1 - Filament transformer: primary, 120-volts a-e; secondary, 12.6-volts center tapped (Triad F25X, or equivalent) Line cord, vectorboard, minibox etc.
Fig. 70-3
Circuit Notes This precision, solid state, time delay circuit has delayed off and delayed on switching functions that are interchangeably available by simply interchanging the relay contacts.
446
CONTRAST METER
51 (ne)
+ 15v
R4 3 meg
R1 2 3 + 741 7 IC1 4
h
C1 0.01 6 C2 0.01
-=-
R6 2200 R5 10 k
R7 6800 D1 IN4001 D2 IN4001 D3 IN4001
M1 mA
R2 10 k
R3 1 meg
~
-15v
Fig. 70-4
RADIO ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes One leg of the photocell (RI) is tied to the + 15 volt supply and the other end is connected to ground through resistor R2, forming a voltage-divider network. The noninverting input of the 741 op amp, !Cl, is tied to the junction formed by RI and R2, while its inverting input is grounded through resistor R3. When switch SI is pressed, another divider network is formed, reducing the voltage applied to the inverting input of theop amp. When light hits the photocell its resistance begins to decrease causing a greater voltage drop across R2 and a higher voltage to be presented to the non-inverting input of ICl. This causes lC1 to output a voltage proportional to the two inputs. The circuit gives a meter reading that depends on the intensity of light hitting photocell RI; therefore, RI should be mounted in a bottle cap so that the light must pass through a 3/16 inch hole. Potentiometer R5 is used to adjust the circuit for the negative you're working with.
447
ELECTRONIC FLASH TRIGGER

0)----
0----
e..pORP12
0----
ALTERNATIVE Output INPUTS ...----- to flash SCR

I .....
- -....
+
Fig. 70-5
.--____ F
=*= C3 0.011'F
(
Input 1
r
I
~11 C1 0 .01
R2 II
;> R1 ;> 330 k

2
il
8
4 3
If-
2 x 330 k Input 2
NE555 R2 1 6
~10k
C2 _'0.1I'F-r-
>R4
~~2~.~ -'Ft:ED
R3 100 k R5
SW1~
:> 560'0
+9'V
~V1
50k
OV
Circuit Notes A negative pulse at the input is fed via capacitor Cl to the input pin (2) of the le. Pin 2 is held slightly above its triggering voltage of 1/3 Vcc by the voltage divider comprising RI. R2 and RVl. The negative pulse triggers the IC and the output (pin 3) goes high for a time period controlled by RV2, R3 and C2. When the output goes low again at the end of the time interval, capacitor C3 charges through the gate cathode circuit of the SCR switching it on and firing the flash. Capacitor Cl isolates the input from the voltage divider so that the unit isn't sensitive to the dc level at the input. RVI acts as a sensitivity control by allowing the voltage to be adjusted to a suitable level so that the input signal will trigger the IC. Resistor R4 limits the discharge current from C2 at the end of the timing cycle protecting the IC. The LED and its protective resistor R5 act as an indicator to show that the unit has triggered. simplifying the setting up process and minimizing the number of times the strobe has to be fired. This means that the strobe needn't be fired until a photo is to be taken.
448
SOUND TRIGGER FOR FLASH UNIT
C1 IC1 CA3130
0---0 +9 V
~~39 P
3 J1S
+~
SW1 ON/OFF 01 MPS6515
I'j)
~
R2 220 k
,....2 _
MIC
RV1
-( 6
R3 330 R
FLASH FLASH SOCKET
~C2
100 "
10 V
47 k log ~
R1 470 R
TRIAC - 400 V 1A
G~ ~
A2
A1 Ve
Fig. 70-6
Circuit Notes The circuit is based on operational amplifier lel used in the noninverting amplifier mode. Rl and 2 set the gain at about 500. RVl (sensitivity) biases the noninverting input to the negative supply. Ql provides the relatively high trigger current required by the triac. When a signal is received by the microphone, the signals are amplified (by ICl). The triac is triggered and a low resistance appears across its Al and A2 terminals which are connected via the f1ashlead to the strobe. The circuit operates almost instantly, giving very little delay between the commencement of the sound and the f1ashgun being triggered.
449
71 Power Amplifiers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. 2 To 6 W Audio Amplifier with Preamplifier Audio Power Amplifier 25 Watt Amplifier Bull Horn Low Power Audio Amplifier Audio Booster Walkman Amplifier Rear Speaker Ambience (4-Channel) Amplifier 90 W Audio Power Amplifier with Safe Area Protection Power Amplifier
450
2 TO 6 W AUDIO AMPLIFIER WITH PREAMPLlFIER
.,
t---~~---r-------r~--~----9'
TD.,0l''''
~L" 40
"'"
.' I
v"
00
// 1/
/ L (/
10 15 Ycc tV)
If
20
25
NOTES: dTO T - 10%; typical values. The available O4Jlput
power is 5% higher whan !1'l8BSUred 811 Pin 2 (due to Sllfies resistance 01 Ct) .
SIGNETICS
Fig. 71-1
Output Power Acros. RL as Function of Supply Voltage with Bootstrap
Circuit Notes The monolithic integrated audio amplifier circuit is especially designed for portable radio and recorder applications and delivers up to 4 W in a 4 ohm load impedance.
AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER
Cl 1:5n R3 3.3k
11
'I'
r-+---W\-+-'lJiDlr'-~
R2
R,
OUT
Ltk
IN
C2 39001' RI Ik 01
~R7~2
2.2
common
ground PQint/
C3 39001'
02
~R752
V- y+
Circuit Notes Output-clamp diodes are mandatory because loudspeakers are inductive loads. Output LR isolation is also used because audio amplifiers are usually expected to handle up to 2 I'F load capacitance. Large, supply-bypass capacitors located close to the le are used so that the rectified load current in the supply leads does not get back into the amplifier, increasing high-frequency distortion. Single-point ground ing for all intemalleads plus the signal source and load is recommended to avoid ground loops that can increase distortion.
Fig. 71-2
451
25 WATT AMPLIFIER
-j-
S2V
R,
"
R"
V.
" ' tf
e,
R,
.001
150
'"
R3 2N2484 R,
2011
R,
'OK
"
H
tB~o ."
..,
Rn R,
1.SM
~
a,
VN64GA
R.
910K 510!)
e,
"
2.2K 1I2W
R"
f-rJ:::
,
'" '"
.......
>OK
r'z,
a.2V
.&en
R"
R"
R, '" R"
a,
*
2.7K
'"
'"
2~
R" R"
~
r"
a. VNj~
R"
~I-
e,
IN4001
1~~
390!
2N3!104
"'" ."
R, "
~
~
510n
~
R"
2.2K 112W
R"
'"
1.2K
R"
1:
v,
z,
B.2V
R~
'OK
'OK
Ru
fe, ,
'.0
UNLESS NOTED: ALL RESISTORS flAW,S'!. ALL CAPACITORS: 1DDV. VALUES IN "F
INA1A8
o.
82!!
.68!l
150\1
R"
0,
IN4001
+ S2V
v.
-sv
'"
R"
JFig. 71-3
SILlCONIX. INC.
Circuit Notes Transistors are used for current sources. Base drive for these transistors is derived from the main power supply VA' so that their collector current is proportional to the rail voltage. This feature holds the voltage on the diff-amp collectors close to VA/2. The sensitivity of IQ to VA is about 3.4 mA/volt when VB is held constant; the sensitivity of IQ to VB is -15 mA/volt when VA is held constant. In a practical amplifier with a non-regulated supply. variations in power output will cause fluctuations in VA' but will not affect VB; therefore. having IQ increase slightly with power output will tend to compensate for the 3.4 mA/volt IQVA sensitivity. In the case of line voltage variations. since VA is about five times VB' the sensitivities tend to cancel. leaving a net sensitivity of about 2 mA/volt.
452
BULL HORN
,-, ~'"
,
C3
RI
SOOK
rr=U
" ~~
1
R8 10"
SPKRl
C8
~~
"
I
~
~.:CO"
r---ll 2 Ul 3
,
Is
C~ ;
10
lB6 LOW-VOLTAGE AMPLIFIER
-----.m
1 1 I I I I I
-'I
_*"".J
~
lDD: C7 100
R2 lOOK
R3 lOOK 6 7
R' ClD 47K 6. ,
2 U2
...
J77
OUAl2-WATT
14 13
AMPLIFIER R7 lOOK
9 8
6 , R5 4.7K
C9~!::
R6 CS
lOOK
'.~
"
(PINS 3, 4, 5,10,11 AND 12 SHOULD BE GROUNDED)
,+ +~
6 -9VDC
SOURCE
Fig. 71-4
Circuit Notes The input audio signal is fed to pin 3 of Ul, an LM386 low-voltage amplifier, via C3 and Rl. Potentiometer RI sets the drive or volume level. Ul, which serves as a driver stage, can be set for a gain of from 20 to 200. The output of Ul at pin 5 is fed to U2-a 377 dual two-watt amplifier connected in parallel to produce about four watts of output power-at pins 6 and 9 via C4 and C5. Frequency stability is determined by RZ, R4, and CIa on one side, and the corresponding components R6, R5, and C9 on the other side. The outputs of the two amplifiers (at pins 2 and 13) are capacitively coupled to SPKRI through C6 and C7.
453
LOW POWER AUDIO AMPLIFIER
AUDIDJ ----rINPUT
e--
.,
+VCC (+3 TO. +t2V)
VOLUME
JOOK
Cl NC NC
~'
5
" Cl ... 001
17
16
Ul
"
..1-
:t>="
1
[Ih
2
3~
C2 *500
C4_ ... 500
SPKRl 8-320
.....
POWER SUPPLY GROUND
Fig. 71-5
Circuit Notes The amplifier operates from supplies ranging up to 12 volts, and operates (with reduced volume) from supply voltages as low as 1.8 volts without having distortion rise to unacceptable levels. (Its power requirements make it suitable for solar-cell application.) Components external to the integrated circuit, Ul, consist of four capacitors and a potentiometer for volume control. Capacitor C3 is for decoupling, low-frequency rolloff, and power-supply ripple rejection. Capacitor C4 is an electrolytic type that couples the audio output to an 8 to 32 ohm speaker that is efficient.
454
AUDIO BOOSTER
Sl
0
R3 10K R2 470K Cl .05'.1

+
Jl
C3 T30
I I I
81 +9VOC
1
I I
I I
B
E
C2 .1 01
2N3392
1
R5 lOOK
Rl 47K
HANDS-ON. ELECTRONICS
Fig. 71-6
Circuit Notes The amplifier's gain is nominally 20 dB. Its frequency response is determined primarily by the value of just a few components-primarily Cl and Rl. The values of the schematic diagram provide a response of 3.0 dB from about 120 Hz to better than 20,000 Hz. Actually, the frequency response is ruler flat from about 170 Hz to well over 20,000 Hz; it's the low end that deviates from a flat frequency response. The low end's roll-off is primarily a function of capacitor Cl (since RI's resistive value is fixed). If Cl's value is changed to O.lI'F, the low end's corner frequency-the frequency at which the lowend roll-off starts-is reduced to about 70 Hz. If you need an even deeper low-end rolloff, change Cl to a 1.0 I'F capacitor; if it's an electrolytic type, make certain that it's installed into the circuit with the correct polarity, with the positive terminal connected to '11's base terminal.
455
WALKMAN AMPLIFIER
,leg
470J.!F
9-15V
C5
CHANNEL 1 POWER AMP INPUT
0-,11
2.2iJF
C3
2_2pF
~~,
"='
C13 47Ol-lF
Al5
50K
,
RIl
47K
f13
27
~
8n
SPKRl
C10
{ 470"'
9-15V
C4
C6 2.2,uF
14
"=' C14
CHANNEL2
POWER AMP
INPUT
2.2/.1F
470pF 2
SPKR2
0---;-1
RI6
50K
8n
R12
47K
R14
2.7
."
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 71-7
Circuit Notes The gain of the low-cost le is internally fixed so that it is not less than 34 dB (50 times). A unique input stage allows input signals to be referenced to ground. The output is automatically self centering to one half the supply voltage. The output is also shortcircuit proof with internal thermal limiting. With a maximum supply of 15 volts and an 8 ohm load, the output is around 1.5 watts per channel. The input stage is usable with signals from 50 mV to 500 mV rms. If the amplifier is to be used with a source other
456
WALKMAN AMPLIFIER, Continued.

CHANNEl1
PREAMP INPUT
RI
2.2K
J
L
INPUT
+9-15V
R3 47K R5 47K
lCl
R9 lMEG
Cl O.1,uF
6
CHANNEL 1 PREAMP OUTPUT
47K
.~(-
R1
3 '41 4
CHANNEL2 PREAMP
C15
cr--)~
Cl
O.l,uF
R4 100,uF 4'" R6 4'"
RIO
lMEG
CHANNELl
R2
2.2K
R8
41K
PREAMP OUTPUT
-THE PREAMP, If you wish 10 amplify

Iow-level signals, such as the output of a turntable, the signal will first have to be fed to the preamp shown here.
than a personal stereo, such as a phonograph or an electric guitar, some type of preamplifier is required. A suitable circuit is shown. In that circuit, two 741 op amps have been configured as input amplifiers. Their input stages referenced to a common point-half the supply voltage. That voltage is derived from a voltage divider made up of RI and R2, two 2.2 k resistors. The gain of each of the 741's has been fixed at 21 by the input resistors (R9, RIO). Input capacitors, Cl and C2, are used to filter out any dc component from the input signal.
457
REAR SPEAKER AMBIENCE (4-CHANNEL) AMPLIFIER
JOOk
r------,
3D.
_240 LF
FROM
I m I. 2.,~ >_--Q . ~KR

JOO,uF
FRONT
SPKR
TERM
~
Rf
I .....
240
620k
+ran
lOOk
lDD
~14~ ov'
I
620k
3,4, 5 10,11,12
Q.l"F CERAM'C
3D.
lOOk
Fig. 71-8
Circuit Notes
Rear channel "ambience" can be added to an existing stereo system to extract a difference signal (R - L or L - R) which. when combined with some direct signal (R or L), adds fullness, or "concert hall realism" to the reproduction of recorded music. Very little power is required at the rear channels, hence an LM1877 suffices for most "ambience" applications. The inputs are merely connected to the existing speaker output terminals of a stereo set, and two more speakers are connected to the ambience circuit outputs. The rear speakers should be connected in the opposite phase to those of the front speakers, as indicated by the + I - signs.
458
90 W AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER WITH SAFE AREA PROTECTION
POWER AMPLIFIER
r-----~~---ov
t------r
"'"
>OK
"
2N3638
'OK
!> Ill.
Ill.
Circuit Notes For most applications. the available power from op amps is sufficient. There are times when more power handling capability is necessary. A simple power booster capable of driving moderate loads uses an NE5535 device. Other amplifiers may be substituted only if Rl values are changed because of the Ice current required by the amplifier. Rl should be calculated from the expression
2N691
.,
'------+-----0 -v
SIGNETICS
Rl
600 mV
Ice
Fig. 71-10
459
72
Power Supply Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. 8 Amp Regulated Power Supply for Operating Mobile Equipment Uninterruptible Power Supply for Personal Computers 5 V Supply Including Stabilized Momentary Backup Power-Switching Circuit Radiation-Hardened, 125 A Linear Regulator Switch Mode Power Supply Micropower Bandgap Reference Supply Variable Current Source, 100 mA to 2 Amp Basic Single-Supply Voltage Regulator Bench Top Power Supply 400-Volt, 60-Watt Push-Pull Power Supply 500 kHz Switching Inverter for 12 V Systems 10-Amp Regulator with Current and Thermal Protection Bipolar Power Supply for Battery Instruments Power Supply for 25-Watt Arc Lamp Stand-by Power for Non-Volatile CMOS RAMs RV Regulator with F oldback Current Limiting 90 V rrns Voltage Regulator Using a PUT 12-14 V Regulated 3 A Power Supply DC-to-DC SMPS Va...-iable 18 V to 30 V out at 0.2 A Off-Line Flyback Regulator SCR Preregulator Fits Any Power Supply Voltage Regulator Zener Diode Increase Fixed PNP Regulator's Output Voltage Ratings Increasing the Power Rating of Zener Diodes Memory Save on Power'Down
460
a-AMP REGULATED POWER SUPPLY FOR OPERATING MOBILE EQUIPMENT

DIODES 1N1200 10 A - 100 PIV
120 AC
0,065 n A--'~~~--~~----~--~----+
01 Ase
10 kn
R2 R3
I _ 13.8 VOL TS 'T:': 100 JJF

...1:3
":" 1,000
n "':'"
,*6 V DC--=1--
C2
20 VAC @10AMPS
2N3055
Rl
200
n
10 12
1t
2
C L
3
C
13
SECONDARY
S
uA723
REF
6
7
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 72-1
Circuit Notes This supply is powered bya transformer operating from 120 Vac on the primary and providing approximately 20 Vac on the primary, and providing approximately 20 Vac on the secondary. Four 10-A diodes with a 100 PIV rating are used in a full-wave bridge rectifier. A 10,000 I'F/36 Vdc capacitor completes the filtering, providing 28 Vdc. The dc voltage is fed to the collectors of the Darlington connected 2N3055's. Base drive for the pass transistors is from pin 10 of the ",A723 through a 200 ohm current limiting resistor, RI. The reference terminal (pin 6) is tied directly to the non-inverting input of the error amplifier (pin 5), providing 7.15 V for comparison. The inverting input to the error amplifier (pin 4) is fed from the center arm of a 10 k ohm potentiometer connected across the output of the supply. This control is set for the desired output voltage of 13.8 V. Compensation of the error amplifier is accomplished with a 500 pF capacitor connected from pin 13 to pin 4. If the power supply should exceed 8 A or develop a short circuit, the ",A 723 regulator will bias the transistors to cutoff and the output voltage will drop to near zero until the short circuit condition is corrected.
461
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY FOR PERSONAL COMPUTERS

,6V"~---------------------------------
+12 V
+ 12 V
60 H,
AEF A2 A3
Ul
MM5369
LJ1...:
6
+ 12 V
1k
5
Al
20 M
(V.) C04Q30
l~;F
1~
_
'1
":'
A.
16'
12 V POWER SOURCE (LEAD-ACID
3.58 MHz
1 o e2 30PFl J
+ 12 V
AUTOMOBilE
BATTERY)
60Hz
if
Rel~
+12V
A12
-~+10V
---------ov
('I.) LM324
10 ,
A14 lM
A13
10 ,
L ______....~
MOTOROLA
+,
Fig. 72-2
Circuit Notes
The UPS is basically an ac inverter that is powered by a 12-V, lead-acid automobile battery. During power outages, it can supply several minutes of power for an average personal computer. It incorporates a crystal-controlled 60 Hz time base, so that a computer with a real time clock can maintain its accuracy. It isolates the ac line from the computer, so it can be used to operate sensitive electronic equipment on noisy power
sources.
Two MTM60N06 Power FETs (Q1 and Q2) alternately switch current through a center-tapped 120-V to 12-V filament transformer (Tl) with its primary and secondary reversed. The 120-V output is compared with a 60 Hz reference in a closed-loop configuration that maintains a constant output at optimum efficiency.
462
rR5
'0 , 270
"
"'
R7
100 k
R'O
'0 ,
n 7
'3
" L2
60 Hz ReI
U3
XR2206
R, 10'
5
1 I-'F;;
'0
1
~
Rn 10'
., V
--------- 0
-vv-.,
180 0
~2
AB 1Ol-'F
~LM324
C4
"
'--.,..
0'
+ 12-V
30k.C5
r
~
PR!MARY
SECONDARY
T1
R15
MTM60N06
,..
12 V,C,T
540 k
l
120 Vac
OUTPUT
R16
10'
Q2
40 A
POWER
TRANSFORMER
-t
MTM60N06
A 60 Rz reference frequency is derived from a crystal oscillator and divider circuit, Ul. An inexpensive 3.58 MRz color burst crystal provides the time base that can be accurately adjusted by Cl. The 60 Rz output from Ul is applied to the exclusive-OR gate, U2, and then to the XR-2206 function generator (U3) that converts the square wave into a sine wave. U2 and U3 form a phase-locked loop that synchronizes the sine wave output of U3 with the 60 Rz square wave reference of Ul. The sine wave is then inverted by op amp U4a, so that two signals 180 out of phase can be applied to U4b and U4c that drive Ql and Q2. Due to the closed-loop configuration of the drive circuits, Ql and Q2 conduct only during the upper half of the sine wave. Therefore, one TMOS device conducts during the first half of the sine wave and the other conducts during the second half.
463
5 V SUPPLY INCLUDING STABILIZED MOMENTARY BACKUP

8rownouIs
Fig 1
~~it~zedLI__________~I~~L--UL-'-L__~______-. ~t
Switch off Charging
t=====+~~~'-==~~I
Battery
current Drain
Battery isolated
--3
IT, supplies base current 10 switch on T
Rch selected to change battery a j)1 .2mA Rb selected to supply T2 base current of lout/Bt2 2 for about 3 seconds after removal of 12V supply
I
0,
1K
External
reservoir
2M2
capaCitor
R,
NiCd
-Fig. 2
12V stabilised supply (optional)
Fig. 72-3
464
5 V SUPPLY INCLUDING STABILIZED MOMENTARY BACKUP, Continued.
Circuit Notes TIlls circuit protects microprocessor systems from "brownouts" without the expense of an uninterruptible power supply. Designed around a small 9-V nickel cadmium battery the circuit continues to provide a constant 5-V output during brownouts of up to a few seconds. Load currents of up to 500 mA may be drawn using the components shown. With this mains-derived supply present, D5 is forward biased so that the stabilized supply powers the 5-V regulator and hence the circuitry to be protected. FET T 1 is held on by D1, its drain current being provided from the dc supply via Rb and D2. Diode D3 is reverse-biased so that T2 is off, and the battery is isolated from D6. RcH and D4 serve to trickle charge the battery with approximately 1.2 mA. When the 12-V supply is removed, R1 and Cl initially keep T1 switched on. D3 is now forward biased, so that T1 drain current is drawn via Rb, D3 and T2 from the battery. This switches T2 on, allowing the load circuitry to draw current from the battery via D6 and the 5-V regulator. After a few seconds Cl has discharged (via R1) such that Vgs falls below the threshold value for the FET, and T1 switches off. There is then no path for T2 base current, so that it also switches off, isolating the battery.
465
POWER-SWITCHING CIRCUIT
CONTROL SECTION Statu"
.~
POWER SECTION
8u'Voltage
62K Clook
4991(
IRFF9130
."
r-----i""
FI'O-F'op
SIDE
II~RN
SIDE
Ruet
Clue,
I
I
1I
o
IIDE
."
/IETIIFlN
."
"
1N~142
'm IRFZ30
"
+1.5 V
1201(
'"
0.' ~F lOOK.
)____
'"
'-1-1+-_ _-+-+-_ _ '~.... o }'""OO'' '."..

RH,sto,"
.~,
+;:---~
1'10
005 Q
'"
FI'pFlop
Re.et
Clock
NASA
Fig. 72-4
466
POWER-SWITCHING CIRCUIT, Continued.
Circuit Notes This circuit provides on/off switching, soft starting, current monitoring, current tripping, and protection against overcurrent for a 30 Vdc power supply at normal load currents up to 2 A. The switch is turned on by an "on" command pulse; it is turned off by an "off" command pulse. An overcurrent trip can also be set on the bus side by a 6-digit binary signal, which is converted to an analog voltage and compared with the amplified voltage developed across a load-current-sensing resistor. Resistor/capacitor combinations (0.027 I'F, 2 kG) at the inputs of the current-sensing amplifiers act as low-pass filters: this introduces a few hundred I's of delay in the response to overcurrent, thereby providing some immunity to noise. The 0.022 "F capacitors connected to the drain terminals of the PFETs provide a Miller effect, which reduces the rate of change of the drain voltage and therefore the rate of rise of current at turn-on. The soft-turn-on time depends upon the load impedance and is typically 100 to 200 ms.
467
RADIATION-HARDENED, 125 A LINEAR REGULATOR
POWER UNIT OUTPUT
R13 26.7 k
R14 2.43 k
R17
40.2 k
03 0,-0,2 = 2N6764
I
R15 1.5 k
48 Vdc
R16
1k
013
Pl
B.2 V POWER UNIT RETURN
Fig. 72-5
MOTOROLA
Circuit Notes Intended for extreme temperature, radiation-hardened environments, this linear supply is capable of supplying 28 Vdc at 125 A from an ac-driven power unit. 1n operation, power supply output voltage is sensed by the voltage divider consisting of R24 to R28 and fed to one input of a discrete differential amplifier composed of Q13
468
1
D2 15 V\ D3 \ 15 V
t 28 Vdc OUTPUT
r
t-
R18 1k
R20 402 k
R24 20
t----<o
R25 402
f----D
C1; 014 015
f'
R21 1k
R26 806
2J
~
016 R22 1k R27 215 k
'r: C2
R19 9
R23
4_99 k
R28 619 28 Vdc RETURN
through Q16. The other input of the amplifier is connected to a radiation-hardened zener diode, Dl. Local feedback using R21 and Cl produces gain to phase shift that are independent of individual component parameters, which provides stable operation into the required loads.
469
SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY

',"
'"
l00~f~
co
I'I'(
,"
"
on
n
"
],5k
"'
":"
"
'Cl
:rll.~;
"
FETI
VN06{JOD
,--~p-I~::;
C5 4
7~f
"
'-<>--~--11---'-~,
lOT
r--.., ,,-ri,I>f-t-----'~~p-__._----;P_Q"""'
8R2 CTBJ4
r'-L~f-L'''--ll------,---l,~ ~~~~OOO
.''"
"
, ,
5V@8A
~22pf
'" '"
CT2
4100pf
":",
'-'-le>'_F-_...J~
"'''
" ".
SILICONIX
'"
,~
Fig. 72-6
Circuit Notes This buck-derived circuit provides up to 8 A at 5 Vdc operating off 24 to 32 Vdc, The two power MOSFETs in the circuit conduct alternately for equal periods. Switching frequency is 150 kHz, set by the PWM125 controller. Output of the two MOSFETs is transformed to a low-voltage level, then rectified. Efficiency of the circuit is 75% when operated in a 22 to 32 V range, Efficiency approaches 90% with higher voltage inputs. MICROPOWER BANDGAP REFERENCE SUPPLY
".
".
'1.11
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a CA3440 BiMOS op amp and CA3086 transistor array. The no-load current from 5-volt supply is 1.5 p.A. Load current can go as high as 200 p.A and still maintain output voltage regulation within 0.05%.
loLL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS
"
Fig. 72-7
470
VARIABLE CURRENT SOURCE, 100 mA TO 2 AMP

VCC
f.
R2 680 470 "F + 25V ~r C1
/'
+
20V
C3
~rl
C2
'L ~
L-~
VR3
1 "F~
:=
R current
TYP
IN 751
2N3906 ~
/-'
p.A741, Etc.
V2LM1458
~N3055
470 + constan t current
0- to load
Rl 1.8 k
WILLIAM SHEETS
Fig. 72-8
Circuit Notes The output current is set by tbe resistor R in tbe collector of Tr2, which may be varied to offer a range of output currents from 100 mA to 2 A witb fine control by means of VR3 which varies tbe reference voltage to tbe non-inverting input of tbe op amp. The feedback patb from tbe output to the inverting input of tbe op amp maintains a constant voltage across R, equal to CV CCVIN) and hence a constant current to tbe load given by CVCCVIN)/R. BASIC SINGLE-SUPPLY VOLTAGE REGULATOR
7
CA3140
INPUT
REGULATED
OUTPUT
I
4
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a CA3140 BiMOS op amp capable of supplying a regulated output that can be adjusted from essentially 0 to 24 volts.
Fig. 72-9
471
BENCH TOP POWER SUPPLY
J:. CHASSIS
o
BP3
ll~
RADIOELECTRONICS
Fig. 72-10
Circuit Notes A tapped transformer drives a diode bridge (D1-D4) and two 2500 I'F filter capacitors (Cl and C2), that provide a no-load voltage of 37 or 47 volts, depending upon the position of switch S2a. The unregulated dc is then fed to a pre-regulator stage composed of Q1 and D5. Those components protect !Cl (the 723) from an over-voltage condition; the 723 can't handle more than 40 volts. The LED (LEDl) and its 2.2 k current-limiting resistor (RI) provide on/off indication. The current through the LED varies slightly according to the transformer tap selected, but that's of no real consequence. The seriespass transistor in IC1 drives voltage-follower Q2, providing current amplification. The transistor can handle lots of power. It has a maximum collector current of 15 amps and a maximum VCE of 70 V, both of which are more than adequate for our supply.
472
400-VOLT, 60-WATT PUSH-PULL POWER SUPPLY
+ 12V
"
7
". 'W
R,
D,
R.
'00
'w
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~
------___+. $Sk!l
R,
lQkU
R,
SILlCONIX, INC.
NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL RESISTORS 5%, 1/4 W ALL CAPACITOR VALUES IN MICAOFARADS, 25V 0, & 02: VN64GA ON HEAT SINK 0, & 02: 1 N4934 03: 33V. 3W ZENER T,: PAl: 12T, CT, NO 18 AWG SEC: 27ST, NO 24 AWG CORE: INO GEN 82311 Fig. 72-11
Circuit Notes The design delivers a regulated 400-V, 60-W output. The TU94 switching regulator governs the operating frequency and regulates output voltage. RI and Cl determine ~witching frequency, which is approximately 0.5RC-100 kHz for the values shown. The TU94 directly drives the FET's gates with a voltage-controlled, pulse-width-modulated signal. After full-wave rectification, the output waveform is filtered by a choke-input arrangement. The 1l'H, 751'F filter accomplishes the job nicely at 100 kHz. A feedback scheme using R4, R5 and R6 provides for output-voltage regulation adjustment, with loop compensation handled by C2. Diodes-Dl and D2 provide isolation and steering for the 33-V zener transient clamp, D3. Output regulation is typically 1.25% from no-load to the full 60-W design rating. Regulation is essentially determined by the TU94. Output noise and ripple consists mainly of positive and negative O.8-V spikes occurring when the output stage switches,
473
500 kHz SWITCHING INVERTER FOR 12 V SYSTEMS

VSUPPl V
II
VSlJPPl Y
HAAITE 6EAOISl
UNITROOf
1111914
2N44~ .::1---,
'~\'f'a) 'OO"~'o"'
o
1
'"
lN914
UNITRODE
~'
UUll02
UESU02
+20VOUT
1100
>O>-1r-l>l-.,-_J?'1 VN64GA
PF
0,
Fig, 72-12
2N44~~ .:t---r--.,..--~f-~"""-""-----------'
lN914
lav
220,~
-=-
21'1
100
lN914
1N914
K~
Circuit Notes This PWM control circuit provides the control pulse to theDMOS Power Switch in the flyback circuit. The output of the PWM is a pulse whose width is proportional to the input control voltage and whose repetition rate is determined by an external clock signal. To provide the control input to thePWM and to prevent the output voltage from soaring or sagging as the load changes the error amplifier and reference voltage complete the design. They act as the feedback loop in this contrnl circuit much like that of a servo control system.
10 AMP-REGULATOR WITH CURRENT AND THERMAL PROTECTION
MJI5004
SILlCONIX, INC.
"" _____-1"_ _-"_ _ +" D,.: """1r'0tVC5,,'-"__r--,'~""98/'" lOA ,

200
lOoa~t
EN
LT1005
ONO
c,"
AUX
,.
'"
100' C
Fig, 72-13
ri D. TI-lEAMOSWITCH
ON Ii(ATSINK
474
BIPOLAR POWER SUPPLY FOR BATTERY INSTRUMENTS

OFF FNI ..,.. I I PPS: I --l...I
I
78L05
2~
3
~
+5v
10/16
1 Ov
10/16 79L05
.1 -5v 2
3
Fig. 1
03
OFF
6vl 78L05 2 10/16 .1

3
+5v
Ov
10/16 79L05
.1 -5v
ON
Fig. 2
04
6vl
FIg. 72-14
Circuit Notes To generate regulated 5-V supplies from a pair of dry batteries, the circuit of Fig. 1 is commonly used. In order to give protection from inadvertent reverse connection of a battery, a diode in series with each battery would produce an unacceptable voltage drop. The more effective approach is to fit diodes Dl and D2 as shown in Fig. 2, in parallel with each battery. When the supply is switched off, there is the risk of a reverse bias being applied across the regulators, if there is significant inductance or capacitance in the load circuit. Diodes across the regulators prevent damage. When the power supply is switched on, the two switches do not act in unison. There is a probability that one or the other regulators ",ill be latched hard off by the other. To prevent this, D3 and D4 are Zener diodes so that 5-V rails are pulled up by the batteries until the regulators establish the correct levels.
475
:!J
'"
POWER SUPPLY FOR 25-WATT ARC LAMP
WHtTE252,50W
'W\
~ CONNECTOR TYPE #fRG 59
OUTPUT (BNC
COMMON (BLACK)
-=
CABLE)
1AMP
84V
,.
NASA
H1
,1
102,25W
"K
120
~F,
350 V EACH
Fig. 72-15
Circuit Notes A dual-voltage circuitry both strikes and maintains the arc. The lamps require a starting voltage in excess of 1,000 volts. Once stabilized, the voltage drop across the lamp is near 20 volts. Power supply consists of two main sections. The first section, the lowvoltage power supply section, is an 84-volt direct-current supply. Tbis supply powers the stabilized arc. Current is limited by the 10 ohm adjustable and 25 ohm fixed resistance. The second section, the high-voltage starter circuit, is a Cockroft-Walton voltage multiplier. With no load, the output voltage is 2,036 volts. However, when the arc is established, the heavy current drain maintains a forward bias on all of the diodes, and the circuit becomes a straight path with a voltage drop of 7.2 volts. The small value of the capacitors used in the multiplier guarantees that the diodes will be forward-biased once the arc is established.
STAND-BY POWER FOR NON-VOLATILE CM OS RAMs

Main +5V supply
~ ,1N4148 fVCG -
24 47k
CMOS CS 18 RAM (8416)
--Nv~ 1k8
2.4V
-----1.
--
Ni-Cdr VBAT
ISU~ ercap F
--,
74HCT138
r
I I I
I
+5V V1L - -
--
:~
CS
7nF
Decoder (See text)
L_____ .J
Fig. 72-16
Circuit Notes To prevent loss of data when a CMOS RAM is switched from normai operation (VCC~5 volts) to stand-by mode (V CC~ VBAT) it must be ensured that the CS pin goes near the Vcc rail at ail times. Ac coupling to the chip select is made through capacitor C, breaking the dc current path between Vcc (and hence VBAT) and the decoder output. So, whatever the impedance state of the decoder in power down, the battery will provide current only for the RAM, low enough to keep the voltage at CS near to Vcc.
477
HV REGULATOR WITH FOLDBACK CURRENT LIMITING

+275 Vdc
Rl0
100 k. 2W
R4
100 k
<W
(~l~
Dl 15 V
'.10 k R9
232 k RB
, .-D2.l o1
15V~
100 k R7 2N
V03
'499 k R2
'1)
t-<
f-'
Q2 MTM7N4 5
'::' ........
R1
12
n
+ Vout - 250 Vdc, 1h A
/~,
t-.,
4401
5W
R3 200 k
.1%
A5
402 k 1%
+ Cl ; " 2.2 "F 400 V

A6
10 k
1%
>-.
~
Fig. 7217
MOTOROLA
Circuit Notes A TMOS MTM7N45 (Q2) is used as a series pass element in a linear high voltage supply that accepts + 275V unregulated and produces 250 V regulated with foldback current limiting. A 15V zener. Dl. provides the dc reference for operational amplifier Ul. whose other input is obtained from a fraction of the output voltage. Ul drives Q3. which drives the gate of Q2. Foldback current limiting is achieved by Rl. R2. R3. R4. Ql. and D2. The formula to establish the current "knee" for limiting is:
VOUT(R2/R2 + R3) + 0.5 V

Rl
Short circuit current is: 0.5 V Rl
478
90 V rms VOLTAGE REGULATOR USING A PUT
LOAD
500 W 90 V ~ 2
,"
RJ Ik
RI
Ri
R9
100 ~
R2
30Ck
Ik
110-130 V
OJ R'
lOk
,rn,
05 2N4443
Cl
D1
0.' MF
R5 6.8 k
100 V
1N4747
10V
R7
4.7 k
Re IOk
RIO 6.B k
MOTOROLA
Fig. 72-18
Circuit Notes
The circuit is an open loop rms voltage regulator that will provide 500 watts of power at 90 V rms with good regulation for an input voltage range of llO-l30 V rms. With the input voltage applied, capacitor Cl charges until the firing point of Q3 is reached causing it to fire. This turns Q5 on which allows current to flow through the load. As the input voltage increases, the voltage across R10 increases which increases the firing point of Q3. This delays the firing of Q3 because Cl now has to charge to a higher voltage before the peak-point voltage is reached. Thus the output voltage is held fairly constant by delaying the firing of Q5 as the input voltage increases. For a decrease in the input voltage, the reverse occurs.
479
12-14 V REGULATED 3 A POWER SUPPLY
'A
ALTERNATE POWER
TRANS. ARRANGEMENT
"
2.N30~~
J A
'"
ZENER
'AVAUi7~A
~
24 V.5 A TRANSFORMER
l.l~F
100 >IV ' - - RI-ADJ. FOR DESIRED
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
0-11< IW
iRIDGE
/"------_:'~.,~,C----------------:,7.,~,C---,
gOUTPUT (GHD OR REF.)
(NO CT !lEQ.l
1812 0 : 0 2N3011l1
~IIjITT(II' eLECTOR
0 0
CRL,CFl:2-IOO PIV.!5 A
INPUT
(BOTTOM VIEW)
lASt
AMATEUR RADIO
Fig. 72-19
DC-TO-DC SMPS VARIABLE 18 V TO 30 V OUT AT 0.2 A
TO R2 (e) ~r--I-'i
1200
"
'HIQH CURREN COMMON
r
I
- - -,
R1G
____.J5 1 r~5.':'~~a~'('l----r--~'t. ~ '.'03' I I -I..!C7 R~ I

I -,- i~F
RS 1270 1(
C5 IS the timing
capacitor
Lt IS Ferroxcube 2616 3GB with 14 turns of #18 enameled wire (0 14 mH)
TANT.
6.21<
1 L
_____ J
--SLOW START
AND OUTY CYCLE LIMIT
-=
Of max =f[Rl0 :'Rl1
(VZ)+VBE]
SIGNETICS
Fig. 72-20
480
OFFLlNE FLYBACK REGULATOR

.u
1W
<n
,.
" u'"''''
'" ,."'"
11013$13
..
~
3....
-:;VIIfF
o.en"F
UCl142 Vcc .------1
1----:::::----;;-1
:]":1
I
".
21
-,I
I
13
4_ ~
...
~
!1
. ~
lOY
.,...,
DC'(OY)
2-""
OUT
~.
...
!~;'"''''~;;~''--'lr.. -~t:u"""
I H.
I
-.1
flC=U".,---....'W,,-----i
1-:-::-'1 A,.'CTI
-:;-
1 ,I
...
o.O'I1'Fqo.00471!f"1 I L. _ _ _ _ ;;._.J
GND
~
NOTES:
Tl" Coilcraf1 .4140_8 Primllry 97 1urns Single AWG 24 Secondary -4 turns 4 perallRI AWG 22 Conlr~ 9 turns 3 paral!(ol AWQ 28
SPECIFICATIONS
Input line voltage: Input frequency: Switching frequency: Output power: Output voltage:
Output current
90VAC to 130V"c
Efficiency @ 25 W,
IN" 9OVAC:
50 or 60Hz
40kHz 10%
70%
65% 2.5A average
25W maximum
V,N .. 130VAC: Output short-Circuit current
5V5%
210 SA
O.OI%/V 8%/A'
line regulation: Load regulation:
SIGNETICS
Fig. 7221
Circuit Notes This circuit uses a low-cost feedback scheme in which the de voltage developed from the primary-side control winding is sensed by the UCl842 error amplifier. Load regulation is therefore dependent on the .coupling between secondary and control windings, and on transformer leakage inductance. For applications requiring better load regulation, a UC1901 Isolated Feedback Generator can be used to directly sense the output voltage.
481
~
SCR PREREGULATOR FITS ANY POWER SUPPLY
Fig. 1
Vr
Q. prevents fizing of SCR
Vc
Vo+ Vo
o
Fig.2
1--------1~-------~--~R~er~~~r---1
I i
.-~ IN4148
p,
1-
V" ~
4111
MPSA42
I ~9?: _ I_Vb r-vVV~
I
I
R,
Q,
I I
I I
R,
1000
Regulator
+
-+
I
Vr
I
I
I !
R.
D,
I
....I
1,8K
Vc +IN4148
D,
R3 R2
". .. ..
SeR 100K ..........-.......-. I ________________________ ~_D2 __ ~
Filter capacitor
Fig. 72-22
Circuit Notes
This SCR pre-regulator keeps the filter capacitor Vc' in a variable output power supply, a few volts above the output voltage V0' The benefits include: less heat dissipated by the pass transistor and therefore small heatsink, cooler operation and higher efficiency, especially at low output voltages. Ql, RI, R2, D 1 and D2 form a constant current source for zener ZI, so that the contribution to the output current is always a few mA (2 - 3 mAl. The Darlington pair Q2, Q3 keeps the SCR off. The voltage Vc decreases until Vc = V0 = V at which point the Darlington pair fires the SCR, charging the filter capacitor to a higher voltage Vc 1 in less than half the period of the input voltage. The component values, shown are for a 0 - 250-V, 3-A power supply.
----------
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
R2
+Vee
01
Fig. 72-23
NOTE MOTOROLA, INC.

For positive Te lerlerS R2 &fld Al cafl be selecled 10 give 0 Te output
Vo
ZEN ER DIODE INCREASE FIXED PNP REGULATOR'S OUTPUT VOLTAGE RATINGS
Input
LM2931Z-5
Output
o--.._--..----J1n
GNO
Ou1 r----~---O
L-----1r--_t-_-1" c,
10~ ~F
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 72-24
Circuit Notes A zener diode in the ground lead of a fixed pnp regulator varies the voltage output of that device without a significant sacrifice in regulation. The technique also allows the regulator to operate with output voltages beyond its rated limit.
484
INCREASING THE POWER RATING OF ZENER DIODES
.W~"L
B
Vz
1 t
Vl' 47(1 'hW
Q2
VzI" Vz - Vbe
al. a2 - GERMANIUM OR SILICON POWER TRANSISTOR
Vzl
f t
Vb. - GERMANIUM' O.3V Vb. - SILICON = O.7V
PNP
NPN
Fig. 72-25
Circuit Notes A power transistor can be used to provide a high powered zener voltage from a low wattage zener. A 400 mW zener can be used where a 10 watt zener is required or a 1 W zener can be used where a 50 to 80 watt zener is required by using appropriate transistors for Ql and Q2 in the circuits shown. Where low rating is required, Ql would be an ASZ 15 (germanium) or an AY9140 (silicon). Q2 could be a 2N2955 (silicon). For higher powers, Ql should be an ASZ18 (germanium) or a 2N2955 (silicon) and Q2 a 2N3055 (silicon) or an AY8149 (silicon). A heatsink on the transistor is required. The circuit in A has the advantage that power transistors can be bolted directly on to a chassis which may serve as a heatsink.
485
MEMORY SAVE ON POWER-DOWN

+sv
"
EN
OUT
LTl005
GI<>
"" ,,.
2 Z/'!
,
lN914
~47 k w.t4OUT
."
AUX OUT
2,.
.~
4.7k
~~ ~v7
'"
22<
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY
FIg. 72-26
Circuit Notes The auxiliary output powers the memory, while the main output powers the system and is connected to the memory store pin. When power goes down, the main output goes low, commanding the memory to store. The auxiliary output then drops out.
486
73 Power Supply Circuits (High Voltage)

Low Cost Ultra High Generator Simple High-Voltage Supply High Voltage Geiger Counter Supply High Voltage Supply
487
LOW COST ULTRA HIGH VOLTAGE GENEBATOR
O.1u 400V
1
UHV
600V Tri ac
SA
:=
~
-;:-2
c
~
:"~ ~ ~
o~----~----~----~----~--~ .1 .2 .3
Fig. 73-1
Circuit Notes By repetitively charging and discharging a capacitor through the primary of an induction coil with a high voltage. an ultra high emf is induced in the secondary. Switching is performed by the triac. triggered by the disc at times set by Cl and Rl. With a 12 V car ignition coil for example. the length of sparkgap obtained is 12 mm of air for C2 ~ 0.1 "F. If the dielectric strength of air is assumed to be 3 kV/mm. this spark-gap length corresponds to 36 kV. rom the curve shown in Fig. B. care must be taken in keeping the value of C2 below 1 "F as the coil is liable to be seriously damaged at this value of C2. Power consumption is only about one watt.
488
SIMPLE HIGH-VOLTAGE SUPPLY
E. L. D.
D2
,
351<',1
o@----I
240V AC
DC
R
1uF
/~
t2 t1
\
t3
Fig. 73-2
,,
Circuit Notes
A light dimmer, a 1 I'F capacitor and a 12 V car ignition coil form the simple line powered RV generator. The current in the dimmer is shown in Fig. B. At times t1 , t 2, ... , set by tbe dimmer switcb, the inner !riac of the dimmer switches on, and a very high and very fast current pulse charges the capacitor through the primary of the induction coil. Then at a rate of 120 times per second for a 60 Hz line, a very high voltage pulse appears at the secondary of the coil. To obtain an RV dc output, use a voltage doubler. Dl and D2 are selenium rectifiers (TV 18 Siemens or ITT) used for the supply of television sets. High value output shock protection resistors, R, are recommended when suitable.
HIGH VOLTAGE GEIGER COUNTER SUPPLY
(~f)
120 k
+9 V
12.6 V
C.T.
IN4004
r--l~-.,.....+EHT
Circuit Notes
HEP55
+
250 volt winding
This circuit will generate about 300 volts dc-at a very low current, but enough for a GM tube.
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 73-3
489
HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY
+6 V 10 k!J
I1
.01 p.F
.11
6.3-115 Vac
11
1\
.047 p.F TIP 41
C~
~ ~ L
-, '"
IN4007
+100- 150 V
:: ::
10 p.F 25 OV
Neg
WILLIAM SHEETS
Fig, 73-4
Circuit Notes A 6 V battery can provide 100-150 Vdc center-tapped at a high internal impedance (not dangerous though it can inflict an unpleasant jolt), A 6,3 V transformer is connected "in reverse" with a transistor used in a Hartley oscillator configuration. The frequency of operation may be controlled by varying the value of the 10 K ohm resistor. The 10 I'F capacitor must have a working voltage of at least 250 Vdc.
490
74
Power Supply Monitors
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Power Supply Monitor Low-Volts Alarm Microprocessor Power Supply Watchdog Overvoltage Protection Circuit (SCR Crowbar) Power Supply Protection Circuit
491
ti;
'"
r;e;;:;ty I - 15t~30Vd'
/
nA
I' I
I ;
1N5309
I I
I I I I
I
I I I I
,-----,----,
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR
-l
XC5491
Tricolor
7~,
I ~'
0",
rN~1 'V
)d~;o: i4A
l"
~
I I I
I I I
lOOK
High
Sot
I I V
I
I I I
I
i
OK
i
I
I
1250Q
1N5309 ,
3mA
F:
I
I I
lOOK
1 I
lK
i :
"
'222A
Switching TranSistOr!
. ~N2222A I I
I
I I I
100 K
Low
I
I I
I ...!~ I
V.LM339 2
I I
I
I
lOOK
5 + ...... 12
i
1
100K
..:~ .
9 +
20K
T
!
I
I I
--I'
100 K
>--
~
..,
Buller
I I
I
I I I
A
I
I I I _--1
V-- -------.J
Switch and Display
SOl
G, ~~Jfld
100 K
~~
Reference Calibration
...
I\.
Dual Comparator
Oscillator
NASA
Fig. 74-1
Circuit Notes This circuit uses a tricolor LED display to indicate acceptable and unacceptable output voltages. One to set the upper voltage limit, the other, the lower voltage limit. When the monitored voltage is above the set maximum, the LED display turns red. YeUow turns on for voltages below the set minimum, and green turns on for voltages between the high and the low settings. The circuit does not need a separate power supply. It is powered by the voltage it monitors. The circuit can be adapted to monitor voltage differences between two power supplies. Should the monitored voltages differ by more than a set value, a visual or an audible alarm would warn the operator about the difference. The circuit can also be modified for remote monitoring and the use of a separate power supply.
LOW-VOLTS ALARM
39
Spkr 1000
1M Battery
1M 2N3565 2.2
U1 AB C D 4001 CMOS CHIP
WILlIAM SHEETS
Fig. 74-2
Circuit Notes This inexpensive de supply-voltage monitor sounds a warning when the voltage falls below a preset value. It is ideal for monitoring rechargeable batteries since it draws only a few mieroamperes when not sounding. The voltage at which the alarm sounds is determined by the zener diode. When the voltage falls below the zener voltage. the alarm sounds. The alarm tone is determined by the RC time constant of the 39 k resistor and 0.01 mf capacitor.
493
MICROPROCESSOR POWER SUPPLY WATCHDOG
Fig 1
VI
Dg
F~+~~
11 VAC
AECTIFIEA
T
V3 .".
r----I O,2v
I
3.4v
I
I
I
AMS
'-An
lMl0
Rm
12,2v
5K6 470
Y;7V
De
. -
4v
AI
Ak 150K
33K
Ch
+Cj
As
+
22"F
220 10"F
Fig. 74-3
Circuit Notes
The circuit monitors the input to the microprocessor 5 V regulated supply for voltage drops and initiates a reset sequence before supply regulation is lost. In operation, the resistor capacitor combination Rs and Cj form a short time constant smoothing network for the output of the fullwave bridge rectifier. An approximately triangular, voltage waveform appears across C and Rs and it is the minimum excursion of this that initiates
494
5 VOLT REGULATOR
- - ---------1
I :1 T~F
01
V2
Cn
~4K7 Rh
1
~___________________________l~~IC .~6~_+:----~L~I_.~--------~RESET
'3V
..At!.
R'
A
i
..J
......
- - --f------
SCHOTIKY DIODES
GROUND
------------------------~I------
the reset. Diode Dg prevents charge sharing between capacitors Cj and Ck. Resistors Rn and Rm form a feedback network around the voltage reference section of the LM10C, setting a threshold voltage of 3.4 volts. The threshold voltage is set at 90% of the minimum voltage of the triangular waveform. When the triangular wave trough, at the comparator's non-inverting input, dips below the threshold, the comparator output is driven low. This presents a reset to the microprocessor. Capacitor Ch is charged slowly through resistor Rk and discharged rapidly through diode De.
495
OVERVOL T AGE PROTECTION CIRCUIT (SCR CROWBAR)
+12V
Ac
!
12 Vdc
Zener
22n
f"
Fig. 74-4
330n
WILLlAM SHEETS
Circuit Notes
The silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) is rated to handle at leas1 the current of the power supply. It is connected in parallel across the 12 V dc output lines, but remains inert until a voltage appears at the gate terminal. This triggering voltage is supplied by the zener diode. At potentials less than 14 V the zener will not conduct current. But, at potentials greater than 14 Vdc the zener conducts and creates a voltage drop across the 330 ohm resistor that will fire the SCR. When the SCR turns on, the output lines of the power supply are shorted to ground. This will blow the primary fuse or burn out the transformer if there is no primary fuse.
496
POWER SUPPLY PROTECTION CIRCUIT
'hA
5V
Reg
~
2N 3906
330
10k
...l
> 680
C103
Trip voltage 500 n
~~
~,
LED 20 mA
WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 74-5
Circuit Notes When using a regulated supply to reduce a supply voltage there is always the danger of component failure in the supply and consequent damage to the equipment. A fuse will protect when excess current is drawn, but might be too slow to cope with overvoltage conditions. The values shown are for a 12 V supply being dropped to 5 V. The trip voltage is set to 5.7 V to protect the equipment in the event of a regulator fault. The 330 ohm resistor and the 500 ohm potentiometer form a potential divider which samples the output voltage as set by adjustment of the potentiometer. The SCR is selected to carry at least twice the fuse rating. The full supply voltage is connected to the input of the regulator. The 2N2906 is held bias off by the 10 k resistor and the SCR so that the LED is held off. If the output voltage rises above a set trip value then the SCR will conduct, the fuse will blow. and the 2N3906 will be supplied with base current via the 10 k resistor, and the LED will light up.
497
75
Probes
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Microvolt Probe Single Injector-Tracer General Purpose RF Detector Clamp-on-Current Probe Compensator 650 MHz Amplifying Prescaler Probe Tone Probe for Testing Digital ICs
498
MICROVOLT PROBE
O,OI~F
g
+
10 TO 3Op'I
RI In
,/
R2
10'
2~
741
10>
'"
7 /741
"a.v.: ~
:'['t
5
1
R'
9\1 AT lemA
2SZERO
Av ~ 10.000
ADJUST
~'i:'
""IN3064
01
D2
-.9
50 TD 100 I"A METER
El.ECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 75-1
Ci rcuit Notes
The current tracer helps locate a defective IC that is loading down the power supply. The tracer amplifies the small voltage drop caused by current flow along a fraction of an inch of PC wiring and drives an ordinary microamrneter. Needle-point test probes are used to contact the edge of a PC trace and to follow the current to determine which branch the current takes. One-half of a dual 741 op amp forms a dc amplifier with ac feedback to prevent oscillations and hum-pickup problems. It drives a 50-to-100 p.A meter. The other op amp provides a center tap for the 9 V battery supply and zero adjustment with R4. Two diodes protect the meter. Resistor RI eliminates the necessity for shorting the probes when the meter is zeroed. The value of 1 ohm is large when compared with the resistance of the meter leads plus the bridged portion of PC wiring.
ii;
co
SINGLE INJECTOR-TRACER
Hdphone 1.5 M 10 k .001 .001 Probe .. 2N3565 Inject 1.5 M
r 1:
-=T-
9V
Sig trace GND

WILUAM SHEETS
Fig. 75-2
Circuit Notes This circuit will provide a nominal square wave output in the audio range in the "Inject" mode, the harmonics of which should be heard at several MHz. In the "Trace" mode the non-linear operation of the amplifier will detect modulated rf signals which will be filtered by the .001 "F capacitor and heard in the headphones.
GENERAL PURPOSE RFDETECTOR

SHORT LEAD
'C>
.=>Y ~__~....--.,...,.,....,.o--~
\ C,
RFC 1
0'
lN914
DC
our
c4T" .1 R'L-...Ce
C3
AVOID
210k
OUT
O.OlI'F
C2
lOOOpF
~~~_~----.J
CAN BE A FEW INCHES LONG
Fig. 75-3
Circuit Notes This circuit provides a de output to a meter and an audio output (if necessary) for checking transmitters or modulated signals. It can be used also as a field strength meter or transmitter monitor.
500
CLAMP-aN-CURRENT PROBE COMPENSATOR

+v-------.--------~ R, 6eOK
to
from
oscilloscope
R6 Comp.
470
S,
100 p,
K t1 500
-V----~~~----
10"
Table
Tek P6021. on Its own
with Tek amp. 134 with compensator
1Hz IQ 100kHz (@ 2mAlmV ~
120Hz to 60MHz (@ lOmA/mV 450Hz to 60MHz @2mAlmV
12Hz to 38MHz
(switched lmA to
lA1div for 50rnV/div output
Fig. 75-4
Circuit Notes
A clamp-on "current probe" such as the Tektronix P6021 is a useful means of displaying current waveforms on an oscilloscope. Unfortunately, the low-frequency response is somewhat limited, as shown in the Table. The more sensitive range on the P6021 is 2 rnA/mY, but it has a roll-off of 6 dB per octave below 450 Hz. The compensator counteracts the IOW-frequency attenuation, and this is achieved by means of C3 and R4 + PI in the feedback around op amp NI. The latter is a low-noise type, such as the LM725 shown, and even so it is necessary at some point to limit the increasing gain with decreasing frequency; otherwise amplifier noise and drift will overcome the signal. The values shown for C3R3 give a lower limit below 1 Hz. A test square wave of 10 rnA is fed to the current probe so that PI can be adjusted for minimum droop or overshoot in the output waveform. At high frequencies, the response begins to fall off at 100 kHz.
501
650 MHz AMPLIFYING PRESCALER PROBE +5V +5V
C2 .01
r I FBI I L J
R2 2.2K 01
C3 .01
,FB2 I L
01-04
~
02
FHll00
14
CB .01
3 Ul
Cl
lOon
RI
500pF 03 04 1,2,5,
BIPOLAR AMPLIFIER SL952
7,8,9
(
C9 .01
R3 2.2K
FIg. 75-5
Circuit Notes The 650 MHz Prescaler Probe's input is terminated by resistor RI and is fed through Cl to the diode limiter composed of D1 through D4. Those diodes are forward-biased by the + 5 volt supply for small-input signals and, in turn, feed the signal to VI. However, for larger input signals, diodes D1 through D4 will start to turn off, passing less of the signal, and, thus, attenuating it. But even in a full-off state, the FHllOO-type diodes will always pass a small part of the input to VI because of capacitive leakage within the diodes. Integrated circuit VI, a Plessey SL952 bipolar amplifier, capable of 1 GHz operation, provides 20 to 30 dB of gain. The input signal is supplied to pin 10, VI with
502
..J:..
SI
B15VDC (SEE PARTS LIST) +5V
+1 Cl~
+
10
0-1 1- - - - 1
r
I
:(
l
I
~
FB3 L
C11 .01 C12 .01
l
I -'-
lE
:~ 22 K
"b-
~ R6 .,J".
16 15
4 U2 710 PRESCAlER
15
cia 500pF
I'
11
TTl
OUTPUT
11C90
OPTIONAL ECl 9 OUTPUTS } 04 r--<~ - - (SEE TEXT) 04 -"-----\14
R5 51n
F 1
"'F
12 13
"'oF
the other input (pin 11) is bypassed to ground. The output signal is taken at pin 3 and pin 4, with pin 3 loaded by R4 and pin 4 by R5. Integrated circuit 11 C90, V2, is a high-speed prescaler capable of 650 MHz operation configured for a divide-by-lO format. A reference voltage internally generated appears at pin 15 and is tied to pin 16, the clock input. This centers the capacitive-coupled input voltage from VI around the switching threshold-voltage level. An ECL-to-TTL converter in VI provides level conversion to drive TTL input counters by typing pin 13 low. Therefore, no external ECL to TTL converter is required at the pin 11 output. On the other hand, ECL outputs are available at V2, pin 8 (Q4) and at pin 9 (Q4), if desired. In that circuit configuration, pin 13 is left open, and V2 will use less power.
503
TONE PROBE FOR TESTING DIGITAL ICs

.5V
Al
47K R4
Q1
R6
2N3904
lOOK
""
A7 17K
R9 2.2K
4.7K
Al"
R8
3.3K
Cl
2.3V - HI
PROBE
D1
QJ
2N3906
RII
Q1
"
S;
17
3
5
Cl
.5V: lO
RJ
lOOK
lN4001
s;
AS
IN4001
GND
"'1
=
R2 22K
10nn
1'C1 01
~
!~"
-=
lOon
= =
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 75-6
Circuit Notes The tone probe uses sound to tell the status of the signal being probed. The probes input circuit senses the condition of the signal and produces either a low-pitched tone for low-level signals Uess than 0.8 V) or a high-pitched tone for high-level signals (greater than 2 V).
504
76
Proximity Sensors
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Proximity Alarm Field Disturbance Sensor/Alarm
505
PROXIMITY ALARM
~~;~6~~--------~~~+
1/6 4049 1/6 4049
'='
100
d
i
I
BZ1 +
81 9V
..l.
III 47K
R3 1K
b
C5
Cl 9-50pF
C2
9-50pF
C3
6BOpF
39pF
I
Fig. 76-1
02
1N914
4IN. x6IN. PLATE ANTENNA
01
1N914
C4
_1
R2
lOOK
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes Inverters Ula and Ulb are connected in a simple RC oscillator circuit. The frequency is determined by the values of RI, Cl, C2, and the internal characteristics of the integrated circuit. As long as the circuit is oscillating, a positive dc voltage is developed at the output of the voltage-coupler circuit: C3, Dl, D2 and C4. The dc voltage is applied to the input of Ulc-the third inverter amplifier-keeping its output in a low state, which keeps Ql turned off so that no sound is produced by BZL With Cl and C2 adjusted to the most sensitive point, the pickup plate will detect a hand 3 to_5-inches away and sound an alert. Set Cl and C2 to approximately one-half of their maximum value and apply power to the circuit. The circuit should oscillate and no sound should be heard. Using a non-metallic screwdriver, carefully adjust Cl and C2, one at a time, to a lower value until the circuit just ceases oscillation: Buzzer BZl should sound off. Back off either Cl or C2 just a smidgen until the oscillator starts up again-that is the most sensitive setting of the circuit.
506
FIELD DISTURBANCE SENSOR/ALARM
" '0'
" '0'
!1t-84
AI --==-(4}AACLlS
5001(
"'
2.5K
"
'"
'"
LOR2
'0'
..
It,
lM5uN
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 76-2
Circuit Notes The change in ambient light triggers the alarm by changing resistance of LDRI and LDR2.
QI Al
LDRI, LDR2
= Radio Shack 276-2024
Mallory SC628P Sonalert Cadmium sulfide photocell, Radio Shack 276-116
507
77
Pulse Generators
Delayed Pulse Generator Pulse Generator (Astable Multivibrator) Non-Integer Programmable Pulse Divider
508
DELAYED PULSE GENERATOR

ICI4093B DI1N414B
+ SUPPLY
ICI PIN 14
'-=....
R1 5K1
INPUT M1~
)O--------'~
71___~O~ c{] ~O~________________________ ~______________~
~~fi~R~2n:~~~=5~6[lnCg')b~4~
390K 01
____
-t~~~~~
T
100n
C2
____~~1>1~1rnJTP3.
ICI PIN
O~
Fig. 77-1
Circuit Notes The circuit offers independent control of initial delay and pulse rate. !C1c is connected as a pulse generator whose operation is inhibited by the normally low O/P of the !C1a. When the circuit input goes low Le., by pressing PB1, IC1b O/P goes high and the circuit O/P goes low thus replicating the input. When the input is keptlow capacitor Cl charges via R2 to a point where IC1a O/P goes low. This allows the pulse generator IC1c to start and "rapid fire" pulses appear at the circuit O/P. When the circuit input returns to the high state Cl is rapidly discharged via D1 and Ri. The value of R2 and Cl control the initial delay while R3 and C2 control the pulse rate. The values given will give a delay of around 0.5 seconds and a pulse rate of 200/300 Hz depending on supply voltage. PB1 may be replaced by an open collector TTL gate or a common emitter transistor stage if required.
509
PULSE GENERATOR (ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR)
+15 V
lOQI"..F
ON-PERIOD ADJUST
OFF
PERIOD
RI
100 kn
,.n
, Mn
At)JUST
_n
100
R'Itn
.2
100
Itn
o~ 'OI._J-L" -Leoo: /o'-F

FREQUENCY RANGE
pQSITION OF SI PUL SE PERIOD
o 001
~F
001 J'F
01 fJ-F
4"sTClms GO/-,s TO IOms <l ms TO 100 rn$

.. ms TO 15
'.'
ReA
Fig. 77-2
Circuit Notes Resistors Rl and R2 bias the CA3I30 to the mid-point of the supply-voltage, and R3 is the feedback resistor. The pulse repetition rate is selected by positiOning SI to the desired position and the rate remains essentially constant when the resistors which determine on-period and off-period are adjusted.
510
NON-INTEGER PROGRAMMABLE PULSE DIVIDER
Olp
22K
.,..1nF
+OV
12 3 13 6 C4 CS DOWN 41-..--14 DOWN ....___~-I---I COUNTER 10 10 COUNTER ...._.+..;15V 6 5 11 14 2 5 11 14 2

3 12
+15V
10K 3 C2 D FF
liP
16 5 C3
4 OV
I
I
4x10K
1/)",
2 5 4 6 1nF
11
C1 4093 C2 4013 C340192 C4&C54022
0::> 14 "'0 15 :l:u ue 1 2u

10 9 12 OV
g!Z
::>",
:--~- - -:
I
OV
I
I
:--~--l -- -:
j
~Lt~TH-- ____ J
~NIT-- __ ~~DJ
10"
+15V . +15V THUMBWHEEl SWITCHES OPEN ~ '0'
Fig, 77-3
Circuit Notes In applications where the period of the input pulses is uneven and the divider is required to cover a wide range of frequencies, the non-integer programmable pulse divider shown can be used. The purpose of the D-type flip-flop (IC2) is to synchronize the input sigoal with the clock pulse. When the clock pulse changes from low to high and the input is high, IC2 output goes high. Subsequently, IC3 resets to zero and starts counting up. The number of pulses at the output of IC3 is ten time the input pulse. IC4 and ICS are cascaded to form a two decade progranunable down counter.
511
78
Radiation Detectors
Micropower Radioactive Radiation Detector Pocket-Sized Geiger Counter Photomultiplier Output-Gating Circuit
512
MICRO POWER RADIOACTIVE RADIATION DETECTOR
Lamp
Monostahle high
Monostable low
I-_ _/'~
voltage pulse
vol tage pulse
genera tor
generator
Speaker or
earphone
3V
Vcc
'9 16
JL
?
LE D
';"
Fig. 78-1
Circuit Notes In the absence of radiation, no current is drawn. At normal background radiation levels the power consumption is extremely low. The instrument may be left on for several months without changing batteries. In this way the detector is always ready to indicate an increase in radiation. An LED is used as an indicator lamp. With background radiation it draws less than 50 pA. A ferrite pot core is used for the transformer with NI ~ 30, N2 ~ 550, and N3 ~ 7. Using two 1.5V batteries with 0.5 Ah total capacity, the detector can work at background radiation levels for 0.5 Ah .;. 50pA ~ 10,000 hours, which is more than a year.
513
POCKETSIZED GEIGER COUNTER
6V
IBM 2M
7
2
-
IS(
l,aM
,
910~
CA3080A
ICI
5
8
'6M
R
IM
~
820
k
IN914
6V
IOO,...f
15V
220k
T
'v
loon
SPEAKER
Q,QQ5j.LF
'"
lN914 IN914
IN 914
100
100.
'"
01J.1.F
IM
IQQpF
CAL
"'''''''R
INPUT
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 782
514
---198M
~
+900V
I.
IM
JVV'
'r
(NINE 22M RESISTORS IN SERIES) ReA 44007
GAE~
BLACK
~N914
...l:..olf'-f IW
4:307
ReA
T
-:!:
-:
j
r 44007 ReA I'
I
r:OOI,u.F IkV
\I
OOl"jIIllV
OO!,u.F
Ik~f;
B;..u~
~YELLOW
ARGONNE RED TYPE ARI42
O.oIJ.4F IkV
GEIG ER- MUELLR CO UNTER TUBE VIC TOREEN TYPE

1885
Circuit Notes A single 6.75 V mercury battery powers the counter, which features a 1 mA countrate meter as well as an aural output. A regulated 900 V supply provides stable operation of the counter tube. A multivibrator, built around a differential power amplifier IC2, drives the step-up transformer. Comparator ICl varies the multivibrator duty cycle to provide a constant 900 V. The entire regulated supply draws less than 2 mA. A one-shot multivibrator, built with IC3, provides output pulses that have constant width and amplitude. Thus the average current through the meter is directly proportional to the pulse-rate output from the counter tube. And the constant-width pulses also drive the speaker. Full-scale meter deflection (1 mAl represents 5000 counts/min, or 83.3 pulses/so A convenient calibration checkpoint can be provided on the meter scale for 3600 ppm (60 pulses/s.)
515
PHOTOMULTlPLlER OUTPUT-GATING CIRCUIT
+5v
A,
LM
733
C,
A,
C,
LM 710
From
Laser
,.
5
11
,.
74121 3,4,7
a, 1
"
5
11
10
1
2 O
74121
3,4,7
":"
-5v
lv
-5v
C,
1. 13
4016
(pm-Hammamatsuj
OIP
7
330~
330'
A,
-1000v
Fig. 78-3
516
Laser pulse
pm alp
710
alp
Q,
Q,
Q,
5,
alp
Fig2
Circuit Notes The application involves observing the light pulse emerging from a thick specimen after traosillumination by a laser pulse. Pulses derived from the laser source are amplified using a Video Amplifier LM733. The reference level is set to 1 V in the comparator LM 710, to provide the necessary trigger pulses for the monostable multivibrator 7412l. The laser pulses have a repetition frequency of 500 Hz and suitable values are as below:
RI R2
33 k ohm, Cl = 22 pF = 33 k ohm, C2 = 68nF
The pulse width for each monostable is approximately given by tw = 0.7 RC. R3 and C3 is a high pass filter. The method therefore permits the use of low cost components having moderate response times for extracting the pulse of interest.
517
79
Radar Detectors
One-Chip Radar Detection Circuit Radar Signal Detector
518
ONE-CHIP RADAR DETECTION CIRCUIT
Threshold
+5Vo-~----~----
__----~--__----------~-------,
15k
lOOk
~_ 5k f4k2
4k)
Receiving horn
Comparator i LMJ39
50
Crystal detector CV 2154
lOOk
Buffer'
1 LM339
lk
-'W1r---1~Mr-....J
lk
Set ranqe
,) 1 P
~
+100k
lOOk
Fig. 79-1
Circuit Notes A simple X-band radar detector is capable of indicating changes in rf radiation strength at levels down to 2 mW/cm2 . Radiation falling on the detector diode, produces a voltage at the input of an amplifier whose gain may be adjusted to vary the range at which the warning is given. The amplifier output drives a voltage comparator with a variable threshold set to a level that avoids false alarms. The comparator output is connected in the wired-OR configuration with the open collector output of an oscillator running at a frequency of 2 Hz. In the absence of a signal, the comparator output level is low, inhibiting the oscillator output stage and holding the buffer so the lamp is off. When a signal appears, the comparator output goes high, removing the lock from the oscillator which free-runs, switching the lamp on and off at 2 Hz.
519
RADAR SIGNAL DETECTOR

RI 1.1 MEG
Cl .22
C2 PIEZO 05 TRANDUCER 6
R2
,
10
~
27K
~ w
OB
0.6
;: 04
'" 02
0.0'4,~~-'-':;--'-";--'---7---'--+'"500100 10 1 .1 01
L-<_---<--~
1- --I' 120-0-1
9V
+ SI
FREQUENCYGHz b
FIG. 3-VARY THE LEAD LENGTHS OF Cl to lune the Input circuit.
FIG. I-THE ECONOMY RADAn DETECTOR needs only one le and a few uiscrcte components.
RI
2~ Y 145 ci l' 22 t-,V 8 R2

f---! !CI-~
l
47'
R3
fcs
SI
10K
OS
I;~OOK ILl b
"'
C2
Y'14~ ty,
~;
,-----l ~
le? 2 LM386
"
AS 2SK
r-' [;/ 4
~~
nO~lF
R6 lOOK
R7 1OtJ.~
lOOK 6V
C~
~-
IOV
SPKR
01
, :I-~~-II--
FIG. 2-0ElUXE RADAR DETECTOR adds a buffer amplifier and an audio power amp to drive a speaker.
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 79-2
Circuit Notes The circuit can be tuned to respond to signals between 50 MRz and 500 GRz. The economy model is shown in Fig. I, and the deluxe model is shown in Fig. 2. The first op amp in each circuit functions as a current-to-voltage converter. In the economy model IClb buffers the output to drive the piezo buzzer. The deluxe model functions in a similar manner except that IClb is configured as a x 20 buffer amplifier to drive the LM386. In both circuits Cl functions as a "transmission line" that intercepts the incident radar signal. The response may be optimized by trimming Cl's lead length for the desired frequency. Typically the capacitor's leads should be 0.5-0.6 inches long.
520
80 Ramp Generators
Ramp Generator Voltage Controlled Ramp Generator
521
RAMP GENERA TOR
8.
Negative Ramp
SIGNETICS
Circuit Notes The 566 can be wired as a positive or negativerarnp generator. In the positive ramp generator. the external transistor driven by the Pin 3 output rapidly discharges Cl at the end of the charging period so that charging can resume instantaneously. The pnp transistor of the negative ramp generator likewise rapidly charges the timing capacitor Cl at the end of the discharge period. Because the circuits are reset so quickly. the temperature stability of the ramp generator is excellent. The period
1
T is
where fo is the 566 free-running frequency in normal operation. Therefore.
1
T
2fo
RTCjVCC
"(VCC - V c)
(1)
where Vc is the bias voltage at Pin 5 and RT is the total resistance between Pin 6 and Vcc. Note that a short pulse is available at Pin 3. (Placing collector resistance in series with the external transistor collector will lengthen the pulse.)
522
VOLTAGE CONTROLLED RAMP GENERATOR
'" ,
19 17
v
/ c00047.'
" 15
14
IJ
~
J J I
/
/ C = 0.01 ,.f
RI 10 k
.3
510 k
/
I I
12
/ / / 1/
.,
-.=-
R2 20 k
~Q1 MPSOS16
/V1
RAMP OUT
r-Cl;
I{MPU
131
R4 100
1 0
Ri 100 k
I I
,
,IL
s: r
51020V
, I
Voltage Controlled Ramp Generator
IVCAGI
DURATION TIME (ms)
Voltage
verlus Ramp Duration Time of VCRG
MOTOROLA
Fig. 80-2
Circuit Notes The current source formed by Ql in conjunction with capacitor Cl set the duration time of the ramp. As the positive dc voltage at the gate is changed, the peak point firing voltage of the PUT is changed, which changes the duration time, i.e., increasing the supply voltage increases the peak point firing voltage causing the duration time to increase.
523
81 Receivers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry~in the Sources section. Car Radio with Capacitive Diode Tuning and Electronic MWILW Switching Receiver Monitor PLLlBC Receiver
524
CAR RADIO WITH CAPACITIVE DIODE TUNING AND ELECTRONIC MW/LW SWITCHING
vs- +&liY
~----~~------~--.t--o'~
22
.
Ut *"F
'.
'""
1DIInF
.,_m "...
u.
"'.
..
.,.
... ~
..,'
~
...
r---"'.,
1211101
1..
'oH
..,
,~o-'---'
NOTES: Values of capacitors depend On the selected group 01 capacitIVe (I'odes 98112
For IF fllte, and co,1 data 'afa' to Block Diagfam. The circuli Includes pre-slag" AGe opt,mizad lor good large_s'gnal handling.
SIGNETICS
Fig. 81-1
525
RECEIVER MONITOR
SI
o
Circuit Notes The alarm plugs into the earphone jack on a receiver. Then when a signal (normally fed to the headphones) is detected and applied to the gate of SCRl, it conducts, sounding whatever alarm is connected to SO 1. The signaling device can be an audible alarm or a lamp. Variable resistor RI functions as a sensitivity control so that background noises won't trigger the alarm.
TO HEAO PHONE JACK OF RECEIVER
SDI
Fig. 81-2
PLL/BC RECEIVER
TUNING C3
365pF
+18V
C5
.01 F
Cl ANTENNWI-...,._ _ _ _ _ _.., 4
14
UI
15
16
l'
C9
.,
CIO I
15K
R2
15K
561 B 13
C2
150pF
I
~
C4
150p'
q
25K
TOAUOIO AMPLIFIER
.3
---<>
Fig. 81-3
Circuit Notes TIlls simple AM circuit uses a 561B. There's no inductance/capacitance tuning circuit.
The 365 pF capacitor connected between pins 2 and 3 does all the tuning. The circuit needs a good outside antenna and a solid ground. And if you want to further improve operation, stick a broadband amplifier in front of the receiver. Just make sure the input voltage does not climb over 0.5 volt rms.
526
82 Rectifier Circuits
Absolute-Value, "Ideal" Full-Wave Rectifier Half-Wave Rectifier
527
ABSOLUTEVALUE, "IDEAL" FULLWAVE RECTIFIER

R2
tl5 v
.J10 kn
001
f" F
1N914r
10 kfi
R3j
><,o:-:o-'-;:n~
OFFSET
PEAK
ADJUST
10
~n
ADJuST
t:_2 _ X
><3-1'11 i~_+X
, \
__ H::.~
RI
I - X
?
\
)
Rr+fl2+R3
FOR X 0 5
--.
ID Kn
~Kn
R?
RI
R3 -1O~n (DO??) .15kfi

20 V P P INPUT BW(-3dB)o290 kH;, DC OUTPUl (AVGl-32 V
Fig. 821
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a CA3140 BiMOS op amp in an inverting gain configuration. When equality of two equations shown in satisfied, full-wave output of circuit is symmetrical.
HALFWAVE RECTIFIER
10k
10'
5.1k
NOTE: All resistor values are in ohms.
Circuit Notes The circuit provides for accurate half-wave rectification of the incoming signal. For positive signals, the gain is 0; for negative signals, the gain is -1. By reversing both diodes, the polarity can be inverted. This circuit provides an accurate output, but the output impedance differs for the two input polarities and buffering may be needed. The output must slew through two diode drops when the input polarity reverses. The "NE5535 device will work up to 10 kHz with less than 5% distortion.
SIGNETICS
Fig. 822
528
83
Relay Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the ~source entry in the Sources section.
Relay Driver Provides Delay and Controls Closure Time TRIAC Relay-Contact Protection TR Circuit
529
RELAY DRIVER PROVIDES DELAY AND CONTROLS CLOSURE TIME
r------.------.-o'::SI
0--0 +VCC
R2
; ,C2
RI
R'
~~I .f----f-~
Fig. 83-1
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Circuit Notes The relay operates a certain time. td. after power is applied to it, and then it operates for a length of time, te- The SCR fires when the voltage on Cl reaches VA- This operates the relay, which stays activated until the current charging C2 drops below the dropout current. To keep the relay in its activated position indefinitely (tc = 00), eliminate C2 and choose R2 just large enough to keep the relay coil current within its related limits. Typical component values for td = 30 seconds and tc = 2 seconds are: RI = 1. 5 megohms, R2 = 10 kohms, R3 = 3 k ohms, Cl = 47 I'F, and C2 = 100 I'F. The SCR is a 2N1877 and the relay is a Potter Brumfield PW-5374. A value of 12 Vdc is assumed for Vcc.
530
TRIAC RELAY-CONTACT PROTECTION
R3 47
If
1\ C2
0.1 /LF Q1 2N5569
I
~
50 AMP LOAD
I
I
S1
I I I
I
~ ~
R1 1.5 k 10W R2 10 10W' C1 20/LF 250 V
115 VAC 60 Hz
115 V RELAY WITH PICK UP AND DROPOUT TIMES OF 10-20 ms
..... ,
FI
D1 1N4004
+ ::::r:
MOTOROLA
Fig. 83-2
Circuit Notes This circuit can be used to prevent relay contact arcing for loads up to 50 amperes. There is some delay between the time a relay coil is energized and the time the contacts close. There is also a delay between the time the coil is de-energized and the time the contacts open. For the relay used in this circuit both times are about 15 ms. The TRIAC across the relay contacts will turn on as soon as sufficient gate current is present to fire it. This occurs after switch 51 is closed but before the relay contacts close. When the contacts close, the load current passes througb them, rather than througb the TRIAC, even though the TRIAC is receiving gate current. If 51 should be closed during the negative half cycle of the ac line, the TRIAC will not turn on immediately but will wait until the voltage begins to go positive, at which time diode D1 conducts providing gate current through Ri. The maximum time that could elapse before the TRIAC turns on is S-y, ms for the 60 Hz supply. This is adequate to ensure that the TRIAC will be on before the relay contact closes.
531
TR CIRCUIT
Circuit Notes
Cl and C2 are disc ceramic. RI and R2 are V. or Vz W carbon composition resistors.

K1 is a 12 V DPDT DIP relay. illustration A shows how to connect the relay contacts for use with a separate transmitter-receiver combination. The circuit at B is for amplifier use with a transceiver.
532
84 Resistance/Continuity Meters
Single Chip Checks Resistance Simple Continuity Tester for PCB' s Simple Continuity Tester Adjustable. Audible Continuity Tester for Delicate Circuits
533
SINGLE CHIP CHECKS RESISTANCE

+5V
loon MULTITURN SET HIGH LIMIT R 24kll LEDI RED
+5V
+5V
Ikn
'/
+5V
2201l loon Ikn Ikn 10kll MULTITURN SET 'LOW LIMIT LED2 GREEN
'/
~ ~
loon
LED3 RED
i~
,kn '/
ELECTRONIC~ENGINEERING
Fig. 84-1
Circuit Notes A simple tester can be used for routine checks for resistance on production lines of relays, coils, or similar components where frequent changes in resistance to be tested are not required. The tester is built around a single quad op amp chip, the LM324. R, which is chosen to be around 80 times the resistance to be checked, and the 5 V supply form the current source. The first op amp buffers the voltage generated across the resistanceunder test, R,.. The second op amp amplifies this voltage. The third and fourth op amps compare the amplified voltage with high and low limits. The high and low limits are set on multitum presets with high and low limit resistors connected in place of R,.. LED 1 (red) lights when the resistance is high. LED 2 (green) shows that the resistance is within limits. LED 3 (red) indicates that the resistance is low.
534
SIMPLE CONTINUITY TESTER FOR peBs

3300
TEST
4.7k
0' IN!l'4
390
+
OURACELL '.5 VOLTS
Fig. 84-2
2200
Circuit Notes This tester is for tracing wiring on Printed Circuit Boards. Resistors below 50 obms act as a short circuit; above 100 obms as an open circuit. The circuit is a simple muitivibrator switched on by transistor T3. The components in the base of T3 are Dl, Rl, R2, and the"test resistance. With a 1.5 volt supply, there is insufficient voltage to turn on a semiconductor connected to the test terminals.
SIMPLE CONTINUITY TESTER
TEST
IK 4.7K
100n
,K
4.7K
3V;t ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Fig. 84-3
Q4 BeY7'
lOOn
Circuit Notes The pitch of the tone is dependent upon the resistance under test. The tester will respond to resistance of hundreds of kilohms, yet it is possible to distinguish differences of just a few tens of ohms in low-resistance circuits. Ql and Q2 form a muitivibrator, the frequency of which is influenced by the resistance between the test points. The output stage Q3 and Q4 will drive a small loudspeaker or a telephone earpiece.
535
SIMPLE CONTINUITY TESTER FOR PCBs
TEST
01 IN914
+
1.5 VOLTS
Fig. 84-2
22011
Circuit Notes This tester is for tracing wiring on Printed Circuit Boards. Resistors below 50 ohms act as a short circuit; above 100 ohms as an open circuit. The circuit is a simple multivibrator switched on by transistor T3. The components in the base of T3 are Di, Ri, R2, and the test resistance. With a l.5 volt supply, there is insufficient voltage to turn on a semiconductor connected to the test terminals.
SIMPLE CONTINUITY TESTER
TEST IK 4.7K 100n 4.7K
1K
3V;t -ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Fig. 84-3
Q4 BeY71 100n
Circuit Notes The pitch of the tone is dependent upon the resistance under test. The tester will respond to resistance of hundreds of kilohms, yet it is possible to distinguish differences of just a few tens of ohms in low-resistance circuits. Qi and Q2 form a multivibrator, the frequency of which is influenced by the resistance between the test points. The output stage Q3 and Q4 will drive a small loudspeaker or a telephone earpiece.
535
Zl a>
ADJUSTABLE, AUDIBLE CONTINUITY TESTER FOR DELICATE CIRCUITS

Audible Alarm (Mallory Sanoalart 628 or Equivalent)
Power Switch
3K
Adjustment r--:. 500
Sensitivity
2.2 K
9.1 K
:L
_T
6to9V
(9 V, NEDA
1604A or Equivalent)
Pilot Light
CD

LM 311
(HP HLMP-0101 or Equivalent)
R3
220
'...----<p---+ 0
N916
Red
i'N9'6
Sockets
for Probes
OBlack
Note: Resistors are 1/4 W, 5%. NASA
Fig. 844
Circuit Notes
The tester gives an audible indication, making it unnecessary for the user to look directly at the instrument to observe a meter reading. In addition, the current and voltage of the tester are strictly limited. It can apply no more than 0.6 volts dc and no more than 3 mA through the probes. It can therefore be used safely on circuit boards in which semiconductor components have been installed, and on complementary metal oxide/semiconductor integrated circuits, which are highly susceptible to damage during testing. The tester can be adjusted to indicate continuity below any resistance value up to 35 ohms. For example, if the user sets the tester to 30 ohms, the unit will emit an audible tone whenever the resistance between the probes is 30 ohms or less; if, for example, the resistance is 30.2 ohms, the unit will remain silent.
85 RF Amplifiers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Low-Distortion 1.6 to 30 MHz SSB Driver 1 Watt, 2.3 GHz Amplifier 5-W RF Power Amplifier 6-Meter Preamplifier Provides 20 dB Gain and Low 125 Watt 150 MHz Amplifier 6-Meter Kilowatt Amplifier Broadcast-Band RF Amplifier Improved RF Isolation Amplifier A 10 Watt 225-400 MHz Amplifier
NF
537
LOW-DISTORTION 1.6 TO 30 MHz SSB DRIVER
R5
R6
RFC5
v,
e14
01
50
~ :n" J:--l i
C2
res
B
07
B
C8
02
Cl0J_
-=-
C13J :I_
< 50 n
R'
RB
Out
In
R2
T2
R9
RFC3
R7
c'
I I I I
R12 RW
R3
-=-
AFC4
-=-
-=R4
C3
C9
R5,
10 Ohms, 1/4W R' R4 R2, R3 30 Ohms. 1/4 W R6 - 82 Ohms, 3W(Nom,) R7 47 Ohms, 1/4 W R8, Rn - 6.8 Ohms, 1/4 W R9, Rl0-150hms,l/4W
I_
B
C12
AFC5 - Ferroxcube VK200 19/48 RFC1, 2,3,4 - 10,uH Molded Choke

Ferrite Beads (Fair-Rite Prod Corp Ferroxcube !T56 59065/381 #2643000101 or
R12 - 130 Ohms, 1/4 W Cl C4, - 39 pF Dipped Mica
C2. C3
680 pF CeramiC DISC

220 j../F, 4 V. Tantalum
01,02 -lN4001
Ql, Q2 MRF476 03. Q4 - MRf475
T1, T2 T3 4: 1 Impedance Transformer
eta -
CS C7, Cll, C13 - 0.' /-IF Ceramic Disc

C6 - 56 pF Dipped Mica CS, C9 - 1200 pF Ceramic Disc C12. e14 - 10 j../F, 25 V Tantalum
1:4 Impedance Transformer
MOTOROLA
Fig. 851
538
Circuit Notes
The amplifier provides a total power gain of about 25 dB, and the construction technique allows the use of inexpensive components throughout. The MRF476 is specified as a 3 watt device and theMRF475 has an output power ofl2 watts. Both are extremely tolerant to overdrive and load mismatches, even under CW conditions. Typical IMD numbers are better than -35 dB, and the power gains are 18 dB and 12 dB, respectively, at 30 MHz. The bias currents of each stage are individually adjustable with R5 and R6. Capacitors C4 and CID function as audio-frequency bypasses to further reduce the source impedance at the frequencies of modulation. Gain levelin& across the band is achieved with simple RC networks in series with the bases, in conjunction with negative feedback. The amplitude of the out-of-phase voltages at the bases is inversely proportional to the frequency as a result of the series inductance in the feedback loop and the increasing inputimpedance of the transistor at low frequencies. Conversely, the negative feedback lowers the effective input impedance presented to the source (not the input impedance of the device itselt) and with proper voltage slope would~equa1ize it. With this technique, it is possible to maintain an input VSWR of 1.5:1 or less than 1.6 to 30 MHz.
539
1 WATT, 2.3 GHz AMPLIFIER
19
l10
RF Input Zl
MRF2001 Z2
C2
l4
Z5
Z6
l8
Z7
RF Output
l3
Cl
Cl - 0.4-2.5 pF Johanson 7285

C2, C3 - 68 pF, 50 mil ATC" C4-0.1 ~F,50V CS - 4.7 JlF, 50 V Tantalum
Zl-Z10 Microstrip; see Photomaster, Figure 3
Board Material - 0.0625" 3M Glass Tetlon:*Er ::
2.5 0.05
.. Johanson Manufacturing Corp., 400 Rockaway Valley Road, Boonton. NJ 07005 American Technical Ceramics, One Norden Lane. Huntington Station, NY 11746 Registered Trademark of Du Pont
MOTOROLA
Fig. 852
540
Circuit Notes Simplicity and repeatability are featured in !bis 1 watt S-band amplifier design. The design uses an MRF2001 transistor as a common base, Class C amplifier. The amplifier delivers 1 watt output with 8 dB minimum gain at 24 V, and is tunable from 2.25 to 2.35 GHz. Applications include microwave communications equipment and other systems requiring medium power, narrow band amplification. The amplifier circuitry consists almost entirely of distributed microstrip elements. A total of six additional components, induding the MRF200l, are required to build a working amplifier. The input and output impedances of the transistor are matched to 50 obms by double section low pass networks. The networks are designed to provide about 3% 1 dB power bandwidth while maintaining a collector efficiency of approximately 30%. There is one tuning adjustment in the amplifier-Cl~in the output network. Ceramic chip capacitors, C2 and C3, are used for dc blocking and power supply decoupJing. Additional low frequency decoupJing is provided by capacitors C4 and C5.
541
~
POWER
LI
S-W RF POWER AMPLIFIER

AMP
FLI
feD. 7.5 MHz

T2
0.1
rv-YV"'
ANT (50.n)
ce
2
poS
GAIN 13 dB EFF _60"4
RFINPUT~}I
(50n) PIN;:;250 mW 2
11
RFCI
,
11
C51~
Rrc 2
EXCEPT AS INOICATEb, DECIMAL VALUES OF CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS (J,F); OTHERS ARt: IN PICOFARADS ( pF ): RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS; .. '" 1000, M", 1000 000.
HEAT SINK
+
22,.F. 25 V
P-POLVSf'(RENE S t.4 - SILVER MICA
r:h
TC6
+I2V 1660mA KEYOOWN)
C FRONT VIEW
11-0.22-JlH Inductor. Small RF choke or 6 turns of no. 24 enam wire on an Amidon T-37-6 loroid. L2, L4-0.8-I'H induclor. 12 turns of no. 24 enam wire on an Amidon T-50-2 loraid. L3-1.67-/-tH inductor. 18 turns of no. 24 enam wire on an Amidon T-50-2 taroid.
QST
RFCl-2.8 p.H choke. 24 turns 01 no. 26 enam wire on an Amidon T -50-2 taroid. RFC2-42 I'H choke. 10 turns of no. 26 enam wire on an Amidon FT-37-43 toraid. Tl-Primary has 16 turns of no. 26 enam wire on an Amidon FT37-43 taroid
Secondary has 6 turns of no. 26 enam wire. T2-Primary (01 side) has 9 turns of no. 24 enarn wire on an Amidon FT -50-43 taroid. Secondary has 15 turns of no. 24 enam wire.
Fig. 85-3
Circuit Notes Numbered components are so designated for PC-board lay()ut purposes. C5 and C8 are disc ceramic. C6 and C7 are tantalum or electrolytic. RI, R2 and R3 are Y, W carbon composition resistors. Silver-mica capacitors may be substituted for polystyrene (P) types. Impedance transformation ratios are shown above TI and T2.
6METER PREAMPLlFIER PROVIDES 20 dB GAIN AND LOW NF

50 MHt 50 MHz TUNE
50 MHz
TUNE
TUNE
T3
..h~11
10
10
I I
I~R~eR
I I
0.01
I
I
~
100
EXCEPT AS INDICATED, DECIMAL VAll,lES OF CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFAAADS (I'F); OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF ); RESIST ANCES ARE IN OHMS; k::: 1000
SHIELD
~
SHIELDI
~
100
+
~01
O+12-18Y
QST
Fig. 854
Circuit Notes Cl, C2, and C3 are miniature ceramic or plastic trimmers. Tl (main winding) is 0.34 "H. Use of 11 turns of no. 24 enameled wire ona T37-1O toroid core. The antenna winding has one turn, and Ql the source winding has three turns. 1'2 primary consists of 11 turns of no. 24 enameled wire on a T37-10 toroid. Tap Ql drain is three turns from C2 the end of the winding. The secondary has three turns. T3 is the same as 1'2, except its secondary has one turn.
en
t;
125 WATT 150 MHz AMPLIFIER
R2
Bias
Adjust
C12
C13
VDO = 28 V
R3
C9
Cl0
r-
*"F'
C3
01 ~~
co
R4
RF Output
RF Input
Cl
1
co
,,~C2
"
L1
L2
L3
C6 ' "
C4
_,~ C5
"t. C7
1
JLT Jl-l 0 4 r -'--'---'=-=....., to+- 0.2"
Cl - 35 pF Unleco
C2, CS - Areo 462, 5-80 pF C3 - 100 pf Unleco C4 - 25 pF Unleco C6 - 40 pF Unleco C7 - Areo 461, 2.7-30 pF
Ll-#16AWG,l-1/4Turns,D.213"'O
II - 11 1 6 AWG, Hairpin 0.25" -1 I-- 0_062" l3 - 11 14 AWG, Hairpin
ca -
Areo 46-3, 9-'80 pF C9, Cl1. C14 - 0.1 fJ.F Erie Redcap
l4 - 10 Turns #16 AWG Enameled Wire on RI AFC1 - 18 Turns #16 AWG Enameled Wire, 0 3" ID
Cl0-50/-lF,50V e12. C13 - 680 pF Feedthru Dl - 1 N592SA Motorola Zener
Al-10!l,2.0W R2 - '.8 ktl, 1 /2 W R3 - 10 kn, 10 Turn Bourns
R4 -1Okn, 1/4 W
MOTOROLA
Fig. 85-5
Circuit Notes This amplifier operates from a 28 Vdc supply. It has a typical gain of 12 dB, and can survive operation into a 30:1 VSWR load at any phase angle with no damage. The amplifier has an AGe range in excess of 20 dB. This means that with input power held constant at the level that provides 125 watts output, the output power may be reduced to less than 1.0 watt continuously by driving the dc gate voltage negative from its IDQ value.
544
6-METER KILOWATT AMPLIFIER
Circu it Notes The amplifier uses a grounded grid circuit with either the Eimac 3CXlOOOA7 or 8877, ceramic/metal triodes intended for linear service ill the HF and VHF ranges. The amp provides the legal power output of 1500 watts PEP and CW service with no effort and requires a driver delivering between 50 and 80 watts at 50 MHz. With a plate voltage of 3000 volts at 0.8 amps the amplifier performs at 60 percent efficiency. The grid is grounded by means of the grid ring of the 3CXlOOOA7 socket providing a low-inductance path Id ground. The amplifier is completely stable.
"
(
0."'"
HovicDTHROUGH
RFCI
2-~OO~W
"
3-30
"
OUTPIJT
"
,/O.v
"
INPUT
0.001 CERAMIC DOORKNOB
,,., "
RF< OHMITE
Z-50
)
'" '0'
LI
"
RFCJ RFC4
0-/00
11
ZOO,IOW
---w-.10.,251f'
r/ooo .rh ~ICA

.,
os,,
,!;l .,/~J
P-(;.,68
200, IOW
"
STA,!COR
OR'
OR'
"
5'
_~ ii .i 4-J
a-lA
PLATE CURRENT
i
,
0-500"'A
GRID
i li It-] li
""
CURRENT
I/!>V
'h
HAM RADIO
Fig. 85-6
BROADCAST-BAND RF AMPLIFIER
C5 .1 C1 10 ~F 16 V
+12 V
R2 270 !l
Q2 2N3906
Q3 2N3904 RF R6 4.7 k + (ou~ut R7 3.9 k RB see text C4 10 ~F 16 V
Input
R~
R1 see text R3 500 !l BIAS
Q1 MPF 102
R4 1.B k
+ C2 10 ~F 16 V
C3 10 ~F 16 V
R5 10 k
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 85-7
Circuit Notes The circuit has a frequency response ranging from 100 Hz to 3 MHz; gain is about 30 dB. Field-effect transistor Ql is configured in the common-source self-biased mode; optional resistor RI sets the input impedance to any desired value. Commonly, it will be 50 ohms. The signal is then direct-coupled to Q2, a common-base circuit that isolates the input and output stages and provides the amplifier's exceptional stability. Q3 functions as an emitter follower, to provide low output impedance (about 50 ohms). For higher output impedance, include resistor R8. It will affect impedance according to this formula: R8 - Rout - 50. Otherwise, connect output capacitor C4 directly to the emitter of Q3.
546
IMPROVED RF ISOLATION AMPLIFIER
+ 15V
100
1K
150
001
68
L -+------0
001
EXTERNAL
'J'
BYPASS
20
001 ;:: ::~001~(
1K 33
....--.----1: 1,
;; :::: 0.01 390 820
0.01
25 pF
43
AF INPUT
-=
-
~,~1
001
22K
0' 11
001 ;;
22K~
,~~
3K I ( 001 ;::
[:;-
~;,
0.Q1
i'
J1'
1K 150
:~
RFOUTPUT
150
NOTES -TRANSISTORS NEe. OR EQUIVALENT NPN ;; NE 02135 PNP =; NE 88935 -RESISTORS 118 W,5%. CARBON ALL RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
300
-ALL CAPACITANCES ARE IN MICRQFARADS
NASA
Fig. 85-8
Circuit Notes This wideband RF isolation amplifier has a frequency response of 0.5 to 400 MHz 0.5 dB. This two stage amplifier can be used in applications requiring high reverse isolation, such as receiver intermediate-frequency (IF) strips and frequency distribution systems. Both stages use complementary-symmetry transistor arrangements. The input stage is a common-base connection for the complementary circuit. The output stage, which supplies the positive gain, is a common-emitter circuit using emitter degeneration and collector-base feedback for impedance control.
547
A 10 WATT 225-400 MHz AMPLIFIER
Re
Input
T
=
C3 CS -
~ 1, ~'~:J t4 rI~l 11
Z2
Cl - 8 2 pF Chip' C2 - 270 pF Chip'

36 pF Ch,p'
Rl - 36
Tl 25
n 1/4 Watt n Subminiature Coax
(Tvpe UT34 25)
C4, C7 -15 pF Chip'
1 75 Iflches (44.45 mm) long

Zl M,crQstrip Llne 720 mils L X 162 m.tsW 18.29 mm LX 4.115 mm W
CS, C6 - 50 pF Chip'
82 pF Chip'
Cl0, C13
eg. C12 -- 680 pF Feedthru 1,O,u.F 50 V Tantalum Cll - 0.1 iJ.F Erie Redcap
Ll, L3 L2 L4 -3Turns~22AWG
22 - M,crosnip Line
680 m,ls L X 162 mlls W 17.27 mm L X 4.115 mm W
Z3 M,crostnp Line
1/g"(3_17SmmJ ID
0.15 pH Molded ChOke

0.15,u.H MOlded Choke With Ferro)(cube Bead
2200 mils L X 50 mlls W 5588 mm L X 1,27 mm W

Board 0,0625" 11-.-588 mm) Glass Teflon,
(Ferroxcube Sf' 590-65148 on Ground End

of ChOke)
L5 -
Ferroxcube VK200-19!4B
c r - 2.56
1 00 mll A,C.I, Chip CapacItors
Q1 -
MRF331
MOTOROLA
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION
I1 50
T'
A B
Fig. 85-9
25n
=
ASSEMBL Y AND PICTORIAL
Tran~former
Dimensions
I not to scale)
o o548
1.75 inches 14.445 cml
0 1875 Inch (0476 cm)
A 10 WATT 225-400 MHz AMPLIFIER, Continued.
Transformer Connections
"" 50
"" 12_5
Circuit Notes This broadband amplifier covers the 225-400 MRz military communications band producing 10 watt RF output power and operating from a 28 volt supply. The amplifier can be used as a driver for higher power devices such as 2N6439 and MRF327. The circuit is designed to be driven by a 50 ohm source and operate into a nominal 50 ohm load. The input matching network consists of a section composed of C3, C4, Z2, C5 and C6. C2 is a dc blocking capacitor, and Tl is a 4:1 impedance ratio coaxial transformer. Zl is a 50 ohm transmission line. A compensation network consisting of Rl, Cl, and Ll is used to improve the input VSWR and flatten the gain response of the amplifier. L2 and a small ferrite bead make up the base bias choke. The output network is made up of a microstrip L-section consisting of Z3 and C7, and a high pass section consisting of C8 and L3. C8 also serves as a dc blocking capacitor. Collector decoupling is accompJished through the use of L4, L5, C9, ClO, Cll, C12, and C13.
549
86
RF Oscillators
5 MRz VFO
550
5 MHz VFO
VFO
5.0-5.4 MHz
C4
MPF102
01
"
C5
r----.---T-~ C6
I. "
560
C8
BUFFER
Cl
rh
560
RFC 1
500jlH
"
Ra
I~
'0
FREQ
R7
5.6k
"T
RFC2
RI2
S.6k
MV~4~~>-~5~0~0'~"~~~
C9
+,
REG
CI:r '
IOOjlF 25V
+IZ,~
CI8
~
3.77j1H
001
410,
220~
S.M.
C}'7 ~~""T
RIO 56
SM.
Cl4
01
5.0-5.4 MHz
QST
FIg. 86-1
Circuit Notes A JFET (Ql) serves as the oscillator. D2 helps to stabilize the transistor by limiting positive sinewave peaks and stabilizing the bias. Output from Ql is supplied to a class A buffer, Q2. It operates as a broadband amplifier by means of n, which is untuned. Output amplifier Q3 is also a class A stage. A low-pass, single-section filter is used at the output of Q3 to remove some of the harmonic currents'generated within the system. The filter output impedance is 50 ohms. The injection level to the mixer is 600 mV p-p,
551
87
Sample-and-Hold Circuits
Sample-and-Hold Circuit Sample and Hold Circuit II Fast, Precision Sample-Hold High Performance Sample and Hold Infinite Sample and Hold Amplifier Charge Compensated Sample and Hold
552
SAMPLE-ANO-HdLo CIRCUIT
+75
SAMPLE READ-OUT AMPLIFIER. R4
RI
INPUT
"
R2 I 6 2 I< - 7' 5 "V'o'-1'--
"
Cl ' ~i--J
-----r
,
OI"F
SA\lPLE
HOLe
OVl I
75
-2
...
)---------AJ\~v
STRODE
15 K
0--
0---
0---
0--0--TOP TRACE OUTPuT 20 mVI DIV 6; 100 ns IDIV

TOP TRACE OUlPUT-5V/DIV.
2,IJ-s/OIV.
BOTTOM TRACE
INPUT-200 mV/DIV. B 100 ns/OIV.
GENERAL ELECTRIC /ReA
Fig. 87-1
CENTER TRACE: DI FFERENTIAL COMPARISON OF INPUT S OUTPUT --2 mV/DIV. a 2 p.s/DIV. BOTTOM TRACE INPUT-5 V/DIV.
2,us/DIV
'"
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a CA3130 BiMOS op amp as the sample-readout amplifier for the storage (sample-holding) capacitor Cl, and a CA3080A as the sample-coutrol amplifier. Applications in linear systems to temporarily store analog data include DVM systems, industrial process-control, multiplex systems, and A-D converters.
SAMPLE AND HOLD CIRCUIT 11
'OIl""
0.01 ....
...
INl'UT TERMINAL IF CIRCUIT ISEMPL.OYED AS AJri INTEGRATOR VtN-OlOI'OV
SW,
1T11OO
INftUT TRMINAI.
" CIRCUIT
IS EMPLOYED
l00U"/. 0,01"
AS A SAMPU AND
HOl.D CIRCUIT V".. -OTO.tOV
SW,
0
+1$'11
V,
1T1100
S
10pF
v,
-=-
I$ ...n
V,.
:n
$AM'LE
IOkO

"0
'MO
V,
'ULSfOR
C.vACITOR
111100
I)ISCHAJlGE
"'LSE
-=I$kn
-15\1
INTESll
Fig. 87-2
Circuit Notes This circuit rapidly charges capacitor CSTO to a voltage equal to an input signal. The input signal is then electrically disconnected from the capacitor with the charge still remaining on CSTO ' Since CSTO is in the negative feedback loop of the operational amplifier. the output voltage of the amplifier is equal to the voltage across the capacitor. Ideally. the voltage across CSTO should remain constant causing the output of the amplifier to remain constant as well. However. the voltage across CSTO will decay at a rate proportional to the current being injected or taken out of the current summing node of the amplifier. This current can come from four sources: leakage resistance of
554
"'" CAll lE REDUCED TO 'OIl IF CIRCUIT" .......OyIO AS AN INTEGRATOR

CHAflGI STOIIAGE CAPACITOR
D.Oh,F
CST~:
!
,
'5\1
0J
o .15v
CIljULL
~
ICH8100
."./ ,
'i;;n
O.C. ZELIlO
. >_15""
'''*
ADJUST CNUL6 TO EL.IMllliAU AIIIV OUT'UT fFSET VOLTAGE Dui TO CHAAGE INJECTION
'ROM SW2
CSTO ' leakage~current due to the solid state switch SW2, currents due to high resistance paths on the circuit fixture, and most important, bias current of the operational amplifier. If the ICH8500A operational amplifier is employed, this bias current is almost non-existent Oess than O.OIpA). Note that the voltages on the source, drain and gate of switch SW2 are zero or near zero when the circuit is in the hold mode. Careful construction will eliminate stray resistance paths and capacitor resistance can be eliminated if a quality capacitor is selected. The net result is a low drift sample and hold circuit. The circuit can double as an integrator. In this application the input voltage is applied to the integrator input terminal. The time constant of the circuit is the product of RI and CSTO '
555
g: '"
FAST, PRECISION SAMPLE-HOLD

1k
SAMPLEHOLO SIGNAL PATH

,
2N4393
i
rl~-----'
INPUT
+ 15V
,
3k
LEVEL SHIFT
4
7k~
2<
DUIPUl
1 5k
39pF
HP5082-2810
lN4148
TTL ...... ~, , INPUT _VY--,..-------,

20k
":"
1k
T
820\)
1000pF PDl YSTYRENE
-15V
10k
HOLD STEP COMPENSATION
':" -15V 20pF
15pF
13k
16ns APERTURE TIME 2,,$ ACQUISiTION TIME TO 0 01% SAMPLE-HOLD OFFSET < 2S0,N HOLD SETTLING < lOOns
5k HOLD STEF ...........____' -_ _ _ _ _--' COMPENSATION'" TRIM

":"
3.5k
":"
f:ig. 87-3
HIGH PERFORMANCE SAMPLE AND HOLD
VIN V OUT
SWl
01 - lN914
6-ve
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD LAYOUT
VOUT CA3140
Fig. 87-4
Circuit Notes When switch SWl is positive. the FET is turned on, and has a resistance of about 400 ohm. The input voltage charges up the capacitor through the FET. When SWl is negative, the FET is turned off (pinched off). To get a long storage time, the op amp must have a very low input bias current. For the CA3140. this current is about 10 pico amps. The rate at which the capacitor will be discharged by this current is based on the equation, C (dv/dt) ~ i where dv/dt is the rate of change of voltage on the capacitor. Therefore:
dv dt
C
10- 11
22p,V/s
0.47
X
10- 6
557
INFINITE SAMPLE AND HOLD AMPLIFIER
l.
-0
'4MM74C74
VRF
of-QI--
.CLOCK
Cll(
"
tl= 24 t-<
se
Cll(
14
t""
'/
~
GNO
AOC1210, ADe1211
.A
CC
"MM;:'"
~ V
18 19 15 16 17 20
23
, , ,
0--- VREF
pg:
:~ CH
20 Ok
21
'0~lpF
3
ANALOG IN
lFl~
6":"
'I.MM74C08
~
- L..
'~
6 -
pt;(V ,
-15V
1k
-J:ANALOG OUT
j'"
Fig. 87-5
Circuit Notes During nonnal "hold" mode, the replicated analog voltage is buffered straight through the StH amplifier to the output. Upon issuance of a SAMPLE signal, the SIH amplifier is placed in the hold mode, holding the voltage until the new analog voltage is valid. The same SAMPLE signal triggers an update to the input sample-and-hold amplifier. The most current analog voltage is captured and held for conversion. The previously determined voltage is held stable at the output during the conversion cycle while the SARIDto-A converter continuously adjusts to replicate the new input voltage. At the end of the conversion, the output sample-and-hold amplifier is once again placed in the track mode. The new analog voltage is then regenerated.
558
CHARGE COMPENSATED SAMPLE AND HOLD

100 pF
r-f----<Ti
7
2N4400
2N4400
J
LOGIC
'--+--{) - 15 V
CONTROL
,
HIGH' HOLD
I
I
lOK 11
V'N
o----j----<f
f'
..I.
L fJ~6
>-t-+--{)VOUT
5 mV of Sample to Hotd--Offset when CL -"- 1000 pF)
SILICONIX
Fig. 87-6
Circuit Notes Less than 5 pC charge transfer (less than 5 mV sample-to-hold offset when CL 1000 pF).
559
88
Sine-Wave Oscillators
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Sine-Wave Shaper Low Distortion Sine-Wave Oscillator Audio Oscillator Simple Audio Sine-Wave Generator Low Cost Wien Bridge Oscillator Modified UJT Relaxation Oscillator Produces Clean Audio Sinusoids A 555 Used as an RC Audio Oscillator Wien Bridge Oscillator Uses CMOS Chip Adjustable Sine-wave Audio Oscillator One-IC Audio Generator Shnple Two-Tone Generator
560
SINE-WAVE SHAPER
-15v
""'" ~.
5,.
~F
56'
75 ,
~
+
CA3140
6
TO WIOEBAND
OUTPUT
- fgSUBSTRATE
OF CA3019
AMPLIFIER
I
o
+15 V
I /-'F.I
~ ,~3:'5
03
9
~'
~
10, EXTERNAL
OUTPUT
Cl
-D4100 k
I M
-15 V
91 ,
RI
10 ,
06
02
430
R2
ALL RESISTANCE .. ALUES ARE It.! O... ~S
t----i~.., I ,
3
I
CA3QI9
05
I ARRAY L DIODE ___ _ _ _ _ _ ---.JI
Fig. 88-1
Circuit Notes Uses a CA3140 BiMOS op amp as voltage follower, together with diodes from a CA3019 array, to convert a triangular signal (such as obtained from a function generator) to a sine-wave output with typical THD less than 2%.
LOW DISTORTION SINE-WAVE OSCILLATOR
430U
OUTPUT
Fig. 88-2
"% FLM
10k DUAL POTFNT'OMETER ~ATCH TRACKI~G TO 0 1)" tftATCH CAPACITORS TO 0 I v,
'ikH, TO 50kf-z RA%(

D,STOR'O~ ~
O! 'i,
AMP, ITUDE _ . 8v~-p
561
AUDIO OSCILLATOR
RI 220n
+9V
~F
USE CAPACITOR IF
LAMP
#327
h
1kn
6 >!!....--_ ......-'VVI,--
5 1&00 n
-9V
~F
~
0.5~F
150n
5 kn$<4HIi-li-- OUTPUT
I I
USED
TO DRIVE A
OC CIRCUIT
I I
r---- I
I
GANGED
20k FREQ
4
3
r--------..,I
----,
1 I
20 kn FREQ
3
POSITION SWITCH FREQ
.... 15-150 Hz
0.05~F ~
0.005
~F
2
3
....
....
....
150-1500 Hz 1500 Hz-15 kHz 15 kHz-150 kHz
O.OO5~F ~
470 pF
470pF ~
TEXA$INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 88-3
562
Circuit Notes A Wien bridge oscillator produces sine waves with very low distortion level. The Wien bridge oscillator produces zero phase shift at only one frequency (f = Y, 7r RC) which will be the oscillation frequency. Stable oscillation can occur only if the loop gain remains at unity at the oscillation frequency. The circuit achieves this control by using the positive temperature coefficient of a small lamp to regulate gain (~/RLAMP) as the oscillator attempts to vary it~ output. The oscillator shown here has four frequency bands covering about 15 Hz to 150 kHz. The frequency is continuously variable within each frequency range with ganged 20 k ohm potentiometers. The oscillator draws only about 4.0 mA from the 9-V batteries. Its output is from 4 to 5 V with a 10 k ohm load and the Rf (feedback resistor) is set at about 5% below the point of clipping. As shown, the center arm of the 5 k ohm output potentiometer is the output terminal. To couple the oscillator to a dc type circuit, a capacitor should be inserted in series with the output lead.
563
SIMPLE AUDIO SINE-WAVE GENERATOR

RI tOk
10000 (Hz) SIA FREQUENCY
5000
R2
10 k 1000
R3
R4
100 k 100 k
500 100 50
R5
lM
U1A 1/2 TL082
0.0015
R6 FREQ TRIM IM
10000 (Hz) 500;0:..-_ _--. SIB 1000 500 100 50 R8 10 k

-9V
RI2
IM 100 k
R7
10 k
R9 100 k
- R16, SI, S2
ON PANEL
MOUNTED
Rll
lM
K AT 01 = CATHODE
QST
Fig. 88-4
Circuit Notes UIA, an op amp, oscillates at the frequency at which the phase shift in the Wien bridge network is exactly zero degrees. Changing bridge component values changes the oscillator frequency. In this circuit, we need change only the two resistors to do this. SIA chooses a value among RI through R6, and SIB similarly selects a value from R7 through RI2. UIA must provide enough gain to overcome losses in the bridge, but not so much gain that oscillation builds up to the point of overload and distortion. U2 and
564
52A +9V TO U1-8 0 R19 10 T+ VVv C6 -L 100)JF ~ 16V R20 ON
"51 O.~
o.~
~IIII
528 8T2 9V
OFF
BT1
9V
-9 V TO U1-4 0
1 c7 1 C8
VVv 10
16 V
~Iql +
~100)JF
EXCEPT AS INDICATED, DECIMAL VALUES OF CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS ( .F ); OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF ); ~RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS; k = 1000, M =1000 000.
U2 RECTIFIER
OUTPUT LEVEL R16 R17 100 k
R18 100 k
R13
10 k
BRIDGE
N
lOk
J1
D1
K
R14 4.7 k R15 500

U1-TL082 DUAL OP AMP (RS 276-f715) U2-1A, 50 PIV BRIDGE RECTIFIER (RS 276-1161) S1-ROTARY 6-POSITION, 2 POLE (RS 275-1386) S2-TOGGlE SWITCH, DPDT, (RS 275-626) C2, C4-5-50 pF OR 12-100 pF (RS 272-1340 OR MOUSER 24AA067) 01-1 N4733 5~ 1 V. 1 W (RS 276-565) All RESISTORS-1/4 W. 1% (PART OF RS 271-309)
NC
Cl automatically regulate circuit gain to maintain oscillation_ U2 places D1 across R13 with the proper polarity on both positive and negative alterations of the signal at pin 1 of Ul. As the voltage at pin 1 of U1 approaches its peak value, D1 enters its Zener breakdown region, effectively shunting R13 with a resistive load_ This increases the amount of negative feedback around Ul, reducing its gain. R15, WAVEFORM AD], allows you to optimize circuit operation for lowest distortion. UlB provides isolation between oscillator and load. With the values shown for R17 and R18, U1B operates at unity gain.
565
LOW COST WIEN BRIDGE OSCILLATOR
50k
105k
..
10k 33k 1k 33k
Fig. 88-5
Circuit Notes In the circuit the frequency trinuning component is arranged so that the voltage across it is in quadrature with the voltage V0 from the bridge so that as it is adjusted the attenuation of the bridge only changes a little, avoiding the need for a two gang component. The range of variation of frequency is very limited. By using a high gain amplifier and metal film feedback resistors the loop gain can be set so that the unit just oscillates and the use of an automatic gain setting component, a thennistor for example, is eliminated.
MODIFIED UJT RELAXATION OSCILLATOR PRODUCES CLEAN AUDIO SINUSOIDS

4V
2k
0,082 1lF
22 mH
+-_____-,(pi
rv\I\.;
B,
2N2646
1..
2V
3750 Hz
I
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
B,
100
Circuit Notes By placing a tuned circuit in the UJT oscillator's current-pulse path, a 3750-Hz sinusoid can be created at B2 with the component values shown.
Fig. 88-6
566
A 555 USED AS AN RC AUDIO OSCILLATOR
INPUT
01
/001i
04
100'
IODic SENSITIVITY
~-\"i---,4-~--1~
flleepl u indicated, decimal
values 01 c.pacltance 8r. in micro-
lids (pFJ; res/sl,nces .re
'arads (I'FJ; otheTS lire in pico/.,in ohms. /( = 1,000 M = 1,000,000
0---0 +9V
UI
2,.
.,
lOOpF I.V
555
+ (
o"~l
A
Fig. 88-7
HAM RADIO
Circuit Notes Transistor Q5 and the 1000 ohm resistor form the variable element needed for controlling the frequency of veo by limiting the charging current flowing into the 0.151'F timing capacitor according to the forward bias being applied to Q5. As the voltage on pins 2 and 6 of Ul reach , Vcc (about 6 volts with a 9-volt supply) the timer will fire and pin 3 will be pulled low. Pin 7, an open collector output, goes low and begins to discharge the timing capacitor-through the 3.3 kilohm resistor. The discharge time provided by this resistor assures a reasonable, although asymmetrical, waveform for the aural signal generated by Ul. At y, Vcc the internal flip-flop resets, the output on pin 3 goes high, the open collector output on pin 7 floats, and the timing cycle begins again.
567
WIEN BRIDGE OSCILLATOR USES CMOS CHIP

R4 1M
A9
01
01
A10 270 k
1N914
A2
02
Fig. 88-8
ADJUSTABLE SINE-WAVE AUDIO OSCILLATOR

RI 309
I5V
AI
R2
LI
CM7218 4,99k
f-LA74 I
>--~-+--{)
-15V
EOUT
CRI
CR2
Cl O.oZZfLF
IN746
C2
D022I'
1
~
,
_______\5.011 DUAL GANG POT
TECHNO COMPONENTS
560R053HI4
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 88-9
Circuit Notes Waveform purity lit low frequencies for a Wien bridge oscillator is enbanced by diode limiting. Lamp Ll stabilizes the loop gain at higher frequencies while the limiting action of R2, CRI, and CR2 prevents clipping at low frequencies and increases the frequency adjustment range from about 3:1 to greater than 10:1.
568
ONEIC AUDIO GENERATOR

8+-15 VOLTS
Cl ool2 , I C2 ".012
'f
1\
:C
RI
C3 12
51-0. ,, ,
,, 9 ,
~rr
(())
LMt*
2~
8-15 :OLTS
:!; =-C7 ;;; ;:; S,.F/SOV
, ,
, ,
2.4K
2%
R2 2SK
L_
R3 R4 : 25K 2.4K:
2%1
- -..JFREQUENCY:
35V
''lTJ' -' j .,
.L
RANGE
~~C5
, , , , , ,
OU~UT JI
Ra 10K
fR5
fR6 2001l
fR7 2001l
LEVEL
200.0
Sl~ i\~------
--------
-~ $1-'
,,
"'"
=- J2
D2
01
IN3253
2N3904
~~r--- a + ISV
RIO 10K
L-----4
D3
32VCT
IN3253
200
cs
CIO .01
,.F
or IN3253
200~F
C9+
10K
CII RII
.01
2SV
L------4.-1~-4.-~-~:.....>L-'---B-15V
'* SEE
PARTS LIST
D4
Q2
RADIO~ELECTRONICS
IN3253
2N3906
Fig. 88-10
Circuit Notes This high-quality low-cost generator covers 20 Hz to 20 kHzJn three bands with less than 1% ilistortion. LM1-10 V, 14 rnA (344,1869,914) or 10 V, 10 rnA (913, 367).
A B
= oscillator = power supply

569
SIMPLE TWO-TONE GENERATOR
." '"
S12 , ...." ,'.."S'.,'" ,.11'0

,,~
ST!,
""
"'2 I,,,H'."',,.' co""ol,

$1 51 UI
UZ
I,n .... ,I.. 1tI(Iwnl
p., CO""O', PC
'"
ADDE'"
r-~-'-F"-I
p.o".'mO<1"r DPDr '011111.0 spsr ,ol1lft. '.5.dU.'op.mpm m'Il/dip p.ochg_ 7'1 "P.mp In m',,/d,p p.ocug.
'" '"
lUO OSCIllA TO'"
1"
HO
IQK
'"
101(
>-,--t-..,_
"
ON
'"
lztOOSCILLATOR
...
'"
HO
Circuit Notes Two 741 operational amplifiers are used for the active element in this Wien bridge oscillator. (The 1458 is the dual version of the 741.) Frequencies of the two oscillators were chosen to fit standard component values. Other frequencies between 500 and 2000 Hz can be employed. They should not be harmonically related. The output level of UIA is set by a resistive divider. while the output of UIB is adjustable through RI. The output of the two oscillators is combined in U2. an op-amp adder with unity gain. The output from U2 can be adjusted using R2.
'"
'12 14!1S'>-'----1f-..,,::,
"'.
LEvn
aALANC!
'"
-"
"
...
t--_.....-10', 'HO
"'<>--<>h
ON : , 518 ... ;
- iV 0----0
...
foe.pru
.ds.(p~):
~
,.,.ds (.,El; 0,11.", ... -It! pleall"
'-.f, ... kt 01 .... ~"" .... /" mle_
".d'.... Ne_'
".'IIIIICI. I .. in allm .. : 1.000 M "' 1,000,000
!S
aT!
9V
'o----J
Fig. 88-11
HAM RADIO
570
89
Sirens, Warblers and Wailers

Warble Generator Wailing Alarm Warble-Tone Alarm Warbling Tone Generator Multifunction Siren System 7400 Siren Toy Siren
Siren Uses TIL Gates Electronic Ship Siren Siren Alarm Simulates Star Trek Red Alert Yelp Oscillator High Power Siren "Hee-Haw" Two-Tone Siren Varying Frequency Warning Alarm
571
WARBLE GENERATOR
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 89-1
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a pair of 555 timers or a single dual timer. Capacitor Cl controls the speed of the warble, while C2 determines the pitch. The values shown should produce quite a distinctive signal.
WAILING ALARM
5Vto15V
R3
,
ov
4.7 k
~
~ov
C4 100 "F
+
10 k
R1 4.7 k
r;u; --<: 8-PIN ::>OIL 555
R,
TIMER 4
IC1
,
:
R4 100 k
R62.7k
~
--<:
Q1
'av,:p-OIL 555
R2 47k
:'MER, IC2
P-
,
C2
, ,
C1
~: TOTAL 75 R
SPKR
C3
101'F
...
~3702
100I'F
.01I'F
ov
Fig. 89-2
CircuIt Notes This circuit simulates the sound of an American police siren. IC2 is wired as a low frequency astable that has a cycling period of about 6 seconds. The slowly varying ramp waveform on Cl is fed to pnp emitter follower Ql, and is then used to frequency modulate alarm generator ICl via R6. ICl has a natural center frequency of about 800Hz. Circuit action is such that the alarm output signal starts at a low frequen9Y, rises for 3 seconds to a high frequency, then falls over 3 seconds to a low frequency again, and so on ad infinitum.
572
WARBLE-TONE ALARM
5 V to 15 V
+v.
Rl
R3
av
1
...J
tOk
av
1
10 k
a-PIN
u, P- P--~~
ICt
U
8-PIN
A4 220
C4100I'F
r-~I!_:_+~b_-i-C
R,
r'
OIL 555
TIMER
kr+--1r~~
I
10 k
__
'Pb-----t +
b--_..-Ci
+
C2
.01,.F
DIL 555
5 Po."L...l_HW-"1 '---rct4,-=-,...'5~1-'"""
RS lC2
TIMER h
7"
R2
75R
TOTAL
440 - 500 Hz ASTABLE
T,C3 l.ol
I.
Cl IOI'F
JLF 1 Hz ASTABLE
;:;
SPKR
ov
Fig. 89-3
Circuit Notes The circuit generates a warble-tone alarm sigoal that simulates the sound of a British police siren. rCl is wired as an alarm generator and rC2 is wired as a 1 Hz astable multivibrator. The output of rC2 is used to frequency modulate rCl via R5. The action is such that the output frequency of rCl alternates symmetrically between 500 Hz and 440 Hz, taking one sound to complete each alternating cycle. WARBLING TONE GENERATOR
+12-15V
470n
!S6K
33QK
470n
t----:-_OUTPUT
Fig. 89-4
47!l
IO)JF
4711
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes The circuit use two unijunction transistors. The low-frequency sawtooth generated by Ql modulates the high-frequency tone generated by Q2. The output should feed into a high-impedance amplifier. Ql = Q2 = 2N4871.
573
01
MUL TIFUNCTION SIREN SYSTEM

~-------~r--------
330k
f
82>
~
~.-.
4"
27 pF
------,
.r~OM
MODE TWO TONE
r"
33 k 001
9V
v+
Ion
+-----<C3
47>
~2
150 k
8~f4--{i6
39 k
CA30B2 ARRAY
150
".1
IM
IVVl 'UTT::r ~~
IN91
PUSH
/'\. /' f!
I
v+
t\
r'\.. '-J "'-...

"V
'I
I
IN914
~~-~
..
a--l
WAIL
ATlACK
Ik
SWEEP
SHOT [I
IM
IM
YELP
RATtr~( FAST ~ 0-MED
,,-u,-o__
Fig. 89-5
-~
S LOW
J 2~F "':J: ~
On.
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a CA3130 BiMOS op amp as a multivibrator to control the siren's rate. A CA3094 used as a YCO is followed by a CA3082 transistor array used to drive a speaker. A "Manual" or "Auto" mode switch allows the user to select either interinittent or continuous siren operation, respectively. In addition, three switches are available that control "Mode", "Attack", and "Rate".
7400 SIREN
,
j
~"
V~.
'5V
lN914
,,.,
'<=;20/-lF
4k7
~~220:;
.,
OV
~ 1;
GNO
r-n
~~
;
4k7
I .
.. ,
I
OUTPUT
.2/o1 f
, I , ,
I , ./: , \ 13sn UP (1501 " ,, , ,
r-n h t-'
D
h
71~~:w
r,:
4"
t'::
~
11
l, "
, ,'
"~I
, , ,
Fig. 89-6
Circuit Notes Two NAND gates are used for the oscillator, and two as the controL lithe two-tone speed needs to be altered, the 220 I'F capacitors can be changed Oargerfor slower operation). li the frequency of the oscillator is to be cbanged, the 0.2 and O.I/,F capacitors can be varied and the value of RI can be increased. To change frequency range between the two notes, alter the 1.5 k (1,500) resistor.
TOY SIREN
SW1
RI 4.7k
2N2690 MU10
SW2
'---0
9V
PB
R2
39k
BATTERY
I
j
+
Cl lOOpF
EARPIECE
-FIg. 89-7
Circuit Notes This circuit can be built small enough to lit inside a toy. The circuit consists of a relaxation oscillator utilizing one unijunction transistor (2N2646, MUIO, T1S43). R2 and C2 determine the frequency of the tone. Pushing the button, SWI charges up the capacitor and the potential at the junction of R2 and C2 rises, causing an upswing in the frequency of oscillation. On releasing the pushbutton the charge on C2 will drop slowly with a proportional reduction in the frequency of oscillation. Manual operation of the button at intervals of approximately 2 seconds will produce a siren sound.
575
SIREN USES TTL GATES

Q.l .. F C l;,F O.lJ.JF
1------.---1 1-14---1111-----.---1 h
ao: O.lj.lF
4k7 4kJ
O.2pF 4k7
150H
4k7
PIN 7's av PIN 14'5 +5V
ov
4k7 4k7
L--_~220l-1I~_------..l
ELECTRONICS TODAY INTERNATIONAL 220IJF
Fig. 89-8
Circuit Notes
The siren consists of two oscillators which generate the tones. A third oscillator is used to switch the others on and off alternately. giving the two-tone effect. By changing the capacitor values different tones can be produced.
ELECTRONIC SHIP SIREN
R1 1k
R2 68k
R3 6Bk
R4 lk
Circuit Notes The circuit consists of a multivibrator (Q1 & Q2), and a low power output stage Q3. The speaker should have an impedance in the region of 40 to 80 ohms. To use a low impedance speaker, connect an output transformer from the emitter of Q3 to ground. Cl and C2 determine the pitch of the siren and the values specified will provide a tone of about 300 Hz. Quiescent current is negligible. The output at the collector of Q2 can also be fed into an amplifier input via a 11'F electrolytic, in series with a 12 k resistor.
Fig. 89-9
576
SIREN ALARM SIMULATES STAR TREK RED ALERT
,-------~_1~~~----~--------~~-o."
JUlJL
5v !O 15v
1~~ "
e.
TOO I'f
"4.7 k
eo
."
IN 914
R.
"
"R
'e. "-----------1
co
01
~F
TOTAL
SPKR
e.
471'F
Fig. 89-10
Circuit Notes The signal starts at a low frequency, rises for about 1.15 seconds to a high frequency, ceases for about 0.35 seconds,then starts rising again from a low frequency, and so on ad infinitum. YELP OSCILLATOR
.022 I'F
HEP53
Spkr
47k 331'F 15 V 47k
+
0 6-12Vdc
.r
L--vvv
....D.... 0 0
WILLlAM SHEETS
22 k
Fig. 89-11
Circuit Notes Close the pushbutton llwitch and the circuit starts the siren up-shifting to a higher frequency. Release it and the tone slides down until S2 is closed again. Tone quality is adjusted by changing the 0.022 I'F capacitor.
577
HIGH POWER SIREN

D'
+12V
DN
'"
PRESS
OUTLINE OF THE VN87AF
l ,.'
" "
., m
ov
" '"
"' ,,'"
....
.3
., ....
NOTES:
c, ''''"
Fig. 89-12
D1 IS lN4001 01 IS VNe7AF ICT IS CD40118
Circuit Notes ICIa and ICIb are wired as a slow astable multivibrator and ICIc-ICId are wired as a fast astable. Both are "gated" types, which can be turned on and off via PBl. The output of the slow astable modulates the frequency of the fast astable, and the output of the fast astable is fed to the external speaker via the QI VMOS power FET amplifier stage. "HEE-HAW" TWO-TONE SIREN
1/47400
2
1K
1/4 7400/
+
O.47,u.F
2.2K
':'
--L
1K
':'
2.2K
OUTPUT
IN914
150J,lF
+
IN914
1/47400
9 8
+
12 13
2.7K
':'
10
2.7K
':'
150,u.F
7400f4- +5V
7-GND
Circuit Notes The circuit uses two gates of a 7400 IC cross-connected to form an astable multivibrator driven by the I-pulse per second output of the digital clock IC. The hee-haw circuit has a low frequency astable modulator added to make a self-contained European-type siren. Tone and rate can be varied as desired by changing capacitor values. IT the tone is too harsh, a simple R-C filter will remove the harmonic contentthe multivibrator output is almost a square wave. With the resistor values shown, no startup problems occur; but if the 2.2 k or 2.7 k resistors are changed too much, latch-up can be a problem.
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 89-13
578
VARYING-FREQUENCY WARNING ALARM
+t2V
330 47 k 330 k ~ 330
'---
01
330 k
'vv
r--
t- 02 -I-
47
T
+
1OI'F
-'-
--
~1
---
-=L-
47
01 ,02 2N 4871 UJT
WILLIAM SHEETS
Out
Fig. 89-14
Circuit Notes The output frequency changes continuously. Low frequency oscillator (Ql) modulates high frequency oscillator Q2 and its associated timing capacitor.
579
90
Sound (Audio) Operated Circuits
Sound-Activated Switch Sound-Activated ac Switch VOX Box Color Organ Basic Color Organ
580
12V~
SOUND-ACTIVATED SWITCH ____ __________--,

~
11
4.7 k
14 V Lamp #1488
R 1 Sensi tivity 5 k pot
SCR
C103
1k
Mic .47
HEP802
~
WILLlAM SHEETS
1 MEG
01
Fig. 90-1
Circuit Notes The audio from Mic is amplified by Ql. Peaks of signal (adjusted by Rl) greater
than about 0.7 volts trigger the SCR and light lamp H.
SOUND-ACTIVATED
BC
SWITCH
A'
7
+9,
TA.
200 V1 64
A1
80 SPKR
"
4
A2
1"
Fig. 90-2
RADIO~ELECTRONICS
Circuit Notes The circuit uses a 741 op amp operating as an inverting amplifier to amplify the v{)ltage produced by an 8-ohm speaker used to detect any sounds. The feedback resistor R3, a I-megohm potentiometer used to vary the gain of the amplifier determines the sensitivity of the circuit. When SI is dosed in the (SET)llosition and a sound is applied to the speaker, SCRl is turned on. It will remain in conduction until the anode voltage is removed by opening SI, putting it in its RESET position. (Once an SCR is turned on, the gate or trigger has no control over the circuit.) As long as the SCR conducts, the Triac, TRl, will remain on and supply voltage to the load.
581
VOX BOX
R14 lOn
+9-12V
-<> R2
22K
2 ~.' 3N 0-41--+-"---4 ~
l------+---------l --::J
,C4 47 U 1 n071 6" R9 10K MIC
O';.;PUT 10
R 10
i~oo*
lOOK ~. 7 '-'- '::' 6'
03
~
KI
Cl
Rll IK
Rl2
'
'
11
;IC IN GND
, Rl
lOOK
2 '1/'4
R5 lOK
.1._
GAIN
~~K
'--<>'
C,5
22K
01
THRESHOLD
U2"
...... I 1=-4 H071
~J
C8
02 lN4001 Rl3
10K
I
i.::\
\(;.I
C7 +1:::. 4;;j<
IR.:.)
e
~~ Jr4:,P ~
lN4U01 (r'I
"'--'--0
~ ~~2222A
,
$1
OK B " # R
R4
R3 - - ;;o,C2 1K .,C3 T T100 22. ~ rlO
R6 lOOK
10
01 lN4001
01(~
MANUAL 7
DVER,RlDE
L
8
~
,
B t1i""\ HANDS-ON ELECTROMICS
Q '2N2222A
Fig, 90-3
E Q C BOTTOM VIEW
Circuit Notes The electronic circuit in the VOX Box consists of three parts: a microphone preamplifier, a Schmitt trigger, and a relay driver. Input signals (MIC INPUT terminals) to the microphone preampli1ier (UI) are amplified and fed to a THRESHOLD control (R8), When the preselected threshold voltage level is exceeded, the output of the Schmitt trigger (U2) immediately goes high, The signal from U2 is rectified and the voltage developed across C7 turns on the relay energizer transistor (Ql), That transistor action passes pull'down current through the coil of relay KI, The changing of the relay SPDT contacts can be used to either make or break an external ac or dc circuit,
COLOR ORGAN
Sl
LOW FREO
Cl
Auo<>--l~o 22~u TI'I"

IN BR
RB C2 Rl 6k8 lu 10k~
R4
Xl
C106
10k lk2
--.J
R9 3k9
!.' I5 5k6
S2
MED
FREO
TO SPEAKER TERMINALS
~---4~~~~------------~~
R2 10k
C3 20n
X2 Cl06
R6 5k6 S3
HIGH
FREQ A10 C4
R3 10k
lk 4n7 ~
R7
--.J
5k6
ELECTRONICS TODAY INTERNATiONAL
120V AC
INPUT
Fig. 90-4
Circuit Notes Three lights are controlled by the three channels. One light will pulse in response to the bass, another illuminates with mid-range sounds, and the last lights for high notes. Four level controls allow adjustment of overall light level and each channel individually. Up to 200 watts per channel can be handled.
583
BASIC COlOR ORGAN 10 to 100 W lamp
3.2n
~
WILLIAM SHEETS
soon
soon
pot
SCR C106Y
117V 60HZ
Fig. 90-5
Circuit Notes
Transfonner TI can be any matching transistor type in the range of 500/500 to 2500/2500 ohms. No connections from the SCR or its components are connected to ground. For safety's sake, keep the 117-V line voltage from the amplifier connectionsthat is the reason for using Tl. To adjust, set potentiometer RI "off" and adjust the amplifier volume control for a nonnallistening level. Then adjust the potentiometer until the lamp starts to throb in step with the beat.
584
91
Sound Effect Circuits

The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Sound Effects Generator Electronic Bongos Train Chuffer Bird Chirp Steam Locomotive Whistle WAA-WAA Circuit Unusual Fuzz Autodrum Twang-Twang Circuit Steam Train/Prop Plane Funk Box
585
8l
51 ~
01
SOUND EFFECTS GENERATOR
r -1-"'. . J
TB'
.L
0' ,01'11'1'
GI
.,
C2
I,.
Ve.c.
~ CU<
QI
RI
., 92.0K
~10\";
"1
'2
0'-
c..
Q,
S
'2.20K
..
R7
Ri
<{10k
,"V 4-o-l~~~ 11,,,

I E)('TEKNAL
IOOM..F
Q"r----.5
ILl
100'1"(
""
SPEAKER
S PK R: 1
",,0'10 Glr.. z
.<~
R.r. ZU.
"'~ R8
L3 ,S.ll(..
...
12K
'I .
GND R'iT
Is 111
-=
Circuil Notes TIlls circuit can generate a European police-car siren, bird noises, spaceship sounds, etc. In addition, it can be put to use as a doorbell, an alann, etc. The circuit consists of four parts: a binary counter, a D/A converter, a YCO, and an audio output amplifier. The initial frequency of oscillation is determined by potentiometer RH. The YCO first oscillates at a relatively low frequency, and gradually picks up speed as the control voltage supplied by the D/A converter increases. The D/A converter is the group of resistors RI-R8. When none of ICI's outpllts is active, little current will flow into the base of QI, so the YCO's control voltage will be low. As more and more counter outputs become active, base current increases,and thereby so does the YCO's frequency of oscillation. The YCO itself is composed of IC2-a, IC2-b, QI, and the timing network comprising DI-D4, Cl, RIO, and RH. The buffer amplifier is made up of the four remaining gates from IC2, all wired in parallel.
Fig. 91-1
ELECTRONIC BONGOS
SW1
R1
1M
2V
R3
,
Cl
R'
'"
'"
R1
R10
R13 '0'
R1.
'"
C3 150
OUTPUT
'"
C10 '0"
'"
C" '0"
TOUCH PLATE
TOUCH
PLATE
Circuit Notes
This circuit consists of twin-T sine-wave oscillators. Each oscillator has a filter in the feedback loop. If the loop gain is greater than unity, the circuit will oscillate. Gain is adjusted to be just less than unity. Touching the touch plate "tarts the oscillator, but the moment your finger is removed from the touch plate the oscillations will rue away. The rate of decay is a function of circuit gain and controlled by RVl (and RV3).
587
TRAIN CHUFFER
r-__~______~____~____~__~~~~+9V
lOOk Q1, 2, 3 are 2N3904 IC1 is 4011
m
J
RVl
02
'"
00
""
'M'
''''
co,
""
L----l~.;,'"',___---'
"
...
~
__
~
L---________
''''" ____
""
~
__
____
lN34
~L_
___O~
Fig. 91-3
Circuit Notes The circuit consists of a white noise generator which only switches on with the high part of the square wave output from the clock circuit. The frequency of the clock is adjusted with the 10 M pot and the output voltage of the clock is adjusted by the 100 k pot (rate and volume of chuff respectively). The 2M2 pot controls the amount of noise produced and the 1 k pot on the speaker controls the pitch of the average noise.
BIRD CHIRP
5V
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
SN76417
10
11
12
13
14
160 k'l
'00
k~!
L-----------<r------4---''00
k!!
~!
Fig. 91-4
3.9 k!l
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC.
Circuit Notes For a barking dog. the capacitor at pin 17 is changed to 15 pF to increase the frequency of the veo.
588
STEAM LOCOMOTIVE WHISTLE
-',m
m
"' '00'
'00, "'
" ',a;
"'
.... ""
'00" 'MO
" '"
Il~ .?'
"
" ,., "

" ".
I "
"' '
.. Lv
~
'T~
" '00.
, ""
.,. ""
, .. "'I ""
W.
"" ."
,,.
GJ
"" '"
--'VV'.~
k:<\
'" '"
" ,.,
11 ~'5
;;l
,,.
m
".
... "'
"' ".
~
'" ""h -1: .

'
", '"
11
"" '00,
~~an
em .,
G)
I~:---
0,
"
.. 1
co.
NOTE: ICl IS 741

01-4 ARE 2N292S
""'r
co,
ell
"" '"
.00. '"
+ '
,-
'co
~ OUTPUT TO
,~
At,'PUF,ER
... "'"
aIn
TWO_ TON, TRIlIN HORN
~~ CO; '"
1119
CHUff ER
"'"
,~.
Fig. 91-5
'" '"
CD
Circuit Notes The waveform of a steam whistle is a complex combination of white noise and an audio frequency oscillation. The noise generator is a transistor (Ql) biased into zener mode. The audio frequency oscillation is a straightforward mixture of two similar (but not identical) sine waves, which after their addition produce a more complex waveshape. The sine wave generators are twin-t oscillators. Preset RVl mixes the two sine waves so that an appropriate waveform is obtained. RV2 mixes this waveform with the white noise. Adjustment of all three presets will result in the required sound. integrated circuit [Cl is an operational amplifier used as a simple mixer/amplifier which combines the steam whistle, chuffer, (generated elsewhere) and two-tone horn sounds into one, suitable for amplification by an external amplifier.
WAA-WAA CIRCUIT
'9V
R'
470~
R'
OUTPUT '" ________ ---1~I______~10~W~I~M~PE~O=AN~C=E+

470nF
C'
R6
R7
1-5_"+_--+_~
INPUT
IOamV
cs
'] 2"F
R3
100~
Fig. 91-6
'"
1<5
er.
4 l"F
RY] lOOk
~:-t=====~~~========::==~========r-~O~V~
Circuit Notes
The waa-waa effect is achieved as certain frequencies are amplified more than others. A phase shift RC oscillator makes up the basic circuit. Negative feedback is obtained by feeding part of the signal back to the base. When adjusting initially, RV1 is turned to minimum. RV2 is adjusted to a point at which ao audible whistle appears indicating oscillation. RV1 is then adjusted till the oscillation just disappears. It should be possible to set RV2 to aoy value without any oscillation, this should also be achieved with the minimum possible value of RVl.
UNUSUAL FUZZ
rr"o-o '9V
iF;' '00
R2
3.9K 1.5M
c.
R'
'" .-..R' 47K

2N169
R6
33K
R8
8.2M
'"
C5 ,
52 ON/OFF
C3" 33pFI'V c
"
R5
56K
R9
220K
+ " Ul ' > 63
;F~i:p~
lN~
0'
f----,; - 351
2
R7
33K
V '
lK
-<>0
OUT
5,~iIi
FIg. 91-7
l~
R3 1500
R'O
,!r
Circuit Notes It seems that guitar fuzz boxes have been around since the beginning of rock, and have seen little improvement over the years. This one is somewhat different because rather than simply distorting the sound, it also pulses in step with the peaks of the waveform from the pickup because of the Schmitt trigger op amp circuit. Capacitor C2 requires some explanation. It should normally be a 1- or 2-/LF electrolytic capacitor. However, we show the value as 470 pF because it's recommended as ao experimental value giving far out effects.
590
AUTODRUM
2 megs
TEMPO
47 k
.1
-=- 912V
47 k
1.2M
I
Output
22 k
56 k
56 k
220k
.1 *
.I
PUT
33k
~ -f1]~T"1"
To foot switch
1000
1 1r-r ,f
2.2 k
150
(J
25k
Sustain
"" 5% tolerance
WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 91-8
Circuit Notes This unit generates a drum-like damped oscillation that sounds best when fed into a higher power amplifier. The beat rate may be determined by operating a foot pedal in much the same manner as for a real drum, or by means of an internal oscillator, the speed of which may be preset.
591
TWANG-TWANG CIRCUIT
82
A3
1M
10k +
.I. 11tF
G2
2N3565
""l
9V
SlA
1000 pF
Al
=
R6
~,
IN
G4
2N3565
02 .0047
J.-
01
A2
22 k
R4 1 Meg
4.7k
RS
?out
81 B
WILLlAM SHEETS
Fig. 91-9
Circuit Notes Twang is a guitar sound that more or less approximates a banjo or mandolin. The circuit produces unusual sounds from an ordinary electric guitar by cutting the bass. severely distorting the midband and highs. and then amplifying the distortion. SI cuts the effect in and out. S2 turns the unit on and off. STEAM TRAIN/PROP PLANE
100 kn
5V
5V
0.1 "F
RATE CONTROL
1 Mn
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
--'6
15
SN76477
3 39
kn
4 47
kn
10
11
12
13
14
100
kn
150
kn
47 kn
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC.
Fig. 91-10
592
FUNK BOX
SI
o~----------------------------------.
,
R3 470 k
22 k
RI
VV\I--/(
Cl
.1
>
01 01 2N3S6S
1IOut
J2
C2
I'
R2
22 k
Co
::r:
.01
[2K
-::~
R4
::~ C4 .02
47K
Re
::r:. CS
R7 ~
-=::-
1.
R6
01
47\
471
All resistors 1/4W All capacitors all ~F Mylar
10 k
c3T
47 k
-:!:-
9V
WILLIAM SHEETS
Fig. 91-11
Circuit Notes Adjusting potentiometer R7 adds extra twang from way down low to way up high. To set the unit, adjust potentiometer R4 until you hear a whistle (oscillation); then back off R4 until the oscillation just ceases. The effect can be varied from bass to treble by-R7.
593
.-
92 Square-Wave Generators
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Low Frequency TTL Oscillator Square-Wave Generator Using a 555 Timer Oscillator with Frequency Doubled Output CMOS 555 Astable Generates True Rail-to-Rail Square Waves Square-Wave Oscillator Astable Multivibrator Two-MHz Square-Wave Generator Uses Two TTL Gates Phase Tracking Three-Phase Generator Line Frequency Square-Wave Generator Three Phase Square-Wave Output Generator
594
LOW FREQUENCY TTLOSCILLATOR
DIP
-ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Fig. 92-1
Circuit Notes This oscillator uses standard inverters, one resistor and one capacitor, and has no minimum operating frequency. R and C must be chosen such that currents into the gates are below recommended operating limits and that leakage current into the gates and into C are small in comparison with the current in R also the output should be buffered 03) to prevent variations in load affecting frequency. This circuit may also be used to square up slowly changing logic levels by use of multi input gates (NANDS, NORS Etc).
SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR USING A 555 TIMER
V" (15V) R5
IOk
1
(2N2906)
R4 1501<.
Trigger
2 4
Output
D15charge
300
.T",h:..:re:.:;';::ho:.:.1"Id 6
555
)00
RI
5 7 L_--i-_-+2hi5Chiirge--'
Fig. 92-2
Circuit Notes A single timing resistor ensures that the output is a ~square (50% duty cycle) wave at all frequency settings.
595
OSCILLATOR WITH FREQUENCY DOUBLED OUTPUT
vv+
~7
2
XR-567
RL
8-
...n..ru
VOUT
J
R,
2 C
Circuit Notes The current-controlled oscillator frequency can be doubled by applying a portion of the square-wave output at pin 5 back to the input at pin 3, as shown. In this manner, the quadrature detector functions as a frequency doubler and produces an output of 2 fo at pin 8.
1 !r
e1
EXAR
Fig. 92-3
CMOS 555 ASTABLE GENERATES TRUE RAIL-TO-RAIL SQUARE WAVES

v+ (+2TO+15V)
leOk
.1
2 TR
RST
I.
+-___---'6"j THR
Circuit Notes A CMOS timer generates true square waves because, unlike the bipolar 555, its output swings from rail to rail. The component values shown give a frequency of about 400 Hz .
c~nF
C~.I,u.f
I I
.--~
cv
I
596
l'
I
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 924
SQUARE-WAVE OSCILLATOR
+10V
A,
looKll
A,
300K 11
'6
RSET
lOOK
13
Fig. 92-5
A,
300K l!
-=-
R3 lOOK 11
SllICONIX
ASTABLE MUL TIVIBRATOR
'00
.n
.'
ON -PERIOD
0"
PERIOD
,on
AOJUST
, Mn
ADJuST
.n
100
"
~n
'00
" .n
F"REOuEflC'r
RA~G[
POSI1101lo OF SI
o OOr 1"
PUL SE PERIQ.,Q
4,..,TOlm,
4e ..
~
O.Oll-'-f
O'~~
TO 10""
04m~IO'OOm~
Fig. 92-6
'I-'-F
4m~TO'~
Circuit Notes The circuit with independent control of "ON" and "OFF" periods uses the CA3130 BiMOS op amp for filters, oscillators, and long-duration timers. With input current at 50 pA, oscillators can utilize large-resistorlsmall-capacitor combinations without loading effects.
597
TWO-MHz SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR USES TWO TTL GATES

N.C ,= NO CONNECTION
1/4 SN7400N IT.I.l
N.C
0---1-...,--_..-_--0
Cl IOOpF
OUTPUT
RI
3k
C2
R2
3k
IOOpF
Circuit Notes With the values shown the circuit generates a2-MHz symmetrical square wave. Changing capacitors Cl and C2 to 0.01 I'F results in a frequency of 500 Hz. For the particular integrated circuits and power supply voltages (5.0 V), the reliable operating range of RI R2 is 2 k ohm to 4 k ohm.
N.C.o----1..._/
Fig. 92-7
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
PHASE TRACKING THREE-PHASE GENERATOR

R4
R4
R4
R4
R2
Fig. 92-8
Circuit Notes Using a single chip LM324 can, with active R-e networks, reduce the size of a 3-phase wavefonn generator, and prove useful in compact and stable 3-phase inverters. One quarter of an LM324 is used as a Wien bridge oscillator generating a pure sinusoidal wavefonn while the remaining parts of the LM324 are used as three 120 0 fixed phase shifters. Initially potentiometer R3 should be varied to adjust the loop gain of the oscillator in order to start the oscillator.
598
LINE FREQUENCY SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR
~------------------'-------~5~V~R~E~G~---t------~+5V
)-----~--.-----~~-+OV
2K2
TU
-:J: 100n
V PEAK
C1
OV~-------------T~~--------,r~~~
Q.7v
10mS
VOLTAGE AT NODE A
Fig. 92-9
Circuit Notes With only three components and a buffer. a line frequency square wave having a 1:1 duty cycle may be derived from the power supply. During the alternate half-cycle. however. A is effectively clamped to -0.7 V by D1 in the bridge which offsets the forward voltage across D2 giving an input to ICl of approximately 0 V. When A rises above + 5 V. D2 is reverse biased and remains at + 5 V. RI is needed to load the transformer secondary maintaining a distortion-free waveform at A during the time the diode bridge is not conducting. Cl although not essential may be required to remove transients.
599
g:
THREE PHASE SQUARE-WAVE OUTPUT GENERATOR
Ftg.1
Cb
FIg .
o1--.0(
0;
QO
Ck
QOI
04 >---f>o---VVIr-
,..-
,
L - 01
Q2
L-
0017
0.
...
oo
CM
R
00
01
_r-
tb~h~lt--rcr-r--r---
""- III
01
>------Wv--+
02 03
Q<I
-:::=
r---
r---
as
GO
R
Q<I
n.
I:=:l
01
01
01
0'
03
Output
Fig. 92-10
Circuit Notes This circuit gives a 3 phase square-wave output for a variable speed motor drive. Operation is straightforward, the 4017 counter is synchronously reset after six clock inputs. The six outputs are combined to give the required waveforms. It is interesting to note that although NOR gates are shown, OR gates will give effectively the same result. The circuit can be extended as shown in Fig. 2 to give pseudo-sine waves if that is required, but that will diminish the simplicity of the circuit.
93 Staircase Generator Circuits

Staircase Generator Staircase Generator Il
601
STAIRCASE GENERATOR
.. 15 Y
t 15 V
100
tin
100 KD,
------,.---- STAl RC A 'S E I OUTPUT
1101 STEP HEIGHT ADJUST
t 15 Y 60 pF -
8 2:(,6,3130
i- I
1"'914 i
15- !I!S pF FREQUENCt ADJUST
I
CHAFi'C[ COMMUTAtTING
N(TWOR";'
L=~~I
SWITCH
51 KO
.:::~;,::::,:"~~=~",,,--"",-",,,--__'~'~"~G~RATO __ ' _ _ _ _~'~TSTPESIS
tI5rr.VTO+IOV
100 It 11:
COMPARATOR
Fig. 93-1
Circuit Notes The circuit uses three BiMOS op amps. Two CA3130's are used, one as a multivibrator and the other as a hysteresis switch. The third amplifier, a CA3160, is used as a linear staircase generator.
STAIRCASE GENERATOR 11
*JDU'~,V
"
" '"
."
~4
TIOQPf
"
SElECT FO~ STEP HEIGHT 50.- ~I~ ST[P
Fig. 93-2
602
94 Stereo Balance Circuits

The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box-of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section.
Stereo Balance Tester Stereo Balance Meter
603
STEREO BALANCE TESTER
r-----~MI~----~
SOOOSOO!,A, DC
RI R2 560n
R~50
5600
LEFT
AMPLIFIER
~0050
RIGHT AMPLIFIER
Parts list ___ COMMON DI, D2-HEP R0050 RI, R2-560n, 112W Ml--400-O-500ILA de meter, zero center scale Simpson panel. Newark Electronics -S5F4BO
TAB BOOKS
INC.
Fig. 94-1
Circuit Notes The meter will show volume and tone control balance between left and right stereo amplifiers. For maximum convenience the meter is a zero-center type. Resistors are five percent or better and the diodes a matched pair. Optimum stereo level and phase balance occurs for matched speakers when the meter indicates zero. If the meter indicates either side of zero, the levels are not matched or the wires are incorrectly phased. Check phasing by making certain the meter leads are connected to the amplifier hot terminals and the common leads go to ground.
604
STEREO BALANCE METER
+9V,16mA
" A4 lOOk Cl 10u+ 01 OA91 AI 10k
'0.03 TIl209
D4 IN4001
A5
39k l 2 ICI 741 4 02

OA91
O---J
7 6
~+
C2 IOu A2 Ik
AS
A3 10k 620A
D5
C3 IOu
IN4001 A6 39k ..... 06

:-.... TIL209
OV
Fig. 94-2
Circuit Notes To use the indicator. switch the amplifier to mono mode and adjust the balance control until both LEDs are equally illuminated. The amplifier is now in perfect stereo mode balance.
605
95 Strobe Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Simple Strobe Safety Flare Disco-Strobe Light
606
SIMPLE STROBE
C1
10u
C4
10u
D2
-+1HI-+
AC
~
D1
~
C2 10u
+
___
R1 20k
~o
51
To get a single flash. for example for photographic use. connect this circuit between A and B In the mam CircUIt. With R2 m the position for slowest flash rate (le no flashes!) S2 Will provide the deslfed slrigle flash. Alternatively J1 can be used to allow the camera '$ flash contacts to trigger the strobe
L5 (El' 4
'" WRES
R2 1M
R4 100k
,(
11
J1
R3 1M2
C3 220n
"'\ 11 r'" T1
Fig. 95-1
Cl
Circuit Notes Initially the neon and xenon lamps are not conducting and act like a very high (almost infinite) resistance. Capacitors Cl and C4 in conjunction with Dl and D2 form a voltage doubler circuit, which can charge C2 up to about 300 Vdc after several ac cycles. Voltage increases as current is supplied through RI and R2. Neon bulb I1 will all of a sudden start to conduct when the voltage across C3 reaches I1' s ioni2ation potential. While conducting, the resistance of the bulb will be relative low. Due to this sudden conduction, a pulse of current will pass through the primary of Tl. The turns ratio is such that about 400 V will be developed at the secondary. The xenon tube is similar to the neon bulb in that it produces light when the gas ioni2es and conducts. However, it is designed so that an external signal (the 4 kV on the metal ring around the tube) ioni2es the gas and initiates the conduction. When Fl conducts, it discharges C2. At this point, the whole cycle starts over again. The purpose of R2 is to vary the rate at which C3 charges, and hence the repetition rate of the strobe.
.."
SAFETY FLARE
Ql
RI loon 01 lN4002 R2 330n
TCG-152 SK-3041
b
Ill)"
T1
Jl
Cl 100 +
LEOl
CHARGE
'-----t---1~-II----I~ OFF 81 ~ ON
~ VOC
'-----t~0_'
IL2)
ANODE
--,.
~
+
LEOl
n ~~ FLAT
CATHODE
U1 TCG152
SHORTER LEAD
SCRl Cl0601 OR Cl0701
02 lN4005 R3 1.2MEG
C3 .022
"
IL3) C2
4
12 TRIGGER PULSE
3
SCRl Cl060 1 Cl070 1 a NEl
"
2
FXl
" 4
R4 5MEG
C4 .0027 01,02
~==~F===
I"
Fig. 95-2
608
Circuit Notes When SI is on, power is applied to an oscillator composed of Q1, RI, Cl, Ll, and L2, Coil L1 is the primary winding of n, and L2 is the feedback winding, When Q1 turns on, its collector current saturates T1's ferrite core, That, in turn, removes the base drive to Q1 through L2, Transistor Q1 then turns off. As the field around Ll and L2 decays, Q1 will eventually turn on again, and the cycle repeats over, and over. Transformer T1 is a step-up, ferrite-core, potted-type unit whose secondary-winding (L3) output is rectified by D2 and filtered by C2. That capacitor charges up to around 250 to 300 volts, which is applied to the resistor divider composed of R3 and R4, along with the flash tube FXl. Capacitors C3 and C4 will charge up to around 200 and 100 volts, through R3 and R4, respectively. Flash rate is adjustable via R4. When the charge on C4 gets to around 100 volts, neon lamp NE1 fires discharging C4 into the gate circuit of silicon control rectifier SCRl. The SCR1 turns on discharging C3 into the primary winding of trigger-pulse transformer TZ. Transformer TZ is another step-up, pulse-type unit providing an output of around 4 kW across transformer TZ's secondary winding. The xenon gas inside FX1 is ionized and a bright flash is emitted. Finally, C3 quicldy discharges through U, and the cycle repeats over, and over.
609
DISCO-STROBE LIGHT
,----i
R1
L1 50010W
C1 1.F35Vdc
CR2
CR1
1N4004
1N4004
C2
R3 1 M ~---vvv-.....--i~---.
680 k R2
4EX 5811 CR3
Trigger X Former T1
L1
WILLIAM SHEETS
Fig. 95-3
Circuit Notes This circuit uses a voltage doubler CRI and CR2 to obtain about 280 V dc across Cl. C2 and R3 form a voltage divider to obtain a de voltage to change C3 thru R2. When CR3 fires, a high voltage is generated in n, firing Ll.
610
96 Switch Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Solid State Stepping Switch AC-Static SPDT Switch
611
SOLID STATE STEPPING SWITCH

+9 VOLTS
1 24
ICI = 4011
{:t~rrl---t---11
IC2.
,.
,.
8
l'
~~~323
21 22
4515 IC3 5
OUTPUTS SWITCHED
L~r.r~_~L-J.23
12
4 18
IN SEQUENCE TO DIODE MATRIX
,.
19
11
11
FOR OPPOSITE POLARITY

OUTPUT USE 4514
1 24
b
IC2 11~~~32 1C4': "'.!,.-+-__ '1 10 1h: 12 3 451. foJ 9 4518 13 21

" 22 23 12
OUTPUT SWITCHED IN SEQUENCE
} TO DIODE MATRIX
DENOTES L.E.O. CONNECTION fOR READOUT IDENT
-----
seT 1HZ
SOLID STATE STEPPING SWITCH
Fig. 96-1
Circuit Notes This circuit was designed to make switching of a 48-channelmobile transceiver safe to operate while mobile. The oscillators allow for single-stepping or a scanning function. The scan facility allows for stepping through all 48 channels to check for occupancy or otherwise, and each output is indicated with an LED and labeled accordingly, so at-aglance indication is possible. With full scope of this circuit it is possible to scan 256 channels and by adding more 4 to 16 line encoders etc. you could switch to any required number. AC-STATIC SPOT SWITCH
MT2
)
120V 60Hz
LOAD
NO. 2
11
R,
100
Q,
100
MT,
100 100
O,Ip.F
j
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Q
100
2
0. I JL F
MT2
11
LOAD NO. I
Fig. 96-2
Circuit Notes An SPDT solid state relay is shown. When voltage is applied Ql will turn on, activating load #1, because the full line voltage appears across Q2, supplying gate current through RI. When SI is dosed, Q2 turns on removing the gate drive from Ql and activating load #2.
612
97 Tape Recorder Circuits

The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Tape Recorder Interface Tape Recorder Position Indicator/Controller
613
TAPE RECORDER INTERFACE

Input data ... _-..:..;...--_ A ~+ C 22nF
Coder
ICIIl
Tape recorder
Clock 2400 H, "~---'-""B-Decoder

Play output
Record input
IC1/3
VK t-'1/47"KI.-........2 V.2 ........-I
ICl/2 2.2MO
+5V
2~nF
47K .~~~-+-~ ~~+5V
Tape recorder
75K
Todart
H
..
E Fig 1
+5V
417"s
Data
Fig 2
Fig. 97-1
Circuit Notes The interface allows data to be saved on an ordinary tape recorder at a speed of 2400 bit/s. The serial stream of data Fig. 1 (A) is coded with a clock of 2400 Hz (B), by means of XOR gate IC 111. Logical "high" and "low" appear as shown in Fig. 2 (C). These impulses are lowered in amplitude and feed into the record input of a low cost tape recorder.
614
TAPE RECORDER INTERFACE, Continued.
During the playback, pulses (D) are amplified with CMOS gate IC 112 connected as a linear amplifier, and providing a TTL level signal shown in (E). On both positive and negative transitions IC 114 forms short pulses as shown in (F) (approx. 50 I's) that triggers one shot IC2. A monostable one shot pulse width is adjusted to be l4 of bit length (310 I's). A change from "high" to "low" in a coded stream generates a "low" pulse width of one bit cell. The same is for change from' 'low" to "high" that generates a "high" pulse of the same width. During this pulse one shot latches the state of line E inD type flip-flop IC3 (G). When a stream consists of multiple "ones" or "zeros," the one shot is retriggered before it comes to the end of the quasistable state and the state of the flip-flop remains unchanged. The original data stream is available at the output of the flip-flop (H). Z80 the DUART that receives these pulses is programmed so that the receiver clock is 16 times the data rate (38.4 kHz).
TAPE RECORDER POSITION INDICATOR/CONTROLLER
INTERSIL
Fig. 97-2
Circuit Notes This circuit is representative of the many applications of up/down counting in monitoring dimensional position. In the tape recorder application, the LOAD REGISTER, EQUAL, and ZERO outputs are used to control the recorder. To make the recorder stop at a particular point on the tape, the register can be set with the stop at a particular point on the tape, the register can be set with the stop point and the EQUAL output used to stop the recorder either on fast forward, play or rewind. To make the recorder stop before the tape comes free of the reel onrewind, a leader should be used. Resetting the counter at the starting point of the tape, a few feet from the end of the leader, allows the ZERO output to be used to stop the recorder on rewind, leaving the leader on the reel. The 1 M ohm resistor and .0047 I'F capacitor on the COUNT INPUT provide a time constant of about 5 ms to debounce the reel switch. The Schmitt trigger on the COUNT INPUT of the ICM7217 squares up the signal before applying it to the counter. This technique may be used to debounce switchclosure inputs in other applications.
615
98 Telephone-Related Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Speech Activity Detector for Telephone Lines Scramble Phone Musical Telephone Ringer Dual Tone Decoding Automatic Telephone Recording Device Telephone Ringing Detector, Frequency and Volume Controlled Music on Hold Circuit Monitors Blinking Phone Lights Phone Light High Isolation Telephone Ringer Remote Telephone Monitor Plug-In Remote Telephone Ringer Telephone Hold Button Telephone Blinker Telephone "In Use" Indicator Tone Ringer Tone Ringer II Speakerphone Speech Network Programmable Multi-Tone Telephone Ringer
616
SPEECH ACTIVITY DETECTOR FOR TELEPHONE LINES

Vcc
R2
750K
R3
4
2
1M
8
Active 3 IC1 high output
Analogue or digital In~ut signal
C1
a-fT'--'
4.7J..1.
Tr1 : 2N 2218 Tr2 . 2N 2905 IC1 . NE 555
"
"
Fig. 98-1
Circuit Notes The circuit can be used in telephone lines for speech activity detection purposes. This detection is very useful in the case of half-duplex conversation between two stations, in the case of simultaneous transmission of voice and data over the same pair of cables by the method of interspersion data on voice traffic, and also in echo suppressor devices. The circuit consists of a class-A amplifier in order to amplify the weak analog signals (in the range 25-400 mW of an analog telephone line). The IC! is connected as a retriggerable monostable multivibrator with the Tr2 discharging the timing capacitor C3, if the pulse train reaches the trigger input 2 of IC! with period less than the time: Thigh
= 1.1 (R3 C3)
The output 3 of ICl is active ON when an analog or digital signal is presented at the output and it drops to low level, Thigh seconds after the input signal has ceased to exist.
617
a>
co
SCRAMBLE PHONE
1 PHONE LINE
SIAL
1.2K
}
R9
12.. F _C6
T3
~
8n
R71K ~tIF
T2
~
8n
fYYVYY
~~2~ij
3 lCI 4 6 RI lK, CI
Olj-tF 4.7K 4.7K
1.2K
R3 IK
r lc
,
'"
3
R4 lK
R5
R6 C4
47"r \I.
1.2K I
SIC
RS
r"'
--=- 81
lK
Bl-9volt battery, Eveready 216 or equiv. 82-3-volt battery. two AA penlight cells in series Cl, C2-0.01 vF polystyrene copocitor, 100 VDC
02-PNP ttansi'lor, 2N:J63e, HEP-716 .1, R3, R7, RS-l000.ohm, V:-walt re,istor R2-2,200ohm 'lAwatt resistor
pat~nliomeler
Circuit Notes IC-l and the associated circuitry form a stable audio tone generator that feeds a buffer amplifier, Ql and Q2. The tone output is taken from the emitters of the transistor pair to supply a carrier voltage for a balanced modulator made up of four diodes-Dl through D4-and T1 and T2. If the two transformers and the four diodes are perfectly matched (which is almost impossible to achieve and not necessary in any case) no carrier will appear at the input or output of T1 or T2. In a practiCal circuit, a sInall amount of unbalance will occur and produce a low-level carrier tone at the input and output of the balanced modulator. A telephone carbon mike and earpiece are connected to the low impedance winding of 'n, with a three volt battery supplying the necessary mike current. Trim potentiometer R4 is used to make a fine frequency adjustment of the oscillator so that two scrambler units may be synchronized to the same carrier frequency. Rg limits line current to 25 mA.
or better C3, C4-47 uF electrolytic capacilor, 2.5 VDC or better C5-4.7 uF electrolytic capocilor, 25 VDC or better
C6-2 uF paper or mylor copoci'or, 50 VDC or better 01 to D4-Diode. IN914, HEp156 ICI-lntegrated circuit, Signetiu N5741K or equiv. Ql-NPN tronsistor, 2N292 ... HEP72.4
R4-IOOO-ohm
.5, .6-.4,700-ohm, '2-walt resistor

R9-limit line current to 2SMA /see text) 51"',511, 51C-Phone hook switch (see tul) T1 to T3-Smoll tron~istor audio Irnnsformer;
B-ohm primary, 1,200-ohm center 'oped ,ec ondory. Misc.-SurpHn telephone (see lafayette, Radio Shade, EDI, I!IA colol09s), boltery holders, hardware, knob, wire, solder, etc.
TAB BOOKS, INC.
Fig. 98-2
+9V
R1 20 k pitch
MUSICAL TELEPHONE RINGER Circuit Notes

Tune Select
switches
R3 100 k
R2 4 k
b
F
52
0 4 3
E
C1
O.1~F
,Y 2
C2
20 19 IC1 AY-3-1350
47
pF
1sh
15
R13 330 k
-=R6 27fl
31121 61 7111
~5PEED
+ 9V
R7 3.3 k
R14 1 Meg
D1 IN34A
C3
10l1F
D3
IN34A
R15
A19 27 k
47k +9
The heart of the circuit is ICI, General Instrument's AY-3-1350 melody-synthesizer IC. IC2 is a TCMl512 telephone ring detector IC that is powered by the telephone line. The circuit'!; operation begins when IC2 senses a ring pulse on the telephone line. The detector (internally) rectifies the ring signal and then outputs a voltage to relay RYl (an SPST reedtype relay with 5 volt contacts), causing its contacts to close. That pulls pin 12 (the ON/OFF control) of ICI low Oogic "0"), causing it to output a signal-the selected tune-to transistor amplifier Q2. The amplified signal is then fed to the speaker. The melody continues to play either until the tune is finished (at which time !Cl returns to the standby mode), or until someone takes the phone off the hook. Taking the phone off the hook discontinues the ring pulses to IC2, which opens RYl. When the relay contacts open, pin 12 of ICI goes high, returning the circuit to the standby mode to wait for the next incoming phone call.
v
_ ,B { <>--' lele~hone ... _ To

line
-=I (.--,\/,vv-J
C4
An
2.2 k
05
1,F
--vvvA16 33 k
MPS3904
'"
~
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 98-3
ID
DUAL TONE DECODING
.--- 3
'c
LT-'...;..'-T'-+J' '~
"
<>-11INPUT
I 4 Il005
L
"
'. eoos
TONE 1
OUTPUT
DECODER
.f-<---
Figure lA. Detection 01 Two Simultaneous or
Sequential-Iones
y
,
"
, , , , ,
TONE 2 DECODER
~PUT
'1
, ,
TONE 1 DECODER
",'1
Figure
"
le
620
r
4
RL
-3 5
TONE 1
DECODER
6
,''1
C3
20K
R,
~
.::s 2:-
0--) fINPUT
I
3
;~::"
vI-=- -=4 TONE 2 DECODER
It
,
C2
.v
R,
,' 1C3
OUTPUT
R,
I
EXAR
'-
IT
Figure 18
12
Fig. 98-4
Circuit Notes
Two integrated tone decoders, XR-567 units, can be connected (as shown in Fig. lA) to permit decoding of simultaneous or sequential tones. Both units must be on before an output is given. R1C1 and R'lC'l are chosen, respectively, for Tones 1 and 2. If sequential tones (1 followed by 2) are to be decoded, then C3 is made very large to delay turn-off of Unit 1 until Unit 2 has turned on and the NOR gate is activated. Note that the wrong sequence (2 followed by 1) will not provide an output since Unit 2 will turn off before Unit 1 comes on. Figure 1B shows a circuit variation which eliminates the NOR gate. The output is taken from Unit 2, but the Unit 2 output stage is biased off by R2 and CR1 until activated by Tone 1. A further variation is givenin Fig. 1C. Here, Unit 2 is turned on~by the Unit 1 output when Tone 1 appears, reducing the standby power to half. Thus, when Unit 2 is on, Tone 1 is or was present. If Tone 2 is now present, Unit 2 comes on also and an output is given. Since a transient output pulse may appear at Unit 1 turn-on, even if Tone 2 is not present, the load must be slow in response to avoid a false output due to Tone 1 alone. The XR-267 Dual Tone Decoder can replace two integrated tone decoders in this application.
621
AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE RECORDING DEVICE

--<
TELEPHO NE LINES ----< GREEN RED
_c
-; Z1 15 V R3 220 R4 100 k R2
V'
r---.Q2
I~ P1 TO REMOTE
THIS PLUG IS WIRED FOR A RADIO SHACK CTR 43 RECORDER OTHER UNITES MAY REQUIRE PLUG WIRES ASSEMBLY BOARDON TO BE REVERSED P2 TO AUXILIARY
---------Il
39 k
' -_ _ _ _ _~oN' __
~r
I@C1'01 C2 .01
R1
100 -k --1
CONNECT TO ANY CONVENIENT PHONE JACK OR WHEREVER ACCESS TO WIRES IS AVAILABLE. MAY BE CONNECTED VIA ALLIGATOR CLIPS, PLUGS OR MODULAR PLUG.
TAB BOOKS, INC.
SPECIAL NOTE SEE TEXT
Fig. 98-5
Circuit Notes
The device is a dc switch that is normally on via the forward biasing of Ql via R3. Ql now clamps Q2 into a forward state by biasing its complement well into a saturated state via R4. The dc switch is turned off via a negative voltage above that of the zener (Dl). This voltage is usually about 48 and is the on-hook value of the phone line. This negative voltage overrides the effect of R3 and keeps the circuit "off." When the phone is off the hook, the 48 volts drops to 10 volts, that is below the zener voltage of Dl and R3 now turns the circuit on. The audio signal is via attenuator resistor RI and dc isolating capacitors Cl, C2. The device is a high impedance switch that isolates the recording controlled device from the phone line via some relatively simple electronic circuitry. It requires no battery and obtains power for operating via the remote jack that in most recorders is a source of 6 volts. When clamped to ground it initiates recorder operation. The unit interfaces with most portable cassette recorders providing they contain a remote control jack.
622
TELEPHONE RINGING DETECTOR, FREQUENCY AND VOLUME CON,TROLLED
"
6.>
250>
'"
~-+---1---t--14
680
2M
LECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 98-6
Circuit Notes With the 555 timer connected as a multivibrator and an opto-isolator, a remote speaker can be driven. MUSIC ON HOLD
To
TEL.EP~ot-JE
Llt-JES
RI
Circuit Notes
1.2k
LED
\\
Z"'(I< TI
JI
AUDIO
r--~ Z=8.rl
"""""<vvn
INPUT
With this music-on-hold device, you can answer the phone in one room, place the caller on hold, and then pick up the phone again at another location. When you pick up the phone the second time, you automatically deactivate the music-on-hold feature and can continue your
conversation.
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 98-7
~23
CIRCUIT MONITORS BLINKING PHONE LIGHTS

3109V
IM
2_2 k
FI\'W~:::.2N:.;4870
an.
SPEAKER
2N3904
PHCTrODARLlNGTON IS. lN5777 ~H-"",,~.-+-I

I p.F 25V
150 k
PHOTODARLI NGTON
~r;,
6)
~
TAPE
FLEXIBLE TWISTED PAIR
Fig. 98-8
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Circuit Notes
A 2N5777 photo-Darlington cell picks up blinking light from the transparent plastic buttons. The power is switched ON and OFF by a hi-beta 2N3904 transistor. The circuit's 9 V battery can be left continuously connected. Less than a micro-ampere is drawneven With normal, office ambient light and the phone lights not flashing. For noisy locations, the tone can be made louder with an output transformer (ratio of 250:8) or a 100 ohm speaker that replaces the 22 ohm resistor in the output.
624
PHONE LIGHT
11 117 VAC LAMP
D1
R2 33K
+------l..-~'M_i'___,
TO TELEPHONE LINE 117 R1 2.2K
lN2069
r------- ---,
I
LEo1
PHI
T2
TRIAC
IISOLATOR
,
I
G
L... _ _ _ _ _ _ _
IOPTO
T1
VAC
-+--~_
Fig. 98-9
Circuit Notes When the phone does ring the triac is triggered into conduction by a signal applied to its gate (G) through a bilateral switch (diac) , D2. The triac acts as a switch, conducting only when a signal is present at the gate. HIGH ISOLATION TELEPHONE RINGER
22 k
+ Red Phone
line
1N4003 +
10 ~F 150 V
- Green
1 2 see text - . battery: 2 AA cells in series (3 V)
All resistors Y4 W, 10%
Fig. 98-10
Circuit Notes
The diode rectifies the ringing signal to supply the operating power to the audio relaxation oscillator made up of L1, L2, RI, R2, and C. Moreover, L2 together with QI acts as an opto-isolator, totally isolating the telephone line from the rest of the circuit. The oscillator audio frequency is optically coupled to the photo-Darlington which drives Q2 and thus the speaker. The 10 I'F capacitor is not large enough to smooth the ringing ripple completely. This results in frequency modulation of the audio oscillator giving it an attention-getting warble.
625
~
r,;;U.;o;;WiTcHi---'
REMOTE TELEPHONE MONITOR

RY2~2
'---'
N.C.
l2V+
I ,,.
N.O. -v----, RY2-1
,
IN,914
N.D.'
an
-"----'
N.C.
470n
1 MEG
lK!
RY1-l
N.D.
lN914
.1
2N2646
Q~
47K
lOon:
200/
16V
1 MEG
VOLUME
=
r;---------SOUND SWITCH 2
I- - ,
I I 1
0.1
20 SEC DELAY N.C.
3 MIN DELAY
aO:SPEAKER
22K
33/J-F
IOK
lN914
N.D. RY3-1
lK
SOLENOID"
5K
XTAL MIKE2
lOOK
+
0.01 I
I I I I
117VAC
12V
RY'
lN914
0-----0---,.
I
1
~
RY4-2
L ___ 2NJ904' _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...J I

RADIO-ELECTRONICS
Fig. 98-11
Circuit Notes
This device monitors sounds in home or office when a telephone is called from a remote location.
PLUGIN REMOTE TELEPHONE RINGER

F1
114 AMP
1I 47)lH
Cl 11200 NP
D2 lN4004 01
,8<
S2000K53
FIG
02
1/CW
lN27D
D)
lN4004
03
>IV
C2 lOO/JOV
CS .01
R7 1K
RY1-1
C3
.047
1C1
R3
RI
470K D4
IOK
lN4004
05 lN4148 ~+'4-....J
ELECTROL
RA314410SX
~MrHONE l~~K
o--"I\/Ir---'
'~
HP50824370
RING DETECTOR
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, ,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _J
PlI
60Hz 117V
r---~t=======~~;===========:;A;L~L~R;E;S1;ST;O;.;S========~----~SP .8
330K
!nw, 10% ALL TRANSISTORS
MPS3393
AC
F1
1K D1 lN4004
R3
Cl
20DV
lOOK
RI
AMP AC
1/'
.11
220K
1"'
.1/200V
C2
.01
Cl
'p'
22 MEG
CS
300jiH
L1
10K
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
D'
1.5 MEG
RIO
Fig. 98-12
Circuit Notes This device consists of a ring detector connected to the telephone line. When the telephone rings, the ring detector impresses high-frequency pulses on the ac power line. A receiver placed anywhere on the same power line detects these pulses and emits an audible tone in synchronization with the telephone signal. 627
TELEPHONE HOLD BUTTON

01
lN4002
r-~-d> ,", LED 1 ,.y . . 120mAI

RI 1.5K
GREEN
TO
TELEPHONE
+;-
LINE
-=RED
SI
SCRl~~_]
----
INOI
R2
IK
~
seRl
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
SK3638 or Cl06Y
(bottom view)
CG A
Fig. 98-13
Circuit Notes
The on-hook (no load) voltage across the red-green wires will be 48 V or slightly less when all telephones are on-hook (disconnected). When any telephone goes off-hook the load current flowing in the telephone causes the voltage to fall below 5 volts dc. Although the telephone hold is connected across the red-green wires, silicon control rectifier SCRl is open; so there is no current path across the telephone line. To hold the call, depress normally-open switch SI and hang up the telephone (still depressing S1). When the phone goes on-hook the red-green voltage jumps to 48 volts dc. Since switch SI is closed, a positive voltage is applied to SCRl's gate, which causes SCRl to conduct, thereby completing the circuit across the telephone line through Dl, LEDl, RI, and SCRl. The current that flows through those components also causes the L-ED to light up-indicating that the telephone line is being held. The effective load across the-red-green wires is the 1500 ohm value of RI, which is sufficient to seize the line while limiting the current through the LED to a safe value. When the telephone, or an extension, is once again placed off-hook the red-green voltage falls to 5 volts or less. But diode D1 has a normal voltage drop-called the breakover voltage-of 0.7 volts, and the LED has a forward drop of 2.0 volts. Excluding the voltage drop across RI there is a maximum of 2.3 volts available for SCRl, which is too low to maintain conduction; so SCRl automatically opens the hold circuit when any telephone goes off-hook.
628
TELEPHONE BLINKER
TIP (GRE
nn+>--AI 10K 01
non
Cl
39pF
A2
TAl
12
lN4002
RING
(REal
P1
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
117VAC
Fig. 9814
Circuit Notes
A small neon lamp is triggered into conduction by the telephone's ringing voltage, passes just enough current to activate the LED in optocoupler Ul, which in turn triggers the 6-A Triac that controls 12-a 117Vac lamp or bell. (Capacitor Cl is necessary only when the circuit is used to drive a bell.) The lamp will flash off-andon at the ringing rate, which is normally around 20 Hz. If a 117 Vac bell is used, connect it in place of the lamp.
TELEPHONE "IN USE" INDICATOR

TIP
)>-----------------TELEPHo-NE
LINE IN
TO TElEPHON-(S)
RING
LEDl
Fig. 9815
Circuit Notes
This circuit functions as a line-current sensor and can be connected in series with either of the phone lines. For the circuit to indicate an "in use" status for all phones on a single line, it must be connected in series with the phone line before, or ahead of all phones on the line. Since the power for the circuit is supplied by the phone company, a circuit could be added to each phone as an offhook indicator.
629
TONE RINGER
C3
1 -;lE-~-~ ~,
'-~rt--+-"-J.
R1
113 2K
:::4 5
I I
TELEPHONE
CIRCUIT
{TIP>--~
~1
r--DI06~BiiIDGE----~~-
I 7
':'
RI-
RF----l
I
~~CT~FIER ~ ACl
RING)r----
\
1
:
i _~
~
'!'
L..-;.I . ., ., ..,., II-IL7 ..

l
1'4~ nv
-
I
OV :-
UI TELEPHONE - - TQNF RINGER
'
AC2 SCR TRANSIENT
-~
l
THRESHOLD 1
COMPARATOR
MC34012 1 MC34U122 MC34017-3
CLAMP.l
0 9
~ C2
1_
001
I~
OSCILLATOR
112 I
~ 68K
: I
L... _ _ _
WARBLE
~~U~N~ ~V!EE! _ _ _
~~~~:~~>~ ~ -~RT1i.:fE'ZO~ELECTRIC -t
BUFFER
.
':'
i
I
SOUND TRANSDUCER
[R~
G_ :.. ___ __ ...J
I I
':'
HANDSON ELECTRONICS
Fig. 98-16
Circuit Notes
The MC340l2tone-ringer chip derive&its power by rectifying the ac ringing signal. That signal is normally at 20 Hz and measures between 70 and 130 volts rms. It uses that power for the tone generator and to drive the piezoelectric transducer. The sound that is produced is a warble that varies between two frequencies. fo/4 (fo - 4) fo/5. The clock. or fundamental. frequency. fo is generated by a relaxation oscillator. That oscillator has R2 and C2 as its frequency setting components providing a selectable range of 1 kHz to 10 kHz. Selecting different values for R2 andlor C2 changes the clock frequency. which in turn varies the warble frequencies. The MC34012 chip comes in three different warble rates at which the warble frequencies (.,14. .,15) are varied. These warble rates are fo/320. fo/640. or fo/160 and the different chips are designated as MC34012-1. -2. and -3. respectively. For example: with a 4.40 kHz oscillator frequency. the MC34012-1 produces 800 Hz and 1000 Hz tones with a 12.5 Hz warble rate. The MC34012-2 generates 1600 Hz and 2000 Hz tones with a similar 12.5 Hz warble frequency from an 8.0 kHz oscillator frequency. MC340l2-3 will produce 400 Hz and 500 Hz tones with a 12.5 warble rate from a 2.0kHz oscillator frequency.
630
TONE RINGER 11
8.2 kO
.47.F 250 V
R
9 1V 1
8 470
1.0.F
0----+----'
2 "7"'N-------1 3 XR-T8205 6 10 kO
~
T1
H""'--l4 160 kG
,---01
390 kO
0.0027.F 2200
L--4~~~
________
~~
__
1300 0 8 0
IIDJ
SPEAKER
+
2
8 7 6170kO 5
29F
XR3 T8205 150 k 4
-~
15.F 35 V
'--,
~~
A
== TDK - .0022.F == ,~SD161216
(""
47,iF
25 kO
EXAR
Fig_ -98-17
Circuit Notes
The XR-T8205 Tone Ringer is primarily intended as a replacement for the mechanical telephone bell. The device can be powered directly from telephone ac ringing voltage or from a separate dc supply. An adjustable trigger level is provided with an external resistor. The circuit is designed for nominal 15 volt operation.
631
SPEAKER PHONE
"
T3'
~
11'0."...
"
~.0047...
22
33J.'ff
3.31<
='''' "
"' b
uo.
~~+-~~---G'~,~
,f
~h
3301<
"
"L...____________________..J~
I
;::;;;;:;
L-____________
-=~~~~~=----------' ~ ~ 330
c~
L2
(~
II
EXAR
Fig. 98-18
Circuit Notes
The XR-T6425 Speakerphone IC makes it possible to carry on conversation without using the handset, while the user is talking into a microphone and listening from a loudspeaker. It is ideal for hands-free conference calls. The XR-T6425 contains most of the circuits to eliminate singing and excessive background noise.
632
SPEECH NETWORK
R9
lOK
0 DTMF
r - - - - 1 f - - - - + - - - - - + - - ' - - O MUTE
C7
R2
2.2K
2200p
CB
01
Cl 2200p
Rl 5.6K
C2
033
SP
L1
L2
200
:0:
R13
D2
IN4004 27K
Rll
ECM
4.7K
ZDl 15V
Cll
01
ClD
22
R12
03'
D4
C9 22D
(RESISTOR
n,
CAPACITOR ,..F)
EXAR
Fig. 98-19
Circuit Notes The XR-T5995 Speech Network is a monolithic integrated circuit specifically designed for implementing a low cost telephone circuit. It is designed to use an electrodynamic microphone and electromagnetic receiver to replace a carbon microphone and telephone network hybrid.
'" ~
PROGRAMMABLE MULTI TONE TELEPHONE RINGER
BZwoiG -C68 ~
01
C2
R3 1001<
~nF
03
BAX18
D~
G ~I
~ C
l1
Sill'
1N5060
AlB
G
R2
~ BZX79
i 3mH
-C6VB
Z,
BIA
tv,
C1 R1 ,.
(SW)
*~
-=
v.IVH =
0'
17V
C4lC
56pF
680k
V DD
TS1 T52
PCD3360
RR1 RR2
/.
ITR1
C3
10~F
..
FD.
~ DSC
Vss
OPT
TONE
'I
BST72
-! 1~'F
Fl
FH
OM
IS1
IS2 FOE
365k
R'
I ..
=d
11
I~
=3.4V
V~LI)
Transformerless Electronic Ringer With PCD3360 and a Loudspeaker
01
BZW03
-C68
C2
10nf
R3 lOOk
RS
lOOk
03 8ZX79
-C6V8
lN5060
AlB (
(h)
C3
10J-lf
C4 56pF
Voo
OM
TSl
TS2
RRl AR2 OPT
R2
~
Cl I'll 1k
(SW)
I I
1"01
TRl
680k
PC03360
BIA-1~
OSC
I VSS FL FH 151 152
R4
TONEW
'""
FOE
;
BST 72 I
365k
[:::J PXE TRANS-
DUCER
PCD3360 Ringer With PXE Transducer

SIGNETlCS
Fig. 98-20
Circuit Notes
Two BST72 transistors provide an output voltage swing almost equal to the voltage at C3. Pins ISl and IS2 are inoperative because DM = HIGH. Volume control is possible using resistor Rv.
III
99 Temperature Controls
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Temperature-Controlling Circuit Temperature Control Low-Cost Temperature Controller Precision, Linearized Platinum RTD Signal Conditioner Low Power Zero Voltage Switch Temperature Controller Heater Element Temperature Controller Dual-Time Chip Controls Temperature While Monitoring Liquid Level Temperature Alarm Adjustable Threshold Temperature Alarm
636
TEMPERATURE-CONTROLLING CIRCUIT
"
+ 5 Vdc
)",
13
0.1
To Computer
10~
22K
----11
R3
5K
10K 0.1
~
01
22K
o1
2.2K
'/.
~
12K
R,
Operational Amplifier 2
lK
~
Teledyne 6021 (or EQulyalentl SOlldStale Relay 4
Power Supply
"
470 (Determined EmpIrically tor 25C Calibration)
Electrical
Heater
3
R2
Vrel
Gate
1.2K
Thermal
SWitch
NASA
Notes
Fig. 99-1
"" ""
'"
Circuit Notes The circuit switches the current to an electrical heater on and off to maintain the temperature of a room at 25 O.5C. The temperature sensor is a thermistor which provides a differential input (for reduced noise) to an operational amplifier. A 5 kilohm potentiometer is used to adjust the set point through a voltage divider; a value of 2.17 kilohms yields the 25C setting. A second operational ampIilier is connected as an inverting differential-input comparator. The output of operational amplifier 2 controls the electrical heater through a zero-crossing solid-state relay. A transistor/transistor-logic (TIL) gate adjusts the output to the proper level for the relay. A thermal switch is placed in series with the heater and the ac supply for safety in case of thermal runaway. A third operational amplifier monitors the output of the thermistor, providing a signal to a computer for data logging.
All capacllances are In ",F The temperature set pOint Increases or decreases With R3. whiCh IS set al 217K for 25 'C The upper and lower triPPing voltages at operational amplifier 2 are gi\len by Vlr1p = Vref ~ EO Rt"(R! + R2), where Vref := the reference voltage and EO tne output voltage of the opera110nal amplitler
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Vec (5 - 15 VOC) 0
~
2.7 k
" " ~Li2

~~
5.000 @25C
'"
~
5.0 4.0 3.0

2.0
OUTPUT
2N2360A~c.,;..-l
6.8 k
5e' ~ ~
I.L I.L Il..
wa: 1.0
F ERROR ZONE ___ L 1 _________ _
w -1.0
-3.0
-4.0
0J-:20:;-~~::~;-_"_;:=Q::._"_~~~_:=_:i:_::;,-~,,,:~_~,::,20:::-"TEMPERATURE (F)
TIMER
SIGNETICS 555
AA
ifi -2.0
-5.0
I
7
a.
NOTE:
All resistor values are in ohms.
4.03 k 1.04 "F (POLY CARBONATE) TC6980S
!!:!
~
: w
I-
"
SIGNETICS
b.
OP03400S
Fig. 99-2
Circuit Notes
A couple of transistors and a thermistor in the charging network of the 555 type timer enable this device to sense temperature "nd produce a corresponding frequency output. The circuit is accurate to within 1 Hz over a 78F temperature range.
LOW-COST TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
TEMP IM R4
ADJUST
R3
2.5k
r-I NEON I PILOT:

I L __
NOMINAL
-,
_J
55'
+--~-16
3
I I I I
120VDC
'f---+
RI L5k
'------1
6.
TRIAe
IOO~F
Te
200
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
IW
Fig. 99-3
Circuit Notes
The internal comparator of the 555 timer, combined with a thermistor, makes a lowcost temperature controller. Resistor R2 sets the temperature trip point.
638
PRECISION,LlNEARIZED PLATINUM RTD SIGNAL CONDITIONER

2501<."
1Qk"
(LINEARITY CORRECTION LOOP)
"k
LTtQ09 2.5V
+5V
274k"
"k ZEAO
ADJUST
O.l,1<F
r -'hlTCW43 ,
OV-4V =OC_400C
L
'" : '" UJ
I
0 Q5C
I
I
I
\8870
I
I
R, 10011 at DOG
Rp"" ROSE MOUNT 118MFRIO "I % FILM RESISTOR
806k"
-=
"
13
o---f4I-+.J
L ____ ...J
TRIM SEOUENCE
SET SENSOR TO O'G VALUE ADJUST ZERO FOR QV QUT SET SENSOR TO 100C VALUE ADJUST GAIN FOR 1,OOOV OUT SET SENSOA TO 400~C VALUE ADJUST LINEARITY FOR 4 DOOV OUT REPEAT AS REQUIRED
Fig. 99-4
Circuit Notes The circuit provides complete. linearized signal conditioning for a platinum RTD. This LTCI043 based circuit is considerably simpler than instrumentation or multi-amplifier based designs, and will operate form a single 5 V supply. Al serves as a voltage-controlled ground referred current source by differentially sensing the voltage across the 998 phm feedback resistor. The LTCl043 section which does this presents a single-ended signal to AI's negative input, closing a loop. The 2 k O.IJ'F combination sets amplifier roll-off well below the LTCl 043' s switching frequency and the configuration is stable. Because At's loop forces a fixed voltage across the 887 ohm resistor, the current through Rp is constant. At's operating point is primarily fixed by the 2.5 V LTl009 voltage reference.
639
LOW POWER ZERO VOLTAGE SWITCH TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
IN5061
'20' W
HEATER
"'!iOOW
HIIAAI PCI
I.
'"
4.711,
AI5U
Ill,
220VAC
033021
50'
TEMP SET
10'
'"
"
o POWER
rQLOAD
1~g~~AGE
r
MAINS
AC
I. ____________________________
D
OAD
SOUOSTATE
SWITCH
:
~I------~
TIME
~-------'
20% POWE"--IRH----r---~~~-+-~_;.:_T TO LOAO
v~
60'. POWER TO LOAO
P
V
\
I If\
I
\
-----V
1\ /\ vvv.
V\ 1\ 1\ I \TV
I
\
'\
lOO.,. POWER rOlOAD -1~~_f~\__f--\_~~t_.f~t_.r~r_f_~

(PMAX)
I I
IN GENERAL. PlO.l,O PM4X
(t)
Fig. 99-5
GENERAL ELECTRIC
640
Circuit Notes The "zero voltage switching" technique is widely used to modulate heating and similar types of ac loads where the time constant associated with the load (tens of seconds to minutes) is sufficiently long to allow smooth proportional modulation by time ratio control, using one complete cycle of the ac input voltage as the minimum switching movement. Despite its attractions, the traditional triac-based ZVS is virtually unusable for the control of very low power loads, especially from 220 volt ac inputs due to the triac's reluctance to latch-on into the near-zero instantaneous currents that flow through it and the load near the ac voltage zero crossover points. The circuit side-steps the latching problem by employing a pair of very sensitive low current reverse blocking thyristors (C106) connected in antiparallel; these are triggered by a simple thermistor modulated differential amplifier (Ql, Q2), with zero voltage logic furnished by an HllAAl ac input optocoupler. With the NTC thermistor TH calling for heat, transistor Ql is cut off and Q2 is on, which would normally provide mntinuous base drive to Q3, with consequent triggering of either SCR, or of SCR 2 via SCRl, depending on phasing of the ac input. Note that when the ac input voltage is positive with respect to SCR 2, SCR 1 is reverse biased and, in the presence of "gate" current from Q3, behaves as a remote base transistor, whose output provides via blocking diode CRI, positive gate trigger current for SCR 2. When the ac input polarity is reversed (SCR l's anode positive), SCR 1 behaves as a direct fired conventional thyristor. "Trigger" current to SCR I, however, is not continuous, even when TH is calling for heat and Q2 is delivering base current to Q3. In this situation, Q3 is inhibited from conduction by the clamping action of PCl, an HllAA photocoupler, except~during those brief instants when the ac input voltage is near zero and the coupler input diodes are deprived of current. Triggering of either SCR can occur only at ac voltage crossing points, and RFI-Iess operation results. The proportional control feature is injected via the positive feedback action of capacitor CM, which converts the differential amplifier Q1, Q2 into a simple multivibrator, whose duty cycle varies from one to 99 percent according to the resistance of TH. Zener diode Z1 is operational, being preferred when maximum immunity from ac voltage induced temperature drift is desired.
641
HEATER ELEMENT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER HEATER LOAD
(2)
(2 )
120V 60HZ AC SUPPLY
22K IW.
TEMP SET
SC260C
TRIAC ( 2)
GE MOV VARISTOR VI50 LA20A S1"2
2.2K
!
NOTES:
Triac - SC260E
GENERAL ELECTRIC
IOK
1. ThermistorNational Lead type 10101, or equivalent.

2. Component values for 220V operation: Resistor - 47K, 2W GE-MOV Varistor ~ V275lA20A
Fig. 99-6
Circuil Notes The circuit can control up to 6 kW of heating, with moderate gain, using a 25-amp triac (SC260D). Feedback is provided by the negative temperature co-efficient (NTC) thermistor, which is mounted adjacent to the environment beingtemperatnre controlled. The temperature set potentiometer is initially adjusted to the desired heating level. As the thermistor becomes heated by the load, its resistance drops, phasing back the conduction angle of the triac, so the load voltage is reduced. The ST2 diac is used as a back-to-back zener diode. Its negative resistance region in its E-I characteristic provides a degree of line voltage stabilization. As the input line voltage increases, the diac triggers earlier in the cycle and, hence, the average charging voltage to the 0.1 ~ capacitor, decreases.
642
DUALTIMER CHIP CONTROLS TEMPERATURE WHILE MONITORING LIQUID LEVEL

4 ReseT
114
V"
Out 5
R.
1k
1 Discharge
I(~
15V
K.
R"
39k
556
Dual timer
L--
"
vel probes
C~.07I'F
l2
Threshold fflggcr
4-
~------------
1-0 Reset
10 k
OR
DR.
k
aT 10')
330
lM
r
13
~.
oE
ro;
gE -
Out 9
Threst10ld Dlschargp.
Temperature (
~ensor
_~
;~_OOll'f
8 Trigger
10 k
1%~"
J:
Circuit Notes
Fig. 997
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
One-half of a 556 dual timer monitors the temperature of a liquid bath, controlling a heating element that maintains temperature within 2C over a 32 - 200C range. The other half monitors the liquid level, disconnecting the heater when the level drops below a preset point.
TEMPERATURE ALARM
lOA 2009
0.22 !"FF . . 1Sk
--+!.....f .-.
10
B2V
2
180
B1!
22
+
5
R,
2.2M R, 390k
Circuit Notes The mute pin of this dual audio amplifier is used as the trigger for a one chip high temperature alarm. One-half of the IC is connected as an oscillator and the other boosts the audio alarm outputs to IOW.
NTe
K154 50k
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 998
643
ADJUSTABLE THRESHOLD TEMPERATURE ALARM
NTC TCRl
6V-9V 10 k
2N3906
...I..
~
10 k
+
Ql 2N3904 SONALERY
TEMP SET R2
IC1
+
4.7k 741
1;2
4558
TLD 81 ETC.
6 V-9 V
W1lllAM SHEETS
Fig. 99-9
Circuit Notes When RI increases as temp decreases, the output of lel goes positive, turning on Ql. QI conducts and causes Q2 to conduct, turning on the audible alarm. The threshold is set with potentiometer R2.
644
100
Temperature Sensors
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Dual Output, Over-Under Temperature Monitor Temperature Sensor and DVM Interface CUrvature Corrected Platinum RD Thermometer Thermocouple Amplifier with Cold Junction Compensation 5-V Powered, Linearized Platinum RTD Signal Conditioner HI LO Temperature Sensor
645
DUAL OUTPUT, OVERUNDER TEMPERATURE MONITOR
eRe
FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS

r--+-"l
I I
GE AI4A
LOAO/#-:; ' \ SCR

CRI ___
GE
TI 1 el06Y SUPPLY 0"_ PRIMARY II~-----H\ 'f,t-'-'-'-;C'ORCi:,--1
At +
-*:-
GE AI4A
GE AI4A
LOAn" I
,
L
NOTES: (I) TI: 6.3 FILAMENT TRANSFORME-R
_".J,
(2) T: GE2D052 THERMISTOR
~ ~II~ ~~CONOARY
R3 5K
/,R.,2 1.5K
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 1001
CIrcuit Notes This circuit is ideal for use as an over-under temperature monitor, where its dual output feature can be used to drive HIGH and LOW temperaturejndicator lamps, relays, etc. T1 is a 6.3 volt filament transformer whose secondary winding is connected inside a four arm bridge. When the bridge is balanced, ac output is zero, and C5 (or C7) receives no gate signal. If the bridge is unbalanced by raising or lowering the thermistor's ambient temperature, and ac voltage will appear across the SCR's gate cathode terminals. Depending in which sense the bridge is unbalanced, the positive gate voltage will be in phase with, or 180 out of phase with the ac supply. If the positive gate voltage is in phase, the SCR will deliver load current through diode CR1 to load (1), diode CR2 blocking current to load (2). Conversely, if positive gate voltage is 180 out of phase, diode CR2 will conduct and deliver power to load (2), CR1 being reverse biased under these conditions. With the component values shown, the circuit will respond to changes in temperature of approximately 12C. Substitution of other variableresistance sensors, such as cadmium sulfide light dependent resistors (LDR) or strain gauge elements, for the thermistor shown is permissible.
646
TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND DVM INTERFACE
9V=
PP3
IC1
I
6
AD590
+ 11'ArK
100k
CWt
SPAN
VRI
R1 12k
O.2V INTERNAL REF
01Vrc
2k
R2
1k
OV
12k R3
ZERO ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
VR2
CW
Fig. 100-2
Circuit Notes The DVM gives a direct indication of the temperature of the sensor in degrees Centigrade. The temperature sensor IC1 gives a nominal 1 pA per degree Kelvin which is converted to 10 mV per degree Kelvin by R1 and VRl. IC2 is a micropower. Iow input drift op amp with internal voltage reference and amplifier. The main op amp in IC1 is connected as a voltage follower to buffer the'sensor voltage at Rl. The second amplifier in IC1 is used to amplify the .2 V internal reference up to 2.73 V in order.to offset the 273 degrees below OC. The output voltage of the unit is the differential output of the two op amps and is thus equal to 0.01 V per C.
647
CURVATURE CORRECTED PLATINUM RTD THERMOMETER
15V
2.7k
~
R4 70 k' 1%
2.8 M
. ':f
/'
RI 3.5 k 0.1%
100mV/oC
HI
1%
Cb
3
R2 70 K
~~ LM329B
6.95V
8 kl 1%
5 kt
88 k 1%
20k
350 1%
NON
'~
AI 6
LM308, + 8
R6
C
R7 70 K 1%
200 t
ZERO
GAINL
1 kl 1%
-i
1.SM 1%
;lo-
r---
UN EAAITY
R3 1.8k 1%
-:r
IOOPF
2k 1%
...
r----
--,
R' 1.75 k 1%
PLATINUM.J,SENSOR
1 i : :
I
I
I
I
I
100 0 AT
O'c
~~ *'00
2
105 k 1%
A2 LM308
r- -
PF
'70k an d 2 k should track to 5 ppmlC "Less Ih an 5 ppmlC drift tLess th an 100 ppm/oC drift tThese r&slstors should track 20 ppmlC
L___
-~ 2
I I I
1k 1%
30k 1%
TUH/5609-23
Fig. 100-3
Circuit Notes
This thermometer is capable ofO.OI C accuracy over -50C to + I50C. A unique trim arrangement eliminates cumbersome trim interactions so that zero gain, and nonlinearity correction can be trimmed in one even trip. Extra op amps provide full Kelvin sensing on the sensor without adding drift and offset terms found in other designs. Al is configured as a Howland current pump, biasing the sensor with a fixed current. Resistors RZ, R3, R4 and R5 form a bridge driven into balance by AI. In balance, both inputs of A2 are at the same voltage. Since R6 = R7, Al draws equal currents from both legs of the bridge. Any loading of the R4/R5 leg by the sensor would unbalance the bridge; therefore, both bridge taps are given to the sensor open circuit voltage and no current is drawn.
648
THERMOCOUPLE AMPLIFIER WITH COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION
R9 10k
Ok 2W
OUTPUT _ 10 mV/oC
R8
lEAO -15V
ADJUST
'"
v,Ok 2W
0.01
0.01
COLD JUNCTION LOCATE NEAR LM334
J-TYPE THERMOCOUPLE
Fig. 100-4
Circuit Notes Input protection circuitry allows thermocouple to short to 120 Vac without damaging the amplifier. Calibration: 1. Apply a50 mV signal in place of the thermocouple. Trim R3for VOUT ~ 12.25 V. 2. Reconnect the thermocouple. Trim R9 for correct output.
649
s-v POWERED,
LINEARIZED PLATINUM RTD SIGNAL CONDITIONER
ALL RESISTORS ARE lRW-MAR-6 METAl FILM RATIO MATCH?M 200K '" 0 01'10 TRIM SEQUENCE SET SENSOR TO C VALUE
Fig. 100-5
M11IJS I ZERO FOR DV OUT
HI LO TEMPERATURE SENSOR
}
R2
L1
WILLlAM SHEETS
L3
Fig. 100-6
Circuit Notes Resistors RI, R2, and the two 2.2 k resistors form a bridge circuit. R2 is a thennistor, and RI sets the temperature at which L2 lights. Lower or higher temperatures light LI or L3 to indicate an over- or under-temperature condition.
650
101
Temperature-to-Frequency Converters
Temperature-to-Frequency Converter Digital Temperature Measuring Circuit
651
TEMPERATURE-TO-FREQUENCY CONVERTER
RT COLD JUNCTION TEMPERATURE TRACKING
lN4146
TYPE K THERMOCOUPLE 41 4!'V/"C
1 Bk'
4700
33<
lOOk
I0
- 5V
150k"
3300pF
74C04
6M
74C04
74C04
74C04 820pF
74C04
.;v
74C04 3Jk
O '
50k
60'C TRIMf
OUTPUT QHz-600Hz
+5V - 5V
DoG-WC
,
O.ll'f
3k
4
75~
1k'
LT1004
1 ;V
CuLD JUNCTION BIAS 487!l' 301k'
lOOW"
1870'
'001% FILM-TRW MAR-ij
"TRW/MlR/51 + 120 RT'- YELLOW SPRINGS INST #44007
100DF '" POLYSTYRENE
tFOR GEN~RAl PURPOSE IlmV

FULl-SCAL~)
10-81T A TO D, REMOVE
THERMOCOUPLE-COLD JUNCTION NETWORK, GROUND POINT A, AND DRIVE LTC1052 POSITIVE INPUT
Fig. 101-1
Circuit Notes AI's positive input is biased by the thermocouple. AI's output drives a crude V F converter, comprised of the 74C04 inverters and associated components. Each V - F output pulse causes a fixed quantity of charge to be dispensed into the 1 I'F capacitor from the 100 pF capacitor via the LTl043 switch. The larger capacitor integrates the packets of charge, producing a dc voltage at AI's negative input. AI's output forces the V - F converter to run at whatever frequency is required to balance the amplifier's inputs. This feedback action eliminates drift and noulinearities in the V - F converter as an error item and the output frequency is solely a function of the dc conditions at AI's inputs. The 3300 pF capacitor forms a dominant response pole at AI, stabilizing the loop.
652
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE MEASURING CIRCUIT
R4
8.3K
02
.5
R1910
Input R210K
.,
741
R66ao
Q1
R3
5
11
V
Output
121
Q
U>
'K
3
C11Ol-'T
Z.O
5.1
03
R10
A2' JI.n!-4..J
'..;k1-.~~'< 741 20K .......0-11"2_0
Circuit Notes The output voltage of a thennocouple is converted into frequency measured by a digital frequency meter. The measuring set connected with Ni-NiCr thennocouple permits you to measure the temperatures within the range of 5C - 800C with 1C error. The output thennocouple signal is proportional to the temperature difference between the hot junction and the thennostat kept at OC, it drives the voltage-to-frequency converter changing the analogue input signal into the output frequency with the conversion ratio adjusted~in such away, that the frequency is equal to the measured temperature in Celsius degrees, e.g., for 350C the frequency value is 350 Hz.
R12 10K
.3
6 R16 10K R15 680
741 3 +
R131M
PS
lK
R14 500K
"2
DAY 19
01,02.03.05,
Fig. 101-2
653
102
Theremins
Electronic Theremin Digital Theremin
654
ELECTRONIC THEREMIN
C3
100
+'---~-----------------------------------------<~S1J
Rl
=
1/6 4049 1/6 4049
lOOK
C2
.1
B1 iI 9V I
5 Ul.a
8
>,4__. -__"l3 Ul.b
..l.
LORl
1
Fig. 102-1
Cl .02
Circuit Notes This circuit has the CMOS IC doing double-duty performance. The first two inverters operate as a digital audio oscillator; the third operates as a low-gain linear audio amplifier. As the intensity of the light falling on photoresistor LD RI increases the oscillator's frequency increases; similarly, the illumination falling on photoresistor LD R2 determines the volume level from the loudspeaker: The more illumination the more volume. If you flop and wave your hands between the two photocells and a light source, a special kind of electronic music will be produced.
655
DIGITAL THEREMIN
SI
.L'"
i
: +9
.m
R6
+
C4
220
I
l
..l..
OUTPUT
C2
TO AUDIO [.r-~
AMPLIFIER HANDS-ON ELECTRONICS
51pF
Fig. 102-2
Circuit Notes The CD4069 or 74C04 hex inverter-is used aS1l fixed-frequency oscillator centered around 100 kHz. U2 contains the variable frequency oscillator and balanced modulator. The CD4046 is a phase-locked loop and R3, R4, and C2 determine the center frequency of the on-chip oscillator. The antenna forms a parallel capacitance with C2, which allows the frequency to be shifted several kilohertz by bringing a hand near the antenna. R4, the ZERO control, allows the variable oscillator to be set to the same frequency as the fixed oscillator. When the difference frequency is below 15 Hz, it is below the lower frequency limit of the ear. By setting both oscillators to the-same frequency, the Theremin remains silent until the performer brings his or her hand near the antenna. The oscillators are mixed by an exclusive OR gate inside the 4046. That gate acts as a digital balanced modulator, which produces the sum and difference frequencies. The output of the gate is then ac coupled by C3 to LEVEL control R5 and an output jack for connection to an audio amplifier or stereo receiver.
656
103
Thermometer Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Digital Thermocouple Thermometer Remote Thermometer Electronic Thermometer Differential Thermometer Basic Digital Thermometer, Kelvin Scale with Zero Adjust Centigrade Thermometer (OC-lOOC)
657
DIGITAL THERMOCOUPLE THERMOMETER
TELEDYNE SEMICONDUCTOR
Fig. 103-1
Circuit Notes This digital thermocouple thermometer uses one active component and 15 passive components. With this circuit, both type J and type K thermocouples may be used. The type J will measure over the temperature range of 10 to 530 0 e with a conformity of 2e. The type K will measure over a temperature range of ooe to 1000o~e with a conformity of 3 e.
658
REMOTE THERMOMETER
10M"
8 ;>M"
5V
-'w,--.M,......M.-10 C TRIM
20~'
?Ok"
00'
5V
.,% FILM RESISTOR

M =O.,A-l00.,A MOVEMENT
'"
lN933
lk" 20k"
lN933
+-,N.---(MMH
lN933 lN933
IOk'
UN$HIHOED CONNECTING WIRE
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY
Fig. 103-2
Circuit Notes The low output impedance of a closed loop op amp gives ideal line-noise immunity, while the op amp's offset voltage drift provides a temperature sensor. Using the opamp in this way requires no external components and has the additional advantages of a hermetic package and unit-to-unit mechanical uniformity if replacement is ever required. The op amp's offset drift is amplified to drive the meter by the LTCI052. The diode bridge connection allows either positive or negative op amp temperature sensor offsets to interface directly with the circuit. In this case, the circuit is arranged for a + 10C to +40C output, although other ranges are easily accommodated. To calibrate this circuit, subject the op amp sensor to a + 10C environment and adjust the 10C trim for an appropriate meter indication. Next, place the op amp sensor in a + 40C environment and trim the 40C adjustment for the proper reading. Repeat this procedure until both points are fixed. Once calibrated, this circuit will typically provide accuracy within 2 C, even in high noise environments.
659
ELECTRONIC THERMOMETER
Twisted
+9V +9V 7 3 + 2 C1 IC1 741 R3 20 k R2

5.1 k
M1 0- 1ma
Wire
I
or
Similar
.----{.'I:')------,
R4
861 6
R1 15 k
-9 V
n
2 R5 2.2 k
+
(See text)
4 IC2 741
6
U2 D1
IN914 or
15
-=-
-100 D
R7
similar
R6 5k
-9 Volts
-9V
+9 Volts
RADIO-ELECTRONICS
LL-jfC-rL r 1'- - -I~

B1 B2
Fig. 103-3
Circuit Notes An inexpensive electronic thermometer is capable of measuring temperatures over
a range of from - 30F to + 120F. A diode-connected 2N3904 transistor used as the temperature sensor forms a voltage divider with RI. As temperature increases, the voltage drop across the transistor changes by approximately -1.166 millivolts-peroF. As a result, the current at pin 3 of IC1, a 741 op amp with a gain of 5, decreases as the temperature measured by the sensor increases. A second 741 op amp, IC2 is configured as an inverting amplifier. Resistors R5 and R6 calibrate the circuit. Calibration is also straightforward. When properly done, a temperature of - 30F will result in a meter reading of 0 milliamps, while a temperature of 120F will result in a meter reading of 1 milliamp. Divide the scale between those points into equal segments and mark the divisions with the appropriate corresponding temperatures. The calibration is completed by placing the sensor in an environment with a known temperature, such as an ice-point bath. Place the sensor in the bath and adjust R6 until you get the correct meter reading.
660
DIFFERENTIAL THERMOMETER
+8
5MO -
#1
v+
(8 V
SOka
~
741
10kO
minI
v-
+
-
#2
-V
10kll
INTERSll
'*
Circuit Notes
Fig. 103-4
The 50 k ohm pot trims offsets in the devices whether internal or external, so it can be used to set the size of the difference interval. This also makes it useful for liquidlevel detection (where there will be a measurable temperature difference).
BASIC DIGITAL THERMOMETER, KELVIN SCALE WITH ZERO ADJUST
v+
ICUlQ69 ~ 1.235V ~
l-5kl1
121.kD
7.SIdl
ZERO
ADJ 5kO / 1.000V
SCALEr;R~EF:;'-"" ~ADJ HI
AEF LO
1 kD, 0.1%
402
15kD
26.1kO
ICl7106
'-----l~NO~r_v'__::J _ _....I
IN La
:JO 7
+---------1
~AD500
INTER51L
vCircuit Notes
Fig. 103-5
This circuit allows "zero adjustment" as well as slope adjustment. The ICL8069 brings the input within the common-mode range, while the 5 k ohm pots trim any offset at 218 K (-55C), and set the scale factor.
661
CENTIGRADE THERMOMETER (OC-100C)
,---.....----------0
"0510
1kn ZERO sn
+15V
10mVr'C
Hlkn
10ka 0,1%
1000
2<).n
FULLSCAlE
ADJUST
10kn
2.7315Y
I
I
INTERSIL
Fig. 103-6
Circuit Notes The ultra-Iow bias current of the ICL7611 allows the use of large-value gain-resistors, keeping meter-current error under Yz%, and therefore saving the expense of an extra meter-driving amplifier.
662
104
Tilt Meters
Tiltmeter Indicates Sense of Slope Differential Capacitance Measurement Circuit illtra-Sirnple Level
663
TILTMETER INDICATES SENSE OF SLOPE
6
20K toOl"'
, ['::'-- 7
511 K
LM1QCl
,.-----!
+c1'
5K
1K
200
1K
OUTPUT TO DIGITAL VOLTMETER
l
SENSOR
)
Fig. 104-1
NASA
Circuit Notes Electrodes are immersed in an electrolyte that remains level while the sensor follows the tilt of the body on which it is placed, more of one outer electrode and less of the other are immersed and their resistances fall or rise, respectively. The resistance change causes a change in the output voltage of the bridge circuit. The sensor forms the two lower legs of the bridge, and two 1000 ohm metal film resistors and a 200 ohm ceremet balance potentiometer form the two upper legs. In preparation for use, the bridge is balanced by adjusting the balance potentiometer so that the bridge output voltage is zero when the sensor is level. The bridge input voltage (dc excitation) is adjusted to provide about 10 millivolts output per degree of slope, the polarity indicating the sense of the slope. This scaling factor allows the multimeter to read directly in degrees if the user makes a mental shift of the meter decimal point. The scaling-factor calibration is done at several angles to determine the curve of output voltage versus angle.
664
._-------
DIFFERENTIAL CAPACITANCE MEASUREMENT CIRCUIT

REFERENCE EL ECTROOE
SENSE ELECTRODES
lOOk~,
300 kHl
Your
o 1 ~F
56 kQ
DIFFERENTIAL CAPACITANCE MEASUREMENT CIRCUIT
SENSE ELECTRODES
IALUMINUM TAPE)
TO
ELECTRONICS
'--+--Pl---"~
LIQUID BUBBLE (ALUMINUM TAPE)
REFERENCE ELECTRODE
NASA
Fig. 104-2
Circuit Notes A bubble vial with external alurninum-foil electrodes is the sensing element for a simple indicating tiltrneter. To measure bubble displacement, a bridge circuit detects the difference in capacitance between the two sensing electrodes and the reference electrode. Using this circuit, a tiltrneter level vial with 2 mm deflection for 5 arc-seconds of tilt easily resolves 0.05 arc-second. The four diodes are CA3039, or equivalent.
665
ULTRA-SIMPLE LEVEL
MEflCURY
"
I (\)
}S2
LED I
LE02
'/
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
Fig. 104-3
Circuit Notes This electronic level uses two LED indicators instead of an air bubble. If the surface is tilted to the right, one LED lights; ifit's tilted to the left, the other LED lights. When the surface is level, both LEDs light. It uses two unidirectional mercury switches, 51 and 52. The unidirectional mercury switch has one long electrode and one short, angled electrode. The pool of mercury "rides" on the long electrode and makes contact between the two electrodes if the unit is held in a horizontal position.
666
105
Time-Delay Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Hour Time-Delay SaropJing Circuit Time Delay With Constant Current Charging Low-Cost Integrator Multiplies 555 Timer's Delay Simple Time-Delay Circuit Using Two SCRs
667
HOUR TIME-DELAY SAMPLING CIRCUIT
START
+2BV~-r-----~--,
10M
15K
I.
(
IDOOM
200
02 :;..., 2N6027
IN4443
(GE74F01B-50S)
'",
30K
5fJF
~
100
PULSE OUTPUl
(GE74FOIB-~51
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 105-1
Circuit Notes The circuit lowers the effective peak current of the output PUT, Q2. By allowing the capacitor to charge with high gate voltage and periodically lowering gate voltage, when Ql fires, the timing resistor can be a value which supplies a much lower current than lp. The triggering requirement here is that minimum charge to trigger flow through the timing resistor during the period of the Ql oscillator. This is not capacitor size dependent, only capacitor leakage and stability dependent.
TIME DELAY WITH CONSTANT CURRENT CHARGING
~2N5457
~~OMn
I
Fig. 105-2
OUTPUT PULSE
MOTOAOLA INC.
668
LOW-COST INTEGRATOR MULTIPLIES 555 TIMER'S DELAY
!15V,VCC
RI
lOOk
4
TRIG
~ Y
,
555
TIMER
Vc
7V'
OUT ~
C; ~
'f;tl
R3
lOOk
R2
'80
I R
,,0
ID
CONVENTiONAL
8
0:::
~I
>'
~~
u ~
?:i~
~STEP-CHANGE' VREF
-0 -
10
TIME - 5e-t
ELECTRONIC DESIGN
Fig. 105-3
Circuit Notes
Long delay times can be derived from a 555 timer with reasonably sized capacitors if an integrator circuit is used. The capacitor's charging time with an integrator circuit can be much longer than with a conventional 555-timer configuration.
669
SIMPLE TIME-DELAY CIRCUIT USING TWO SCAs
+ 24 V
.{
lOk[l
R2
~OM[l
~
1 Kn
390n
Rl '
ib ~C
2N4853 27[l
:~SI
N.O.
C /.
CE ;::: ::::: 10 }J.F
RI
l ~!1
'2
,
510n A
1 kn
'2N5061
~.:
Value of Rl must be low enough to allow hold current to flow in the SCR.
MOTOROLA INC.
Fig. 105-4
670
106
Timers
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Long-Term Electronic Timer Timer with Alarm Timer CirCUit PUT Long Duration Timer Programmable Voltage Controlled Timer Low Power Microprocessorl'rogrammable Interval Timer Precision Elapsed Time/Countdown Timer Adjustable AC Timer .2 to 10 sec.
671
LONG-TERM ELECTRONIC TIMER
Unregulated 400 Q Vcc (Regulated) Timer Power 0 - -......" " ' - -...- . . . . . : . : . - - " - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12to15V
IN4740A for 10 V
or
IN4742A for 12 V
$2 (StoP)
I
NC
: :=C1 0.1
12
IJF
Reset
16
CD.06Q Oscillator/Counter
A,
33K
r.17
3
Ai
10K 1%
11
1 jc,
NASA
rh
A,
Rs = 2Rx 10 10R x
Fig. 106-1
Circuit Notes The timer includes an oscillator and a counter in an integrated circuit. The timing interval equals the oscillator period multiplied by the number of cycles to be counted. The oscillator frequency depends upon resistor RS and capacitor CX. The number of oscillator cycles to be counted before the counter output changes state is determined by the selection of the counter output terminal. shown here as pin 3. The interval can be set anywhere in the range from fractions of a second to months; it is given by T ~ 0.55 Rs Cx2 n, where n is an integer determined by the counter-output selection. Operation is initiated by the closure of momentary switch Sl (or by a command signal having a similar effect). This grounds one side of relay Kl, thereby activating the relay
672
To Power Source for Load
-----------+--<!.-N-O'-O--- RB
2.2K
II~
----.L.-
NO
-n.-r-LQ-ad-1
Q, 2N3645
NO
Ls, I
(Start)
and causing the closure of the switches that supply power to the timer and to the load. The turn-on of VCC at the timer is coupled through Cl to the counter-reset terminal, thus resetting the counter. The initial reset voltage transient is then drained away through RI to permit normal operation. During the first half cycle of the counter operation, the counter output voltage <at pin 3 in this case) is low. This turns on transistor Q1 so that relay K1 latches on, enabling the timer to continue running even though switch SI has opened. The oscillator runs while the relay is on. When the number of oscillator cycles reaches the limit, the counter output voltage at pin 3 goes high. This turns off Q1, thereby turning off the relay and returning the system to the original "power-off" state to await the next starting command. The timing cycle can also be interrupted and the system turned off by opening normally-closed switch S2.
673
~
.v
TIMER WITH ALARM

Clock frequency 1,638 to 129.6 HI
"
>
',60
:
22k
On (reset)
,\:2 ,
O.OO22jJF
,
3
>lk
71--
~3
1 2
21" i
1
Ra9'
16 Ql0 15
I.
CD4060A
555 1
2
'I--
.;.~Ok
:~
,.'"F:~
"5
13 12
11
6
)
~r
10
9
;>150k
>150k
"2
"Bleeptone M
390.:.
ov
Fig. 106-2
Circuit Notes The circuit has two ranges: 10 secs to 5 mins and 1 min to 80 mins. It can be powered by a 9-V battery. With the LED connected as shown a reasonable frequency of flashing occurs throughout the range of operation. This circuit is reset when 52 is closed.
TIMER CIRCUIT
,---
- 24 V
\
RE )
10k
R,
1110M
"
#1 MeAn1
390
1 "f
Rl'
Circuit Notes
CE
r
10
~F
Cc
#2 MeRn1
~S1 '.0
510
A
R,
27
VALUE OF Rl MUST BE LOW ENOUGH TO AllOW HOlD CURRENT TO FLOW IN THE seR
After one cycle of operation, SCR 1 will be on, and a low value of voltage is applied to the UJT emitter circuit, interrupting the timing function. When push button Sl is pushed, or a positive going pulse is applied at point A, SCR 2 will turn on, and SCR 1 will be turned off by commutating capacitor CC. With SCR 1 off, the supply voltage will be applied to RE and the circuit will begin timing again. After a period of time determined by lhe setting of RE, the UJT will fire and turn SCR 1 on and commutate SCR 2 off. The time delay is determined by the charge time of the capacitor.
MOTOROLA
Fig. 106-3
PUT LONG DURATION TIMER
t-
20 Vdc
01 2NS457
I
lie!
/
R3 2
nM
~VMP~133
Cl 10 JiF MYLAR
R2
100
~PUT
-~
R4 2M
Circuit Notes The time circuit can provide a time delay of up to 20 minutes. The circuit is a standard relaxation oscillator with a FET current source in which resistor R1 is used to provide reverse bias on the gate-to-source of the JFET. This turns the JFET off and increases the charging time of Cl. Cl should be a low leakage capacitor such as a mylar type.
MOTOROLA
Fig. 106-4
675
PROGRAMMABLE VOLTAGE CONTROllED TIMER

+5 V
1
820
RI 5k"
(16)
Vee
TRIG GER INP UT
(11 )
TRIG
r-'-
(10)
REseT
L
I
f-
=r----
MR
5k"
(12)
MOO
ip~'''~"
I)-
-- - - - - - - - - - - - - TIME BASE
- -
(131
R/e
3.-3 kn
O.l~F"
Cl::
r:
19)
GND
L0-----Fig. 106-5
- - -- -
fl OPENCOLLECTOR OUTPUTS
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Circuit Notes
The ~240 may easily be configured as a programmable voltage controlled timer with a minimum number of external components. The modulation input (pin 12), which allows external adjustment of the input thresh()ld level. A variable voltage is applied from the arm of a 10 k ohm potentiometer connected from VCC to ground. A change in the modulation input voltage will result in a change in the time base oscillator frequency and the period of the time base output (TBO). The TBO has an open-collector output that
676
I
VOLTAGE
~---------
NOTE: FLIPFLOPS 26 ARE NOT SHOWN
-, I
I , ,'I
I
"""'"'Vrh
(~
R,
'0 kn
>-
OU TPUT
VOLTAGE REGULATOR (15)
J...
s
I
I
,
T Q1"
'-s
17
T Q07
0..........:;;
20 kn
I I
-----------
..
~ ~.
(8'
-.J
0, (2) 00 111
TBO (14)
O~
V-.
.....
47 kn
is connected to the regulator output via a 10 k ohm pull-up resistor. The output of the TBO drives the input to the 8-stage counter section. At start-up, a positive trigger pulse starts the TBO and sets all counter outputs to a low state. The binary outputs are open-collector stages that may be connected together to the 10 k ohm pull-up resistor to provide a "wired-OR" output function. This circuit may be used to generate 255 discrete time delays that are integer multiples of the time-base period. The total delay is the sum of the number of time-base periods, which is the binary sum of the Q outputs connected. Delays from 2001's to 0.223 s are possible with this configuration.
677
LOW POWER MICROPROCESSOR PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
v DD
INTEARUPT QNE..$HOT
VDD
10 k
10,.s
10k
.sL
"ELAPSED TIME OVER' INTERRUPT to -MICROPROCESSOR
.001
lV4~lB
.A
l
'14 CD4001B
RESET
STROBE
TRIGG ER
RESET
CD4017B
15 K
3
WR FROM MICROPROCESSOFl
v. C040001B
"
14
4~
15
CD4017B DECADE COUNTER
RESET
t t"
INTERSIL
Fig. 106-6
Circuit Notes The microprocessor sends out an 8-bit binary code on its 8-bit I/O bus (the binary value needed to program the ICM7240), followed by four WRITE pulses into the CD4017B decade counter. The first pulse resets the 8-bit latch, the second strobes the binary value into the 8-bit latch, the third triggers the ICM7240 to begin its timing cycle and the fourth resets the decade counter. The ICM7240 then counts the interval of time
678
Voo
RESET 10
ICM7240lPE CMOS PROGRAMMABLE BINARY TIMER
~ MEG
'3
"
9:, MEG
TRIGGER 11
2 ,
, , ~
t--'---<>
,.
Voo
0'
I
c:-
,1, 31. .1.

0040166
QUAD SWITCH
10 11
31.
.1. 101"
21 12
CD40168 QUAD SWITCH
'3
'2
'3
TRIGGER
5
RESET 1,13
"
17
,.
'0 16
23
3,15
,DISABLE
STROBE 2,14
CD4508B 8 BIT LATCH
,.
~
20 22
100,
I
MSB
LSB
8 BIT MICROPROCESSOR BUS
lCO:>0711
determined by the R-C value on pin 13, and the programmed binary count on pins 1 through 8. At the end of the programmed time interval, the interrupt one-shot is triggered, informing the microprocessor that the programmed time interval is over. With a resistor of approximately 10 M ohm and a can capacitor ofO.lI'F, the time base of the ICM7240 is one second. Thus, a time ofl-255 seconds can be progranuned by the microprocessor, and by varying R or C, longer or shorter time bases can be selected.
679
8l o
PRECISION ELAPSED TIME/COUNTDOWN TIMER

__ EQUAL
ZERO
TO LOGIC GENERATING SIGNALS FOR CONTROL OF
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
STOP
HI
14
5 6 7
1 2 3
'-" 14' 131ICM 12
oSW1 RUN HRSlMtN
7213 11 101-.-0 VOO 91- -(4VOlTSMAX) 8
':'
30 pF 4.1943 MHz CRYSTAL RS<75[)
I DD
/",MI:.:U:::I
.,......
-..L.......
INTERSIL
Fig. 106-7
Circuit Notes The circuit uses an ICM7213 precision one minute/one second timebase generator using a 4.1943 MRz crystal for generating pulses counted by an ICM7217B. The thumbwheel switches allow a starting time to be entered into the counter for a presetcountdown type timer. and allow the register to be set for compare functions. For instance, to make a 24-hour clock with BCD output the register can be preset with 2400 and the EQUAL output used to reset the counter. Note the 10 k resistor connected between the LOAD COUNTER terminal and ground. This resistor pulls the LOAD COUNTER input low when not loading, thereby inhibiting the BCD output drivers. This resistor should be eliminated and SW4 replaced with an SPDT center-off switch if the BCD outputs are to be used.
ADJUSTABLE AC TIMER .2 TO 10 SEC.
470
~
~,
: f; 2 MF
6.BK
lOOK
I MEGO
r
I 15V
L 0
6 OHz
\I
0
470
I
2.2meQ 2,.F
; f;
.47,.F
CI06B OR C6B
K \
lOOK
r--
~ ~NB2
IK
IMEG 0
470
GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 1068
681
107
Tone Control Circuits

Guitar Treble Boost Tone Control Ten Band Graphic Equalizer. Using Active Filters Tone-Control Audio Amplifier Mike Preamp with Tone Control Low Cost High-Level Preamp and Tone Control Circuit Passive Tone-Control Circuit
682
GUITAR TREBLE BOOST
DV
Fig. 107-1
Circuit Notes
Ql is connected as an emitter follower in order to present a high input impedance
to the guitar. C2. being a relatively low capacitance, cuts out most of the bass, and C3 with RVl acts as a simple tone control to cut the treble, and hence the amount of treble boost can be altered. Q2 is a simple preampto recover signal losses in C2, C3, and RVl.
TONE CONTROL
.,F
INPUTo--j
~.
'0"
~.
.. I-~ .""'"
. .0
.......
M ..
BOOST
,.
OUTPUT
."
0
"-
..,.
""",F
I
"
Q.033~F
PEAI(TOPEAK
." ./
""" ...
I
~
,.
... ....
MAl<
""-... ./ ./ "-
:"-..
M ..
TRElLE
C<rr
-" "
C"'
..
FREQUEHCY~
NOTES:
,. Ampl'~'" A may be I NE531 or 3<l1. Frequency compensat.",. 8s fOr unity g... n oon-Inverttng ampl,t,ers. mUI! be usoad 2. Turn-<lvar frequency_1kHz. 3. e ... boQs! + 20dB at 20Hz, 1)", cut - 2Od8 at 20H2, treble boost .. 19dB at 20Hz. 'reble CUi - 19dB at 20Hz
All
,""tor values ara In ohm.

Fig. 107-2
SIGNETICS
Circuit Notes Tone control of audio systems involves altering the flat response in order to attain more low frequencies or more high ones, dependent upon listener preference. The circuit provides 20 dB of bass or treble boost or cut as set by the variable resistance. The actual response of the circuit is shown alSO.
683
~
TEN BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER, USING ACTIVE FILTERS
Cl USE A lOOk LINEAR SlIDER lOOk SEE CHART FOR VALUES OF Cl AND C2
V in
lM lM
lOOk
+
lOOk THIS SECTION IS REPEATED MAKING A TOTAL OF 10 SECTIONS.
Vout
Fig. 107-3
CHANNEL CENTRE FREO. IN H. 32 64 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 16000
Cl 1800 1000 470 220 120. 506 207 105 680p 360p
C2 180 100 407 202 102 560p 270D 150D 68.p 36p
t ONE CHANNEL WITH FULL BOOST 2 SAME CHANNEL WITH FULL CUT :I ALL CHANNELS ON FULL BOOST
20 LOG
V out V in
\
I
-121 2
FREO.
Circuit Notes The above circuit is repeated ten times. Use the table to calculate values.
ffi
~
TONECONTROL AUDIO AMPLIFIER
FOR SINGLE SUPPLY
+30 v
20 dB FLAT POSITION GAIN
2m
>---------41 ,
0OO5~F
G:
'""""l- ~h
2>-1- 4
2.2 M.n
[J~n~~i,::~1 118~Fl
100 pF 0.022 p.F
r:'r
OI~F
~ 7
i 15 dB BASS AND TREBLE BOOST ANa cuT AT 100 Hz AND 10 11Hz, RESPEC,IVELY
25 VOLTS p-p OUTPUT AT 20kHz - 3 dB AT 24 kHz !'"ROM I kHz REFERENCE
IJ"
FOR DUAL SUPPLIES
+15 V
, ,
I
I
I
>-------j~
D_OO?":
h\ J
CA314~
!
0.0022
I Mn
CCW \LOG)
'+Hf;),.
-15
TONE CONTROL NETWORK
0,1
p.f
2,u;F
10 kD
BOOST
100 kll
CUT
I I I I
BASS
I :
L__ '!S!t!E_<:"~'!!!Q.l_~E!!fE'!~_.-J
GENERAL ELECTRiC/ReA
Fig. 107-4
Circuit Notes The circuit makes excellent use of the high slew rate, wide bandwidth, high input impedance, and high-output voltage capability of the CA3140 BiMOS op amp. The wideband gain of this circuit is equal to the ultimate boost or cut plus one, in this case a gain of eleven. For 20-dB boost or cut, input loading is essentially equhl to the resistance from terminal 3 to ground.
MIKE PREAMP WITH TONE CONTROL

R4 10 kn +15 V
R5 BASS *100 kn
R6
1 k<J
+10 J.lf
Rl 47 kn
LOW 0.1
~F
+'~
+
10.u F
C4 0.033 "F
1 "F
C5
0.33.uF
IMPEDANCE MIC
INPUT
OUTPUT
-15 V
':
~
R3
C3
Rl0
10 kn
Rll 50 k<J
C6 0.002 jJf
R7
100 k<J
R9 10kn
220 k<J
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
R2
560 <J
_ _ _--',1..
'Ik,
*50
0.02 "F
C2
kn
'
TREBLE
RS
~ L-cJ 4:-
10"FT-
*THE TONE CONTROLS ARE AUDIO TAPER (LOG) POTENTIOMETERS.
Fig. 107-5
....
Circuit Notes The LM318 op amp is operated as a standard non-inverting amplifier. Resistor R1 (47 k ohm) provides an input path to ground for the bias current of the non-inverting input. The combination of R2 (560 ohm) and C2 (10 "F) provides a frequency toll-off below 30 Hz. At 30 Hz and above the gain is relatively flat at about 50 dB, set by the ratio R3/R2. R3 (200 k ohm) furnishes negative feedback from the output to the inverting input of the op amp. C3 (1.0 "F electrolytic) ac couples the preamp to the tone control section. The top half of the tone control section is the bass control. The bottom half controls the treble frequency response. These tone controls (R5 and R8) require audio taper (logarithmic) potentiometers. The 50 k ohm potentiometet on the output can be used to set the output or gain of the preamp .
LOW COST HIGHLEVEL PREAMP AND TONE CONTROL CIRCUIT
TO COMPAtllON
fOR
~HREO
~HANNEl
CIRCUIT
,-~--...,.---.,...-...,.--t-~-o,,,
VOlUMF
1501
'"
""
@--l f-~_---1_*-,IP'SJ
INPUT
'"'
'00 LINEAR TAPER
~ -=
"",ec,
o 01~F
2NS457
'"
~.
lM
+----'\."M.--4~_t_ ....- - - - - - . . , ...

'"
co,
'"
~~o~ ~-+--'IIIIV---'-->~
I
L -...- - - - - -....--i-:"~,,-:.,-----...."c:<"'~"'_:,_i_....- -....-o

All FIX{D VAt UES
'"
-lSV
'- _ _ S~Y~R~~T~S _ _ ~
Fig. 1076
Circuit Notes This preamp and tone control uses the JFET to its best advantage; as a low noise high input impedance device. All device parameters are noncritical, yet the circuit achieves harmonic distortion levels of less than 0.05% with a SIN ratio of over 85 dB. The tone controls allow 18 dB of cut and boost; the amplifier has a I-V output for 100-mV input at maximum level.
688
PASSIVE TONE-CONTROL CIRCUIT
ON
8:2 v
:
TREBLE
, A
11
1120n
SOk
.
:
~no .
'Ok
BASS
'"
OU,
I
81<.2
~~
"2
,"0
~3"
Fig. 107-7
Circuit Notes
A simple circuit using two potentiometers and easily available standard value components provides tone control. The impedance level is suitable for low-level transistor or op amp circuitry.
689
108
Touch-Switch Circuits
The sources of the following circuits are contained in the Sources section beginning on page 694. The figure number contained in the box of each circuit correlates to the source entry in the Sources section. Touch On/Off Switch Touch Switch Touchomatic
690
TOUCH ON/OFF SWITCH
r - - - - -___- +6v TO+ 12

LE02
R3
R5
1MEG-
RS
R4 lMEG ~
lK
TOUCH
HA"
HANDS~ON
lK
PICKUPS
ELECTRONICS
"8"
Fig. 108-1
Circuit Notes If a Touch On/Off Switch is desired, this circuit fills the bill. Two sensitive gate SCRs are interconnected, so that when one of the devices is turned on, the other (if on) is
forced off. That toggling effect gives an on/off circuit condition for each of the LEDs in the SCR-anode circuits. To turn LEDl on and LED2 off, simply touch the "A" terrninal, and to turn LEDl off and LED2 on, the "B" pick-up must be touched. It is possible to simultaneously touch both terminals, causing both SCRs to~turn on together. To reset the circuit to the normal one-on/one-off condition, momentarily interrupt the circuit's dc power source. Additional circuitry can be connected to the anode circuit of either or both SCRs to be controlled by the on/off function of the touch switch.
691
TOUCH SWITCH
5 V TO 15 V
Vcc
Rl~4.7Mn
22Mn
141 RESET 171 DISCHARGE
181 NE555 VCC

TRIGGER
121
161
Cl = 1 1.1
THRESHOLD
FT
OUTPUT
131
~
lED~
l CONTACT f PLATES
IF TIl220
CONTROL 151
VOl TAGE
~
150 n
111
0.01
"F;; r;
-L
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
Fig. 108-2
Circuit Notes The circuit is basically a NE555 monostable, the only major difference being its method of triggering. The trigger input is biased to a high value by the 22 M ohm resistor. When the contact plates are touched, the skin resistance of the operator will lower the overall impedance from pin 2 to ground. This action will reduce the voltage at the trigger input to below the 'h Vcc trigger threshold and the timer will start. The output pulse width will be T = 1.1 RI Cl, in this circuit about 5 seconds. A relay connected from pin 3 to ground instead of the LED and resistor could be used to perform a switching function.
692
TOUCHOMATIC
RI
+
220 k
220 k
R'
C3
01
D2
seRl
.1
04
+
03
+
D4
117 Vac
RS 1k
PILOT LIGHT
NE'
seR 1,2 GE 106 c
~E
9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
B2
TAB BOOKS, INC.
Fig. 108-3
Circuit Notes When someone touches the touchplate (TP), the resistance of his finger across points A and B is added in series to the combination of RI and R2, the capacitor C2 begins to charge. When the voltage across Cl is finally sufficient to fire NEl, Cl will begin to discharge. When NEl fires, it produces a short between its terminals. Since R3 is connected across Cl, they are effectively in series after NEl fires. A voltage spike will then be passed by C2 and this will act as a positive triggering pulse. The pulse is fed to both SCR gates: SCR2 conducts, thereby closing relay Kl. With a finger no longer on the touchplate, no more pulses are forthcoming because the Cl charge path is open. The next contact with the touchplate will produce a pulse which triggers SCRl. SCR2 is now off by capacitor C3 which was charged by current passing through R6 and SCR2. The firing of SCRl in this way places a negative voltage across SCR2 which momentarily drops the relay currentto a point below the holding current value of SCR2. (Holding current is the minimum current an SCR requires to remain in a conducting state once its gate voltage is removed.) With SCR2 turned off, the relay will open and SCRl will turn off due to the large resistance in series with its anode. Starved in this way SCRl turns off because of a forced lack of holding current.
693
Sou rces Index

Chapter 1
Fig. 1-1. Signetics 1987 Unear Data Manual Vol. 2, 2187, p.7-65. Fig. 1-2. General Electric Application Note 90. 16, p. 25. Fig. 1-3. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 1-4. General Electric Application Note 90. 16, p. 25. Fig. 1-5. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.27. Fig. 1-6. R-E Experimenters Handbook, p. 157. Fig. 2-5. National Semiconductor Corp., Transistor Databook, 1982, p. 11-23. Fig. 2-6. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. AN21-1. Fig. 2-7. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 10/86, p. 4-260. Fig. 2-8. Electronic Engineering, 11186, p. 40. Fig. 2-9. National Semiconductor Corp., Transistor Databook, 1982, p. 11-25. Fig. 2-10. Siliconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 2-112. Fig. 2-11. Electronics Engineering, 9178, p. 17. Fig. 2-12. Electronics Engineering, 9/84, p. 33. Fig. 2-13. Signetics, 1987 LinearData Manual, Vol. 1: Communications,Bl87, p. 4-346. Fig. 2-14. NASA Tech Briefs, Spring 1983, p. 244. Fig. 2-15. Radio Electronics, 7/83, p. 74. Fig. 2-16. Motorala Inc., Linear Integrated Circuits, 1979, p. 6-58. Fig. 2-17. MR-E Exparimenters Handbook, p. 158.
Chapter 2
Fig. 2-1. Unear Technology Corporation, Unear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. AN21-2 Fig. 2-2. Unear Technology Corporation, Linear Databook Supplement, 1988, p. S2-34. Fig. 2-3. SHiconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 10-154. Fig. 2-4. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2-83.
694
Fig. 2-19. Popular Efeetronics, 8/68. Fig. 2-20. Ham Radio, 9/84, p. 24. Fig. 2-21. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.20. Fig. 2-22. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 3-2, 3-4. Fig. 2-23. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual Vol. 1: Communications, 3/87, p.
Fig. 5-6. Electronics Today International, 4/85, p. 82.
Chapter 6
Fig. 6-1. Tab Books Inc., 101 Sound, Light, and Power IC Projects. Fig. 6-2. Radio Electronics, 7170, p. 38. Fig. 6-3. Hands-On Electronics, JuVAug 1986, p. 16. Fig. 6-4. 73 Magazine, 12176, p. 170. Fig. 6-5. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.21. Fig. 6-6. Ibid. Fig. 6-7. Texas Instruments, Lineer and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 3-17. Fig. 6-8. Signetics, Analog Data Manual, 1982, p. 3-90.
4-345.
Fig. 2-24. Electronic Engineering, 11185, p.
32.
Fig. 2-25. NASA Tech Briefs, SeptlOct 1986, p.43.
Chapter 3
Fig. 3-1. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 4-43. Fig. 3-2. Linear Technology, Application Note 9, p. 16. Fig. 3-3. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.26. Fig. 3-4. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. ANI5-2. Fig. 3-5. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 5-17. Fig. 3-6. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 11186, p. 5-215. Fig. 3-7. National Semiconductor Corp., 1984 Linear Supplement Databook, p. S5-126. Fig. 3-8. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual Vol. 2: Industrial, 12186, p. 4-67.
Chapter 7
Fig. 7-1. Molorola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985. Fig. 7-2. Hands-On Electronics, 4/87, p. 95. Fig. 7-3. Tab Books, Inc., The Giant book of Easy-To-Build Electronics Projects, 1982, p. 196. Fig. 7-4. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 151. Fig. 7-5. Tab Books, Inc., The Build-It Book of Electronic Projects, No. 1498, p. 28. Fig. 7-6. Radio-Electronics, 6/85, p. 60. Fig. 7-7. Popular Electronics, 12174, p. 6. Fig. 7-8. Popular Electronics, 4175, p. 68. Fig. 7-9. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, 1987, p. 10-21. Fig. 7-10. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, 1985, vol. 1, p. 3-5. Fig. 7-11. Radio-Electronics, 1979. Fig. 7-12. Hands-On ElBctronics, 1187, p. 30. Fig. 7-13. Electronic Engineering, 12175, p. 9. Fig. 7-14. Electronic Design 18, 9176, p. 114. Fig. 7-15. RadiO-Electronics, 5/87, p. 10. Fig. 7-16. Hands-On Electronics, Fall 1984, p.45. Fig. 7-17. Hands-On Electronics, 4/87, p. 92. Fig. 7-18. General ElectriC, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 105.
Chapter 4
Fig. 4-1. Electronic Design, 5/82, p. 214. Fig. 4-2. R-E Experimenters Handbook, p. 160. Fig. 4-3. Popular Electronics, 11173, p. 50.
Chapter 5
Fig. 5-1. Hands-On Electronics, Summer 1984, p. 77. Fig. 5-2. Courtesy, Wllliam Sheets. Fig. 5-3. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 5-4. Electronic Engineering, 5/84, p. 44 Fig. 5-5. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, vol. 1, 1985, p. 3-13.
695
Chapter 8
Fig. 81. CQ, 7/82, p. 18. Fig. 82. Electronics Design, 7176, p. 120. Fig. 83. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 84. Moli Energy Limited. Fig. 85. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. AN63. Fig. 86. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 87. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, 1101. 1, p.
Chapter 11
Fig. 111. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual, Vol. 1: Communications, 2187, p.
4312.
Fig. 112. Electronic Engineering, 5/86, p. 50. Fig. 113. Electronic Design, 9173, p. 148. Fig. 114. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 628. Fig. 115. Signetics, 555 Timers, 1973, p. 19.
624.
Fig. 88. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook Supplement, 1988, p. SS 11. Fig. 89. Motorola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 8. Fig. 810. Radio Electronics, 9/85, p. 44. Fig. 811. Siliconix, MOSpower Applications Handbook, p. 6176.
Chapter 12
Fig. 121. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 721. Fig. 122. Electronic Engineering, 2185, p. 34.
Chapter 13
Fig. 131. HandsOn Electronics, 3/87, p. 25. Fig. 132. Motarola, TMOS Power FETDesign Ideas, 1985, p. 17. Fig. 133. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. ANI323. Fig. 13-4. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 5113. Fig. 135. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 136. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 323. Fig. 13 7. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1657.
Chapter 9
Fig. 9-1. Motorola, TMOS Power FET Ideas, 1985, p. 7. Fig. 9-2. Electronic Engineering, 2185, p. 45. Fig. 9-3. Electronic Engineering, 10170, p. 17. Fig. 9-4. Electronic Engineering, Mid5178, p.
11.
Fig. 95. Moli Energy Limited, Publication MEL126. Fig. 96. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2104. Fig. 9 7. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 9-8. Tab Books, Inc., 101 Sound, Light, and Power IC Projects.
Chapter 14
Fig. 141. Electronic Engineering, 3/78, p. 38. Fig. 142. HandsOn Electronics, No./Dec 1985, p. 4.
Chapter 10
Fig. 101. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 5367. Fig. 102. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 33, 34. Fig. 103. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 104. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p. 17. Fig. 10-5. Siliconix, SmallSignal FET Data Book, 1186, p. 729. Fig. 106. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 283. Fig. 10-7. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2101.
Chapter 15
Fig. 151. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 282. Fig. 152. Popular Electronics, 9177, p. 92. Fig. 153. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 2: Industrial, 11/86, p. 5269. Fig. 154. Siliconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 58. Fig. 15-5. Electronic Engineering, 2IB5, p. 45. Fig. 15-6. Electronic Engineering, 2184, p. 36. Fig. 15-7. Electronic Design 15, 7179, p. 120. Fig. 158. Electronic Engineering, 12178, p.
17.
696
Fig. 159. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.23. Fig. 1510. Electronic Engineering, 11/86, p.
39.
Fig. 1511. Popular Electronics, 3179, p. 77. Fig. 1512. Electronic Engineering, 7/86, p.
27.
Fig. 1513. Electronic Engineering, 1/86, p.
37.
Fig. 1711. Siliconix, MOSpower Applications Handbook, p. 6178. Fig. 1712. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 5368. Fig. 1713. National Semiconductor Corp., Transistor Databook, 1982, p. 727. Fig. 1714. National Semiconductor Crop., 1984 Linear Supplemental Databook, p. S5142. Fig. 1715. Electronic Engineering, 8/83, p.
141.
Chapter 16
Fig. 161.Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 2: Industrial, 11/86, p. 5215. Fig. 162. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 415. Fig. 163. Siliconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 2207. Fig. 164. SlIiconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 2231. Fig. 165. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 1351. Fig. 166. Siliconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 362. Fig. 167. Datel, Data Conversion Components, p. 437.
Chapter 18
Fig. 181. Intersil, Component Data catalog, 1987, p. 1470. Fig. 182. General Electric, Application Note 90. 16, p. 29. Fig. 183. General ElectriC, Application Note 90. 16, p. 29. Fig. 184. General Electric, Application Note 90.16, p. 28. Fig. 185. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 1491. Fig. 186. Intersif, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 796. Fig. 18 7. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p.14121. Fig. 188. Intersil, Databook 1987, p. 7-47.
Chapter 17
Fig. 171. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 762. Fig. 172. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 2: Industrial, 11/86, p. 4136. Fig. 173. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 2: Industrial, 11/86, p. 5269. Fig. 174. Electronic Engineering, 12177, p.
Chapter 19
Fig. 191. Ham Radio, 6/85, p. 23. Fig. 192. Siliconix, MOSpower Design Catalog, 1183, p. 527. Fig. 19-3. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2104. Fig. 194. QST, 12185, p. 38. Fig. 195. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Applications Handbook 1987, p. AN2D-12. Fig. 196. QST, 2128, p. 43. Fig. 19-7. Ham Radio, 2179, p. 40. Fig. 198. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 199. Courtesy, Wiffiam Sheets. Fig. 19-10. Electronic Design 21, 10175, p. 98. Fig. 1911. Ham Radio, 2179, p. 40. Fig. 1912. Ham Radio, 2179, p. 42. Fig. 19-13. Tab Books, Inc., The Complete Handbook of Amplifiers, OSCillators, and Multivibrators, No. 1230, p. 328. Fig. 1914. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 2: Industrial, 11/86, p. 5269.
19.
Fig. 175. Siliconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 517. Fig. 176. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 517. Fig. 177. Analog Devices, Data Acquisition Databook, 1982, p. 456. Fig. 178. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 1: Communications, 2187, p.
4311.
Fig. 179. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.20. Fig. 1710. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p. 11.
697
Fig. 19-15. Motorola, MECL System Design Handbook, 1983, p. 227. Fig. 1916. Electronic Design, 11/69, p. 109. Fig. 1917. QST, 1/86, p. 40. Fig. 19-18. RE Experimenters Handbook, p.
Fig. 228. Signetics, 1987 Unear Data Man ual Vol. 1: Communications, 11/86, p.
7123.
Fig. 229. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 1: Communications, 11/86, p.
157.
Fig. 1919. Electronic Design 23, 11174, p.
4295.
148.
Chapter 23 Chapter 20
Fig. 231. General Electric, Application Note 90.16, p. 26. Fig. 232. Siliconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 516. Fig. 233. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 323. Fig. 234. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.18. Fig. 235. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 744. Fig. 236. Electronic Engineering, 11186, p.
Fig. 20-1. UnearTechnologyCorp., 1986Un ear Databook, p. 257. Fig. 202. Linear Technology Corp., Unear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. AN313. Fig. 20-3. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 74. Fig. 204. NASA Tech Briefs, JullAug 1986, p.37. Fig. 20-5. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p. 17. Fig. 206. Linear Technology Corp., Unear Databook, 1986, p. 285. Fig. 2IJ7. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p. 14.
39.
Fig. 237. General Electric, Application Note 90. 16, p. 27. Fig. 238. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 5367. Fig. 239. Intersil, Component Data Cata/og, 1987, p. 5112. Fig .. 2310. GENERAL Electric, Application Note 90. 16, p. 26.
Chapter 21
Fig. 211. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 923. Fig. 212. National Semiconductor Corp., Audio/Radio Handbook, 1980, p. 317. Fig. 213. Signetics, 1987 Unear Data Man ual, Vol. 1: Communications, 2187, p. 466. Fig. 214. Signetics, 1987 Unear Data Man ual Vol. 1: Communications, 11/86, p.
Chapter 24
Fig. 241. Electronic Engineering, Bl85, p. 30. Fig. 242. Electronic Engineering, 11/86, p. 40.
4263.
Chapter 25 Chapter 22
Fig. 251. CQ, 1/87, p. 36.
Fig. 221. RadioElectronics, 12186, p. 57. Fig. 222. RadioElectronics, Bl87, p. 63. Fig. 223. RadioElectronics, Bl87, p. 53. Fig. 224. RadioElectronics, 6/87, p. 12. Fig. 225. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 9-23. Fig. 226. RadioElectronics, 3186, p. 51. Fig. 227. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man ual Vol. 1: Communications, 1//86, p.
Chapter 26
Fig. 261. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.26. Fig. 262. National Semiconductor Corp., Un ear Databook, 1982, p. 171. Fig. 263. Electronic Engineering, 9/84, p. 30. Fig. 26-4. GENERAL Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas,1987, p. 12.
7123.
698
Chapter 27
Fig. 27-1. Motorola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 18. Fig. 27-2. Electronic Design, 12187, p. 67. Fig. 27-3. General Electric/RCA, BIMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.22. Fig. 27-4. Electronic Engineering, 8178, p. 32. Fig. 27-5. Electronic Engineering, 2183, p. 37.
Chapter 33
45.
Fig. 33-2. Electronics Today International, 10/78, p. 26. Ag. 33-3. Hybrid Products Databook, 1982, p. 17-131. Fig. 33-4. Siliconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 10-62. Fig. 33-5. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 8-102. Fig. 33-6. 73 for Radio Amateurs, 2186, p. 10. Fig. 33-7. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 7-45. Fig. 33-8. Linear Technology Corp., 1986 Linear Databook, p. 2-56. Fig. 33-9. Electronic Engineering, 2147, p. 47. Fig. 33-10. Courtesy, Wllliam Sheets. Fig. 33-11. Raytheon, Linear and Integrated Circuits, 1984, p. 6-205. Fig. 33-12. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 3-7. Fig. 33-13. Motorola, Linear Integrated Circuits, 1979, p. 3-147. Fig. 33-14. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 3-9.
Chapter 28
Fig. 28-1. Tab Books, Inc., The Giant Book of Easy-To-Build Electronic Projects, 1982, p.53. Fig. 28-2. Hands-On Electronics, 2187, p. 38.
Chapter 29
FIg. 29-1. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual Vol. 2: Industrial, 11/86, p. 4-135. Fig. 29-2. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2-82. Fig. 29-3. Signetlcs, 1987 Linear Data Manual Vol. 2: Industrial, 11186, p. 4-135. Fig. 29-4. Transistor Databook, 1982, p.
11-25.
Chapter 30
Fig. 30-1. Hands-On Electronics, May/Jun 1986, p. 52. Fig. 30-2. Popular Electronics, 3/67. Fig. 30-3. Courtesy, William Sheets.
Chapter 34
Fig. 34-1. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-52. Fig. 34-2. Popular Electronics, 3/81, p. 100. Fig. 34-3. Hands-On Electronics, Spring 1986, p. 4. Fig. 34-4. Hands-On Electronics, Fall 1984, p.61. Fig. 34-5. General Electric, SCR Manual, Fourth Edition, p. 85. Fig. 34-6. Electronic Design 65, 3/73, p. 84. Fig. 34-7. Electronic DeSign, 3/69, p. 96. Fig. 34-8. Electronic Engineering, 676, p. 32. Fig. 34-9. Popular Electronics, 3/75, p. 78. Fig. 34-10. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition. Fig. 34-11. Radio-Electronics, 2187, p. 36. Fig. 34-12. General Electric, Application Note 200.35, p. 16. Fig. 34-13. General Electric, Application Note 90. 16, p. 27.
Chapter 31
Ag. 31-1. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. AN13-22. Fig. 31-2. General ElectriC, Optoe/ectronics, Third Edition, p. 149. Fig. 31-3. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-39.
Chapter 32
Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig.
32-1. Courtesy, William Sheets. 32-2. Courtesy, William Sheets. 32-3. Hands-On Electronics, 8/87, p. 65. 32-4. Courtesy, William Sheets. 32-5. Hands-On ElectroniCS, 3/87, p. 27. 32-6. Ham Radio, 9/86, p. 67.
699
Fig. 40-1. Electronic Design, 6/79, p. 122. Fig. 40-2. Electronic Engineering, 9/84, p. 37. Fig. 40-3. NASA Tech Briefs, 6/87, p. 26. Fig. 40-4. Electronics Today International, 6/80, p. 68. Fig. 40-5. Electronic Engineering, 9/87, p. 27. Fig. 40-6. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interlace Circuits Applications, Vol. I, 1985, p. 7-25. Fig. 40-7. Radio-Electronics, 5/70, p. 33. Chapter 35 Fig. 40-8. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Fig. 35-1. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 5-78. Applications Handbook, 1987, p. AN5-6. Fig. 40-9. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Fig . .35-2. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 8-40. Databook, 1986, p. 2-82. Fig. 40-10. Electronic Engineering, 2179, p. 23. Fig. 40-11. Electronic Engineering, 7/86, p. Chapter 36 30. Fig. 36-1. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 40-12. Motorola, Application Note Fig. 36-2. Electronics Today International, AN-294, p. 6. 6/76, p. 43. Fig. 40-13. Motorola, Linear Integrated Fig. 36-3. Radio-Electronics, 4/87, p. 48. Circuits, p. 3-139. Fig. 36-4. Radio-Electronics, 2184, p. 97. Fig. 40-14. Hands-On Electronics, Winter Fig. 36-5. Hands-On Electronics, Sep/Oct 1985, p. 60. 1986, p. 24. Fig. 40-15. Texas Instruments, Linear and Fig. 36-6. Electronic Engineering, 9/86, p. 37. Interlace Circuits Applications, Vol. I, Fig. 36-7.R-E Experimenters Handbook, p. 1985, p. 7-16. 162. Fig. 40-16. Signetics, Analog Data Manual, Fig. 36-8. Linear Technology Corp., Linear 1982, p. 3-39. Databook, 1986, p. 2-96. Fig. 40-17. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifier Circuit Ideas,1987, p.l0. Chapter 37 Fig. 40-18. Texas Instruments, Linear and Fig. 37-1. Electronic Design, 3/75, p. 68. Interlace Circuits Applications, Vol. I, Fig. 37-2. EXAR, Telecommunications 1985, p. 3-20. Databook, 1986, p. 11-38. Fig. 40-19. National Semiconductor, Linear Brief 23.
Fig. 34-14. National Semiconductor Corp., CMOS Databook, 1981, p. 8-45. Fig. 34-15. General Electric, Application Note 90.25. Fig. 34-16. Motorola, Circuit Applications for the Trian (AN-466), p. 11. Fig. 34-17. Siliconix, MOSpower Applications Handbook, p. 6-181. Fig. 34-18. Popular Electronics, 3/75, p. 78.
Chapter 40
Chapter 38
Fig . .38-1. Electronic Design, 8/73, p. 86. Fig. 38-2. Electronic Design, 12178, p. 98. Fig. 38-3. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, SEries A, 1985, p. 1-6-53. Fig. 38-4. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 7-59.
Chapter 41
Fig. 41-1. Tab Books, Inc., 101 Sound, Light, and Power IC Projects. Fig. 41-2. Courtesy, William Sheets.
Chapter 39
Fig. 39-1. National Semiconductor Corp., 1984 Linear Supplement Databook, p. S5-143.
Chapter 42
Fig. 42-1. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 42-2. Hands-On Electronics, Sep/Oct 1986, p. 85. Fig. 42-3. Courtesy, William Sheets.
700
Chapter 43
Fig. 43-1. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, 1987, p.
12-8.
Fig. 43-2. Texas Instruments, Linear .and Interface Circuits Applications, 1987, p. 12-10.
Fig. 49-2. Motorola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 20. Fig. 49-3. Motorola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 21. Fig. 49-4. R-E Experimenters Handbook, p.
156.
Fig. 49-5. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-48. Fig. 49-6. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, 1'6-55. Fig. 49-7. Electronic Engineering, 9/84, p. 38. Fig. 49-8. Tab Books, Inc., 101 Sound, Light, and Power IC Projects. Fig. 49-9. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-60. Fig. 49-10. General Electric, Application Note 200.35, p. 17.
Chapter 44
Fig. 44-1. Linear Technology Corp., Linear ApplicatIons Handbook, 1987, p. AN3-7.
Chapter 45
Fig. 45-1. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook Supplement, 1988, p. S2-34. Fig. 45-2. Hands-On Electronics, Jul/Aug 1986, p. 86. Fig. 45-3. Signetics, Linear Data Manual Vol. 3: Video, p. 5-15. Fig. 45-4. Tab Books, Inc. Build Your Own Laser, Phaser, Ion Ray Gun, 1983, p. 29. Fig. 45-5. Hands-On Electronics, Jul/Aug 1986, p. 86. Fig. 45-6. Electronic Engineering, 6/78, p. 24.
Chapter 50
Fig. 50-1. Tab Books, Inc., Build Your Own Laser, Phasor, Ion Ray Gun, 1983, p. 104. Fig. 50-2. Electric Engineering, 12/84, p. 34.
Chapter 51
Fig. 51-1. Hands-On Electronics, Sep/Oct 1986, p.26. Fig. 51-2. General Electric,Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 107. Fig. 51-3. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 51-4. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 51-5. Electronic Engineering, 12175, p.
Chapter 46
Fig. 46-1. Hands-On Electronics, 12/86, p. 42. Fig. 46-2. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2-82. Fig. 46-3. Electronic Engineering, 9/84, p. 33. Fig. 46-4. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications Vol. 1, 1985, p. 3-18. Fig. 46-5. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2-83.
15.
Fig. 51-6. Hands-On Electronics, 4/87, p. 94. Fig. 51-7. Hands-On Electronics, 2/87, p. 87. Fig. 51-8. Hands-On Electronics, 10/87, p. 92. Fig. 51-9. LInear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2-83. Fig. 51-10. Radio-Electronics, 11/86, p. 38. Fig. 51-11. General Electric, Application Note 200.35, p. 15. Fig. 51-12.lntersil, Component Data CBtalog, 1987,p. 7-44. Fig. 51-13. Radio Electronics, 3/86, p. 32. Fig. 51-14. Electronic Design, 11/82, p. 172. Fig. 51-15. Electronic Design, 6176, p. 120. Fig. 51-16. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Application Ha'1dbook, 1987, p. AN5-3.
Chapter 47
Fig. 47-1. Electronic Engineering, 7/86, p. 30. Fig. 47-2. Signetics, Analog Data Manual, 1982, p. 3-73. Fig. 47-3.National Semiconductor Corp., Data Conversion/Acquisition Databook, 1980, p. 3-30.
Chapter 48
Fig. 48-1. Hands-On Electronics, 5/87, p. 95. Fig. 48-2. Electronic Design 16, 8176, p. 76.
Chapter 49
Fig. 49-1. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-50.
Chapter 52
Fig. 52-1. Siliconix, Integrated Circuit Deta Book, 3185, p. 10-85.
701
Fig. 52-2. Siliconix, Integrated Circuit Data Book, 3/85, p. 10-79. Fig. 52-3. Siliconix, Integrated Circuit Data Book, 3/85, p. 2-144. Fig. 52-4. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 10/86, p. 4-261. Fig. 52-5. Siliconix, Integrated Circuit Data Book, 3/85, p. 2-103.
23.
Fig. 58-7. Electronic Design, 11/6169, p. 109. Fig. 58-8. Radio-Electronics, 11182, p. 79. Fig. 58-9. National Semiconductor Corp., Transistor Databook, 1982, p. 11-34. Fig. 58-10. National Semiconductor Corp., Data Conversion/Acquisition Databaok, 1980, p. 2-5. Fig. 58-11. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 8-42. Fig. 58-12. Signetics, Lineer Data Manual Vol. 3: VIdeo, p. 11-120. Fig. 58-13. General ElectrIc, ApplicatIon Note 90. 16, p. 28. Fig. 58-14. RCA, DIgItal Integrated Circuits Application Note ICAN-6346, p. 5. Fig. 58-15. Unear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 5-15. Fig. 58-16. General ElectriC, SCR Manual, SIxth Edition, 1979, p. 204.
Chapter 53
Fig. 53-1. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 5-350. Fig. 53-2. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Application Handbook, 1987, p. AN3-9.
Chapter 54
Fig. 54-1. Hands-On Electronics, May/Jun 1986, p. 63. Fig. 54-2. Electronic DesIgn, 10173, p. 114. Fig. 54-3. Electronic Engineering, 7/85, p. 44. Fig. 54-4. Electronics Today International, 3/80, p. 25. Fig. 54-5. Popular Electronics, 1/82, p. 76. Fig. 54,JJ. Electronic Engineering, 6187, p. 28. Fig. 54-7. Popular Electronics, 8/69, p. 71. Fig. 54-8. Electronics TDday International, 1176, p. 52. Fig. 54-9. Electronic Engineering, 9178, p. 20.
Chapter 59
Fig. 59-1. Motorota, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 45. Fig. 59-2. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 59-3. Signetics, Linear Data Manual, Vol. 3: VIdeo, p. 11-3. Fig. 59-4. Radio-ElectronIcs, 6177, p. 33. Fig. 59-5. Electronic Design, 3177, p. 76.
Chapter 55
Fig. 55-1. Electronic Engineering, 1/85, p. 39. FIg. 55-2. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 7-44.
Chapter 60
Fig. 60-1.Electronlc Engineering, 5/84, p. 43. Fig. 60-2. General ElectriC, Optoe/ectronics, Third Edition, p. 114. Fig. 60-3. Motorola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 32. Fig. 60-4. Sillconix, MOSpower Applications Handbook, p. 6-186. Fig. 60-5. Electronic Engineering, 7/86, -po 34. Fig. 60-6. Electronic Engineering, 4185, p.47. Fig. 60-7. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-8. Fig. 60-8. Motorola, TMOS Power FET DeSign Ideas, 1985, p. 31. Fig. 60-9.Sprague Electric Co., Integrated Circuits Databook WR504, p. 4-159. Fig. 60-10. General Electric, Application Note 200.35, p. 18. Fig. 60-11. Sprague Electric Co., Integrated Circuits Databook WR504, p. 4-160.
Chapter 56
Fig. 56-1. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 56-2. Courtesy, Wllliam Sheets.
Chapter 57
Fig. Fig. Ag. Fig.
57-1. 57-2. 57-3. 57-4.
Popular Electronics, 6173. Courtesy, William Sheets. Courtesy, William Sheets. Courtesy, Wllliam Sheets.
Chapter 58
Fig. 58-1. Unitrode Corp., 10/86, p. 332. Fig. 58-2. Unitrode Corp., 10/86, p. 332. Fig. -58-3. Radio Electronics, 6182, p. 36. Fig. 58-4. Hands-On Electronics, Winter 1985, p.93. Fig. 58-5. Hands-On Electronics, 9/87, p. 71.
702
Fig. 60-12. Motorola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 55. Fig. 60-13. Motoro/a, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 54. Fig. 60-14. Motoro/a, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 51. Fig. 60-15. Electronic Engineering, 2184, p.
Chapter 65
Fig. 65-1. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 135. Fig. 65-2. NASA, Tech Briefs, Summer 1984, p.446. Fig. 65-3. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 140. Fig. 65-4. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 121. Fig. 65-5. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 120. Fig. 65-6. General Electric,Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 139. Fig. 65-7. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 120. Fig. 65-8. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 134. Fig. 65-9. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 112. Fig. 65-10. National Semiconductor Corp., Data Conversion/Acquisition Databook, 1980, p. 13-46. Fig. 65-11. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 133. Fig. 65-12. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 65-13. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 117. Fig. 65-14. Electronic Engineering, 6186, p.
23.
Fig. 60-16. National Semiconductor Corp., Unear Application Databook, p. 1066. Fig. 60-17. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 113.
Chapter 61
Fig. 61-1. Fairchild Corp., Unear Databook, 1982, p. 4-72. Fig. 61-2. Linear Technology Corp., Unear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. AN3-14.
Chapter 62
Fig. 62-1. 73 Magazine, 12176, p. 170. Fig. 62-2. Electronics International Today, 1/76, p. 44. Fig. 62-3. Signetics Analog Data Manual, 1983, p. 10-93. Fig. 62-4. Electronics Today International, 9/75, p. 66. Fig. 62-5. CQ, 5/76, p. 26.
Chapter 63
Fig. 63-1. National Semiconductor Corp., Linear Applications Databook, p. 1096. Fig. 63-2. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 7-24. Fig. 63-3. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 7-24. Fig. 63-4. Electronic Engineering, 12184, p.
36.
Fig. 65-15. General Electric, Optoelectronics, Third Edition, p. 118.
Chapter 66
Fig. 66-1. 73 For Radio Amateurs, 11/85, p.
32.
Fig. 66-2. RadiO-Electronics, 5170, p. 35. Fig. 66-3. Electronics Today International, 7/78, p. 16. Fig. 66-4. Electronics Today International, 12178, p. 15. Fig. 66-5. General Electric, Semiconductor Data Handbook, Third Edition, p. 513. Fig. 66-6. Electronic DeSign, 11/29/84, p.
33.
Fig. 63-5. Electronic Engineering, 11/85, p.
31.
Fig. 63-6. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 63-7. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 2-11. Fig. 63-8. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 63-9. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 63-10. Courtesy, Wil/iam Sheets.
281.
Fig. 66-7. Unitrode Corp., Databook 1986, p.
51.
Fig. 66-8. Electronic Engineering, 5177, p. 27. Fig. 66-9. National Semiconductor Corp., Transistor Databook, 1982, p. 7-19. Fig. 66-10. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 66-11. Electronic Design, 10/65.
Chapter 64
Fig. 64-1. Electronic Engineering, 6183, p. 31. Fig. 64-2. Electronic Design 15, 7/75, p. 68.
703
Fig. 66-12. Hands-On Electronics, Summer 1984, p. 43. Fig. 66-13. Signetics, Analog Data Manual, 1982, p. 8-10.
Fig. 71-9. National Semiconductor Corp., Unear Databook, 1982, p. 3-187. Fig. 71-10. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 11/86, p. 4-135.
Chapter 67
Fig. 67-1. Electronic Design, 5179,p. 102. Fig. 67-2. Radio-Electronics, 7170, p. 36. Fig. 67-3. Courtesy, William Sheets.
Chapter 72
Fig. 72-1. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interlace Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, , p. 6-35. Fig. 72-2. Motarola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 43. Chapter 68 Fig. 68-1. Texas Instruments, Linear and Fig. 72-3. Electronic Engineering, 12184, p. 41. Interlace Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, Fig. 72-4. NASA, Tech Briefs, 9/87, p. 21. 1985, p. 3-18. Fig. 68-2. Popular Electronics, 3/79, p. 78. Fig. 72-5. Motarola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 37. Fig. 72-6. Siliconix, MOSpower Applications Chapter 69 Handbook, p. 6-51. Fig. 69-1. Electronic Engineering, 2186, p. 38. Fig. 69-2. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 72-7. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Fig. 69-3. Electronic Engineering, 4177, p. 13. Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.24. Fig. 69-4. Electronic Engineering, 7/85, p. 34. Fig. 69-5. Electronic Design, 3177, p. 106. Fig. 72-8. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 69-6. Electric Engineering, 1187, p. 25. Fig. 72-9. General ElectriC/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.24. Chapter 70 Fig. 70-1. Hands-On Electronics, 10/87, p. 96. Fig. 72-10. Radio-Electronics, 6/86, p. 52. Fig. 70-2. Hands-On Electronics, Spring Fig. 72-11. Siliconix, MOSpower Applications Handbook, p. 6-177. 1985, p. 82. Fig. 70-3. General Electric ProjectG4, p. 131. Fig. 72-12. Siliconix, MOSpower Applications Handbook, p. 6-59. Fig. 70-4. Radio Electronics, 12184, p. 77. Fig. 70-5. Electronics Today International, Fig. 72-13. Linear Technology Corp., Unear Databook, 1986, p. 3-23. 6175, p. 42. Fig. 70-6. Electronics Today International, Fig. 72-14. Electronic Engineering, 10/84, p. 38. 9/82, p. 42. Fig. 72-15. NASA Tech Briefs, Summer 1985, p.32. Chapter 71 Fig. 71-1. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Man- Fig. 72-16. Electronic Engineering, 1187, p. 22. ual Vol. 1: Communications, 11186, p. 7-251. Fig. 72-17. Motorola, TMOS Power FET Design Ideas, 1985, p. 42. Fig. 71-2. National Semiconductor Corp., LinFig. 72-18. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, ear Applications Databook, p. 1065. Fig. 71-3. Siliconix, MOSpower Applications Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-55. Handbook, p. 6-101. Fig. 72-19. 73 Magazine, 12170, p. 170. Fig. 71-4. Hands-On Electronics, 5/87, p. 96. Fig. 72-20. Signetics, Analog Data Manual, 1983, p. 12-27. Fig. 71-5. Hands-On Electronics, Spring 1985, p. 36. Fig. 72-21. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data ManFig. 71-6. Hands-On Electronics, Summer ual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 8-223. Fig. 72-22. Electronic Engineering, 1/85, p. 1984, p. 74. 45. Fig. 71-7. Radio-Electronics, 3/86, p. 59. Fig. 71-8. National Semiconductor Corp., Fig. 72-23. Motorola, Unear Integrated Circuits, p. 3-138. Audio/Radio Handbook, 1980, p. 4-20.
704
Fig. 72-24. Electronic Design, 11/29/84, p. 282. Fig. 72-25. Electronics Today Internationai, 1170, p. 45. Fig. 72-26. Linear Technology, 1986 Linear Databook, p. 3-22.
Fig. 79-2. Radio-Electronics, Experimenters Handbook, p. 122.
Chapter 80
Fig. 80-1. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 1: Communications, 2187. p. 4-310. Fig. 8()'2.Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-52.
Chapter 73
Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig.
73-1. Electronic Engineering, 10176, p.17. 73-2. Electronic Enginearing, 7177, p. 26. 73-3. Popular Electronics, 5174, p. 24. 73-4. Courtesy, Wllllam Sheets.
Chapter 81
Fig. 81-1.Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 1: Communications, 11186, p. 7-14. Fig. 81-2. Hands-On Electronics, 3/87, p. 28. Fig. 81-3. Hands-On Electronics, 12/86, p. 22.
Chapter 74
Fig. 74-1. NASA, Tech Briefs, Winter 1985, p.52. Fig. 74-2. Courtesy, William Sheats. Fig. 74-3. Electronic Enginearing, 3/86, p. 34. Fig. 74-4. Courtesy, WII//am Sheats. Fig. 74-5. Courtesy, William Sheets.
Chapter 82
Fig. 82-1. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p. 11. Fig. 82-2. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 11/86, p. 4-135.
Chapter 75
Fig. 75-1. Electronic Design 25, 1275, p. 90. Fig. 75-2. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 75-3. Electronics Today International, 9175, p. 66. Fig. 75-4. Electronic Enginearing, 1/85, p. 41. Fig. 75-5. Hands-On Electronics, Fa// 1984, p.66. Fig. 75-6. Radio-Electronics, 3177, p. 76.
Chapter 83
Fig. 83-1. Electronic Design, 9/69, p. 106. Fig. 83-2. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-61. Fig. 83-3. QST, 7/87,p. 32.
Chapter 84
Fig. 84-1. Electronic Engineering, 4/86, p. 34. Fig. 84-2. Electronic Engineering, 7/85, p. 44. Fig. 84-3. Electronic Engineering, 71/86, p. 34. Fig. 84-4. NASA, Tech Briefs, 1/88, p. 78.
Chapter 76
Fig. 76-1. Hands-On Electronics, 11186, p. 92. Fig. 76-2. Popular Electronics, 11177, p. 62. Fig. n-l. Electronic Enginearing, 9/86, p. 38. Fig. 77-2. RCA,Design Guide for Fire Detection Systems. Publication 2M1189, p.27. Fig. 77-3. Electronic Enginearing, 9/86, p. 34.
Chapter 77
Chapter 85
Fig. 85-1. Motorola, RF Data Manual, 1986, p. 6-141. Fig. 85-2. Motorola, RF Data Manual, 1986, p. 6-240. Fig. 85-3. QST, 7/87, p. 31. Fig. 85-4. QST, 5-86, p. 23. Fig. 85-5. Motorola, RF Data Manual, 7986, p. 6-181. Fig. 85-6. Ham Radio, 7/86, p. 50. Fig. 85-7. Radio Electronics. 3/87, p. 42. Fig. 85-8. NASA, Tech Briefs, Spring 7984, p.322. Fig. 85-9. Motorola, RF Data Manual, 1986. p. 6-232.
Chapter 78
Fig. 78-1. Electronic Enginearing, 5176, p. 17. Fig. 78-2. Electronic Design, 4174, p. 114. Fig. 78-3. Electronic Engineering, 10/86. p. 41.
Chapter 79
Fig. 79-1. Electronic Engineering, 12175, p. 15.
705
Chapter 86
Fig. 86-1. OST. 12185, p. 39.
Chapter 87
Fig. 87-1. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers circuit Ideas, 1987, p. 14. Fig. 87-2. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 7-5. Fig. 87-3. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2-113. Fig. 87-4. Electronics Today International, 3178, p. 51. Fig. 87-5. National Semiconductor Corp., Hybrid Products Databook, 1982, p. 17-149. Fig. 87-6. SlIiconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 10-58.
Fig. 89-8. Electronics Today International, 1177, p. 85. Fig. 89-9. Electronics Today International, 6175, p. 63. Fig. 89-10. Electronics Today International, 1177, p. 49. Fig. 89-11. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 89-12. Electronics Today International, 11/80, p. 43. Fig. 89-13. Radio-Electronics, 2175, p. 42. Fig. 89-14. Courtesy, Wllliam Sheets.
Chapter 90
Fig. 90-1. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 90-2. Radio-Electronics, 12183, p. 38. Fig. 90-3. Hands-On ElectroniCS, 8/87, p. 77. Fig. 90-4. Electronics today International, 6179, p. 27. Fig. 90-5. Courtesy, William Sheets.
Chapter 88
Fig. 88-1. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS OperaUonal Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.8. Fig. 88-2. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2-113. Fig. 88-3. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. 1, 1985, p. 3-15, 3-1fi. Fig. 88-4. OST, 4/87, p. 48. Fig. 88-5. Electronic Engineering, 5/85, p. 38. Fig. 88-6. Electronic Design, 6/81, p. 250. Fig. 88-7. Ham Radio, 1187, p. 97. Fig. 88-8. Electronic Engineering, 2176, p. 17. Fig. 88-9. Electronic Design, 2173, p. 82. Fig. 88-10. Radio-Electronics, 2171, p. 37. Fig. 88-11. Ham Radio, 6/82, p. 33.
Chapter 91
Fig. 91-1. Hands-On Electronics, 6/87, p. 40. Fig. 91-2. Electronics Today International, 8/77, p. 25. Fig. 91-3. Electronics Today International, 11/80. Fig. 91-4. Texaslnstrumants, Complex Sound Generator, Bulletin No. DL-12612, p. 13. Fig. 91-5. Electronics Today International, 4/82, p. 34. Fig. 91-6. Electronics Today International, 2175, p. 66. Fig. 91-7. Hands-On ElectroniCS, 12186, p. 42. Fig. 91-8. Courtesy, William Sheets. Fig. 91-9. Courtesy, William Shoots. Fig. 91-10. Texas Instruments, complex Sound Generator, Bulletin No. DL-S 12612, p. 11. Fig. 91-11. Courtesy, William Shoots.
Chapter 89
Fig. 89-1. Popular Electronics, 12174, p. 68. Fig. 89-2. Electronics Today International, 1177, p. 49. Fig. 89-3. Electronics Today International, 1177, p. 49. Fig. 89-4. Popular Electronics, 8/74, p. 98. Fig. 89-5. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.28. Fig. 89-6. Electronics Today International, 11176, p. 45. Fig. 89-7. Electronics Today International, 2175, p. 66.
Chapter 92
Fig. 92-1. Electronic Engineering, 3/82, p. 29. Fig. 92-2. Electronic Engineering, 1078, p. 17. Fig. 92-3. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 9-24. Fig. 92-4. Electronic Design, 5179, p. ~100. Fig. 92-5. Siliconix, Integrated Circuits Data Book, 3/85, p. 5-17. Fig. 92-6. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.7.
706
Fig. 92-7. Electronic Design, 6169, p. 126. Fig. 92-8. Electronic Engineering. 8184,p. 27. Fig. 92'9. Electronic Engineering, 12185. p.
Fig. 98-10. Electronics Engineering, 1179, p.
17.
Fig. 98-11. Radio-Electronics, 12178. p. 67. Fig. 98-12. Radio-Electronics, 11177, p. 45. Fig. 98-13. Hands-On Electronics, Summer 1985, p. 74. Fig. 98-14. Hands-On Electronics, SeplDet 1986, p. 88. Fig. 98-15. Hands-On Electronics, SeplDet 1986, p. 105. Fig. 98-16. Hands-On Electronics, Summer 1984, p. 39. Fig. 98-17. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 4-19. Fig. 98-18. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 5-14. Fig. 98-19. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 4-15. Fig. 98-20. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual. Vol. 1: Communications, 1212186, p. 6-50.
35.
Fig. 92-10. Electronic Engineering, 8184. p.
29.
Chapter 93
Fig. 93-1. General ElectriclRCA. Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987. p. 10. Fig. 93-2. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986. p. 8-42.
Chapter 94
Fig. 94-1. Tab Books. Inc. 303 Dynamic Electronic Circuits. p. 169. Fig. 94-2. Electronics Today International, 12177, p. 86.
Chapter 95
Fig. 95-1. Electronics Today International, 10178, p. 46. Fig. 95-2. Hands-On Electronics, Fall 1984, p.65. Fig. 95-3. Courtesy, William Sheets.
Chapter 99
Fig. 99-1. NASA, Tech Briefs. 12187, p. 28. Fig. 99-2. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 7-67. Fig. 99-3. Electronic Design, 8175, p. 82. Fig. 99-4. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Application Handbook. 1987, p. AN3-6. Fig. 99-5. General Electric, Optoe/ectronics, Third Edition. p. 153. Fig. 99-6. General Electric, Application Note 200.85, p. 18. Fig. 99-7. Electronic Design, 8182, p. 217. Fig. 99-8. Electronic Design, 8183, p. 230. Fig. 99-9. Courtesy, William Sheets.
Chapter 96
Fig. 96-1. Electronic Engineering, 6186, p. 35. Fig. 96-2. General Electric, SCR Manual, Sixth Edition, 1979, p. 200.
Chapter 97
Fig. 97-1. Electronic Engineering, 9187, p. 32. Fig. 97-2. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 14-67.
Chapter 98
Fig. 98-1. Electronic Engineering, 2187, p. 40. Fig. 98-2. Tab Books, Inc. The Giant Book of Easy-To-Build Electronic Projects, 1982, p.l. Fig. 98-3. Radio-Electronics, 2185, p. 90. Fig. 98-4. EXAR, Telecommunications Databook, 1986, p. 11-38. Fig. 98-5. Tab Books, Inc. build Your Own Laser, Phaser, Ion gun, 1983, p. 305. Fig. 98-6. Electronic Design, 12178, p. 95. Fig. 98-7. Radio-Electronics, 11179, p. 53. Fig. 98-8. Electronic Design, 10176, p. 194. Fig. 98-9. Hands-On Electronics, 12186, p. 22.
Chapter 100
Fig. 100-1. General Electric, SCR Manual, Sixth Edition, 1979, p. 222. Fig. 100-2. Electronic Engineering, 9185, p. 30. Fig. 100-3. National Semiconductor Corp., 1984 Linear Supplement Databook, p.
SI-41.
Fig. 100-4. National Semiconductor Corp., 1984 Linear Supplement Databook, p.
SI-42.
Fig. 100-5. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Databook, 1986, p. 2-101. Fig. 100-6. Courtesy, William Sheets.
707
Chapter 101
Fig. 101-1. Linear Technology Corp., Linear Applications Handbook, 1987, p. AN7-2. Fig. 101-2. Electric Engineering, 7/84, p. 31.
Fig. 106-2. Electronic Engineering, 9/77, p.
37.
Fig. 106-3. Motorola, ThyrlSlor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-51. Fig. 106-4. Motorola, Thyristor Device Data, Series A, 1985, p. 1-6-54. Fig. 106-5. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. I, 1985, p. 7-23. Fig. 106-6. Intersil, Datebook, 1987, p. 7-102. Fig. 106-7. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 14-67. Fig. 106-8. General Electric, Application Note 90. 16, p. 30.
Chapter 102
Fig. 102-1. Hands-On Electronics, 11/86, p. 93. Fig. 102-2. Hands-On Electronics, 9/87, p. 32.
Chapter 103
Fig. 103-1. Teledyne Semiconductor, Data & Design Manual, 1981, p. 7-17. Fig. 103-2. Linear Technology Corp., Application Note 9, p. 18. Fig. 103-3. Radio-Electronics, 9/82, p. 42. Fig. 103-4. Intersil, Component Data Catelog, 1987, p. 6-8. Fig. 103-5. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 6-11. Fig. 103-6. Intersil, Component Data Catalog, 1987, p. 6-8.
Chapter 107
Fig. 107-1. Electronics Today International, 11/80. Fig. 107-2. Signetics, 1987 Linear Data Manual, Vol. 2: Industrial, 2187, p. 4-107. Fig. 107-3. Electronics Today International, 9/77, p. 55. Fig. 107-4. General Electric/RCA, BiMOS Operational Amplifiers Circuit Ideas, 1987, p.21. Fig. 107-5. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. I, 1985, p. 3-11. Fig. 107-6. National Semiconductor Corp., Transistor Databook, 1982, p. 11-35. Fig. 107-7. Electronics Today International, 6/82, p. 61.
Chapter 104
Fig. 104-1. NASA, Tech Briefs, Spring 1985, p.40. Fig. 104-2. NASA, Tech Briefs, Fal/lWinter 1981, p. 319. Fig. 104-3. Popular Electronics, 12182, p. 82.
Chapter 105
Fig. 105-1. General Electric, Semiconductor Data Handbook, Third Edition, p. 513. Fig. 105-2. Motorola, Application Note AN294. Fig. 105-3. Electronic Design, 4/77, p. 120. Fig. 105-4. Motorola, Application Note AN294.
Chapter 108
Fig. 108-1. Hands-On Electronics, 9/87, p. 88. Fig. 108-2. Texas Instruments, Linear and Interface Circuits Applications, Vol. I, 1985, p. 7-15. Fig. 108-3. Tab Books, Inc., The Giant book of Easy-Ta-Build Electronics Projects, 1982, p. 31.
Chapter 106
Fig. 106-1. NASA, Tech Briefs, Sep/Oct1986, p.36.
708
Index
Numbers preceded by a "I." "11," "Ill," or "IV" are from Encyclopedia of Electronic Circuits Vo!. I, 11, Ill, or IV, respectively.
A
absolute-value amplifier, 1-31 absolute-value circuit,I-37, JV-274 absolute-value full wave rectifier, 11-528
absolute-value Norton amplifier, III-ll ac bridge circuit, II-81
acoustic-sound receiver/transmitter, IV311 active antennas, III-1-2, IV-1-4 basic designs. IV3 wide band rod. IV4 with gain, IV2 active clamp limiting amplifiers, III15 active crossover networks, 1172173 active filters (see also filter circuits) band reject, 11401 bandpass, 11-221, D-223, III-190 digitally tuned low power, 11218 five pole. 1279 highpass, secondorder, 1-297 lowpass, digitally selected break frequency, 11-216 low-power, digitally selectable center frequency, 1Il186 low-power, digitally tuned,-I-279 programmable. III-185 RC, up to 150 kHz, 1-294 state-variable, III-189 ten-band graphic equalizer using, 11684 three-amplifier, 1-289 tunable, 1-294
ac flasher, I11-196 ac linear coupler, analog, 11-412 ac motor control for, 11-375 three-phase driver, 11-383 two-phase driver, 11-382 ac sequential flasher, 11-238 ac switcher, high-voltage optically coupled, III-408 ac timer, .2 to 10 seconds, adjustable, JI-681 ac-coupled amplifiers, dynamic, III-17 acJdc indicator. JV-214 ac-ta-de converter, 1-165 fixed power supplies, IV-395 full-wave,IV-120 high-impedance precision rectifier, 1-
164
acid rain monitor, 11-245, I11-36!
universal, 11-214 variable--bandwidth bandpass, 1-286 active integrator. inverting buffer. 11299 adapters dc transceiver, hand-held, III-461 program, second-audio. III-142 traveller's shaver. 1-495 adder, III-327 AGC, 11-17 AGe amplifiers AGC system for CA3028 IF amplifier, IV-458 rf, wideband adjustable, III-545 squelch control, 1Il-33 wideband, III-15 air conditioner. auto. smart clutch fOT. I1I-46 air flow detector, 1-235, 11-242, IIJ-364 air flow meter (see...anemometer) air-pressure change detector, IV-l44 air-motion detector, III-364 airplane propeller sound effect, 11-592 alarms (see also detectors; indicators; monitors;sensors; sirens), IIJ-3-9, IV-84-87
10s
alarms (coni.) auto bUIg!ar, 11-2, 1-3, I11-4, 1-7, 110, IV-53 auto burglar, CMOS low~current design, IV~-56 auto burglar, horn as loudspeaker, rv~ 54 auto burglar, single~IC design, rv~55 auto burglar, single~IC, I11-7 auto-anning automotive alarm, IV-50 automatic turn-off after 8-minute delay, automotive, IV-52 automatic turn-off with delay, IV-54 blown fuse, I-to boat, 1-9 burglar, III-B, /11-9, /V-B6 burglar, latching circuit, 1-8, 1-12 burglar, NC and NO switches, IV-87 burglar, NC switches, IV-87 burglar, one-chip, III-5 burglar, seH-latching, IV-B5 burglar, timed shutoff, IV-85 camera triggered, 111-444 capacitive sensor, I11-515 CWTent monitor and, III-338 differential voltage or current, 11-3 digital clock circuit with, IU-84 door-ajar, 11-284 door-ajar, Hall-effect circuit, I11-256 doorbell, rain, 1-443 fail-safe, semiconductor, 111-6 field disturbance, 11-507 flasher, bar display, 1-252 flood, I11-206, 1-390, /V-IBB freezer meltdown, 1-13 headlights-on, IU-52 high/low limit, 1-151 home-security system, IV-a7 ice formation, 11-58 infrared wireless security system, IV222-223 low-battery disconnect and, III~65 low-battery warning, Ill-59 low volts, 11-493 mains-failure indicator, IV-216 motion-actuated car, 1-9 motion-actuated motorcycle, 1-9 multiple circuit for, 11-2 <me-chip, III-5 photoelectric, 11-4, 11-319 piezoelectric, 1-12 power failure, I11-511, 1-581, 1-5B2 printer-error, IV-lOG proximity, 1/-506, I11-517 pulsed-tone, 1-11 purse-snatcher, capacitance oper~ ated,I-I34 rain, 1-442, 1-443, IV-IB9 road ice, 11-57
security, 1-4 self-arming, 1-2 shutoff, automatic, 1-4 signal-reception, receivers, III-270 smoke, photoelectric, line-operated, 1-596 smoke, SCR, Ill-251 solar powered, 1-13 sonic defenders, IV-324 speed,I-95 Star Trek red alert, 1/-577 strobe flasher alarm, IV-ISO tamperproof burglar, 1-8 temperature, 11-643 temperature, light, radiation sensitive, 11-4 timer, 11-674 trouble tone alert, 11-3 varying-frequency warning, 11-579 wailing, 1/-572 warbling, 1/-573 watchdog timer/alarm, IV-584 water-leakage, IV-190 water level, 1-389 allophone generator, III-733 alternators battery-alternator monitor, automotive, III-63 AM demodulator, 11-160 AM microphone, wireless, 1-679 AM radio, 1-544 AM radio AM car-radio to short-wave radio converter, IV-500 broadcast-band signal generator, IV302 envelope detector, IV-142 modulation monitor, IV-299 power amplifier for, 1-77 receivers, III-529, IV~455 receivers, carrier-current, 111-81 receivers, integrated, I11-535
AM/FM
dock radio, 11-543, Ill-I squelch circuit for, 11-547, IJI-1 amateur radio linear amp, 2-30 MHz 140-W, I11-260 receiver, III-534 signal-identifier, programmable, IV326 transmitter, SO-M, III-675 ambience amplifier, rear speaker, 11458 ammeter, 1-201 nano, 1-202 pico, 11-154, 1-202 pico, circuit for, II-157 pico, guarded input circuit, 11-156 six decade range, 11-153, 1I~156
amplifiers, 11-5-22, III-10-21 1 watt/2,3 GHz, 11-540 2 to 6 W, with preamp, 11-451 25-watt, 11-452 30 MHz, 1-567 40 dB gain design, IV-3S 60 MHz, 1-567 135-175 MHz, 1-564 absolute value, 1-31 ac serva, bridge type, I11-387 AGC, 11-17 AGC, squelch control, I11-33 AGC, wide-band, I11-15 adjustable-gain, noninverting, 1-91 ambience, rear speaker, 11-458 amateur radio, linear, 2-30 MHz, 140W, 1-555 AM radio power, 1-77 attenuator, digitally controUed, I-53 audio (see audio amplifiers) audio converter, two-wire to fourwire,II-14 audio limiter, low-distortion, 11-15 audio power amplifiers, IV-28-33 audio signal amplifiers, IV-34-42 auto fade circuit for, 11-42 automatic level centrol for, 11-20 automotive audio amplifier, IV-66 balance, 11-46 balance, loudness control, 11-47, 11395 balancing circuit, inverting, 1-33 bass tone control, stereo phonograph, 1-670 bridge, 1-74 bridge, 4W, 1-79 bridge, 16 W, 1-82 bridge, ac servo, 1-458 bridge, -audio power, 1-81 bridge, high-impedance, i-353 bridge transducer, I11-7l, 11-64, 1-351 broadband, low-noise, 1-562 broadband, PEP, 160W, 1-556 broadband/linear, PEP, BOW, 1-557 buffer, IOx, 1-12B buffer, 100x, 1-128 buffer, ac, single-supply, 1-126 buffer, battery-powered, standard cell, 1-351 buffer, rf amplifiers with modulator, IV-490 buffer, sinewave output, 1-126 buffer, unity-gain, stable design, 11-6 cascade, 111-13 cascade, 80 MHz, 1-567 cascode, rf amplifiers, IV-48S C04049 audio signal amplifiers, IV-40 chopper, 15V., I11-12 chopper channel, 1-350
710
chopper stabilized, II-7 clamp-limiting, active, 111-15 color video, 1-34, I11-724 common-source, 450 MHz, 1-568 common-source, low power, II-84 complementary-synunetry,I-78 composite, 11-8, Ill-13 compressor/amplifier, low-distortion, IV-24 constant-bandwidth,_I11-21 current-shunt, ill-21 current collector head, II-l!, II-295 current-to-voltage, high-speed, 1-35 de servo, 1-457 dc-stabilized, fast action, I11-18 dc-to-video log, 1-38 detector, MCl330/MC1352, television IF. 1-688 differential. III-14. 1-38 differential, high-impedance, 1-27, 1354 differential, high-input high-impedance. II-19 differential, instrumentation, 1-347, Ill-283 differential, instrumentation, biomedical. Ill-282 differential, programmable gain, III507 differential, two op amp bridge type, II-83 dynamic, ac-coupled, III-17 electrometer, overload protected, 11155 FET input. II-? flat response, 1-92, III-673 forward-current booster, III-17 -four-quadrant photo-conductive detector, 1-359 gain. 10-dB. III-543 gain-controlled, 111-34 gate, 1-36 guitars, matching audio signal amplifiers.lV-38 hi-fi compander, II-12 hi-fi expander, 11-13 high-frequency. III-259-265 high-impedance/high gain/highfrequency, 1-41 high-impedance/low capacitance, 1691 IF (see IF amplifiers) input/output buffer for analog multiplexers. Ill-ll instnunentation, 1-346, 1-348, 1-349, 1-352.J-354. Ill-278-284. IV-229234 instrumentation, differential, highgain. 1-353
instrumentation, high-impedance, low-drift. 1-355 instrumentation, high-speed, 1-354 instrumentation, low-signal/highimpedance, 1-350 instrumentation, precision FET input, 1-355 instrumentation, triple op-amp design. 1-347 instrumentation, variable gain, differential input, 1-349 instrumentation, very high-impedance. 1-354 inverting. 1-42. II-41. III-14 inverting, ac, high-gain, 1-92 inverting, gain of 2, lag-lead compensation. UHF. 1-566 inverting, power, 1-79 inverting, unity gain, 1-80 isolation, capacitive load, 1-34 isolation, level-Shifting, 1-348 isolation, medical telemetry, 1-352 isolation, rf, II-547 JFET bipolar cascade video, 1-692 line amplifier, universal design, IV39 linear, CMOS inverter in, 11-11 line-operated, 111-37 line-type, duplex, telephone, I11-6I6 load line protected, 75W audio, 1-73 logarithmic, I1-S logic (see logic amplifier) log ratio, 1-42 loudness control, II-46 low-noise design, IV-37 low-level video detector circuit, 1-687 medical telemetry, isolation, 1-352 meter-driver, rf, I-MHz, I11-545 micro-powered, high-input/highimpedance. 20 dB. II- micro-sized, I11-36 microphone, III-34, 1-87 microphone, electronically balanced input, 1-86 microwave, IV-315-319 monostable, 11-268 neutralized common source, 100 MHzI400MHz. 1-565 neutralized conunon source, 200 MHz.I-568 noninverting. 1-32. 1-33. 1-41. Ill-14 noninverting, ac power, 1-7.9 noninverting, single-supply, 1-75 noninverting, split-supply, 1-75 Norton, absolute value, III-ll op amp (see also operational amplifiers) op amp, xlO, 1-37 op amp, xl00, 1-37
op amp, clamping circuit, 11-22 op amp, intrinsically safe-protected, III-12 oscilloscope sensitivity, III-436 output, four-channel D/A, I11-165 phono, I-SO, I-SI phono, magnetic pickup, 1-89 photodiode. 1-361. !I-324. Ill-672 photodiode, low-noise, III-19 playback. tape. III-672 polarity-reversing low-power, III-16 power (see also power amps), 11-46, II-451. Ill-450-456 power, 10-W, 1-76 power, 12-W, low distortion, 1-76 power, 9O-W, safe area protection, 11459 power, GaAsFET with single supply, !I-IO power, rf power, 600 W, 1-559 pre-amps (see pre-amplifiers) precision, 1-40 programmable, II-334, III-504-508 programmable gain, weighted resiston;. II-9 pulse-width proportional controller circuit, 11-21 push-pull. PEP. 100W. 420-450 MHz. 1-554 PWM servo. III-379 reference voltage, 1-36 remore, 1-91 rf (see rf amplifiers) sample and hold, high-speed, 1-587 sample and hold, infinite range, 11558 selectable input, programmable gain, 1-32 servo, 400 Hz, II-386 servo motor, 1-452 servo motor drive, 11-384 signal distribution, 1-39 sound-activated, gain-controlled amp, IV-528 sound mixer, 11-37 speaker, hand-held transceivers, 11139 speaker, overload protector for, 11-16 speech compressor, IT-IS standard cell, saturated, 11-296 stereo, Av/200, 1-77 stereo, gain control, II-9 summing. 1-37. Ill-16 summing, fast action, 1-36 summing, precision design, 1-36 switching power. 1-33 tape playback. 1-92. IV-36 tape recording, 1-90 telephone. III-621. IV-555. IV-560
711
amplifiers (cont,) thermocouple, 1-654, 1lI-14 thermocouple, cold junction compensation, 11-649 thermocouple, high-stability, 1-355 transducer, 1-86, Ill0669-673 transformerless, 6W 8-ohm output, 1-75 transistorized, basic design, 1-85 transistorized, headphone, ll-43 tremolo circuit, voltage-controlled, 1598 tube amplifier,high-voltage isolation, IV-426 TV audio, I11-39 two-meter, 5W output, 1-567 two-meter, IOW power, 1-562 UHF,I-565 UHF, wideband, high-performance FET,I-560 unity gain, 1_27 unity gain, ultra-high Z, ac, 11-7 VHF, single-device, 80W/50-ohm, 1558 video, 1-692, 1Il-70B-712 video, FET cascade, 1-691 video, loop-through amplifier, IV-616 voice activated switch, 1-608 voltage, differential-to-single-ended, I11-670 voltage-controlled, IV-20 voltage-follower, signal-supply operation, I11-20 voltage-controlled (see voltagecontrolled amplifiers) volume, 11-46 walkman, 11-456 weighted-resistor programmable gain, precision design, 11-9 wideband (see wideband amplifiers) wide frequency range, 111-262 write, I11-18 amplitude modulator, low_ distortion low level, 11-370 analog counter circuit, 11-137 analog delay line, echo and reverb effects, IV-21 analog multiplexers buffered inpuUoutput, 111-396 single-trace to four-trace scope converter, 11-431 analog multiplier, 11-392 0/01 percent, 11-392 analog-to-digital buffer, high-speed 6bit, 1-127 analog-to-digital converters,_1I-23-31, I11-22-26, IV-5-6 3-bit, high-speed, I-50 8-bit, 1-44, 1-46
S-bit successive approximation, 1-47 lO-bit, 11-28 lO-bit serial output, 11-27 12-bit,high-speed,II-29 16-bit, 11-26 board design, IV-6 capacitance meter, 31/2 digit, 1lI-76 cyclic, 11-30 differential input system, 11-31 fast precision, 1-49 four-digit (10,000 count), 11-25 half-flash, I1I-26 IC, low cost, I-50 LCD 3.5-digit display, 1-49 logarithmic, three-decade, 1-48 precision design, 1-49 successive approximation, 1-45, II24, 11-30 switched-capacitor, 111-23 three-IC, low-cost, I-SO tracking, I11-24 video converter, IV-610-611 analyzer, gas, 11-281 AND gate, 1-395 large fan-in, 1-395 anemometers hot-wire, I11-342 thermally based, 11-241 angle-of-rotation detector, 11-283 annunciators, 11-32-34, I1I-27-28, IV710 ac line-voltage, III-730 bell, electronic, IV-9 chime circuit, low-cost, 11-33 door buzzer, IV-8 door buzzer, electronic, IV-8 electronic bell, ll-33 large fan-in, 1-395 SCR circuit, self-interrupting load, IV-9 sliding tone doorbell, 11-34 two-door annunciator, IV-10 answering machines, beeper, IV-559 anteIlllas, IV-11-14 active, I11-1'2 active anteIllla, wideband rod. IV-4 active anteIllla. with gain, IV-2 active antermas. 1V-1-4 loop, 3.5 MHz, IV-12-13 selector switch, IV-538-539 tuner, I-to-30 MHz, JV-14 antitheft device, 1-7 arc lamp, 25W, power supply for, 11-476 arc welding inverter, ultrasonic, 20 KHz, I11-700 arc-jet power supply, starting circuit, I11-479 astable flip-flop with starter, 11-239 astable multivibrators, 11-269. 11-
510,I11-196, I11-233, I11-238 op amp, I1I-224 programmable-frequency, 111-237 square wave generation with, 11-597 attendance counter, 11-138 attenuators, I11-29-31 analog signals, microprocessorcootrolled, m-101 digitally programmable, I11-30 digitally se1ectable, precision design, I-52 programmable, I-53, I11-30 programmable (1 to 0.00001), I-53 rf, IV-322 wrlable, I-52 voltage-controlled, 11-18, I11-31 audio amplifiers, I11-32-39 AGe, squelch control, I11-33 automotive stereo systems, highpower, 1V-66 balance indicator, IV-215 Baxandall tone-control, 1V-588 booster, 20 dB, III-35 circuit bridge load drive, I11-35 complementary-symmetry, 1-78 distributioo, 1-39, 11-39 fixed power supplies, 35 V ac, IV398 fixed power supplies, 35 V, 5 A, mobile, IV-407 high-slew rate power op amp, 1-82 gain-controlled, stereo, I11-34 line-operated, I11-37 load line protectioo, 75W, 1-73 low-power, 11-454 micro-sized, Ill..J6 microphone, Ill-34 mini-stereo, 1lI-38 pre-amp, NAB tape playback, professional, 111-38 pre-amp, phono, magnetic, I11-37 pre-amp, RIAA, 1II-38 Q-multiplier, 11-20 signal,II-41-47 speaker, hand-held transceivers, I1I39 television type, I11-39 tone control, 11-686 ultra-high gain,I-87 volume indicator, 1V-212 audio circuits audio-rf algnal tracer probe, 1-527 automatic gain control, 11-17 booster, 11-455, I11-35 biquad filter, I1I-185 bridge load drive, I11-35 carrier-current transmitter, III-79 clipper, precise, 11-394 compressor, 11-44
712
continuity tester, 1-550 converter. two-wire to four-wire, 1114 distribution amplifier, 11-39, 1-39 filters (see audio filters) frequency meter, 1-311 generators (see sound generators) LED bar peak program meter display, 1-254 limiter, low distortion, 11-15 miIlivoltmeter, U1-767, U1-769 mixers (see mixers) notch filter, 11-400 power meter, 1-488 Q multiplier, 11-20 sine wave generator, 11-564 squelch, 11-394 switching/mixing, silent, I-59 waveform generators. precision, ru230 audio effects circuits (see_sound generators) audio equalizer, IV-IS audio fader, IV-I7 audio filters anaiyzer circuit, 1V-309 biqusd filter, U1-185 notch filter, 11-400 tunable, IV-I69 audio generators (see sound generators) audio-operated circuits (see soundoperated circuits) audio osci11ators, 1-64, 11-24, "'-427, IV-374, IV-375 20Hz to 20kHz, variable, 1-727 fisht-sensitive, "'-315 sine wave, 11-562 audio power amplifier, II-451, 111-454. IV-28-33 20-W, "'-456 50-W, 111-451 6-W, with preamp, 111-454 audio amplifier, 1V-32 audio amplifier, SoW, IV-32 bridge, 1-81 bull horn, IV-31 general-purpose. 5 W, ac power supply, IV-3~ op amp, simple design, IV-33 receiver audio circuit, 1V-31 stereo amp, 12-V/20-W, IV-29 audio scramblers, 1V-25-27 voice scrambler/descrambler, 1V-26 voice scrambler/disguiser, 1V-27 audio signal amplifiers, 11-41-47, IV-3442 40 dB gain design, IV-36 audio compressor, 11-44 auto fade, H-42
balance, 11-46 balance and loudness amplifier, 11-47 CD4049 design, IV-40 electric guitar, matching amplifier, IV38 line amplifier, universal design, 1V-39 loudness. II-46 low-noise design, 1V-37 microphone preamp, 11-45 micropower high-input-impedance 20dB amplifier, 11-44 power, 11-46 preamplifier, 1000x.low-noise design, IV-37 preamplifier, general-purpose design, IV-42 preamplifier, impedance-matching, IV-37 preamplifier, low-noise, 1V-41 preamplifier, magnetic phono cartridges, IV-35 preamplifier, microphone, 1V-37, IV42 preamplifier, microphone, low-impedance, 1V-41 preamplifier, phono, low-noise, IV-36 preamplifier, phono, magnetic, ultralow-noise, 1V-36 stereo preamplifier, 11-43, 11-45 tape playback amplifiers, IV-36 transistor headphone amplifier, 11-43 volume, 11-46 audio-frequency doubler, IV-IS-I7 aUdio/video switcher circuit. IV-540541 auto-advance projector, 11-444 autodrum sound effect, 11-591 auto-fade circuit, 11--42 auto-flasher, 1-299 auto-zeroing scale bridge circuits, m69 automotive circuits, 11-48-63, 111-40-52, IV-43-67 alarms, automatic-anning, IV-SO alarms, automatic turn-off after 8minute delay, IV-52 alarms, automatic turn-off with delay, IV-54 alarms, CMOS design, low-current. IV-56 alanns, horn as loudspeaker, IV-54 alarm, motion actuated, 1-9 alarms, single-IC design, IV-55 air conditioner smart clutch, III-46 AM-radio to short-wave radio converter, IV-SOD analog expanded-scale meter, IV-46 audio-amplifier, high-power, IV-66 automatic headlight dimmer. 11-63
automobile locator, 111-43 automotive exhaust emissions analyzer, IT-51 back-up beeper, I11-49, IV-51, IV-56 bar-graph voltmeter, 11-54 battery charger, ni-cad, 1-115 battery condition checker, 1-108 battery current anaiyzer, 1-104 battery monitor, 1-106 battery supply circuit, 15 V and 5 V, IV-391 battery-alternator monitor, 1lI-63 brake fishts, delayed extra, I11-44 brakefishts, flashing third, Ill-51 brake fisht, night-safety fisht for parked cars, IV-61 brake light, third brake fisht, IV-6O burglar alarm, 1-3, 1-7, 1-10, 11-2, III4, I11-7, IV-53 cassette-recorder power circuit. IV548 courtesy fisht delay switch, I11-42 courtesy light extender, m-50 delayed-action windshield wiper control, 11-55 digI-tach, 11-61 directional signals monitor. m-48 door ajar monitor. III-46 electric vehicles. battery saver, m-67 electrical tester, 1V-45 electronic circuits. 1V-63-67 fog fisht controller with delay, IV-59 fuel gauge, digital readout, IV-46 exhaust-gas emissions analyzer, 11-51 _ stop fight, 11-53 glow plug driver, 11-52 headfisht alarm, I-lOO, Ill-52 headlight automatic-off controller, IV~I
headfisht delay circuit, 11-59, I11-49 headfisht dimmer, 11-57 high-speed warning device, 1-101 horn, Ill-50 ice formation alarm, 11-58 ignition circuit, electronic ignition, IV65 ignition cut-off, IV-53 ignition substitute, I11-41 ignition timing fisht, 11-60 immobilizer, 11-50 intermittent windshield wiper with dynamic braking, 11-49 fisht circuits, IV-57-62 fishts-on warning, 11-55, I11-42, IV58, IV-60, IV-52 night-safety fisht for parked cars, IV61 oil-pressure gauge, digital readout, IV-44, IV-47
713
automotive circuits (cont.) PTC thermistor automotive tempera ture indicator, 11-56 radio, receiver for, 11-525 read head pre-amplifier. 11144 road ice alarm. II-57 security system, 1-5, IV-49-56 tachometer. set point, I11-47 tachometer/dwell meter, I1145 temperature gauge, digital readout, IV-48 temperature -indicator, PTC thermistor, 11-56 turn signals. sequential flasher, 11lOO, Ill-I
vacuum gauge, digital readout. IV-45 voltage gauge, IV-47 voltage regulator, I11-48, IV-67 voltmeter. bargraph, 1-99 water-temperature gauge, IV-44 wiper control, IT-55, --11-62 wiper delay, solid-state. lV-64 wiper interval controller, IV-67
B
B-field measurer, lV-272 back-biased GaAs LED light sensor, 11321 back-EMF PM motor speed control. 11379 backup-light beeper, automotive, IV-51, IV-56 bagpipe sound effect. IV-521 balance indicator, audio amplifiers, IV215 balancer, stereo. 1-619 banricade flashe~ 1-299 battery charge/discharge indicator, 1-122 battery charger, automatic shut-off, 11113 balance amplifiers, III-46 loudness control, 11-47, 11-395 balance indicator, bridge circuit, 1I-82 bandpass filters (see also filter circuits), 11-222 0.1 to 10 Hz bandpass, 1-296 160 Hz, 1-296 active, 11-221, 11-223, III-190 active. with 60dB gain, 1-284 active, 1 kHz, 1-284 active, 20 kHz, 1-297 active, variable bandwidth. 1-286 biquad, RC active, 1-285 biquad, second-order. I11-188 Chebyshev, fourth-order, III-191 high Q, 1-287 MFB, multicharmel tone decoder, 1288
multiple feedback, 1-285, 11-224 multiple feedback, 1.0 kHz, 1-297 notch, 11-223 Sallen-Key, 500 Hz, 1-291 second-order biquad. 111-188 state variable. 1-290 tunable, IV-l71 band reject filters. active (see also filter circuits),1I-401 bang-bang power controllers, IV-389 bar-code scanner, I11-363 bar-expanded scale meter, 11-186 bar graphs ac signal indicator, 11-187 voltmeter, 11-54voltmeter, automotive, 1-99 barometer, IV-273 bass tuners, 11-362 12 V, I-Ill 200 mA-hour, 12V ni-cad, 1-114 automatic shutoff for, 1113 batteries fixed power supply, 12-VDC/120VAC, IlI-464 high-voltage generator, III-482 zapper, simple ni-cad, 1-116 battery chargers, 1-113, 11-64, 11-69, IlI-53-59,IV-68-72 12-V charger, IV-70 battery-life extender, lead-acid batteries, IV-72 constant-voltage, current limited charger, 1-115 control for 12V, 1-112 current limited 6V, 1-118, IV-70 gel cell, 11-06 lead/acid, Ill-55 lithium, 11-67 low-battery detector, lead-acid. Ill-56 low-battery warning, Ill-59 low-cost trickle for 12V storage, 1117 mobile battery charger. + 12-Vdc, IV71
ni-cad, 1-118 ni-cad, portable, Ill-57, IV-69 ni-cad, temperature-sensing charger, fV-77 ni-cad, zapper, 11-66 power supply and, 14V, III-4A, 11-73 PUT, Ill-54 regulator, 1-117 simpli-cad, 1~112 solar cell. 1171 thermally controlled ni-cad, 11-68 UlT, Ill-56 universal, Ill-56, Ill-58 versatile design, II-T!. voltage detector relay, 11-76
wind powered, 11-70 zapper, simple ni-cad. 1116 battery monitors, 1-106, 11-74-79, I1I60-67, IV-73-80 anal}'zer; ni-cad batteries, 111-64 automatic shutoff, battery-powered projects. III-61 battery saver. electric vehicles, 111-67 battery-life extender, 9 V, I11-62 battery life-extender, disCOIUlect switch, IV-75 capacity tester, I11-66 condition checker, 1-108, 1-121 converter, dc-to-dc + 3-to-+ 5 V. IV119 disconnect switch, life-extender circuit, IV-75 dynamic, constant current load fuel celllbattery tester, 11-75 internal resistance tester, IV-74 level indicator. II-124 lithium battery, state of charge indicator, 11-78 low-battery detector, I11-63, IV-76 low-battery indicator, 1-124, 11-77, IV-80 low-battery protector, I11-65 low-battery warning/disconnect, III65 protection circuit, ni-cad batteries, IlI-62 sensor, quick-deactivating, I11-61 splitter, I11-66 status indicator, 11-77 step-up switching regulator for 6V. 1178 temperature-sensing battery charger, ni-cad batteries, IV-77 test circuit, IV-78 test circuit. ni-cad batteries, IV-79 threshold indicator, 1-124 undervoltage indicator for, 1-123 voltage, 11-79 voltage detector relay in. 11-76 voltage gauge, automotive battery, IV-47 voltage indicator, solid-state, 1-120 voltage measuring regulator, IV-77 voltage monitor, 11-79 voltage monitor, HTS, 1-122 voltage-level indicator, IV-80 battery-life extender, 9 V, 111-62, IV-75 battery-operated equipment ac power control switch, batterytriggered, IV-387 automatic shutoff, I11-61 automotive battery supply, 15 V and 5 V, IV-391 automotive cassette-deck power
714
circuit, JV-548 bipolar power supply for, 11-475 buffer amplifier for standard cell, 1351 fence charger, 11-202 flasher, high powered, 11-229 lantern circuit, 1-380 light, capacitance operated, 1-131 On indicator, IV-217 undervoltage indicator for, 1-123 warning iight, 11-320 BaxandaIl tone-control audio amplifier, 1V-588 BCD-to-analog converter, 1-160 BeD-ta-parallel converter, multiplexed, 1-169 beacon transmitter, I11-683 beep transformer, I11-555, I11-566 beepers back-up, automotive circuits, III-49 repeater, 1-19 bells electronic, 11-33, IV-9 electronic phone, 1-636 benchtop power supply, Il-472 bicycle speedometer, IV-271, IV-282 bilateral current source, I11-469 binary counter, 11-135 biomedical instrumentation differential amplifier, IIl-282 bipolar dc-dc converter with no inductor, 11-132 ~lar power supply, 11-475 bipolar voltage reference source, III774 biquad audio filter, 1-292-293, III-185 second-order bandpass, IIl-188 RC active bandpass, 1-285 bird-chirp sound effect, 11-588, 111-577 bistable multivibrator, touch-triggered, 1-133 bit grabber, computer circuits, JV-I05 blinkers (see flashers and blinkers) blown-fuse alarm, 1-10 boiler control, 1-638 bongos, electronic, 11-587 boosters 12ns, 11-97 audio, II1-35, 11-455 booster/buffer for reference current boost, IV-425 electronic, high-speed, 11-96 forward-current, I11-17 LED,I-307 power booster, op-amp design, IV358 rf amplifiers, broadcast band booster, IV-487 shortwave FET, 1-561
bootstrapping, cable, 1-34 brake lights extra, delayed, IIIM flashing, extra, Ill-51 brake, PWM speed control/energy recovering, I11-3S0 breakers 12ns, 11-97 high-speed electronic, 11-96 breaker power dwell meter, 1-102 breakout box, buffer, 11-120 breath alert alcohol tester, III.359 breath monitor, III-350 bridge balance indicator, 11-82 bridge circuits, 1-552, 11-80-85, I11-6S71, IV-81-83 ac, Il-Sl ac servo amplifier with, I11-387 accurate nUll/variable gain circuit, III69 air-flow sensing thermistor bridge, IV-82 auto-zeroing scale, I11-69 balance indicator, 11-82 bridge transducer amplifier, I11-71 crystal-controlled bridge oscillator, TV'127 differential amplifier, two op-amp, Il83 inductance bridge, IV-83 load driver, audio circuits, III-35 low power common source amplifier, 11-84 one-power supply design, IV-S3
QRP SWR, 111-336
rectifier, fixed power supplies, IV-398 remote sensor loop transmitter, III70 strain Rauge signal conditioner, 11-85,
111-71
transducer, amplifier for, -11-84 Wien bridge, variable oscillator, III424 Wien-bridge filter, I11-659 Wien-bridge oscillator, I11-429 Wien-bridge oscillator, low-distortion, thermally stable, III-557 Wien-bridge oscillator, low-voltage,
111-432
bucklboost converter, III -113 bucking regulator, high~voltages, III481 buffers, IV-88-00 ac, single-supply, high-speed, 1-127128 ADC input, high-resolution, 1-127 AID, 6-bit, high-speed, 1-127 booster/buffer for reference current boost, IV-425 capacitance, stabilized low-input, -Ill502 -input/output, for analog multiplexers, III-ll inverting bistable buffer, IV-90 oscillator buffers, IV-89 precision-increasing design, IV89 rf amplifiers, buffer amplifier with modulator, IV-490 stable, high-impedance, 1-128 unity gain, stable, good speed and high-input impedance, 11-6 video, low-distortion, I11-712 wideband, high-impedance/lowcapacitance 1-127 buffer amplifiers IOx,I-128 100x, 1-128 ac, single-supply, 1-126 battery-powered, standard cell, 1-351 sinewave output, 1-126 unity-gain, stable design, H-6 buffered breakout box, 11-120 bug detector, III365 bug tracer, III -358 bull horn, 11-453, IV-31 burglar alarms (see alarms) burst generators (see also function generators; sound generators; waveform generators), 11-86-90, III72-74 multi-, square waveform, 11-88 rf, portable, III-73 single timer IC square wave, 11-89 single-tone, 11-87 strobe-tone, 1-725, 11-90 tone, 11-90 tone burst, European repeaters, III74
Wien-bridge oscillator, single-supply, IlI-558 brightness controls, I11-308 LED,I-250 low loss, 1-377 broadband communications ac active rectifier, IV-271 broadcast-band rf amplifier, 11-546, III284 buck converter, 5V/0.5A, 1-494
burst_power control, III-362 bus interface, eight bit uP, 11-114 Butler oscillators aperiodic,I-196 common base, 1-191 emitter follower, 11-190-191, 11-194 Butte:r-loVOrth filter, high-pass, fourthorder, 1-280 buzzers door buzzer, IVg
715
buzzers (cont.) continuous tone 2kHZ, 1-11 gated 2kHz, 1-12
cable bootstrapping, 1-34 cable tester, 111-539 calibrated circuit, DVM auto, 1-714 calibrated tachometer, 111-598 calibration standard, precision, 1-406 calibrators crystal, 100 kHz, 1-185 electrolytic-capacitor reforming circuit, IV-276 ESR measurer, IV-279 oscilloscope, 11-433, III-436 portable, 1-644 square-wave, 5 V, 1-423 tester, IV-265 wave-shaping circuits, high slew rates, IV-650 cameras (see photography-related circuits; television-related circuits; video circuits) canceller, central image, 111-358 capacitance buffers low-input, 111-498 low-input, stabilized, 111-502 capacitance meters, 1-400, 11-91-94, III-75-77 AID, three-and-a-haIf digit, III-76 capacitance-to-voltage, 11-92 digital, 11-94 capacitance multiplier, 1-416, 11-200 capacitance relay, 1-130 capacitance switched light, 1-132 capacitance-to-pulse width converter, 11-126 capacitance-to-mltage meter, 11-92 capacitor discharge high-voltage generator, III-485 ignition system, 11-103 capacity tester, battery, I11-66 car port, automatic light controller, 11308 cars (see automotive circuits) carrier-current circuits, 111-78-82, IV91-93 AM receiver, Ill-SI audio transmitter, 1lI-79 data receiver, IV-93 data transmitter, IV-92 FM receiver, HI-80 intercom, 1-146 power-line modem, III-82 receiver, 1-143 receiver, single transistor, 1-145 receiver, IC, 1-146
remote control, 1-146 transmitter, 1-144 transmitter, integrated circuit, 1-145 carrier-operated relay (COR), IV-461 carrier system receiver,-1-141 carrier transmitter with on/off 200kHz line, 1-142 cascaded amplifier, 111-13 cassette bias oscillator, II-426 cassette interface, telephone, III-618 cassette-recorders (s~ tape-recorder circuits) centigrade thermometer, 1-655, 11-648, 11-662 central image canceller, 111-358 charge pool power supply, 111-469 charge pumps positive input/negative output, 1-418, III-360 regulated for fixed power supplies, IV-396 chargers (see battery charger) chase circuit, 1-326, III-197 Chebyshev filters {see also filter circuits) bandpass, fourth..order, IIl-191 fifth-order multiple feedback lowpass, II-219 high-pass, fourth-order, III-191 chime circuit, low.;cost, II-33 chopper amplifier, 1-350, 11-7, III-12 checkers buzz box continuity and coil, 1-551 car battery condition, 1-lOS crystal, 1-178, 1-186 zener diode, 1-406 chroma demodulator with RGB matrix, IlI-716 chug-chug sound generator, ITI-576 circuit breakers (see also protection circuits) 12ns, Il-97 ac, III-512 high-speed electronic, 11-96 trip circuit, IV-423 circuit protection (see protection cir~ cuits) clamp-on-current probe compensator, 11-501 clamp-limiting amplifiers, active, Ill-IS clamping circuits video signal, 1lI-726 video sununing amplifier and, I11-710 class-D power amplifier, 111-453 clippers, 11-394, IV-648 audio-powered noise, 11-396 audio clipper/limiter, IV-355 zener-design, fast and symmetrical, IV-329
clock circuits, 11-100-102, III-83-S5 60Hz clock pulse generator, II-102 adjustable TTL, 1-614 comparator, 1-156 crystal oscillators, micropower design, IV-122 digital, with alann, I1I-84 gas discharge displays, 12-hour, 1-253 oscillator/clock generator, Ill-SS phase lock, 2O-Mhz to Nubus, III105 run-down clock for games, IV-205 sensor touch switch and clock, IV591 single op amp, I11-85 source, clock source, 1-729 three-phase from reference, 11-101 TTL, wide-frequency, I11-85 ZBO computer, II-121 clock generators oscillator, 1-615, III-S5 precision, 1-193 pulse generator, 60 Hz, 11-102 clock radio, 1-542
AM/FM,I-543
CMOS circuits 555 astable true rail to rail square wave generator, 11-596 9-bit, I1I-167 coupler, optical, III-414 crystal oscillator, III-l34 data acquisition system, II-1l7 flasher, I1I-199 inverter, linear amplifier from, 11-11 mixer, I-57 optical coupler, III-414 oscillator, I1I-429, I11-430 short-pulse generator, III-523 timer, programmable, precision, 111652 touch switch, 1-137 universal logic probe, I1I-499 coaxial cable, five-transistor pulse booster, 11-191 Cockcroft-Walton cascaded voltage doubler, IV-635 code-practice oscillator, I-IS, 1-20, 122,11-428-431, IV-373, IV-375, IV376 coil drivers, current-limiting, III-173 coin flipper circuit, III-244 calor amplifier, video, III-724 calor-bar generator, IV-614 color organ, 11-583, 11-584 color video amplifier, 1-34 Coipitts crystal oscillator, 1-194, 1-572, 11-147 1-to-20 MHz, IV-123 frequency checker, 1V-301
716
harmonic. 1-189-190
two-frequency, IV-127
compressor/expander circuits, III-9I95. IV9497

amplifier/compressor, low-distortion,
combination locks electronic, ll-l96 electronic. three-dial. 11-195 commutator, four-channel, 11-364 companders (see compressor/expander circuits) comparators. 1-157. 11-103-112. IIl-8690 demonstration circuit, 11-109 diode feedback. 1-150 display and. 11-105 double-ended limit. 1-156. 11-105 dual limit. 1-151 fourchannel. IIl90 frequency. 11109 frequencydetecting. IIl-88 highimpedance. 1157
high-input impedance window com-
parator.II108 high-low level comparator with one op amp. 11108 latch and. IIl88 LED frequency. 11110 limit. 11104. 1156 low-power, less than lOllV hysteresis, ll-l04 microvolt. dual limit. IIl89 microvolt, with hysteresis, III-88
monostable using, 11-268
opposite polarity input voltage. 1155 oscillator. tunable signal. 1-69 power supply overvoltage. glitch detection with. 11107 precision, balanced input/variable offset. III89 precision. photodiode. 1880. 1384 time-out. 1-153 TI'L-compatible Schmitt trigger. 11 111 three-input and gate comparator, Dp-amp design. IV363 variable hysteresis. 1149 voltage comparator. IV-659
voltage monitor, 11-104
window. 1-152. 1154. ITI06. III87. IIl-90. IIl-776-781. IV656658 with hysteresis, 1-157 with hysteresis, inverting, 1-154 with hysteresis, noninverting, 1-153
compass
digital design. IV147 Halleffect. IIl258 compensator, clamp-on-current probe, 11501 composite amplifier, ll-8. III-13 composite-video signal text adder, III716
IV24 audio, 11-44 audio compressor/audio-band splitter, IV95 clock circuit, 1-156 guitar, sound-effect circuit, IV-5l9 hifi. 11-12. 11'13 hifi. deemphasis. III95 hifi. preemphasis. III93 lowvoltage. IIl92 protector circuit, IV-35l speech, 11-2 universal design, IV-96-97 variable slope, Ill-94 computalarm, 1-2 computer circuits (see also interfaces), 11113122. III96-108. IV-9B-I09 analog signal attenuator, Ill-lOl alann,I-2 ASCII triplex LCD. 9048/1M80C48 8-cbar/l6-seg. 11116 bit grabber. IVI05 buffered breakout box. 11120 bus interface, 8-bit uP, 11-114 clock pbase lock. 20Mhzto-Nubus. IIII05 CMOS data acquisition system, ll117 CPU interface, one-shot design, IV239 data separator for floppy disks, II -122 deglitcher. IVI09 display. eight.digit. IIl106 dual 8051s execute in lock-step circuit, IV-99 EEPROM pulse generator.~5V powered. III'99 eight-channel mux/demux system. 11115 eight-digit microprocessor display, IIl-106 fliJ>-flop inverter. spare. III103 high-speed data acquisition system, 11-118 interface. 68Ox. 65Ox. 8080 families. IIl98 interval timer. programmable. II~ 678 keyboard matrix interface. IV-240 line protectors. 3 uP 110. IV-I0l logic-level translators. IV242 logic line monitor, m-108 long delay line. logic signals. III107 memory/protector power supply monitor, IV-425 memory saving power supply for, 11488
microprocessor selected pulse width control. 11-116 multiple inputs detector, III-l02 -one-of-eight channel transmission system, III-lOO oscilloscope digital-levels, IV-108 power supply watchdog. 11-494 pulse width control. 11-116 printer-error alarm, IV-lOO reset protection, IV-lOO reset switch, child-proof, IV-107 RGB blue box. III-99 RS-232 dataselector, automatic, III97 RS232C line-driven CMOS circuits. IVI04 RS232toCMOS line receiver. Ill
102
RS232C LED circuit. I11-103 short-circuit sensor, remote data lines. IVI02 signal attenuator, analog, microprocessor-controBed, III-1Oi socket debugger, coprocessor, III104 speech synthesizer, Ill-732 stalled-output detector, IV-109 switch debouncer, IV-l05 switch debouncer, auto-repeat, IV106 triac array driver. ll-4l0 uninterruptible power supply. 11-462 Vpp generator for EPROMs. IT-110 XOR gate. IVI07 XOR gate up/down counter. IIl-105 Z-80 bus monitor/debugger, IV-103 Z80 clock. 11121 contact switch. 1188 continuity test.... 11533. 11535. Ill 345. III538540. IV287. IV289. IV0296 audible. adjustable. 11538 cable tester. III-539 latching design. IV295 PCB. IT342. 11535 contrast meters, II-447 automatic, 1-472 control circuits (see alsQ alanns; detectors; indicators; monitors; motor control circuits; sensors), ill-378390 ac servo. amplifier, bridge-type, ill387 boiler. 138 brightness, low-loss, 1-377 fan speed. IIl382 feedback speed. 1-447 floodiamp power. 1373 fluid level. 1387
717
control circuits (cont.) full-wave SCR, 1-375 heater, 1-639 hi-fi tone, high-Z input, 1-676 high-power, sensitive contacts for, 1371
capacitance-to-pulse width, 11-126 current-to-frequency, IV-113 current-to-frequency, wide-range, 1-
164
current-to-voltage, 1-162, 1-165 current-to-voltage, grounded bias and sensor, 11-126 current-to-voltage, photodiode, ll128 dc-dc, 3-25 V, I11-744, IV-118 dc-to-dc, + 3-to- + 5 V battery, IV119 dc-to-de, l-to-5 V, IV-1I9 dc-to-dc, bipolar, no inductor, 11-132 dc-to-dc, fixed 3- to 15-V supplies, IV-400 dc-to-dc., isolated +lSY., 111-115 dc-to-de, push-pull, 400 V, 60 W, 1210 dc-to-dc, regulating, 1-210, 1-211, 11125, IJI-121 dc-to-dc, step up-step down, 111-118 digitaI-to-analog (see digitaI-to-analog conversion) fixed power supply, I11-470 flyback, 1-211 flyback, self oscillating, 1-170, 11-128 flyback, voltage, high-efficiency, 111744 frequency, 1-159 frequency-ta-voltage (see frequencyto-voltage conversion) high-to-low impedance, 1-41 intennittent converter, power-saving design, IV-1l2 light intensity-ta-frequency, 1-167 logarithmic, fast-action, 1-169 low-frequency, 111-111 ohms-to-volts, 1-168 oscilloscope, 1-471 period-ta-voltage, IV-lt5 pico-ampere, 70 voltage with gain, 1170 PIN photodiode-to-frequency, III-120 polarity, 1-166 positive-to-negative, I11-112, IIl-113 peak-to-peak, ac-dc, precision, 11-127 pulse height-to-width, IlI-119 pulse train-to-sinusoid, III-122 pulse width-to-voltage, 1II-117 radio beacon converter, IV-495 rectangular-to-triangular wavefonn, IV-116-1I7 regulated 15-\\>ut 6-V driven, IlI-745 resistance-to-vo!tage, 1-161-162 RGB-composite video signals, III-714 RMS-to-de, 11-129, 1-167 RMS-to-de, 50-MHz thermal, IlI-117 RGB-to-NTSC, IV-611
LED brightness, 1-250 Iight-Ievel,I-38O light-level, 860 W limited-range lowcost, 1-376 light-level, brightness, low-loss, 1377 liquid level, 1-388 model train and/or car, 1-453, 1-455 motor controllers (see motor control circuits) onloff, 1-665 phase control, hysteresis-free, 1-373 power taol torque, 1-458 sensitive contact, high power, 1-371 servo system, 111-384 single-setpoint temperature, 1-641 speed control (see speed controllers) switching, JII-383 temperature, 1-64-1-643 temperature-sensitive heater, 1-640 three-phase power-factor, 11-388 tone control (see tane controls) voltage-control, pulse generator and, JII-524 water-level sensing, 1-389 windshield wiper, 1-105 conversion-and converters, 1-503, 11123-132, III-109-122, IV-110-120 3-5 V regulated output, I11-739 4-18 MHz, I11-1I4 4-to-20-mA current loop, IV-Ill 5V-to-isolated 5V at 20MA, I11-474 5V 10.5A buck, 1-494 9-to-5 V converter, IV-1l9 12 V- to 9-, 7.5-, or 6-V, 1-508 12-to-16 V, I11-747 + 50V feed forward switch mode, 1495 + 50 V push-pull switched mode, 1494 lOO MHz, 11-130 lOO V110.25 A switch mode, 1-501 ac-to-dc, 1-165 ac-to-dc, high-impedance precision rectifier, 1-164 analog-to-digital (see analog-to-digital conversion) ATV rf receiver/converter, IV-420 MHz, low-noise, IV-496, IV-497 BCD-to-analog, 1-160 BCD-to-parallel, multiplexed, 1-169 bucklboost, I11-113 calculator-to-stopwatch, 1-153
sawtooth wave converter, lV-1l4 shortwave, III-114 simple LF, 1-546 sine-ta-square wave, 1-170, IV-120 square-ta-sine wave, I11-118 square-to-triangle wave, TIL, 11-125 temperature-ta-frequency, 1-168 temperature-to-time, 111-632-633 triangle'-to-sine wave, 11-127 TTIAo-MOS logic, 11-125, 1-170 two-wire to four-wire audio, 11-14 unipolar-to-dual voltage supply, 111743 video, aid and dla, IV-610-611 video, RGB-to-NTSC, IV-611 VLF,I-547 VLF, rf converter, IV-497 voltage ratio-to-frequency, I11-116 voltage, IIl-742-748, IlI-742 voltage, negative voltage. uP-controlled, IV-117 voltage, oflline, 1.5-W, III-746 voltage-to-current. 1-166, 11-124, III110, IV-118 voltage-to-current, power, 1-163 voltage-to-current, zero IS error, Ill120 voltage-ta-frequency (see voltage-tofrequency conversion) voltage-ta-pulse duration. 11-124 WWV-to-SW rf converter, IV-499 coprocessor socket debugger, III-104 countdown timer, 11-680 countens, 11-133-139, I1I-123-130 analog circuit, 11-137 attendance, 11-138 binary, 11-135 divide-by-N, CMOS progranunable, 1-257 divide-by-n, 1+ GHz, IV-155 divide-by-odd-number, IV-153 frequency, I1I-340, IIl-168, IV-300 frequency, 1.2 GHz, I1I-129 frequency, 100MHz, III-126 frequency, 100 MHz, periodic, 11-136 frequenCY,Jow-cost, III-124 frequency, preamp, ID-128 frequency, tachometer and, 1-310 geiger, 1-536-537 microfarad cOlUlter, IV-27S odd-number divider and, 111-217 preamplifier. oscilloscope, 1lI-438 precision frequency, 1-253 programmable, low-power widerange, I11-126 ring, 20 kHz, 11-135 ring, incandescent lamp, 1-301 ring, low cost, 1-301 ring, low-power pulse circuit, IV-437
718
ring, SCR, III-195
ring, variable timing, II l34 time base, function generators, 1

M
Hz,IV-201
universal, 10 MHz, 1-255, II-139 universal, 40-MHz, III-127

up/down, 8-digit, 11-134
Colpitts, frequency checker, IV-301 Colpitts, two-frequency, IV-127 crystal-controlled oscillator as, 11-147 crystal-stabilized le timer for subharmonic frequencies, II-lS1
crystal tester, 1-178, 1-186, II-151
current analyzer, auto battery, 1-104 .current booster, 1-30, 1-35 current collector head amplifier, 11-11,
II-295
current loop, 4-to-20-mA converter, IV-
111
current meters and monitors, 1-203, II152-157, Ill-338
up/down, extreme count freezer. III125 up/down, XOR gate, III-105 couplers linear, ac analog, JI-412 linear, analog, 11413 linear, dc, II-411 optical, CMOS design, III-414 optical, ITL design, II!-416
doubler and, 1-184 easy start-up, III-132

FET, 1 MHz, 1I-144
fundamental-frequency, III-132
high-frequency, [-175, II-l4B
highfrequency signal generator as,

11-150
IC-compatible, 11-145 W for 5SB transmitter controlled by,

II-142
photon, II412 transmitter oscilloscope for CB signals, [-473 courtesy light delay/extender, 1-98, III42, Ill-50 CRO doubler, IIl-439 cross-fader, 11-312 cross-hatch generator. color TV, III724 crossover networks, IJ-35 5V,I-518 ac/dc lines, electronic, 1-515 active, 1-172 active, asymmetrical third order Butterworth,I-173 electronic circuit for, 11-36 crowbars, 1-516 electric, I11-51O electronic, 11-99 SCR, II-496 crystal oscillators (see also oscillators), [-180,1-183-185, 1-195, [-198, II140-151, Ill-131-140, [V-121-128 Uo-20 MHz, ITL design, IV-127 1-to-4 MHz, CMOS design, IV-125 10 MHz, II-141 10-to-150 kHz, [V-125 10-to-80 MHz, IV-125 50-10-150 MHz, IV-I26 96 MHz, [-179 150-to-30,000 kHz, IV-126 330 MHz, IV-125 aperiodic, parallel-mode, 1-196 bridge, crystal-controlled, IV-I27 Butler oscillator, 1-182 calibrator, 100 kHz, 1-185, IV124 ceramic, 10 MHz, varactor tuned, 11-
low-frequency, 1-184, 11-146 low-frequency, 10 kHz to 150 kHz,

II-146
ac current indicator, JV-290 current sensing in supply rails, 11-153 electrometer amplifier with overload protection, 11-155 Hall-effect circuit, I11-255 Hall-sensor, rv284 high-gain current sensor, IV-291 pica ammeter, II-l54, 11-157 pica ammeter, guarded input, 11-156 range ammeter, six-decade, 11-153,
11-156
low-noise, 11-145 OF-l HI oscillator, international, 1-197 OF-1 LO oscillator, international, I

189
overtone, 1-176, 1-180, 1-183, II-146 overtone, 100 MHz, IV-124 marker generator, III-138 mercury cell crystal-controlled oscillator as, 11-149 overtone, 1-176, 1-177, 1-180, 1-186,
Ill-146
current readout, rf, 1-22 current sensing, supply rails, II-153 current sink, 1-206 1 mA for fixed power supplies, IV- 402 voltage-controlled, IV-629 current sources, 1-205, 1-697
0-to-200-nA, [V-327 bilateral, I1I-469, 1-694-695
Pierce, 11-144 Pierce, IMHz, JII-I34

Pierce, JFET, [-198
bipolar, inverting, 1-697 bipolar, noninverting, 1-695 constant, 1-697, I11-472 fixed power supplies, bootstrapped
amp, IV-406
Pierce, low-frequency, III-133

quartz, two-gate, IlI-136
reflection oscillator, crystal-controlled, I1I-136
5chmitt trigger, 1-181 signal source controlled by, 11-143 sine-wave oscillator, 1-198 stable low frequency, 1-198
standard, 1 MHz, [-197
fixed power supplies, differentialinput, fast-acting, IV-40S low-current s.ource, fixed power supplies, IV-399 precision, 1-205 precision, 1mA to 1mA, 1-206 regulator, variable power supply, III490
temperature-compensated, 1-187, Ill137
variable power supplies, voltageprogrammable, IV-420 voltagecontrolled, grounded source!

load, IlI-468
temperature-compensated, SV driven, low-power, JI-142 third-overtone, 1-186, IV-123 time base, economical design, 1V128
ITL design, [-179 ITL design, 1-to-20 MHz, IV-127
current-loop controller, SCR design,

IV-387
TTL-compatible, 1-197 transistorized,I-I88 tube-type, 1-192

\'IIF, 20-MHz, Ill-138 VHF, 5O-MHz, IlI-140 VHF, lOO-MHz, IIl-139
currentshunt amplifiers, 111-21 current-to-frequency converter, IV113 wide range, 1-164 current-to-voltage amplifier, highspeed, 1-35 current-to-voltage converter, 1162, J165
141
clock, micropower design, IV-122
CMOS, 1-187, 111-134 CMOS, 1-to-4 MRz, [V-125 Colpitts, II-147
grounded bias and sensor in, 11-126 photodiode, 11-128 curve tracer
diodes, IV-274 FET,I-397
voltage-controlled, III-135, IV-124 crystal switching, overtone oscillator

with, [-183
Colpitts, 1-to-20 MHz, IV-123
CW radio communications
719
CW radio communications (cont.) filter, razor sharp, II~219 keying circuits, IV-244 offset indicator, IV~213 SSBICW product detector, IV-139 transceiver, 5 W, 80~meter, IV~602 transmitter, loW, I11-678 transmitter, 40M, III ~684 transmitter, 902-MHz, I11-686 transmitter, HF low-power, IV-60l transmitter, QRP, I11-690 cyclic AJD converter, ll30
D
darkroom equipment (see photography related circuits) Darlington regulator, variable power supplies, IV421 data-manipulation circuits, IV-129-133 acquisition circuits, CMOS system, II-1l7 acquisition circuits, fourchannel, I 421 acquisition circuits, highspeed system, II118 analogsignal transmission isolator, IV-l33 dataacquisition systems, IV131 link, IR type, 1-341 prescaler, lowfrequency, 1V-132 readtype circuit, 5 MHz, phase encoded, II-365 receiver/message demuxer, threewire, IV-130 selector, RS-232, I11-97 separator, floppy disk, 11-122 data transmission receiver, carrier-current circuit design, IV-93 transmitter, carriercurrent circuit design, IV-92 de adapter/transceiver, handheld, Ill 461 de geoerators, high-voltage, I11-4S1 dc restorer, video,-III723 -1ie servo drive, bipolar control input, 11 385 de static switch, ll367 dcto-dc converters, IV118 !-to-5 V, IV-1l9 3-25 V, I11-744 bipolar, no inductor, 11132 dual output 12-15 V, I11-746 fixed power supplies, 3-to15 V, IV 400 isolated + 15 V, III-115 push-pull, 400 V, 60 W, 1-210
regulated, 1-210, 1-211, II-125, III121 step up/step down, llI1l8 dc-to-dc SMPS variable power supply, II-480 debouncer, I11-592, IV-105 autorepeat, IV106 flip-flop, IV-IOS debugger, coprocessor sockets, III104 decibel level detector, audio, with meter driver, 1lI154 decoders, II-l62, I11-141-145 10.S MHz FSK, 1-214 24percent bandwidth tone, 1215 direction detector, Ill144 dualtone, 1215 encoder and, III144 frequency division multiplex stereo, II-169 PALINTSC, with RGB input, I11-7l7 radio control receiver, 1574 SCA, 1-214, I11-166, I11-170 secondaudio program adapter, Ill 142 soundactivated, III145 stereo TV, ll167 time division multiplex stereo, 11-168 tone alert, 1213 tone dial, 1-631 tone dial sequence, 1630 tone, 1-231, III-l43 tone, dual ti..-ne constant, 11-166 -tone, relay output, 1213 video, NTSC-to-RGB, IV-613 weatheralert detector/decoder, IV 140 deglitcher circuit, computer circuits, IV-109 delay circuitsl delay units, III-l46-l48 adjustable, 1lI-148 door chimes, 1-218 headlights, 1-107, 11-59 leading-edge, 1lI-147 long duration time, 1-217, 1-220 precision solid state, 1664pulse, dual-edge trigger, 1lI-147 time delay, constantcurrent charg ing, II-668 time delay, simple design, 1668, 11 220 windshield wiper delay, 1-97, II-55 delay line, analog, echo and reverb effects, 1V21 delayed pulse generator, H509 delay relay, ultraprecise long time, IT211 demodulators, II-15S-160, I11-149-150 5V FM, 1-233
12V FM, 1-233 565 SCA, 1lI-160 AM, II-l60 cbroma, with RGB matrix, 1lI-7l6 FM,1I-161 FM, narrow-band, carrier detect, 11 159 linear variable differential transformer driver, 1-403 LVDT circuit, I11-323-324, I11-323 LVDT driver, II-337 stereo, II-159 telemetry, 1-229 demonstration comparator circuit, ll 109 demultiplexer, 111-394 descramblers. II162 gated pulse, II-165 outband,II-164 sine wave, II163 derived centerchannel stereo system, IV-23 detectand-hold circuit, peak, 1585 detection switch, adjustable light,I-362 detectors (see also aIanns; control circuits; indicators; monitors; sensors), II-171-178, 1lI-151-162, IV-134-145 air flow, 1-235, II-240-242 air motion, 1-222, III-364 airpressure change, IVl44 amplifier, four quadrant photoconduc tive, 1-359 angle of rotation, II283 bug, 1lI-365 controller circuit, IV-142 decibel level, audio, with meter driver, III-154 direction detector, thennally oper ated, IV-l35 double-ended limit, 1-230, 1-233 duty-cycle, IV-l44 edge, 1lI-157, 1-226 electrostatic, 1lI-337 envelope detector, 1lI-155 envelope detector, AM signals, IV 142 envelope detector, lowlevel diodes, IV-141 flame, 1lI-313 flow, I11-202-203 flow, low-rate thermal, I11-203 fluid and moisture, II-243, II-248, III204-210, IV-194-191 frequency limit, II-177 frequency window, I11-777 frequency, digital, 1lI-158 frequency-boundary, 1lI-156
720
gas, 11278, III246253
gas and smoke. 1-332 gas and vapor, 11-279 ground-fault Hall detector, IV-20B209 highfrequency peak, II175 highspeed peak, 1232 IC product detector, IV143 infrared, II289, IIl276, IV224
positive peak, 1-225, 1-235 power loss, 11-175

product, 1223, 1861 proximity, 1344, 11135, 11136, IV 341346
instrumentation, 1-347, III-283 instrumentation, biomedical, III-282

programmable gain, III507
IR, long-range objects, III-273

level,II174 level, with hysteresis,
lie detector, IV-2oo
I~235
pulse coincidence, 11-178 pulse sequence, 11-172 pulse-width, out-of-bounds, III-158 radar (see radar detector) radiation (see radiation detector) resistance ratio, 11-342 rf, II500, IVI39 rf detector probe, IV433
Schmitt trigger, IllI53 smoke, II278, Ill246253, IV140
two op amp bridge type, 11-83 differential analog switch, 1-622 differential capacitance measurement
circuit, 11665 differential hold, 1589, 11365
differential multiplexers demultiplexer/, 1425

wide band, 1428
differential thermometer, 11-661. III638
light detector, IV369 light interruption, 1364 light level, IIl316
light level, level drop, I11-3I3 line-current, optically coupled, III414 liquid level, 1388, 1390
smoke, ionization chamber, 1-332":333 smoke, operated ionization type, 1596
smoke, photoelectric, 1-595 speech activity on phone lines, 11617, Ill615
low-level video, video IF amplifier, 1687689
differential voltage or current alarm, 113 differentiators, 1-423 negative-edge, 1-419 positive-edge, 1-420 digital-capacitance meter, 11-94 digital-IC, tone probe for testing, 11-504 digital-frequency meter, I11-344
digitallogic probe, Ill497 digital audio tape (DAT)
low-line loading ring, 1-634 low-voltage, 1-224

magnet, permanent-magnet detector, IV281 magnetic transducer, 1-233 MC!330/MC!352 television IF amplifier, 1-688 metal, II350352, IV137 missing pulse, 1-232, III-159 moisture, 1-442
motion, motion,
SSB/CW product detectors, IV139 stalled computer-output detector, IV109
static detector, IV-276 telephone ring, I11-619, IV-564 telephone ring, optically interfaced,
III--611
ditherizing circuit, IV-23 digital multimeter (DMM) high-resistance-measuring, IV-291 digital oscillator, resistance controlled,
II426
threshold, precision, III-157

tone, 500Hz, Ill 154
digital transmission isolator, 11-414

digital voltmeters (DVM)
1V-341-346 UHF, III-SI6 multiple-input, computer circuit, III102
toxic gas, 11-280 true nns, 1-228 TV sound IFIFM IF amplifier with quadrature, 1-690 two-sheets in printer detector, IV136
3.5-digit, common anode display, 1713
3.5-digit, full-scale, four-decade, III761 3.75digit, 1711 4.5-digit, Ill7OO 4.5-digit, LCD display, 1717
negative peak, 1-234 nuclear particle, 1-537

null, 1148, IIl162 peak program, Ill 771 peak, II174, II175, IV138, IV143 peak, analog, with digital hold, Ill 153 peak, digital, Ill1OO peak, highbandwidth, III161 peak, lowdrift, Ill156 peak, negative, 1-225 peak, op amp, IV145 peak, positive, IIl169 peak, widebandwidth, Ill162 peak, widerange, IIH52
ultra-low drift peak, 1-227 undervoltage detector, IV-I38 video, low-level video IF amplifier, 1687689
voltage level, 1-8, 11-172 weather-alert decoder, IV-l40

window, 1235, Ill776781, IV658
auto-calibrate circuit, 1-714 automatic nulling, 1-712 interface and temperature sensor, 11647 digital-ta-analog converters, 1-241, 11179-181, IllI63169
peak voltage, precision, 1-226 people-detector, infrared-activated,

IV225 pH level. probe and, Ill501 phase, Ill440442
zero crossing, 1-732, 1-733, II-173 zero crossing, with temperature sensor, 1-733 deviation meter, IV-303 dial pulse indicator, telephone, III-613 dialers, telephone pulse-dialing telephone, III-6lO pulse/tone, single-chip, 111-603 telephone-line powered repertory, 1633
tonedia1ing telephone, IIIOO7 dice, electronic, 1325, Ill245, IV207
O-to -5V output, resistor terminated,

1239 3digit, BCD, 1239 -8bit, 1240241
8-bit, high-speed, 1-240 8-bit, output current to voltage. 1-243 8-bit to 12-bit, two, 11-180
9'bit, CMOS, IlI167 10bit, 1238
lO-bit, 4-quad, offset binary coding,

multiplying, 1241 + 10V full scale bipolar, 1-242 + 10V iuII scale unipolar, 1244 12-bit, binary two's complement, III166
phase, IO-bit accuracy, 11-176 photodiode level, precision, 1-365
differential amplifiers, 1-38, 111-14 high-impedance, 1-27, 1-354 high-input high-impedance, 11-19
721
digital-to-analog converters (cont.) 12-bit, precision, 1-242 12-bit, variable step size, 11-181 14-bit binary, 1-237 16-bit binary, 1-243 fast voltage output, 1-238 high-speed voltage output, 1-244 multiplying, III-168 output amplifier, four-channel, III-165 video converter, IV-610-611 digitizer, tilt meter, I11-644-646 dimmers (see lights/light-activated and controlled circuit-s) diode emitter driver, pulsed infrared, 11-292 diode tester, 11-343, I11-402 go/no-go, 1-401 zener diodes, 1-406 diode-matching circuit, IV-280 dip meter>, 1-247, 11-182-183 basic grid, 1-247 dual gate IGFET, 1-246 little dipper, 11-183 varicap tuned FET, 1-246 diplexer/mixer, IV-335 direction detector, thermally operated, IV-135 direction detector decoder, I11-144 direction finders, IV-146-149 compass, digital design, IV-147 radio-signal direction finder, IV-148149 direction-of-rotation circuit, I11-335 directional-signals monitor, auto, I11-48 disco strobe light, 11-610 discrete current booster, 11-30 discrete sequence oscillator, III-421 discriminators multiple-aperture, window, I11-781 pulse amplitude, I11-356 pulse width, ll-227 window, I11-776-781 display cirouits, 11-184-188, I11-170-171 3112 digit DVM common anode, 11713 60 dB dot mode, 11-252 audio, LED bar peak program meter, 11-254 bar-graph indicator, ac signals, 11-187 brightness control, ill-316 comparator and, 1I-10S exclamation point, 11-254 expanded scale meter. dot or bar, 11186 LED bar graph driver, 11-188 LED matrix, two-variable, IIl-171 oscilloscope, eight-channel voltage, IIl-435 dissolver, lamp. solid-state, I11-304
distribution circuits, 11-35 distribution amplifiers audio, 1-39, 11-39 signal, 1-39 divider>, IV-150-156 1 + GHz divide-by-n counter. IV-155 7490-divided-by-n cirouits, IV-I54 binary chain, 1-258 counter, divide-by-odd-number, IV153 divide-by-2-or-3 cirouit, IV-I54 divide-by-n + 1/2 circuit, IV-l56 frequency, 1-258, 11-254, IIl-213-218 frequency divider, clock input, IV-151 frequency, decade, 1-259 frequency, divide-by-ll12, ill-216 frequency. low frequency. II-253 frequency divider. progranunable. IV152-153 mathematical. one trim, III-326 odd-number cOWlter and, III-217 pulse, non-integer programmable, 11511, III-226 Dolby noise reduction circuits, I11-399 decode mode, I11-401 encode mode. III-400 door bells/chimes, 1-218, 1-443, IV-8 buzzer, two-door. IV-10 musical-tone. IV-522 rain alann, 1-443 single-chip design, IV-S24 sliding tone, n-M door-open alarm, 11-284, III-46 Hall-effect cirouit, I11-256 door opener, I11-366 aot-expanded scale meter, 11-186 double-sideband suppressed-carrier modulator, IIl-377 double-sideband suppressed-carrier rf, 11-366 doublers oto 1MHz, 11-252 150 to 300 MHz, 1-314 audio-frequency doubler, IV-16-17 broadband frequency, 1-313 CRO, oscilloscope, IIl-439 crystal oscillator, 1-184 frequency, 1-313, 1II-215 frequency, digital, I11-216 frequency, GASFET design, IV-324 frequency, single-chip, III-218 low-frequency, 1-314 voltage, IIl-459 voltage, triac-controlled, III-468 downbeat-emphasized metronome, III353-354 drivers and drive circuits, 1-260, 11-189 193, III'172-175, IV-157-160 50 ohm, 1-262
bar-graph driver, transistorized, IV213 BIFET cable, 1-264 bridge loads, audio circuits, I11-35 capacitive load, 1-263 coaxial cable, 1-266, 1-560 coaxial cable, five-transistor pulse boost, 11-191 coil, current-limiting, I11-173 CRT deflection yoke, 1-265 de modulator, linear variable differential transformer, 1-403 fiber optic, 50-Mb/s, I11-178 flash slave, 1-483 glow plug, 11-52 high-impedance meter, 1-265 instrumentation meter, 11-296 lamp, 1-380 lamp, flip-flop independent, IV-160 lamp, low-frequency flasher/relay, 1300 lamp, optically coupled, III-413 lamp, short-cirouit proof, 11-310 laser diode, high-speed, 1-263 LED, bar graph, 11-188 LED, emitter/follower, IV-159 line signals, 600-ohm balanced, 11 192 line, 1-262 line, SO-ohm transmission, 11-192 line, full rail excursions in, ll-l90 line-synchroulaed, I11-174 load, tizning threshold, III-648 LVDT demodulator and, 11-337, IIl323-324 meter-driver rf amplifier, I-MHz. III545 microprocessor triac array, 11-410 motor drivers (see motor control, driver multiplexer, high-speed line, 1-264 neon iamp, 1-379 op amp power driver, IV-158-159 optoisolated, high-voltage,lII-482 power driver, op amp, IV-158-159 pulaed infrared diode emitter, 11-292 relay, 1-264 relay. delay and controls closure time, 11-530 relay, with strobe, 1-266 RS-232C, low-power, 1II-175 shift register, 1-418 solenoid, 1-265, 1II-571-573 SSB, low distortion 1.6 to 30MH, 11538 stepping motor, 11-376 totem-pole, with bootstrapping, III175 two-phase motor, 1-456
722
VCO driver, op-amp design, IV-362 drQp-voltage recovery for long-line systems, IV-328 drum sound effect, 11-591 dual-tone decoding, 11-620 dual-tracking regulator, I11-462 duplex line amplifier, ITI-616 duty-cycle detector, IV-l44 duty-cycle meter. IV~275 duty-cycle monitor, III-329 duty-cycle multivibrator, 5O-percent. I11-584 duty~cycle oscillators SO-percent, ill-426 variable, fixed-frequency. III-422 dwell meters breaker point, 1-102 digital, I11-45
encoders decoder and, I11-14 telephone handset tone dial, 1-634, I11-613 tone, 1-67, 1-629 tone, two-wire, 11-364 engine tachometer, 1-94 eularger timer, 11-446, I11-445 envelope detectors, III-155 AM signals, IV-142 low-level diodes. IV-141 envelope generator/modulator, musical, IV22 EPROM,Vpp generator for, 11114 equalizers, 1671, IV18 ten-band, graphic, active filter in, 11684
E
eavesdropper, telephone, wireless, Ill620 echo effect, analog delay line, IV-21 edge detector, 1-266, III-157 EEPROM pulse generator, 5V-powered, I11-99 EKG simulator, three-chip, I11-350 elapsed-time timer, 11-680 electric-fence charger, 11-202 electric-vehicle battery saver, 1lI-67 electrolytic-capacitor refonning circuit. IV-276 electrometer, IV-277 electrometer amplifier, overload protected, 11-155 electronic dice, IV-207 electmnic locks, 11-194-197, IV-161163 combination, 1-583, 11-196 digital entry lock, IV-162 keyless design. IV-163 three-dial combination. 11-195 electronic music, I11-360 electronic roulette, 11-276. IV-205 electronic chip siren, 11-576 electronic switch, push on/off, 11-359 electronic theremin, 11-655 electronic thermometer, 11-660 electronic wake-up call, 11-324 electrostatic detector, I1I-337 emergency lantern/flasher, 1-308 emergency light, 1-378, IV-250 emissions analyzer, automotive exhaust, 11-51 emulators, 11-198-200 capacitance multiplier, 11-200 JFET ac coupled integrator, 11-200 resistor multiplier, 11-199 simulated inductor, 11-199
tenband, octave, III658 equipment-on reminder, 1-121 exhaust emissions analyzer, 11-51 expanded-scale meters analog, III774 dot or bar, 11186 expander circuits (see compressor! expander circuits) extended-play circuit. tape-recorders. I11-600 extractor, square-wave pulse, I11-584
F
555 timer astable, low duty cycle, 11-267 beep transformer, III-566 integrator to multiply, 11-669 RC audio oscillator from, 11-567 square wave generator using, 11-595 fader, audio fader. IV-17 fail-safe semiconductor alarm. III-6 fans infrared heat-controlled fan, IV-226 speed controller, automatic, 111-382 Fahrenheit thermometer, 1-658 fault monitor, singlesupply, I11-495 fax/telephone switch, remote-contmUed, IV552553 feedback oscillator, 1-67 fence charger, D201203 batterypowered, 11202 electric, 11-202 solidstate, 11203 FET circuits dual-trace scope switch. 11-432 input amplifier, 11-7 probe, I11-501 voltmeter, III765, III770 fiber optics, 11204207, 111176181 driver, LED, 5OMb/s, III178 interface for, 11-207 link, 1268, 1269, 1-270, III179
motor control, dc, 11-206 receiver, 10 MHz, 11-205 receiver, SO-Mb/s, I11-181 receiver, digital, I11-178 receiver,-high-sensitivity, 3Onw, 1270 receiver, low-cost, 100-M baud rate, III180 receiver. low-sensitivity, 300nW, 1271 receiver, very-high sensitivity. low speed, 3nW, 1269 repeater, 1270 speed control, 11-206 transmitter, III177 field disturbance sensor!alarm, 11-507 fieldstrength meters, 11208212, III182-183, IVI64166 1.5-150 MHz, 1-275 adjustable sensitivity indicator, 1-274 high-sensitivity, 11-211 LF or HF, 11-212 microwave, low-cost, 1-273 rf sniffer, 11-210 sensitive, 1-274, III-l83 signa1strength meter, IV-I66 transmission indicator, 11-211 tuned, 1-276 UHF fields, IV-165 untuned, 1-276 filter circuits, 11-213-224, 111164192, IV-167-177 active (see active filters) antiaIiasing!sync-compensation, IV173 audio, biquad, ID-185 audio, tunable, IV-169 bandpass (see bandpass filters) band-reject, active, 11-401 biquad, 1292293 biquad, audio, III-185 biquad, RC active bandpass, 1-285 bridge filter. twin-T, programmable, 11221 Butterworth, high-pass, fourth-order, 1280 Chebyshev (see Chebyshev filters) CW, razorsharp, 11219 full wave rectifier and averaging, 1229 high-pass (see high-pass filters) low-pass (see -low-pass filters) networks of, 1-291 noise, dynamic. III-190 noisy signals, ID188 notch (see notch filters) programmable, twin-T bridge, 11-221 rejection, 1-283 ripple suppressor, IV-175
723
filter circuits (cont.) rumble, III-192, IV.175 rumble, LM387 in, 1-297 rumble filter, turntable, IV-170 rumble/scratch, IIl-660 SaIlen-Key, 500 Hz bandpass, 1-291 Sallen-key, low-pass, active, IV-177 Sallen-Key, low-pass, equal component, 1-292 Sallen-Key, low-pass, second order, 1-289 scratch, I11-189, IV-175 scratch, LM287 in, 1-297 speech, bandpass, 300 Hz 3kHz, 1295 speech filter, second-order, 3DO-to3,400 Hz, IV-174 speech filter, two-section, 3OO-to3,000 Hz, IV-174 state-variable, 11-215 state-variable, multiple outputs, III-
190
state-variable, second-order, 1kHz, Q/10, 1-293 state-variable, universal, 1-290 turbo, glitch free, I11-186 twin-T bridge filter, 11-221 Wien-bridge, I11-659 voltage-controlled, I11-187 voltage-controlled, 1,000:1 tuning, IV-176 fixed power supplies, I11-457-477, IV390-408 12-VDC battery-operated 120-VAC, I11-464 +24 V, 1.5 A supply from +12 V source, IV-401 15 V isolated to 2,-500 V supply, IV407 audio amplifier supply, 35 V ac, IV-398 audio amplifier supply, 35 V, 5 A, -mobile, IV-407 automotive battery supply, 15 V and 5 V, IV-391 auxiliary supply, IV-394 bias/reference applications, auxiliary negative dc supply, IV-404 bilateral current source, III-469 bridge rectifier, IV-398 charge pool, I11-469 charge pump, regulated, IV-396 constant-current source, safe, III-472 converter, III-470 converter, 5V-to-isolated 5V at 20MA, I11-474 converter, ac-to-dc, IV-395 converter, dc-to-dc, 3-to-lS V, IV400
current sink, 1 mA, IV-402 current source, bootstrapped amp, IV-406 current source, differential-input, fast-acting, IV-405 dc adapter/transceiver, hand-held, I11-461 dual-tracking regulator, I11-462 GASFET power supply, IV-405 general-purpose, ill-465 inverter, 12 V input. IV-395 isolated feedback, I11-460 LCD display power supply, IV-392 , IV-403 linear regulator, low cost, low dropout, I11-459 low-current source, IV-399 low-power inverter, III-466 negative rail, GET, with CMOS gates, IV-408 negative supply from + 12 V source, IV-401 negative voltage from positive supply, IV-397 output stabilizer, IV-393 portable-radio 3 V power supply, IV397 positive and negative voltage power supplies, IV-402 pnp regulator, zener increases voltage output, 11484 programmable, I11-467 rectifier, bridge rectifier, IV-398 rectifier, low forward-drop, I11-471 regulated 1 A, 12 V, IV-401 regulated + 15V I-A, I11-462 regulated -15V I-A, I11-463 regulator, 15V slow turn-on, III-477 regulator, positive with PNP boost, III-471 regulator, positive, with NPN/PNP boost, I11-475 regulator, switching, 3-A, I11-472 regulator, switching, high-current inductorless, III-476 ripple suppressor, IV-396 RTTY machine current supply, IV400 stabilizer, CMOS diode network, IV406 switching, I11-458 switching, 5- and 12 V, ac-powered, IV-404 switching, 50-W off-Une, I11-473 switching, positive and negative voltage, IV-403 switching regulator, 3 A, IV-408 Urree-rail, I11-466 uninterruptible + 5V, I11-477
voltage doubler, III-459 voltage doubler, triac-controlled, III468 voltage regulator, 10V, high stability, I11-468 voltage regulator, 5-V low-dropout, I11-461 voltage regulator, ae, I11-477 -voltage regulator, negative, I11-474 voltage-controlled current source/ grounded soun::e/load, I11-468 fixed-frequency generator, III-231 flame igultor, I11-362 flame monitor, I11-313 flash/flashbulb circuits (see photography-related circuits) flashers and blinkers (see also photography-related circuits), 1-304, II-225, I11-193-210,IV-178-183 1.5 V, minimum power, 1-308 1 kW flip-flop, II-234 lA lamp, 1-306 2 kW, photoelectric control in, 11-232 3V,I-306 ae, I11-196 alternating, 1-307, II-227 astable multivibrator, I11-196 auto, 1-299 automatic safety, 1-302 automotive turn signal, sequential, 1-
109
bar display with alarm, 1-252 barricade, 1-299 boat, 1-299 CMOS, I11-199 dc, adjustable on/off timer, 1-305 dual LED CMOS, 1-302 electronic, 11-228 emergency lantern, 1-308 fast-action, 1-306 flash light, 60-W, I11-200 flicker light, IV-183 flip-flop, 1-299 four-parallel LED, 1-307 high efficiency parallel circuit, -1-308 high-voltage, safe, 1-307 high-power battery operated, 11-229 incandescent bulb, III-198, 1-306 LED, IV-181 LED, alternating, IlI-198, I11-200 LED, control circuit, IV-183 LED, multivibrator design, IV-182 LED, PUT used in, 11-239 LED, ring-around, III-l94 LED flasher, sequential, reversibledirection, IV-IB2 LED, three-year, I11-194 LED, un used in, 11-231 low-current consumption, 11-231
724
low-voltage, 1-305, 11-226 miniature transistorized. II~227 minimum-component, 111-201 neon, 1-303 neon, five-lamp, 1lI-19B neon, two-state oscillator, III-2oo
neon, tube, 1-304 oscillator and, high drive, 11-235
oscillator and, low frequency, 11-234

photographic slave-flash trigger, SCR
design, IV-380, IV-382

photographic time-delay flash trigger,
IV-380 relay driver, low-frequency lamp. 1300 SCR design, 11-230, 1II-197 SCR chaser, 1II-197 SCR relaxation, II-230 SCR ring counter, 1II-195 sequential, 11-233, IV-181
sequential, ac, 11-238 sequencer, pseudorandom simulated,
IV-179 single-huup, 1II-196 strobe a1ann, IV-180 telephone, 11-629, IV-558, IV-559, IV-561 telephone-message flasher, IV-556 transistorized, m-200, 1-303 transistorized. table of, 11-236 variable, 1-308 xenon light, IV-ISO flashlight finder, 1-300 flip-flops
astable, with starter, 11-239
debouncer switch, IV-lOB flasher circuit, 1 kW, use of, 11-234 inverter, llI-I03 SCR,II-367 wave-shaping circuits, SIR, N-6S1 flood alarm, 1-390, I11-206, IV-188 flow detectors, 11-240-242, 1II-202-203 air, 11-242 low-rate thermal, I11-203
thermally based anemometer, 11-241
flowmeter, liquid, IT-24S fluid and moisture detectors. 1-388, 1390,1-442,1I-243-248,1II-204-21O, IV-I84-191 acid rain monitor, 11-245 checker. III-2OO controU-388, I11-206 cryogenic fluid-level sensor. 1-386 dual, I11-207 flood a1ann, I11-206, IV-188 fluid-level control. III-205 full-bathtub indicator, IV-187 full-cup detector for the blind. N-l89 indicator. 11-244
liquid flow meter, 11-248 liquid-level checker, III-209 liquid-level monitor. III-210 liquid-level sensor, IV-l86 liquid-level, dual, 111-207 moisture detector. IV-188 monitor, 111-210 plant water, 11-245, 11-248 pump controller, single-chip, 11-247 rain aIann, IV-189 rain warning bleeper, 11-244 sensor and control, 11-246 soil moisture, 111-208 temperature monitor, 11-643, 111-206 water-leak aIann, IV-190 water-level, 111-206, IV-I86, IV-191 water-level, indicator, 11-244 water-level, sensing and control, 11246,IV-190 windshield-washer level, 1-107 fluid-level controller, 1-387, III-205 fluorescent display, vacuum, 11-185 fluorescent lamps high-voltage power supplies, coldcathode design, IV-411 inverter, 8-W, III-306 flyback converters, 1-211 selioscillating, 1-170, 11-128, 111-748 voltage, high-efficiency, III-744 flyback regulator, off-line, 11-481 FM transmissions 5 V, 1-233 12 V, 1-233 clock radio, Ml/FM, 1-543 demodulators, 1-544, 11-161 IF amplifier with quadrature detector, TV sound IF, 1-690 generators, low-frequency, 111-228 radio, 1~545 receivers, carrier-current circuit, III80 receivers, MPX/SCA receiver. III530 receivers, narrow-band, IIl-532 receivers optical receiver/transmitter, 50 kHz, 1-361 receivers, zero center indicator, 1338 snooper, I11-680 speakers, remote, carrier-current system, 1-140 squelch circuit for AM, 1-547 stereo demodulation system. 1-544 transmitters, 1;.;681 transmitters, infrared. voice-modulated puise, IV-228 transmitters, multiplex, III-688 transmitters, one-transistor, IIl-687 transmitters, optical, 50 kHz center
frequency, 11-417 transmitters, optical receiver/transmitter, 50 kllz, 1-361 transmitters, optical (PRM), 1-367 transmitters, voice, I11-678 tuner, 1-231, III-529 wireless microphone, I11-682, III685, I11-691 FM/AM clock radio, 1-543 fog-light controller, automotive, IV-59 foldhack current, HV regulator limiting. 11-478 followers, III-211-212 inverting. high-frequency, III-212 noninverting, high-frequency, III-212 source, photodiode, III-419 unity gain, 1-27 voltage, III-212 forward-current booster, I11-17 free-running multivibrators lOO kHz, 1-465 programmable-frequency, III-235 free-running oscillators, 1-531 square wave, 1-615 freezer, voltage, III-763 freezer-meltdown alarm. 1-13 frequency comparators, 11-109 LED,II-110 frequency control, telephone, 11-623 frequency converter, 1-159 frequency counters, III-340, 111-768, IV-300 1.2 GHz, II1-129 10-MHz, IlI-126 lOO MHz, period and, 11-136 low-cost, 111-124 preamp, 111-128 precision, 1-253 tachometer and, 1-310 frequency detectors, 11-177, III-I58 boundary detector, III-I56 comparator, 111-88 frequency dividers, 1-258. 11-251, 11254 clock input, IV-151 decade, 1-259 low, 11-253 programmable, IV-I52-153 staircase generator and, 1-730 frequency-division multiplex stereo decoder, 11-169 frequency doublers, 1-313 broadband, 1-313 GASFET design, IV-324 frequency generators, fixed-frequency, III-231 frequency indicators. beat, 1-336 frequency inverters. variable frequency, complementary output, 111-297
725
frequency meters, II-249-250, 1V-282 audio, 1-311 linear, 1-310 low cost, 11-250 power, II-250 power-line, 1-311
frequency multipliers/dividers, TI-251,
III-213-218 counter, odd-nwnber, I11-217 divide-by PI" III-216 doubler, III215 doubler, digital, III-216 doubler, to IMHz, II-252 doubler, single'chip, III-218 nonselective tripler, 11-252 pulsewidth, III-214 frequency-boundary detector, III-l56 frequency-detecting comparator, III-BS frequency oscillator, tunable, ll-425 frequency-ratio monitoring circuit, IV202 frequency-shift key (FSK) communications data receiver, III-533 decoder, 10.8 MHz, 1214 generator, low-cost design, III-227 keying circuits, 1V245
frequency synthesizer, programmable
voltage controlled. 11-265 frequency-to-voltage converter, 1-318, II-255-257, III-219-220 dc, 10kHz, 1316
digital meter, 1-317
optocoupJer input,lV-193 sample-and-hold circuit, IV-l94 single-supply design, IV-195 zener regulated, 1-317 fuel gauge, automotive, IV-46 full-wave rectifiers, IV-328. IV-650 absolute value. 11-528 precision, 1-234, I11-537 function generators (see alsQ burst generators; sound generators; waveform generators), 1-729, IT-
271, III221-242, III258274, IV196202 555 astable, low duty cycle, II-267 astable multivibrator, II-269, III-233, III238 astable multivibrator, op amp, III-224 astable multivibrntor, programmablefrequency, III-237 audio function generator, IV-197 clock generator, 1-193 clock generator/oscillator, 1-615 complementary signals, XOR gate, III-226 DAC controlled, 1-722 emitter-coupled RC oscillator, 11-266
fixed-frequency, III-231 FM, low-frequency, 111-228 free-running multivibrator, programmable-frequency, III-235 frequency-ratio monitoring circuit, 1V202 frequency synthesizer, programmable voltage controlled, II-265 FSK, low'cost, III-227 harmonics, III-228 linear ramp, II-270 linear triangle/square wave vea, 11263 monostable operation, III-235 monostable multivibrator, III-230 monostable- multivibrator, linearramp, III-237 monostable multivibrator, positivetriggered, 111-229 monostable multivibrator, video amplifier and comparator, 11-268 multiplying pulse width circuit, 11-264 multivibrator, low-frequency, III-237 multivibrator, single-supply, 111-232 nonlinear potentiometer outputs, IV198 one-shot, precision, 1II-222 one-shot, retriggerable, III-238 oscillator/amplifier. wide frequency range, II-262 potentiometer-position V/F converter, IV-200 precise wave, IT-274 programmed,I-724 pulse .divider, noninteger, programmable, III226 pulse train, IV202 pulse, 2-ohm, III-231 quad op -amp, four simultaneous synchronized 'Waveform, -11-259 ramp,--variable reset level, 11-267 sawtooth and pulse, I1I-241 signal, twofunction, 1II-234 sinelcosine (0.1-10 kHz), II-260 single supply, II-273 sine-wave/square-wave oscillator, tunable, III232 singlecontrol, 1II238 timebase, 1 Hz, for readout and counter applications, IV-201 time-delay generator, 1-217-218 triangle-square wave, programmable, III-225 triangle-wave, III-234 triangle-wave timer, linear, III-222 triangle-wave/square-wave, III-239 triangle-wave/square-wave, precision, III-242 triangle-waveLsquare-wave, wide-
range, III242 tunable, wide-range, 1II-241 UJT monostable circuit insensitive to changing bias voltage, 11-268 variable duty cycle timer output, III240 voltage controlled high-speed one shot, II266 waveform, II269, II272 waveform, four-output, III-223 white noise generator, IV-201 funk box, ll-593 furnace exhaust gas/smoke detector, temp monitor/low supply detection, III-248 fuzz box, III575 fuzz sound effect. 11-590
G
GaAsFET amplifier, power, with single supply, III0 gain block, video, 1II712 gain control, automatic, audio, IT-17 gain-controlled stereo amplifier, IT-9, III34 game feeder controller, 11-360 game roller, 1-326 games, II275-277, 1II-243-245, IV203207 coin flipper, III-244 electronic dice, 1lI-245, IV-207 electronic roulette, IT-276, IV-205 lie detector, 11-277, IV-206 reaction timer, IV-204 run-down clock/sound generator, IV205 Wheel-of-Fortune, IV-206 who's first, III-244 garage stop light, II53 gas analyzer, 11-281 gas/smoke detectors (see also smoke alarms and detectors), 11278279, III246253, III246 analyzer and, II281 furnace exhaust, temp monitorllowsupply detection, I11-248 methane concentration, linearized output, III-2S0 toxic, 11-280 SCR, III251 smoke/gas/vapor detector, III-2S0 GASFET fixed power supplies, 1V405 gated oscillator, last-cycle completing, III-427 gated-pulse descrambler, 11-165 gates programmable, 1394 XOR gate, IVI07
726
geiger counters, 1~536-S37 high-voltage supply, II-489 pocket-sized,II-S14 geL cell charger, II-66 generators, electric-power corona-wind generator, 1V-633 high-voltage generator, IV-413 high~voltage generator, batterypowered, IlI-482 high-voltage generator, capacitordischarge, III-485 high-voltage generator, de voltage, I11-481 high-voltage generator, negative-ions, IV-634 high-voltage generator, ultra-high voltages, II-488 glitch-detector, comparator, 11-107 glow plug driver, II-52 graphic equalizer, ten-band, active filter in, II-684 grid-dip meter, bandswitched, IV-298 ground tester, 11-345 ground-fault Hall detector, IV-208-209 ground-noise probe, battery-powered, III-S00 guitars compressor, sound-effect circuit. IV519 matching audio signal amplifiers, IV38 treble boost for, 11-683 tuner, 11-362 gun. laser, visible red and continuous, IlI310
hands-free telephone, III605 hands-off intercom, III-291 handset encoder, telephone, III-613 harmonic generators, 1-24, III-228, IV649 Hartleyoscillator, 1-571 HC-based oscillators, III-423 HCU/HTC-based oscillator, III-426 headlight alann, IlI52 headlight delay unit, 1107, IlI49 headlight dimmer, 11-63 headphones, amplifier for, 11-43 heart rate monitor, II-348, -JI-349 heat sniffer. electronic, 1II-627 heater, induction, ultrasonic, 120-KHz 500W, III-704 heater controls, 1-639 element controller, II-642 protector circ1Ji~, servo-sensed, 111-
624
temperature sensitive, 1-640 hee-hFN siren, 11-578, III-565 hi-fi circuits compander, 11-12 compressor, pre-emphasis and. 111-93 expander, II-13 expander, de-emphasis, 111-95 tone control circuit, high Z input, 1676 high-frequency amplifiers, III-259265 29-MHz, III262 3-30 MHz, SOW, 12.5-13.6 V, Ill 261 amateur radio, linear, 2-30 MHz 140W, IlI260 noninverting, 28dB, III-263 RF, broadcast band, IlI264 UHF, wideband with highperfor mance FETs, III-264 wideband, hybrid, 500 kHz-1GHz, III'265 wideband, miniature, II1-265 high-frequency oscillator, I1I-426 crystal, 1-175, II-148 high-frequency peak detector, II175 high-frequency signal generator, 11-150 high-input-high-impedance amplifiers, 11-19,11-44 highpass filters, 1-296 active, 1-296 active, second-order, 1-297 Butterworth, fourth-order, 1-280 Chehyshev, fourthorder, 1II191 fourthorder, I()()'Hz, IV-174 second-order, loo-Hz, 1V-175 sixth-order elliptical, 111-191 wideband two-pole, 11-215 high-voltage power supplies (see also generators, electrical power), 11-
H
half-duplex information transmission link, III679 half-flash analog-to-digital converters, I11-26 half-wave ac phase-controlled circuit, 1377 halfwave rectifiers, 1230, I11-528, IV 325 fast, 1228 Hall-effect circuits, 11-282-284, I11-254258 angle of rotation detector, 11-283 compass, 111-258 current monitor, III-255. IV-284 door open alarm, 11-284 ground-fault detector,' IV208-209 security door-ajar alarm, III-256 switches using, III-257, IV539 halogen lamps, dimmer for, I11-300 handitalkies, 119 two-meter preamplifier for, 1-19
487-490,.111-486, IV-409-413 10,000 V dc supply, IV-633 arc-jet power supply, starting circuit, 111-479 battery-powered generator, III-482 bucking regulator, 111481 dc generator, III-481 fluorescent-lamp supply, cold-cathode design, IV-411 geiger counter supply, 11-489 generators (see generators, electrical power) inverter, IlI-484 inverter, 40 W, 120 Vac, IV-41O-411 negative-ion generator, IV-634 optoisolated driver, 1lI-4B2 preregulated, III-480 pulse supply, 1V-412 regulator, 111-486 regulator, foldback-current limiting, II478 solid-state, remote adjustable, 111-486 strobe power supply,_1V-413 tube amplifier, high-volt isolation, IV426 ultra high-voltage generator, II-488 hobby circuits (see model and hobby circuits) hold button, telephone, 612, 11628 home security systems, IV-S7 Iightson warning, IV-250 monitor. 1-6 horn, auto, electronic, Ill-SO hot-wire anemometer, II1-342 hour/time delay sampling circuit, 11-668 Howland current pump. 11-648 humidity sensor, II285-287, 111266 267 HV regulator, foldback current limiting, 11-478 hybrid power amplifier, II1-455
IC product detectors, IV-143 IC timer, crystal-stabilized, suhharmonic frequencies for. II-151 ice alarm, automotive, 11-57 ice fonnation alarm, 11-58 ice warning and lights reminder, 1-106 ICOM IC-2A battery charger, II65 IF amplifiers, 1-690, IV-459 AGC system, IV-458 AGC system, CA3028amplifiers, IV 458 preamp, IV-4SO preamp, 30MHz, IV-460 receiver, IV-459 two-stage, SO MHz, 1-663
727
ignition circuit, electronic, automotive,
IV-65
ignition cut-off circuit, automotive, IV-
53
ignition substitute, automotive, III-41 ignition system, capacitor discharger, 1-
103
ignition timing light, 11-60 ignitor, III-362 illumination stabilizer, machine vision,
telephone, off-hook, 1-633 temperature indicator, IV-570 transmitter-output indicator, IV-21S undervoltage, battery operated equipment, 1-123 visual modulation, 1-430 visual level, III-269
instrumentation amplifiers, 1-346, 1-
348,1-349,1-352,11-293-295, IIl278-284, IV-229-234 100 V common mode range, 111-
294
current collector head amplifier, 11-
voltage, I11-758-772
voltage, visible, 1-338, III-772 voltage-level, 1-718, III-759 voltage-level, five step, 1-337 voltage-level, ten-step, 1-335 volume indicator, audio amplifier, IV-
295 differential, 1-347, 1-354, I11-283

differential, biomedical, 111-282
differentiaI,high-gain,I-353
differential, input, 1-354 differential, variable gain, 1-349 extended common-mode design, IV-
11-306
image canceller, III-358 immobilizer, 11-50 impedanee converter, high to low, 1-41 incandescent light flasher, I11-19B indicators (see also alarms; control circuits; detectors; monitors; sensors), III-268-270, IV-210-218 ac-current indicator, IV-290 ac-power indicator, LED display, IV-
212 VU meter, LED display, IV-211

zero center, FM receivers, 1-338 in-use indicator, telephone, 11-629 induction heater, ultrasonic, 120-KHz
234
high-impedance low drift, 1355
higb-speed, 1-354
low-drift/low-noise dc amplifier, IV-
232
low-signallevel/high-impedance, 1350 lowpower, 111284 meter driver, 11-296 preamp, oscilloscope, IV-230-231 re-amp, thermocouple, III-283 precision FET input. 1355 saturated standard cell amplifier, 11-
5OO-W, I11-704
inductors active, 1-417 simulated,I1-199
214 ac/dc indicator, IV-214

alarm and, 1-337 automotive-temperature -indicator,
PTC thermistor, 11-56

balance indicator, IV-215 bar-graph driver, transistorized, IV- 213
infrared circuits, 11-288-292, IIl-271277,IV-219-228 data link, 1-341 detector, I11-276, IV-224
detector, low-noise, 11-289 emitter drive, pulsed, II-292 fan controller, IV-226 laser rifle, invisible pulsed, 11-291 loudspeaker link, remote, 1-343 _low-noise detector for, 11-289 object detector, long-range, III-273 people-detector, IV-225 proximity switch, infrared-activated,
battery charge/discharge, 1-122

battery condition, 1-121
296 strain gauge, IlI-280

triple op amp, 1-347 ultra-precision, III-279 variable gain, differential input, 1-349 very high-impedance, 1-354
battery level, 1-124

battery threshold, 1-124 battery voltage, solid-state, 1-120
beat frequency, 1-336

CW offset indicator, IV-213
wideband, I11-281
instrumentation meter driver, 11-296
dial pulse, I11-613

field-strength (see field-strength meters) in-use indicator, telephone, 11-629 infrared detector, low-noise, 11-289 lamp driver, optically coupled, III-413 level, three-step, 1-336 low-battery, 1-124
integrators, 11-297-300, I11-285-286

active, inverting buffer, II-299
IV-345
receivers, 1-342, 11-292, III-274, IV-
JFET ac coupled, 11-200

gamma ray pulse, 1-536
220-221
receivers, remote-control, 1-342 remote controller, IV-224 remote-control tester, IV-228 remote-extender, IV-227
long time, 11-300 low drift, 1"423

noninverting, improved, 11-298 photocurrent, 11-326
low-voltage, I11-769
mains-failure indicator, IV-216 On indicator, IV-217 on-the-air, III-270 overspeed, 1-108 overvoltage/undervoltage, 1-150
transmitter, 1-343, Il-289, 11-290, III274, I11-276, III-277, IV-226-227

transmitter, digital, I11-275 transmitter, remote-control, 1-342 transmitter, voice-roodulated pulse
programmable reset level, I11-286

ramp generator, initial condition reset, III-527
FM,IV-22B
wireless speaker system, III-272 injectors three~in-one set: logic probe, signal tracer, injector, IV-429 injector-tracers, 1-522
resettable,IIl-286 intercoms, 1-415, 11-301-303, I11-287292

bidirectional, IIJ-290 carrier current, 1-146
peak level, 1-402

phase sequence, l-lt76 receiver-signal alarm, III-270 rf output, IV-299 rf-actuated relay, III-270 simulated, 1-417 sound sensor, IV-218 stereo-reception, III-269
hands-off, I11-291 party-line, 11-303

pocket pager, -III-288 telephone-intercoms, IV-557
single, 11-500 signal, 1-521

input selectors, audio, low distortion,
two-way, I11-292
two-wire design, IV-235237 interfaces (see also computer circuits),
SWR warning, 1-22

telephone, in-use indicator, 11-629,
11-38
input/output buffer, analog multiplex-
IV-560, IV-563
ers, IIl-ll
IV-238-242 680x, 65Ox, 8080 families, I11-98
728
cassette-to-telephone, IIl-618 CPU interface, one-shot design, IV239 DVM, temperature sensor and, 11647 FET driver, low-level power FET, IV241 fiber optic, 11-207 keyboard matrix interface, IV-240 logic-level translators, IV-242 optical sensor-to-TIL, 111-314 process control, precision, 1-30 tape recorder, 11-614 interrupter, ground fault, 1-580 interval timer, low-power, microprocessor programmable, II -678 inverters, IIl-293-298 dc-to-dc/ac, 1-208 fast, 1-422 fixed power supplies, 12 V input, IV395 tlip-fiop, 111-103 fluorescent lamp, 8-W, IIl-306 high-voltage, IIl-484 high-voltage power supplies, 40 W, 120 Vac, IV-410-411 low-power, fixed power supplies, 111466 on/off switch, 111-594 picture, video circuits, 111-722 power, I11-298 power, 12 VDC-to-117 VAC at 60 1Iz, IIl-294 power, medium, III-296 power, MOSFET, IlI-295 rectifierlinverter, programmable opamp design, IV-364 ultrasonic, arc welding, 20 KHz, I1I700 variable frequency, complementary output, 1lI-297 voltage, precision, III-298 inverting amplifiers, 1-41-42, IIl-J4 balancing circuit in, 1-33 low power, digitally selectable gain, 11-333 power amplifier, 1-79 programmable-gain, IlI-505 unity gain amplifier, 1-80 wideband unity gain, 1-35 inverting buffers, active integrator using. 11-299 inverting comparators, hysteresis in, 1154 inverting followers. high-frequency, 111212 isolated feedback power supply, 111-460 isolation amplifiers capacitive load, 1-34
level shifter, 1-348 medica! telemetry, 1-352 rf, 11-547 isolation and zero voltage switching logic, 11-415 isolators analog data-signal transmission, IV133 digital transmission, 11-414 stimulus, IIl-351
J
JFET ac coupled integrator, IIl-200
K
Kelvin thennometer, 1-655 zero adjust, III-661 keying circuits, IV-243-245 automatic operation, 11-15 automatic TIL morse code, 1-25 CW keyer, IV-244 electronic, 1-20 frequency-shift keyer, IV-245 negative key line keyer, IV-244
L
lamp-control circuits (see lights/lightactivated and controlled circuits) laser circuits (see also Iights/lightactivated and controlled circuits; optical circuits), 11-313-317, IlI309-311 diode sensor, IV-321 discharge current stabilizer, 11-316 gun, visible red, IlI-310 light detector, 11-314 power supply, IV-636 pulsers. laser diode, III-311, 1-416 receiver, IV-368 rifle, invisible IR pulsed, 11-291 latches 12-V, solenoid driver, I1I-572 comparator and, I11-88 latching relays, dc, optically coupled, III-417 latching switches double touchbutton, 1-138 SCR-replacing, III-593 LeD display. fixed power supply, IV392,IV-403 lead-acid batteries battery chargers, Ill-55 life-extender and charger, IV-72 low-battery detector, Ill-56 leading-edge delay circuit, III-147 LED circuits ac-power indicator, IV-214
alternating tlasher, "'-198, I11-200 bar graph driver, 11-188 driver, emitter/follower, IV-159 flasher, IV-181 flasher, control circuit, IV-183 flasher, multivibrator design, IV-182 flasher, PUT, 11-239 flasher, sequential, reversible-direction, IV-182 flasher, UJT, 11-231 frequency comparator. II1l0 matrix display, two-variable, I11-171 mil1ivoltmeter readout, IV294 multiplexed common-cathode display ADC, "'-764 panel. meter, I11-34 7 peakmeter, I11-333 ring-around flasher, I11-194 RS-232C, computer circuit, III-103 three-year flasher, I11-194 voltmeter, IV-286 VU meter, IV-211 level, electronic, 11-666, IV-329 level controllers/indicators/monitors, II174 alann, water, 1-389 audio, automatic, II-20 cryogenic fluid, 1-386 fluid,I-387 hysteresis in, 1-235 liquid, 1-388, 1-389, 1-390 meter, LED bar/dot, 1-251 peak,I-402 sound, 1-403 three-step, 1-336 visual, I1I-269 warning, audio output, low, 1~91 warning, high-level, 1-387 water, 1-389 level shifter, negative-ta-positive supply, 1-394 LF or HF field strength meter, 11-212 LF receiver, IV-451 lie detector, 11-277, IV-206 lightS/light-activated and controlled circuits (see also laser circuits; optical circuits), 11-304-312, II-318331, "'-312-319 860 W limited-range light control. 1376 ambient-light cancellization circuit, 11328 audio oscillator, light-sensitive, III315 battery-powered light, capacitance operated,I-131 brightness control, lighted displays, I11-316 carport light, automatic. 11-308
729
lights/light-activated and controlled circuits (cont.) chaser lights, sequential activation, IV-251, IV-252 Christmas light driver, IV-254 complementary, 1-372 controller, IV-252 cross fader, 11-312 detectors, detection switch, adjustable, [-362 dimmer, 1-369, 11-309, IV-247, [V249 dimmer, 800 W, 11-309 dimmer, de lamp, 11-307 dimmer, four-quadrant, IV-248-249 dimmer, halogen lamps, I11-300 dimmer, headlight, 11-57, 11-63 dimmer, low-cost, 1-373 dimmer, soft-start, 800-W, 1-376, IlI304
night light, telephone-controlled, III604
dimmer, tandem, 11-312 dimmer, triac, 1-375, 11-310, I11-303 dissolver, solid-state, I11-304 drivers, 1,:380 drivers, flip-flop independent design, IV-lOO drivers, indicator-lamps, optical coupling, I11-413 drivers, neon lamps, 1-379 drivers, short-circuit-proof, 11-310 emergency light, 1-378, 1-081, 11320, IlI-317, IlI-415, IV-250 flame monitor, I11-313 fluorescent-lamp high-voltage power supplies, cold-cathode design, IV411 indicator-lamp driver, optically coupled, IlI-413 interruption detector, 1-364 inverter, fluorescent, 8-W, I11-306 level controller, 1-380 level detector, 1-367, Ill-316 level detector, low-light level drop detector, I11-313 life-extender for lightbulbs, I11-302 light-bulb changer, "automatic" design, IV-253 lights-on warning, IV-58, IV-62, IV- 250 light-seeking robot, 11-325 logic circuit, 1-393 machine vision illumination stabilizer, 11-306 marker light, I11-317 meters, light-meters. 1-382, 1-383 modulator, IlI-302 monostable photocell, self-adjust trigger, 11-329 mooring light, automatic, 11-323 night light, automatic, 1-360, I11-306
on/off relay, 1-366 on/off reminder, auiomotive lights, 1109 on/off rer'ninder, with ice alarm. 1-106 one-shot timer, I11-317 phase control, 11-303, 11-305 photo alarm, 11-319 photocell, monostable, self-adjust trigger, 11-329 photocurrent integrator, 11-326 photodiode sensor amplifier, 11-324 photoelectric controller, IV-369 photoelectric switches,-U-321, IT326, I11-319 projector-lamp voltage regulator, II305 power outage light, line-operated, III415 pulse-generation interruption, 1-357 relay, on/off, 1-366 remote-controller, 1-370 robot, eyes, 11-327 robot, light-seeking robot, 11-325 sensor, ambient-light ignoring, III413 sensor, back-biased GaAs LED, II321 sensor, logarithmic, 1-366 sensor, optical sensor-to-TTL interface, IlI-314 sequencer, pseudorandom, III-30l short-circuit proof lamp driver, 11-310 signal conditioner, photodiode design, 11-330 sound-controlled lights, 1-609 speed controller, IV-24 7 strobe, high-voltage power supplies, IV-413 strobe, variable, I11-589-590 sun tracker, 111-318 switch, 11-320, IlI-314 switch, capacitance switch, 1-132 switch, light-controlled, 11-320, I11-314 switch, photoelectric, 11-321, 11-326, I11-319 switch, solar triggered, I11-318 switch, zero-point triac, 11-311 tarry light, 1-579 telephone in-use light, 11-625 three-way light control, IV-251 touch lamp, three-way, IV-247 triac switch, inductive load, IV-253 turn-off circuit, SCR capacitor design, IV-254 twilight-triggered circuit, 11-322 voltage regulator for projection lamp, !l-305
wake-up call light, 11-324 . warning lights, 11-320, I11-317 light-seeking robot, ll-325 lights-on warning, automotive, 11-55, IIl-42 limit alarm, high/low, 1-151 limit comparator, 1-156, I11-106 double ended, [-156, 11-105 limit detectors double ended, 1-230, 1-233 micropower double ended, 1-155 limiters, IIl-320-322, IV-255-257 audio, low distortion, 11-15 audio clipperllimiter, IV-355 dynamic noise reduction circuit, III321 hold-current, solenoid driver, I11-573 noise, 1II-321, II-395 one-zener design, IV-257 output, I11-322 power-consumption, 111-572 transmit-time limiter/timer, IV-580 voltage limiter, adjustable, IV-256 line amplifier duplex, telephone, I11-616 universal design, IV-39 line drivers 50-ohm transmission, 11-192 600-ohm balanced, 11-192 full rail excursions, 11-190 high output 600-ohm, 11-193 video amplifier. I11-710 line-dropout detector, 11-98 line-frequency square wave generator, !l-599 line receivers digital data, IIl-534 low-cost, III-532 line-sync, noise immune 60 Hz, 11-367 line-current detector, optically coupled, I11-414 line-current monitor, III-341 line-hum touch switch, I11-664 line-synchronized driver circuit, III -174 line-voltage announcer, ac, III-730 line-voltage monitor, I11-511 linear amplifiers 2-30MHz, 140W PEP amateur radio, 1-555 lOO W PEP 420-450 MHz push-pull, 1-554 160 W PEP broadband, [-556 amateur radio, 2-30 MHz 140-W, IIl260 CMOS inverter, 11-11 rf amplifiers, 6-m, lOO W, IV-480-481 rf amplifiers, 903 MHz, IV-484-485 rf amplifiers, ATV, 10-to-15 W, IV481
730
linear couplers 1Illalog, 11-413 analog ac, 11-412 dc, 11-411 linear le siren, III-564 linear optocoupler, instrumentation, 11417 linear ramp generator, 11-270 linear regulators fixed power supply, low dropout low cost, lli-459 radiation-hardened 125A, 11-468 link, fiber optic, I1I-179 liquid flowmeter, 11-248 liquid-level detectors (see fluid and moisture detectors) lithium batteries charger for, 11-67 state d charge indicator for, 11-78 little dipper dip meter, 11-183 locator, la-parts treasure, 1-409 locks, electronic, 11-194-197, IV-161183 combination, 1-583, 11-196 digital entry lock, IV-I62 keyless design, IV-163 three-dial combination, 11-195 locomotive whistle, ll-589 logarithmic amplifiers, 1-29, 1-35, 11-8 dc to video, 1-38 log-ratio amplifier, 1-42 logarithmic cO""'rter, fast, 1-169 logarithmic light sensor, 1-366 logarithmic sweep VCO, I1I-73B logic/logic circuits audible pulses, 11-345 four-state, single LED indicator, 11361 isolation and zero voltage switching, 11-415 light-activated, 1-393 line monitor, 111-108 overvoltage protection, 1-517 probes (see logic probes) pulse generator for logic-troubleshooting, IV-436 pulser, I1I-520 signals, long delay line for, I1I-I07 tester, audible, I1I-343 tester, TIL, 1-527 translators, logic-level translators, IV-242 logic amplifiers, 11-332-335 low power binary, to IOn gain low frequency, 11-333 low power inverting, digitally selectable gaIo, 11-332 low power noninverting, digitally selectable input aod gain, 11-334
precision, digitally programmable input and gain. II-335 programmable amplifier, 11-334 logic converter, TIL to MOS, 1-170 logic level shifter, negative-to-positive supply, 1-394 logic probes, 1-520, 1-525, 1-526, IV430-431, IV-434 CMOS, 1-523, 1-526, III-499 digital, III-497 four-way operation, IV-432 memory-tester, installed, 1~525 single-IC design, IV-433 three-in-one test set: probe, signal tracer, injector, IV-429 long-duration timer, PUT, II-675 long-range object detector, III-273 long-tenn electronic timer, II-672 long-time integrator, 11-300 long-time timer, 111-653 loop antenna, -3.5 MHz, IV-12-13 loop transmitter, remote sensors, III70 loop-thru video amplifier, IV-616 loudness amplifier, 11-46 loudness control, balance amplifier with, 11-395 loudspeaker coupling circuit, 1-78 low-current measurement system. 111345 low-distortion audio limiter, 11-15 low-distortion input selector for audio use, 11-38 lowdistortion low level amplitude modulator, 11-370 low-distortion sine wave oscillator. 11561 low-frequency oscillators, JII-428 crystal, 1-184, 11-146 oscillator/flasher, 11-234 Pierce oscillator, I11-133 TIL oscillator, 11-595 low-pass filters, 1-287 active, digitally selected break frequency, II-216 Chebyshev, fifth-onler, multi-feedback, 11-219 pole-active, 1-295 fast-response, fast settling, IV-168169 fast-settling, precision, 11-220 precision, fast settling, II-220 Sallen-Key, 10 kHz, 1-279 Sallen-key, active, IV-I77 Sallen-Key, equal component, 1-292 low-voltage aIannIindicator, 11-493, JII769 low-voltage power disconnector, 11-97 LVDT circuits, 11-336-339, III-323~324
driver- demodulator, 11-337 signal conditioner, 11-338
M
machine vision. illumination stabilizer for, 11-306 magnetic current low-power sensor, 111341 magnetic phono preamplifier, 1-91 magnetic pickup phone preamplifier, 189 magnetometer, 11-341 magnets, pennanent-magnet detector, IV-281 mains-failure indicator, IV-216 marker generator, I11-138 marker light, I1I-317 mathematical circuits, 111-325-327, IV258-263 adder, JII-327 adder, binary, fast-action. IV-260-261 divide/multiply, one trim, J11-326 multiplier, precise commutating amp, IV-262-263 slope integrator, programmable, IV259 subtractor, III-327 measuremenUtest circuits (see also detectors; indicators_: meters), 11340, 111-328-348, IV-264-311 3-in-1 test set, I11-330 absolute-value circuit, IV-274 acoustic-sound receiver, IV-3ll acoustic-sound transmitter, IV311 anemometer/, hot-wire, III342 audible logic tester, III-343 automotive electrical tester, IV-45 B-field measurer, IV-272 barometer, IV-273 battery internal-resistance, 1V-74 battery tester, IV-78 battery tester, ni-cad batteries, IV-79 breath alert alcohol tester, I11-359 broadband ac active rectifier, IV-271 cable tester, m539 capacitor tester, IV-265 capacitor-ESR measurer, IV-279 continuity tester, 1-550, 1-551, 11 342, I11-345, 111-540, IV-287, IV289, IV-296 continuity tester, latching, IV-295 crystal tester, 11-151 current indicator, ac current. IV290 current monitor,_HaU-sensor. 1V-284 current monitor/aIann, I11-338 current sensor, high-gain, IV-291 deviation meter, IV-303 digital frequency meter, I11-344
731
measurement/test circuits (cont.) digital multimeter (DMM), highresistance measuring, IV-29l .diode, [-402, [[-343 direction-of-rotation circuit, III-335 diode-curve tracer, IV-274 diode-matching circuit, IV-280 duty-cycle measurer, IV-265 duty-cycle meter, IV-275 duty-cycle monitor, III-329 E, T, and R measurement/test circuits, IV-283-296 electrolytic-capacitor reforming circuit, IV-276 electrometer, IV-277 electrostatic detector, III-337 filter analyzer, audio filters, IV-309 frequency checker, crystal oscillator, precision design, IV-301 frequency counter, Ill-340, IV-300 frequency meter, IV-282 frequency shift keyer tone generator, [-723 go/no-go, diode, 1-401 go/no-go, dual-limit, [-157 grid-dip meter, bandswitched, IV-298 ground, [-580, [[-345 injectors, IV-429 high-frequency and rf, N-297 -303 LC checker, Ill-334 LED panel meter, III-34 7 line-current monitor, I11-341 logic probes (see logic probes) logic-pulses, slow pulse test, 11-345 low-current measurement, III-345 low-ohms adapter, IV-290 magnet, permanent-magnet detector, IV-281 magnetic current sensor, low-power, Ill-341 magnetic-field meter, IV-266 magnetometer, 11-341 measuring gauge, linear variable differential transformer, 1-404 meter tester, IV-270 microammeter, dc, four-range, IV292
microfarad counter, IV-275 millivoltmeter, dc, IV-295 millivoltmeter, four-range, IV-289 millivoltmeter, LED readout, IV-294 modulation monitor, IV-299 mono audio-level meter, IV-310 motion sensor, unidirectional, 11-346 motor hour, III-340 multiconductor-cable tester, IV-288 multimeter shunt, IV-293 noise generator, IV-308 ohmmeter, linear, 111-540
ohnuneter, linear-scale, five-range, [V-290 oscilloscope adapter, four-trace, IV267 paper sheet discriminator, copying machines, I11-339 peak-dB meter, Ill-348 peakmeter, LED, Ill-333 phase difference from 0 to 180 degrees, [[-344 phase meter, digital VOM, IV-277 picoamrneter, I11-338 power gain, 60 MIIz, [-489 power supply test load, constantcurrent, IV-424 probes, 4-t0-220 V, Ill-499 pulse-width, very short, Ill-836 QRP SWR bridge, Ill-336 remote-control infrared device, IV228 resistance measurement, synchronous system, IV-285 resistance ratio detector, 11-342 resistance/continuity meters, I11-53S540 rf output indicator, IV-299 rf power, wide-range, 111-332 SCR tester, Ill-344 shutter, 1-485 signal generator, AM broadcast-band, IV-302 signal generator, AMIIF, 455 kHz, IV-30l signal strength (S), Ill-342 signal tracer, IV-429 sound-level meter, III-346, IV-305, IV-307 sound-test circuits (see also sound generators), IV-304 speedometer, bike, IV-271, IV-282 static detector, IV-276 stereo audio-level meter, IV-3l0 stereo audio-power meter, IV-306 stereo power meter, 111-331 stud finder, III-339 SWR meter, IV-269 tachometer, Ill-335, Ill-340 tachometer, optical pick-up, I11-347 tachometer, analog readout, IV-280 tachometer, digital readout, IV-278 tachometer, digital, IV-268269 temperature measurement, transistorized, IV-572 test probe, 4-220 V, Ill-499 thermometers, III-637-643 three-inone set, logic probe, signal tracer, injector, IV429 threephase tester, 11-440 transistor, 1-401, IV-281
TTL logic, [-527 tmiversal test probe, IV-431 UHF source dipper, IV-299 voltmeter, digital LED readout, IV286
VOM, phase meter, digital readout, [V-277 VOR signal simuiator, IV-273 water-level measurement circuit, IV191 wavemeter, tlUled RF, IV-302 wideband test amplifier, IV..:303 wire tracer, 1I~343 zener, 1400 medical electronic circuits, 11-347-349, Ill-349-352 biomedical instrumentation differential amp, Ill-282 breath monitor, III-350 EKG simulator, three-chip, Ill-350 heart rate monitor, [[-348, [[-349 preampJifier for, 11-349 stimulator, constant-current, 111-352 stimulus isolator, I11-35l -thermometer, implantable/ingestible, Ill-641 melody generator, single-chip design, IV-520 memory-related circuits EEPROM pulse generator, 5Vpowered, Ill-99 memory protector/power supply monitor, IV425 memory-saving power supply, 11486 metal detectors, [[-350-352, [V-137 micropower, 1-408 meters (see also measurement/test circuits) ac voltmeters, III-765 analog, expanded-scale, IV-46 analog, expanded-scale, voltage reference, 111-774 anemometer/, hot-wire, III-342 audio frequency, 1-311 audio millivolt, Ill-767, Ill-769 audio power, 1-488 automatic-contrast, 1-479 basic grid dip, [-247 breaker point dwell, 1-102 capacitance, 1400 dc voltmeter, I11-763 de voltmeter, high-input resistance, Ill-762 deviation meter, IV-303 digital frequency, ID-344 digital muItimeter (DMM), highresistance measuring, IV-29l dip, [-247 dip, dual-gate [GFET in, 1-246
732
dosage rate, 1-534 duty-cycle meter, IV-275 electrometer, IV-277 extended range VU, 1-715, III-487 FET voltmeter, JIJ-765, JIJ-770 field-strength meters (see fieldstrength meters) flash exposure, 1-484, JIJ-446 frequency meter, IV-282 grid-dip meter, bandswitched, IV-298 LED bar/dot level,I-251 LED panel, JIJ-34 7 light, 1-383 linear frequency, 1-310 linear light, 1-382 logarithmic light, 1-382 magnetic-field meter, IV-266 meter-driver rf amplifier, I-MHz, III545 microammeter, dc, four-r2l1ge, IV292 microwave field strength, 1-273 millivoltmeter, dc, IV-295 millivoltmeter, four-range, IV-289 millivoltmeter, LED readout, IV-294 mono audio-level meter, IV-310 motor hour,-IIl-340 multimeter shunt, IV-293 ohmmeter, linear, IIl-540 ohmmeters, linear-scale, five-range, IV-290 peak decibels, ill-34-8 peak, LED, JIJ-333 pH,I-399 phase, 1-406 picoammeter, III-338 power line frequency, 1-311 power, 1-489 resistance/continuity, III-538-540 rf power, 1-16 rf power, wide-range, III-332 rf voltmeter, IIl-766 signal strength (5), JIJ-342, IV-166 soil moisture, 111-208 sound-level meter, IV-305, IV-307 sound level, telephone, 111-614 sound level, 111-346 speedometer, bicycle, IV-271, IV-282 stereo audio-level meter, IV-310 stereo audio-power meter, IV-306 stereo balance, 1-618-619 stereo power, Ill-331 suppressed zero, 1-716 SWR power, 1-16, IVo:l69 tachometer, JIJ-335, I11-340, I11-347 tachometer, analog readout, IV-280 tachometer, digital readout, IV-278 temperature, 1-647 tester, 1V-270
thermometers, III-637-643 tilt meter, III-644-646 varicap tuned FET DIP, 1-246 vibration, 1-404 voltage, JIJ-758-77 voltmeters, ac wide-range, III-772 voltmeters, digital, 3.5-digit, fullscale four-decade, I11-7n1 voltmeters, digital, 4.5-digit, JIJ-760 voltmeters, high-inputTesistance, III768 VOM field strength, 1-276 VOM/phase meter, digital readout, IV-277 wavemeter, tuned RF, IV-302 methane concentration detector, linearized output, I11-250 metronomes, 1-413, 11-353-355, 111353-354, IV-312-314 ac-line operated unijunction, 11-355 accentuated beat, 1-411 downbeat-emphasized, III-353-354 electronic, 1V-3I3 low-power design, IV-3I3 novel design, IV-314 sight and sound, 1-412 simple, 11-354 version 11, 11-355 microammeter, dc, four-range, 1V-292 microcontroller, musical organ, preprogrammed single-chip, 1-600 micro-sized amplifiers, 111-36 microphone circuits -amplifiers for, 1-87, IlI-34 amplifiers for, electronic balanced input, 1-86 FM wireless, III-682, JIJ-685, JIJ-691 mixer, 11-37 preamp for, 11-45, IV-37, IV-42 preamp, low-impedance design, IV41 preamp for, low-noise transformerless balanced, 1-88 preamp for, tone control in, 1-675, 11687 wireless, IV-652-654 wireless AM, 1-679 microprocessors (see computer circuits) microvolt comparators duallirnit, I11-89 hysteresis-including, Ill-SS microvolt probe, 11-499 microwave amplifier circuits, IV-3I5319 5.7 GHz, IV-317 bias supply for preamp, IV-3I8 preamplifier, 2.3 GHz, IV-3I6 preamplifier, 3.4 GHz, IV-316
preamplifier, single-stage, 10 GHz, IV-317 preamplifiers, bias supply, IV-318 preamplifiers, two-stage, 10 GHz, IV-319 Miller oscillator, 1-193 millivoltmeters (see also meters; voltmeters) ac, 1-716 audio, III-767, III-769 high-input impedance, 1-715 mini-stereo audio amplifiers, III~38 mixers, III-367-370, IV-330-336 1- MHz, 1-427 audio, 1-23, 11-35, IV335 audio, one-transistor design, I-59 CMOS, I-57 common-source, 1-427 digital mixer, IV-334 diplexer, IV-335 doubly balanced, 1-427 dynamic audio mixer, IV-331 four-channel, 1-60, I11-369, IV-333 four-channel, four-track, 11-40 four-channel, high level, I-56 four-input, stereo, I-55 four-input, unity-gain, 1V-334 HF transceiver/mixer, -IV-457 hybrid, 1-60 input-buffered, I11-369 microphone, 11-37 multiplexer, 1-427 one-transistor design, I-59 passive, .I-58 preamplifier with tone COGtrol, I-58 signal combiner, I11-368 silent audio switching, I-59 sound amplifier and, 11-37 stereo mixer, pan controls, JV-332 unity-gain, four-input, IV-334 utility-design mixer, IV-336 universal stage, III-370 video, high-performance operation, IV-609 mobile equipment, 8-amp regulated power supply, 11-461 model and hobhy circuits, IV-337-340 controller, model-train and/or slotcar, IV-336-340 model rocket launcher, 11-358 modems, power-line, carrier-current circuit, III-82 modulated light beam circuit, ambient light effect cancellization with, 11328 modulated readback systems, disc/tape phase, 1-89 modulation indicator/monitor, 1-430 CB,I-431
733
modulators, 1-437, II-36S-372, III-371377 + 12V de single supply. balanced, 1437 AM,I-438 amplitude, low-distortion low level. II-370 balanced, IIl-376 balanced, phase detector-selector! sync rectifier, IIl-441 double-sideband suppressed-carrier, III-377 linear pulse-width, 1-437 monitor for, III-375
musical envelope generator, 1-601 pulse-position, 1-435, III-375
pulse-width, 1-435, 1-436, 1-43S-440, III-376, IV-326 rf, 1-436, IIl-372, III-374 rf, double sideband, suppressed carrier, 11-369 saw oscillator, I11-373 TTL oscillator for television display, II-372 TV, 1-439, II-433, II-434 VHF, 1-440, III-684 video, 1-437, II-371, II-372 moisture detector (see-fluid and moisture detectors)
monitors (see also alarms; control circuits; detectors; indicators; sensors), IIl-378-390 acid rain, IIl-361 battery, III-60-67
battery-alternator, automotive, I11-63
blinking phone light, II-624 breath monitor, III-350 current, alarm and, III-338 directional signals, auto, III-48 door-ajar, automotive circuits, III-46 duty cycle, III-329 flames, III-313 home security system, 1-6
line-current, I11-341
line-voltage, III-511 logic line, IIl-108 modulation, III-375 overvoltage, III-762 power monitor, SCR design, IV-3S5
power-supply monitors (see powersupply monitors)
power-line connections, ac, I11-5lO precision battery voltage, HTS, 1-122 receiver, 11-526 sOlUld level, telephone, I11-614 telephone status, optoisoiator in, 1625 telephone, remote, II-626 thermal monitor, IV-569
undervoltage, I11-762 voltage, 1II-767 voltage, III-758-772 monostable circuit, 1-464, 11-460 monostable muhivibrators, 1-465, III230, III-235 input lockout. 1-464 linear-ramp, III-237 positive-triggered, I1I-229 monostable photocell, self-adjust trigger, II-329 monostable lTL, 1-464 monostable UJT, 1-463 mooring light, automatic, 11-323 MOSFETs power control switch, IV-386 power inverter, I11-295 mosquito repelling circuit, 1-684 motion sensors acoustic Doppler motion detector, IV343 auto alarm, 1-9 low-current-drain design, IV-342-343 motorcycle alarm, 1-9 UHF, III-516, JV-344 unidirectional, 11-346 motor control circuits, IV-347-353 400 Hz servo amplifier, 11-386 ac motors, 11-375 bidirectional proportional, 11-374 compressor protector, IV-351 direction control, de motors, 1-452 direction control, series-wolUld motors, 1-448 direction control, shunt-wound motors. 1-456 direction control, stepper motor, IV350 driver control, ac, three-phase, 11383 driver control, ac, two-phase, 11-382 driver control, constant-speed, III386 driver control, dc, fixed speed, III387 driver control, dc, servo, bipolar control input. II-385 driver control, dc, speed-controlled reversible, I11-388 driver control, N-phase motor, 11-382 driver control, reversing, dc control signals, II-381 driver control, servo motor amplifier, 1-452, II-384 driver control, stepper motors, III390 driver control, stepper motor. halfstep, JV-349 driver control, stepper motor, quar-
ter-step, IV-350 driver control, two-phase, 11-456 fiber-optic, dc, variable. 11-206 hours-in-use meter. I11-340 induction motor, 1-454 load-dependent, universal motor, 1451 mini-drill control, IV-348 power brake, ac, 11-451 power-factor controller, three-phase, II-388 PWM motor controller. I11-389 PWM servo amplifier, III-379 PWM speed control, II-376 PWM speed controVenergy-recovering brake, III-380 self-timing control, built-in, universal motor, 1-451 servo motor amplifier, 1-452, 11-384speed control (see speed controllers) start-and-run motor circuit, 111-382 stepper motors, half-step, IV-349 stepper motors, quarter-step, IV-350 stepper motors. speed and direction, JV-350 tachometer feedbaek control, II-378 tachometer feedback control, closed loop, 11-390 motorcycle alarm, motion actuated, 11-9 multiburst generator, square wavefonn, !I-SS multimeters, shunt, IV-293 multiple-input detector, 1II-102 multiplexed common-cathode LEDdisplay ADC, III-784 multiplexers, III-391-397 1-of-8 channel transmission system, III-395 analog, II-392 analog, O/Ol-percent, II-392 analog, buffered input and output, III-396 analog, input/output buffer for. III-11 analog, single- to four-trace-.eonverter, II -431 capacitance, 11-200, 11-416 de-, III-394 four~channel, low-cost, I11-394 frequency, III-213-218 mathematical, one trim. III-326 oscilloscopes. -add-on, III-437 pulse-width, 1II-214 resistor. 11-199 sample-and-hold, three-channel, I11-396 two-level, III-392 video, 1-of-15 cascaded. I11-393 wideband differential, II-428 multipliers, low-frequency multiplier, JV-325
734
multiplying D/A converter, IlI168 multiplying pulse width circuit, II264 multivibrators 100 kHa free running, II-485 astable, 1-461, II-269, II-510, Ill196, Ill-224, Ill-233, Ill-238 astable, digital-control, II-462 astable, dual, II-463 astable, programmable-frequency, Ill-237 bistable, II-465 bistable, touchtriggered, 1133 car battery, II-106 CB modulation, II-431 current, II-203 duty-cycle, 50-percent, Ill-584 freerunning, programmable-fre quency, Ill-235 low-frequency, III-237 lowvoltage, II123 modulation, II-430 monostable, II-465, Ill-229, Ill-230, Ill-235, Ill-237 monostable, input lockout, II-464 oneshot, II-465 oscilloscope, II474 singlesupply, IlI232 sound level, II403 squarewave generators, IV536 telephone line, 11-628 wideband radiation, II535 music circuits- (see sound generators) musical envelope generator/modulator, IV-22 mux/demux systems differential, 1-425 eightchannel, 1-426, 1I-115
N
N-phase motor drive, Ill-382 NAB preamps record, Ill-673 two-pole, Ill-673 NAB tape playback preamp, IIl-38 nano ammeter, 1202 narrowband FM demodulator, carrier detect in, II-159 negativeion generator, IV634neon flashers fivelamp, III198 twostate oscillator, I11-200 networks filter, 1-291 speech,--telephone, II-633 ni-cad batteries analyzer for, III64 charger, 1-112, 1-116, Ill-57 charger, 12 v, 200 mA per hour, 1-114
charger, current and voltage limiting, 1-114 charger, fast-acting, 1118 charger, portable, IV-69 charger, temperature-sensing, IV-77 charger, thermally controlled, 11-68 packs, automotive charger for, 1-115 protection circuit, HI-62 test circuit, IV 79 zappers, 1-6, II-68 night lights (see Iights/light-activated and controlled circuits) noise generators (see sound generators) noise reduction circuits, II-393-396, IIl398-401, IV-354-356 audio clipperilimiter, IV-355 audio shunt noise limiter, IV.355 audio squelch, IT-394 balance amplifier with loudness control, II~395 blanker, IV-356 clipper, 11-394 clipper, audio-powered, HI-396 Dolby B, decode mode, Ill-401 Dolby B, encode mode, III-400 Dolby BIC, Ill-399 dynamic noise reduction, IlI-321 filter, Ill-188 filter, dynamic filter, 111-190 limiter, II-395, Ill-321 noninverting amp1iers, 1-41, 111-14 adjustable gain, 1-91 comparator with hysteresis in, 1-153 high-frequency, 28-dB, Ill-263 hysteresis in, 1-153 low power, digitally se1ectable input and gain, II-334 power, 1-79 programmable-gain, IIl-505 single supply, 1-74 split supply, 1-75 noninverting integrator, -improved design, II-298 noninverting voltage followers, 1-33 high-frequency, Ill-212 nonselective frequency tripler, transistor saturation, II-252 Norton al1J.plifier, absolute value, III-ll notch filters (see also filter_circuits), 1283, II-397-403, Ill-402-404 4.5 MHz, 1-282 550 Hx, II-399 1800 Hz, II-398 active band reject, 11-401 adjustable Q, II-398 audio, II-400 bandpass and, 11-223 high-Q, Ill-404 selectable bandwidth, 1-281
three-amplifier design, 1-281 tunable, II-399, II402 tunable, passive-bridged differentiator, II-4(}3 tunable, hum-suppressing, 1-280 tunable, op amp, 11-400 twin-T, Ill-403 Wien bridge, II-402 NTSC-to-RGB video decoder, IV-613 null circuit, variable gain, accurate, III69 null detector, 1-148, III-162
ohnnneters, 1549 linear,Ill-540 -linear scale, 1-549 linear-scale, five-range, IV290 ohmsto-volts converter, 1168 oil-pressure gauge, automotive, IV-44, IV-47 on/off inverter, I11-594 onfofftouch switches, II-691, Ill-663 one-of-eight channel transmission system, Ill-lOO one-shot function generators, 1-465 digitally controlled, 1-720 precision, 111-222 retriggerable, Ill-238 one-shot timers, III-654 light-controlled, Ill-317 voltage-controlled high-speed, II-256 op amps, II-404-406, DI-405-406, IV357-364 xl0, 1-37 xl00, 1-37 astable multivibrator, IlI-224 audio amplifier, IV-33 bidirectional compound op amp, IV361 clamping for, II-22 clock circuit using, I11-85 comparator, three-input and gate comparator, I-V-363 compound op-amp, IV-364 feedback-stabilized amplifier, IV-360 gain-controlled op amp, IV361 intrinsically safe protected, IlI-12 inverter/rectifier, progranunable, IV 364 on/off switch, transistorized, IV-54-6 power booster, IV-358 power driver circuit, IV-158159 quad, simultaneous wavefonn generator using, II~259 single potentiometer to adjust gain over bipolar range, 11-406 swing rail-ray, LM324, IV-363
735
op amps (cont.) tunable notch filter with, 11-400 variable gain and sign, 11-405 vca driver, IV-362 video op amp circuits, IV-615 optical circuits (see also lasers; lights/ light-activated and controlled circuits), 11-407-419, IV'365-369 50 kHz center frequency FM transmitter, 11-417 ac relay, IlI-418 ac relay using two photon couplers, 11-412 ac switcher, high-voltage, III-408 ambient light ignoring optical sensor, IlI-413 CMOS coupler, IlI-414 communication system, 11-416 dc linear coupler, 11-411 dc latching relay, IlI-417 digital transmission isolator, 11-414 high-sensitivity, NO, two-tenninal zero voltage switch, 11-414 indicator lamp driver, III-413 integrated solid state relay, 11-408 interruption sensor, IV-366 isolation and zero voltage switching logic, II-4l5 light-detector, IV-369 line-current detector, III414 linear ac analog coupler, 11-412 linear analog coupler, 11-413 linear optocoupler for instrumentation, 11-417 microprocessor triac array driver, 11410 optoisolator relay circuit, IV-475 paper tape reader, II-414 photoelectric light controller, IV-369 power outage light, line-operated, III415 probe, IV-369 receiver, 50 kHz FM optical transmitter, 11-418 receiver, light receiver. IV-367 receiver, optical or laser light, IV-368 relays, dc solid-state, open/closed, IlI-412 source follower, photodiode, II1-419 stable optocoupler. 11-409 telephone ring detector. Ill-611 transmitter, light transmitter, IV-368 triggering SCR series, III-411 TTL coupler, optical, 111-416 zero-voltage switching, closed halfwave, 1II-412 zero-voltage switching, solid-state, IlI-4l0 zero-voltage switching, solid-state relay, IlI-416
optical communication system, 1-358, II-416 optical pyrometer. 1-654 optical receiver, 1-364, 11-418 optical Scbmitt trigger, 1-362 optical sensor, ambient light ignoring, IlI-413 optical sensor-to-TTL interface, III314 optical transmitters, 1-363 FM (PRM), 1-367 optocouplers linear, instrumentation, 11-417 stable, 11-409 optoisolators, IV-475 driver, high-voltage, 1II-482 telephone status monitor using, 1-626 OR gate, 1-395 organ, musical, 1-415 preprogrammed single chip microcontroller for, 1-600 stylus, 1-420 oscillators, 11-420-429, 1II-420-432, IV370-377 1kHz, II-427 1.0 MHz, 1-571 2MHz, 11-571 5-V, I11-432 50 kHz, 1-727 400 MHz, 1-571 500 MHz, 1-570 800 Hz, 1-68 adjustable over 10:1 range, 11-423 astable, 1-462 audio, 1-245, 1II-427, IV-374, IV-375 audio, light-sensitive, I11-315 beat-frequency audio generator, IV371 buffer circuits, IV-89 Butler, aperiodic, 1-196 Butler, common base, 1-191 Butler, emitter follower, 11-190-191, 11-194 cassette bias, 11-426 clock generator, 1-615, 111-85 CMOS, 1-615 CMOS, 1 MHz to 4MHz, 1-199 CMOS, crystal, 1-187 code practice; 1-15.1-20, 1-22, 11428, "'-431, IV,373, IV-375, IV376 Colpitis, 1-194, 1-572, 11-147 Colpitts, harmonic. 1-189-190 crystal (see crystal oscillators) double frequency output, 1-314 discrete sequence, 111-421 duty-cycle, 50-percent, III-426 emitter-coupled, big loop, 1I-422 emitter-coupled, RC, 11-266 exponential digitally controlled, 1-728
feedback, 1-67 flasher and, high drive, 11-235 flasher and, low frequency, 11-234 free-running, 1-531 free-running, square wave, 1-615 frequency doubled output from, 11596 gated,I-728 gated, last-cycle completing, III-427 Hartley, 1-571 hc-based, I11-423 HCu/HCT-based, "'-426 high-current, square-wave generator, I11-585 high-frequency, "'-426 high-frequency, crystal, 1-175, 11-148 load-switching, lOO mA, 1-730 low-distortion, 1-570 low-duty-cycle pulse circuit, IV-439 low-frequency, III-428 low-frequency, crystal, 1-184, 11-146 low-frequency, TIL, 11-595 low-noise crystal, 11-145 Miller, 1-193 neon flasher, tv.u-state, I11-200 one-second, 1 kHz, 11-423 one-shot, voltage-controlled highspeed, 11-266 overtone. 50 MHz to 100 MHz, 1181 overtone, crystal, 1-176, 1-1SO,lJ146, IV-123 overtone, crystal switching, 1-183 overtone, fifth overtone, 1-182 phase-locked, 20-MHz, JV-374 Pierce, 1-195 Pierce, crystal. JI-144 Pierce, harmonic, 1-199, 11-192 quadrature, III-428 quadrature-output, 1-729 quadrature-output, square-wave generator. Ill-585 RIC, 1-612 reflection, crystal-controlled, III-136 relaxation, IV-376 relaxation, SCR, "'-430 resistance-controlled digital, 11-426 rf (see also rf oscillator), 11-550, 1-572 rf-genie, 11-421 rf-powered sidetone, 1-24 RLC, "'-423 sawtooth wave, modulator, II1-373 Schmitt trigger Crystal, 1-181 sine-wave (see sine-wave oscillators) sine-wave/square wave, easily tuned, 1-65 sine-wave/square-wave, tunable, III232 single op amp, 1-529 square-wave, 11-597, 1-613-614, 11-
736
616, IV-532, IV-533 square-wave, 0.5 Hz. 1-616 square-wave, 1kHz. 1-612 start-stop oscillator pulse circuit, IV438 switching, 20 os, 1-729
temperature-compensated, low
sensitivity amplifier, IIl-436

triggered sweep, III-438
voltage-level dual readout, IV-lOB outband- descrambler, 11-164out-aC-bounds pulse-width detector, III-
ISS
output limiter, I11-322 output-gatmg circuit, photomultiplier, U-516
output-stage booster, III-452
power 5v-driven, 11-142 temperature-stable, II-427
temperature-compensated crystaJ, 1187 timer, 500 timer,-I531

tone-burst, decoder and, 1-726 transmitter and, 27 MHz and 49 MHz rf, 1-680 triangle/square wave, 1-616, 11-422
over/under temperature monitor, dual output, 11-64-6

overload protector, speaker, 11-16
overspeed indicator, 1-108

overtone crystal oscillators, 11-146
TTL, 1-179, 1-613 TTL, IMHz to 10MHz, 1-178 TIL, television display using, 11-372 TTL-compatible crystal, 1-197 tube type crystal, 1-192 tunable frequency, [(-425 tunable single comparator, 1-69 varactor tuned 10 MHz ceramic resonator, 11-141 variable, U-421 variable, audio, 20Hz to 20kHz, U727 variable. four-decade. single control for, U-424 variable, wide range, 11-429 variable-duty cycle, fixed-frequency, III-422 voltage-controlled (see voltagecontrolled oscillators) wide-frequency range, 11-262 wide-range, 1-69, III-425 wide-range, variable, 1-730 Wien-bridge (see Wien-bridge oscillators)
50 MHz to 100 MHz, 1-181 lOO MHz, IV-124 crystal, 1-176, 1-180, U-146 crystal switching, 1-183 fifth overtone, 1-182 third-overtone oscillator, IV123 overvoltage detection and protection, IV-389 comparator to detect, 11107 monitor for, Ill 762 protection circuit, I196, 11-496, Ill 513 undervoltage and, indicator, 1150
peak meter, LED, III-333 peak program detector, III771 peaktopeak converter, precision act dc, II-127 peopledetector, infraredactivated, IV225 period counter, 100 MHz, frequency and, II-136 periodto-voltage converter, IV115 pestrepeller, ultrasonic, III-699, 111706, III-707, IV-605-606 pH meter, 1-399 pH probe, 1-399, IlI-501 phase detectors, III-440-442 10-bit accuracy, II-176 phase selector/sync rectifier/balanced modulator, III-441 phase sequence, III-44l phase difference, 0- to ISO-degree, 11344 phase indicator, 11-439 phase meter, 1-406 digital VOM, IV-277 phase selector, detector/sync rectifier/ balanced modulator,lII-441 phase sequence circuits, II-437-442 detector, U-439, II-441, U-442, IlI-
441
indicator, 1-476, II-439 re circuit, phase sequence reversal detection, II-438 reversal, re circuit to detect, 11-438 threephase tester, 11-440 phase shifters, IV-647 0-180 degree,l-477 0-360 degree, 1-477 single transistor, 1-476 phase splitter, precision, 111-582 phase tracking, three-phase square wave generator, 11-598 phasor gun, 1-606, IV-523 phono amplifiers, 1-8081 magnetic pickup, 1-89 stereo, bass tone control, 1-670 phono preamps, 1-91 equalized, III-671 LM382,1-90 low-noise design, IV-36 magnetic, 1-91, IlI-37 magnetic, ultrn-low-noise, IV-36 photo-conductive detector amplifier, four qUlJ,drant, 1-359 photo memory switch for ac power control, 1363 photo stop action, 1-4Sl photocell, monostable, self-adjust trigger, II-329 photocurrent integrator, II-326 photodiode circuits amplifier, III-672
XOR-gate, 1II-429 yelp, U-577 oscilloscopes, U-430-433, III-433-439 analog mUltiplexer, single- to fourtrace scope converter, 11-431 beam splitter, 1-474 calibrator, U-433, III-436 converter, 1-471 CRO doubler, III-439
eight-channel voltage display, 111-435
extender, III-434FET dual-trace switch for, 11-432 four-trace oscilloscope adapter, IV-
267 monitor, 1-474 multiplexer, add-on, III-437 preamplifier, III-437 preamplifier, counter, III-438 preamplifi.er, instrumentation amplifiers, IV-230-231
pager, pocketsize, III288 PALlNTSC decoder, RGB input, III717 palette, video, IJI720 panning circuit, twochannel, 157 papersheet discriminator, copying machines, III339 papertape reader, 11-414 parallel connections, telephone, III611 partyline intercom, 11--303 passive bridge, differentiator tunable notch filter, 11-403 passive mixer, 1158 PCB continuity tester, 11342 peak decibel meter, III348 peak detectors, 11174, II175, 11-434 436, IV-138, IV-143 analog, with digital hold, III-153 digital,IlI-160 high-bandwidth, III-161 high-frequency, 11175 high-speed, 1-232 low-drift, IlI-156 negative, 1225, 1234 op amp, IV145 positive, 1-225, 1-235, II-435, IlI-169 ultra-low drift, 1-227 voltage, precision, 1226 wide-bandwidth, IlI-162 widerange, III152
737
photodiode circuits amplifier (cont.) amplifier, low-noise, 111-19 current-to-voltage converter, 11-128 sensor amplifier, 11-324 amplifier, 1-361 comparator, precision, 1-360 level detector, precision, 1-365 PIN, thermally -stabilized signal conditioner with. 11-330 PIN-ta-frequency converters, III-120 source follower, 111-419 photoelectric circuits ac power switch, JII-319 alann system, 11-4 controlled flasher, 11-232 light controller, IV-369 smoke alarm, line operated, 1-596 smoke detector, 1-596 switch, 11-321 switch, synchronous, 11-326 photoflash, electronic, 111-449 photography-related circuits, 11-443449, iII-443-449, IV-378-382 auto-advance projector, 11-444 camera alarm trigger, III-444 camera trip circuit, IV-381 contrast meter, 11-447 darkroom enlarger timer, III445 electronic flash trigger, 11-448 enlarger timer, II-446 exposure meter, 1-484 flash meter, ill-446 flash slave driver, 1-483 flash trigger, electronic, 11-448 flash trigger, remote, 1-484 flash trigger, sound-triggered, 11-449 flash trigger, xenon flash, III-447 photo-event timer, IV-379 photoflash, electronic, IlI-449 shutter speed tester, 11-445 slave-flash unit trigger, SCR design, IV-380, IV-382 slide projector auto advance, IV-381 slide timer, 1lI-448 slide-show timer, 111-444 sound trigger for flash unit, 11-449, IV-382 time-delay flash trigger, IV-380 timer, 1-485 xenon flash trigger, slave, III-447 photomultiplier output-gating circuit, 11- 516 picoammeters, 1-202, 11-154, III-338 circuit for, 11-157 guarded input circuit, 11-156 picture fixer/inverter, 1II-722 Pierce crystal oscillator, 1-195, 11-144 I'MHz, IlI-I34 hannonic, 1-199, 11-192 low-frequency, III-l33
piezoelectric alarm, 1-12 piezoelectric fan-based temperature controller, III-627 PIN photodiode-to-frequency converters, 111-120 pink noise generator, 1-468 plant watering gauge, 11-248 plant watering monitor, 11-245 plant waterer, 1-443 playback amplifier, tape, 1-77 PLLlBC receiver, 11-526 pocket pager, I11-288 polarity converter, 1-166 POlarity-protection relay, IV-427 polarity-reversing-amplifiers, lowpower, III-16 portable-radio 3 V fixed power supplies, IV-397 position indicator/controller, tape recorder, 11-615 positive input/negative output charge pump, I11-360 positive- peak detector, 11-435 positive regulator, NPN/PNP boost, iII-475 power amps, 11-450-459, iII-450-456 2- to 6-watt audio amplifier with preamp, 11-451 10 W, 1-76 12 W low distortion, 1-76 25 W, 11-452 90 W, safe area protection, 11-459 am radio, 1-77 audio, 11-4&1, I11-454, IV-28-33 audio, 20-W, III-456 audio, 5O-W, I11-451 audio, 6-W, with preamp. II1~454 audio, booster, ll-455 bridge audio, 1-81 bull horn, 11-453 class~D. III-453 hybrid, III-455 inverting, 1-79 low-distortion, 12 W, 1-76 low-power audio, 11-454 noninverting, 1-79 noninverting, ac, 179 outputstage booster, I1I-452 portable, III-452 rear speaker ambience amplifier, 11458
pOwer factor controller, three-phase, II

388
rf, 1296-MHz solid state, III-542 rf, 5W, 11-542 switching, 1-33 twometer 10 W, 1-562 walkman amplifier, 11456 power booster, 1~28, 1-33 power control, burst, 1II-362 power disconnector, low-voltage, 11-97
power failure alarm, 1-581-582 power gain test circuit, 60 MHz, 1-489 power inverters, I11-298 12 VDC-to-117 VAC at 60 Hz, III294 medium, 111-296 MOSFET, I11-295 power loss detector, 11-175 power meters, 1-489 audio, 1-488 frequency and, 11-250 rf,I-16 SWR, 1-16 power op amp/audio amp, high slew rate, 1-82 power outage light, line-operated, III415 power pack for battery operated devices, 1509 power protection circuit, 1-515 power reference, O-t0-20 V, 1-694 power supplies, 11-460-486, III-464 5V including momentary backup, 11464 5V, 0_5A, 1-491 8-amp regulated, mobile equipment operation, 11-461 10 A regulator, current and thermal protection, 11-474 12-14 V regulated 3A, 11-480 90 V rms voltage regulator with PUT, 11-479 500 kHz switching inverter for 12V, 11-474 2,000 V low-current supply, 1V-636637 adjustable current limit and output voltage, 1-505 arc lamp, 25W, 11-476 arc-jet, starting circuit, III-479 backup supply, drop-in main-activated, IV-424 balance indicator, ITI-494 battery charger and, 14V, 4A, 11-73 bench top, 11-472 benchtop, dual output, 1-505 bipolar, battery instruments, 11-475 charge pool, III-469 dc-to-dc SMPS variable 18V to 30 V out at 0.2A, 11-480 dual polarity, 1-497 fault monitor, single-supply, III-495 fixed power supplies (see fixed power supplies) general-purpose, I11-465 glitches in, comparator to detect, U107
738
high-voltage (see high-voltage power supplies) increasing zener diode power rating, 11-485 isolated feedback, III-460 laser power supply, voltage multiplier circuits, IV-636 low-ripple, 1-500 low-volts alarm, 11-493 memory save on power-down, 11-486 micropower bandgap reference, 11470 microprocessor power supply watchdog, 11-494 monitors {see power-supply monitors) off-line flyback regulator, 11-481 overvoltage protection circuit, 11-496 overvoltages in, comparator to detect, 11-107 power-switching circuit, 11-466 programmable, III-467 protection circuit, 11-497 protection circuit, fast acting, 1-518 push-pull, 400V/60W, 11-473 radiation-hardened 125A linear regulator, 11-468 regulated, + 15V I-A, IlI-462 regulated, -15V I-A, IlI-463 regulated, split, 1-492 SCR preregulator for, 11-482 single supply voltage regulator, 11-471 split, 1-512 stand-by, non-volatile CMOS RAMs, 11-477 switching, 11-470, IlI-458 switching, 50-W off-lioe, IlI-473 switching, variable, 100-KHz multiple-output, IlI-488 three-rail, IlI-466 uninterruptible, +5V, IlI-477 uninterruptible, personal computer, 11-462 variable (see variable power supplies) voltage regulator, 11-464 power-consumption limiters, III-S72 power-control circuits, IV-383-389 ac switch, battery-triggered, IV-387 bang-bang controllers, IV-389 current-loop control, SCR design, IV387 high-side switches, 5 V supplies, IV384, lV-385 monitor. SCR design, IV-385 MOSFET switch, lV-366 overvoltage protector, IV-389 power controner, universal design, IV-388 pushbutton switch. IV-388 power-down protection
alarm, IlI-511 memory save power supply for, 11- 486 protection circuit, 11-98 power-line connections monitor. ac, 111510
power-line modem, III-82 power-on reset, 11-366 power-supply monitors, 11-491-497, III493-495, lV-422-427 backup supply, drop-in main-activated, lV-424 balance monitor, 111-494 boosterlbuffer, boosts reference current, IV-425 circuit breaker, trip circuit, IV-423 fault monitor, single-supply, IlI-495 memory protector/supply monitor, lV-425 polarity-protection relay, lV-427 test load, constant-current, IV-424 triac for ac-voltage control, IV-426 tube amplifier, high-voltage isolation. IV-426 voltage sensor, IV-423 power-switching circuit, 11-466 complementary ac, 1-379 power/frequency meter, 11-250 preamplifiers, 1-41 6-meter, 20 dB gain and low NF, II543 1000x, low-noise design, IV-37 audio amplifier, 2- to 6-watt, 11-451 audio amplifier. 6-Wand, 111-454 equalized, for magnetic phono cartridges, 1J1-671 frequency counter, III-128 general purpose, 1-84 general-purpose design, audio signal amplifiers, IV-42 handitalkies, two-meter, 1-19 IF, 30 MHz, lV-460 impedance-matching,IV-37 LM382 phono, 1-91 low-noise, IV-41 low-noise 30MHz, 1-561 low-noise transformerless balanced microphone, 1-88 magnetic phono, 1-91, 1J1-673, lV-35 medical instrument, II-349 microphone, 11-45, IY-37, lV-42 microphone, low-impedance, IV-41 microphone, tone control for, 11-687 microphone, transfonnerless, unbal~ anced input, 1-88 microwave, 2.3 GHz. IV-316 microwave, 3.4 GHz, IV-316 microwave, bias supply, IV-318 microwave, single-stage, 10 GHz, IV317
microwave, two-stage, 10 GHz, IV319 NAB, tape playback, professional, I11-38 NAB, record, I11-673 NAB, two-pole, 1J1-673 oscilloscope, III-437 oscilloscope, instrumentation amplifiers, IY-230-231 oscilloscope/counter. III-438 phono,l-91 phono, low-noise, IV-36 phono, magnetic, ultra-Iow-noise, IV36 phono, magnetic, 1J1-37 read-head, automotive circuits, 111-44 RIAA, 1J1-38 RlAAINAB compensation, 1-92 stereo, 11-43, 11-45 tape, 1-90 thennocouple instrumentation amplifier, III-283 tone control, 1-675 tone control, high-level, 11-688 tone control, !C, 1-673, III-657 tone control, mixer, I-58 UHF-TV, 1J1-546 ultra-low leakage, 1-38, 11-7
VHF,I-560
precision amplifier, 1-40 digitally programmable input and gain, 11-335 prereguiators high-voltage--power supplies, III-480 tracking, 1J1-492 prescaler, data circuits, low-frequency, lV-132 prescaler probe, amplifying, 650 MHz, 11-502 preselectors rf amplifiers, JFET, lV-485 rf- amplifiers, JFET, double-tuned, IV483 rf amplifiers, varactor-tuned, IV-488 printer-error alarm, computer circuits, lV-l06 printers printer-error alarm, IV-106 two-sheets in printer detector, IV136 probes, 11-498-504, I11-496-503, IV428-434 100 K megaohm dc, 1-524 ac hot wire, 1-581 audible TTL, 1-524 audio-rf signal tracer, -1-527 capacitance buffer, low-input, III-498 capacitance buffer, stabilized lowinput, III-502
739
probes (cont.) clamp-on-current compensator, 11501 CMOS logic, 1-523 FET, I11-501 general purpose rf detector, 11-500 ground-noise, battery-powered, III-
SOO
logic probes (see logic__ probes) microvolt, II-499 optical light probe, IV-359 pH, 1-399, Ill-SOl prescaler, 650 MHz amplifying, 11502 ri, I-S23, I11-498, III-S02, IV-433 single injector-tracer, 11-500 test, 4-220V, 1II-499 three-in-one test set; logic probe, signal tracer, injector, IV-429 tone, digital IC testing, 11-504 universal test probe, IV-431 process control interface, 1-30 processor, CW signal, 1-18 product detector, 1-223 programmable amplifiers, 11-334, III504-508 differential-input, programmable gain, I11-507 inverting, programmable-gain, Ill-50S noninverting, programmable-gain, IIISOS precision, digital control, III-S06 precision, digitally programmable, IIiS06 programmable-gain, selectable input, 1-32 variable-gain, wide-range digital control, I11-506 projectors (see photography-re1ated circuits) proportional temperature controller, III626 protection circuits, II-9S-99, III -509SI3 1208 circuit breaker, 11-97 automatic power down, II-98 circuit breaker, ac, III -512 circuit breaker, electronic, highspeed, 11-96 compressor protector, IV-351 crowbars, electronic, 11-99, I11-51O heater protector, servo-sensed, III624 line protectors, computer 110, 3 uP, IV-IOI line dropout detector, 11-98 line-voltage monitor, 111-511 low-voltage power disconnector, TI-97 overvoltage, ll-96, IV-389
overvoltage, fast, III-513 overvoltage, logic, 1-517 polarity-protection relay for power supplies, IV-427 power-down, ll-98 power-failure alarm, I11-511 power-line connections monitor, ac, Ill-SIO power supply; 11-497,1-518 reset-protection for computers, IV-lOO proximity sensors, 1-135-136, 1-34-4, 115OS-S07, III-S14-S18, IV-341-346 alarm for, 11-506
capacitive, 111-515
field disturbance sensor/alarm, 11-507 infrared-reflection switch, IV-34S relay-output, IV-345 SCR alann, I11-517 self-biased, changing field, 1-135 switch, I11-517 UHF movement detector, I11-516 pseudorandom sequencer, 111-301 pulse circuits, IV-43S-440 amplitude discriminator, III-356 coincidence detector, II-178 counter, ring counter, low-power, IV437 delay, dual-edge trigger, 1II-147 detector, missing-pulse, I11-159 divider, non-integer programmable, I11-226,II-S11 extractor, square-wave, I11-584 generator, 555-circuit, IV-439 generator, delayed-pulse generator, IV-440 generator, free-running, IV-438 generator, logic troubleshooting applications, IV-436 generator, transistorized design, IV437 height-to-width converters, 111-119 osciUator, fast, low duty-cycle, IV-439 oscillator, start-stop, stable design, IV-438 pulse train-to-sinusoid converters, I11-122 sequence detector, 11-172 stretcher, IV-440 stretcher, negative pulse stretcher, IV-436 -stretcher, positive pulse stretcher, IV-438 pulse generators, 11-508-511 2-ohm, I11-231 300-V, I11-521 astable multivibrator, 11-510 clock, 60Hz, 11-102 CMOS short-pulse, I11-523 delayed, 11-509
EEPROM, 5V-powered, I11-99 interrupting pulse-generation, 1-357 logic, III-S20 programmable, 1-529 sawtooth-wave generator and, I11-241 single,II-17S two-phase pulse, 1-532 unijunction transistor design, 1-530 very low duty-cycle, I11-521 voltage-controller and, I11-524 wide-ranging, III-S22 pulse supply, high-voltage power supplies, IV-412 pulse-dialing telephone, I11-6W pulse-position modulator, I11-375 pulse-width-to-voltage converters, 111117 pulse-width modulators (PWM), IV-326 brightness controller, I11-307 control, microprocess.or selected, 11116 modulator, I11-376 motor speed control, 11-376, I11-389 multiplier cin:uit, 11-264, I11-214 out-of-bounds detector, I11-158 proportional-controller circuit, 11-21 servo amplifier, III-379 speed control/energy-recovering brake, I11-380 very short, measurement circuit, III335
pulse/tone dialer, single-chip, I11-603 pulsers, laser diode, 111-311 pump circuits controller, single chip, ll-247 positive input/negative output charge, 1-418 push switch, on/off, electronic, 11-359 push-pull power supply, 400V/60W, 11473 pushbutton power control switch, IV~388
PUT battery chargers, Ill-54 PUT long-duration timer, 1I-<;7S pyrometer, optical, 1-654
Q
Q-multipliers audio, 11-20 transistorized, 1-566 QRP CW transmitter, I11-690 QRP SWR bridge, I11-336 quad op amp, simultaneous waveform generator using, 11-259 quadrature oscillators, III-428 square-wave generator, I11-585 quartz crystal oscillator, two-gate, III135
740
quick-deactivating battery sensor, III61
R
race-car motor/crash sound generator, I11-578 radar detectors. II-518-520. IV-441-442 one-chip, 11-519 radiation detectors, 11-512-517 alarm. II-4 micropower, 11-513 monitor, wideband, 1-535 photomultiplier output-gating circuit, II-516 pocket-sized Geiger counter, 11-514 radiation-hardened 125A linear regulator, 11-46B radio AM car-radio to short-wave radio converter, IV-SOO AM demodu1ator. II-I60 AM radio, power amplifier, 1-77 AM radio. receivers. I11-81. I11-529. I11-535 AM/FM. clock radio. 1-543 AM/FM. squelch circuit. II-547. Ill-I amateur radio. I11-260. IlI-534. III675 automotive, receiver for, 11-52S clock. 1-542 direction finder, radio signals, IV-148149 FM (see FM transmissions) portable-radio 3 V fixed power supplies. IV-397 radio beacon converter, IV-495 receiver, AM radio, IV-455 receiver, old-time design, IV-453 receiver, reflex radio receiver, IV-452 receiver, short-wave receiver, IV-454 receiver, TRF radio receiver, IV-452 radio beacon corrverter, IV-495 radio-control circuits audio oscillator. II-567. IlI-555 motor speed controller, 1-576 phase sequence reversal by, 11-438 oscillator, emitter-coupled, 11-266 receiver/decoder, 1-574 single-SCR design. 11-361 radioactivity (see radiation detectors) rain warning beeper. II-244. IV-189 RAM. non-volatile CMOS. stand-by power supply. II-477 ramp generators, 1-540, 11-521-523, IlI-525-527.IV-443-447 accurate, 111-526 integrator,--initial condition reset, 1lI527
linear, II-270 variable reset level, 11-267 voltage-controlled. II-523 ranging system, ultrasonic. 1lI-697 reaction timer, IV-204 read-head pre-amplifier, automotive circuits, 111-44 readback system, disc/tape phase modulated. 1-89 readout, rf current, 1-22 receiver audio circuit, IV-3! receivers and receiving circuits (see also transceivers; transmitters), II-524-526. 111-528-535. IV-448-461 50kHz FM optical transmitter, 1-36! acoustic-sound receiver, IV-3!! AGC system for CA3028 IF amplifier, IV-458 AM. I11-529. IV-455 AM, carrier-current circuit, III-B! AM. integrated. 111-535 analog, 1-545 ATV d receiver/converter, 420 MHz, low-noise, IV-496, IV-497 car radio, capacitive diode tuning/ electronic MW/LW switching, 11525 carrier current, 1-143, 1-146 carrier current, single transistor, 1145 carrier system, 1-141 carrier-operated relay (COR). IV-461 CMOS line. 1-546 data receiver/message demuxer, three-wire design, IV-130 fiber optic, 10 MHz, 11-205 fiber optic, SO-Mb/s, I11-18l fiber optic. digital. I11-178 fiber optic, high-sensitivity, 3OnW, 1270 fiber optic, low-cost, 100-M baud rate. IlI-180 fiber optic, low-sensitivity. 300nW, 1271 fiber optic, very high-sensitivity. low speed 3nW. 1-269 FM, carrier-current circuit, I11-80 FM. MPXlSCA. I11-530 FM. narrow-band. IlI-532 FM. tuner. IlI-529 FM, zero center indicator, 1-338 FSK data. IlI-533 ham-band. 1II"534 IF amplifier, IV-459 IF amplifier, preamp, 30 MHz, IV460 IF amplifier/receiver. IV-459 infrared. 1-342. II-292. IlI-274. IV220-221
laser, IV-368 LF receiver, IV-451 line-type. digital data. 1I1-534 line-type, low-cost, 111-532 monitor for, 11-526 optical. 1-364. 11-418 optical light receiver, IV-367, IV-36B PLLlBC. 11-526 pulse-frequency modulated, IV-453 radio control, decoder and, 1-574 radio receiver, AM, IV-455 radio receiver, old-time design, IV453 radio receiver, reflex, IV-452 radio receiver, TRF, IV-452 regenerative receiver, one-transistor design, IV-449 RS-232 to CMOS. 1II-102 short-wave receiver, IV-454 signal-reception alarm. I11-270 superheterodyne receiver, 3.5-to-lO MHz. IV-450-451 tracer.1I1-357 transceiver/mixer. HF, IV-457 ultrasonic. IlI-698. IlI-705 zero center indicator for FM, 1-33B recording amplifier, 1-90 recording devices (see tape-recorder circuits) rectangu1ar~to-triangular wavefonn converter. IV-116-117 rectifiers. II-527-528. IlI-536-537 absolute value, ideal full wave,II-52B averaging filter. 1-229 bridge rectifier, fixed power supplies, IV-398 broadband ac active, IV-271 diodeless, precision, 111-537 full-wave. 1-234. 1I1-537. IV-328. IV660 ball-wave. 1-230. 11-528. IV-325 ball-wave. fast. 1-228 high-impedance precision, for ac/dc converter, 1-164 inverter/rectifier, programmable opamp design, IV-364 low forward-dmp. 1I1-471 precision, 1-422 synchronous, phase detector-selectorlba1anced modulator, 111-44! redial, electronic telephone set with, 111-606 reference voltages, 1-695, I11-773-775 10V. 1-696 3V.I-696 5V.I-696 0- to 20 V power. 1-694. 1-699 amplifier, 1-36 bipolar output, precision, 1-698
741
reference voltages (cont.) dual tracking voltage,- precision, 1-698 high-stability, 1-696 low-noise buffered, precision, 1-698 low-power regulator, 1-695 micropower 10 V, precision, 1-697 square wave voltage, precision, 1-696 standard cell replacement, precision, 1-699 variable-voltage reference source, IV327 reference clock, three phase clock from, 11-101 reference supply, low-voltage adjustable, 1-695 rel1ection oscillator, crystal-controlled, III-l36 refiectometer, 1-16 regenerative receiver, one-transistor design, IV-449 registers, shift, 1,380, 11-366 driver, 1-418 regulated power supplies 8-amp, 11-461 12 to 14V at 3 A, 11-480 + 15V I-A, III-462 -15V I-A, III-463 split power supplies, 1-492 regulators (see voltage regulators) rejection filter, 1-283 relaxation oscillator, III-430, IV-376 relays, II-529-532, IV-471-475 ac, optically coupled, III-418 ac, photon coupler in, 11-412 ac, solid-state latching, IV-472 audio operated, 1-608 bidirectional switch, IV-472 capacitance, 1-130 carrier operated, 1-575 carrier-operated relay (COR), IV-461 dc latching, optically coupled, I11-417 delay-off circuit, IV-473 driver, delay and controls .closure time, II-530 light-beam operated on/off, 1-366 monostable relay, low-consumption design, IV-473 optically coupled, ac, I11-418 optically coupled, dc latching, III-417 optoisolator, IV-475 polarity-protection for power supplies, IV-427 rf-actuated, III-270 ringer, telephone, Ill-606 solid-state, III-569-570, IV-474 solid-state, 10 A 25 Vdc, 1-623 solid-state, ac, 1II-570 solid-state, ac, latching, IV-472
solid-state, dc, normally -open/closed, III-412 solid-state, integrated, 11-408 solid-state, light-isolated, 1-365 solid-state, ZVS, antiparallel SCR output, III-416 sound actuated, 1-576, 1-610 telephone, 1-631 time delayed, 1-663 time delayed, ultra-precise, 1-219 tone actuated, 1-576 TR circuit, 11-532 triac, contact protection, 11-531 remote control devices amplifier, 1-99 carrier, current, I~146 drop-voltage recovery for long-line systems, IV-32B extender, infrared, IV-227 faxltelephone switch, IV-552-553 infrared circuit, IV-224 lamp or appliance, 1-370 loudspeaker via IR link, 1-343 on/off switch, 1-577 ringer, telephone, III-614 sensor, temperature transducer, 1649 servo system, 1-575 telephone monitor, 11-626 temperature sensor, 11-654tester, infrared, IV-228 thermometer, 11-659 transmitterireceiver, JR, 1-342 video switch, IV-619-621 repeaters European-type, tone burst generator for, III-74 fiber optic link, 1-270 telephone, I11-607 repeater beeper, 1-19 reset buttons child-proof computer reset, 1V-107 power-on, 11-366 protection circuit for computer, IV100 resistance/continuity meters, 11-533, III-538-540 cable tester, IlI-539 continuity tester, III-54-0 ohnuneter, linear, ill-54-0 resistance-ratio detector, 11-342 single chip checker, II-534 resistance measurement, low parts count ratiometric, 1-550 resistance-to-voltage converter, 1.. 161162 resistor multiplier, 11-199 resonator oscillator, varactor tuned 10
MHz ceramic, 11-141 restorer, video dc, III-723 reverb effect, analog delay line, IV~2l reverb system, stereo, 1-602, 1-606 reversing motor drive, dc control signal, II-381 rf amplifiers, II-537-549, III-542-547, IV-476-493 1 W, 2.3 GHz, 11-540 10 W, 225-400 MHz, 11-548 10 dB-gain, III-543 2- to 30 MHz, III-544 4 W amp for 900 MHz, IV-477 5 W 1SO-MHz, III-546 5 W power, II-542 6-meter kilowatt, II-545 6-meter preamp, 20dB gain and low NF, II-543 60 W 225-400 MHz, III-547 125 W, 150 MRz, 11-544 500 MHz, IV-491 1,296 MHz, IV-436 I,SOO W, IV-478-479 AGC, wideband adjustable, III545 broadcast-band, III-264, II546 broadcast-band booster, IV-487 buffer amplifier with modulator, IV490 cascade amplifier, IV-48B common-gate, 450-MHz. III-544 isolation amplifier, 11-54-7 linear amplifier, 903 MRz, IV-484485 linear amplifier, 6-m, 100 W, IV-480481 linear amplifier, ATV, 10-to-15 W, IV481 low distortion 1.6 to 30MHz SSB driver, II-538 meter-driver, 1-MRz, III-545 MOSFET rf-amp stage, dual-gate, IV-489 power, 600 W, 1-559 power amp, 1296-MHz solid-state, III-542 preselector, JFET, IV-4B5 preselector, JFET, double-tuned, IV483 preselector, varactor-tuned, IV-488 UHF-TV preamp, III-546 UHF TV-line amplifier, IV-462, IV483 wideband amplifier, IV-479, IV-489, IV-490 wideband amplifier, HF, IV-492 wid"band amplifier, JFET, IV-493 wideband amplifier, MOSFET, IV-492 wideband amplifier, two-CA3100 op
742
amp design, IV-491 d circuits attenuator, IV-322 burst generators, portable, 111-73 converters, IV-494-501 converters, ATV receiver/converter, 420 MHz, low-noise. IV-496, IV497 converters. radio beacon converter, IV-495 converters, receiver frequencyconverter stage, IV-499 converters, SW converter for AM car radio, IV-SOO converters, two-meter, IV-498 converters. up-converter, TVRO subcarrier reception, IV-501 converters, VLF converter, IV-497 converters, WWV-to-SW converter, IV-499 converters ,receiving converter, 220 MHz, 1V-500 current readout, 1-22 detector, 11-500 detector probe, IV-433 genie, 11-421 measurement/test circuits, IV-297303 modulators, 1-436, 111-372, 111-374 modulators, double sideband suppressed carrier, 11-369 oscillators, 1-550-551, 1-572 oscillators, 5 MHz VFO, 11-551 oscillators, transmitter and, 27MHz and 49MHz, 1-680 output indicator, IV-299 power meter, 1-16 power meter, sidetone oscillator, 1-24 power meter, switch, 111-592 power meter, wide-range, 1II-332 probe, 1-523, 111-498, 111-502 signal tracer probe, audio, 1-527 snifter, 11-210 switch, low-cost, I11-361 VHFfUHF diode switch, 1V-544 voltmeter, 1-405, 111-766 RGB video amplifier, 111-709 RGB-composite video signal converter, I11-714 RGB-to-NTSC converter, IV-611 ring counters 20 kHz, 11-135 incandescent lamps, 1-301 low cost, 1-301 pulse circuit, low-power. IV-437 SCR, I11-195 variable timing, 11-134 ring detectors
low line loading. 1-634 telephone, 11-623, I11-619 telephone, auto-answer, 1-635 telephone, optically interfaced, III611 ring-around flasher, LED, 111-194 ringers, telephone, 1-628, IV-556 extension-phone ringer, IV-561 high isolation, 11-625 multi-tone, remote programmable, 11634
musical, 11-619 piezoelectric. 1-636 plug-in, remote, 11-627 relay, I11-606 remote, 11-627, III-614, IV-562 silencer, IV-557 tone, 1-627, 1<i28, 1I<i30, II<i31 ripple suppressor, IV-175 fixed power supplies. IV-396 RLC oscillator, 111-423 nns-to-dc converter, 1-167, 11-129 thermal, 50-MHz, I11-117 road ice alarm, 11-57 robots eyes for, 11-327 light-seeking, II-325 rocket launcher, 11-358 rotation detector, 11-283 roulette, electronic, 11-276, IV-205 RS-232 interface CMOS-to,line receiver, III-102 dataselector, automatic, 111-97 drive circuit,low-power, I11-175 LED circuit, I11-103 line-driven CMOS circuits. IV-I04 RS flip-flop, 1-395 RTD signal conditioners 5V powered linearized platinum, 11650 precision, linearized platinum, Il-639 RTTY machines, fixed current supply, 1V-400 rumble filters, 1-297, I11-192, 111-660, 1V-170,IV-175
S meter, 111-342 safe area protection, power amplifier with, III-459 safety flare, 11-608 Sallen-Key filters _500 Hz bandpass. 1-291 low-pass, active. IV-177 low-pass, equal component, 1-292 low-pass, second order, 1-289 sample-and-hold circuits. 1-590, 11-552-
559, 111-548-553, 1V-502-503 x 1000, 1-589 charge-compensated, 11-559 fast and precise, 11-556 filtered, 111-550 frequency-to-voltage conversion, IV194 high-accuracy, 1-590 high-performance, 11-557 high-speed amplifier, 1-587 high-speed, 1-587-588, 1-590, I11-550 infinite, 11-558 inverting, I11-552 JFET,I-586 low-drifl, 1-586 offset adjustment for, 1-588 three-channel multiplexer with, III- 396 track-and-hold, 111-552 track-and-hold, basic, III-549 sampling circuit, hour time delay, 11-668 saturated standard cell amplifier. 11-296 sawtooth waves converter, IV-114 generator. digital design, IV-444, IV446 oscillator modulator, I11-373 pulse generator and, III-241 SCA decoder, 1-214, 11-166, 11-170 SCA demodulator, 11-150, 111-565 scale, digital weight, 1-398 scaler, inverse, 1-422 scanner, bar codes, 111-363 Schmitt triggers, 1-593, 111-153 crystal oscillator, 1-181 programmable hysteresis, 1-592 TTL-compatible, 11-111 without hysteresis, 1-592 SCR circuits annunciator. self-interrupting load, IV-9 chaser, III-197 crowbar. 11-496 flasher, 111-197 flip-flop, 11-367 gas/smoke detector, III-251 preregu!ator, 11-482 proximity alann, 111-517 radio control using, 11-361 relaxation flasher, 11-230 relaxation oscillator, 111-430 ring counter,lII-195 tester, III-344 time delay circuit with, 11-670 triggering series. optically coupled, I11-411 scramblers, audio (see also sound generators; voice-activated circuits), 1V-25-27
743
scramblers. audio (cont.) telephone, 11-618 voice scrambler/descrambler, IV-26 voice scrambler/disguiser, IV-27 scratch filters, 111-189, IV-175 LM287 in, 1297 second-audio program adapter, 111-142 security circuits, 1-4, IIl-3-9 automotive security system. 1-5, IV4956 home system, 1-6, IV-87 infrared. wireless, IV-222-223 sense-oC-slope tilt meter, 11-664 sensors (see also alarms; control circuits; detectors: indicators; monitors) 0-50 C, four-channel temperature, 1648 air-flow sensor. thermistor bridge, IV82 ambient light ignoring optical, I11-413 capacitive, alarm for, 111-515 cryogenic fluid level, 1-386 differential temperature, 1-655 humidity, 11285-287, I1I266267 IC temperature, 1-649 isolated temperature, 1-651 light level, [367 light, backbiased GaAs LED, lI321 logarithmic light, 1-366 magnetic current, low-power, I11-341 motion,IV-341-346 motion, unidirectional. 11-346 nanoampere, 100 megohm input impedance, 1-203 optical interruption sensor, IV-366 photodiode amplifier for. 11-324 precision temperature transducer with remote, 1-64-9 proximity, 11.505, I1I514518, IV 341346 remote, loop transmitter for, III-70 remote temperature, 1-654 self-biased proximity, detected changing field, [135 short-circuit sensor, computer remote data lines, IV-102 simple differential temperature, 1-654 temperature (see also temperature sensor), lI645, [648, [657 temperature, I11-629-631, IIl-629 voltage regulators, LM317 design, [V466 voltage sensor, power supplies, IV423 voltagelevel, I1I770 water level, 1-389 zero crossing detector with temperature, [733
sequence indicator, phase. 1-476 sequencer, pseudorandom, I11-301 sequential flasher, 11-233 ac, lI238 automotive turn signals, 1-109 sequential timer, IIl-651 series cOlUlectors, telephone. 111-609 servo amplifiers 400 Hz, 11386 bridge type ac, 1-458 dc, [457 servo motor drive amplifier. 11-384 servo systems controller, I11-384 remote control, 1-575 shaper, sine wave, Il-561 shift registers, 1-380, 11-366 driver for, 1-418 shifter, ---phase (see phase shifted ship siren, electronic, 11-576 short-circuit proof lamp driver, 11-310 shortwave transmissions converters, IIl-114 converter,. AM car radio. IV-500 FET booster, 1-561 receiver,.JV-454 short-circuit sensor, computer remote data lines, IV-102 shunt, multimeter shunt. IV-293 shutoff, automatic, battery-powered projects, IIl-61 shutter speed tester, 11-445 sidetone oscillator, ri-powered, 1-24 signal amplifiers, audio, IV-34-42 signal attenuator, analog, microprocessor-controlled, 111-101 signal combiner, I11-368 signal conditioners, IV-649 5V powered linearized platinum RTD, 1l650 bridge circuit, strain gauge, 11-85 linearized RTD, precision design, 11639 LVDT, 1l338 thermally stabilized PIN photodiode, 1l330 signal distribution amplifier. 1-39 signal generators (see also function generators; sound generators: waveform generators) AM broadcast-band, IV-302 AM/[F, 455 kHz, [V30l highfrequency, lI150 square-wave, III-583-585 staircase. 1II-586-588 two-function, III-234 signal injectors, III554-555 signal sources, crystal-controlled, 11 143
signal tracer, three-in-one set: logic probe, signal tracer. injector, IV-429 signal-strength meters, III-342, IV-166 signal-supply, voltage-follower amplifiers, III20 simulated inductor, 11-199 simulators EKG, threechip, [[[350 VOR signals, IV-273 sine-to--square wave converter. IV-120 sine-wave descrambler, 11-163 sine-wave generators, square-wave and, tunable oscillator, III-232 sine-wave oscillators, 1-65, 11-560-570, [[[556559, ][[560, [V504513 555 used as RC audio oscillator, 11567 adjustable, 1l568 audio, 11-562 audio. generator. I11-559 audio, simple generator for, 11-564 -generator, IV-50S generator, LC sine-wave, IV-507 generator, LF, IV-512 generator, pure sine-wave, IV-506 generator, VLF audio tone, IV-508 generators, 60 Hz, IV-507 LC oscillator, low-frequency, IV-509 low distortion, 11-561 one-IC audio generator. 11-569 phase-shift, audio ranging, IV-510 programmable-frequency, II1-424 relaxation. modified UJT for clean audio sinusoids, 11-566 sine wave shaper, 11-561 sine/square wave TIL oscillator, IV512 two-tone generator, 11-570 two-transistor design, IV-508 variable, super low-distortion. I11-558 very-low distortion design, IV-509 Wien bridge, 168, [70, 1l566, [V
511
Wien bridge, CMOS chip in, 11-568 Wien-bridge, low-distortion, thermal stable, [[[557 Wien-bridge, single-supply, III-558 Wien-bridge. three-decade 15 Hz to 15 kHz, [V5lO Wien-bridge. very-low distortion, IV 513 sine-wave output buffer amplifier, 1-126 sine-wave to square-wave converter. 1170 sine/cosine generator, 0.1 to 10 kHz, 1l260 sine/square wave oscillators, 1-65 easily tuned, 1-65 TTL design, [V512
744
tunable, III-232 single-pulse generator, 11-175 single-sideband (SSB) communications CW /SSB product detector, IV-139 driver, low distortion 1.6 to 30MHz, II-538 generators, IV-323 transmitter, crystal-controlled W for, II-142 sirens (see also alarms; sound generators), 1-606, II-571, III-560-568 aIann using, II-572, II-573, IV-514517 7400, II-575 adjustable-rate programmable-frequency, III-563 electronic, III-566, IV-515, IV-517 generator for, 11-572 hee-haw, III-565, II-578 high power, 11-578 tinear !C, III-564 low-cost design, IV-516 multifunction system for, 11-574 ship, electronic, 11-576 sonic defender, IV-324 Star Trek red alert, 11-577 tone generator, 11-573 toy, II-575 TTL gates in, 11-576 two-state, IIl-567 two-tone, III-562 varying frequency warning alarm, 11579 wailing, I11-563 warble-tone siren, 6 W, IV-516 warble-tone siren, alternate tone, IV515 whooper, IV-517 yelp oscillator, II-577, III-562 slave-flash trigger, IV-380, IV-382 slide timer, IIl-448 slide-show timer, IIl-444 sliding tone doorbell, 11-34 smart clutch, auto air conditioner, IIl46 smoke alarms and detectors, 1I-278, III-246-253 gas, 1-332 ionization chamber, 1-332-333 line-operated,IV-140 operated ionization type, 1~596 photoelectric, 1-595, 1-596 sniffers (see also detectors; monitors) heat, electronic, IIl-627 ri, 11-210 snooper, FM, I11-680 socket debugger, coprocessor, I11-104 soldering station, IR-controlled, IV-225 soil moisture meter, I11-20B
solar-powered battery charger, 11-71 solar-triggered switch, I11-318 solenoid drivers, I11-571-573 12-V latch, III-572 hold-current limiter, I11-573 power-consumption limiter, 1II-572 solid-state devices ac relay, III-S70 electric fence charger, 11-203 high-voltage supply, remote adjustable, I11-486 relays, III-569-570 stepping switch, 11-612 switch, line-activated, telephone, III617 sonic defender, IV-324 sound-activated circuits (see soundoperated circuits) sound generatol"3 (see also burst generators; function generators; sirens; waveform generators), I-60S, IT585-593, I11-559-568, III-575, IV15-24, IV-518-524 amplifier, voltage-controlled, IV-20 amplifier/compressor, low-distortion, IV-24 allophone, III-733 audio tone generator, VLF, IV-508 autodrum, II-S91 bagpipes, electronic, I11-561, IV-521 beat-frequency,IV-371 bird chirp, 1-605, II-588, III-577 bongos, II-587 chime generator, 11-604 chime generator, single-chip design, IV-524 chug-chug, III-576 dial tone, 1-629, III-609 ditherizing circuit, digital audio use, IV-23 doorbell, musical tones, rv-S22 doubler, audio-frequency doubler, IV16-17 echo and-reverb, analog delay line, IV-21 electronic, I11-360 envelope generator/modulator, 11-601 equalizer, IV-18 fader, IV-17 frequency-shift keyer, tone-generator test circuit, 1-723 funk box, 11-593 fuzz box, III-575 guitar compressor, JV-519 harmonic generator, 1-24, IV-649 high-frequency signal, IIl-150 hold for telephone, 11-623 melody generator, single-chip design, IV-520
music maker circuit, IV-S21 musical chimes, 1-640 musical envelope, modulator, 1-601, IV-22 noise generators, 1-467, 1-468, 1-469, IV-308 octave-shifter for musical effects, IV523 one-IC design, 11-569 phasor sound generator, IV-523 pink noise, 1-468 portable, 1-625 race-car motor/crash, I11-578 run-down clock for games, JV-20S sound effects, III-574-578 steam locomotive whistle, 11-589, III~ 568 steam train/prop plane, 11-592 stereo system, derived centerchannel, IV-23 super, I11-564synthesizer, 11-599 telephone call-tone generator, JV-562 telephone ringer, 11-619 tone generator, burst, 1-604 tone generator, portable design, I~ 625 Touchtone dial-tone, telephone, III609 train chuffer, 11-588 tremolo circuits, III-692-69S, IV-S89 twang-twang, II-592 two-tone, 11-570 ultrasonic sound source, IV-60S unusual fuzz, 11-590 v.rarbling tone, 11-573 white noise, IV-201 very-low frequency, 1-64 vocal eliminator, IV-19 voice circuits, III-729-734 waa-waa circuit, 11590 white noise, IV-201 sound-level meters, III-346, IV-305, IV-307 meter/monitor, telephone, I11-614 sOWld-operated circuits (see also ultrasonic circuits; voiceoperated circuits), II-580-584,I11-579-580, IV-525-528 amplifier, gain-controlled, IV-528 color organ, 11-583, 11-584 decoder, III-145 flash triggers, 1-481, II-449, IV-382 lights, 1-609 noise clipper, 1-396 relay, 1-608, 1-610 switch, II-581, I11-580, I11-600, III601, IV-526-527 switch, ac, 11-581
745
soundoperated circuits (cont,) switch, two-way, 1-610 switch, voice-operated, III580 switch, voice-activated, microphonecontrolled, IV-527 speech activity detector, telephone,
III-615
voiceoperated switch, I11-580 vox box, 11-582 sources (see current sources; voltage sources) source follower, photodiode, I11-419 SPDT switch, acstatic, 11-_612 space war, 1-606 speaker systems FM carrier current remote. 1-140 hand-held transceiver amplifiers, III-
stepper motors, direction and speed control, IV-350 switched-mode. IlI384 tachless, I11-386 tachometer, II-378, 11-389 tachometerless, IV349 tools and appliances, 1-446 universal motors, 1-457 universal motors, load-dependent, 11-
squelch circuits, 11-394
AM/FM,I-547
voice-activated circuits. IV-624 squib firing circuits, 11-357 stabilizer fixed power supplies, CMOS diode network, IV-406 fixed power supplies. output stabilizer, IV-393 staircase generators,(see also wavefonn generators), 11-601-602, I11-586-
451
speed warning device, 1-96, 1-101 speedometers, bicycle, IV-271. IV-282 splitters, IJ!-581-582 battery, I11-66 phase, precision, ITI-582 precision phase, 1-477
588, IV-443-447 UA2240, I11-587

stand-by power supply, non-volatile
CMOS RAMs, 11-477

standard, precision calibration, 1-406 standard-cell amplifier,- saturated, 11-
voltage, I11-738, III-743

wideband, I11-582 squarer, precision, 1-615 square-wave generators, 11-594-600,
39
overload protector for. Il16
296
staniling wave ratio (8WR) meter, IV-269 power meter, 1-16
wireless, IR, I11-272

speakerphone, 11611, III608 speech-activity detector, 11-617, III619 speech compressor, 11-15 speech filter
I11-583-585, IV-529-536 1 kHz, IV-536

2 MHz using two TTL gates, 11-598 555 timer, 11-595 astable circuit, IV-534 astable multivibrator, 11-597 CMOS 555 astable, true rail-ta-rail,
QRP bridge, I11-336

warning indicator, 1-22
300 Hz-3kHz bandpass, 1-295

secondorder, 300-to-3,400 Hz, IV-
Star Trek red alert siren, II577 start-and-run motor circuit, I11-382 state-of-charge indicator, lithium bat-
174
two-section, 300-to-3,000 Hz, lV-174 speech network, 11-633 speed alann, 1-95 speed controllers, 1-450, 1-453. 11-378.
II-596
duty-cycle multivibrator, I11-50percent, IlI-584 four-decade design, IV-535 high~current oscillator, I11-585 line frequency, 11-599 low-frequency TTL oscillator, 11-595 multiburst generator, 11-88 multivibrator, IV-536
tery, 11-78 state-variable filters, 11-215, 1II-189

multiple outputs, III-190 second-order, 1kHz, Q/I0, 1-293 universal,-I-290 steam locomotive sound effects, 11-
11-379, 11-455 back EMF PM, 11-379

cassette-deck motor speed calibrator,
589.11-592, I11-568
static detector, IV-276 stepup switching regulator, 6V.battery,
IV-353
dosed-loop, I11-385 fans, automatic, I11-382
II-78
step-up/step-down dc-dc converters,
oscillator, II-597, IV-532, IV-533

oscillator, with frequency doubled output, 11-596 phase-tracking, three-phase, 11598 pulse extractor, I11-584 quadrature-outputs oscillator, I11-585 sine-wave, tunable oscillator, 111-232 threephase, 11-600 tone-burst generator, single timer IC,
dc motors, 1-452, 1-454, I11-377, III380

dc motor. direction control and, 1-452 dc variable, fiber optic. 11-206 feedback, 1-447
III-1l8
stepping motor driver, 11-376, 111390
stepping switch, solid state, 11-612

stereo circuits
fixed, III-387 high-efficiency, I11-390

high-torque motor, 1-449 light-activated/controlled, IV-247 load-dependent. 1-451 model trains and/or cars, 1-455. IV-
amplifier, 12-V/20-W, IV-29 amplifier, Av/200, 1-77

amplifier, bass tone control, 1-670 audio-level meter, IV31O audio-power meter, IV-306 balance circuit, 11-603-605 balance meter, IT-605, 1-618-619 balance tester, II-604 decoder, frequency division multi-
II-89
triangle-wave, triangle-wave, triangle-wave, triangle-wave, I11-239 precision, 111-242 programmable, III-225 wide-range, I11-242
338-340 motor, 1-450, 1-453

motor, dc, reversible, driver and, III-
388
motor, high-efficiency, I11-390 PWM, II-376 PWM, energy-recovering brake, III-
TTL, LSTTL, CMOS designs, IV530-532

variable dutycycle, IV-533 variable-frequency, IV-535 square-wave oscillators, 1-613-614, 11
plex, II-169
decoder, time division multiplex, H-
18
decoder. TV-stereo, 11-167 demodulator, 11-159 demodulator. FM, 1-544 derived center-channel system, IV-23 mixer, fourinput, I-55 power_ meter, I11-331
380
radio-controlled, 1-576 series-wound motors, 1-448, 11-456 shunt-wound motors, 11-456
597, II-616, IV-532, IV-533 0.5 Hz, 1-616 1kHz, 1-612

squareto-sine wave converters, I11-118
746
preampli1ier, IT43, IT-45 reception indicator, I11-269 reverb systems, 1-602, 1-606 reverb systems, gain control in, 11-9 TV-stereo decoder. IT-167 stimulator, constant-current, 111-352 stimulus isolator, I11-3S1 stop light, garage, 11-53
strain gauges
bridge excitation, III-71

bridge signal conditioner, 11-85 instrumentation amplifier. III-280
strobe circuits, 11-606-610 disco-, 11-610 high-voltage power suppties, 1V-413 safety flare, 11-608 simple, 11-607 tone burst generator, 11-90 trip switch, sound activated, 1-483 variable strobe, III-589-590 stud finder, III-339 subhannonic frequencies, crystalstabilized IC timer, IT-151 subtractor circuit, I11-327 successive-approximation AID converter, IT-24, IT-30 summing amplifiers, I11-16 precision design. 1-36 video. clamping circuit and, I11-710 sun tracker, I11-318 superheterodyne receiver, 3.5-ta-10 MHz, 1V-450-451 supply rails, current sensing in, 11-153 suppressed-carrier. double-sideband, modulator. ID-377
sweep generators
dc static, 11-367 debouncer, nI-592 debouncer. computer switches, IV-10S debouncer, computer switches. autorepeat, 1V-106 debouncer, computer switches, fJipflop, 1V-108 delay, auto courtesy light, nI-42 DTL-TTL controlled buffered analog, 1-621 fax/telephone switch, 1V-552-553 FET dual-trace (oscilloscope), 11-432 Hall-effect, nI-257, 1V-539 high-frequency, 1-622 high-side power control switch, 5 V supply, 1V-384, 1V-385 infrared-activated, 1V-345 latching, SCR-replacing, nI-593 tight-operated, IT-320, I11-314 light-operated, adjustable, 1-362 MOSFET power control switch, IV386
10.7 MHz, 1-472 add-on triggered, 1-472 oscilloscope-triggered, III-438 switches and switching circuits, 11-611612, III-591-594, 1V-537 ac switch, battery-triggered, 1V-387 analog, buffered, D'fL.TTL-controlled, 1-621 analog, differential, 1-622
analog, high=1ogg1e/high-frequency, 1-
621 analog, one MOSPOWER FET, nI593 antenna selector, electronic, IV-S3B539 audio/video- switcher circuit, IV-540541 auto-repeat switch, bounce-free, lV545 bidirectional relay switch, IV-472 bistable switch, mechanically controlled, 1V-545 contact, 1-136
on/off inverter, m594 on/off switch. IV543 on/off switch. transistorized op-amp on/off switch, IV-546 optically coupled. high-voltage ac, III408 optically coupled, zero-voltage, solidstate, I11-410 over-temperature switch, IV-S71 photocell memory, ac power control, 1-363 photoelectric, 11-321 photoelectric, ac power. 11-326 photoelectric. synchronous, 11-326 proximity, nI-517 push on/off, IT-359 pushbutton power control switch, lV388 remote, on/off, 1-577 remote, ring extender, 1-630 ri, low-cost, I11-361 rf, power switch, III-592 sate1lite TV audio switcher. IV-543 solar-triggered, I11-318 solid-state stepping, 11-612 sonar transducer/. m-703 sound-activated, 11-581, I11-580, III600, nI-601, 1V-526-527 sound-activated, two-way, 1-610 speed, 1-104 SPDT, ac-static, 11-612 switching controller, I11-3S3 temperature control, low-power. zero-voltage, IT-640 tone switch, natTOwband, IV-542 touch switches (see touch switches) touchomatic, U-693
triac, inductive load, IV-253 triac, zero point, 11-311 triac., zero voltage, 1623 two-channel, 1-623 ultrasonic, 1-683 under-temperature switch, IV-570 VHF /UHF diode rI switch, IV-S video, 1V-618-621 video, automatic, III-727 video, general purpose, III-72S video, fiigh-perfunnance, I11-728 video, very-high off isolation, 111-719 voice-operated, I-60S, 111-580 voice-operated, microphone-controlled, 1V-527 zero crossing, 1-732 zero point, 1-373, 11-311 zero-voltage switching, closed contact half-wave, III-412 zero-voltage switching, solid-state, optically coupled, I11-4l0 zero-voltage switching, triac design, 1-623 switched-mode power supplies. 11-470, I11-458 50 W, off-tine, nI-473 100 kHZ, multiple-output, nI-488 converter, + SOV push pull, 1-494 switched light, capacitance, 1-132 switching inverter, 500 kHz, 12 V systems, U474 switching power amplifier, 1-33 switching regulators 3 A, nI-472 5 V, 6 A, 25 uHz, separate u1trastable reference. 1-497 6 A variable output, 1-513 200 kHz, 1-491 application circuit, 3W, 1-492 fixed power suppties, 3 A, 1V-408 high-current inductorless, III-476 low-power, nI-490 multiple output MPU, 1-513 positive, 1-498 slejrdown, 1-493 step-up, 6V battery,ll-78 switching/mixing, silent audio, I-59 sync separators single-supply wide-range, III-715 video circuits, IV-616 synthesizers four-channel, 1-603 frequency, programmable voltagecontrolled, 11-265 music. 1-599
T
tachometers, I-lOO, 1-102, 11-175, Ill335, I11-340, Ill-595-598
747
tachometers (cont.) analog readout, IV-280 calibrated, I11-598 closed-loop, feedback control, 11-390 digital, 11-61, I11-45, 1V-268-269, JV278 frequency counter, 1-310 gasoline engine, 1-94low-frequency, III-596 minimum component, 1-405 motor speed control, 11-378, 11-389 optical pick-up, I11-347 set point, I11-47 tandem dimmer, 11-312 taP. telephone, III-622 tape-recorder circuits. 1-21. 1-419, III599-601, 1V-547-548 amplifier, 1-90 amplifier, playback mode, IV-36 audio"powered controller, IV-548 automatic tape-recording switch, 121, 11-21 automotive-battery power circuit, IV548 cassette-deck motor speed calibrator. IV-353 extended-play circuit, II1-6oo flat-response amplifier, I11-673 interface for, 11-614 playback amplifier, I11-672, 1'1-36 position indicator/controller, 11-615 preamplifier, 1-90 sound-activated switch, I11-6oo, III-
GOI
starter switch, telephone-activated, 1-632 telephone-activated starter switch, 1632, 11-622, II1-616 telephone-to-cassette interface, III618 telemetry demodulator, 1-229 telephone-related circuits, 11-616-635, I11-602-622, 1V-549-564 amplifier, II1-621, 1V-560 answering machine beeper, IV-559 auto answer and ring indicator, 1-635 automatic recording device, 11-622 blinking phone light monitor, 11-624, 11-629 call-tone generator, IV-562 cassette interface, I11-618 decoder, touch-tone, IV-555 dial pulse indicator, I11-613 dialed-phone number vocalizer, III731 dialer, pulse/tone. single-chip, I11-603 dual tone decoding, 11-620 duplex audio link, 1V-554 duplex line amplifier, III-616
eavesdropper. wireless, I11-620 fax-machine switch, remote-controlled, 1V-552-553 flasher, phone-message. IV-556 flasher, teU-a-bell. 1'1-558 flasher, visual ring indicator, IV-559, 1V-561 frequency and volume controller, 11623 hands-free telephone, I11-605 handset encoder, 1-634. III-613 hold button, 11-628, I11-612 in-use indicator, 11-629, IV-560, IV563 intercom, IV-557 light for, 11-625 line interface, autopatch, 1-635 line monitor, 1-628 message-taker, IV-563 musical hold, 11-623 musical ringer, IT-619 night light, telephone controUed, III604 off-hook indicator. 1-633 optoisolator status monitor. 1-626 parallel cOIUlection, I11-611 piezoelectric ringer, 1-636 power switch, ac, IV-550 pulse-dialing, I11-61O recording calls, 1-632, II1-616 recording calls, auto-record switch, 1V-558 recording calls, telemonitor, IV-553 redial, I11-606 relay, 1-631 remote monitor for, 11-626 repeater, I11-607 repertory dialer, line powered, 1-633 ring detector, 11-623, II1-619, 1V-564 ring detector, optically interfaced. III611 ringers, IV-556 ringers, extension-phone ringer, IV561 ringers, high isolation, 11-625 ringers, multi-tone, remote programmable, 11-634 ringers, musical, II-619 ringers, piezoelectric, 1-636 ringers, plug-in, remote, 11-627 ringers, relay, III-606 ringers. remote, 11-627, I11-614, IV562 ringers, tone, 1-627, 1-628, 11-630, 11-631 scrambler, 11-618 series cOIUlection, I11-609 silencer, IV-557 sound level meter monitor. III-614
speaker amplifier, IV-555 speakerphone, 11-632, 1II-6OS speech activity detector, 11-617, III615 speech network, 11-633 status monitor using optoisolator. 1626 switch, solid-state, line-activated, III617 tap, I11-622 tape-recorder starter con'trolled by, 1632 toll-totalizer, IV-551 tone-dialing, I11-607 tone ringers, 1-627, 1-628, 11-630, 11631 Touchtone generator, I11-609 touch-tone decoder, IV-555 vocalizer, dialed-phone number, III~ 731 television-related circuits (see also video circuits) amplifier. audio, I11-39 amplifier. IF detector, MC130/ MC1352, 1-688 amplifier, IF/FM IF, quadrature, 1690 amplifier, RF, UHF TV-line amplifier. 1V-482, IV-483 audio/video switcher circuit, N-54054! automatic turn-off, 1-577 cross-hatch generator, I11-724 data interface, TIL oscillator, 11372 decoder, stereo TV, 11-167 IF detector, amplifier, MC130/ MC1352, 1-688 modulators, 1-439, 11-433, 11-434 preamplifier, UHF, I11-546 rf up-converter for TYRO subcarrier reception, IV-501 satellite TV audio switcher, --IV-543 stereo-sound decoder, 11-167 transmitter, ill-676 transmitter,-amateur TV, IV-599 temperature-related circuits (see also thermometers), IV-565-572 alarms, 11-4, ll-643 alarms, adjustable threshold, 11-644 automotive temperature indicator, 1156,IV-48 automotive water-temperature gauge, IV-44 Centigrade thermometer, 1I~648 control circuits, 1-641-643, 11-636644, 1II-623-628, 1V-567 control circuits, defrost cycle. IV-566 control circuits, heater element, 11-642
748
control circuits, heater protector, servo-sensed, I11-624 control circuits, heat snifter, electronic, III627 control circuits, liquid-level monitor. !I643 control circuits, low-power, zerovoltage switch,!I640 control circuits, piezoelectric fanbased, III627 control circuits, proportional, 111-626 control circuits, signal conditioners, !I639 control circuits, single setpoint, 1-641 control circuits, thermocoupled, IV567 control circuits, zero-point switching, III624 converters, temperature-to-frequency, 1646, 1168, 1656, !I651 653 converters, temperature-ta-time, III632-1;33 defrost cycle and control, IV-566 heater control, 1640, !I642, Ill 624 heat sniffer, I11-627 hino sensor, 11-650 indicator, IV-570 indicator, -automotive temperature, PTC thennistor, !I56 measuring circuit, digital, 11-653 measuring sensor, transistorized, IV572 meter, 1-647 monitor, I11-206 monitor, thermal monitor, IV-569 oscillators, crystal, temperaturecompensated, 1-187 oscillators, temperature-stable, 11427 over-temperature switch, IV-571 over/under sensor, dual output, 11646 remote sensors, 1-649, 1-654 sensors, 1648, 1-657, !I64565O, "'-629631, 1V568572 sensors, 0-50-degree C four channel, 1648 sensors, 0-63 degrees C, I11-631 sensors, 5 V powered linearized platinum RTD signal conditioner, 11650 sensors, automotive-temperature indicator, PTC thermistor, 11-56 sensors, Centigrade thermometer, !I648 sensors, coefficient resistor, positive, 1657
sensors, differential, 1-654, 1-655 sensors, over/under, dual output, 11646 sensors, DVM interface, 11-647 sensors, hi/la, ll-65O sensors, integrated circuit, 1-649 sensors, isolated, 1-651, I11-63l sensors, remote, 1-654 sensors, thermal monitor, IV-569 sensors, thermocouple amplifier, cold junction compensation, 11-649 sensors, thermocouple multiplex system, "'630 sensors, zero-crossing detector, 1733 signal conditioners. 11-639 thermocouple amplifier, cold junction compensation, 11-649 thermocouple control, IV-567 thermocouple multiplex system, III630 transconducer, temperature-tofrequency, linear, 1-646 transducer, temperature-transducer with remote sensor, 1-649 under-temperature switch, IV~570 zero-crossing detector, 1-733 temperature-to-frequeocy converter, 1168,1656, !I651653 temperature-to-frequency transconducer, linear, 1-646 temperature-to-time converters, III632633 ten-band graphic equalizer. active filter, !I684 Tesla coils, III634636 test circuits (see measurement/test circuits) text adder, composite-video signa], III716 theremins. 11-654-656 digital, !I656 electronic. 11-655 thermal flowmeter. low-rate flow, III203 thermocouple circuits digital thermometer using, 11-658 multiplex. temperature sensor systern, III630 pre-amp using, III283 thennometer, centigrade calibrated, 1650 thermocouple amplifiers. 1-654, 11-14 cold junction compensation,_II-649 high stability, 1355 thermometers, 11657662, III637643, IY573577 050 degree F, 1656 0100 degree C, 1-656
adapter, 111-642 addon for DMM digital voltmeter, III640 centigrade, 1655, !I648, 11662 centigrade, calibrated, 1-650 centigrade, ground-referred, 1-657 differential, 1652, 11661, III638 digital, 1-651, 1-658 digital. temperature-reporting, III638 digital, thermocouple, 11658 digital, uP controlled, 1650 electronic, 11660, III639, IY575, 1V576 Fahrenheit, 1658 Fahrenheit. ground-referred, 1-656 high-accuracy design, IV-577 implantablelingestible, III641 kelvin, zero adjust, 1653, !I661 kelvin, ground-referred. 1-655 tinear, III642, 1V574 low-power, 1-655 meter. trimmed output, 1-655 remote, 11-659 single-de supply, IV-575 variable offset, 1-652 thermostats electronic, remote ac, two-wire. 1- 63-9 electronic, three-wire, 1-640 three-m-one test set, I11-330 three-minute timer, I11-654 three-rail power supply, I11-466 threshold detectors, precision, I11-157 tilt meter, 11663666, III644646 differential capacitance measurement circuit. 11-665 sense-of-slope, 11-664 ultra-simple level. 11-666 time base crystal oscillator. I11-133. IV-128 function generators. 1 Hz, for readout and counter applications, IV-20l time delays, 1-668, !I220, !I667670, III647-649 circuit, precision solid state. 1-664 constant current charging. 11-668 electronic, I11-648 generator, 1-218 hour sampling circuit, 11-668 integrator to multiply 555 timers, low-cost. 11-669 long-duration, 1-220 relay, 1663 relay, ultra precise long. 1-219 timing threshdd and load driver, Ill 648 twoSCR design, !I670 time division multiplex stereo decoder. 11168
749
timers, 1-666, 1-668,11-671-681, 11165().655,W-578-586 0.1 to 90 second, 1-663 741 timer, 1-667 adjustable, 1V-585 adjustable at .2 to 10 seconds, 11-681 alarm, 11-674
appliance-cutoff timer, JV-583
CMOS, programmable precision, III652 circuit, 11-675 darkroom, 1-480 elapsed time/counter timer, 11-680 electronic egg, 1-665 IC, crystal-stabilized, 11-151 interval, progranunable, 11-678 interval. programmable, thumbwheel, 1-680 long-delay, PUT, 1-219 long-duration, PUT, 11-675 long-duration. time delay, IV-585 long-interval, programmable,lV-581, 1V-582 long-interval, RC, 1-667 long-tenn electronic, 11-672 long-time, 111-653 mains-powered, IV-579 one-shot, III-654 photographic, 1-485 photographic, darkroom enlarger, III-
445
photographic, photo-event timer, IV379 reaction timer, game circuit, IV-204 SCR design, 1V-583 sequential, 1-661-662, 1-663, 111-651 sequential UJT, 1-662 slide-show, III-444 slides, photographic, 111-448 solid-state, industrial applications, 1664 ten-minute ID timer, IV584 three-minute, 111-654 thumbwheel-type, prograrrunable interval, 1-660 time-out circuit, IV-586 transmit-time lirniter, IV-580 triangle-wave generator, linear, III222 variable duty-c~le output. III-240 voltage-controlled, programmable, 11676 washer, 1-668 watchdog timer/alarm, IV-584 timing light, ignition, 11-60 timing threshold and load driver, 111-848 tone alert decoder, 1-213 tone annunciator, transfonnerless, III27~8
tone burst generators, 1-604, 11-90 European repeaters, 111-74 tone controls (see also sound generators), 1-677,11-682-689, 111-656660, 1V-587-589 active bass and treble, with buffer, 1674 active control, IV-588 audio amplifier, 11-686 Baxandall tone-control audio amplifier, 1V-588 equalizer, ten-band octave, III-658 equalizer, ten-band graphic, active filter, 11-684 guitar treble booster, 11-683 high-qUality, 1-675 high-z input, hi fi, 1-676 microphone preamp, 1-675, 11-687 mixer preamp, I-58 passive circuit, II-689 preamplifier, high-level, 11-688 preampliJier,IC,I-673,1II-657 preamplifier, microphone, 1-675, 11687 preamplifier, mixer, I-58 rumble/scratch filter, III-660 three-band active, 1-676, 111-658 three-channel, 1-672 tremolo circuit, IV-589 Wien-bridge filter, 111-659 tone decoders, 1-231, III-143 dual time constant, 11-166 24 pe",ent bandwidth, 1-215 relay output, 1-213 tone-dial decoder, 1-631 tone detectors, 5OO-Hz, III-l54 tone-dial decoder, 1-630, 1-631 tone-dial encoder, 1-629 tone-dial generator, 1-629 tone-dialing telephone, III-607 tone encoder, 1-67 subaudible. 1-23 tone-dial encoder, 1-629 two-wire, 11-384 tone generators (see sound generators) tone probe, digital le testing with. 11504 tone ringer, telephone. 11-630. 11-631 totem-pole driver. bootstrapping, III175 touch circuit, 1-137 touch switches, 1-131, 1-135-136, 11690-693, 111-661-665, IV-590-594 CMOS,I-137 bistable multivibrator, touch-triggered, 1~133 double-button latching, 1-138 hum-detecting touch sensor, IV-594 lamp control, three-way, IV-247
low-current. 1132 On/Off, 11-691, 111-663, 1V-593 line-hum, 111-684 momentary operation. 1-133 negative-triggered, 111-662 positive-triggered, 111-662 sensor switch and clock, IV-59! time-on touch switch, IV-594 touchomatic, 11-693 two-terminal, 111-663 Touchtone generator, telephone, III609 toxic gas detector, 11-280 toy siren, II-575 TR circuit, 11-532 tracers audio reference signal, probe, 1-527 bug, 111-358 closed-loop, III-356 receiver, III-357 track-and-hold circuits, III-667 sample-and-hold circuit, 111-549, 111552 signal, 111-668 tracking circuits, 111-666-668 positive/negative voltage reference. 111-667 preregulator, 111-492 traCk-and-hold, 111-667 track-and-hold, signal, 111-668 train chuffer sound effect, IT-588 transceivers (see also receivers; transmitters), 1V-595-803 CE, 20-m, 1V-596-598 CW, 5 W, 80-meter, lV-802 hand-held, de adapter, III-46! hand-held, speaker ampli5ers, 111-39 HF transceiver/mixer, IV-457 ultrasonic, 111-702, 111-704 transducer ampliJiers, 111-669-673 flat-response, tape, III-673 NAB preamp, record, 111-673 NAB preamp, two-pole, 111-673 photodiode ampli5er, 111-672 preamp. magnetic phono. III-671. III673 tape playback, 111-672 voltage, differential-to-single-ended, 111-670 transducers. 1-86 bridge type, ampli5er, 11-84, 111-71 detector, magnetic transducer. 1-233 sonar, switch and, I11-703 temperature, remote sensor, 1649 transistors and transistorized circuits flashers, 11-236, 111-200 irequency tripler, nonselective, saturated, 11-252 headphone amplifier, IT-43
750
on/off switch for op amp, IV-546 pulse generator, IV-437 sorter, 1-401 tester, 1-401, IV-28l transmission indicator, !I-2ll transmitters (see also receivers; transceivers), I1I-674-691, IV-595-603 2-meter, IV-6oo-60l acoustic-sound transmitter, IV-3ll amateur radio, 80-M, HI-675 amateur TV, IV-599 beacon, 111-683, 1V-603 broadcast, l-to-2 MHz, 1-680 carrier current, 1-144, 1-145, 111-79 computer circuit, l-of-8 channel, HIlOO CW, I W, 111-678 CW, 10 W, one-tube, 1-681 CW, 40 M, I1I-684 CW, 902 MHz, 111-686 CW, HF low-power, 1V-601 CW, QRP, 111-690 fiber optic, 111-177 FM,I-681 FM, infrared, voice-modulated pulse, IV-228 FM, multiplex, I1I-688 FM, one-transistor, 111-687 FM, (PRM) optical, 1-367 FM, snooper, ill-680 FM, voice, 111-678 FM, wireless microphone, III-682, III-685, 111-691 half-duplex infonnation transmission link, low-cost, IlI-679 HF, low-power, IV-598 infrared, 1-343, 11-289, 11-290, I1I277, IV-226-227 infrared, digital, I1I-275 infrared, FM, voice-modulated pulse, 1V-228 infrared, remote control with -receiver, 1-342 line-carrier, with on/off, 200 kHz, 1142 low-frequency. III-682 multiplexed, 14-8 channel, I1I-395 negative key-line keyer, IV-244 optical, 1-363, 1V-368 optical, FM. 50 kHz center frequency, 11-417 optical, receiver for, 11-418 oscillator and, 27 and 4~ MHz, 1-680 output indicator, IV-2l8 remote sensors, loop-type, II1-70 television, III-676 ultrasonic, 40 kHz, 1-685 VHF, modulator, I1I-684 VHF, tone, 111-681
treasure locator, lo-parts, 1-409 treble booster, guitar, 11-683 tremolo circuits, I-59, III-692-695, IV589 voltage-controlled amplifier, 1-598 triac circuits ac-voltage controller, IV-426 contact protection, 11-531 dimmer switch, 11-310, I11-303 dimmer switch, 800W, 1-375 drive interface, direct dc,-1-266 microprocessor array, 11-410 relay-contact protection-with, 11-531 switch, inductive load, IV-253 trigger, 1-421 voltage doubler, IlI-468 zero point switch, 11-311 zero voltage, 1-623 triangle-to-sine converter, 11-127 triangle/square wave oscillator, 11-422 triangle-wave generators, III-234 square-wave, 111-225, 111-239 square-wave, precision, 111-242 square-wave, wide-range, III-242 timer, linear, IIJ-222 trickle charger, 12 V battery, 1-117 triggers 50-MHz, 1Il-384 camera alarm, III-444 flash, photography, xenon flash, 111447
guitar and bass, 11-362 turbo circuits, glitch free, I11-186 twang-twang circuit, 11592 twilight-triggered circuit, !I-322 twin-T notch filters. III-403 two-state siren, I11-567 two-tone generator, 11-570 two-tone siren, III -562 two-way intercom, IlI-292 two's complement, D/A conversion system, binary, 12-bit, 111-166
optical Schmitt, 1-362 oscilloscope-triggered sweep, IlI-438 remote flash, 1-484 SCR series, optically coupled, I11-411 sound/tight flash, 1-482 triac, 1-421 triggered sweep, add-on, 1-472 tripler, nonselective, transistor saturation, II-252 trouble tone alert, II-3 TTL circuits clock, wide-frequency, 1II~.85 coupler. optical, III-416 gates, siren using, 11-576 Morse code keyer, 11-25 square wave to triangle wave converter, 11-125 TTL to MOS logic converter, 11-125 TTL oscillators, 1-179, 1-613 IMHz to IOMHz, 1-178 television display using, 11372 crystal,I-197 sine/square wave oscillator, 1V-512 tube amplifier. high-voltage isolation, IV-426 tuners antenna tuner, 1-t0-30 MHz. IV-14 FM,I-231
UA2240 staircase generator, 111-587 UHF transmissions fieldstrength meters, IV-165 rf amplifiers, UHF TVline amplifier, IV-482, IV-483 source dipper, IV-299 TV- preamplifier, I11-546 VHF/UHF rf diode switch, IV-544 wideband amplifier, high performance FETs, 111-284 UJT circuits battery chargers, Ill-56 metronome, IT-355 monostable circuit, bias voltage change insensitive, 11-268 ultrasonic circuits (see also soundoperated circuits), 111-696-707, IV604-606 arc welding inverter, 20 KHz, IlI-700 induction heater. 120-KHz SOO-W, III-704 pest-controller, IlI-706, I11-707 pest-repelier,I-684, 11-685, 111-699, IV-605-606 ranging system, 111-697 receiver. lII-698, 111-705 sonar transducer/switch, lII-703 sound source, IV-60S switch,I-683 -transceiver, 111-702. 111-704 transmitter, 1-685 undervoltage detector, 1V-138 undervoltage monitor, III-762 uninterruptible power supply, U-462 +5V, 111-477 unity-gain amplifiers inverting, 1-80 inverting, wideband, 1-35 ultra high Z, ac, 11-7 unity-gain buffer stabie, with good speed and highinput impedance, 11-6 unity-gain follower, 1-27 universal counters 10 MHz, 11-139
751
universal counters (cont.) 40-MHz, IJI-127 universal mixer stage, 111-370 univeI1lal power supply, 3-30V, IJI-489 up/down cOlUlter, extreme count freezer, III-125
V
vacuum fluorescent display circuit, 11185 vacuum gauge, automotive, IV-45 vapor detector, II-279 varactor-tlUled 10 MHz ceramic resonator oscillator, II -141 variable current source, 100 rnA to 2A, 11-471 variable duty-cycle oscillator, fixedfrequency, 111-422 variable-frequency inverter, complementary output, I11-297 variable-gain amplifier, voltage-controlled, 1-28-29 variable-gain and sign op amp, 11-405 variable-gain circuit, accurate null and, IJI-69 variable oscillators, 11-421 audio, 20Hz to 20kHz, 11-727 four-decade, single control for, 11-424 sine-wave oscillator, super lowdistortion, ill-558 wide range, 11-429 variable power supplies, 111-487-492, 1V-414-421 adjustable 10-A regulator, IJI-492 current source, voltage-programmable, 1V-420 de supply, SCR variable, IV-418 dc supply, step variable, IV-41S dual universal supply, O-ta-50 V, 5 A, 1V-416-417 regulated supply, 2.5 A, 1.25-to-25 V regulator, Darlington, IV-421 regulator, variable, 0-to-50 V, IV-421 regulator/current source, III-490 switch-selected fixed-voltage supply, 1V-419 switching regulator, low-power, III490
crystal oscillator, 20-MHz, 111-138 crystal oscillator, SO-MHz, 111-140 crystal oscillator, 100-MHz, 111-139 modulator, 1-440, I11-684 tone transmitter, I11-681 VHF/UHF diode rf switch, 1V-544 video amplifiers, 111-708-712 75-ohm video pulse, IJI-711 buffer, low-distortion, 111-712 color, 1-34, IJI 724 dc gain-control, 1II-711 FET cascade, 1-691 gain block, DI-712 IF, low-level video detector circuit, 1689,11-687 JFET bipolar cascade, 1-692 line driving, I11-710 log amplifier, 1-38 RGB, III-709 summing, clamping circuit and, Ill710 video circuits (see also televisionrelated circuits), I11-713-728, IV607-621 audio/video switcher circuit, IV-540541 camera-image tracker, analog voltage, IV-608-609 camera link, wireless, 111-718 chroma demodulator with RGB matrix, IJI-716 color amplifier, III-724 color-bar generator, IV-614 composite-video signal text adder, IJI-716 converter, RGB-to-NTSC, IV-611 converter, video aid and d/a, IV-610611
switching, 100-KHz multiple-output, IJI-488 tracking preregujator, III-492 transformerless supply, IV-420 univeI1lal3-30V, DI-489 variable current source, 100rnA to 2A,II-471 voltage regulator, III-491 vehicles (see automotive circuits) VFO, 5 MHz, 11-551 VHF transmissions
cross-hatch generator, color TV, 111724 dc restorer, 111-723 decoder, NTSC-to-RGB, IV-613 high-performance video switch, III728 line pulse extractor, IV-612 loop-thru amplifier, IV-616 mixer, high-performance video mixer, 1V-609 modulatoI1l, 1-437, II-371, II-372 monitors, RGB, blue box, III-99 monochrome-pattern generator, IV617 multiplexer, cascaded, 1-of-15, III393 PAL/NTSC decoder with RGB input, I11-7I7 palette, IIl-720 picture fixer/inverter, III-722 RGB-composite converter, Ill-714
signal clamp, III-726 switching circuits, IV-618-621 switching circuits, remote selection switch, IV-619 switching circuits, remote-controlled switch, 1V-619-621 sync separator, IV-616 sync separator, single-supply widerange, IIl-7I5 video op amp circuits, IV-615 video switch, automatic, I11-727 video switch, general purpose, III725 video switch, very-high off isolation, IIl-719 wireless camera link, III-71 vocal eliminator, IV-IS voice scrambler/descrambler, IV-26 voice scrambler/disguiser, IV-27 voice substitute, electronic, III-734 voice-activated circuits (see-also soundoperated circuits), III-729-734, IV622-624 ac line-voltage annOlUlcer, 111-730 allophone generator, 111-733 amplifier/switch, 1-608 computer speech synthesizer, 111-732 dialed phone number vocalizer, 111731 scanner voice squelch, N624 switch, III-580 switch, microphone-controlled, IV527 switch/amplifier, 1-608 voice substitute, electronic, III-734 VOX circuit, IV-623 voltage amplifiers differential-to-single-ended, III-670 reference, 1-36 voltage-controlled amplifier, 1-31, 1-598 attenuator for, 11-18 tremolo circuit, 1-598 variable gaIn, 1-28-29 voltage-controlled filter, Ill-187 1,000:1 tuning, 1V-176 voltage-controlled high-speed one shot, 11-266 voltage-controlled ramp generator, 11523
voltage-controlled resistor, 1-422 voltage-<:ontrolled timer, progranunable, 11-676 voltage-controlled amplifier, IV-20 tremolo circuit or, 1-598 voltage-controlled oscillators, 1-702704,11-702, IIl-735, IV-625-630 3-5 V regulated output converter, 111739 10Hz to 10kHz, 1-701, IIl-735-741
752
555VCO, IV-627 audiofrequency VCO, IV-626 crystal oscillator, III-135, IV-124
dc voltmeter, resistance, high-input,

Ill762
100 Verns, 1-196 ac, III-I77
DVM, 3.5-digit, full-scale 4-decade,

III761 DVM, 4.5digit, Ill760 FET voltmeter, Ill765, III770
current sink, voltage-controlled, IV629 driver. op-amp design, IV-362 linear, 1701, IV628 linear triangle/square wave, 11-263
logarithmic sweep, 1II-738
adjustable output, 1-506, 1-512 automotive circuits, 111-48, IV-67

battery charging, 1117 bucking, highvoltage, III481
five-step level detector, 1-337 frequency counter, III-768 high-input resistance voltmeter, III768
common hot-lead regulator, IV-467 constant voltage/constant current, 1508
precision, 1-702. 111-431

restrictedraoge, IV-627 stable, IV372373 supply voltage splitter, 1II738 three-decade.I-703 TMOS, balanced, Ill736 two-decade, high-frequency, 1-704 varactorless IV-630
I
current and thermal protection, 10

amp, 11-474 dualtracking, Ill-l62 efficiency-improving switching, IV- 464
HTS, precision, 1-122

level detectors, 1338, III72, Ill 759, Ill770
low-voltage indicator, 111-769 multiplexed common-cathode LED

ADC, III764
fixed pnp, zener diode increases output, 11-484 fixed-current regulator, IV-467
fixedvoltages, IV-I62467 flyback, offline, Il-l81 high- or low-input regulator, IV-466 higbstability, 1-199 high stability, 1 A, 1502 highstability, 10 V, Ill-l68 higbvoltage, III-I85
variable-capacitance diode-sparked,
Ill737
VHF oscillator. voltage-tlmed, IV-628 waveform generator, I11-737

wideraoge, IV629
over/under monitor, III-762 peak program detector, 1II-771 rf voltmeter, III-766 solid-state battery, 1-120 ten-step level detector, 1-335
visible, 1338, III772
wide-range. biphase, IV-6Z9

widerange, gate, IV-627 voltage-controller, pulse generator, 111524 voltage converters, 111-742-748 12to16 V, Ill747 dctodc, 325 V, Ill744 dc-to-de, dual output 12-15 V, Ill746 flyback, high-efficieocy, 1II744
flyback-switching, self-oscillating, 111748
voltage freezer, 111-763

voltage multipliers, IV-631637
high-voltage, foldback-current limiting, Il-l78
2,000 V low-current supply, IV-636637 10,000 V dc supply, IV-633
high-voltage, precision, 1-509

lowdropout, 5V, III-I61 lowvoltage, 1502, 1511 linear, lowdropout, Ill-l59
corona wind generator, IV-633

doublers, 1II459, IV-635
doubler, cascaded, Cockcroft-Walton,

IV635 doublers, triaccontrolled, Ill-l68
linear, radiation-hardened 125 A, 11468

mobile, 1498
laser power supply, IV-636 negative-ion generator, high-voltage,

IV634
negative voltage, uP-controlled, IV117 offline, lo5W, III746 regulated 15--\but 6V driven, 1IIU5 splitter, Ill743 unipolartodual supply, III743
tripler, low-current, IV-637 voltage ratio-to-frequency converter.

Ill116
voltage references, ITI-773-775

bipolar source, III774 digitally controlled, ID775
negative, III-474, IV-465 negative, -15 V, 1-499 negative, floating, 1-498 negative, switching, 1-498 negative, voltage, 1-499 positive, floating, 1-498 positive, switching, 1-498 positive, with NPN/PNP boost, IIT475
voltage detector relay, battery charger,

Il76 voltage followers, 1-10, 1II212 fast, 1-34 noninverting, 1-33 signal-supply operation, amplifier, 11120 voltage inverters, precision, ITI-29B
expanded-scale analog meter, 111-774 positive/negative, tracker for, 111-667 variable-voltage reference source, IV327
positive, with PNP boost. IIT-471

pre, SCR, II-I82 pre, tracking, Ill-l92
voltage regulators, 1-501, 1-511, 11-484 (). to IQ- Vat 3A, adjustable, 1511 O to 22V, 1510
voltage meters/monitors/indicators, 111758772
ac voltmeter, III-765 ac voltmeter, wide-range, I1I-772

audio millivoltmeter, III 767, Ill769
automotive battery voltage gauge, IV47
o to 30V, 1510 5 V, lowdropout, III-I61 5 V, 1 A, 1500 6 A, variable output switching, 1513 10 A, 1510 10 A, adjustable, III-I92 10 V, high stability, III-I68
15 V, 1 A. remote sense, 1-499 15 V, slow turn-on, IlI-477 -15 V negative, 1-499
45 V, 1 A switching, 1-199
projection lamp, --JI-305 PUT, 90 V rms, II-I79 remote shutdown, 1-510 negative, IV-465 sensor, LM317 regulator sensing, IV466
short-circuit protection, low-voltage,

1502 singleended, 1-193 singlesupply, II-I71
batteO'-voltage measuring regulator,

IV77
slow turn-on 15 V, 1-499 switch-mode, IV-463

switching, 3A, Ill-l72
comparator and, II-104

de voltmeter, Ill 763
switching, 3 W. application circuit, 1492
753
voltage regulators (cont,) switching, 5 V, 6 A 25kHz, separate ultrastable reference, 1-497 switching, 6 A, variable output, 1-513 switching, 200 kHz, 1-491 switching. multiple output, for use with MPU, 1513 switching, step down, 1-493 switching, high-current inductorless, III-476 switching, low-power, III-490 variable, III-491, IV-468-470 variable, current source, ITI-490 zener design, programmable, IV-470 voltage sources millivolt, zenerless, 1-696 programmable, 1-694 voltage splitter, I11-738 voltage-to-current converter, 1-166, 11124, I11-110, IV-118 power, 1-163 zero IB error, 111-120 voltage-to-frequency converters, 1-707, I11-749-757,IV-638-642 1 Hz-to-10MHz, III-754 1 Hz-to-30 MHz, I11-750 1Hzto-l.25 MHz, I11-755 5 KHz-to-2MHz, I11-752 10Hz to 10kHz, 1-706, I11-110 accurate, III-756 differential-input, III-750 function generators, potentiometerposition, IV-2oo low-cost, I11-751 low-frequency converter, IV-641 negative input, 1-708 optocoupler, IV-642 positive input, 1-707 precision, 11-131 preserved input, I11-753 ultraprecision, 1-708 wide-range, III-751, III752 voltage-to-pulse duration converter, 11124 voltmeters JI/, digit, 1-710 311z digital true rms ac, 1-713 5-digit, I11-760 ac, I11-765 ac, wide-range, III-772 add-on thermometer for, I11-640 bar-graph, 1-99, 11-54 dc, III763 dc, high-input resistance, III-762 digital, III-4 digital, 3.5-digit, full-scale, fourdecade, III-761 digital, LED readout, IV-286 FET, 1-714, III765, I11-770
high-input resistance, I11-768 millivoltmeters (see millivoltmeters) rf, 1-405, I11-766 wide-band ac, 1-716 voltohmmeter, phase meter, digital readout, IV-277 volume amplifier, 11-46 volume control circuits, IV-643-645 telephone, 11-623 volume indicator, audio amplifier, IV212 VOR signa] simulator, IV-273 vox box, 11-582, IV-623 Vpp generator, EPROM, II~114 VU meters extended range, 11-487, 1-715 LED display, IV-211
waa-waa circuit, 11-590 wailers (see alanns; sirens) wake-up call, electronic, 11-324 waIkman amplifier, 11-456 warblers (see alarms; sirens) warning devices auto lights-on warning, 11-55 high-level, 1-387 high-speed,I-101 light, III-317 light, battery-powered, 11-320 low-level, audio output, 1-391 speed, 1-96 varying-frequency alarm, II-579 water-level sensors (see fluid and moisture detectors) water-temperature gauge, automotive, IV-44 wattmeter, 1-17 wave-shaping circuits (see also waveform generators), IV-646-651 capacitor for high slew rates, IV-650 clipper, g1itch-free, IV-648 flip-flop, SIR, IV-651 harmonic generator, IV-649 phase shifter, IV-64 7 rectifier, full-wave, IV-650 signal conditioner, IV-649 waveform generators (see also burst generators; function generators; sOWld generators; square-wave generators; wave-shaping circuits), 11-269,11-272 audio, precision, 111-230 four-output, 111-223 harmonic generator, IV-649 high-speed generator, 1-723 precise, II-274 ramp generators, IV-443-447
sawtooth generator, digital, IV-444, IV-446 sine-wave, IV-505, IV-506 sine-wave, 60 Hz, IV-507 sine-wave, audio, II-564 sine-wave, LC, IV-507 sinewave, LF, IV-512 sine-wave oscillator. audio, I11-559 staircase generators, IV-443-447 staircase generator/frequency divider, 1-730 stepped waveforms, IV-447 triangle and square waveform. 1-726 veo and, 111737 wave meter, tuned RF, IV-302 weather-alert decoder, IV-140 weight scale, digital, 1I-398 Wheel-of-FortlUle game, IV-206 whistle, steam locomotive, 11-589, III568 who's first game circuit,- I11-244 wide-range oscillators, 1-69, I11-425 variable, 1-730 wide-range peak detectors, I11-152 hybrid, 500 kHz-1 GH" I11-265 instrumentation, III-28I miniature, I11-265 UHF amplifiers, high-performance FETs, 111-264 wideband amplifiers low-noise/low drift, 1-38 two-stage, 1-689 rf, IV489, IV-490, IV-491 rf, HF, IV-492 rf, ]FET, IV-493 rf, MOSFET, IV-492 ri, two-CA3I00 op amp design, IV491 unity gain inverting, 1-35 wideband signal splitter, I11-582 wideband two-pole high pass- filter, 11215 Wien-bridge filter, I11-659 notch filter, -U-402 Wien-bridge oscillators, 1-62-63, 1-70, I11-429, IV-371, IV-377, IV-511 eMOS chip in, 11-568 Jow-distortion, thennally stable, III557 low-voltage, III-432 sine wave, 1-66, 1-70, II-566 sine-wave, three-decade, IV-5I0 sine-wave, very-low distortion, IV513 single-supply, I11-558 variable, 111-424 wind-powered battery charger, 11-70 windicator, 1-330 window circuits, 11-106, I11-90, III-776-
754
781, IV-655-659 comparator, 1V~658 comparator, low-cost design, IV-656-
wireless microphones (see micro-
phones), IV-652
wireless speaker system, JR, III-272 write amplifiers, Ill-IS
zappers, battery, 11-64 ni-cad battery, 11-66

ni-cad battery, version 11, 11-68
657 comparator, voltage comparator, IV659 detector, IV-658 digital frequency window, I1I-777 discriminator, multiple-aperture, III781
zener diodes
clipper, fast and symmetrical, IV-329 increasing power rating, 1-496. I!-485
xenon flash trigger, slave, III-44 7
XOR gates, IV-107

complementary signals generator, Ill-
generator, IV-657 high":input-impeclance, 11-108

windshield wiper circuits
control circuit, 1-103, 1-105, 11-62 delay circuit, 11-55 delay circuit, solid-state, IV-64 hesitation control unit, 1-105 intennittent. dynamic braking, 11-49 interval controller, IV-67 slow-sweep control, IT-55
windshield washer fluid watcher, 1-107 wire tracer. 11-343
226 oscillator, III-429 up/down counter, 111-105
limiter using one-zener design, IV257 tester, 1-400 variable, 1-507 voltage regulator, programmable, IV470
yelp oscillator/siren, 11-577, JII-562
v z
zero-crossing detector, 11-173 zero meter, suppressed, 1-716 zero-point switches temperature control, III-624 triac, 11-311 zero-voltage switches closed contact half-wave, III-412
solid-state, optically coupled, III-410 solid-state, relay, antiparallel SCR
Z80 clock, 11-121
output, III-416
755
Other Bestsellers of Related Interest
ENCYCLOPEDIA OF ELECTRONIC cmCUITS

Vol. l-Rudolf F. Graf
ELECTRONIC DATABOOK-4th Edition

- Rudolf F. Graf If it's electronic, it's here-current, detailed, and comprehensive! Use this book to broaden your electronics iniormation base. Revised and expanded to include all up-to-date information, this fourth edition makes any electronic job easier and less time-consuming. You'll find iniormation that will aid in the design of local area networks, computer interlacing structure, and more! 528 pages, 131 illustrations. Book No. 2958, $24.95 paperback only
" ... schematics that encompass virtually the entire spectrnm of electronics technology . . . This is a well worthwhile book to have handy." -Modern Electronics
Discover hundreds of the most versatile electronic and integrated circuit designs, all available at at the turn of a page. You'll find circuit diagrams and schematics for a wide variety of practical applications. Many entries
also include clear, concise explanations of the circuit

configurations and functions. 768 pages, 1,762 illustrations. Book No. 1938, $32.95 paperback, $60.00 hard-
cover
THE ILLUSTRATED DICTIONARY OF ELECTRONICS-5th Edition
-Rufus P. 'fumer and Stan Gibilisco This completely revised and updated edition defines more than 27,000 practical electronics terms, acronyms, and abbreviations. Find up-to-date infonnation on basic electronics, computers, mathematics, electricity, commanications, and state-<>f-the-art applications-all discussed in a nontechnical stYle. The author also includes 360 new definitions and 125 illustrations and diagrams. 736 pages, 650 illustrations. Book No. 3345, $26.95 paperback
BUILD YOUR OWN TEST EQUIPMENT -Homer L. Davidson

Build more than 30 common electronic testing devices, ranging from simple continuity and polarity
testers to signal injectors and power supplies. Also learn how test instruments work, how they are used, and how to save money. Each project includes a complete parts list with exact part numbers. 300 pages, 324 illustrations. Book No. 3475, $17.95 paperback, $27.95
hardcover
ELECTRONIC SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS: Television, Stereo, Satellite TV, and Automotive-Stan Prentiss
Study signal analysis as it applies to the operation and signal-generating capabilities of today's most advanced electronic devices with this handbook. It explains
ELECTRONIC CONVERSIONS: Symbols and Fonnulas-2nd Edition

-Rufus P. Turner and Stan Gibilisco This revised and updated edition supplies all the formulas, symbols, tables, and conversion factors commonly used in electronics. Exceptionally easy to use. the material is organized by subject matter. Its format is ideal and you can save time by directly accessing specific information. Topics cover only the most-needed facts about the-most often used conversions, symbols, formulas, and tables. 280 pages, 94 illustrations. Book No. 2865, $14.95 paperback only
the composition and use of a wide variety of test instruments, transmission media, satellite systems, stereo broadcast and reception facilities, antennas, television equipment, and even automotive electrical systems.
You'll find coverage of C- and Ku-band video, satellite master TV systems, high-definition television, CQUAM AM stereo transmission and reception, and more. 328 pages, 186 illnstrations. Book No. 3557, $19.95 paperback, $29.95 hardcover
Prices Subject to Change Without Notice.
Look for These and Other TAB Books at Your Local Bookstore To Order Call Toll Free 1-800-822-8158
(in PA, AK, and Canada call 717-794-219l)
or write to TAB Books, Blue Ridge Summit, PA 17294-0840.

Title
Product No. Quantity
Price
Check or money order made payable to TAB Books

0 MasterCard U American Express
Subtotal
$ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Charge my 0 VISA
Acct. No. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Exp. _ _ _ _ __ Signature: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
Postage and Handling ($3.00 in U.S., $5.00 outside U.S.) $ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Add applicable state and local sales tax $ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
TOTAL $ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
TAB Books catalog free with purchase; otherwise send $1.00 in check or money order and receive $1.00 credit on your next purchase. Orders outside U. S. must pay with inlemaliono.l money in U. S. dolklrs
Address: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
c;~,
___________________
Zip: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
State: _ _ _ _ _ __
TAB Guarantee: If rOI" any reason you are not satisfied with the book(s) you order, simply return it (them) within IS days and receive a full refund. BC

Encyclopedia of Electronic Circuits, Volume 2 - (Rudolf F Graf) Mcgraw-Hill Tab Electronics 1988

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Encyclopedia of Electronic Circuits, Volume 2 - (Rudolf F Graf) Mcgraw-Hill Tab Electronics 1988

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

- Encyclopedia

133 140 152 158 162

282 285 288 293

301 304 313 318 332

98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108

Alarm and Security Circuits

AUTO BURGLAR ALARM

l-z:~ t-oT"-l I -=I """" JA'" , .. I I ,

NOTES: Timer Signotics NE555 All resistor values In ohms

DIFFERENTIAL VOLTAGE OR CURRENT ALARM

~I WI~If.P I'k;Ro,s,'S - - ~~~E:~NT /r-M~~IM~--+-----"""""~

PHOTOELECTRIC ALARM SYSTEM

2. Cl SETS TIMING FOR IRE DIODE

t-<Y .... .....,V X

POSITIVE PULSE TRIG(Z:RS

CHOPPER STABILIZED AMPLIFIER

FET INPUT AMPLIFIER

LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORP.

ULTRAHIGH Zln AC UNITY GAIN AMPLIFIER

NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP.

TEL. LABS. TYPE 061 1% FILM AESISTOR 2N2979

LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORP.

LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION

STEREO AMPLIFIER WITH GAIN CONTROL

POWER GaAsFET AMPLIFIER WITH SINGLE SUPPLY

LINEAR AMPLIFIERS FROM CM OS INVERTERS R2

~+ .- ,. " R 9 ?!C~ Z1~ 1 ci~oo" c~~oo;-} ~RlO I"

I ---0 I lT1008 -15V. ~---------------~

100 k ~""""I22,,0l'>.-k~O.-i R 16 I L--r-....

R16 ,--_~ 100 k D.C. SHIFT TRIM R 18 -:220 k S F COMPRESSOR + Il OUT

.....-'VYv-- + 7.S V R11 Rg

HI-FI Compressor With Pre-emphasis

HI-FI Expandor With De-emphasis

TWO-WIRE TO FOUR-WIRE AUDIO CONVERTER

ALL RESISTORS ARE I'll. ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS

LOWDISTORTION AUDIO LlMITER Circuit Notes

SPEAKER OVERLOAD PROTECTOR

ALL RE:SISTOR:; I/2-WATT

AUDIO AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL

E---o OUTPUT AUDIO

ads (pFJi resJstances are in ohms. /!; = 1,000 NI = 1,000,000

__. . _~3,'::..~'-"'' 07---1

'OOk '"T' OUT 017

CONTROL R22 VOLTAGE UIIk 0_1OV

C6I ~ _________ _ --------""

HIGH-INPUT-IMPEDANCE DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER

AUDIO Q-MUL TIPLlER

AUTOMATIC LEVEL CONTROL

PULSE-WIDTH PROPORTIONAL-CONTROLLER CIRCUIT

VARIABLE Voltage COMPAAATOA/

NOTE: Capacitance! are in ",F.

SUCCESSIVE APPROXIMATION AID CONVERTERS

PROQ y'" AGMDF RFe

r.~~ Hli 1~.

OUTPUT = 1 COUNT PERmV,f=lMHz

ALL DIODES lN4148 'POLYSTYRENE

LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORP.

16-BIT AID CONVERTER

INEXPENSIVE, FAST 10BIT SERIAL OUTPUT AID

100MHz CLOCK INPUT

"3.9k", TAW MTR-5 + 12Oppm/"C

,OOOpF=WESCO #32-P - 10530ppm/oC

LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION

10-BIT AID CONVERTER